Relion® 670 SERIES

Line distance protection REL670

Version 2.2 IEC
Application manual
 Document ID: 1MRK 506 369-UEN
Issued: November 2018
Revision: D
Product version: 2.2

© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved

Copyright
This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written
permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor
used for any unauthorized purpose.

The software and hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may
be used or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL
Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written/
developed by: Eric Young ([email protected]) and Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names
mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.

Warranty
Please inquire about the terms of warranty from your nearest ABB representative.
Disclaimer
The data, examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for the concept or product
description and are not to be deemed as a statement of guaranteed properties. All persons
responsible for applying the equipment addressed in this manual must satisfy themselves that
each intended application is suitable and acceptable, including that any applicable safety or
other operational requirements are complied with. In particular, any risks in applications where
a system failure and/or product failure would create a risk for harm to property or persons
(including but not limited to personal injuries or death) shall be the sole responsibility of the
person or entity applying the equipment, and those so responsible are hereby requested to
ensure that all measures are taken to exclude or mitigate such risks.

This document has been carefully checked by ABB but deviations cannot be completely ruled
out. In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer.
Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or
liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the
equipment.
Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities on the
approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified
voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of tests
conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive,
and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive. The
product is designed in accordance with the international standards of the IEC 60255 series.
 Table of contents

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 25
1.1 This manual....................................................................................................................................... 25
1.2 Intended audience........................................................................................................................... 25
1.3 Product documentation................................................................................................................. 26
1.3.1 Product documentation set...................................................................................................... 26
1.3.2 Document revision history.........................................................................................................27
1.3.3 Related documents..................................................................................................................... 27
1.4 Document symbols and conventions...........................................................................................28
1.4.1 Symbols......................................................................................................................................... 28
1.4.2 Document conventions.............................................................................................................. 29
1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping..................................................................................... 29

Section 2 Application.........................................................................................................37
2.1 General IED application...................................................................................................................37
2.2 Main protection functions............................................................................................................. 38
2.3 Back-up protection functions....................................................................................................... 40
2.4 Control and monitoring functions................................................................................................41
2.5 Communication................................................................................................................................50
2.6 Basic IED functions.......................................................................................................................... 52

Section 3 Configuration....................................................................................................55
3.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 55
3.2 Description of configuration REL670.......................................................................................... 56
3.2.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................56
3.2.1.1 Description of configuration A41..........................................................................................56
3.2.1.2 Description of configuration A42..........................................................................................57
3.2.1.3 Description of configuration B42......................................................................................... 58
3.2.1.4 Description of configuration D42......................................................................................... 59

Section 4 Analog inputs.................................................................................................... 61

4.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................... 61
4.2 Setting guidelines............................................................................................................................ 61
4.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel.................................................................................. 61
4.2.1.1 Example......................................................................................................................................62
4.2.2 Setting of current channels....................................................................................................... 62
4.2.2.1 Example 1................................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.2.2 Example 2...................................................................................................................................63
4.2.2.3 Example 3...................................................................................................................................64
4.2.2.4 Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most commonly
used CT connections............................................................................................................... 68
4.2.2.5 Example on how to connect a star connected three-phase CT set to the IED............ 69
4.2.2.6 Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED................... 72

Line distance protection REL670 1

Application manual
Table of contents

4.2.2.7 Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED....................................................... 74

4.2.3 Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT rated primary
current and minimum pickup of a protection IED................................................................ 75
4.2.4 Setting of voltage channels.......................................................................................................76
4.2.4.1 Example...................................................................................................................................... 76
4.2.4.2 Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most commonly
used VT connections................................................................................................................76
4.2.4.3 Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-earth connected VT to the IED..........77
4.2.4.4 Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED.....................79
4.2.4.5 Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high impedance
earthed or unearthed networks............................................................................................ 81
4.2.4.6 Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low impedance
earthed or solidly earthed power systems......................................................................... 82

Section 5 Local HMI........................................................................................................... 85

5.1 Display................................................................................................................................................86
5.2 LEDs.................................................................................................................................................... 87
5.3 Keypad............................................................................................................................................... 88
5.4 Local HMI functionality...................................................................................................................90
5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication.............................................................................................. 90
5.4.2 Parameter management ........................................................................................................... 91
5.4.3 Front communication................................................................................................................. 91

Section 6 Wide area measurement system.................................................................... 93

6.1 C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration PMUCONF.......... 93
6.1.1 Identification................................................................................................................................ 93
6.1.2 Application....................................................................................................................................93
6.1.3 Operation principle..................................................................................................................... 93
6.1.3.1 Short guidance for use of TCP.............................................................................................. 94
6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of UDP.............................................................................................. 95
6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT................................................... 96
6.2.1 Identification................................................................................................................................96
6.2.2 Application....................................................................................................................................96
6.2.3 Operation principle..................................................................................................................... 99
6.2.3.1 Frequency reporting..............................................................................................................100
6.2.3.2 Reporting filters......................................................................................................................101
6.2.3.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels................................................................ 102
6.2.3.4 PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application
Configuration Tool (ACT)......................................................................................................103
6.2.4 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 109

Section 7 Differential protection................................................................................... 113

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF ........................................... 113
7.1.1 Identification...............................................................................................................................113
7.1.2 Application...................................................................................................................................113
7.1.2.1 The basics of the high impedance principle..................................................................... 114
7.1.3 Connection examples for high impedance differential protection................................. 119
7.1.3.1 Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection....................... 119

2 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

7.1.3.2 Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF....................... 120
7.1.4 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................... 121
7.1.4.1 Configuration.......................................................................................................................... 121
7.1.4.2 Settings of protection function........................................................................................... 121
7.1.4.3 T-feeder protection................................................................................................................ 121
7.1.4.4 Tertiary reactor protection...................................................................................................123
7.1.4.5 Alarm level operation............................................................................................................. 125

Section 8 Impedance protection.................................................................................... 127

8.1 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated
lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS, ZDSRDIR..........................................................................................127
8.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 127
8.1.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 127
8.1.2.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................. 127
8.1.2.2 System earthing......................................................................................................................127
8.1.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end..............................................................................................129
8.1.2.4 Load encroachment............................................................................................................... 130
8.1.2.5 Long transmission line application.................................................................................... 130
8.1.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling.................................................................. 131
8.1.2.7 Tapped line application......................................................................................................... 137
8.1.2.8 Series compensation in power systems............................................................................ 139
8.1.2.9 Challenges in protection of series compensated and adjacent power lines............. 145
8.1.2.10 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines...........................154
8.1.2.11 Distance protection............................................................................................................... 156
8.1.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................162
8.1.3.1 General......................................................................................................................................162
8.1.3.2 Setting of zone1...................................................................................................................... 162
8.1.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone...............................................................................................162
8.1.3.4 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 163
8.1.3.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines............................................................................ 163
8.1.3.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application.................................................................... 167
8.1.3.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction................................................................................169
8.1.3.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function............................. 169
8.1.3.9 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated.................. 171
8.1.3.10 Setting of minimum operating currents............................................................................ 171
8.1.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones..............................................................171
8.2 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment FDPSPDIS..................................... 172
8.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 172
8.2.1.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 172
8.2.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 172
8.2.3 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................... 172
8.2.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics................................................................................... 172
8.2.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic.................................................178
8.2.3.3 Minimum operate currents...................................................................................................178
8.3 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS,
ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR........................................................................................................................179
8.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 179

Line distance protection REL670 3

Application manual
Table of contents

8.3.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 179

8.3.2.1 System earthing......................................................................................................................179
8.3.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end..............................................................................................182
8.3.2.3 Load encroachment............................................................................................................... 183
8.3.2.4 Short line application............................................................................................................ 184
8.3.2.5 Long transmission line application.................................................................................... 184
8.3.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling..................................................................185
8.3.2.7 Tapped line application......................................................................................................... 191
8.3.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................193
8.3.3.1 General......................................................................................................................................193
8.3.3.2 Setting of zone 1..................................................................................................................... 193
8.3.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone...............................................................................................193
8.3.3.4 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 194
8.3.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application.................................................................... 195
8.3.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction................................................................................196
8.3.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function............................. 196
8.3.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function activated .............................................................. 198
8.3.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents........................................................................... 198
8.3.3.10 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics............................... 198
8.3.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones............................................................ 200
8.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS .........................................201
8.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 201
8.4.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 201
8.4.2.1 Functionality............................................................................................................................201
8.4.2.2 System earthing..................................................................................................................... 201
8.4.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end............................................................................................. 204
8.4.2.4 Load encroachment...............................................................................................................205
8.4.2.5 Short line application............................................................................................................ 206
8.4.2.6 Long transmission line application.................................................................................... 207
8.4.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling................................................................. 207
8.4.2.8 Tapped line application......................................................................................................... 211
8.4.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................213
8.4.3.1 General......................................................................................................................................213
8.4.3.2 Setting of zone 1..................................................................................................................... 214
8.4.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone...............................................................................................214
8.4.3.4 Setting of zone 2.....................................................................................................................214
8.4.3.5 Setting of zone 3.....................................................................................................................214
8.4.3.6 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 215
8.4.3.7 Consideration of zero sequence mutual coupling for parallel circuits....................... 220
8.4.3.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function............................. 220
8.4.3.9 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated..................221
8.4.3.10 Setting of minimum operate currents............................................................................... 222
8.4.3.11 Setting of directional mode................................................................................................. 222
8.4.3.12 Setting of direction for offset mho.................................................................................... 222
8.4.3.13 Setting of timers for distance protection zones............................................................. 222

4 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

8.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS. 223
8.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 223
8.5.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 223
8.5.2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................223
8.5.2.2 System earthing..................................................................................................................... 223
8.5.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end............................................................................................. 226
8.5.2.4 Load encroachment............................................................................................................... 227
8.5.2.5 Short line application............................................................................................................ 228
8.5.2.6 Long transmission line application.................................................................................... 228
8.5.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling................................................................. 229
8.5.2.8 Tapped line application........................................................................................................ 234
8.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 236
8.5.3.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 236
8.5.3.2 Setting of zone1......................................................................................................................236
8.5.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone.............................................................................................. 236
8.5.3.4 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 237
8.5.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application.................................................................... 237
8.5.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction................................................................................239
8.5.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function............................. 239
8.5.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated.................240
8.5.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents...........................................................................240
8.5.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones............................................................. 241
8.6 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR................ 241
8.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 241
8.6.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 241
8.6.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................241
8.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC.......................................................................... 243
8.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................243
8.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................243
8.7.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 244
8.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS.........................................244
8.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................244
8.8.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 244
8.8.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 245
8.8.3.1 Load encroachment...............................................................................................................246
8.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR................................................................................................................. 247
8.9.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 247
8.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................247
8.9.2.1 System earthing..................................................................................................................... 248
8.9.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end............................................................................................. 250
8.9.2.3 Load encroachment............................................................................................................... 251
8.9.2.4 Short line application............................................................................................................ 252
8.9.2.5 Long transmission line application.................................................................................... 253
8.9.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling................................................................. 253
8.9.2.7 Tapped line application........................................................................................................ 258

Line distance protection REL670 5

Application manual
Table of contents

8.9.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 260

8.9.3.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 260
8.9.3.2 Setting of zone 1.................................................................................................................... 260
8.9.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone.............................................................................................. 260
8.9.3.4 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 261
8.9.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application....................................................................262
8.9.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction................................................................................263
8.9.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function............................. 263
8.9.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function activated .............................................................. 265
8.9.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents........................................................................... 265
8.9.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones.............................................................265
8.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS....................266
8.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................266
8.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................266
8.10.3 Load encroachment characteristics......................................................................................270
8.10.3.1 Phase-to-earth fault in forward direction..........................................................................271
8.10.3.2 Phase-to-earth fault in reverse direction.......................................................................... 272
8.10.3.3 Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction........................................................................273
8.10.4 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 274
8.10.4.1 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic................................................ 274
8.10.4.2 Minimum operate currents...................................................................................................275
8.11 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment FDPSPDIS.....................................276
8.11.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 276
8.11.1.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................276
8.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................276
8.11.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 276
8.11.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics...................................................................................276
8.11.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic................................................ 282
8.11.3.3 Minimum operate currents.................................................................................................. 282
8.12 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS............................................................................... 283
8.12.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................283
8.12.2 Application..................................................................................................................................283
8.12.2.1 System earthing..................................................................................................................... 283
8.12.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end............................................................................................. 286
8.12.2.3 Load encroachment............................................................................................................... 287
8.12.2.4 Short line application............................................................................................................ 287
8.12.2.5 Long transmission line application....................................................................................288
8.12.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling................................................................. 288
8.12.2.7 Tapped line application........................................................................................................ 294
8.12.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 296
8.12.3.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 296
8.12.3.2 Setting of zone 1.................................................................................................................... 296
8.12.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone.............................................................................................. 296
8.12.3.4 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 297
8.12.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application....................................................................298

6 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

8.12.3.6 Setting the reach with respect to load..............................................................................299

8.12.3.7 Zone reach setting lower than minimum load impedance........................................... 300
8.12.3.8 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance.......................................... 301
8.12.3.9 Other settings........................................................................................................................ 302
8.12.3.10 ZMMMXU settings................................................................................................................. 305
8.13 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines ZMFCPDIS ......................306
8.13.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................306
8.13.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 306
8.13.2.1 System earthing.....................................................................................................................306
8.13.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end............................................................................................. 308
8.13.2.3 Load encroachment.............................................................................................................. 309
8.13.2.4 Short line application............................................................................................................309
8.13.2.5 Long transmission line application.................................................................................... 310
8.13.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling.................................................................. 311
8.13.2.7 Tapped line application......................................................................................................... 317
8.13.3 Series compensation in power systems............................................................................... 318
8.13.3.1 Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit..................... 319
8.13.3.2 Increase in power transfer................................................................................................... 320
8.13.3.3 Voltage and current inversion............................................................................................. 320
8.13.3.4 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines...........................327
8.13.3.5 Distance protection...............................................................................................................328
8.13.3.6 Underreaching and overreaching schemes...................................................................... 328
8.13.4 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 334
8.13.4.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 334
8.13.4.2 Setting of zone 1.....................................................................................................................335
8.13.4.3 Setting of overreaching zone.............................................................................................. 335
8.13.4.4 Setting of reverse zone......................................................................................................... 336
8.13.4.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines............................................................................336
8.13.4.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application....................................................................339
8.13.4.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction................................................................................341
8.13.4.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function............................. 341
8.13.4.9 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance.......................................... 343
8.13.4.10 Parameter setting guidelines..............................................................................................344
8.13.4.11 ZMMMXU settings................................................................................................................. 346
8.14 Power swing detection ZMRPSB ................................................................................................347
8.14.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................347
8.14.2 Application..................................................................................................................................347
8.14.2.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 347
8.14.2.2 Basic characteristics............................................................................................................. 348
8.14.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 348
8.15 Power swing logic PSLPSCH .......................................................................................................354
8.15.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................354
8.15.2 Application..................................................................................................................................354
8.15.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 356
8.15.3.1 Scheme communication and tripping for faults occurring during power
swinging over the protected line........................................................................................356

Line distance protection REL670 7

Application manual
Table of contents

8.15.3.2 Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings................................................. 359
8.16 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM ....................................................................................................360
8.16.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................360
8.16.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 360
8.16.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 363
8.16.3.1 Setting example for line application..................................................................................364
8.16.3.2 Setting example for generator application...................................................................... 367
8.17 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM .............................................................................................371
8.17.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 371
8.17.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 371
8.17.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................373
8.18 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF ...........................................................................376
8.18.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 376
8.18.2 Application..................................................................................................................................376
8.18.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................377
8.19 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ................................................................................................. 378
8.19.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 378
8.19.2 Application..................................................................................................................................378
8.19.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................381
8.20 Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ...............................................................................................382
8.20.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................382
8.20.2 Application..................................................................................................................................382
8.20.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 384

Section 9 Current protection......................................................................................... 387

9.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC ..........................................................387
9.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 387
9.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................387
9.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 387
9.1.3.1 Meshed network without parallel line................................................................................388
9.1.3.2 Meshed network with parallel line......................................................................................390
9.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC........................................ 391
9.2.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 391
9.2.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 391
9.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 392
9.2.3.1 Settings for each step...........................................................................................................393
9.2.3.2 Setting example..................................................................................................................... 396
9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC ...................................................... 400
9.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 400
9.3.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 400
9.3.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................400
9.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC .................................... 403
9.4.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 403
9.4.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 403
9.4.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................404
9.4.3.1 Common settings for all steps........................................................................................... 405

8 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

9.4.3.2 2nd harmonic restrain.......................................................................................................... 406

9.4.3.3 Parallel transformer inrush current logic..........................................................................406
9.4.3.4 Switch onto fault logic..........................................................................................................407
9.4.3.5 Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4)........................................................................... 408
9.4.3.6 Line application example..................................................................................................... 409
9.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC ....... 414
9.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................414
9.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................414
9.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 416
9.5.3.1 Settings for each step .......................................................................................................... 416
9.5.3.2 Common settings for all steps............................................................................................418
9.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE ....................419
9.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 419
9.6.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 420
9.6.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................421
9.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/Fahrenheit
LCPTTR/LFPTTR.............................................................................................................................428
9.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................428
9.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................428
9.7.3 Setting guideline....................................................................................................................... 429
9.8 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF............................................................................................430
9.8.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 430
9.8.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 430
9.8.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 430
9.9 Stub protection STBPTOC .......................................................................................................... 438
9.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................438
9.9.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 438
9.9.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 439
9.10 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC.......................................................................................439
9.10.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 440
9.10.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 440
9.10.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................440
9.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP........................................................................ 441
9.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................441
9.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................441
9.11.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 443
9.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP ......................................................................... 446
9.12.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 446
9.12.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 446
9.12.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................448
9.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC ........................................................................................... 451
9.13.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 451
9.13.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 451
9.13.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 451
9.14 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC.................................................... 452
9.14.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................452

Line distance protection REL670 9

Application manual
Table of contents

9.14.2 Application..................................................................................................................................452
9.14.2.1 Base quantities.......................................................................................................................452
9.14.2.2 Application possibilities....................................................................................................... 453
9.14.2.3 Undervoltage seal-in............................................................................................................. 453
9.14.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 453
9.14.3.1 Explanation of the setting parameters.............................................................................454
9.14.3.2 Voltage-restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up
transformer.............................................................................................................................454
9.14.3.3 Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in......................................................... 455

Section 10 Voltage protection......................................................................................... 457

10.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV ......................................................................... 457
10.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................457
10.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................457
10.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 457
10.1.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators.........................................458
10.1.3.2 Disconnected equipment detection.................................................................................. 458
10.1.3.3 Power supply quality ............................................................................................................ 458
10.1.3.4 Voltage instability mitigation............................................................................................. 458
10.1.3.5 Backup protection for power system faults.................................................................... 458
10.1.3.6 Settings for two step undervoltage protection.............................................................. 458
10.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV ........................................................................... 459
10.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 460
10.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 460
10.2.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................460
10.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and
transformers........................................................................................................................... 461
10.2.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors..................................................................................... 461
10.2.3.3 Power supply quality............................................................................................................. 461
10.2.3.4 High impedance earthed systems...................................................................................... 461
10.2.3.5 The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage protection......... 461
10.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV ......................................................... 463
10.3.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................463
10.3.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 463
10.3.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 463
10.3.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and
transformersEquipment protection for transformers.................................................. 464
10.3.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors.....................................................................................464
10.3.3.3 Power supply quality.............................................................................................................464
10.3.3.4 High impedance earthed systems..................................................................................... 464
10.3.3.5 Direct earthed system.......................................................................................................... 465
10.3.3.6 Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection................................................. 465
10.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH ........................................................................................467
10.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................467
10.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................467
10.4.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 469
10.4.3.1 Recommendations for input and output signals............................................................ 469

10 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

10.4.3.2 Settings................................................................................................................................... 469

10.4.3.3 Service value report...............................................................................................................470
10.4.3.4 Setting example......................................................................................................................471
10.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV ............................................................................... 472
10.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 472
10.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................472
10.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 474
10.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV ................................................................................................ 475
10.6.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................475
10.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................475
10.6.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 475
10.6.3.1 Advanced users settings...................................................................................................... 476
10.7 Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC............................................................................................ 476
10.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................476
10.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................476
10.7.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 476

Section 11 Frequency protection.................................................................................... 479

11.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF .........................................................................................479
11.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................479
11.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................479
11.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 479
11.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF .......................................................................................... 480
11.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 480
11.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 480
11.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 481
11.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC .................................................................. 481
11.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 481
11.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................481
11.3.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 482

Section 12 Multipurpose protection............................................................................... 483

12.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC................................................................... 483
12.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................483
12.1.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 483
12.1.2.1 Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function......................................................484
12.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function............................................................................... 486
12.1.2.3 Application possibilities.......................................................................................................486
12.1.2.4 Inadvertent generator energization...................................................................................487
12.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 487
12.1.3.1 Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection.................................................488
12.1.3.2 Negative sequence overcurrent protection..................................................................... 489
12.1.3.3 Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standards.. 491
12.1.3.4 Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit
breaker head flashover protection for generators......................................................... 493
12.1.3.5 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up
transformer.............................................................................................................................493

Line distance protection REL670 11

Application manual
Table of contents

12.1.3.6 Loss of excitation protection for a generator................................................................. 494

Section 13 System protection and control.....................................................................497

13.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC.................................................................................................... 497
13.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................497
13.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................497
13.1.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................498
13.1.3.1 Setting example..................................................................................................................... 498

Section 14 Secondary system supervision..................................................................... 501

14.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC........................................................................................ 501
14.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 501
14.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................501
14.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 501
14.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC............................................................................................. 502
14.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................502
14.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................502
14.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 503
14.2.3.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 503
14.2.3.2 Setting of common parameters......................................................................................... 503
14.2.3.3 Negative sequence based.................................................................................................... 503
14.2.3.4 Zero sequence based............................................................................................................504
14.2.3.5 Delta U and delta I .................................................................................................................505
14.2.3.6 Dead line detection............................................................................................................... 505
14.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC............................................................................................... 505
14.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 505
14.3.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 505
14.3.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................506
14.4 Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC............................................................................507
14.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................507
14.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................507
14.4.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 509
14.5 Current based delta supervision DELISPVC............................................................................. 509
14.5.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 509
14.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................510
14.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 510
14.6 Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC...................................................................................511
14.6.1 Identification...............................................................................................................................511
14.6.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 511
14.6.3 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................... 511

Section 15 Control..............................................................................................................513
15.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing SESRSYN............................................ 513
15.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 513
15.1.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 513
15.1.2.1 Synchronizing.......................................................................................................................... 513
15.1.2.2 Synchrocheck.......................................................................................................................... 514

12 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

15.1.2.3 Energizing check.....................................................................................................................516

15.1.2.4 Voltage selection.................................................................................................................... 517
15.1.2.5 External fuse failure............................................................................................................... 517
15.1.3 Application examples................................................................................................................518
15.1.3.1 Single circuit breaker with single busbar.......................................................................... 519
15.1.3.2 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection....................... 519
15.1.3.3 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection........................520
15.1.3.4 Double circuit breaker...........................................................................................................520
15.1.3.5 1 1/2 circuit breaker................................................................................................................521
15.1.4 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 523
15.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase operation SMBRREC ...........................527
15.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................528
15.2.2 Application..................................................................................................................................528
15.2.2.1 Auto reclosing operation Off and On................................................................................ 530
15.2.2.2 Start auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle............................... 531
15.2.2.3 Start auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information.........................................531
15.2.2.4 Blocking of the auto recloser............................................................................................... 531
15.2.2.5 Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1.........................................................532
15.2.2.6 Long trip signal.......................................................................................................................532
15.2.2.7 Maximum number of reclosing shots................................................................................ 532
15.2.2.8 ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot)............................................... 532
15.2.2.9 ARMode = 1/2/3ph................................................................................................................. 532
15.2.2.10 ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot..................................533
15.2.2.11 ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot......................... 533
15.2.2.12 ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot...533
15.2.2.13 ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the first shot...533
15.2.2.14 External selection of auto reclosing mode....................................................................... 534
15.2.2.15 Auto reclosing reclaim timer............................................................................................... 535
15.2.2.16 Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter...................................... 535
15.2.2.17 Transient fault........................................................................................................................ 535
15.2.2.18 Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal....................................................... 535
15.2.2.19 Lock-out initiation................................................................................................................. 535
15.2.2.20 Evolving fault.......................................................................................................................... 536
15.2.2.21 Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence.............................................. 537
15.2.2.22 Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back.......................................537
15.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 537
15.2.3.1 Configuration..........................................................................................................................537
15.2.3.2 Auto recloser settings...........................................................................................................545
15.3 Apparatus control......................................................................................................................... 548
15.3.1 Application................................................................................................................................. 548
15.3.2 Bay control QCBAY.................................................................................................................... 552
15.3.3 Switch controller SCSWI...........................................................................................................553
15.3.4 Switches SXCBR/SXSWI...........................................................................................................554
15.3.5 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY.....................................554
15.3.6 Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN)............................................................................ 556
15.3.7 Interaction between modules.................................................................................................558

Line distance protection REL670 13

Application manual
Table of contents

15.3.8 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................560

15.3.8.1 Bay control (QCBAY)............................................................................................................. 560
15.3.8.2 Switch controller (SCSWI).....................................................................................................561
15.3.8.3 Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI)......................................................................................................... 562
15.3.8.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY..................................562
15.3.8.5 Bay Reserve (QCRSV).............................................................................................................563
15.3.8.6 Reservation input (RESIN).................................................................................................... 563
15.4 Interlocking .................................................................................................................................... 563
15.4.1 Configuration guidelines.........................................................................................................564
15.4.2 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE ....................................................................................... 564
15.4.2.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 564
15.4.2.2 Signals from bypass busbar................................................................................................ 565
15.4.2.3 Signals from bus-coupler..................................................................................................... 566
15.4.2.4 Configuration setting........................................................................................................... 568
15.4.3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC ........................................................................... 569
15.4.3.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 569
15.4.3.2 Configuration......................................................................................................................... 570
15.4.3.3 Signals from all feeders........................................................................................................ 570
15.4.3.4 Signals from bus-coupler......................................................................................................572
15.4.3.5 Configuration setting............................................................................................................573
15.4.4 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO ...................................................................... 574
15.4.4.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 574
15.4.4.2 Signals from bus-coupler..................................................................................................... 575
15.4.4.3 Configuration setting........................................................................................................... 576
15.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS.................................................................... 576
15.4.5.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 576
15.4.5.2 Signals from all feeders........................................................................................................ 576
15.4.5.3 Configuration setting........................................................................................................... 579
15.4.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC .........................................................579
15.4.6.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 580
15.4.6.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement..............................................................................580
15.4.6.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement............................................................................583
15.4.6.4 Signals in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement................................................................................ 585
15.4.7 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES ................................................................. 586
15.4.7.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 586
15.4.7.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement..............................................................................586
15.4.7.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement........................................................................... 590
15.4.7.4 Signals in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement................................................................................ 591
15.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB ........................................................................................ 591
15.4.8.1 Application...............................................................................................................................591
15.4.8.2 Configuration setting........................................................................................................... 592
15.4.9 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH ................................................................................................... 592
15.4.9.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 593
15.4.9.2 Configuration setting........................................................................................................... 593
15.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation SLGAPC................ 594
15.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................594

14 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

15.5.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 594

15.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 594
15.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC......................................................................................................595
15.6.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................595
15.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................595
15.6.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 595
15.7 Generic communication function for Double Point indication DPGAPC............................ 596
15.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................596
15.7.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 596
15.7.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 597
15.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC.................................................................. 597
15.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................597
15.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................597
15.8.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 597
15.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS................................................ 597
15.9.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................598
15.9.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 598
15.9.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 598
15.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD................................................................................. 598
15.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................598
15.10.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 598
15.10.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................600

Section 16 Scheme communication................................................................................ 601

16.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or overcurrent protection ZCPSCH.............. 601
16.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................601
16.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................601
16.1.2.1 Blocking schemes...................................................................................................................601
16.1.2.2 Delta blocking scheme..........................................................................................................602
16.1.2.3 Permissive schemes.............................................................................................................. 603
16.1.2.4 Intertrip scheme.................................................................................................................... 605
16.1.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................606
16.1.3.1 Blocking scheme.................................................................................................................... 606
16.1.3.2 Delta blocking scheme......................................................................................................... 606
16.1.3.3 Permissive underreaching scheme.....................................................................................607
16.1.3.4 Permissive overreaching scheme....................................................................................... 607
16.1.3.5 Unblocking scheme............................................................................................................... 607
16.1.3.6 Intertrip scheme.....................................................................................................................607
16.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH .. 607
16.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................607
16.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 608
16.2.2.1 Blocking scheme.................................................................................................................... 609
16.2.2.2 Permissive schemes.............................................................................................................. 610
16.2.2.3 Intertrip scheme......................................................................................................................611
16.2.3 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................... 611
16.2.3.1 Permissive underreache scheme......................................................................................... 611

Line distance protection REL670 15

Application manual
Table of contents

16.2.3.2 Permissive overreach scheme.............................................................................................. 611

16.2.3.3 Blocking scheme.....................................................................................................................612
16.2.3.4 Intertrip scheme..................................................................................................................... 612
16.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for distance protection 3-phase
ZCRWPSCH ..................................................................................................................................... 612
16.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 612
16.3.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 612
16.3.2.1 Current reversal logic.............................................................................................................612
16.3.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic........................................................................................................... 613
16.3.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 614
16.3.3.1 Current reversal logic............................................................................................................ 614
16.3.3.2 Weak-end infeed logic........................................................................................................... 614
16.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
ZC1WPSCH ......................................................................................................................................614
16.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 614
16.4.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 615
16.4.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 616
16.5 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH............................................................................................617
16.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 617
16.5.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 617
16.5.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................617
16.6 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH ................... 618
16.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 618
16.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................618
16.6.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 619
16.7 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH...................................................................................................................................... 619
16.7.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 619
16.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................619
16.7.2.1 Fault current reversal logic...................................................................................................619
16.7.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic...........................................................................................................620
16.7.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................621
16.7.3.1 Current reversal...................................................................................................................... 621
16.7.3.2 Weak-end infeed.....................................................................................................................622
16.8 Direct transfer trip logic...............................................................................................................622
16.8.1 Application..................................................................................................................................622
16.8.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 624
16.8.3 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC.............................................624
16.8.3.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 624
16.8.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 625
16.8.3.3 Setting guidelines.................................................................................................................. 625
16.8.4 Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC........................................ 625
16.8.4.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 626
16.8.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 626
16.8.4.3 Setting guidelines.................................................................................................................. 627
16.8.5 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC................................................................. 628
16.8.5.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 628

16 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

16.8.5.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 628

16.8.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................628
16.8.6 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC..............................................................................................629
16.8.6.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 629
16.8.6.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 629
16.8.6.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................629
16.8.7 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV................................................... 629
16.8.7.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 630
16.8.7.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 630
16.8.7.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................630
16.8.8 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV............................................................630
16.8.8.1 Identification.......................................................................................................................... 630
16.8.8.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 630
16.8.8.3 Setting guidelines.................................................................................................................. 631
16.8.9 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC.................................................... 631
16.8.9.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................631
16.8.9.2 Application...............................................................................................................................631
16.8.9.3 Setting guideline.................................................................................................................... 632
16.8.10 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC............................................................ 632
16.8.10.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................632
16.8.10.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 632
16.8.10.3 Setting guidelines.................................................................................................................. 632
16.8.11 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC..................................................................................... 633
16.8.11.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................633
16.8.11.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 633
16.8.11.3 Setting guidelines.................................................................................................................. 633
16.8.12 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC...................................................................................633
16.8.12.1 Identification...........................................................................................................................633
16.8.12.2 Application.............................................................................................................................. 633
16.8.12.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................634

Section 17 Logic.................................................................................................................635
17.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC ..............................................................................................................635
17.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................635
17.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................635
17.1.2.1 Three-phase tripping............................................................................................................ 636
17.1.2.2 Single- and/or three-phase tripping..................................................................................636
17.1.2.3 Single-, two- or three-phase tripping................................................................................ 638
17.1.2.4 Lock-out...................................................................................................................................638
17.1.2.5 Example of directional data.................................................................................................638
17.1.2.6 Blocking of the function block............................................................................................ 640
17.1.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................640
17.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC......................................................................................................... 640
17.2.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 640
17.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 640
17.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 641

Line distance protection REL670 17

Application manual
Table of contents

17.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH................................................................................................ 641

17.3.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 641
17.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................641
17.3.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 641
17.4 Logic for group alarm WRNCALH............................................................................................... 641
17.4.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 641
17.4.1.1 Application...............................................................................................................................641
17.4.1.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................642
17.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH......................................................................................... 642
17.5.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................642
17.5.1.1 Application.............................................................................................................................. 642
17.5.1.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................642
17.6 Configurable logic blocks............................................................................................................ 642
17.6.1 Application..................................................................................................................................642
17.6.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 642
17.6.2.1 Configuration......................................................................................................................... 643
17.7 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN........................................................................................ 644
17.7.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 644
17.7.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 644
17.8 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I...................................................................................... 645
17.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................645
17.8.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 645
17.9 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC..........646
17.9.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 646
17.9.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 646
17.10 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16...................................................................................... 647
17.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................647
17.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................647
17.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation ITBGAPC.................... 648
17.11.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 648
17.11.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 648
17.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC.. 649
17.12.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 649
17.12.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 649
17.12.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................650
17.13 Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP.............................................................................. 650
17.13.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 650
17.13.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 650
17.13.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................650
17.13.4 Setting example......................................................................................................................... 651
17.14 Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP.................................................................................. 651
17.14.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 651
17.14.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 651
17.14.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 652
17.14.4 Setting example.........................................................................................................................652

18 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

Section 18 Monitoring.......................................................................................................655
18.1 Measurement..................................................................................................................................655
18.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................655
18.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................655
18.1.3 Zero clamping............................................................................................................................ 656
18.1.4 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 657
18.1.4.1 Setting examples................................................................................................................... 659
18.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG.................................................................................................665
18.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................665
18.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 665
18.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 665
18.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML.............................................................................................666
18.3.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 666
18.3.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 666
18.3.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 666
18.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR.......................................................................................................... 667
18.4.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................667
18.4.2 Application..................................................................................................................................667
18.4.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 669
18.4.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED.............................................................................................. 670
18.5 Event function EVENT................................................................................................................... 671
18.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 671
18.5.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 671
18.5.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................671
18.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE......................................................................................................672
18.6.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 672
18.6.2 Application..................................................................................................................................672
18.6.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 673
18.6.3.1 Recording times..................................................................................................................... 675
18.6.3.2 Binary input signals............................................................................................................... 676
18.6.3.3 Analog input signals.............................................................................................................. 676
18.6.3.4 Sub-function parameters..................................................................................................... 677
18.6.3.5 Consideration......................................................................................................................... 677
18.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP.................................................................................678
18.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................678
18.7.2 Application..................................................................................................................................678
18.7.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 678
18.8 Fault locator LMBRFLO.................................................................................................................679
18.8.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................679
18.8.2 Application..................................................................................................................................679
18.8.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 679
18.8.3.1 Connection of analog currents........................................................................................... 680
18.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT................................................................................................................ 681
18.9.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 681
18.9.2 Application..................................................................................................................................681

Line distance protection REL670 19

Application manual
Table of contents

18.9.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 682

18.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC...................................................................................................682
18.10.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................682
18.10.2 Application..................................................................................................................................682
18.10.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 682
18.11 Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR ......................................................................................... 682
18.11.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................682
18.11.2 Application..................................................................................................................................683
18.11.3 Setting guidelines.....................................................................................................................684
18.11.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED..............................................................................................684
18.11.3.2 Consideration of zero sequence currents........................................................................ 684
18.11.3.3 On-line correction with on-load tap changer position...................................................685
18.11.3.4 Through fault detection....................................................................................................... 685
18.11.3.5 Through fault I2t alarms....................................................................................................... 686
18.11.3.6 Initial values for cumulative I2t and number of through faults.................................... 686
18.11.4 Setting examples.......................................................................................................................687
18.11.4.1 Typical main CT connections for transformer................................................................. 687
18.11.4.2 Application examples for power transformers............................................................... 689
18.11.4.3 Application example for OHL.............................................................................................. 698
18.12 Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI................................................................................. 698
18.12.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 698
18.12.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 698
18.12.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 699
18.12.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED..............................................................................................699
18.13 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI................................................................................. 700
18.13.1 Identification............................................................................................................................. 700
18.13.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 700
18.13.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................701
18.13.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED.............................................................................................. 701

Section 19 Metering...........................................................................................................703
19.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT........................................................................................................703
19.1.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................703
19.1.2 Application..................................................................................................................................703
19.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 703
19.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR......................................704
19.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................704
19.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 704
19.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 705

Section 20 Ethernet-based communication................................................................... 707

20.1 Access point....................................................................................................................................707
20.1.1 Application..................................................................................................................................707
20.1.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 707
20.2 Redundant communication......................................................................................................... 708
20.2.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................708
20.2.2 Application................................................................................................................................. 708

20 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

20.2.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 709

20.3 Merging unit....................................................................................................................................710
20.3.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 710
20.3.2 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................... 711
20.4 Routes............................................................................................................................................... 711
20.4.1 Application...................................................................................................................................711
20.4.2 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................... 711

Section 21 Station communication..................................................................................713

21.1 Communication protocols............................................................................................................713
21.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.................................................................................... 713
21.2.1 Application IEC 61850-8-1........................................................................................................ 713
21.2.2 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................714
21.2.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE..................................................................................715
21.2.3.1 Sending data........................................................................................................................... 715
21.2.3.2 Receiving data......................................................................................................................... 715
21.3 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol..................................................................... 716
21.3.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................ 716
21.3.2 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................719
21.3.2.1 Specific settings related to the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication.................... 720
21.3.2.2 Loss of communication when used with LDCM...............................................................720
21.3.2.3 Setting examples for IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE and time synchronization..................... 724
21.3.3 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP...................................................................................728
21.4 LON communication protocol.....................................................................................................729
21.4.1 Application..................................................................................................................................729
21.4.2 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND...................................................................................... 731
21.4.2.1 Identification........................................................................................................................... 731
21.4.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................... 731
21.4.2.3 Setting guidelines...................................................................................................................731
21.5 SPA communication protocol...................................................................................................... 731
21.5.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 731
21.5.2 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................732
21.6 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol............................................................................... 733
21.6.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 733
21.6.1.1 Functionality........................................................................................................................... 734
21.6.1.2 Design.......................................................................................................................................734
21.6.2 Settings....................................................................................................................................... 736
21.6.2.1 Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication................................................... 736
21.6.2.2 Settings from PCM600..........................................................................................................737
21.6.3 Function and information types.............................................................................................739
21.7 DNP3 Communication protocol.................................................................................................. 739
21.7.1 Application..................................................................................................................................739

Section 22 Remote communication.................................................................................741

22.1 Binary signal transfer.................................................................................................................... 741
22.1.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 741
22.1.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 741

Line distance protection REL670 21

Application manual
Table of contents

22.1.2.1 Communication hardware solutions..................................................................................742

22.1.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 743

Section 23 Security............................................................................................................ 749

23.1 Authority status ATHSTAT...........................................................................................................749
23.1.1 Application..................................................................................................................................749
23.2 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG............................................................... 749
23.2.1 Application..................................................................................................................................749
23.3 Change lock CHNGLCK................................................................................................................. 750
23.3.1 Application..................................................................................................................................750
23.4 Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH ..................................................................................... 751
23.4.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 751
23.4.2 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................751

Section 24 Basic IED functions......................................................................................... 753

24.1 IED identifiers TERMINALID......................................................................................................... 753
24.1.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 753
24.2 Product information PRODINF.................................................................................................... 753
24.2.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 753
24.2.2 Factory defined settings..........................................................................................................753
24.3 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP............................................................................. 754
24.3.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................754
24.3.2 Application..................................................................................................................................754
24.3.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 755
24.4 Parameter setting groups............................................................................................................755
24.4.1 Application..................................................................................................................................755
24.4.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 755
24.5 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL..............................................................................................755
24.5.1 Identification.............................................................................................................................. 755
24.5.2 Application..................................................................................................................................756
24.5.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 756
24.6 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM........................................................................................... 756
24.6.1 Application..................................................................................................................................756
24.6.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 756
24.7 Global base values GBASVAL....................................................................................................... 756
24.7.1 Identification..............................................................................................................................756
24.7.2 Application.................................................................................................................................. 757
24.7.3 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................757
24.8 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI..........................................................................................757
24.8.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 757
24.8.2 Setting guidelines......................................................................................................................757
24.9 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO ....................................................................................757
24.9.1 Application.................................................................................................................................. 757
24.9.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 758
24.10 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI..............................................................................................758
24.10.1 Application..................................................................................................................................758
24.10.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 758

22 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
 Table of contents

24.11 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI........................................................................................ 758

24.11.1 Application..................................................................................................................................758
24.11.2 Frequency values....................................................................................................................... 758
24.11.3 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 759
24.12 Test mode functionality TESTMODE......................................................................................... 763
24.12.1 Application..................................................................................................................................763
24.12.1.1 IEC 61850 protocol test mode.............................................................................................764
24.12.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 765
24.13 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN.....................................................................................765
24.13.1 Application..................................................................................................................................765
24.13.2 Setting guidelines..................................................................................................................... 766
24.13.2.1 System time............................................................................................................................ 766
24.13.2.2 Synchronization......................................................................................................................766
24.13.2.3 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization...................................................... 768

Section 25 Requirements...................................................................................................771
25.1 Current transformer requirements.............................................................................................771
25.1.1 Current transformer basic classification and requirements............................................ 771
25.1.2 Conditions...................................................................................................................................772
25.1.3 Fault current............................................................................................................................... 773
25.1.4 Secondary wire resistance and additional load...................................................................773
25.1.5 General current transformer requirements......................................................................... 774
25.1.6 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements............................................................... 774
25.1.6.1 Busbar protection.................................................................................................................. 774
25.1.6.2 Distance protection............................................................................................................... 775
25.1.6.3 Breaker failure protection.................................................................................................... 776
25.1.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other standards................... 777
25.1.7.1 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR.........................................777
25.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX, PXR (and old IEC
60044-6, class TPS and old British Standard, class X)....................................................777
25.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE................................................................ 778
25.2 Voltage transformer requirements............................................................................................ 778
25.3 SNTP server requirements........................................................................................................... 779
25.4 PTP requirements.......................................................................................................................... 779
25.5 Sample specification of communication requirements for the protection and
control terminals in digital telecommunication networks.................................................... 779
25.6 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements ................................................................ 780

Section 26 Glossary........................................................................................................... 783

Line distance protection REL670 23

Application manual
24
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 1
Introduction

Section 1 Introduction

1.1 This manual GUID-AB423A30-13C2-46AF-B7FE-A73BB425EB5F v19

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.

1.2 Intended audience GUID-C9B8127F-5748-4BEA-9E4F-CC762FE28A3A v11

This manual addresses the protection and control engineer responsible for planning, pre-
engineering and engineering.

The protection and control engineer must be experienced in electrical power engineering and
have knowledge of related technology, such as protection schemes and communication
principles.

Line distance protection REL670 25

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Introduction

1.3 Product documentation

1.3.1 Product documentation set GUID-3AA69EA6-F1D8-47C6-A8E6-562F29C67172 v16

Deinstalling & disposal

Planning & purchase

Decommissioning
Commissioning

Maintenance
Engineering

Operation
Installing
Engineering manual
Installation manual

Commissioning manual
Operation manual

Application manual

Technical manual

Communication
protocol manual
Cyber security
deployment guideline
IEC07000220-4-en.vsd
IEC07000220 V4 EN-US

Figure 1: The intended use of manuals throughout the product lifecycle

The engineering manual contains instructions on how to engineer the IEDs using the various
tools available within the PCM600 software. The manual provides instructions on how to set
up a PCM600 project and insert IEDs to the project structure. The manual also recommends a
sequence for the engineering of protection and control functions, as well as communication
engineering for IEC 61850.

The installation manual contains instructions on how to install the IED. The manual provides
procedures for mechanical and electrical installation. The chapters are organized in the
chronological order in which the IED should be installed.

The commissioning manual contains instructions on how to commission the IED. The manual
can also be used by system engineers and maintenance personnel for assistance during the
testing phase. The manual provides procedures for the checking of external circuitry and
energizing the IED, parameter setting and configuration as well as verifying settings by
secondary injection. The manual describes the process of testing an IED in a substation which
is not in service. The chapters are organized in the chronological order in which the IED should
be commissioned. The relevant procedures may be followed also during the service and
maintenance activities.

The operation manual contains instructions on how to operate the IED once it has been
commissioned. The manual provides instructions for the monitoring, controlling and setting of
the IED. The manual also describes how to identify disturbances and how to view calculated
and measured power grid data to determine the cause of a fault.

26 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 1
Introduction

The application manual contains application descriptions and setting guidelines sorted per
function. The manual can be used to find out when and for what purpose a typical protection
function can be used. The manual can also provide assistance for calculating settings.

The technical manual contains operation principle descriptions, and lists function blocks, logic
diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data, sorted per
function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The communication protocol manual describes the communication protocols supported by

the IED. The manual concentrates on the vendor-specific implementations.

The point list manual describes the outlook and properties of the data points specific to the
IED. The manual should be used in conjunction with the corresponding communication
protocol manual.

The cyber security deployment guideline describes the process for handling cyber security
when communicating with the IED. Certification, Authorization with role based access control,
and product engineering for cyber security related events are described and sorted by
function. The guideline can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,
installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

1.3.2 Document revision history GUID-C8027F8A-D3CB-41C1-B078-F9E59BB73A6C v8

Document revision/date History

–/May 2017 First release
A/October 2017 Information updated
B/March 2018 2.2 Maintenance release 1
C/June 2018 Added new functions and resolved bugs

D/November 2018 Added harmonic, delta, and PSTPDIF functions

1.3.3 Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v7

Documents related to REL670 Document numbers

Application manual 1MRK 506 369-UEN
Commissioning manual 1MRK 506 371-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 506 372-BEN
Technical manual 1MRK 506 370-UEN
Type test certificate 1MRK 506 372-TEN

670 series manuals Document numbers

Operation manual 1MRK 500 127-UEN
Engineering manual 1MRK 511 398-UEN
Installation manual 1MRK 514 026-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 1MRK 511 392-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON 1MRK 511 395-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA 1MRK 511 396-UEN
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 27

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Introduction

670 series manuals Document numbers

Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide 1MRK 514 012-BEN
Cyber security deployment guideline 1MRK 511 399-UEN
Connection and Installation components 1MRK 513 003-BEN
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, Communication set-up 1MRK 505 382-UEN

1.4 Document symbols and conventions

1.4.1 Symbols GUID-2945B229-DAB0-4F15-8A0E-B9CF0C2C7B15 v13

The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could
result in electrical shock.

The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in
personal injury.

The caution hot surface icon indicates important information or warning about
the temperature of product surfaces.

Class 1 Laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes and do not
view directly with optical instruments.

The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the

concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which
could result in corruption of software or damage to equipment or property.

The information icon alerts the reader of important facts and conditions.

The tip icon indicates advice on, for example, how to design your project or
how to use a certain function.

Although warning hazards are related to personal injury, it is necessary to understand that
under certain operational conditions, operation of damaged equipment may result in
degraded process performance leading to personal injury or death. It is important that the
user fully complies with all warning and cautionary notices.

28 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 1
Introduction

1.4.2 Document conventions GUID-96DFAB1A-98FE-4B26-8E90-F7CEB14B1AB6 v8

• Abbreviations and acronyms in this manual are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary
also contains definitions of important terms.
• Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button
icons.
For example, to navigate between the options, use and .
• HMI menu paths are presented in bold.
For example, select Main menu/Settings.
• LHMI messages are shown in Courier font.
For example, to save the changes in non-volatile memory, select Yes and press .
• Parameter names are shown in italics.
For example, the function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
• Each function block symbol shows the available input/output signal.
• the character ^ in front of an input/output signal name indicates that the signal
name may be customized using the PCM600 software.
• the character * after an input signal name indicates that the signal must be
connected to another function block in the application configuration to achieve a
valid application configuration.
• Dimensions are provided both in inches and millimeters. If it is not specifically mentioned
then the dimension is in millimeters.

1.5 IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping GUID-C5133366-7260-4C47-A975-7DBAB3A33A96 v7

Function block names are used in ACT and PST to identify functions. Respective function block
names of Edition 1 logical nodes and Edition 2 logical nodes are shown in the table below.

Table 1: IEC 61850 edition 1 / edition 2 mapping

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes
AEGPVOC AEGGAPC AEGPVOC
AGSAL AGSAL AGSAL
SECLLN0
ALMCALH ALMCALH ALMCALH
ALTIM - ALTIM
ALTMS - ALTMS
ALTRK - ALTRK
BCZPDIF BCZPDIF BCZPDIF
BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF BCZSPDIF
BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF BCZTPDIF
BDCGAPC SWSGGIO BBCSWI
BDCGAPC
BDZSGAPC BBS6LLN0 LLN0
BDZSGAPC BDZSGAPC
BFPTRC_F01 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F02 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F03 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F04 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F05 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F06 BFPTRC BFPTRC
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 29

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BFPTRC_F07 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F08 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F09 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F10 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F11 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F12 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F13 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F14 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F15 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F16 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F17 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F18 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F19 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F20 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F21 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F22 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F23 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BFPTRC_F24 BFPTRC BFPTRC
BICPTRC_01 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_02 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_03 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_04 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BICPTRC_05 BICPTRC BICPTRC
BRCPTOC BRCPTOC BRCPTOC
BRPTOC BRPTOC BRPTOC
BTIGAPC B16IFCVI BTIGAPC
BUSPTRC_B1 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BBSPLLN0
BUSPTRC_B2 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B3 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B4 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B5 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B6 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B7 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B8 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B9 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B10 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B11 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B12 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B13 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B14 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B15 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
Table continues on next page

30 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

BUSPTRC_B16 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B17 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B18 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B19 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B20 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B21 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B22 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B23 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUSPTRC_B24 BUSPTRC BUSPTRC
BUTPTRC_B1 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BBTPLLN0
BUTPTRC_B2 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B3 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B4 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B5 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B6 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B7 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BUTPTRC_B8 BUTPTRC BUTPTRC
BZISGGIO BZISGGIO BZISGAPC
BZITGGIO BZITGGIO BZITGAPC
BZNPDIF_Z1 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z2 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z3 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z4 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z5 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNPDIF_Z6 BZNPDIF BZNPDIF
BZNSPDIF_A BZNSPDIF BZASGAPC
BZASPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNSPDIF_B BZNSPDIF BZBSGAPC
BZBSPDIF
BZNSGAPC
BZNSPDIF
BZNTPDIF_A BZNTPDIF BZATGAPC
BZATPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
BZNTPDIF_B BZNTPDIF BZBTGAPC
BZBTPDIF
BZNTGAPC
BZNTPDIF
CBPGAPC CBPLLN0 CBPMMXU
CBPMMXU CBPPTRC
CBPPTRC HOLPTOV
HOLPTOV HPH1PTOV
HPH1PTOV PH3PTOC
PH3PTUC PH3PTUC
PH3PTOC RP3PDOP
RP3PDOP
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 31

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

CCPDSC CCRPLD CCPDSC
CCRBRF CCRBRF CCRBRF
CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF CCRWRBRF
CCSRBRF CCSRBRF CCSRBRF
CCSSPVC CCSRDIF CCSSPVC
CMMXU CMMXU CMMXU
CMSQI CMSQI CMSQI
COUVGAPC COUVLLN0 COUVPTOV
COUVPTOV COUVPTUV
COUVPTUV
CVGAPC GF2LLN0 GF2MMXN
GF2MMXN GF2PHAR
GF2PHAR GF2PTOV
GF2PTOV GF2PTUC
GF2PTUC GF2PTUV
GF2PTUV GF2PVOC
GF2PVOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
CVMMXN CVMMXN CVMMXN
D2PTOC D2LLN0 D2PTOC
D2PTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
DPGAPC DPGGIO DPGAPC
DRPRDRE DRPRDRE DRPRDRE
ECPSCH ECPSCH ECPSCH
ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH ECRWPSCH
EF2PTOC EF2LLN0 EF2PTRC
EF2PTRC EF2RDIR
EF2RDIR GEN2PHAR
GEN2PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EF4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH1PTOC
PH1PTOC
EFPIOC EFPIOC EFPIOC
EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC EFRWPIOC
ETPMMTR ETPMMTR ETPMMTR
FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS FDPSPDIS
FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS FMPSPDIS
FRPSPDIS FPSRPDIS FPSRPDIS
FTAQFVR FTAQFVR FTAQFVR
FUFSPVC SDDRFUF FUFSPVC
SDDSPVC
GENPDIF GENPDIF GENGAPC
GENPDIF
GENPHAR
GENPTRC
GOPPDOP GOPPDOP GOPPDOP
PH1PTRC
Table continues on next page

32 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

GRPTTR GRPTTR GRPTTR
GSPTTR GSPTTR GSPTTR
GUPPDUP GUPPDUP GUPPDUP
PH1PTRC
HZPDIF HZPDIF HZPDIF
INDCALCH INDCALH INDCALH
ITBGAPC IB16FCVB ITBGAPC
L3CPDIF L3CPDIF L3CGAPC
L3CPDIF
L3CPHAR
L3CPTRC
L4CPDIF L4CLLN0 LLN0
L4CPDIF L4CGAPC
L4CPTRC L4CPDIF
L4CPSCH
L4CPTRC
L4UFCNT L4UFCNT L4UFCNT
L6CPDIF L6CPDIF L6CGAPC
L6CPDIF
L6CPHAR
L6CPTRC
LAPPGAPC LAPPLLN0 LAPPPDUP
LAPPPDUP LAPPPUPF
LAPPPUPF
LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC LCCRPTRC
LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC LCNSPTOC
LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV LCNSPTOV
LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC LCP3PTOC
LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC LCP3PTUC
LCPTTR LCPTTR LCPTTR
LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC LCZSPTOC
LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV LCZSPTOV
LD0LLN0 LLN0 -
LDLPSCH LDLPDIF LDLPSCH
LDRGFC STSGGIO LDRGFC
LEXPDIS LEXPDIS LEXPDIS
LEXPTRC
LFPTTR LFPTTR LFPTTR
LMBRFLO LMBRFLO LMBRFLO
LOLSPTR LOLSPTR LOLSPTR
LOVPTUV LOVPTUV LOVPTUV
LPHD LPHD
LPTTR LPTTR LPTTR
LT3CPDIF LT3CPDIF LT3CGAPC
LT3CPDIF
LT3CPHAR
LT3CPTRC
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 33

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

LT6CPDIF LT6CPDIF LT6CGAPC
LT6CPDIF
LT6CPHAR
LT6CPTRC
MVGAPC MVGGIO MVGAPC
NS2PTOC NS2LLN0 NS2PTOC
NS2PTOC NS2PTRC
NS2PTRC
NS4PTOC EF4LLN0 EF4PTRC
EF4PTRC EF4RDIR
EF4RDIR PH1PTOC
GEN4PHAR
PH1PTOC
O2RWPTOV GEN2LLN0 O2RWPTOV
O2RWPTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
OC4PTOC OC4LLN0 GEN4PHAR
GEN4PHAR PH3PTOC
PH3PTOC PH3PTRC
PH3PTRC
OEXPVPH OEXPVPH OEXPVPH
OOSPPAM OOSPPAM OOSPPAM
OOSPTRC
OV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 OV2PTOV
OV2PTOV PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PAPGAPC PAPGAPC PAPGAPC
PCFCNT PCGGIO PCFCNT
PH4SPTOC GEN4PHAR GEN4PHAR
OCNDLLN0 PH1BPTOC
PH1BPTOC PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC
PHPIOC PHPIOC PHPIOC
PSLPSCH ZMRPSL PSLPSCH
PSPPPAM PSPPPAM PSPPPAM
PSPPTRC
QCBAY QCBAY BAY/LLN0
QCRSV QCRSV QCRSV
RCHLCCH RCHLCCH RCHLCCH
REFPDIF REFPDIF REFPDIF
ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ ROTIPHIZ
ROTIPTRC
ROV2PTOV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ROV2PTOV
ROV2PTOV
SAPFRC SAPFRC SAPFRC
SAPTOF SAPTOF SAPTOF
SAPTUF SAPTUF SAPTUF
SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC SCCVPTOC
SCHLCCH SCHLCCH SCHLCCH
SCILO SCILO SCILO
Table continues on next page

34 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 1
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

SCSWI SCSWI SCSWI
SDEPSDE SDEPSDE SDEPSDE
SDEPTOC
SDEPTOV
SDEPTRC
SESRSYN RSY1LLN0 AUT1RSYN
AUT1RSYN MAN1RSYN
MAN1RSYN SYNRSYN
SYNRSYN
SLGAPC SLGGIO SLGAPC
SMBRREC SMBRREC SMBRREC
SMPPTRC SMPPTRC SMPPTRC
SP16GAPC SP16GGIO SP16GAPC
SPC8GAPC SPC8GGIO SPC8GAPC
SPGAPC SPGGIO SPGAPC
SSCBR SSCBR SSCBR
SSIMG SSIMG SSIMG
SSIML SSIML SSIML
PTRSTHR PTRSTHR PTRSTHR
STBPTOC STBPTOC BBPMSS
STBPTOC
STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ STEFPHIZ
STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ STTIPHIZ
SXCBR SXCBR SXCBR
SXSWI SXSWI SXSWI
T2WPDIF T2WPDIF T2WGAPC
T2WPDIF
T2WPHAR
T2WPTRC
T3WPDIF T3WPDIF T3WGAPC
T3WPDIF
T3WPHAR
T3WPTRC
TCLYLTC TCLYLTC TCLYLTC
TCSLTC
TCMYLTC TCMYLTC TCMYLTC
TEIGAPC TEIGGIO TEIGAPC
TEIGGIO
TEILGAPC TEILGGIO TEILGAPC
TMAGAPC TMAGGIO TMAGAPC
TPPIOC TPPIOC TPPIOC
TR1ATCC TR1ATCC TR1ATCC
TR8ATCC TR8ATCC TR8ATCC
TRPTTR TRPTTR TRPTTR
U2RWPTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC U2RWPTUV
U2RWPTUV
UV2PTUV GEN2LLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC UV2PTUV
UV2PTUV
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 35

Application manual
Section 1 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Introduction

Function block name Edition 1 logical nodes Edition 2 logical nodes

VDCPTOV VDCPTOV VDCPTOV
VDSPVC VDRFUF VDSPVC
VMMXU VMMXU VMMXU
VMSQI VMSQI VMSQI
VNMMXU VNMMXU VNMMXU
VRPVOC VRLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC PH1PTUV
PH1PTUV VRPVOC
VRPVOC
VSGAPC VSGGIO VSGAPC
WRNCALH WRNCALH WRNCALH
ZC1PPSCH ZPCPSCH ZPCPSCH
ZC1WPSCH ZPCWPSCH ZPCWPSCH
ZCLCPSCH ZCLCPLAL ZCLCPSCH
ZCPSCH ZCPSCH ZCPSCH
ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH ZCRWPSCH
ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF ZCVPSOF
ZGVPDIS ZGVLLN0 PH1PTRC
PH1PTRC ZGVPDIS
ZGVPDIS ZGVPTUV
ZGVPTUV
ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS ZMCAPDIS
ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS ZMCPDIS
ZMFCPDIS ZMFCLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPTRC
ZMFPTRC ZMMMXU
ZMMMXU
ZMFPDIS ZMFLLN0 PSFPDIS
PSFPDIS PSFPDIS
ZMFPDIS ZMFPDIS
ZMFPTRC ZMFPTRC
ZMMMXU ZMMMXU
ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS ZMHPDIS
ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS ZMMAPDIS
ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS ZMMPDIS
ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS ZMQAPDIS
ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS ZMQPDIS
ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS ZMRAPDIS
ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS ZMRPDIS
ZMRPSB ZMRPSB ZMRPSB
ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC ZSMGAPC

36 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

Section 2 Application

2.1 General IED application

M13636-3 v13
The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the protection, control and monitoring of
overhead lines and cables in solidly, impedance earthed or isolated networks. The IED can be
used up to the high voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and
multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is one-, two- and/or three-phase. The
IED is also suitable as back-up protection of power transformers, reactors and so on.

Distance protection with quadrilateral or mho characteristics is available. The full scheme
distance protection provides protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low
requirement on remote end communication. The six zones have fully independent measuring
and setting which gives high flexibility for all types of lines. Load encroachment and adaptive
reach compensation are included.

The modern technical solution offers fast operating time of typically less than one cycle.

The IED also includes an alternative for use on impedance earthed or isolated networks. It
includes phase preference logic to select and trip only one line at cross-country faults.

The autorecloser for single-, two-, and/or three-phase tripping and autoreclosing includes
priority features for multi-breaker arrangements. It co-operates with the synchrocheck
function with high-speed or delayed reclosing.

A high impedance differential protection can be used to protect T-feeders or line reactors.

High set instantaneous phase and earth overcurrent, four step directional or non-directional
delayed phase and earth overcurrent, sensitive earth fault for not direct earthed systems,
thermal overload and two step under and overvoltage protection are examples of the available
functions allowing the user to fulfill any application requirement.

The distance phase and earth fault protection, and the directional earth overcurrent
protection can communicate with remote end in any teleprotection communication scheme.
With the included remote communication, following the IEEE C37.94 standard, up to 192
channels for intertrip and binary signals are available per LDCM communication module in the
communication between the IEDs.

The IED can also be provided with full bay control and interlocking functionality including co-
operation with the synchrocheck function to allow integration of the main or back-up control.

Out of Step function is available to separate power system sections close to electrical centre
at occurring out of step.

The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to eight
merging units (MU) depending on other functionality included in the IED. Each MU has eight
analogue channels, normally four currents and four voltages. Conventional and Merging Unit
channels can be mixed freely in the application.

Logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The advanced logic capability allows special
applications such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker arrangements,
closing of breaker rings, load transfer logics and so on. The graphical configuration tool with
delay mode, ensures simple and fast testing and commissioning.

Disturbance recorder and fault locator are available to allow independent post-fault analysis
after primary disturbances.

Line distance protection REL670 37

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to test wiring in substations as well
as testing configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all binary inputs and outputs
on the IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced to arbitrary values.

Central Account Management is an authentication infrastructure that offers a secure solution

for enforcing access control to IEDs and other systems within a substation. This incorporates
management of user accounts, roles and certificates and the distribution of such, a procedure
completely transparent to the user.

Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an IED-vendor independent IEC 61850
model of the IED. This customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data model, but all other
aspects of the IED will remain unchanged (e.g., names on the local HMI and names in the tools).
This offers significant flexibility to adapt the IED to the customers' system and standard
solution.
M11788-3 v10
Communication via optical connections ensures immunity against disturbances.
GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1

The following tables list all the functions available in the IED. Those functions
that are not exposed to the user or do not need to be configured are not
described in this manual.

2.2 Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v14

Table 2: Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance

function name
REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670
(Customized)

Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential 0-3 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
protection, single phase
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection
logic
LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for 0-1
differential protection
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, 0-5
ZMQAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2
quadrilateral
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, 0-6
ZMCAPDIS quadrilateral characteristic for
series compensated lines
Table continues on next page

38 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance

function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance 0-2

quadrilateral, including series
compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral 0-2
characteristic with fixed angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance 0-5
protection, mho characteristic
ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance 0-5
ZMMAPDIS protection, quadrilateral for
earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element 0-2
for mho characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection 0-2
directional function for earth
faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision 0-1
logic
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with 0-2
load enchroachment
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad 0-5
ZMRAPDIS characteristic separate Ph-Ph
and Ph-E settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral 0-2
characteristic with settable
angle
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance 0-2 1 1 1 1
protection, quad and mho
characteristic
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection 0-2
for series comp. lines, quad and
mho characteristic
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1 1
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1 1 1 1
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1 1 1 1
PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-2 1-B24 1-B24 1-B24
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1 1 1 1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault 1 1 1 1 1
logic, voltage and current
based

Line distance protection REL670 39

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

2.3 Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v14

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance

function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase 0-3 1 1 1 1
overcurrent protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1
protection, four steps
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual 0-3 1 1 1 1
overcurrent protection
EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual 0-3 1 1 1 1
67N2) overcurrent protection, four
steps
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative 0-2 1 1 1 1
phase sequence overcurrent
protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual 0-1 1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
overcurrent and power
protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, 0-2 1 1 1 1
one time constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, 0-2 1 1 1 1
one time constant, Fahrenheit
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2 1 1 2 1
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1 1 1B 1
1-B27
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2 1 1 2 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower 0-2 1-C39 1-C39 1-C39
protection
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower 0-2 1-C39 1-C39 1-C39
protection
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained 0-3 1 1 1 1
overcurrent protection

Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage 0-2 1 1 1 1
protection
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage 0-2 1 1 1 1
protection
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage 0-2 1 1 1 1
protection
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03
Table continues on next page

40 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Distance

function name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2

LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1
PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0-1

Frequency protection
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B
3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B
3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B
protection 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage 0-4 1 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
protection

General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

2.4 Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v17

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description
REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670
(Customized)

Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrochec 0-2 1 1 2 1
k, energizing
check and
synchronizin
g
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 1 1B 2B 1B
1-H04 2-H05 1-H04
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 41

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

APC10 3 Control 0-1 1-H37 1-H37 1-H37

functionality
for a single
bay, max 10
objects
(1CB),
including
interlocking
(see Table 4)
APC15 3 Control 0-1 1-H38
functionality
for a single
bay, max 15
objects
(2CB),
including
interlocking
(see Table 5)
QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of 1 1 1 1 1
LR-switch
positions
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control 1 1 1 1 1
of PSTO
SXCBR Circuit 6 3 3 6 3
breaker
SLGAPC Logic 15 15 15 15 15
rotating
switch for
function
selection and
LHMI
presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini 30 30 30 30 30
switch
DPGAPC Generic 32 32 32 32 32
communicati
on function
for Double
Point
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point 5 5 5 5 5
generic
control
function 8
signals
AUTOBITS Automation 3 3 3 3 3
bits,
command
function for
DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single 8 8 8 8 8
command, 16
signals
Table continues on next page

42 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

I103CMD Function 1 1 1 1 1
commands
for IEC
60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function 50 50 50 50 50
commands
generic for
IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED 50 50 50 50 50
commands
with position
and select for
IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMDV IED direct 50 50 50 50 50
commands
with position
for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED 1 1 1 1 1
commands
for IEC
60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function 4 4 4 4 4
commands
user defined
for IEC
60870-5-103
Secondary
system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current 0-2 1 2 1
circuit
supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure 0-3 1 3 3 3
supervision
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03
supervision
based on
voltage
difference
DELVSPVC 7V_78 Voltage delta 4 4 4 4 4
V supervision,
2 phase
DELISPVC 71 Current delta 4 4 4 4 4
supervision,
2 phase
DELSPVC 78 Real delta 4 4 4 4 4
supervision,
real
Logic
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 43

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

SMPPTRC 94 Tripping 12 12 12 12 12
logic
SMAGAPC General start 12 12 12 12 12
matrix block
STARTCOMB Start 32 32 32 32 32
combinator
TMAGAPC Trip matrix 12 12 12 12 12
logic
ALMCALH Logic for 5 5 5 5 5
group alarm
WRNCALH Logic for 5 5 5 5 5
group
warning
INDCALH Logic for 5 5 5 5 5
group
indication
AND, GATE, INV, Basic 40-420 40-42 40-42 40-42 40-42
LLD, OR, configurable 0 0 0 0
PULSETIMER, logic blocks
RSMEMORY, (see Table 3)
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable 0-1
INDCOMBSPQT, logic blocks
INDEXTSPQT, Q/T (see
INVALIDQT, Table 6)
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
AND, GATE, INV, Extension 0-1
LLD, OR, logic
PULSETIMER, package (see
RSMEMORY, Table 7)
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal 1 1 1 1 1
function
block
B16I Boolean to 18 18 18 18 18
integer
conversion,
16 bit
Table continues on next page

44 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

BTIGAPC Boolean to 16 16 16 16 16
integer
conversion
with logical
node
representati
on, 16 bit
IB16 Integer to 18 18 18 18 18
Boolean 16
conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to 16 16 16 16 16
Boolean 16
conversion
with Logic
Node
representati
on
TEIGAPC Elapsed time 12 12 12 12 12
integrator
with limit
transgressio
n and
overflow
supervision
INTCOMP Comparator 30 30 30 30 30
for integer
inputs
REALCOMP Comparator 30 30 30 30 30
for real
inputs

Table 3: Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 298
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40

Line distance protection REL670 45

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

Table 4: Number of function instances in APC10

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 10
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 10
SXSWI Circuit switch 9
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 12
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 12
switching device

Table 5: Number of function instances in APC15

Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 15
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 15
SXSWI Circuit switch 14
Table continues on next page

46 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

Function name Function description Total number of instances

QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching 20
device via GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 20
switching device

Table 6: Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40

Table 7: Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 220
GATE 49
INV 220
LLD 49
OR 220
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 113
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89

Line distance protection REL670 47

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

Monitoring
CVMMXN Power 6 6 6 6 6
system
measuremen
t
CMMXU Current 10 10 10 10 10
measuremen
t
VMMXU Voltage 6 6 6 6 6
measuremen
t phase-
phase
CMSQI Current 6 6 6 6 6
sequence
measuremen
t
VMSQI Voltage 6 6 6 6 6
sequence
measuremen
t
VNMMXU Voltage 6 6 6 6 6
measuremen
t phase-earth
AISVBAS General 1 1 1 1 1
service value
presentation
of analog
inputs
EVENT Event 20 20 20 20 20
function
DRPRDRE, Disturbance 1 1 1 1 1
A4RADR, report
B1RBDR-
B22RBDR
SPGAPC Generic 96 96 96 96 96
communicati
on function
for Single
Point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic 16 16 16 16 16
communicati
on function
for Single
Point
indication 16
inputs
MVGAPC Generic 24 24 24 24 24
communicati
on function
for measured
values
BINSTATREP Logical signal 3 3 3 3 3
status report
Table continues on next page

48 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

RANGE_XP Measured 66 66 66 66 66
value
expander
block
SSIMG 63 Insulation 21 21 21 21 21
supervision
for gas
medium
SSIML 71 Insulation 3 3 3 3 3
supervision
for liquid
medium
SSCBR Circuit 0-6 3 3 6 3
breaker
condition
monitoring
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands 1 1 1 1 1
for IEC
60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands 3 3 3 3 3
user defined
signals for
IEC
60870-5-103
I103AR Function 1 1 1 1 1
status auto-
recloser for
IEC
60870-5-103
I103EF Function 1 1 1 1 1
status earth-
fault for IEC
60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function 1 1 1 1 1
status fault
protection
for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for 1 1 1 1 1
IEC
60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison 1 1 1 1 1
status for IEC
60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for 20 20 20 20 20
user defined
signals for
IEC
60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event 30 30 30 30 30
counter with
limit
supervision
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 49

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function Line Distance

function name description

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

TEILGAPC Running hour 6 6 6 6 6

meter
PTRSTHR 51TF Through fault 0-2 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22
monitoring
CHMMHAI ITHD Current 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3
harmonic
monitoring, 3
phase
VHMMHAI VTHD Voltage 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3
harmonic
monitoring, 3
phase
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter 16 16 16 16 16
logic
ETPMMTR Function for 6 6 6 6 6
energy
calculation
and demand
handling

2.5 Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v17

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line Distance

name
REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)

REL670
(Customized)

Station communication
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via 59 59 59 59 59
GOOSE for interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64 64
receive a double point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to 32 32 32 32 32
receive an integer value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to 60 60 60 60 60
receive a measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to 64 64 64 64 64
receive a single point value
Table continues on next page

50 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line Distance

name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND
AGSAL Generic security application 1 1 1 1 1
component
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30
communication, 8 merging
units
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23
protocol
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24
seamless redundancy
PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 0-1 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32 1
PMUREPORT, phasors (see Table 8)
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for 6 6 6 6 6
non-redundant Ethernet port
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for 3 3 3 3 3
redundant Ethernet ports
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96
Remote communication
LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2 remote LDCM
LDCMRecBinStat3
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic 0-2 1 1 1 1
with delta based blocking
scheme signal transmit
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
communication logic for
distance protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-2 1 1 1 1
infeed logic for distance
protection
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 51

Application manual
Section 2 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Application

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Function description Line Distance

name

REL670 (D42)
REL670 (A42)

REL670 (B42)
REL670 (A41)
REL670
(Customized)

ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05

infeed logic for phase
segregated communication
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1 1 1 1
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic 0-1 1 1 1
for residual overcurrent
protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end 0-1 1 1 1
infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection
DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1

Table 8: Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors

Function name Function description Number of instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

2.6 Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v13

Table 9: Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description
name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, Time synchronization
SYNCHCAN,
SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
Table continues on next page

52 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 2
Application

IEC 61850 or function Description

name
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
GBASVAL Global base values for settings
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

Table 10: Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description
name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600
FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module
GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

Line distance protection REL670 53

Application manual
54
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 3
Configuration

Section 3 Configuration

3.1 Introduction SEMOD120082-1 v1

SEMOD172508-5 v6
The IED is available to be ordered in four different alternatives with the configuration suitable
for the application. Normally these configurations should be acceptable to use with only few
changes of binary input and outputs, which can be done from the signal matrix tool in the
PCM600 engineering platform.

The main protection functions are switched Off at delivery. Back-up functions not generally
used are also set to Off.

The configurations are:

• Single-breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement for non directly earthed
systems.
• Single-breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.
• Single-breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.
• Multi-breaker arrangement. Three phase tripping arrangement.
• Multi-breaker arrangement. Single phase tripping arrangement.

The Multi-breaker arrangement includes one-and-a-half breaker and ring-breaker

arrangements.

The number of IO must be ordered to the application where more IO is foreseen for the single-
phase tripping arrangements respectively the multi-breaker arrangement. The basic delivery
includes one binary input module and one binary output module, which is sufficient for the
default configured IO to trip and close the circuit breaker.

However, all IEDs can be reconfigured with help of the application configuration tool, being
part of the PCM600 platform. This way the IED can be made suitable for special applications
and special logic can be developed, such as logic for automatic opening of disconnectors and
closing of ring bays, automatic load transfer from one busbar to the other, and so on.

Line distance protection REL670 55

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Configuration

3.2 Description of configuration REL670 IP14802-1 v2

3.2.1 Introduction IP14803-1 v1

3.2.1.1 Description of configuration A41 GUID-E5AFA7F9-AA08-48B1-9ABA-B6A9A0B9BE1E v1

WA1
REL670 A41 – Single breaker with three phase tripping for
WA2 high ohmic and resonance earthed systems 12AI (6I+6U)

WA2_VT

QB1 QB2 3 Control 63 71 MET UN

S XCBR S SIMG S SIML VN MMXU
WA1_VT

MET UN 94 1→0
1->0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

QA1
21 Z< 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
PPL2 PHIZ ZMF PDIS PH PIOC BRC PTOC

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control 68 Zpsb 50BF 3I>BF 26 θ>
S SCBR
S SCBR
S SCBR ZCLC PSCH ZM RPSB CC RBRF LC PTTR

U>/I< MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) 67N IN>

ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC CV MMXN OC4 PTOC SDE PSDE

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET Isqi MET I

QB9
DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR C MSQI C MMXU
QC9

LINE_VT

MET U MET Usqi MET UN 27 3U<

V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU LOV PTUV

Other Functions available from the function library

52PD PD 2(I>/U<) 71 DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>)
CC PDSC CV GAPC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC

59 2(3U>)   Zpsl 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 27 2(3U<)
OV2 PTOV PSL PSCH Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC UV2 PTUV
51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85
VR PVOC ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH

Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD
CHM MHAI PMU REP PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI

IEC16000195-2-en.vsd

IEC16000195 V2 EN-US

Figure 2: Configuration diagram for configuration A41

56 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 3
Configuration

3.2.1.2 Description of configuration A42 GUID-8BA33493-DB51-4FCC-A9C6-39E6F78A2606 v1

WA1
REL670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
WA2 12AI (6I+6U)

WA2_VT

QB1 QB2 3 Control

Control
Control 63 71 MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR S SIMG S SIML VN MMXU
WA1_VT

MET UN 94 1→0
1->0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

85 85 68 Zpsb 21 Z<
QA1
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZMF PDIS

46 Iub> 50 3I>> 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

BRC PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
SSSCBR
S SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC

MET P/Q U>/I< 51_67 4(3I>) 26 θ>

CV MMXN ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC OC4 PTOC LC PTTR

MET W/Varh MET Isqi MET I

QB9
ETP MMTR C MSQI C MMXU
QC9
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL 85 85 27 3U<
LINE_VT DRP RDRE LMB RFLO EC PSCH ECRW PSCH LOV PTUV

MET U MET Usqi MET UN 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)

V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 71 DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl 3 Control
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY

59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f> 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)
ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 51TF 78 Ucos
CHM MHAI CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP PTR STHR PSP PPAM

3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 85 85

Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000196-2-en.vsd

IEC16000196 V2 EN-US

Figure 3: Configuration diagram for configuration A42

Line distance protection REL670 57

Application manual
Section 3 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Configuration

3.2.1.3 Description of configuration B42 GUID-1F828D7F-B53B-418D-8A14-A11D3224B8C8 v1

WA1
REL670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT

WA1_CT Control
Control 52PD PD
Control 50BF 3I>BF MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU
Σ
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
WA1_QA1
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC

3 Control
Control
Control 63 71
S
SSXCBR
SCBR
SCBR S SIMG S SIML
WA1_QB6
MET I MET Isqi 46 Iub> 50STB 3I>STB 26 3I>STB
θ>
LINE1_QB9 C MMXU C MSQI BRC PTOC STB PTOC LC PTTR
LINE1_VT

MET P/Q 68 Zpsb 21 Z< U>/I<

CV MMXN ZM RPSB ZMF PDIS ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC

QB61 MET W/Varh 21FL FL DFR/SER DR

ETP MMTR LMB RFLO DRP RDRE

85 51_67 4(3I>) 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50 3I>> 50N IN>>

TIE_QA1 ZC PSCH OC4 PTOC EF4 PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC

TIE_CT
85 85 85 27 3U<
ZCRW PSCH EC PSCH ECRW PSCH LOV PTUV

MET U MET UN MET Usqi 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)

QB62 V MMXU VN MMXU V MSQI UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

LINE2_QB9
MET UN
LINE2_VT VN MMXU

WA2_QB6 WA2_VT MET UN 94

94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP
SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

WA2_QA1 Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 71 DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>)
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC

78 Ucos Zpsl 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

QB2
OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f< 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)

WA2 SA PTUF VDC PTOV VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions

ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f>

CHM MHAI CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH

78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

PMU REP PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI

67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 85 85

SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000197-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000197 V2 EN-US

Figure 4: Configuration diagram for configuration B42

58 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 3
Configuration

3.2.1.4 Description of configuration D42 GUID-C0623D78-EE13-44E9-BE02-951B54878879 v1

WA1
REL670 D42 – Single breaker with single or three phase
WA2 tripping with PMU functionality 12AI (6I+6U)

` Phasor data
81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f> IEEE Std 1344

SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF PMU REP IEEE Std C37.118

WA2_VT

QB1 QB2 3 Control

Control
Control 63 71 MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR S SIMG S SIML VN MMXU
WA1_VT

MET UN 94 1→0
1->0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC
VN MMXU SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

85 85 68 Zpsb 21 Z<
QA1
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZMF PDIS

46 Iub> 50 3I>> 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

BRC PTOC PH PIOC EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

LINE_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
SSSCBR
S SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC

MET P/Q U>/I< 51_67 4(3I>) 26 θ>

CV MMXN ZCV PSOF FUF SPVC OC4 PTOC LC PTTR

MET W/Varh MET Isqi MET I

QB9
ETP MMTR C MSQI C MMXU
QC9
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL 85 85 27 3U<
LINE_VT DRP RDRE LMB RFLO EC PSCH ECRW PSCH LOV PTUV

MET U MET Usqi MET UN 27 2(3U<) 59 2(3U>)

V MMXU V MSQI VN MMXU UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 71 DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl 3 Control
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY

59N 2(U0>) 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)

ROV2 PTOV STB PTOC VDC PTOV VR PVOC ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control
CHM MHAI CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV

3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 85 85

S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000198-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000198 V2 EN-US

Figure 5: Configuration diagram for configuration D42

Line distance protection REL670 59

Application manual
60
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

Section 4 Analog inputs

4.1 Introduction SEMOD55003-5 v11

Analog input channels must be configured and set properly in order to get correct
measurement results and correct protection operations. For power measuring, all directional
and differential functions, the directions of the input currents must be defined in order to
reflect the way the current transformers are installed/connected in the field ( primary and
secondary connections ). Measuring and protection algorithms in the IED use primary system
quantities. Setting values are in primary quantities as well and it is important to set the data
about the connected current and voltage transformers properly.

An AISVBAS reference PhaseAngleRef can be defined to facilitate service values reading. This
analog channel's phase angle will always be fixed to zero degrees and remaining analog
channel's phase angle information will be shown in relation to this analog input. During testing
and commissioning of the IED, the reference channel can be changed to facilitate testing and
service values reading.

The IED has the ability to receive analog values from primary equipment, that
are sampled by Merging units (MU) connected to a process bus, via the IEC
61850-9-2 LE protocol.

The availability of VT inputs depends on the ordered transformer input module

(TRM) type.

4.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55068-1 v1

SEMOD130348-4 v5

The available setting parameters related to analog inputs are depending on the
actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

If a second TRM is used, at least one TRM channel must be configured to get
the service values. However, the MU physical channel must be configured to get
service values from that channel.

4.2.1 Setting of the phase reference channel SEMOD55055-5 v3

All phase angles are calculated in relation to a defined reference. An appropriate analog input
channel is selected and used as phase reference. The parameter PhaseAngleRef defines the
analog channel that is used as phase angle reference.

Line distance protection REL670 61

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

4.2.1.1 Example SEMOD55055-11 v5

Usually the L1 phase-to-earth voltage connected to the first VT channel number of the
transformer input module (TRM) is selected as the phase reference. The first VT channel
number depends on the type of transformer input module.

For a TRM with 6 current and 6 voltage inputs the first VT channel is 7. The setting
PhaseAngleRef=7 shall be used if the phase reference voltage is connected to that channel.

4.2.2 Setting of current channels SEMOD55055-16 v6

The direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Unless
indicated otherwise, the main CTs are supposed to be star connected and can be connected
with the earthing point to the object or from the object. This information must be set in the
IED. The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current,
power, and so on means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negative
value means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction into the
object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined as Reverse. See
Figure 6

A positive value of current, power, and so on (forward) means that the quantity flows towards
the object. A negative value of current, power, and so on (reverse) means that the quantity
flows away from the object. See Figure 6.

Definition of direction Definition of direction

for directional functions for directional functions
Reverse Forward Forward Reverse
Protected Object
Line, transformer, etc
e.g. P, Q, I e.g. P, Q, I
Measured quantity is Measured quantity is
positive when flowing positive when flowing
towards the object towards the object

Set parameter Set parameter

CTStarPoint CTStarPoint
Correct Setting is Correct Setting is
"ToObject" "FromObject"

en05000456.vsd
IEC05000456 V1 EN-US

Figure 6: Internal convention of the directionality in the IED

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject or ToObject, a
positive quantities always flowing towards the protected object and a direction defined as
Forward always is looking towards the protected object. The following examples show the
principle.

4.2.2.1 Example 1 SEMOD55055-23 v6

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects.

62 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

Line

Ip
Transformer Ip Ip
Line
Reverse Forward

Definition of direction
for directional functions
Transformer
Is Is
protection Line protection

IED IED

Setting of current input: Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter Set parameter
CTStarPoint with CTStarPoint with CTStarPoint with
Transformer as Transformer as Line as
reference object. reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject" "FromObject"

IEC05000753=IEC05
000753=1=en=Origin
al[1].vsd

IEC05000753 V2 EN-US

Figure 7: Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED

Figure 7 shows the normal case where the objects have their own CTs. The settings for CT
direction shall be done according to the figure. To protect the line, direction of the directional
functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward. This means that the protection is
looking towards the line.

4.2.2.2 Example 2 SEMOD55055-29 v7

Two IEDs used for protection of two objects and sharing a CT.

Line distance protection REL670 63

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

Transformer
Line
Reverse Forward

Definition of direction
for directional functions
Transformer
protection Line protection

IED IED

Setting of current input: Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter Set parameter
CTStarPoint with CTStarPoint with CTStarPoint with
Transformer as Transformer as Line as
reference object. reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject" "FromObject"

IEC05000460 V2 EN-US

Figure 8: Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED

This example is similar to example 1, but here the transformer is feeding just one line and the
line protection uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. The CT direction is set
with different reference objects for the two IEDs though it is the same current from the same
CT that is feeding the two IEDs. With these settings, the directional functions of the line
protection shall be set to Forward to look towards the line.

4.2.2.3 Example 3 SEMOD55055-35 v7

One IED used to protect two objects.

64 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

Transformer
Line
Forward Reverse

Definition of direction
for directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

IED

Setting of current input: Setting of current input:

Set parameter Set parameter
CTStarPoint with CTStarPoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"

IEC05000461 V2 EN-US

Figure 9: Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED

In this example, one IED includes both transformer and line protections and the line protection
uses the same CT as the transformer protection does. For both current input channels, the CT
direction is set with the transformer as reference object. This means that the direction
Forward for the line protection is towards the transformer. To look towards the line, the
direction of the directional functions of the line protection must be set to Reverse. The
direction Forward/Reverse is related to the reference object that is the transformer in this
case.

When a function is set to Reverse and shall protect an object in reverse direction, it shall be
noted that some directional functions are not symmetrical regarding the reach in forward and
reverse direction. It is in first hand the reach of the directional criteria that can differ. Normally
it is not any limitation but it is advisable to have it in mind and check if it is acceptable for the
application in question.

If the IED has sufficient number of analog current inputs, an alternative solution is shown in
Figure 10. The same currents are fed to two separate groups of inputs and the line and
transformer protection functions are configured to the different inputs. The CT direction for
the current channels to the line protection is set with the line as reference object and the
directional functions of the line protection shall be set to Forward to protect the line.

Line distance protection REL670 65

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

Transformer
Line
Reverse Forward

Definition of direction
for directional
Transformer and line functions
Line protection

IED
Setting of current input
for line functions:
Set parameter
CTStarPoint with
Line as
reference object.
Setting of current input Setting of current input Correct setting is
for transformer functions: for transformer functions: "FromObject"
Set parameter Set parameter
CTStarPoint with CTStarPoint with
Transformer as Transformer as
reference object. reference object.
Correct setting is Correct setting is
"ToObject" "ToObject"

IEC05000462 V2 EN-US

Figure 10: Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED

66 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

Busbar

2
Busbar
Protection

IED

2 1

en06000196.vsd
IEC06000196 V2 EN-US

Figure 11: Example how to set CTStarPoint parameters in the IED

For busbar protection, it is possible to set the CTStarPoint parameters in two ways.

The first solution will be to use busbar as a reference object. In that case for all CT inputs
marked with 1 in Figure 11, set CTStarPoint = ToObject, and for all CT inputs marked with 2 in
Figure 11, set CTStarPoint = FromObject.

The second solution will be to use all connected bays as reference objects. In that case for all
CT inputs marked with 1 in Figure 11, set CTStarPoint = FromObject, and for all CT inputs
marked with 2 in Figure 11, set CTStarPoint = ToObject.

Regardless which one of the above two options is selected, busbar differential protection will
behave correctly.

The main CT ratios must also be set. This is done by setting the two parameters CTsec and
CTprim for each current channel. For a 1000/1 A CT, the following settings shall be used:
• CTprim = 1000 (value in A)
• CTsec =1 (value in A).

Line distance protection REL670 67

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

4.2.2.4 Examples on how to connect, configure and set CT inputs for most
commonly used CT connections SEMOD55055-296 v7

Figure 12 defines the marking of current transformer terminals commonly used around the
world:

In the SMAI function block, you have to set if the SMAI block is measuring
current or voltage. This is done with the parameter: AnalogInputType: Current/
Voltage. The ConnectionType: phase -phase/phase-earth and GlobalBaseSel.

P1 P2
IPri

ISec (H1) (H2)

S1 (X1) S2 (X2)
x S2 (X2) x S1 (X1)

P2 P1
(H2) (H1)

a) b) c)

en06000641.vsd
IEC06000641 V1 EN-US

Figure 12: Commonly used markings of CT terminals

Where:
a) is symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square
indicates the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (that is, positive)
polarity
b) and are equivalent symbols and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for CTs. Note
c) that for these two cases the CT polarity marking is correct!

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices, the rated secondary
current of a CT has typically one of the following values:

• 1A
• 5A

However, in some cases, the following rated secondary currents are used as well:

• 2A
• 10A

The IED fully supports all of these rated secondary values.

It is recommended to:

• use 1A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with 1A and 2A
secondary rating
• use 5A rated CT input into the IED in order to connect CTs with 5A and 10A
secondary rating

68 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.2.5 Example on how to connect a star connected three-phase CT set to the

IED SEMOD55055-352 v11

Figure 13 gives an example about the wiring of a star connected two-phase CT set to the IED. It
gives an overview of the actions which are needed to make this measurement available to the
built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

L1 L2 L3
IED
1 2
4
IL2

IL3
IL1

3
IL1
CT 600/5 SMAI2
Star Connected IL2 BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2L1 5 AI2
IL3 ^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN
IN

IEC13000002-4-en.vsdx
Protected Object

IEC13000002 V4 EN-US

Figure 13: Star connected three-phase CT set with star point towards the protected object

Where:
1) The drawing shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a star connected three-
phase CT set to the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) The current inputs are located in the TRM. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs the
following setting values shall be entered for the example shown in Figure 13.

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTStarPoint=ToObject

Ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter
(CTStarPoint=ToObject) as set in this example causes no change on the measured currents. In other
words, currents are already measured towards the protected object.
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 69

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

3) These three connections are the links between the three current inputs and the three input channels
of the preprocessing function block 4). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to the same three
physical CT inputs.
4) The preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors
for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the
IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of the
preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in power plants), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.
Section SMAI in this manual provides information on adaptive frequency tracking for the signal
matrix for analogue inputs (SMAI).
5) AI3P in the SMAI function block is a grouped signal which contains all the data about the phases L1,
L2, L3 and neutral quantity; in particular the data about fundamental frequency phasors, harmonic
content and positive sequence, negative and zero sequence quantities are available.
AI1, AI2, AI3, AI4 are the output signals from the SMAI function block which contain the fundamental
frequency phasors and the harmonic content of the corresponding input channels of the
preprocessing function block.
AIN is the signal which contains the fundamental frequency phasors and the harmonic content of
the neutral quantity. In this example, GRP2N is not connected so this data is calculated by the
preprocessing function block on the basis of the inputs GRPL1, GRPL2 and GRPL3. If GRP2N is
connected, the data reflects the measured value of GRP2N.

Another alternative is to have the star point of the three-phase CT set as shown in Figure 14:

L1 L2 L3

IED
IL2

IL3
IL1

2
1 4
IN 3

IL3 SMAI2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
IL2 ^GRP2L1 5 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
CT 800/1 ^GRP2L3 AI4
IL1
Star Connected ^GRP2N AI N

Protected Object IEC11000026-4-en.vsdx

IEC11000026 V4 EN-US

Figure 14: Star connected three-phase CT set with its star point away from the protected object
In the example, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example (Figure
13). The only difference is the setting of the parameter CTStarPoint of the used current inputs
on the TRM (item 2 in Figure 14 and 13):

70 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

• CTprim=600A
• CTsec=5A
• CTStarPoint=FromObject

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as set in
this example will negate the measured currents in order to ensure that the currents are
measured towards the protected object within the IED.

A third alternative is to have the residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set
connected to the IED as shown in Figure 14.

L1 L2 L3
IED
IL2

IL3
IL1

3 6

IN 1 4
SMAI2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
IL3 ^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
IL2 ^GRP2N AIN

CT 800/1
IL1
Star Connected
5

Protected Object
IEC06000644-4-en.vsdx

IEC06000644 V4 EN-US

Figure 15: Star connected three-phase CT set with its star point away from the protected object and
the residual/neutral current connected to the IED

Where:
1) Shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a star connected three-phase CT set to
the three CT inputs of the IED.
2) Shows how to connect residual/neutral current from the three-phase CT set to the fourth input in
the IED. It shall be noted that if this connection is not made, the IED will still calculate this current
internally by vectorial summation of the three individual phase currents.
3) Is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs
the following setting values shall be entered.

• CTprim=800A
• CTsec=1A
• CTStarPoint=FromObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-N

The ratio of the first two parameters is only used inside the IED. The third parameter as set in this
example will have no influence on measured currents (that is, currents are already measured
towards the protected object).
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 71

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

4) Are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool
(ACT), which connects these three current inputs to the first three input channels on the
preprocessing function block 6). Depending on the type of functions, which need this current
information, more than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT
inputs.
5) Is a connection made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT) and Application configuration tool (ACT), which
connects the residual/neutral current input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing
function block 6). Note that this connection in SMT shall not be done if the residual/neutral current
is not connected to the IED.
6) Is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors
of the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the
IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this
application, most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations), then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

4.2.2.6 Example how to connect delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED SEMOD55055-392 v7

Figure 16 gives an example how to connect a delta connected three-phase CT set to the IED. It
gives an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions in the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

72 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

L1 L2 L3
IED

IL3
IL2
IL1

1 2
3 4
IL1-IL2
SMAI2
DAB Connected

IL2-IL3 BLOCK AI3P

CT 600/5

REVROT AI1
in Delta

^GRP2L1 AI2
IL3-IL1 ^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN

IEC11000027-3-en.vsdx
Protected Object

IEC11000027 V3 EN-US

Figure 16: Delta DAB connected three-phase CT set

Where:
1) shows how to connect three individual phase currents from a delta connected three-phase CT set to
three CT inputs of the IED.
2) is the TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs
the following setting values shall be entered.
CTprim=600A
CTsec=5A

• CTStarPoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT), which
connect these three current inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block
4). Depending on the type of functions which need this current information, more then one
preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three CT inputs.
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all three input channels

• harmonic content for all three input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors
for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the
IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block. For this application most of the
preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

Line distance protection REL670 73

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

Another alternative is to have the delta connected CT set as shown in figure 17:

L1 L2 L3
IED

IL3
IL2
IL1

2
1
3

IL1-IL3 SMAI2
BLOCK AI3P
DAC Connected

IL2-IL1 REVROT AI1

CT 800/1
in Delta

^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
IL3-IL2 ^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN

IEC11000028-3-en.vsdx
Protected Object

IEC11000028 V3 EN-US

Figure 17: Delta DAC connected three-phase CT set

In this case, everything is done in a similar way as in the above described example, except that
for all used current inputs on the TRM the following setting parameters shall be entered:

CTprim=800A

CTsec=1A

• CTStarPoint=ToObject
• ConnectionType=Ph-Ph

It is important to notice the references in SMAI. As inputs at Ph-Ph are expected to be L1L2,
L2L3 respectively L3L1 we need to tilt 180º by setting ToObject.

4.2.2.7 Example how to connect single-phase CT to the IED SEMOD55055-431 v8

Figure 18 gives an example how to connect the single-phase CT to the IED. It gives an overview
of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to the built-in
protection and control functions within the IED as well.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

74 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

IED
Protected Object

L1 L2 L3

1 SMAI2
(+) BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
INS ^GRP2L1 AI2
CT 1000/1

a) (+) ^GRP2L2 AI3

(-) ^GRP2L3 AI4
(+) ^GRP2N AIN
b)
(-)
INS
3
(-)

IEC11000029-4-en.vsdx
INP

IEC11000029 V4 EN-US

Figure 18: Connections for single-phase CT input

Where:
1) shows how to connect single-phase CT input in the IED.
2) is TRM where these current inputs are located. It shall be noted that for all these current inputs
the following setting values shall be entered.
For connection (a) shown in Fgure 18:
CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTStarPoint=ToObject

For connection (b) shown in Figure 18:

CTprim= 1000 A
CTsec= 1A
CTStarPoint=FromObject
3) shows the connection made in SMT tool, which connect this CT input to the fourth input channel
of the preprocessing function block 4).
4) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate values. The calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control
functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for
IEDs installed in the power plants) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

4.2.3 Relationships between setting parameter Base Current, CT

rated primary current and minimum pickup of a protection IED GUID-8EB19363-9178-4F04-A6AC-AF0C2F99C5AB v1

Note that for all line protection applications (e.g. distance protection or line differential
protection) the parameter Base Current (i.e. IBase setting in the IED) used by the relevant
protection function, shall always be set equal to the largest rated CT primary current among all
CTs involved in the protection scheme. The rated CT primary current value is set as parameter
CTPrim under the IED TRM settings.

For all other protection applications (e.g. generator, shunt reactor, shunt capacitor and
transformer protection) it is typically desirable to set IBase parameter equal to the rated
current of the protected object. However this is only recommended to do if the rated current
of the protected object is within the range of 40% to 120% of the selected CT rated primary
current. If for any reason (e.g. high maximum short circuit current) the rated current of the

Line distance protection REL670 75

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

protected object is less than 40% of the rated CT primary current, it is strongly recommended
to set the parameter IBase in the IED to be equal to the largest rated CT primary current
among all CTs involved in the protection scheme and installed on the same voltage level. This
will effectively make the protection scheme less sensitive; however, such measures are
necessary in order to avoid possible problems with loss of the measurement accuracy in the
IED.

Regardless of the applied relationship between the IBase parameter and the rated CT primary
current, the corresponding minimum pickup of the function on the CT secondary side must
always be verified. It is strongly recommended that the minimum pickup of any instantaneous
protection function (e.g. differential, restricted earth fault, distance, instantaneous
overcurrent, etc.) shall under no circumstances be less than 4% of the used IED CT input rating
(i.e. 1A or 5A). This corresponds to 40mA secondary for IED 1A rated inputs and to 200mA
secondary for IED 5A rated inputs used by the function. This shall be individually verified for all
current inputs involved in the protection scheme.

Note that exceptions from the above 4% rule may be acceptable for very special applications
(e.g. when Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC is involved in the protection scheme).

4.2.4 Setting of voltage channels SEMOD55055-44 v4

As the IED uses primary system quantities, the main VT ratios must be known to the IED. This
is done by setting the two parameters VTsec and VTprim for each voltage channel. The phase-
to-phase value can be used even if each channel is connected to a phase-to-earth voltage from
the VT.

4.2.4.1 Example SEMOD55055-47 v3

Consider a VT with the following data:

132kV 110V
3 3
EQUATION2016 V1 EN-US (Equation 1)

The following setting should be used: VTprim=132 (value in kV) VTsec=110 (value in V)

4.2.4.2 Examples how to connect, configure and set VT inputs for most
commonly used VT connections SEMOD55055-60 v6

Figure 19 defines the marking of voltage transformer terminals commonly used around the
world.

+ + A a A da A a
(H1) (X1) (H1) (X1) (H1) (X1)
UPri USec

N n N dn B b
(H2) (X2) (H2) (X2) (H2) (X2)
a) b) c) d)
en06000591.vsd
IEC06000591 V1 EN-US

Figure 19: Commonly used markings of VT terminals

76 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
a) is the symbol and terminal marking used in this document. Terminals marked with a square indicate
the primary and secondary winding terminals with the same (positive) polarity
b) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-earth
connected VTs
c) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for open delta
connected VTs
d) is the equivalent symbol and terminal marking used by IEC (ANSI) standard for phase-to-phase
connected VTs

It shall be noted that depending on national standard and utility practices the rated secondary
voltage of a VT has typically one of the following values:

• 100 V
• 110 V
• 115 V
• 120 V
• 230 V

The IED fully supports all of these values and most of them will be shown in the following
examples.

4.2.4.3 Examples on how to connect a three phase-to-earth connected VT to the

IED SEMOD55055-87 v9

Figure 20 gives an example on how to connect a three phase-to-earth connected VT to the IED.
It gives an overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED.

For correct terminal designations, see the connection diagrams valid for the
delivered IED.

Line distance protection REL670 77

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

L1

L2 IED
L3 2
3
66 kV
5
3 1
110V
3
SMAI2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
66 kV ^GRP2L3 AI4
#Not used ^GRP2N AIN
3
110V
3
4

66 kV
3 IEC06000599-4-en.vsdx
110V
3

IEC06000599 V4 EN-US

Figure 20: A Three phase-to-earth connected VT

L1

L2 IED

2
3
132 kV
2 1
110V
2
SMAI2
BLOCK AI2P
^GRP2L1 AI1
^GRP2L2 5 AI2
132 kV ^GRP2L1L2 AI3
^GRP2N AI4
2 AIN
110V
2 4

IEC16000140-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000140 V1 EN-US

Figure 21: A two phase-to-earth connected VT

78 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect three secondary phase-to-earth voltages to three VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. For these three voltage inputs, the
following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim =132 kV
VTsec = 110 V
Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of
the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual VT.

66
66 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1903 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

3) are three connections made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect these three voltage
inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing function block 5). Depending on the
type of functions which need this voltage information, more then one preprocessing block might
be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs.
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block
is not connected in SMT tool. Thus the preprocessing block will automatically calculate 3Uo
inside by vectorial sum from the three phase to earth voltages connected to the first three input
channels of the same preprocessing block. Alternatively, the fourth input channel can be
connected to open delta VT input, as shown in Figure 23.
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all input channels

• harmonic content for all input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the
following settings shall be set as shown here:
UBase=66 kV (that is, rated Ph-Ph voltage)
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

4.2.4.4 Example on how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED SEMOD55055-134 v7

Figure 22 gives an example how to connect a phase-to-phase connected VT to the IED. It gives
an overview of the required actions by the user in order to make this measurement available to
the built-in protection and control functions within the IED. It shall be noted that this VT
connection is only used on lower voltage levels (that is, rated primary voltage below 40 kV).

Line distance protection REL670 79

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

L1

L2
L3
13.8kV 13.8kV IED
120V 120V

3 5
1

SMAI2
BLOCK AI3P
REVROT AI1
^GRP2L1 AI2
^GRP2L2 AI3
^GRP2L3 AI4
#Not Used ^GRP2N AIN

IEC06000600-5-en.vsdx
.

IEC06000600 V5 EN-US

Figure 22: A Two phase-to-phase connected VT

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of a phase-to-phase VT to the VT inputs on the IED
2) is the TRM where these three voltage inputs are located. It shall be noted that for these three
voltage inputs the following setting values shall be entered:
VTprim=13.8 kV
VTsec=120 V
Please note that inside the IED only ratio of these two parameters is used.
3) are three connections made in the Signal Matrix tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connects these three voltage inputs to first three input channels of the preprocessing
function block 5). Depending on the type of functions, which need this voltage information, more
than one preprocessing block might be connected in parallel to these three VT inputs
4) shows that in this example the fourth (that is, residual) input channel of the preprocessing block is
not connected in SMT. Note. If the parameters UL1, UL2, UL3, UN should be used the open delta must
be connected here.
5) Preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency phasors
for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within the
IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For this
application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values. However the
following settings shall be set as shown here:
ConnectionType=Ph-Ph
UBase=13.8 kV
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

80 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

4.2.4.5 Example on how to connect an open delta VT to the IED for high
impedance earthed or unearthed networks SEMOD55055-163 v9

Figure 23 gives an example about the wiring of an open delta VT to the IED for high impedance
earthed or unearthed power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT connection
presents a secondary voltage proportional to 3U0 to the IED.

In case of a solid earth fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will be equal to:

3U 0 = 3 × U Ph - Ph = 3 × U Ph - N
EQUATION1921 V3 EN-US (Equation 3)

The primary rated voltage of an open Delta VT is always equal to UPh-E. Three series connected
VT secondary windings gives a secondary voltage equal to three times the individual VT
secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of open delta VTs quite often have a
secondary rated voltage equal to one third of the rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage
(110/3V in this particular example).

Figure 23 gives overview of required actions by the user in order to make this measurement
available to the built-in protection and control functions within the IED as well.

L1
L2 IED

L3
2

6.6kV
3
110V
3 5

3
SMAI2
BLOCK AI3P
6.6kV 1 REVROT AI1
# Not Used ^GRP2L1 AI2
3 # Not Used ^GRP2L2 AI3
110V # Not Used ^GRP2L3 AI4
^GRP2N AIN
3 +3Uo

4
6.6kV
IEC06000601-4-en.vsdx
3
110V
3

IEC06000601 V4 EN-US

Figure 23: Open delta connected VT in high impedance earthed power system

Line distance protection REL670 81

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of the open delta VT to one VT input on the IED.

+3U0 shall be connected to the IED

2) is the TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage input the
following setting values shall be entered:

VTprim = 3 × 6.6 = 11.43kV

EQUATION1923 V1 EN-US (Equation 4)

110
VT sec = 3 × = 110V
3
EQUATION1924 V1 EN-US (Equation 5)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted that the ratio of
the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one individual open delta VT.

6.6
3 × 6.6 3
=
110 110
3
EQUATION1925 V1 EN-US (Equation 6)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing block is not
connected in SMT tool or ACT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), Application configuration tool (ACT),
which connect this voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block
5).
5) is a Preprocessing block that has the task to digitally filter the connected analog input and
calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental frequency
phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as reference for sequence
quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control functions within
the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function block in the configuration tool. For
this application most of the preprocessing settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically required only for IEDs
installed in the generating stations ) then the setting parameters DFTReference shall be set
accordingly.

4.2.4.6 Example how to connect the open delta VT to the IED for low impedance
earthed or solidly earthed power systems SEMOD55055-199 v6

Figure 24 gives an example about the connection of an open delta VT to the IED for low
impedance earthed or solidly earthed power systems. It shall be noted that this type of VT
connection presents secondary voltage proportional to 3U0 to the IED.

In case of a solid earth fault close to the VT location the primary value of 3Uo will be equal to:

82 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 4
Analog inputs

U Ph - Ph
3Uo = = U Ph - E
3
EQUATION1926 V1 EN-US (Equation 7)

The primary rated voltage of such VT is always equal to UPh-E Therefore, three series
connected VT secondary windings will give the secondary voltage equal only to one individual
VT secondary winding rating. Thus the secondary windings of such open delta VTs quite often
has a secondary rated voltage close to rated phase-to-phase VT secondary voltage, that is,
115V or 115/√3V as in this particular example. Figure 24 gives an overview of the actions which
are needed to make this measurement available to the built-in protection and control
functions within the IED.

L1

L2 IED
L3 2

138kV
3 5
115V
3
3
SMAI2
1 BLOCK AI3P
138kV REVROT AI1
# Not Used ^GRP2L1 AI2
3 # Not Used ^GRP2L2 AI3
115V # Not Used ^GRP2L3 AI4
3 +3Uo ^GRP2N AIN

4
138 kV
3
115V
3
IEC06000602-4-en.vsdx

IEC06000602 V4 EN-US

Figure 24: Open delta connected VT in low impedance or solidly earthed power system

Line distance protection REL670 83

Application manual
Section 4 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Analog inputs

Where:
1) shows how to connect the secondary side of open delta VT to one VT input in
the IED.

+3Uo shall be connected to the IED.

2) is TRM where this voltage input is located. It shall be noted that for this voltage
input the following setting values shall be entered:

138
VTprim = 3× = 138kV
3
EQUATION1928 V1 EN-US (Equation 8)

115
VT sec = 3× = 115V
3
EQUATION1929 V1 EN-US (Equation 9)

Inside the IED, only the ratio of these two parameters is used. It shall be noted
that the ratio of the entered values exactly corresponds to ratio of one
individual open delta VT.

138
138 3
=
115 115
3
EQUATION1930 V1 EN-US (Equation 10)

3) shows that in this example the first three input channel of the preprocessing
block is not connected in SMT tool.
4) shows the connection made in Signal Matrix Tool (SMT), which connect this
voltage input to the fourth input channel of the preprocessing function block 4).
5) preprocessing block has a task to digitally filter the connected analog inputs
and calculate:

• fundamental frequency phasors for all four input channels

• harmonic content for all four input channels
• positive, negative and zero sequence quantities by using the fundamental
frequency phasors for the first three input channels (channel one taken as
reference for sequence quantities)

These calculated values are then available for all built-in protection and control
functions within the IED, which are connected to this preprocessing function
block in the configuration tool. For this application most of the preprocessing
settings can be left to the default values.
If frequency tracking and compensation is required (this feature is typically
required only for IEDs installed in the generating stations) then the setting
parameters DFTReference shall be set accordingly.

84 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 5
Local HMI

Section 5 Local HMI AMU0600442 v15

IEC13000239-3-en.vsd
IEC13000239 V3 EN-US

Figure 25: Local human-machine interface

The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements

• Keypad
• Display (LCD)
• LED indicators
• Communication port for PCM600

The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.

Line distance protection REL670 85

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Local HMI

5.1 Display GUID-55739D4F-1DA5-4112-B5C7-217AAF360EA5 v13

The LHMI includes a graphical monochrome liquid crystal display (LCD) with a resolution of 320
x 240 pixels. The character size can vary. The amount of characters and rows fitting the view
depends on the character size and the view that is shown.

The display view is divided into four basic areas.

IEC15000270-1-en.vsdx

IEC15000270 V1 EN-US

Figure 26: Display layout

1 Path
2 Content
3 Status
4 Scroll bar (appears when needed)

The function key button panel shows on request what actions are possible with the function
buttons. Each function button has a LED indication that can be used as a feedback signal for
the function button control action. The LED is connected to the required signal with PCM600.

86 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 5
Local HMI

IEC13000281-1-en.vsd
GUID-C98D972D-D1D8-4734-B419-161DBC0DC97B V1 EN-US

Figure 27: Function button panel

The indication LED panel shows on request the alarm text labels for the indication LEDs. Three
indication LED pages are available.

IEC13000240-1-en.vsd
GUID-5157100F-E8C0-4FAB-B979-FD4A971475E3 V1 EN-US

Figure 28: Indication LED panel

The function button and indication LED panels are not visible at the same time. Each panel is
shown by pressing one of the function buttons or the Multipage button. Pressing the ESC
button clears the panel from the display. Both panels have a dynamic width that depends on
the label string length.

5.2 LEDs AMU0600427 v14

The LHMI includes three status LEDs above the display: Ready, Start and Trip.

There are 15 programmable indication LEDs on the front of the LHMI. Each LED can indicate
three states with the colors: green, yellow and red. The texts related to each three-color LED
are divided into three panels.

There are 3 separate panels of LEDs available. The 15 physical three-color LEDs in one LED
group can indicate 45 different signals. Altogether, 135 signals can be indicated since there are

Line distance protection REL670 87

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Local HMI

three LED groups. The LEDs are lit according to priority, with red being the highest and green
the lowest priority. For example, if on one panel there is an indication that requires the green
LED to be lit, and on another panel there is an indication that requires the red LED to be lit, the
red LED takes priority and is lit. The LEDs can be configured with PCM600 and the operation
mode can be selected with the LHMI or PCM600.

Information panels for the indication LEDs are shown by pressing the Multipage button.
Pressing that button cycles through the three pages. A lit or un-acknowledged LED is indicated
with a highlight. Such lines can be selected by using the Up/Down arrow buttons. Pressing the
Enter key shows details about the selected LED. Pressing the ESC button exits from
information pop-ups as well as from the LED panel as such.

The Multipage button has a LED. This LED is lit whenever any LED on any panel is lit. If there are
un-acknowledged indication LEDs, then the Multipage LED blinks. To acknowledge LEDs, press
the Clear button to enter the Reset menu (refer to description of this menu for details).

There are two additional LEDs which are next to the control buttons and . These
LEDs can indicate the status of two arbitrary binary signals by configuring the
OPENCLOSE_LED function block. For instance, OPENCLOSE_LED can be connected to a circuit
breaker to indicate the breaker open/close status on the LEDs.

IEC16000076-1-en.vsd
IEC16000076 V1 EN-US

Figure 29: OPENCLOSE_LED connected to SXCBR

5.3 Keypad AMU0600428 v19

The LHMI keypad contains push-buttons which are used to navigate in different views or
menus. The push-buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help
and switch between local and remote control mode.

The keypad also contains programmable push-buttons that can be configured either as menu
shortcut or control buttons.

88 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 5
Local HMI

24

1
23
2
18
3

19
4

6 20

21

7 22

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

IEC15000157-2-en.vsd

IEC15000157 V2 EN-US

Figure 30: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push-buttons and
RJ-45 communication port

1...5 Function button

6 Close
7 Open
8 Escape
9 Left
10 Down
11 Up
12 Right
13 Key
14 Enter
15 Remote/Local
16 Uplink LED
17 Not in use
18 Multipage
19 Menu
20 Clear
21 Help

Line distance protection REL670 89

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Local HMI

22 Communication port
23 Programmable indication LEDs
24 IED status LEDs

5.4 Local HMI functionality

5.4.1 Protection and alarm indication GUID-09CCB9F1-9B27-4C12-B253-FBE95EA537F5 v17

Protection indicators
The protection indicator LEDs are Ready, Start and Trip.

The yellow and red status LEDs are configured in the disturbance recorder
function, DRPRDRE, by connecting a start or trip signal from the actual function
to a BxRBDR binary input function block using the PCM600 and configure the
setting to Off, Start or Trip for that particular signal.

Table 11: Ready LED (green)

LED state Description
Off Auxiliary supply voltage is disconnected.
On Normal operation.
Flashing Internal fault has occurred.

Table 12: Start LED (yellow)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has started and an indication message is displayed.
The start indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or
binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the LHMI,
press .

Flashing The IED is in test mode and protection functions are blocked, or the IEC61850
protocol is blocking one or more functions.
The indication disappears when the IED is no longer in test mode and blocking
is removed. The blocking of functions through the IEC61850 protocol can be
reset in Main menu/Test/Reset IEC61850 Mod. The yellow LED changes to
either On or Off state depending on the state of operation.

Table 13: Trip LED (red)

LED state Description
Off Normal operation.
On A protection function has tripped. An indication message is displayed if the
auto-indication feature is enabled in the local HMI.
The trip indication is latching and must be reset via communication, LHMI or
binary input on the LEDGEN component. To open the reset menu on the LHMI,
press .

Flasing Configuration mode.

90 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 5
Local HMI

Alarm indicators
The 15 programmable three-color LEDs are used for alarm indication. An individual alarm/
status signal, connected to any of the LED function blocks, can be assigned to one of the three
LED colors when configuring the IED.

Table 14: Alarm indications

LED state Description
Off Normal operation. All activation signals are off.
On • Follow-S sequence: The activation signal is on.
• LatchedColl-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has not
been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the activation
signal is still on.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has
not been acknowledged.
• LatchedReset-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has
not been acknowledged.

Flashing • Follow-F sequence: The activation signal is on.

• LatchedAck-F-S sequence: The activation signal is on, or it is off but the indication has
not been acknowledged.
• LatchedAck-S-F sequence: The indication has been acknowledged, but the activation
signal is still on.

5.4.2 Parameter management GUID-5EE466E3-932B-4311-9FE1-76ECD8D6E245 v9

The LHMI is used to access the relay parameters. Three types of parameters can be read and
written.

• Numerical values
• String values
• Enumerated values

Numerical values are presented either in integer or in decimal format with minimum and
maximum values. Character strings can be edited character by character. Enumerated values
have a predefined set of selectable values.

5.4.3 Front communication GUID-FD72A445-C8C1-4BFE-90E3-0AC78AE17C45 v12

The RJ-45 port in the LHMI enables front communication.

• The green uplink LED on the left is lit when the cable is successfully connected to the port.
• The yellow LED is not used; it is always off.

Line distance protection REL670 91

Application manual
Section 5 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Local HMI

IEC13000280-1-en.vsd
GUID-AACFC753-BFB9-47FE-9512-3C4180731A1B V1 EN-US

Figure 31: RJ-45 communication port and green indicator LED

1 RJ-45 connector
2 Green indicator LED

The default IP address for the IED front port is 10.1.150.3 and the corresponding subnetwork
mask is 255.255.254.0. It can be set through the local HMI path Main menu/Configuration/
Communication/Ethernet configuration/FRONT port/AP_FRONT.

Ensure not to change the default IP address of the IED.

Do not connect the IED front port to a LAN. Connect only a single local PC with
PCM600 to the front port. It is only intended for temporary use, such as
commissioning and testing.

92 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

Section 6 Wide area measurement system

6.1 C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol

Configuration PMUCONF GUID-747C6AD7-E6A1-466E-92D1-68865681F92F v1

6.1.1 Identification
GUID-1E140EA0-D198-443A-B445-47CEFD2E6134 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Configuration parameters for IEEE PMUCONF - -
1344 and C37.118 protocol

6.1.2 Application GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v4

The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor standards:

• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data communication)

• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014 (Measurements)
• IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)

PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE 1344
protocols. This means all the required settings and parameters in order to establish and define
a number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or more PDC clients (synchrophasor client).
This includes port numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings for IEEE C37.118 as
well as IEEE 1344 protocols.

6.1.3 Operation principle GUID-2608FBC4-9036-476A-942B-13452019BC11 v2

The Figure 32 demonstrates the communication configuration diagram. As can be seen, the
IED can support communication with maximum 8 TCP clients and 6 UDP client groups,
simultaneously. Every client can communicate with only one instance of the two available
PMUREPORT function block instances at a time. It means that one client cannot communicate
with both PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:2 at the same time. However, multiple clients can
communicate with the same instance of PMUREPORT function block at the same time. For TCP
clients, each client can decide to communicate with an existing instance of PMUREPORT by
knowing the corresponding PMU ID for that PMUREPORT instance. Whereas, for UDP clients,
the PMUREPORT instance for each UDP channel is defined by the user in the PMU and the client
has to know the PMU ID corresponding to that instance in order to be able to communicate.
More information is available in the sections Short guidance for the use of TCP and Short
guidance for the use of UDP.

Line distance protection REL670 93

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

IED
PMU ID

1344/C37.118
PMUREPORT: 1 PMUREPORT: 2 TCP Client_1
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_2
1344/C37.118
TCP Client_3
PMU ID: X
1344/C37.118
TCP IP TCP Client_4
PMU ID: Y 1344/C37.118
TCP Port TCP Client_5
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_6
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_7
1344/C37.118 TCP Client_8

PMU ID

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 1 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_1

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 2 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_2

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 3 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_3

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 4 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_4

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 5 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_5

PMUREPORT Instance: 1 or 2 1344/C37.118

UDP 6 Unicast/Multicast
UDP Client Group_6

IEC140000117-1.en.vsd
IEC140000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 32: The communication configuration (PMUCONF) structure in the IED

6.1.3.1 Short guidance for use of TCP GUID-700B2618-3719-4C17-A1F8-3B8F5834FE95 v3

Port 7001 is used by the SPA on TCP/IP (field service tool). If the port is used for
any other protocol, for example C37.118, the SPA on TCP/IP stops working.

The IED supports 8 concurrent TCP connections using IEEE1344 and/or C37.118 protocol. The
following parameters are used to define the TCP connection between the IED and the TCP
clients:

1. 1344TCPport– TCP port for control of IEEE 1344 data for TCP clients
2. C37.118TCPport – TCP port for control of IEEE C37.118 data for TCP clients

As can be seen, there are two separate parameters in the IED for selecting port numbers for
TCP connections; one for IEEE1344 protocol (1344TCPport) and another one for C37.118
protocol (C37.118 TCPport). Client can communicate with the IED over IEEE1344 protocol using
the selected TCP port defined in 1344TCPport, and can communicate with the IED over IEEE
C37.118 protocol using the selected TCP port number in C37.118TCPport.

All the frames (the header frame, configuration frame, command frame and data frame) are
communicated over the same TCP port. The client can request (by sending a command frame)
a configuration and/or header via the TCP channel and the requested configuration and/or
header will be sent back to the client (as Configuration frame/Header frame) over the same
TCP channel.

Once the TCP client connects to the IED, the client has to necessarily send a command frame
to start a communication. As shown in Figure 32, the IED can support 2 PMUREPORT instances
and the client has to specify the PMU ID Code in order to know which PMUREPORT data needs
to be sent out to that client. In this figure, X and Y are referring to the user-defined PMU ID
Codes for PMUREPORT instances 1 or 2, respectively. It is up to the TCP client to decide which
PMUREPORT function block shall communicate with that client. Upon successful reception of

94 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

the first command by the IED, the PMU ID will be extracted out of the command; if there is a
PMUREPORT instance configured in the IED with matching PMU ID, then the client connection
over TCP with the IED will be established and further communication will take place.
Otherwise, the connection will be terminated and the TCPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in the
PMU Diagnostics on the Local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU
diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

It is possible to turn off/on the TCP data communication by sending a IEEE1344 or C37.118
command frame remotely from the client to the PMU containing RTDOFF/RTDON command.

At any given point of time maximum of 8 TCP clients can be connected to the IED for
IEEE1344/C37.118 protocol. If there is an attempt made by the 9th client, the connection to the
new client will be terminated without influencing the connection of the other clients already
connected. A list of active clients can be seen on the Local HMI in the diagnostics menu under
Main menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

6.1.3.2 Short guidance for use of UDP GUID-F5BCBBF7-4EED-4E79-9E86-AF046D201BB1 v3

The IED supports maximum of 6 concurrent UDP streams. They can be individually configured
to send IEEE1344 or C37.118 data frames as unicast / multicast. Note that [x] at the end of
each parameter is referring to the UDP stream number (UDP client group) and is a number
between 1 and 6. Each of the 6 UDP groups in the IED has the following settings:

1. SendDataUDP[x] – Enable / disable UDP data stream

2. ProtocolOnUDP[x] – Send IEEE1344 or C37.118 on UDP
3. PMUReportUDP[x] – Instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send data
on this UDP stream (UDP client group[x])
4. UDPDestAddres[x] – UDP destination address for UDP client group[x] (unicast / multicast
address range)
5. UDPDestPort[x] – UDP destination port number for UDP client group[x]
6. TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] – TCP port to control of data sent over UDP client group[x], i.e. to
receive commands and send configuration frames
7. SendCfgOnUDP[x] – Send configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) on UDP for client group[x]

It is possible to turn off/on the UDP data communication either by setting the parameter
SendDataUDP[x] to Off/On locally in the PMU or by sending a C37.118 or IEEE1344 command
frame (RTDOFF/RTDON) remotely from the client to the PMU as defined in IEEE 1344/C37.118
standard.

However, such a remote control to stop the streams from the client is only possible when the
parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to SetByProtocol. The command RTDOFF/RTDON sent by
the client is stored in the IED, i.e. if the IED is rebooted for some reason, the state of the
stream will remain the same.

If the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set toOn the RTDOFF/RTDON commands received from
the clients are ignored in the IED.

It is recommended not to set the parameter SendDataUDP[x] to SetByProtocol in case of a

multicast. This is because if one of the clients sends the RTDOFF command, all the clients will
stop receiving the frames.

The UDP implementation in the IED is a UDP_TCP. This means that by default, only the data
frames are sent out on UDP stream and the header frame, configuration frame and command
frame are sent over TCP. This makes the communication more reliable especially since
commands are sent over TCP which performs request/acknowledgment exchange to ensure
that no data (command in this case) is lost.

However, by setting the parameter SendCfgOnUDP[x] to On, the configuration frame 2 (CFG-2)
of IEEEC37.118 data stream is cyclically sent on the corresponding UDP stream (UDP client
group[x]) once per minute. This is useful in case of multicast UDP data stream when a lot of

Line distance protection REL670 95

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

PMU clients are receiving the same UDP stream from the same UDP group (UDP client
group[x]).

As shown in Figure 32, there are maximum 2 instances of PMUREPORT function blocks
available in the IED. Each UDP client group[x] can only connect to one of the PMUREPORT
instances at the same time. This is defined in the PMU by the parameter PMUReportUDP[x]
which is used to define the instance number of PMUREPORT function block that must send
data on this UDP stream (UDP client group[x]).

The data streams in the IED can be sent as unicast or as multicast. The user-defined IP address
set in the parameter UDPDestAddress[x] for each UDP stream defines if it is a Unicast or
Multicast. The address range 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 (Class D IP addresses) is treated as
multicast. Any other IP address outside this range is treated as unicast and the UDP data will
be only sent to that specific unicast IP address. In addition to UDPDestAddress[x] parameter,
UDPDestPort[x] parameter is used to define the UDP destination port number for UDP client
group[x].

In case of multicast IP, it will be the network switches and routers that take care of replicating
the packet to reach multiple receivers. Multicast mechanism uses network infrastructure
efficiently by requiring the IED to send a packet only once, even if it needs to be delivered to a
large number of receivers.

If there are more than one UDP client group defined as multicast, the user shall set different
multicast IP addresses for each UDP group.

The PMU clients receiving the UDP frames can also connect to the IED to request (command
frame) config frame 1, config frame 2, config frame 3, or header frame, and to disable/enable
real time data. This can be done by connecting to the TCP port selected in
TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] for each UDP group. This connection is done using TCP. The IED allows
4 concurrent client connections for every TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port (for each UDP client
group[x]).

If the client tries to connect on TCPportUDPdataCtrl[x] port using a PMU-ID other than what is
configured for that PMUREPORT instance (PMUReportUDP[x]), then that client is immediately
disconnected and the UDPCtrlCfgErrCnt is incremented in PMU Diagnostics on LHMI at Main
menu/Diagnostics/Communication/PMU diagnostics/PMUSTATUS:1

Even if the parameter SendDataUDP[x] is set to Off it is still possible for the clients to connect
on the TCP port and request the configuration frames.

6.2 Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118

PMUREPORT GUID-0C45D2FA-1B95-4FCA-B23B-A28C2770B817 v1

6.2.1 Identification
GUID-0090956B-48F1-4E8B-9A40-90044C71DF20 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and PMUREPORT - -
C37.118

6.2.2 Application GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v4

The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor calculations into an IEEE C37.118
and/or IEEE 1344 synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT block contains parameters
for PMU performance class and reporting rate, the IDCODE and Global PMU ID, format of the

96 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

data streamed through the protocol, the type of reported synchrophasors, as well as settings
for reporting analog and digital signals.

The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block is set in accordance with the IEEE
C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 standards.

There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence, negative sequence or zero sequence in
case of 3-phase phasor and L1, L2 or L3 in case of single phase phasor), PMU's Service class
(Protection or Measurement), Phasor representation (polar or rectangular) and the data types
for phasor data, analog data and frequency data.

Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for
multicast or unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. More information regarding
synchrophasor communication structure and TCP/UDP configuration is available in section
C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration.

Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, which can stream out same or
different data at different reporting rates or different performance (service) classes. There are
2 instances of PMU functionality available in the IED. Each instance of PMU functionality
includes a set of PMU reporting function blocks tagged by the same instance number (1 or 2).
As shown in the following figures, each set of PMU reporting function blocks includes
PMUREPORT, PHASORREPORT1-4, ANALOGREPORT1-3, and BINARYREPORT1-3 function blocks.
In general, each instance of PMU functionality has 32 configurable phasor channels
(PHASORREPORT1–4 blocks), 24 analog channels (ANALOGREPORT1-3 blocks), and 28 digital
channels (24 digital-report channels in BINARYREPORT1-3 and 4 trigger-report channels in
PMUREPORT function block). Special rules shall be taken into account in PCM600 for
Application Configuration and Parameter Settings of multiple PMUREPORT blocks. These rules
are explained in the the Application Manual in section PMU Report Function Blocks Connection
Rules.

Figure 33 shows both instances of the PMUREPORT function block. As seen, each PMUREPORT
instance has 4 predefined binary input signals corresponding to the Bits 03-00: Trigger Reason
defined in STAT field of the Data frame in IEEE C37.118.2 standard. These are predefined inputs
for Frequency Trigger, Rate of Change of Frequency trigger, Magnitude High and Magnitude
Low triggers.

IEC140000118-2-en.vsd
IEC140000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 33: Multiple instances of PMUREPORT function block

Figure 34 shows both instances of the PHASORREPORT function blocks. The instance number
is visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are four separate
PHASORREPORT blocks including 32 configurable phasor channels (8 phasor channels in each
PHASORREPORT block). Each phasor channel can be configured as a 3-phase (symmetrical
components positive/negative/zero) or single-phase phasor (L1/L2/L3).

Line distance protection REL670 97

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000119-2-en.vsd
IEC140000119 V2 EN-US

Figure 34: Multiple instances of PHASORREPORT blocks

Figure 35 shows both instances of ANALOGREPORT function blocks. The instance number is
visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are three separate
ANALOGREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Analog signals (8 Analog signals in each
ANALOGREPORT block). These can include for example transfer of active and reactive power or
reporting the milliampere input signals to the PDC clients as defined in IEEE C37.118 data
frame format.

IEC140000120-2-en.vsd
IEC140000120 V2 EN-US

Figure 35: Multiple instances of ANALOGREPORT blocks

Figure 36 shows both instances of BINARYREPORT function blocks. The instance number is
visible in the bottom of each function block. For each instance, there are three separate
BINARYREPORT blocks capable of reporting up to 24 Binary signals (8 Binary signals in each
BINARYREPORT block). These binary signals can be for example dis-connector or breaker
position indications or internal/external protection alarm signals.

98 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000121-2-en.vsd
IEC140000121 V2 EN-US

Figure 36: Multiple instances of BINARYREPORT blocks

6.2.3 Operation principle GUID-EB2B9096-2F9D-4264-B2D2-8D9DC65697E8 v3

The Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) features three main functional principles:

• To measure the power system related AC quantities (voltage, current) and to calculate the
phasor representation of these quantities.
• To synchronize the calculated phasors with the UTC by time-tagging, in order to make
synchrophasors (time is reference).
• To publish all phasor-related data by means of TCP/IP or UDP/IP, following the standard
IEEE C37.118 protocol.

The C37.118 standard imposes requirements on the devices and describes the communication
message structure and data. The PMU complies with all the standard requirements with a
specific attention to the Total Vector Error (TVE) requirement. The TVE is calculated using the
following equation:

2
( X r ( n ) - X r )2 + ( X i ( n ) - X i )
TVE =
X r2 + X i2
GUID-80D9B1EA-A770-4F50-9530-61644B4DEBBE V1 EN-US (Equation 11)

where,

Xr(n) and Xi(n) are the measured values

Xr and Xi are the theoretical values

In order to comply with TVE requirements, special calibration is done in the factory on the
analog input channels of the PMU, resulting in increased accuracy of the measurements. The
IEEE C37.118 standard also imposes a variety of steady state and dynamic requirements which
are fulfilled in the IED with the help of high accuracy measurements and advanced filtering
techniques.

Figure 37 shows an overview of the PMU functionality and operation. In this figure, only one
instance of PMUREPORT (PMUREPORT1) is shown. Note that connection of different signals to
the PMUREPORT, in this figure, is only an example and the actual connections and reported
signals on the IEEEC37.118/1344 can be defined by the user.

Line distance protection REL670 99

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

U/I samples

PMUREPORT1

MU PHASOR1
PHASOR2 8 TCP
U IEEEC37.118 / 1344
TRM SMAI messages NUM
I
U 6 UDC
TRM PHASOR32
I

ANALOG1
I/P MIM SMMI ANALOG2

MEAS. ANALOG24

BINARY1
BINARY2
BIM

OR
BINARY24
PROTECTION

GPS / OP
IRIG-B FREQTRIG
UP
DFDTTRIG
OC
PPS time data MAGHIGHTRIG
MAGLOWTRIG
UV

IEC140000146-1-en.vsd

IEC140000146 V2 EN-US

Figure 37: Overview of reporting functionality (PMUREPORT)

The TRM modules are individually AC-calibrated in the factory. The calibration data is stored in
the prepared area of the TRM EEProm. The pre-processor block is extended with calibration
compensation and a new angle reference method based on timestamps. The AI3P output of
the preprocessor block is used to provide the required information for each respective
PMUREPORT phasor channel. More information about preprocessor block is available in the
section Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI.

6.2.3.1 Frequency reporting GUID-4F3BA7C7-8C9B-4266-9F72-AFB139E9DC21 v2

By using patented algorithm the IED can track the power system frequency in quite wide range
from 9 Hz to 95 Hz. In order to do that, the three-phase voltage signal shall be connected to
the IED. Then IED can adapt its filtering algorithm in order to properly measure phasors of all
current and voltage signals connected to the IED. This feature is essential for proper operation
of the PMUREPORT function or for protection during generator start-up and shut-down
procedure.

This adaptive filtering is ensured by proper configuration and settings of all relevant pre-
processing blocks, see Signal matrix for analog inputs in the Application manual. Note that in
all preconfigured IEDs such configuration and settings are already made and the three-phase
voltage are used as master for frequency tracking. With such settings the IED will be able to
properly estimate the magnitude and the phase angle of measured current and voltage
phasors in this wide frequency range.

One of the important functions of a PMU is reporting a very accurate system frequency to the
PDC client. In the IED, each of the PMUREPORT instances is able to report an accurate
frequency. Each voltage-connected preprocessor block (SMAI block) delivers the frequency
data, derived from the analog input AC voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor

100 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

channel. Every phasor channel has a user-settable parameter (PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used

as a source of frequency data for reporting to the PDC client. It is very important to set this
parameter to On for the voltage-connected phasor channels. There is an automatic frequency
source selection logic to ensure an uninterrupted reporting of the system frequency to the
PDC client. In this frequency source selection logic, the following general rules are applied:

• Only the voltage phasor channels are used

• The phasor channel with a lower channel number is prioritized to the one with a higher
channel number

As a result, the first voltage phasor is always the one delivering the system frequency to the
PDC client and if, by any reason, this voltage gets disconnected then the next available voltage
phasor is automatically used as the frequency source and so on. If the first voltage phasor
comes back, since it has a higher priority compare to the currently selected phasor channel,
after 500 ms it will be automatically selected again as the frequency source. There is also an
output available on the component which shows if the reference frequency is good, error or
reference channel unavailable.

It is possible to monitor the status of the frequency reference channel (frequency source) for
the respective PMUREPORT instance on Local HMI under Test/Function status/
Communication/Station Communication/PMU Report/PMUREPORT:1/Outputs, where the
FREQREFCHSEL output shows the selected channel as the reference for frequency and
FREQREFCHERR output states if the reference frequency is good, or if there is an error or if the
reference channel is unavailable. For more information refer to the table PMUREPORT
monitored data.
PID-6244-MONITOREDDATA v2

Table 15: PMUREPORT Monitored data

Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description
TIMESTAT BOOLEAN 1=Ready - Time synchronization status
0=Fail
FREQ REAL - Hz Frequency
FREQGRAD REAL - - Rate of change of frequency
FREQREFCHSEL INTEGER - - Frequency reference channel number
selected
FREQREFCHERR BOOLEAN 0=Freq ref not - Frequency reference channel error
available
1=Freq ref error
2=Freq ref
available
FREQTRIG BOOLEAN - - Frequency trigger
DFDTTRIG BOOLEAN - - Rate of change of frequency trigger
MAGHIGHTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude high trigger
MAGLOWTRIG BOOLEAN - - Magnitude low trigger

6.2.3.2 Reporting filters GUID-D39153B5-81CE-4C1F-A816-C7A4C3407048 v2

The PMUREPORT function block implements the reporting filters designed to avoid aliasing as
the reporting frequency is lower than the sample/calculation frequency. This means, the
synchrophasor and frequency data which are included in the C37.118 synchrophasor streaming
data are filtered in order to suppress aliasing effects, as the rate of the C37.118 data is slower
than the data rate for internal processing. For this purpose, there is an anti-aliasing filter
designed for each reporting rate. The correct anti-aliasing filter will be automatically selected
based on the reporting rate and the performance class (P/M) settings. The filters are designed
to attenuate all aliasing frequencies to at least -40 dB (a gain of 0.01) at M class.

Line distance protection REL670 101

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

The synchrophasor measurement is adaptive as it follows the fundamental

frequency over a wide range despite the reporting rate.

For example, when the synchrophasor measurement follows the fundamental frequency
beyond the fixed Nyquist limits in C37.118 standard, the anti-aliasing filter stopband moves
with the measured fundamental frequency. This has to be considered in connection with
C37.118, where the passband is defined relative to a fixed nominal frequency as shown in the
equation 12.

Fs
f0 ±
2
IECEQUATION2418 V1 EN-US (Equation 12)
where,

f0 is the nominal frequency

Fs is the reporting rate

6.2.3.3 Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels GUID-0DDAF6A9-8643-4FDD-97CF-9E35EF40AF7E v2

The internal calculation of analog values in the IED is based on 32 bit floating point. Therefore,
if the user selects to report the analog data (AnalogDataType) as Integer, there will be a down-
conversion of a 32 bit floating value to a new 16 bit integer value. In such a case, in order to
optimize the resolution of the reported analog data, the user-defined analog scaling is
implemented in the IED.

The analog scaling in the IED is automatically calculated by use of the user-defined parameters
AnalogXRange for the respective analog channel X. The analog data value on the input X will
have a range between -AnalogXRange and +AnalogXRange. The resulting scale factor will be
applied to the reported analog data where applicable.

If the AnalogDataType is selected as Float, then these settings are ignored.

The analog scaling in the IED is calculated using the equation:

AnalogXRange ´ 2
S calefactor =
65535.0
offset = 0.0
65535.0 = 16 bit integer range
IECEQUATION2443 V1 EN-US

According to the IEEE C37.118.2 standard, the scale factors (conversion factor) for analog
channels are defined in configuration frame 2 (CFG-2) and configuration frame 3 (CFG-3)
frames as follows:

• CFG-2 frame: The field ANUNIT (4 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as a signed 24 bit
word for user defined scaling. Since it is a 24 bit integer, in order to support the floating
point scale factor, the scale factor itself is multiplied in 10, so that a minimum of 0.1 scale
factor can be sent over the CFG-2 frame. The resulting scale factor is rounded to the
nearest decimal value. The clients receiving the Analog scale factor over CFG-2 should
divide the received scale factor by 10 and then apply it to the corresponding analog data
value.
• CFG-3 frame: The field ANSCALE (8 bytes) specifies the conversion factor as X’ = M * X + B
where; M is magnitude scaling in 32 bit floating point (first 4 bytes) and B is the offset in
32 bit floating point (last 4 bytes).

102 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

The server uses CFG-3 scale factor to scale the analog data values. As a result, the clients which
use scale factors in CFG-3 in order to recalculate analog values, will get a better resolution than
using the scale factors in CFG-2.

The following examples show how the scale factor is calculated.

Example 1:

AnalogXRange = 3277.0
IECEQUATION2446 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(3277.0 ´ 2.0 )
sc alefac tor = = 0.1 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2447 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.1 on configuration frame 3.
The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.1 to -3276.8 and +0.1 to
+3276.7.

Example 2:

AnalogXRange = 4915.5
IECEQUATION2448 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(4915.5 ´ 2.0 )
s c alefac tor = = 0.15 a nd offse t = 0.0
65535.0
IECEQUATION2449 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 1 on configuration frame 2, and 0.15 on configuration frame 3.
The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is -0.15 to -4915.5 and +0.15 to
+4915.5.

Example 3:

Analo gXRange = 10000000000

IECEQUATION2450 V1 EN-US

The scale factor is calculated as follows:

(10000000000 ´ 2.0)
sc alefac tor = = 305180.43 and offse t = 0.0
65535.5
IECEQUATION2451 V1 EN-US

The scale factor will be sent as 3051804 on configuration frame 2, and 305180.43 on
configuration frame 3. The range of analog values that can be transmitted in this case is
-305181 to -10000000000 and +305181 to +10000000000.

6.2.3.4 PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600 Application

Configuration Tool (ACT) GUID-66667179-F3E1-455B-8B99-6D73F37E949B v3

There are 3 important general rules which have to be considered in PCM600 ACT for the
connection of preprocessor blocks (SMAI) and 3PHSUM blocks to PHASORREPORT blocks:

Rule 1:

Line distance protection REL670 103

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

Only SMAI or 3PHSUM blocks shall be connected to PMU PHASORREPORT blocks and they shall
have the same cycle time, 0.9 ms.

Figure 38 shows an example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where both function blocks are working on 0.9 ms cycle time.

IEC140000124-2-en.vsd
IEC140000124 V2 EN-US

Figure 38: An example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Figure 39 shows an example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where the SMAI block is working on 3 ms while PHASORREPORT block is working on 0.9 ms
cycle time.

IEC140000125-2-en.vsd
IEC140000125 V2 EN-US

Figure 39: An example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Violation of rule 1 results in PMU applications not running at all. The reason is the inconsistent
cycle time. For example, in Figure 39, the SMAI block is updating its output every 3 ms while
the PHASORREPORT block is expecting input every 0.9 ms. The PHASORREPORT filtering
window is designed to receive updated input every 0.9 ms and therefore the application will
fail.

Rule 2:

The same SMAI or 3PHSUM block can be connected to more than one PHASORREPORT block
only if all the connected PHASORREPORT blocks have similar instance number or only if all the
connected PHASORREPORT blocks have similar settings for SvcClass and ReportRate. Figure
40 shows the settings for PMUREPORT function block demonstrated by PCM600 Parameter
Setting Tool (PST).

104 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000126-2-en.vsd
IEC140000126 V2 EN-US

Figure 40: PMUREPORT settings in PCM600 PST

Figure 41 shows an example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where two different SMAI blocks are connected to different PHASORREPORT blocks with
different instance numbers. In this example, as the PHASORREPORT blocks have different
instance numbers and different settings for SvcClass and ReportRate, a separate SMAI block is
used for each PHASORREPORT block.

IEC140000127-2-en.vsd
IEC140000127 V2 EN-US

Figure 41: An example of correct connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Figure 42 shows an example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
where the same SMAI block is connected to different PHASORREPORT blocks with different
instance numbers. Such connection will be only correct if both connected PHASORREPORT
blocks have similar settings for SvcClass and ReportRate. If settings for PMUREPORT instances
differ for SvcClass or ReportRate, then PHASOR1 connection in PHASORREPORT1 instance 2
will not be compliant with IEEE C37.118 standard. The reason is that the filtering in SMAI/
3PHSUM block is adapted according to the performance class (SvcClass) and reporting rate of
the connected instance of PHASORREPORT function block. In this example, SMAI1 will adapt its
filtering according to PHASORREPORT instance 1 (because of higher priority) and therefore
PHASORREPORT instance 2 will receive data which does not match its performance class and
report rate.

Line distance protection REL670 105

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000128-2-en.vsd
IEC140000128 V2 EN-US

Figure 42: An example of wrong connection of SMAI and PHASORREPORT blocks in ACT
Rule 3:

This rule is only related to the connection of 3PHSUM block to the PHASORREPORT block. If
3PHSUM block is configured to use external DFT reference (from SMAI reference block), it shall
only be connected to the same PHASORREPORT block instance as the one the SMAI reference
block is connected to. In other words, both the SMAI reference block and 3PHSUM block
(3PHSUM block with external DFT reference) shall be connected to the same instance of
PHASORREPORT block (PHASOR1-32 of Instance number 1 or 2).

Figure 43 shows an example of correct connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in

ACT where SMAI3 is configured as the reference block for DFT reference external out
(DFTRefExtOut) and 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference (from SMAI3). Figures 44 and 45
show the corresponding setting parameters.

IEC140000129-2-en.vsd
IEC140000129 V2 EN-US

Figure 43: An example of correct connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in

ACT

106 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000130-1-en.vsd
IEC140000130 V1 EN-US

Figure 44: SMAI1 setting parameters example-showing that SMAI3 is selected as the DFT
reference (DFTRefGrp3)

IEC140000131-1-en
IEC140000131 V1 EN-US

Figure 45: 3PHSUM setting parameters example-showing that 3PHSUM is using the
External DFT reference coming indirectly from SMAI3
Figure 46 shows an example of wrong connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in
ACT where SMAI3 is configured as the reference block for DFT reference external out
(DFTRefExtOut) and 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference (from SMAI3).

Line distance protection REL670 107

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

IEC140000132-2-en.vsd
IEC140000132 V2 EN-US

Figure 46: An example of wrong connection of 3PHSUM and PHASORREPORT blocks in

ACT
If settings for PMUREPORT instances (PHASORREPORT1 instances 1 and 2 above) differ for
SvcClass or ReportRate, then the synchrophasor reported by PHASOR2 connection from
PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 will not be compliant with IEEE C37.118 standard. The reason is as
in the rule 2, the filtering in SMAI/3PHSUM block is adapted according to the performance
class (SvcClass) and reporting rate of the connected instance of PHASORREPORT function
block. On the other hand, when 3PHSUM uses external DFT reference, it also adapts its filtering
according to the SMAI reference block. Therefore, in order to avoid two different filtering
applied to the 3PHSUM block, both SMAI reference block and 3PHSUM shall be connected to
the same PHASORREPORT instance. In this example (Figure 46), SMAI3 adapts its filtering
according to PHASORREPORT1 instance 2 (due to connection) and 3PHSUM is adapting its
filtering according to PHASORREPORT1 instance 1. On the other hand, since 3PHSUM is set to
receive external DFT reference from SMAI3, therefore If settings for PHASORREPORT1
instances 1 and 2 above differ for SvcClass or ReportRate, then 3PHSUM block will be affected
by two different filtering at the same time which is not possible. For example in Figure 46,
PHASOR2 from PHASORREPORT1 instance 1 may not be fully compliant with IEEE C37.118
standard.

Note: If the SMAI reference block is not connected to any PHASORREPORT block, then 3PHSUM
block can be freely connected to any PHASORREPORT block regardless of its DFT reference
setting.

Note: If more 3PHSUM blocks need to be used, all 3PHSUM blocks (using external DFT ref) have
to be connected to the same instance of PHASORREPORT blocks (PHASOR1-32 of Instance
number 1 or 2).

Note: If settings SvcClass and ReportRate are the same for different instances of
PHASORREPORT blocks, then 3PHSUM block can be freely connected to any of them regardless
of 3PHSUM block DFT reference setting or the reference SMAI block connection.

Note: Violation of rules 2 or 3 results in non-compliancy with IEEE C37.118 standard for some of
the synchrophasors. In case of rule 2 violation, the non-compliancy only applies to
synchrophasors from instance 2 and the synchrophasors from instance 1 will be still compliant.
The non-compliancy with the standard may be quite obvious as in case of rule 2 violation with
different SvcClass settings. This produces big angle error. On the other hand, it may be
difficult to detect the non-compliancy with the standard if rule 2 is violated with different

108 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

ReportRates, or if rule 3 is violated. In such cases, the synchrophasors may only fail to comply
(with small error) in some particular test case(s).

For more information regarding 3PHSUM block application, please refer to the Application
Manual under section Basic IED functions.

6.2.4 Setting guidelines GUID-83969957-DABF-4B9B-95C7-B9F0AF6E647A v2

Based on the functionality and appearance in PCM600, the PMU reporting functionality is
categorized into 4 different categories (function block) as follows:

1. PMUREPORT
2. PHASORREPORT
3. ANALOGREPORT
4. BINARYREPORT

Each category has its corresponding parameter settings except for BINARYREPORT function
block which does not have any specific parameters and settings.

1. PMUREPORT is the main function block which controls the operation of other PMU
reporting function blocks. Each instance of PMUREPORT function block has the following
parameters:
• Operation: Enables/Disables the operation of the corresponding instance of PMU
reporting functionality by choosing On/Off setting.
• SvcClass: It refers to the 1-byte SVC_CLASS field of the configuration frame 3
(CFG-3) organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user can
select the performance class (service class) used for synchrophasor data
measurement according to IEEE C37.118.1 standard. The options are P class or M
class.
Note: There are 2 PMUREPORT instances available (PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:
2) corresponding to 2 independent data streams. The user can set different or
identical service class for each data stream. In case of different service classes,
special rules shall be considered in PCM600 ACT for the connection of preprocessor
blocks (SMAI) and 3PHSUM blocks to PHASORREPORT blocks. More details are
available under section PMU Report Function Blocks Connection Rules in PCM600
Application Configuration Tool (ACT).
• Global_PMU_ID: It refers to the 16-byte G_PMU_ID field of the configuration frame 3
(CFG-3) organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. It is a 16-character
(128 bits) user-assigned value which can be sent with the configuration 3 message. It
allows uniquely identifying PMUs in a system that has more than 65535 PMUs. The
coding for the 16 bytes is left to the user for assignment.
• PMUdataStreamIDCODE: It refers to the 2-byte IDCODE field of the configuration
frame and data frame organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. It is a
user assigned ID number (1-65534) for each data stream sent out from the PMU. This
is especially important when having multiple data streams (multiple PMU
functionality).
Note: The data stream IDCODE is a unique code for each and every data stream in
one physical PMU device. In the IED, there are 2 PMUREPORT instances available
(PMUREPORT:1 and PMUREPORT:2) corresponding to 2 independent data streams.
The user must set different IDCODEs for each instance.
• PhasorFormat: It refers to the Bit 0 of the FORMAT field of the configuration frames
1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the user can
select the format of the calculated synchrophasors. The options are Rectangular or
Polar format. Rectangular format represents the synchrophasor as real and
imaginary values, real value first (a + bj) while the Polar format represents the
synchrophasor as magnitude and angle, magnitude first (A ejα).
• PhasorDataType: It refers to the Bit 1 of the FORMAT field of the configuration
frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the
user can select the data type of the calculated synchrophasors. The options are

Line distance protection REL670 109

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

Integer or Float data. The synchrophasor data are sent via the PHASORS field of data
frame organization of IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Depends on the phasor data
type, the size of PHASORS field can be 4 (Integer) or 8 (Float) bytes per IEEE
C37.118.2 message.
Integer data type for the phasors corresponds to a 16-bit integer value. It represents
a 16-bit signed integer, range –32 767 to +32 767, in rectangular format, and in polar
format it represents a 16-bit unsigned integer range 0 to 65535 for the magnitude
and a 16-bit signed integer, in radians × 104, range –31 416 to +31 416 for the angle.
Float data type for the phasors corresponds to 32-bit values in IEEE floating-point
format. In rectangular format, it represents real and imaginary, in engineering units
(real value first) and in polar format it represents magnitude and angle, in
engineering units (magnitude first) and angle in radians, range –π to + π.
• AnalogDataType: It refers to the Bit 2 of the FORMAT field of the configuration
frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the
user can select the type of the analog data which are reported along with the
synchrophasor data over IEEE C37.118.2 message. The options are Integer or Float
data corresponding to the 16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating-point values,
respectively. The analog data could be sampled data such as control signal or
transducer values, or it can be active and reactive power measurement values from
each feeder in the substation. Values and ranges are separately defined by user via
the parameter settings related to the ANALOGREPORT function block. The analog
data are sent via the ANALOG field of data frame organization of IEEE C37.118.2
message format. Depends on the analog data type, the size of ANALOG field can be
2 (Integer) or 4 (Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2 message. More information is
available under the section Scaling Factors for ANALOGREPORT channels.
• FrequencyDataType: It refers to the Bit 3 of the FORMAT field of the configuration
frames 1, 2 and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. Here the
user can select the type of the frequency-deviation and rate-of-change-of-frequency
data (FREQ/DFREQ) which can be reported along with the synchrophasor data over
IEEE C37.118.2 message. The options are Integer or Float data corresponding to the
16-bit integer or 32-bit IEEE floating-point value, respectively.
The frequency-deviation and rate-of-change-of-frequency data are sent via the FREQ
and DFREQ fields of data frame organization of IEEE C37.118.2 message format.
Depends on the selected data type, the size of each field can be 2 (Integer) or 4
(Float) bytes per IEEE C37.118.2 message.
The data sent via the FREQ field is frequency deviation from nominal frequency (50
Hz or 60 Hz), in mHz. It is ranged from –32.767 to +32.767 Hz. Integer data type for
frequency-deviation data represents 16-bit signed integers, range –32 767 to +32 767
32, and Float data type represents actual frequency value in IEEE floating-point
format.
The data sent via the DFREQ field is Rate Of Change Of Frequency (ROCOF), in Hertz
per second times 100. It is ranged from –327.67 to +327.67 Hz per second. Integer
data type for ROCOF data represents 16-bit signed integers, range –32 767 to +32
767 32, and Float data type represents actual value in IEEE floating-point format.
• SendFreqInfo: Enables/Disables sending of the frequency-deviation and Rate Of
Change Of Frequency (ROCOF) data by choosing On/Off setting.
• ReportRate: It refers to the 2-byte DATA_RATE field of the configuration frames 1, 2
and 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message format. The DATA_RATE field
is identifying the Rate of phasor data transmissions by a 2-byte integer word (–32
767 to +32 767). Here the user can select the synchrophasor data reporting rate from
the PMU based on the number of frames per second.
In general, the IED has 5 different reporting rates (10, 25, 50, 100, 200 fr/s) on the 50
Hz system frequency, and has 8 different reporting rates (10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60, 120,
240 fr/s) on the 60 Hz system frequency. The options are as follows:
• 10/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 12/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 15/10 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 20/25 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 30/25 fr/s (60/50Hz)

110 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 6
Wide area measurement system

• 60/50 fr/s (60/50Hz)

• 120/100 fr/s (60/50Hz)
• 240/200 fr/s (60/50Hz)

The first number is identifying the reporting rate in a 60Hz system, and the second
number is the reporting rate in a 50Hz system. For example, if the selected setting is
15/10 fr/s (60/50Hz), this means that the synchrophasor data reporting rate would
be 15 frames per second if the system frequency is 60Hz. Likewise, if the system
frequency is 50Hz, the selected rate is equal to 10 frames per second.
• RptTimetag: It refers to the method of time-tagging used in the IED which is related
to the phasor estimation and filtering technique. The options are FirstSample,
MiddleSample and LastSample. The time-stamp of the PMU output represents the
phasor equivalent, frequency, and ROCOF of the power system signal at the time it
is applied to the PMU input. All of these estimates must be compensated for PMU
processing delays including analog input filtering, sampling, and estimation group
delay. If the sample time tags are compensated for all input delays, the time tag of
the sample in the middle of the estimation window can be used for the phasor
estimation (output) time tag as long as the filtering coefficients are symmetrical
across the filtering window.
Note: It is recommended to set this parameter on MiddleSample.
2. PHASORREPORT is the function block responsible for reporting the synchrophasors. Each
instance of PMUREPORT function block has 32 phasor channels with the following setting
parameters; where X is a number from 1 to 32:
• PhasorXReport: Enables/Disables the phasor channel X (reporting of PhasorX) by
choosing On/Off setting.
• PhasorX: The group selector for PhasorX. Here, the user can select the type of
reported synchrophasor from the phasor channel X as either a 3-phase symmetrical
component or a single-phase phasor. The options are as follows:
• A
• B
• C
• NEGSEQ
• POSSEQ
• ZEROSEQ
• PhasorXUseFreqSrc: Enables/Disables the contribution of Phasor channel X in
automatic frequency source selection by choosing On/Off setting. Each voltage-
connected preprocessor block delivers the frequency data, derived from the analog
input AC voltage values, to the respective voltage phasor channel. Every phasor
channel has a user-settable parameter (PhasorXUseFreqSrc) to be used as a source
of frequency data for reporting to the PDC client. It is very important to set this
parameter to On for the voltage-connected phasor channels. There is an automatic
frequency source selection logic to ensure an uninterrupted reporting of the system
frequency to the PDC client. More information is available under the section
Frequency reporting.
3. ANALOGREPORT is the function block responsible for reporting the analog values. Each
instance of ANALOGREPORT function block has 24 analog channels with the following
setting parameters; where X is a number from 1 to 24:
• AnalogXRange: This parameter defines a range between -AnalogXRange and
+AnalogXRange for AnalogX value. The range will be used by the IED to apply a
proper scale factor to the AnalogX values when Integer format is used. It refers to
the 4-byte ANUNIT field of the configuration frames 1, 2 organization and the 8-byte
ANSCALE field of the configuration frame 3 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2
message format. The AnalogXRange value can be a number between 3277.0 and
10000000000. This setting is only important if the AnalogDataType setting is
selected as Integer. More information is available under the section Scaling Factors
for ANALOGREPORT channels.
• AnalogXUnitType: Unit type for analog signal X. It refers to the 4-byte ANUNIT field
of the configuration frames 1, 2 organization defined in IEEE C37.118.2 message

Line distance protection REL670 111

Application manual
Section 6 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Wide area measurement system

format. The options are Single point-on-wave, RMS of analog input and Peak of
analog input.

112 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

Section 7 Differential protection

7.1 High impedance differential protection, single phase

HZPDIF IP14239-1 v4

7.1.1 Identification M14813-1 v4

IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

Function description
identification identification device number

High impedance differential

HZPDIF Id 87
protection, single phase

SYMBOL-CC V2 EN-US

7.1.2 Application IP14944-1 v3

SEMOD54734-4 v8
The 1Ph High impedance differential protection function HZPDIF can be used as:

• Generator differential protection

• Reactor differential protection
• Busbar differential protection
• Autotransformer differential protection (for common and serial windings only)
• T-feeder differential protection
• Capacitor differential protection
• Restricted earth fault protection for transformer, generator and shunt reactor windings
• Restricted earth fault protection

The application is dependent on the primary system arrangements and location of breakers,
available CT cores and so on.

Line distance protection REL670 113

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

Id 3·Id

3·Id

3·Id

3·Id

3·Id
G

IEC05000163-4-en.vsd
IEC05000163 V4 EN-US

Figure 47: Different applications of a 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
function

7.1.2.1 The basics of the high impedance principle SEMOD54734-153 v9

The high impedance differential protection principle has been used for many years and is well
documented in literature publicly available. Its operating principle provides very good
sensitivity and high speed operation. One main benefit offered by the principle is an absolute
stability (that is, no operation) for external faults even in the presence of heavy CT saturation.
The principle is based on the CT secondary current circulating between involved current
transformers and not through the IED due to high impedance in the measuring branch. This
stabilizing resistance is in the range of hundreds of ohms and sometimes above one kilo Ohm.
When an internal fault occurs the current cannot circulate and is forced through the measuring
branch causing relay operation.

It should be remembered that the whole scheme, its built-in components and wiring must be
adequately maintained throughout the lifetime of the equipment in order to be able to

114 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

withstand the high voltage peaks (that is, pulses) which may appear during an internal fault.
Otherwise any flash-over in CT secondary circuits or any other part of the scheme may prevent
correct operation of the high impedance differential relay for an actual internal fault.

Id Metrosil

IEC05000164-2-en.vsd
IEC05000164 V3 EN-US

Figure 48: Example for the high impedance restricted earth fault protection application
For a through fault one current transformer might saturate when the other CTs still will feed
current. For such a case a voltage will be developed across the measuring branch. The
calculations are made with the worst situations in mind and a minimum operating voltage UR
is calculated according to equation 13

UR > IF max × ( Rct + Rl )

EQUATION1531 V1 EN-US (Equation 13)

where:
IFmax is the maximum through fault current at the secondary side of the CT
Rct is the current transformer secondary winding resistance and
Rl is the maximum loop resistance of the circuit at any CT.

The minimum operating voltage has to be calculated (all loops) and the IED function is set
higher than the highest achieved value (setting U>Trip). As the loop resistance is the value to

Line distance protection REL670 115

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

the connection point from each CT, it is advisable to do all the CT core summations in the
switchgear to have shortest possible loops. This will give lower setting values and also a better
balanced scheme. The connection in to the control room can then be from the most central
bay.

For an internal fault, all involved CTs will try to feed current through the measuring branch.
Depending on the size of current transformer, relatively high voltages will be developed across
the series resistor. Note that very high peak voltages can appear. To prevent the risk of
flashover in the circuit, a voltage limiter must be included. The voltage limiter is a voltage
dependent resistor (Metrosil).

The external unit with stabilizing resistor has a value of either 6800 ohms or 1800 ohms
(depending on ordered alternative) with a sliding link to allow adjustment to the required
value. Select a suitable value of the resistor based on the UR voltage calculated. A higher
resistance value will give a higher sensitivity and a lower value a lower sensitivity of the relay.

The function has a recommended operating current range 40 mA to 1.0A for 1 A inputs and 200
mA to 5A for 5A inputs. This, together with the selected and set value, is used to calculate the
required value of current at the set U>Trip and SeriesResitor values.

The CT inputs used for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF
function, shall be set to have ratio 1:1. So the parameters CTsecx and CTprimx of
the relevant channel x of TRM and/or AIM shall be set equal to 1 A by PST in
PCM600; The parameter CTStarPointx may be set to ToObject.

The tables 16, 17 below show, the operating currents for different settings of operating
voltages and selected resistances. Adjust as required based on tables 16, 17 or to values in
between as required for the application.

Minimum ohms can be difficult to adjust due to the small value compared to
the total value.

Normally the voltage can be increased to higher values than the calculated minimum U>Trip
with a minor change of total operating values as long as this is done by adjusting the resistor
to a higher value. Check the sensitivity calculation below for reference.

Table 16: 1 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 40 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R current level resistor R current level
U>Trip ohms 1A ohms 1A
20 V 500 0.040 A -- --
40 V 1000 0.040 A -- --
60 V 1500 0.040 A 600 0.100 A
80 V 2000 0.040 A 800 0.100 A
100 V 2500 0.040 A 1000 0.100 A
150 V 3750 0.040 A 1500 0.100 A
200 V 5000 0.040 A 2000 0.100 A

116 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

Table 17: 5 A channels: input with minimum operating down to 100 mA

Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating Stabilizing Operating
voltage resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level resistor R1 current level
U>Trip ohms 5A ohms 5A ohms 5A
20 V 200 0.100 A 100 0.200 A -- --
40 V 400 0.100 A 200 0.200 A 100 0.400
60 V 600 0.100 A 300 0.200 A 150 0.400 A
80 V 800 0.100 A 400 0.200 A 200 0.400 A
100 V 1000 0.100 A 500 0.200 A 250 0.400 A
150 V 1500 0.100 A 750 0.200 A 375 0.400 A
200 V 2000 0.100 A 1000 0.200 A 500 0.400 A

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least 2 ˣ U>Trip to have sufficient
operating margin. This must be checked after calculation of U>Trip.

When the R value has been selected and the U>Trip value has been set, the sensitivity of the
scheme IP can be calculated. The IED sensitivity is decided by the total current in the circuit
according to equation 14.

IP = n × ( IR + Ires + å lmag )
EQUATION1747 V1 EN-US (Equation 14)

where:
n is the CT ratio
IP primary current at IED pickup,
IR IED pickup current (U>Trip/SeriesResistor)
Ires is the current through the voltage limiter and
ΣImag is the sum of the magnetizing currents from all CTs in the circuit (for example, 4 for
restricted earth fault protection, 2 for reactor differential protection, 3-5 for
autotransformer differential protection).

It should be remembered that the vectorial sum of the currents must be used (IEDs, Metrosil
and resistor currents are resistive). The current measurement is insensitive to DC component
in fault current to allow the use of only the AC components of the fault current in the above
calculations.

The voltage dependent resistor (Metrosil) characteristic is shown in Figure 54.

Series resistor thermal capacity SEMOD54734-336 v6

The series resistor is dimensioned for 200 W. Preferable the U>Trip2/SeriesResistor should
always be lower than 200 W to allow continuous activation during testing. If this value is
exceeded, testing should be done with a transient faults.

Line distance protection REL670 117

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

Rl Rl

Rct UR Rct
R
Rres

I>

Protected Object

UR

a) Through load situation

UR

b) Through fault situation

UR

c) Internal faults IEC05000427-2-en.vsd

IEC05000427 V2 EN-US

Figure 49: The high impedance principle for one phase with two current transformer
inputs

118 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

7.1.3 Connection examples for high impedance differential

protection GUID-8C58A73D-7C2E-4BE5-AB87-B4C93FB7D62B v5

WARNING! USE EXTREME CAUTION! Dangerously high voltages might be

present on this equipment, especially on the plate with resistors. De-energize
the primary object protected with this equipment before connecting or
disconnecting wiring or performing any maintenance. The plate with resistors
should be provided with a protective cover, mounted in a separate box or in a
locked cubicle. National law and standards shall be followed.

7.1.3.1 Connections for three-phase high impedance differential protection GUID-C12CCAAF-5AE5-4A9C-AC9C-F56A66FD2C14 v8

Generator, reactor or busbar differential protection is a typical application for three-phase

high impedance differential protection. Typical CT connections for three-phase high
impedance differential protection scheme are shown in figure 50.

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)
7 SMAI2
1 BLOCK G2AI3P
AI01 REVROT G2AI1
CT 1200/1 2 (I) ^GRP2L1 G2AI2

Star/Wye 3 ^GRP2L2 G2AI3

AI02 ^GRP2L3 G2AI4
Connected 4 (I) ^GRP2N G2N

5
AI03
6 (I)
7
AI04
8 (I)
9
1
AI05
0 (I)
1 1
1
1
AI06
2 (I)
Protected Object IED
N
L3 (C)
L2 (B)
L1 (A)

N 4
L3 (C)
L2 (B)

CT 1200/1 L1 (A) 5
Star/Wye
Connected X1 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2

3
1

1
3

3
R4

R5

R6

R1

R2

R3
2 U

2 U

2 U

4
2

L1 L2 L3 X X 6
(A) (B) (C) 3-Ph Plate with Metrosils and Resistors
IEC07000193-5-en.vsdx

IEC07000193 V5 EN-US

Figure 50: CT connections for high impedance differential protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme earthing point

It is important to insure that only one earthing point exist in this scheme.

2 Three-phase plate with setting resistors and metrosils. Protective earth is a separate 4 mm screw
terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for three-phase metrosil set.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for setting resistors.

Line distance protection REL670 119

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

6 Factory-made star point on a three-phase setting resistor set.

The star point connector must be removed for installations with 670 series IEDs.
This star point is required for RADHA schemes only.

7 Connections of three individual phase currents for high impedance scheme to three CT inputs in the
IED.

7.1.3.2 Connections for 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF GUID-D68A237F-610C-4AF0-870F-273117F64D92 v10

Restricted earth fault protection is a typical application for 1Ph High impedance differential
protection HZPDIF. Typical CT connections for the high impedance based protection scheme
are shown in figure 51.

L1 L2 L3
(A) (B) (C)

CT 1500/5 2 AI01 (I)

Star/Wye 3
Connected 4 AI02 (I) SMAI2

BLOCK G2AI3P
5 REVROT G2AI1
6 6 AI03 (I) ^GRP2L1 G2AI2

^GRP2L2 G2AI3
7
8 AI04 (I) ^GRP2L3 G2AI4

^GRP2N G2N

9
10 AI05 (I)
11
Protected Object 12 AI06 (I)

L1 L2 L3
IED
N
(A) (B) (C)

4
1
N
CT 1500/5

X1 4 5 1 2 3

2
3
5
1

1
3
R1

R2
U

4
2

1-Ph Plate with Metrosil and Resistor

=IEC07000194=5=en=Original.vsdx

IEC07000194 V5 EN-US

Figure 51: CT connections for restricted earth fault protection

Pos Description
1 Scheme earthing point

Ensure that only one earthing point exists in this scheme.

2 One-phase plate with stabilizing resistor and metrosil. Protective earth is a separate 4 mm screw
terminal on the plate.
3 Necessary connection for the metrosil.
4 Position of optional test switch for secondary injection into the high impedance differential IED.
5 Necessary connection for stabilizing resistor.
6 How to connect the high impedance restricted earth fault protection scheme to one CT input in IED.

120 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

7.1.4 Setting guidelines IP14945-1 v1

M13076-3 v2
The setting calculations are individual for each application. Refer to the different application
descriptions below.

7.1.4.1 Configuration M13076-5 v4

The configuration is done in the Application Configuration tool.

7.1.4.2 Settings of protection function M13076-10 v6

Operation: The operation of the high impedance differential function can be switched On or
Off.

U>Alarm: Set the alarm level. The sensitivity can roughly be calculated as a certain percentage
of the selected Trip level. A typical setting is 10% of U>Trip This alarm stage can be used for
scheme CT supervision.

tAlarm: Set the time delay for the alarm. A typical setting is 2-3 seconds.

U>Trip: Set the trip level according to the calculations (see examples below for a guidance).
The level is selected with margin to the calculated required voltage to achieve stability. Values
can be within 20V - 400V range dependent on the application.

SeriesResistor: Set the value of the used stabilizing series resistor. Calculate the value
according to the examples for each application. Adjust the resistor as close as possible to the
calculated value. Measure the value achieved and set this value for this parameter.

The value shall always be high impedance. This means for example, for 1A
circuits say bigger than 400 ohms (400 VA) and for 5 A circuits say bigger than
100 ohms (2500 VA). This ensures that the current will circulate and not go
through the differential circuit at through faults.

That the settings of U>Alarm, U>Trip and SeriesResistor must be chosen such
that both U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and U>Trip/SeriesResistor are >4% of
IRated of the used current input. Normally the settings shall also be such that
U>Alarm/SeriesResistor and U>Trip/SeriesResistor both gives a value
<4*IRated of the used current input. If not, the limitation in how long time the
actual current is allowed to persist not to overload the current input must be
considered especially during the secondary testing.

7.1.4.3 T-feeder protection M16850-4 v7

In many busbar arrangements such as one-and a half breaker, ring breaker, mesh corner, there
will be a T-feeder from the current transformer at the breakers up to the current transformers
in the feeder circuit (for example, in the transformer bushings). It is often required to separate
the protection zones that the feeder is protected with one scheme while the T-zone is
protected with a separate differential protection scheme. The 1Ph high impedance differential
HZPDIF function in the IED allows this to be done efficiently, see Figure 52.

Line distance protection REL670 121

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

3·Id

IEC05000165-2-en.vsd
IEC05000165 V2 EN-US

Figure 52: The protection scheme utilizing the high impedance function for the T-feeder
Normally this scheme is set to achieve a sensitivity of around 20 percent of the used CT
primary rating so that a low ohmic value can be used for the series resistor.

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high

impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability,
minimize the secondary fault current, thereby reducing the stability voltage
limit. Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across
the selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps,
owing to auto-transformer action, voltages induced may be much higher than
design limits.

Setting example
Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 2000/1 A
CT Class: 20 VA 5P20
Secondary resistance: 6.2 ohms
Cable loop resistance: <100 m 2.5 mm2 (one way) gives 2 ˣ 0.8 ohm at 75° C
Max fault current: Equal to switchgear rated fault current 40 kA

122 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

Calculation:

EQUATION1207 V2 EN-US (Equation 15)

Select a setting of U>Trip=200 V.

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least twice the set operating voltage
U>Trip.

E 5 P > ( 20 + 6.2 ) × 20 = 524V

EQUATION1208 V1 EN-US (Equation 16)

that is, bigger than 2 ˣU>Trip

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to
use. As this application requires to be so sensitive select SeriesResistor= 2000 ohm, which
gives an IED operating current of 100 mA.

Calculate the primary sensitivity at operating voltage using the following equation.

2000
IP = (100 0° + 20 0° + 3 × 10 −60° ) × 10−3 ≤ approx 275 A
1
EQUATION1209 V2 EN-US (Equation 17)

where
100 mA is the current drawn by the IED circuit and
10 mA is the current drawn by each CT just at pickup
20 mA is current drawn by metrosil at pickup

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve for the current transformer
cores which should be available. The current value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage
dependent resistor current the peak value of voltage 200 ˣ √2 is used. Then the RMS current is
calculated by dividing obtained current value from the metrosil curve with√2. Use the value
from the maximum metrosil curve given in Figure 54

It can clearly be seen that the sensitivity is not so much influenced by the selected voltage level
so a sufficient margin should be used. The selection of the stabilizing resistor and the level of
the magnetizing current (mostly dependent of the number of turns) are the most important
factors.

7.1.4.4 Tertiary reactor protection M16850-118 v5

Reactive power equipment (for example shunt reactors and/or shunt capacitors) can be
connected to the tertiary winding of the power transformers. The 1Ph High impedance
differential protection function HZPDIF can be used to protect the tertiary reactor for phase
faults as well as earth faults if the power system of the tertiary winding is direct or low
impedance earthed.

Line distance protection REL670 123

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

3·Id

IEC05000176-3-en.vsd

IEC05000176 V3 EN-US

Figure 53: Application of the1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function on a reactor

Setting example

It is strongly recommended to use the highest tap of the CT whenever high

impedance protection is used. This helps in utilizing maximum CT capability,
minimize the secondary fault, thereby reducing the stability voltage limit.
Another factor is that during internal faults, the voltage developed across the
selected tap is limited by the non-linear resistor but in the unused taps, owing
to auto-transformer action, voltages much higher than design limits might be
induced.

124 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 7
Differential protection

Basic data:
Current transformer ratio: 100/5 A (Note: Must be the same at all locations)
CT Class: 10 VA 5P20
Secondary resistance: 0.26 ohms
Cable loop resistance: <50 m 2.5mm2 (one way) gives 1 ˣ 0.4 ohm at 75° C
Note! Only one way as the tertiary power system earthing is limiting
the earth-fault current. If high earth-fault current exists use two way
cable length.
Max fault current: The maximum through fault current is limited by the reactor
reactance and the inrush will be the worst for a reactor for example,
800 A.

Calculation:

800
UR > × (0.26 + 0.4) = 26, 4
100 / 5
EQUATION1216 V2 EN-US (Equation 18)

Select a setting of U>Trip=30 V.

The current transformer saturation voltage must be at least, twice the set operating voltage
U>Trip .

 10 
U _ CT _ Saturation >  + 0.26  × 20 × 5 = 66V
 25 
EQUATION1217 V2 EN-US (Equation 19)

that is, greater than 2 ˣ U>Trip.

Check from the table of selected resistances the required series stabilizing resistor value to
use. Since this application requires good sensitivity, select SeriesResistor = 300 ohm, which
gives an IED current of 100 mA.

To calculate the sensitivity at operating voltage, refer to equation 20, which gives an
acceptable value. A little lower sensitivity could be selected by using a lower resistance value.

100
IP = × (100 0° + 5 0° + 2 × 100 −60° ) × 10−3 ≤ approx 5 A
5
EQUATION1218 V2 EN-US (Equation 20)

The magnetizing current is taken from the magnetizing curve of the current transformer cores,
which should be available. The current value at U>Trip is taken. For the voltage dependent
resistor current the peak value of voltage 30 ˣ √2 is used. Then the RMS current is calculated by
dividing obtained current value from the metrosil curve with √2. Use the maximum value from
the metrosil curve given in Figure 54.

7.1.4.5 Alarm level operation M16850-196 v6

The 1Ph High impedance differential protection HZPDIF function has a separate alarm level,
which can be used to give alarm for problems with an involved current transformer circuit. The
setting level is normally selected to be around 10% of the operating voltage U>Trip.

As seen in the setting examples above the sensitivity of HZPDIF function is normally high,
which means that the function will in many cases operate also for short circuits or open

Line distance protection REL670 125

Application manual
Section 7 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Differential protection

current transformer secondary circuits. However the stabilizing resistor can be selected to
achieve sensitivity higher than normal load current and/or separate criteria can be added to
the operation, like a check zone. This can be either another IED, with the same HZPDIF
function, or be a check about the fault condition, which is performed by an earth overcurrent
function or neutral point voltage function.

For such cases where operation is not expected during normal service the alarm output should
be used to activate an external shorting of the differential circuit avoiding continuous high
voltage in the circuit. A time delay of a few seconds is used before the shorting and alarm are
activated. Auxiliary relays with contacts that can withstand high voltage shall be used, like
RXMVB types.

The metrosil operating characteristic is given in the following figure.

IEC05000749 V1 EN-US

Figure 54: Current voltage characteristics for the non-linear resistors, in the range 10-200 V, the
average range of current is: 0.01–10 mA

126 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Section 8 Impedance protection

8.1 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic

for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS,
ZDSRDIR SEMOD168167-1 v3

8.1.1 Identification
SEMOD168165-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance measuring zone, ZMCPDIS 21
quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (zone 1) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Distance measuring zone, ZMCAPDIS 21

quadrilateral characteristic for series
compensated lines (zone 2-5) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Directional impedance quadrilateral, ZDSRDIR 21D

including series compensation
Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN-US

8.1.2 Application SEMOD168236-1 v1

8.1.2.1 Introduction SEMOD168232-4 v2

Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex,
consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different
lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the
fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the
power system.

The distance protection function is designed to meet basic requirements for application on
transmission and sub transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be used
on distribution levels.

8.1.2.2 System earthing SEMOD168232-11 v2

The type of system earthing plays an important roll when designing the protection system. In
the following sections, some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted.

Solid earthed networks SEMOD168232-14 v2

In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any
impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

Line distance protection REL670 127

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 55: Solidly earthed network

The earth fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very
limited influence on the earth fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some
marginal influence on the earth fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The earth fault current at single phase -to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 21:

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 21)

Where:
UL1 is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive
ZN is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance
measuring technique to detect earth-fault. However, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and must, therefore, always be complemented
with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.

Effectively earthed networks SEMOD168232-40 v2

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The
earth-fault factor is defined according to equation 22.

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 22)

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

128 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, as shown in equation 23
and equation 24.

X 0 ≤ 3 ⋅ X1
EQUATION1269 V4 EN-US (Equation 23)

R0 £ X 1
EQUATION1270 V4 EN-US (Equation 24)

The magnitude of the earth fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring element to detect earth-fault. However, in the same way as for solid
earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults
and must, therefore, always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry
out the fault clearance in this case.

8.1.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end SEMOD168232-84 v2

All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault infeed may enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 56, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left side as:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN-US (Equation 25)

If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN-US (Equation 26)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

en05000217.vsd
IEC05000217 V1 EN-US

Figure 56: Influence of fault infeed from remote end

Line distance protection REL670 129

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors to justify
complementary protection to distance protection.

8.1.2.4 Load encroachment SEMOD168232-97 v3

Sometimes the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an
external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The
effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 57. The entrance of the load
impedance inside the characteristic is not allowed and the way to handle this with
conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings that is, to have a security
margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback
that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure 57.
The load encroachment algorithm increases the possibility to detect high fault resistances,
especially for line to earth faults at remote end. For example, for a given setting of the load
angle ARGLd for the load encroachment function, the resistive blinder for the zone
measurement can be expanded according to the right in figure 57 given higher fault resistance
coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both
directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium
long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and
load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function
could preferable be switched off.

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection with
load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS) function.

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance
area in forward ARGLd ARGLd
R
direction R
ARGLd
ARGLd

RLdRv RLdFw

en05000495.vsd
IEC05000495 V1 EN-US

Figure 57: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

8.1.2.5 Long transmission line application SEMOD168232-128 v3

For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for line
to earth-fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy loaded.

130 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection can generally
be described as in table 18, long lines have SIR’s less than 0.5.

Table 18: Definition of long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high
resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated), as shown in figure 58.

Zm

ZL

ARGLd ARGLd
R
ARGLd
ARGLd

RLdRv RLdFw

en05000220.vsd
IEC05000220 V1 EN-US

Figure 58: Characteristic for zone measurement for long line with load encroachment
activated

8.1.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling SEMOD168232-149 v2

General SEMOD168232-151 v2
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage to experience mutual coupling, and
some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to
the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage
inversion that occurs.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is
practice to neglect them.

Line distance protection REL670 131

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes)
that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are:

• Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

• Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network
• Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated

One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be
in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups
to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero-sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation
for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned
below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic
principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.

Parallel line applications SEMOD168232-169 v2

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation
modes:

• parallel line in service

• parallel line out of service and earthed
• parallel line out of service and not earthed

Parallel line in service SEMOD168232-176 v3

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

Here is the description of what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line, as shown in
figure 59.

From symmetrical components, it is possible to derive the impedance Z at the IED point for
normal lines without mutual coupling according to equation 27.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN-US (Equation 27)

132 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Where:
Vph is phase-to-earth voltage at the IED point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is earth-fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< en05000221.vsd

IEC05000221 V1 EN-US

Figure 59: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, as shown in figure 60.

Z0 - Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 60: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-earth-fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A is changed, according to
equation 28.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
V ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
EQUATION1276 V4 EN-US (Equation 28)

By dividing equation 28 by equation 27 and after some simplification we can write the
impedance present to the IED at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN-US (Equation 29)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

Line distance protection REL670 133

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line
impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected
line that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current
on the protected line, the distance function overreaches. If the currents have the same
direction, the distance protection underreaches.

Maximum overreach occurs if the fault infeed from remote end is weak. If we consider a single
phase-to-earth fault at "p" unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel line for the case
when the fault infeed from remote end is zero, we can draw the voltage V in the faulty phase at
A side as in equation 30.

VA =p × Z 1L ( I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × 3I 0 p )
EQUATION1278 V4 EN-US (Equation 30)

Notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN-US (Equation 31)

Simplification of equation 31, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation 30
gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN-US (Equation 32)

If we finally divide equation 32 with equation 27 we can draw the impedance present to the IED
as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 ph
I + KN ⋅ 3 I + KN ⋅ 
2− p 
0 m
Z = p ⋅ ZI L 
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN-US (Equation 33)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that
is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is
most pronounced with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is
normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally
increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect
the operation of a permissive under-reach scheme.

Parallel line out of service and earthed SEMOD168232-227

SEMOD168232-229 v3

134 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
en05000222.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG867 V1 EN-US

Figure 61: The parallel line is out of service and earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends on the bus bar side of the line
CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence
circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 61.

A I0 Z 0 Zm0

Zm0 I0
C

B Z 0 Zm0

99000039.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG7100 V1 EN-US

Figure 62: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 34.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 34)

The influence on the distance measurement can be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings. All expressions below are proposed for practical use.
They assume the value of zero sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider
only the zero-sequence, mutual reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-
sequence parameters according to equation 35 and equation 36 for each particular line section
and use them for calculating the reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 35)

 X 0m 2 
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 36)

Line distance protection REL670 135

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Parallel line out of service and not earthed SEMOD168232-243 v3

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
en05000223.vsd
IEC05000223 V1 EN-US

Figure 63: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero
sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit
shown in figure 63.

The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance
protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence
impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and
earthed at both ends.

I0 Z0 Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 Z0m
B
99000040.vsd
IEC99000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 64: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not earthed
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 37.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f ) (
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN-US (Equation 37)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 38 and equation 39.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN-US (Equation 38)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN-US (Equation 39)

136 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 40.

( )
Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
Re K u = 1 +
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2 2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN-US (Equation 40)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 41.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN-US (Equation 41)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at
least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

8.1.2.7 Tapped line application SEMOD168232-266 v2

SEMOD168232-268 v2

A IA IB B
T

Z< IC Z<

-IB

Z<
C

en05000224.vsd
DOCUMENT11524-IMG869 V1 EN-US

Figure 65: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed
from remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C is as
follows:

Line distance protection REL670 137

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 42)

 I A + IC   U 2 2
Z C = Z Trf +  Z CT + ⋅ Z TF  ⋅  
 IC   U1 
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3510 V3 EN-US (Equation 43)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point.
IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.
U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the
transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault can be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the
fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(as shown in the dotted line in figure 65), given that the distance protection in B to T will
measure wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone2 trip in one
end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone1
settings that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance SEMOD168232-289 v2

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance,
resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be
calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 44)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately
50 km/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

138 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth (RFPE) and phase-to-phase
(RFPP) must be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance to obtain
reliable fault detection.

8.1.2.8 Series compensation in power systems SEMOD168320-4 v2

The main purpose of series compensation in power systems is virtual reduction of line
reactance in order to enhance the power system stability and increase loadability of
transmission corridors. The principle is based on compensation of distributed line reactance
by insertion of series capacitor (SC). The generated reactive power provided by the capacitor
is continuously proportional to the square of the current flowing at the same time through the
compensated line and series capacitor. This means that the series capacitor has a self-
regulating effect. When the system loading increases, the reactive power generated by series
capacitors increases as well. The response of SCs is automatic, instantaneous and continuous.

The main benefits of incorporating series capacitors in transmission lines are:

• Steady state voltage regulation and raise of voltage collapse limit

• Increase power transfer capability by raising the transient stability limit
• Improved reactive power balance
• Increase in power transfer capacity
• Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction
• Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power
lines

Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit SEMOD168320-24 v2
A series capacitor is capable of compensating the voltage drop of the series inductance in a
transmission line, as shown in figure 66. During low loading, the system voltage drop is lower
and at the same time, the voltage drop on the series capacitor is lower. When the loading
increases and the voltage drop become larger, the contribution of the series capacitor
increases and therefore the system voltage at the receiving line end can be regulated.

Series compensation also extends the region of voltage stability by reducing the reactance of
the line and consequently the SC is valuable for prevention of voltage collapse. Figure 67
presents the voltage dependence at receiving bus B (as shown in figure 66) on line loading and
compensation degree KC, which is defined according to equation 45. The effect of series
compensation is in this particular case obvious and self explanatory.

XC
KC =
X Line
EQUATION1895 V1 EN-US (Equation 45)

A typical 500 km long 500 kV line is considered with source impedance

Z SA1 = 0
EQUATION1896 V1 EN-US (Equation 46)

A B
Z SA1 Power line Load
EA ~
Seires
capacitor

en06000585.vsd
IEC06000585 V1 EN-US

Figure 66: A simple radial power system

Line distance protection REL670 139

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

500

U limit
400

300
U[kV]

200

P30

P50

P70
P0
100

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

P[MW]

en06000586.vsd
IEC06000586 V1 EN-US

Figure 67: Voltage profile for a simple radial power line with 0, 30, 50 and 70% of
compensation

Increased power transfer capability by raising the first swing stability limit SEMOD168320-32 v2
Consider the simple one-machine and infinite bus system shown in figure 68.

A B
System
ZSA1 -jXC +jXLine
PMech
EA ~

en06000587.vsd
IEC06000587 V1 EN-US

Figure 68: One machine and infinite bus system

The equal-areas criterion is used to show the effectiveness of a series capacitor for
improvement of first swing transient stability (as shown in figure 69).

In steady state, the mechanical input power to the generator (PMech) is equal to the electrical
output power from the generator (PE ) and the generator angle is d0. If a 3-phase fault occurs
at a point near the machine, the electrical output of the generator reduces to zero. This means
that the speed of the generator increases and the angle difference between the generator and
the infinite bus increases during the fault. At the time of fault clearing, the angle difference has
increased to δC. After reclosing of the system, the transmitted power exceeds the mechanical
input power and the generator deaccelerates. The generator decelerates as long as equal area
condition AACC=ADEC has not been fulfilled. The critical condition for post-fault system stability
is that the angular displacement after fault clearing and during the deceleration does not
exceed its critical limit δCR, because if it does, the system cannot get back to equilibrium and
the synchronism is lost. The first swing stability and the stability margin can be evaluated by
studying the different areas in figure 69 for the same system, once without SC and once with
series compensation. The areas under the corresponding P – δ curves correspond to energy
and the system remains stable if the accelerating energy that the generator picks up during
the fault is lower than the decelerating energy that is transferred across the transmission line
during the first system swing upon fault clearing.

140 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

without SC with SC

P [ pu ]

P [ pu ]
A SM

A DEC

A DEC
PMech A SM P Mech

AACC AACC

0 C EA CR 0 C EA CR

en06000588.vsd
IEC06000588 V1 EN-US

Figure 69: Equal area criterion and first swing stability without and with series
compensation
This means that the system is stable if AACC ≤ (ADEC + ASM). The stability margin is given by the
difference between the available decelerating energy (area between the P (δ) and PMech and the
angular difference between δC and δCR ) and the accelerating energy. It is represented in figure
69 by the area ASM. Notice that a substantial increase in the stability margin is obtained by
installing a series capacitor. The series compensation can improve the situation in two ways, it
can decrease the initial angle difference δ0 corresponding to a certain power transfer and it
also shifts the P – δ curve upwards.

Improve reactive power balance SEMOD168320-43 v2

A series capacitor increases its output of reactive power instantaneously, continuously and
automatically with increasing line load. It is thus a self-regulating device, which improves
voltage regulation and reduces the need for other means of voltage control for example, shunt
compensation. The reactive power balance of a series compensated line is shown in figure 70
as an example for 500 km long 500 kV transmission line with 50% compensation degree.

Q
(Mvar) 600
(S.C.)
400
Capacitive
200
Power flow
(MW)
500 1000 1500
200
(T.L. + S.C.)
Inductive
400

600
Transmission 500 kV
800 Line 500 km (T.L.)
Series
1000 Compensation k = 50 %

en06000589.vsd
IEC06000589 V1 EN-US

Figure 70: Self-regulating effect of reactive power balance

Line distance protection REL670 141

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Increase in power transfer SEMOD168320-45 v2

The increase in power transfer capability as a function of the degree of compensation for a
transmission line can be explained by studying the circuit shown in figure 71. The power
transfer on the transmission line is given by the equation 47:

U A × U B × sin (d ) U A × U B × sin ( d )
P= =
X Line - X C X Line × (1 - K C )
EQUATION1897 V1 EN-US (Equation 47)

The compensation degree Kc is defined as equation

UA DU UB

PA A B PB
-jX C +jXL
UA UB
QA QB
d

en06000590.vsd
IEC06000590 V1 EN-US

Figure 71: Transmission line with series capacitor

The effect on the power transfer when considering a constant angle difference (δ) between
the line ends is illustrated in figure 72. Practical compensation degree runs from 20 to 70
percent. Transmission capability increases of more than two times can be obtained in practice.

Multiple of power over

a non-compensated line
Power transfer with constant angle difference
3.5

3
Increase in power transfer

2.5

1.5

1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Degree of series compensation [%] Degree of
compensation
IEC06000592-2-en.vsd
IEC06000592 V2 EN-US

Figure 72: Increase in power transfer over a transmission line depending on degree of
series compensation

Active load sharing between parallel circuits and loss reduction SEMOD168320-79 v2
A series capacitor can be used to control the distribution of active power between parallel
transmission circuits. The compensation of transmission lines with sufficient thermal capacity
can relieve the possible overloading of other parallel lines. This distribution is governed by the
reactance, while the losses are determined by the resistance. A properly designed series
compensation system can considerably reduce the total transmission system losses, as shown
in figure 73.

142 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

-jXC
jXL1 RL1

Line 1

jXL2 R L2

Line 2

en06000593.vsd
IEC06000593 V1 EN-US

Figure 73: Two parallel lines with series capacitor for optimized load sharing and loss
reduction
To minimize the losses, the series capacitor must be installed in the transmission line with the
lower resistance. The size of the series capacitor that minimizes the total losses is given the
following expression:

X L1 - X C RL1
=
X L2 RL 2
EQUATION1899 V1 EN-US (Equation 48)

Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power
line SEMOD168320-88 v2
As shown in figure 72 the line loading can easily be increased 1.5-2 times by series
compensation. Thus, the required number of transmission lines needed for a certain power
transfer can be significantly reduced. The cost of series compensation is small compared to
the cost of a transmission line. When evaluating the cost of a transmission system upgrade
also the cost of secondary equipment such as eventual upgrading of line protections on the
compensated as well as, adjacent lines should be considered. The main advantages of series
compensation against the new transmission line within the same corridor are:

• Significantly reduced investment costs; the same increase in power transmission for up to
90% reduced costs
• In many cases, the only practical way to increase the transmission capacity of a corridor
• Series compensation shortens the lead times
• Environmental impact

EA ~ Series compensation ~ EB

New transmission line

en06000594.vsd
IEC06000594 V1 EN-US

Figure 74: Series compensation is an important alternative to new transmission lines

Advancements in series compensation using thyristor switching technology SEMOD168320-102 v3

A thyristor switched series capacitor (TSSC) can be used for power flow control. This is
performed by changing the reactance of the transmission circuit in discrete steps, as shown in
figure 75. A TSSC typically consists of a few segments in series that can be inserted
independently of each other in order to achieve different total series capacitor reactance.

Line distance protection REL670 143

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

-jXC -jX C -jXC

Fw Fw Fw

Rv Rv Rv

en06000595.vsd
IEC06000595 V1 EN-US

Figure 75: Thyristor switched series capacitor

-jXC
IL
+ -

FW
UC
jXL
IV

Rv
en06000596.vsd
IEC06000596 V1 EN-US

Figure 76: Thyristor controlled series capacitor

IL Line current

IV Current through the thyristor

UC Voltage over the series capacitor

XC Rated reactance of the series capacitor

A thyristor controlled series capacitor (TCSC) allows continuous control of the series capacitor
reactance. This is achieved by adding current through the capacitor via the parallel thyristor
valve path see figure 76. The main circuit of the TCSC consists of a capacitor bank and a
thyristor controlled inductive branch connected in parallel. The capacitor bank may have a
value of for example, 10...30 Ω/phase and a rated continuous current of 1500...3000 A. The
capacitor bank for each phase is mounted on a platform providing full insulation towards
earth. The thyristor valve contains a string of series connected high power thyristors with a
maximum total blocking voltage in the range of hundreds of kV. The inductor is an air-core
reactor with a few mH inductance. The wave forms of a TCSC in capacitive boost mode are
shown in figure 77.

IL 0

-2
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
5

IV 0

-5
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
50

UC 0

-50
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2
0

XC -20

-40
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2

en06000597.vsd

IEC06000597 V1 EN-US

Figure 77: TCSC wave forms presented in capacitive boost mode for a typical 50Hz
system

144 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The apparent impedance of the TCSC (the impedance seen by the power system) can typically
be increased to up to 3 times the physical impedance of the capacitor, see figure 78. This high
apparent reactance will mainly be used for damping of power oscillations.

Imperatriz TCSC, Operating range

3.2
B C D
3

2.8

2.6

2.4

2.2
Continuous 30 min 10s
2

1.8

1.6
Xtcsc/Xc (pu)

1.4
A
1.2

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2
Continuous
0 30 min. overload
-0.2 10s overload
E F G Bypass mode
-0.4
Series5
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 2100 2400 2700 3000
Line current (Arms)

en06000598.vsd
IEC06000598 V1 EN-US

Figure 78: Operating range of a TCSC installed for damping of power oscillations
(example)
During continuous valve bypass the TCSC represents an inductive impedance of about 20% of
the capacitor impedance. Both operation in capacitive boost mode and valve bypass mode can
be used for damping of power swings. The utilization of valve bypass increases the dynamic
range of the TCSC and improves the TCSC effectiveness in power oscillation damping.

8.1.2.9 Challenges in protection of series compensated and adjacent power lines SEMOD168320-10 v2

System planning does not consider any more possible protection issues and difficulties, when
deciding for a particular, non conventional solution of certain operation and stability
problems. It is supposed that modern communication and state of the art computer
technologies provides good basis for the required solution. This applies also to protection
issues in series compensated networks. Different physical phenomena, which influence
conventional principles of IED protection, like distance protection, phase comparison
protection, are well known and accordingly considered in IED design. Some other issues, like
influence of controlled thyristors in series capacitor banks are getting increased importance,
although not as high as they would deserve.

The most important challenges, which influence the operation of different protection
functions in the greatest extent, are described in this chapter.

Voltage and current inversion SEMOD168320-168 v2

Series capacitors influence the magnitude and the direction of fault currents in series
compensated networks. They consequently influence phase angles of voltages measured in
different points of series compensated networks and this performances of different
protection functions, which have their operation based on properties of measured voltage and
current phasors.

Voltage inversion SEMOD168320-171 v2

Figure 79 presents a part of series compensated line with reactance XL1 between the IED point
and the fault in point F of series compensated line. The voltage measurement is supposed to

Line distance protection REL670 145

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

be on the bus side, so that series capacitor appears between the IED point and fault on the
protected line. Figure 80 presents the corresponding phasor diagrams for the cases with
bypassed and fully inserted series capacitor.

Voltage distribution on faulty lossless serial compensated line from fault point F to the bus is
linearly dependent on distance from the bus, if there is no capacitor included in scheme (as
shown in figure 80). Voltage UM measured at the bus is equal to voltage drop D UL on the faulty
line and lags the current IF by 90 electrical degrees.

The situation changes with series capacitor included in circuit between the IED point and the
fault position. The fault current IF (see figure 80) is increased due to the series capacitor,
generally decreases total impedance between the sources and the fault. The reactive voltage
drop D UL on XL1 line impedance leads the current by 90 degrees. Voltage drop DUC on series
capacitor lags the fault current by 90 degrees. Note that line impedance XL1 could be divided
into two parts: one between the IED point and the capacitor and one between the capacitor
and the fault position. The resulting voltage UM in IED point is this way proportional to sum of
voltage drops on partial impedances between the IED point and the fault position F, as
presented by

U M = I F × j ( X L1 - X C )
EQUATION1901 V1 EN-US (Equation 49)

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
Source voltage

Pre -fault voltage

U’ M Fault voltage

UM
U

Source
XS XL1
~
XC F
IF

Z<

en06000605.vsd
IEC06000605 V1 EN-US

Figure 79: Voltage inversion on series compensated line

US
xUS

xUS
US

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
x UL
U’M=xU L

IF IF
x UC

UM

en06000606.vsd
IEC06000606 V1 EN-US

Figure 80: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted
series capacitor during voltage inversion

146 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

It is obvious that voltage UM will lead the fault current IF as long as XL1> XC. This situation
corresponds, from the directionality point of view, to fault conditions on line without series
capacitor. Voltage UM in IED point will lag the fault current IF in case when:

X L1 < X C < X S + X L1
EQUATION1902 V1 EN-US (Equation 50)

Where
XS is the source impedance behind the IED

The IED point voltage inverses its direction due to presence of series capacitor and its
dimension. It is a common practice to call this phenomenon voltage inversion. Its
consequences on operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend
on their operating principle. The most known effect has voltage inversion on directional
measurement of distance IEDs (see chapter "Distance protection" for more details), which
must for this reason comprise special measures against this phenomenon.

There will be no voltage inversion phenomena for reverse faults in system with VTs located on
the bus side of series capacitor. The allocation of VTs to the line side does not eliminate the
phenomenon, because it appears again for faults on the bus side of IED point.

Current inversion SEMOD168320-206 v2

Figure 81 presents part of a series compensated line with corresponding equivalent voltage
source. It is generally anticipated that fault current IF flows on non-compensated lines from
power source towards the fault F on the protected line. Series capacitor may change the
situation.

With inserted
U capacitor
Source voltage
UM

Pre -fault voltage

With bypassed
capacitor U’ M Fault voltage

Source
XS XL1
~
XC F
IF

Z<
en06000607.vsd
IEC06000607 V1 EN-US

Figure 81: Current inversion on series compensated line

The relative phase position of fault current IF compared to the source voltage US depends in
general on the character of the resultant reactance between the source and the fault position.
Two possibilities appear:

X S - X C + X L1 > 0
X S - X C + X L1 < 0
EQUATION1935 V1 EN-US (Equation 51)

Line distance protection REL670 147

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The first case corresponds also to conditions on non compensated lines and in cases, when
the capacitor is bypassed either by spark gap or by the bypass switch, as shown in phasor
diagram in figure 82. The resultant reactance is in this case of inductive nature and the fault
currents lags source voltage by 90 electrical degrees.

The resultant reactance is of capacitive nature in the second case. Fault current will for this
reason lead the source voltage by 90 electrical degrees, which means that reactive current will
flow from series compensated line to the system. The system conditions are in such case
presented by equation 52

X C > X S + X L1
EQUATION1936 V1 EN-US (Equation 52)

US HUS
US
HUS

UM
With bypassed With inserted
capacitor capacitor HUC
U’M=HU L

IF IF
HUL

en06000608.vsd
IEC06000608 V1 EN-US

Figure 82: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted
series capacitor during current inversion
It is a common practice to call this phenomenon current inversion. Its consequences on
operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their operating
principle. The most known effect has current inversion on operation of distance IEDs (as
shown in section "Distance protection" for more details), which cannot be used for the
protection of series compensated lines with possible current inversion. Equation 52 shows
also big dependence of possible current inversion on series compensated lines on location of
series capacitors. XL1 = 0 for faults just behind the capacitor when located at line IED and only
the source impedance prevents current inversion. Current inversion has been considered for
many years only a theoretical possibility due to relatively low values of source impedances (big
power plants) compared to the capacitor reactance. The possibility for current inversion in
modern networks is increasing and must be studied carefully during system preparatory
studies.

The current inversion phenomenon should not be studied only for the purposes of protection
devices measuring phase currents. Directional comparison protections, based on residual
(zero sequence) and negative sequence currents should be considered in studies as well.
Current inversion in zero sequence systems with low zero sequence source impedance (a
number of power transformers connected in parallel) must be considered as practical
possibility in many modern networks.

Low frequency transients SEMOD168320-220 v2

Series capacitors introduce in power systems oscillations in currents and voltages, which are
not common in non-compensated systems. These oscillations have frequencies lower than the
rated system frequency and may cause delayed increase of fault currents, delayed operation of
spark gaps as well as, delayed operation of protective IEDs. The most obvious difference is
generally seen in fault currents. Figure 83 presents a simplified picture of a series
compensated network with basic line parameters during fault conditions. We study the basic

148 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

performances for the same network with and without series capacitor. Possible effects of
spark gap flashing or MOV conducting are neglected. The time dependence of fault currents
and the difference between them are of interest.

-jXC
RL jXL
i L(t)

eG (t) ~
F

en06000609.vsd
IEC06000609 V1 EN-US

Figure 83: Simplified equivalent scheme of SC network during fault conditions

We consider the instantaneous value of generator voltage following the sine wave according
to equation 53

eG = EG × sin (w × t + l )
EQUATION1904 V1 EN-US (Equation 53)

The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 83 without series capacitor
is presented by equation 54

diL
LL × + RL × iL = EG × sin (w × t + l )
dt
EQUATION1905 V1 EN-US (Equation 54)

The solution over line current is presented by group of equations 55

R
E é E ù -t×
L

iL = G × sin (w × t + l - j ) + ê I L ( t = 0) - G × sin ( l - j ) ú × e LL
Z ë Z û
Z = RL 2 + (w × LL )
2

æ w × LL ö
j = atg ç ÷
è RL ø
EQUATION1906 V1 EN-US (Equation 55)

The line fault current consists of two components:

• The steady-state component which magnitude depends on generator voltage and

absolute value of impedance included in the circuit
• The transient DC component, which magnitude depends on the fault incident angle
decays with the circuit time constant

LL RL [ s ]
EQUATION1907 V1 EN-US (Equation 56)

The basic loop differential equation describing the circuit in figure 83 with series capacitor is
presented by equation 57.

d 2il di 1
LL × 2
+ RL × L + iL (t ) = EG × w × cos (w × t + l )
dt dt C L
EQUATION1908 V1 EN-US (Equation 57)

Line distance protection REL670 149

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The solution over line current is in this case presented by group of equations 58. The fault
current consists also here from the steady-state part and the transient part. The difference
with non-compensated conditions is that

• The total loop impedance decreases for the negative reactance of the series capacitor,
which in fact increases the magnitude of the fault current
• The transient part consists of the damped oscillation, which has an angular frequency b
and is dying out with a time constant a

EG
iL = × sin (w × t + l - j ) + [ K1 × cos ( b × t ) + K 2 × sin ( b × t )] × e -a ×t
Z SC
2
æ 1 ö
Z SC = RL + ç w × LL -
2
÷
è w × CL ø
EG
K1 = I L ( t = 0) - × sin ( l - j )
Z SC
é RL EG × w × LL ù
ê E G
× sin ( l ) - U C ( t = 0)
- × I L ( t = 0)
- × cos ( l - j ) - ú
1 2 Z SC
K2 = ê ú
b × LL ê EG × RL ú
ê - 2 × Z × sin ( l - j ) ú
ë SC û
RL
a=
2 × LL

1 RL2
b= -
LL × C L 4 × L2L
EQUATION1909 V1 EN-US (Equation 58)

The transient part has an angular frequency b and is damped out with the time-constant α.

The difference in performance of fault currents for a three-phase short circuit at the end of a
typical 500 km long 500 kV line is presented in figure 84.

The short circuit current on a non-compensated line is lower in magnitude, but comprises at
the beginning only a transient DC component, which diminishes completely in approximately
120ms. The final magnitude of the fault current on compensated line is higher due to the
decreased apparent impedance of a line (60% compensation degree has been considered for a
particular case), but the low frequency oscillation is also obvious. The increase of fault current
immediately after the fault incidence (on figure 84 at approximately 21ms) is much slower than
on non-compensated line. This occurs due to the energy stored in capacitor before the fault.

150 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

10

I[pu]
0 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.08 0.1 0.12 0.14 0.16 0.18 0.2

10

t[ms ]
en06000610.vsd

IEC06000610 V1 EN-US

Figure 84: Short circuit currents for the fault at the end of 500 km long 500 kV line
without and with SC

Location of instrument transformers SEMOD168320-261 v2

Location of instrument transformers relative to the line end series capacitors plays an
important role regarding the dependability and security of a complete protection scheme. It is
on the other hand necessary to point out the particular dependence of those protection
schemes, which need for their operation information on voltage in IED point.

Protection schemes with their operating principle depending on current measurement only,
like line current differential protection are relatively independent on CT location. Figure 85
shows schematically the possible locations of instrument transformers related to the position
of line-end series capacitor.

- jX C
CT 1 CT 2

VT1 VT 2
en06000611.vsd
IEC06000611 V1 EN-US

Figure 85: Possible positions of instrument transformers relative to line end series
capacitor

Bus side instrument transformers SEMOD168320-266 v2

CT1 and VT1 on figure 85 represent the case with bus side instrument transformers. The
protection devices are in this case exposed to possible voltage and current inversion for line
faults, which decreases the required dependability. In addition to this may series capacitor
cause negative apparent impedance to distance IEDs on protected and adjacent lines as well
for close-in line faults (see also figure 87 LOC=0%), which requires special design of distance
measuring elements to cope with such phenomena. The advantage of such installation is that
the protection zone covers also the series capacitor as a part of protected power line, so that
line protection will detect and cleared also parallel faults on series capacitor.

Line side instrument transformers SEMOD168320-271 v2

CT2 and VT2 on figure 85 represent the case with line side instrument transformers. The
protective devices will not be exposed to voltage and current inversion for faults on the
protected line, which increases the dependability. Distance protection zone 1 may be active in
most applications, which is not the case when the bus side instrument transformers are used.

Line distance protection REL670 151

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Distance IEDs are exposed especially to voltage inversion for close-in reverse faults, which
decreases the security. The effect of negative apparent reactance must be studied seriously in
case of reverse directed distance protection zones used by distance IEDs for teleprotection
schemes. Series capacitors located between the voltage instruments transformers and the
buses reduce the apparent zero sequence source impedance and may cause voltage as well as
current inversion in zero sequence equivalent networks for line faults. It is for this reason
absolutely necessary to study the possible effect on operation of zero sequence directional
earth-fault overcurrent protection before its installation.

Dual side instrument transformers SEMOD168320-277 v2

Installations with line side CT2 and bus side VT1 are not very common. More common are
installations with line side VT2 and bus side CT1. They appear as de facto installations also in
switchyards with double-bus double-breaker and 1½ breaker arrangement. The advantage of
such schemes is that the unit protections cover also for shunt faults in series capacitors and at
the same time the voltage inversion does not appear for faults on the protected line.

Many installations with line-end series capacitors have available voltage instrument
transformers on both sides. In such case it is recommended to use the VTs for each particular
protection function to best suit its specific characteristics and expectations on dependability
and security. The line side VT can for example be used by the distance protection and the bus
side VT by the directional residual OC earth fault protection.

Apparent impedances and MOV influence SEMOD168320-285 v2

Series capacitors reduce due to their character the apparent impedance measured by distance
IEDs on protected power lines. Figure 86 presents typical locations of capacitor banks on
power lines together with corresponding compensation degrees. Distance IED near the
feeding bus will see in different cases fault on remote end bus depending on type of
overvoltage protection used on capacitor bank (spark gap or MOV) and SC location on
protected power line.

100 %
66 %
50 %
33 %
0%
EA ~

K C = 80% 33% 50 % 33 % 80 %
Z<

en06000612.vsd
IEC06000612 V1 EN-US

Figure 86: Typical locations of capacitor banks on series compensated line

Implementation of spark gaps for capacitor overvoltage protection makes the picture
relatively simple, because they either flash over or not. The apparent impedance corresponds
to the impedance of non-compensated line, as shown in figure 87 case KC = 0%.

KC = 80% KC = 50% KC = 2 x 33% KC = 80%

KC = 0% LOC = 0% LOC = 50% LOC = 33%, 66% LOC = 100%
jX
jX

jX

jX

jX

R R R R R

en06000613.vsd
IEC06000613 V1 EN-US

Figure 87: Apparent impedances seen by distance IED for different SC locations and
spark gaps used for overvoltage protection

152 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

M OV
iM

-jXC
iL iC

uC

MOV protected series capacitor

20 100

10 50

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

50
10

100
20
Line current as a function of time Capacitor voltage as a function of time

20 20

10 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

10
10

20
20

Capacitor current as a function of time MOV current as a function of time

en06000614.vsd

IEC06000614 V1 EN-US

Figure 88: MOV protected capacitor with examples of capacitor voltage and
corresponding currents
The impedance apparent to distance IED is always reduced for the amount of capacitive
reactance included between the fault and IED point, when the spark gap does not flash over, as
presented for typical cases in figure 87. Here it is necessary to distinguish between two typical
cases:

• Series capacitor only reduces the apparent impedance, but it does not cause wrong
directional measurement. Such cases are presented in figure 87 for 50% compensation at
50% of line length and 33% compensation located on 33% and 66% of line length. The
remote end compensation has the same effect.
• The voltage inversion occurs in cases when the capacitor reactance between the IED point
and fault appears bigger than the corresponding line reactance, Figure 23, 80%
compensation at local end. A voltage inversion occurs in IED point and the distance IED
will see wrong direction towards the fault, if no special measures have been introduced in
its design.

The situation differs when metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used for capacitor overvoltage
protection. MOVs conduct current, for the difference of spark gaps, only when the
instantaneous voltage drop over the capacitor becomes higher than the protective voltage
level in each half-cycle separately, see figure 88.

Extensive studies at Bonneville Power Administration in USA ( ref. Goldsworthy, D,L “A

Linearized Model for MOV-Protected series capacitors” Paper 86SM357–8 IEEE/PES summer
meeting in Mexico City July 1986) have resulted in construction of a non-linear equivalent
circuit with series connected capacitor and resistor. Their value depends on complete line
(fault) current and protection factor kp. The later is defined by equation 59.

Line distance protection REL670 153

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

U MOV
kp =
U NC
EQUATION1910 V1 EN-US (Equation 59)

Where
UMOV is the maximum instantaneous voltage expected between the capacitor immediately before the MOV
has conducted or during operation of the MOV, divaded by √2
UNC is the rated voltage in RMS of the series capacitor
jX

jX

jX
I I
£1 =2
Kp × In Kp × In

I
Kp × In
= 10

R R R

en06000615.vsd
IEC06000615 V1 EN-US

Figure 89: Equivalent impedance of MOV protected capacitor in dependence of

protection factor KP
Figure 89 presents three typical cases for series capacitor located at line end (case LOC=0% in
figure 87).

• Series capacitor prevails the scheme as long as the line current remains lower or equal to
its protective current level (I £ kp · INC). Line apparent impedance is in this case reduced for
the complete reactance of a series capacitor.

• 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to

approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the
protective current level (I £ 2· kp· INC). This information has high importance for setting of
distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to earth fault measurement
as well as for phase to phase measurement.

• Series capacitor becomes nearly completely bridged by MOV when the line current
becomes higher than 10-times the protective current level (I £ 10· kp· INC).

8.1.2.10 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines SEMOD168320-318 v2

Voltage inversion is not characteristic for the buses and IED points closest to the series
compensated line only. It can spread also deeper into the network and this way influences the
selection of protection devices (mostly distance IEDs) on remote ends of lines adjacent to the
series compensated circuit, and sometimes even deeper in the network.

154 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

UA UD
ZSA IA
EA
~ ZLA
A
-jX C
IF
F
UB ZLF
ZSB IB
EB
~ ZLB
B
D

en06000616.vsd
IEC06000616 V1 EN-US

Figure 90: Voltage inversion in series compensated network due to fault current infeed
Voltage at the B bus (as shown in figure 90) is calculated for the loss-less system according to
the equation below.

( )
U B = U D + I B ⋅ jX LB = I A + I B ⋅ j ( X LF − X C ) + I B ⋅ jX LB
EQUATION1911 V2 EN-US (Equation 60)

Further development of equation 60 gives the following expressions:

  IA  
U B = jI B ⋅  X LB + 1 +  ⋅ ( X LF − X C )
  IB  
EQUATION1912 V2 EN-US (Equation 61)

X LB
X C (U B = 0 ) = + X LF
IA
1+
IB
EQUATION1913 V1 EN-US (Equation 62)

Equation 61 indicates the fact that the infeed current IA increases the apparent value of
capacitive reactance in system: bigger the infeed of fault current, bigger the apparent series
capacitor in a complete series compensated network. It is possible to say that equation 62
indicates the deepness of the network to which it will feel the influence of series
compensation through the effect of voltage inversion.

It is also obvious that the position of series capacitor on compensated line influences in great
extent the deepness of voltage inversion in adjacent system. Line impedance XLF between D
bus and the fault becomes equal to zero, if the capacitor is installed near the bus and the fault
appears just behind the capacitor. This may cause the phenomenon of voltage inversion to be
expanded very deep into the adjacent network, especially if on one hand the compensated line
is very long with high degree of compensation, and the adjacent lines are, on the other hand,
relatively short.

Extensive system studies are necessary before final decision is made on implementation and
location of series capacitors in network. It requires to correctly estimate their influence on
performances of (especially) existing distance IEDs. It is possible that the costs for number of
protective devices, which should be replaced by more appropriate ones due to the effect of
applied series compensation, influences the future position of series capacitors in power
network.

Possibilities for voltage inversion at remote buses should not be studied for short circuits with
zero fault resistance only. It is necessary to consider cases with higher fault resistances, for
which spark gaps or MOVs on series capacitors will not conduct at all. At the same time this
kind of investigation must consider also the maximum sensitivity and possible resistive reach
of distance protection devices, which on the other hand simplifies the problem.

Line distance protection REL670 155

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Application of MOVs as non-linear elements for capacitor overvoltage protection makes simple
calculations often impossible. Different kinds of steady-state network simulations are in such
cases unavoidable.

8.1.2.11 Distance protection SEMOD168320-338 v3

Distance protection due to its basic characteristics, is the most used protection principle on
series compensated and adjacent lines worldwide. It has at the same time caused a lot of
challenges to protection society, especially when it comes to directional measurement and
transient overreach.

Distance IED in fact does not measure impedance or quotient between line current and
voltage. Quantity 1= Operating quantity - Restraing quantity Quantity 2= Polarizing quantity.
Typically Operating quantity is the replica impedance drop. Restraining quantity is the system
voltage Polarizing quantity shapes the characteristics in different way and is not discussed
here.

Distance IEDs comprise in their replica impedance only the replicas of line inductance and
resistance, but they do not comprise any replica of series capacitor on the protected line and
its protection circuits (spark gap and or MOV). This way they form wrong picture of the
protected line and all “solutions” related to distance protection of series compensated and
adjacent lines are concentrated on finding some parallel ways, which may help eliminating the
basic reason for wrong measurement. The most known of them are decrease of the reach due
to presence of series capacitor, which apparently decreases the line reactance, and
introduction of permanent memory voltage in directional measurement.

Series compensated and adjacent lines are often the more important links in a transmission
networks and delayed fault clearance is undesirable. This makes it necessary to install distance
protection in combination with telecommunication. The most common is distance protection
in Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip mode (POTT).

Underreaching and overreaching schemes SEMOD168320-348 v2

It is a basic rule that the underreaching distance protection zone should under no
circumstances overreach for the fault at the remote end bus, and the overreaching zone should
always, under all system conditions, cover the same fault. In order to obtain section selectivity,
the first distance (underreaching) protection zone must be set to a reach less than the
reactance of the compensated line in accordance with figure 91.

Zone 2 A
A B
-j X
C
Zone 1 A
X 12

X 11
Zone 1 B
G
DA DB

Zone 2 B
en06000618.vsd
IEC06000618 V1 EN-US

Figure 91: Underreaching (Zone 1) and overreaching (Zone 2) on series compensated line
The underreaching zone will have reduced reach in cases of bypassed series capacitor, as
shown in the dashed line in figure 91. The overreaching zone (Zone 2) can this way cover bigger
portion of the protected line, but must always cover with certain margin the remote end bus.
Distance protection Zone 1 is often set to

X Z 1 = K S × ( X 11 + X 12 - X C )
EQUATION1914 V1 EN-US (Equation 63)

Here KS is a safety factor, presented graphically in figure 92, which covers for possible
overreaching due to low frequency (sub-harmonic) oscillations. Here it should be noted

156 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

separately that compensation degree KC in figure 92 relates to total system reactance,

inclusive line and source impedance reactance. The same setting applies regardless MOV or
spark gaps are used for capacitor overvoltage protection.

Equation 63 is applicable for the case when the VTs are located on the bus side of series
capacitor. It is possible to remove XC from the equation in cases of VTs installed in line side,
but it is still necessary to consider the safety factor KS .

If the capacitor is out of service or bypassed, the reach with these settings can be less than
50% of protected line dependent on compensation degree and there will be a section, G in
figure 91, of the power line where no tripping occurs from either end.

1.0
KS

0.8

0.6

0.4
0.2

0 20 40 60 80 100
KC[%]

en06000619.vsd
IEC06000619 V1 EN-US

Figure 92: Underreaching safety factor KS in dependence on system compensation

degree KC
For that reason permissive underreaching schemes can hardly be used as a main protection.
Permissive overreaching distance protection or some kind of directional or unit protection
must be used.

The overreach must be of an order so it overreaches when the capacitor is bypassed or out of
service. Figure 93 shows the permissive zones. The first underreaching zone can be kept in the
total protection but it only has the feature of a back-up protection for close up faults. The
overreach is usually of the same order as the permissive zone. When the capacitor is in
operation the permissive zone will have a very high degree of overreach which can be
considered as a disadvantage from a security point of view.

A B
- jX C Permissive Zone A
X 12
X 11
Permissive Zone B

DA DB

en06000620.vsd
IEC06000620 V1 EN-US

Figure 93: Permissive overreach distance protection scheme

Negative IED impedance, positive fault current (voltage inversion) SEMOD168320-367 v3

Assume in equation 64

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN-US (Equation 64)

and in figure 94

a three phase fault occurs beyond the capacitor. The resultant IED impedance seen from the
DB IED location to the fault may become negative (voltage inversion) until the spark gap has
flashed.

Line distance protection REL670 157

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Distance protections of adjacent power lines shown in figure 94 are influenced by this
negative impedance. If the intermediate infeed of short circuit power by other lines is taken
into consideration, the negative voltage drop on XC is amplified and a protection far away
from the faulty line can maloperate by its instantaneous operating distance zone, if no
precaution is taken. Impedances seen by distance IEDs on adjacent power lines are presented
by equations 65 to 68.

I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
EQUATION1915 V1 EN-US (Equation 65)

IF
X DA1 = X A1 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A1
EQUATION1916 V2 EN-US (Equation 66)

IF
X DA2 = X A2 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A2
EQUATION1917 V2 EN-US (Equation 67)

IF
X DA3 = X A3 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A3
EQUATION1918 V2 EN-US (Equation 68)

A1 B
jX 1
IA1
A2
-jX C
jX 2 jX11

A3 IA2 F
IF
jX 3

DA1 IA3
DB
DA2

DA3

en06000621.vsd
IEC06000621 V1 EN-US

Figure 94: Distance IED on adjacent

power lines are influenced by
the negative impedance

Normally the first zone of this protection must be delayed until the gap flashing has taken
place. If the delay is not acceptable, some directional comparison must also be added to the
protection of all adjacent power lines. As stated above, a good protection system must be able
to operate correctly both before and after gap flashing occurs. Distance protection can be
used, but careful studies must be made for each individual case. The rationale described
applies to both conventional spark gap and MOV protected capacitors.

Special attention should be paid to selection of distance protection on shorter adjacent power
lines in cases of series capacitors located at the line end. In such case the reactance of a short
adjacent line may be lower than the capacitor reactance and voltage inversion phenomenon
may occur also on remote end of adjacent lines. Distance protection of such line must have
built-in functionality which applies normally to protection of series compensated lines.

158 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

It usually takes a bit of a time before the spark gap flashes, and sometimes the fault current
will be of such a magnitude that there will not be any flashover and the negative impedance
will be sustained. If equation 69

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN-US (Equation 69)

in figure 95, the fault current will have the same direction as when the capacitor is bypassed.
So, the directional measurement is correct but the impedance measured is negative and if the
characteristic crosses the origin shown in figure 95 the IED cannot operate. However, if there
is a memory circuit designed so it covers the negative impedance, a three phase fault can be
successfully cleared by the distance protection. As soon as the spark gap has flashed the
situation for protection will be as for an ordinary fault. However, a good protection system
should be able to operate correctly before and after gap flashing occurs.

jX jX X12

X 12
R RV

X11

X FW
X 11

R R FW
ZS

X RV
XC
ZS

XC

en06000584_small.vsd
en06000625.vsd IEC06000584-SMALL V1 EN-US
IEC06000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 95: Cross-polarized Figure 96: Quadrilateral

quadrilateral characteristic with
characteristic separate impedance and
directional measurement

If the distance protection is equipped with an earth-fault measuring unit, the negative
impedance occurs when

3 × X C > 2 × X 1 _ 11 + X 0 _ 11
EQUATION1919 V1 EN-US (Equation 70)

Cross-polarized distance protection (either with mho or quadrilateral characteristic) will

normally handle earth-faults satisfactory if the negative impedance occurs inside the
characteristic. The operating area for negative impedance depends upon the magnitude of the
source impedance and calculations must be made on a case by case basis, as shown in figure
95. Distance IEDs with separate impedance and directional measurement offer additional
setting and operational flexibility when it comes to measurement of negative apparent
impedance (as shown in figure 96).

Negative IED impedance, negative fault current (current inversion) SEMOD168320-408 v2

If equation 71

X C > X S + X11
EQUATION2036 V2 EN-US (Equation 71)

Line distance protection REL670 159

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

in figure 81 and a fault occurs behind the capacitor, the resultant reactance becomes negative
and the fault current will have an opposite direction compared with fault current in a power
line without a capacitor (current inversion). The negative direction of the fault current will
persist until the spark gap has flashed. Sometimes there will be no flashover at all, because the
fault current is less than the setting value of the spark gap. The negative fault current will
cause a high voltage on the network. The situation will be the same even if a MOV is used.
However, depending upon the setting of the MOV, the fault current will have a resistive
component.

The problems described here are accentuated with a three phase or phase-to-phase fault, but
the negative fault current can also exist for a single-phase fault. The condition for a negative
current in case of an earth fault can be written as follows:

3 × X C > 2 × X 1_ L1 + X 0 _ L1 + 2 × X 0 _ S + X 1_ S
EQUATION1920 V1 EN-US (Equation 72)

All designations relates to figure 81. A good protection system must be able to cope with both
positive and negative direction of the fault current, if such conditions can occur. A distance
protection cannot operate for negative fault current. The directional element gives the wrong
direction. Therefore, if a problem with negative fault current exists, distance protection is not
a suitable solution. In practice, negative fault current seldom occurs. In normal network
configurations the gaps will flash in this case.

Double circuit, parallel operating series compensated lines SEMOD168320-417 v2

Two parallel power lines running in electrically close vicinity to each other and ending at the
same busbar at both ends (as shown in figure 97) causes some challenges for distance
protection because of the mutual impedance in the zero sequence system. The current reversal
phenomenon also raises problems from the protection point of view, particularly when the
power lines are short and when permissive overreach schemes are used.

A -jXC B
ZAC ZCB

Zm0AC Zm0CB
-jXC
ZAC ZCB

en06000627.vsd
IEC06000627 V1 EN-US

Figure 97: Double circuit, parallel operating line

Zero sequence mutual impedance Zm0 cannot significantly influence the operation of distance
protection as long as both circuits are operating in parallel and all precautions related to
settings of distance protection on series compensated line have been considered. Influence of
disconnected parallel circuit, which is earthed at both ends, on operation of distance
protection on operating circuit is known.

Series compensation additionally exaggerates the effect of zero sequence mutual impedance
between two circuits, see figure 98. It presents a zero sequence equivalent circuit for a fault at
B bus of a double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both IEDs. The
effect of zero sequence mutual impedance on possible overreaching of distance IEDs at A bus
is increased compared to non compensated operation, because series capacitor does not
compensate for this reactance. The reach of underreaching distance protection zone 1 for
phase-to-earth measuring loops must further be decreased for such operating conditions.

160 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A -jXC B
j(X0L -Xm0)

jXm0

j(X0L -Xm0) -jXC

en06000628.vsd
IEC06000628 V1 EN-US

Figure 98: Zero sequence equivalent circuit of a series compensated double circuit line
with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both IEDs
Zero sequence mutual impedance may disturb also correct operation of distance protection
for external evolving faults, when one circuit has already been disconnected in one phase and
runs non-symmetrical during dead time of single pole autoreclosing cycle. All such operating
conditions must carefully be studied in advance and simulated by dynamic simulations in order
to fine tune settings of distance IEDs.

If the fault occurs in point F of the parallel operating circuits, as presented in figure 99, than
also one distance IED (operating in POTT teleprotection scheme) on parallel, healthy circuit will
send a carrier signal CSAB to the remote line end, where this signal will be received as a carrier
receive signal CRBB.

RAA IFC1 IFC1 RBA RAA IFC1 RBA

F F

RAB IFC2 RBB RAB IFC2 RBB

CSAB CRBB CSAB CRBB

en06000629.vsd
IEC06000629 V1 EN-US

Figure 99: Current reversal phenomenon on parallel operating circuits

It is possible to expect faster IED operation and breaker opening at the bus closer to fault,
which will reverse the current direction in healthy circuit. Distance IED RBB will suddenly detect
fault in forward direction and, if CRBB signal is still present due to long reset time of IED RAB
and especially telecommunication equipment, trip its related circuit breaker, since all
conditions for POTT have been fulfilled. Zero sequence mutual impedance will additionally
influence this process, since it increases the magnitude of fault current in healthy circuit after
the opening of first circuit breaker. The so called current reversal phenomenon may cause
unwanted operation of protection on healthy circuit and this way endangers even more the
complete system stability.

To avoid the unwanted tripping, some manufacturers provide a feature in their distance
protection which detects that the fault current has changed in direction and temporarily
blocks distance protection. Another method employed is to temporarily block the signals
received at the healthy line as soon as the parallel faulty line protection initiates tripping. The
second mentioned method has an advantage in that not the whole protection is blocked for
the short period. The disadvantage is that a local communication is needed between two
protection devices in the neighboring bays of the same substation.

Distance protection used on series compensated lines must have a high overreach to cover the
whole transmission line also when the capacitors are bypassed or out of service. When the
capacitors are in service, the overreach will increase tremendously and the whole system will
be very sensitive for false teleprotection signals. Current reversal difficulties will be
accentuated because the ratio of mutual impedance against self-impedance will be much
higher than for a non-compensated line.

If non-unit protection is to be used in a directional comparison mode, schemes based on

negative sequence quantities offer the advantage that they are insensitive to mutual coupling.
However, they can only be used for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults. For three-phase
faults an additional protection must be provided.

Line distance protection REL670 161

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.1.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD168241-1 v2

8.1.3.1 General SEMOD168247-4 v2

The settings for the distance protection function are done in primary values. The instrument
transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is used to automatically convert
the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in the distance protection
function.

The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.1.3.2 Setting of zone1 SEMOD168247-15 v2

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section
"Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in your
application. We recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the parallel line is in
operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The
setting of earth fault reach should be selected to be <85% also when parallel line is out of
service and earthed at both ends (worst case).

8.1.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone SEMOD168247-19 v3

The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at
remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location.

The setting must not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the
protected line.

If the requirements in the bullet—listed paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than 120%,
the time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted
operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is

162 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

down during faults. The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section.
The whole line must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted with a simple example below.

If a fault occurs at point F (as shown in figure 100, also for the explanation of all abbreviations
used), the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 

EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 73)

Z AC Z CB

F
A IA C Z CF B
IB

I A+ I C
Z< IC

IEC05000457-2-en.vsd

IEC05000457 V2 EN-US

Figure 100: Setting of overreaching zone

8.1.3.4 Setting of reverse zone SEMOD168247-33 v2

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal
logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus
bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching
zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
Equation 74 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN-US (Equation 74)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction to obtain certain sensitivity.

8.1.3.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines SEMOD168247-142 v2

Line distance protection REL670 163

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Directional control SEMOD168247-145 v2

The directional function (ZDSRDIR) which is able to cope with the condition at voltage reversal,
shall be used in all IEDs with conventional distance protection (ZMCPDIS,ZMCAPDIS). This
function is necessary in the protection on compensated lines as well as all non-compensated
lines connected to this busbar (adjacent lines). All protections that can be exposed to voltage
reversal must have the special directional function, including the protections on busbar where
the voltage can be reversed by series compensated lines not terminated to this busbar.

The directional function is controlled by faulty phase criteria. These criteria must identify all
forward and reverse faults that can cause voltage reversal. Setting of the corresponding reach
of the impedance measuring elements is separate for reactive and resistive reach and
independent of each other for phase-to-earth and for phase-to-phase measurement.

It is also necessary to consider the minimum load impedance limiting conditions:

Setting of zone 1 SEMOD168247-150 v3

A voltage reversal can cause an artificial internal fault (voltage zero) on faulty line as well as on
the adjacent lines. This artificial fault always have a resistive component, this is however small
and can mostly not be used to prevent tripping of a healthy adjacent line.

An independent tripping zone 1 facing a bus which can be exposed to voltage reversal have to
be set with reduced reach with respect to this false fault. When the fault can move and pass
the bus, the zone 1 in this station must be blocked. Protection further out in the net must be
set with respect to this apparent fault as the protection at the bus.

Different settings of the reach for the zone (ZMCPDIS) characteristic in forward and reverse
direction makes it possible to optimize the settings in order to maximize dependability and
security for independent zone1.

Due to the sub-harmonic oscillation swinging caused by the series capacitor at fault
conditions the reach of the under-reaching zone 1 must be further reduced. Zone 1 can only be
set with a percentage reach to the artificial fault according to the curve in 101

p
%
100

80

60

40

20

0 C
20 40 60 80 100 %

99000202.vsd
IEC99000202 V1 EN-US

Figure 101: Reduced reach due to the expected sub-harmonic oscillations at different
degrees of compensation

164 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

æX ö
c = degree of compensation çç c ÷÷
è Xl ø
EQUATION1894 V1 EN-US (Equation 75)

Xc is the reactance of the series capacitor

p is the maximum allowable reach for an under-reaching zone with respect to the sub-
harmonic swinging related to the resulting fundamental frequency reactance the zone is not
allowed to over-reach.

The degree of compensation C in figure 101 has to be interpreted as the relation between
series capacitor reactance XC and the total positive sequence reactance X1 to the driving
source to the fault. If only the line reactance is used the degree of compensation will be too
high and the zone 1 reach unnecessary reduced. The highest degree of compensation will occur
at three phase fault and therefore the calculation need only to be performed for three phase
faults.

The compensation degree in earth return path is different than in phases. It is for this reason
possible to calculate a compensation degree separately for the phase-to-phase and three-
phase faults on one side and for the single phase-to-earth fault loops on the other side.
Different settings of the reach for the ph-ph faults and ph-E loops makes it possible to
minimise the necessary decrease of the reach for different types of faults.

Reactive Reach
Compensated lines with the capacitor into the zone 1 reach :

A XC B

XLLOC

XL

en07000063.vsd
IEC07000063 V1 EN-US

Figure 102: Simplified single line diagram of series capacitor located at XLLOC ohm from A
station

Line distance protection REL670 165

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

jX
Xline - XC

R RV

XLLOC

X1FW
XC
R

R FW
Z
ZSS

X1RV
XC

en06000584-2.vsd
IEC06000584 V2 EN-US

Figure 103: Measured impedance at voltage inversion

Forward direction:
Where
XLLoc equals line reactance up to the series capacitor(in the picture
approximate 33% of XLine)
X1 is set to (XLindex-XC) · p/100.
p is defined according to figure 101
1,2 is safety factor for fast operation of Zone 1
Compensated line with the series
capacitor not into the reach of zone 1. The
setting is thus:
X1 is set to (XLine-XC) · p/100.

When the calculation of XFw gives a negative value the zone 1 must be
permanently blocked.

For protection on non compensated lines facing series capacitor on next line. The setting is
thus:

• X1 is set to (XLine-XC · K) · p/100.

• K equals side infeed factor at next busbar.

166 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

When the calculation of XFw gives a negative value the zone 1 must be
permanently blocked.

Fault resistance SEMOD168247-201 v2

The resistive reach is, for all affected applications, restricted by the set reactive reach and the
load impedance and same conditions apply as for a non-compensated network.

However, special notice has to be taken during settings calculations due to the ZnO because
50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to
approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the
protective current level. This information has high importance for setting of distance
protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to earth- fault measurement as well as,
for phase-to-phase measurement.

Overreaching zone 2 SEMOD168247-211 v2

In series compensated network where independent tripping zones will have reduced reach due
to the negative reactance in the capacitor and the sub-harmonic swinging the tripping will to a
high degree be achieved by the communication scheme.

With the reduced reach of the under-reaching zones not providing effective protection for all
faults along the length of the line, it becomes essential to provide over-reaching schemes like
permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) or blocking scheme can be used.

Thus it is of great importance that the zone 2 can detect faults on the whole line both with the
series capacitor in operation and when the capacitor is bridged (short circuited). It is
supposed also in this case that the reactive reach for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-earth
faults is the same. The X1Fw, for all lines affected by the series capacito, are set to:

• X1 >= 1,5 · XLine

The safety factor of 1.5 appears due to speed requirements and possible under reaching
caused by the sub harmonic oscillations.

The increased reach related to the one used in non compensated system is recommended for
all protections in the vicinity of series capacitors to compensate for delay in the operation
caused by the sub harmonic swinging.

Settings of the resistive reaches are limited according to the minimum load impedance.

Reverse zone SEMOD168247-222 v3

The reverse zone that is normally used in the communication schemes for functions like fault
current reversal logic, weak-in-feed logic or issuing carrier send in blocking scheme must
detect all faults in the reverse direction which is detected in the opposite IED by the
overreaching zone 2. The maximum reach for the protection in the opposite IED can be
achieved with the series capacitor in operation.

The reactive reach can be set according to the following formula: X1 = 1.3 · (X12Rem - 0.5 · (X1L -
XC))

Settings of the resistive reaches are according to the minimum load impedance:

Optional higher distance protection zones SEMOD168247-226 v2

When some additional distance protection zones (zone 4, for example) are used they must be
set according to the influence of the series capacitor.

8.1.3.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application SEMOD168247-48 v2

Line distance protection REL670 167

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone1 SEMOD168247-50 v2

With reference to section "Parallel line application with mutual coupling", the zone reach can be
set to 85% of protected line.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone2 SEMOD168247-53 v2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all
cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in
service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent
zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 60 in section
"Parallel line in service".

The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to
at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN-US (Equation 76)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN-US (Equation 77)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN-US (Equation 78)

If the denominator in equation 78 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and
imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN-US (Equation 79)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN-US (Equation 80)

Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends SEMOD168247-69 v2

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means
that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single
phase-to-earth-faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and
reactance) equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION561 V1 EN-US (Equation 81)

168 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN-US (Equation 82)

8.1.3.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction SEMOD168247-76 v2

Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, and separately for phase-to-phase (R1PP),
and phase-to-earth loop (R1PE) measurement.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults (R1PP) and for the
phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) for each zone. Set all remaining reach setting parameters
independently of each other for each distance zone.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically
follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the
protected zone is equal to equation 83.

1
R = --- ( 2 × R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE
3
EQUATION567 V1 EN-US (Equation 83)

é ù
j loop = arctan êê 22××X1PE + X0
ú
R1PE + R0 ú
ë û
EQUATION1457 V1 EN-US (Equation 84)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone1 must follow the following condition:

RFPE £ 4.5 × X 1
EQUATION569 V2 EN-US (Equation 85)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault
resistance for phase-to-earth faults. Limit the setting of the zone1 reach in resistive direction
for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:

RFPP £ 3 × X 1
EQUATION570 V2 EN-US (Equation 86)

8.1.3.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function SEMOD168247-91 v3

The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function is not activated,
which is done by setting the parameter Rld for the Phase Selector to its upper limit. If the load
encroachment function is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load
limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum
permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin
between the IED boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance
(Ω/phase) is calculated as:

Line distance protection REL670 169

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 87)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 88)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-

phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under
combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-
phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load

EQUATION792 V2 EN-US (Equation 89)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-
earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance
angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load min  cos  

 2  R1Zx  R 0 Zx
 sin 

 2  X 1Zx  X 0 Zx 
EQUATION578 V5 EN-US (Equation 90)

Where:
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load
impedance.

RFPPZx  1.6  Zload

EQUATION579 V3 EN-US (Equation 91)

170 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Equation 91 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase faults
is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More
accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 92.

R1PP
RFPP £ 1.6 × Z loadmin × cosJ – --------------- × sinJ
X1PP
EQUATION580 V1 EN-US (Equation 92)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element is in the
protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a
power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the description of Power
swing detection (ZMRPSB) function.

8.1.3.9 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated SEMOD168247-129 v2

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the
description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, section "Setting
guidelines". If the characteristic for the impedance measurement is shaped with the load
encroachment algorithm, the parameter RLdFw and the corresponding load angle ArgLd must
be set according to the minimum load impedance.

8.1.3.10 Setting of minimum operating currents SEMOD168247-132 v2

The operation of the distance function can be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is
below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE.

The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base
current for the analog input channels. The value has been proven in practice to be suitable in
most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to
increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IED base
current. This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection
on series of very long transmission lines.

If the load current compensation is activated, there is an additional criteria IMinOpIN that will
block the phase-earth loop if the 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of IMinOpIN is 5% of the
IED base current IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the
distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

8.1.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones SEMOD168247-138 v2

The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each
other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity
reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60
seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the
corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E
(tPE) and for the ph-ph (tPP) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to
further increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.

Line distance protection REL670 171

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.2 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment

FDPSPDIS IP12400-1 v4

8.2.1 Identification

8.2.1.1 Identification M14850-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, FDPSPDIS 21
load encroachment
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN-US

8.2.2 Application M13138-3 v3

The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. The
ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection with load
encroachment function FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the
distance measuring function depending on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be
in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of
both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously

measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values.

The extensive output signals from FDPSPDIS give also important information about faulty
phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

8.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14959-1 v2

The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where φloop and
φline is greater than 60°.

8.2.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics M13142-3 v6

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve correct
phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire line. It is not
necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at least 10% is
recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones , the phase selection outputs
STCNDZ or STCNDLE must be connected to input on ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.

For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance φ for phase-to-earth fault is
defined according to equation 93.

X1L + XN
arctan j =
R1L + RN
EQUATION2115 V1 EN-US (Equation 93)

172 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

In some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than 60°. In
these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and reverse direction,
RFFwPE and RFRvPE for phase-to-earth faults and RFFwPP and RFRvPP for phase-to-phase
faults have to be increased to avoid that FDPSPDIS characteristic shall cut off some part of the
zone characteristic. The necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be
derived from trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type.

Phase-to-earth fault in forward direction M13142-6 v7

With reference to figure 104, the following equations for the setting calculations can be
obtained.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection with
load encroachment function FDPSPDIS and index Zm reference settings for
Distance protection function (ZMQPDIS).

Line distance protection REL670 173

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

X
( W / loop)
3 4 5
1

6 6

60°

60° R
8 ( W / loop)

6 6

3 4 5
IEC09000043_1_en.vsd
IEC09000043 V1 EN-US

Figure 104: Relation between distance protection phase selection (FDPSPDIS) and
impedance zone (ZMQPDIS) for phase-to-earth fault φloop>60° (setting
parameters in italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection)(red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone)
3 RFltRevPGPHS
4 (X1PHS+XN)/tan(60°)

5 RFltFwdPGPHS

6 RFPGZM

7 X1PHS+XN
8 φloop
9 X1ZM+XN

Reactive reach M13142-9 v4

The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring zone
used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 94 and equation 95 gives the
minimum recommended reactive reach.

X1PHS ³ 1.44 × X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN-US (Equation 94)

174 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X0 PHS ³ 1.44 × X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN-US (Equation 95)

where:
X1Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS, and the constant

1.44 is a safety margin

X0Zm is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS

The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for forward
direction. No additional setting is required.

Fault resistance reach M13142-103 v5

The resistive reach must cover RFPE for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly zone 2.
Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in the
application. Equation 96 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.

RFFwPEmin ³ 1.1× RFPEzm

EQUATION1312 V2 EN-US (Equation 96)

where:
RFPEZm is the setting RFPE for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS .

The security margin has to be increased to at least 1.2 in the case where φloop<60° to avoid
that FDPSPDIS characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone measurement characteristic.

Phase-to-earth fault in reverse direction M13142-151 v4

Reactive reach M13142-153 v2

The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional setting is
required.

Resistive reach M13142-156 v4

The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse zones. In
blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote end that is used
in the communication scheme. In equation 97 the index ZmRv references the specific zone to
be coordinated to.

RFRvPE min ³ 1.2 × RFPE ZmRv

EQUATION1316 V1 EN-US (Equation 97)

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction M13142-168 v2

Reactive reach M13142-170 v3

The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-earth reach setting X1. No extra
setting is required.

Resistive reach M13142-173 v4

In the same way as for phase-to-earth fault, the reach is automatically calculated based on
setting X1. The reach will be X1/tan(60°) =X1/√(3).

Line distance protection REL670 175

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Fault resistance reach M13142-176 v7

The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFFwPP, must cover RFPPZm with at least
25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-to-phase fault for the longest
overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS, see Figure 105. The minimum recommended
reach can be calculated according to equation 98.

RFFwPP ³ 1.25 × RFPP zm

EQUATION1318 V3 EN-US (Equation 98)

where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by FDPSPDIS .

Equation 98 modified is applicable also for the RFRvPP as follows:

RFRvPPmin ³ 1.25 × RFPPzmRv

EQUATION2264 V1 EN-US (Equation 99)

Equation 98 is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will cater for the
risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-phase fault when
FDPSPDIS characteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90 degrees (rotated 30° anti-
clock wise).

176 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X ( W / phase)

3 4 5
1

6 6

8 60°

60° 6 6
R (W / phase)
8

6 6

3 4 5

IEC09000257_1_en.vsd
IEC09000257 V1 EN-US

Figure 105: Relation between distance protection (ZMQPDIS) and FDPSPDIS

characteristic for phase-to-phase fault for φline>60° (setting parameters in
italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection) (red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone)
3 0.5 · RFRvPP PHS

4
X1PHS
tan ( 60° )

5 0.5 · RFFwPPPHS

6 0.5 · RFPPZm

7 X1PHS
8 X1Zm

Line distance protection REL670 177

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.2.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic M13142-312 v4

The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically to
define the load angle ArgLd, the blinder RLdFw in forward direction and blinder RLdRv in
reverse direction, as shown in figure 106.

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000050-1-en.vsd

IEC09000050 V1 EN-US

Figure 106: Load encroachment characteristic

The load angle ArgLd is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be suitable to
begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the maximum possible
load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20° must be used.

The blinder in forward direction, RLdFw, can be calculated according to equation 100.

2
U min
RLdFw = 0.8 ×
P exp max

where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power
Umin is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs
0.8 is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFw can be lesser than the calculated minimal
resistive load.

The resistive boundary RLdRv for load encroachment characteristic in reverse direction can be
calculated in the same way as RLdFw, but use maximum importing power that might occur
instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Umin voltage for this condition.

8.2.3.3 Minimum operate currents M13142-334 v5

FDPSPDIShas two current setting parameters which blocks the respective phase-to-earth loop
and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn) and phase difference
current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.

The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-earth (IMinOpPE) is set to securely
detect a single phase-to-earth fault at the furthest reach of the phase selection. It is
recommended to set IMinOpPP to double value of IMinOpPE.

The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-earth fault (INReleasePE) is set
securely detect single line-to-earth fault at remote end on the protected line. It is
recommended to set INBlockPP to double value of INReleasePE.

178 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.3 Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic

ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS, ZDRDIR IP14498-1 v4

8.3.1 Identification M14852-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, ZMQPDIS 21
quadrilateral characteristic (zone 1)
Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Distance protection zone, ZMQAPDIS 21

quadrilateral characteristic (zone
2-5) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 21D

Z<->

IEC09000167 V1 EN-US

8.3.2 Application IP14961-1 v2

M17048-3 v7
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex,
consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different
lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the
fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the
power system.

The distance protection function in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for
application on transmission and sub-transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it
also can be used on distribution levels.

The two inputs I3P — Three phase group signal for current and U3P — Three
phase group signal for voltage, must be connected to non-adaptive SMAI
blocks if ANY OF THE ZONES are set for directional operation. That is, the
parameter DFTReference in used SMAI must be set to InternalDFTRef. If
adaptive SMAI block is used this might result in a wrong directional and reach
evaluation.

8.3.2.1 System earthing M17048-9 v4

The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system.
Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solidly earthed networks M17048-12 v6

In solidly earthed systems, the transformer neutrals are connected directly to earth without
any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

Line distance protection REL670 179

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 107: Solidly earthed network

The earth-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very
limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some
marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The earth-fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 101:

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 101)

Where:
UL1 is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase), is considered

to be equal to Z1

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the earth-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero-sequence current in solidly earthed networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring techniques to detect earth faults. However, distance protection has
limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those
cases.

Effectively earthed networks M17048-38 v6

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-
fault factor is defined according to equation 102.

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 102)

180 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equation 103 and
equation 104.

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN-US (Equation 103)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN-US (Equation 104)

Where
R0 is the zero sequence source resistance

X0 is the zero sequence source reactance

R1 is the positive sequence source resistance

X1 is the positive sequence source reactance

The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring elements to detect earth faults. However, in the same way as for
solidlyearthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance
faults and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that
can carry out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance earthed networks M17048-57 v6

In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the
earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed
networks.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth-fault current is very
low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a
magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will
have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop
distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 105.

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN-US (Equation 105)

Line distance protection REL670 181

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Where:
3I0 is the earth-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the
reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN-US (Equation 106)

IEC05000216 V2 EN-US

Figure 108: High impedance earthing network

The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed
networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed
networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-earth faults immediately; they
clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network
operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth faults. To handle this type of
phenomenon, a separate function called Phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed in
medium and subtransmission network.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and
clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of
the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For
this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault
clearance for single phase-to-earth fault.

8.3.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end M17048-83 v5

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 109, the equation for the bus voltage UA at A side is:

(
U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z L + I A + I B ⋅ Rf )
EQUATION1273-IEC-650 V2 EN-US (Equation 107)

182 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

If we divide UA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.

UA IA + IB
ZA = = p ·ZL + ·Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274-IEC-650 V1 EN-US (Equation 108)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

UA UB
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL ESB
ESA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

IEC09000247-1-en.vsd
IEC09000247 V1 EN-US

Figure 109: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end
The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving factors for
justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in algorithm,
which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end. No settings are
required for this function.

8.3.2.3 Load encroachment M17048-589 v8

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an
external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The
effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 110. The entrance of the load
impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed and the way to handle this with
conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings, that is, to have a
security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the
drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect
resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure of
figure 110. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault
resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote line end. For example, for a given
setting of the load angle ArgLd for Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic function (FDPSPDIS), the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be
expanded according to the figure 110 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for
unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium
long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function

Line distance protection REL670 183

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

could preferably be switched off. See section "Load impedance limitation, without load
encroachment function".

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in FDPSPDIS function.

Z1

ArgLd

[1]
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-3-en.vsdx
IEC09000248 V3 EN-US

Figure 110: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic defined in Phase selection with load encroachment function
FDPSPDIS

8.3.2.4 Short line application M17048-97 v4

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a
fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see
table 19.

Table 19: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 1.1-5.5 km 5-25 km
Short line 5.5-11 km 25-50 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 110.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the voltage
drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching.

Load encroachment is normally no problem for short line applications.

8.3.2.5 Long transmission line application M17048-516 v5

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to achieve
high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote line end of long lines when the line is heavy
loaded.

184 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection
can generally be described as in table 20, long lines have Source impedance ratio (SIR’s) less
than 0.5.

Table 20: Definition of long and very long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated), see figure 111.

Zm

ZL

ARGLd ARGLd
R
ARGLd
ARGLd

RLdRv RLdFw

en05000220.vsd
IEC05000220 V1 EN-US

Figure 111: Characteristic for zone measurement for a long line

8.3.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling M17048-417 v2

General M17048-567 v3
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling,
and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The mutual
coupling does influence the zero sequence impedance to the fault point but it does not
normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is a
practice to neglect them.

Line distance protection REL670 185

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes)
that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can be in
service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different setting groups for
handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation
for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications M17048-560 v4

This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three most common operation modes are:

1. Parallel line in service.

2. Parallel line out of service and earthed.
3. Parallel line out of service and not earthed.

Parallel line in service M17048-424 v5

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 112.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for normal
lines without mutual coupling according to equation 109.

U ph U ph
Z= =
Z 0 − Z 1 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ K N
I ph + 3I 0 ⋅
3⋅ Z1
IECEQUATION1275 V2 EN-US (Equation 109)

186 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Where:
Uph is phase to earth voltage at the relay point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is earth fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< IEC09000250_1_en.vsd

IEC09000250 V1 EN-US

Figure 112: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 113.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 113: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed according
to equation 110.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
U ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
IECEQUATION1276 V3 EN-US (Equation 110)

By dividing equation 110 by equation 109 and after some simplification we can write the
impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN-US (Equation 111)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line
impedance.

Line distance protection REL670 187

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected
line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current
on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same
direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is weak. If
considering a single phase-to-earth fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel
line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end is zero, the voltage UA in
the faulty phase at A side as in equation 112.

(
U A = p ⋅ ZI L I ph + K N ⋅ 3I 0 + K Nm ⋅ 3I 0 p )
IECEQUATION1278 V2 EN-US (Equation 112)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN-US (Equation 113)

Simplification of equation 113, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation
112 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

 3I ⋅ p 
U A = p ⋅ ZI L  I ph + K N ⋅ 3I 0 + K Nm ⋅ 0 
 2− p 
IECEQUATION1280 V2 EN-US (Equation 114)

If we finally divide equation 114 with equation 109 we can draw the impedance present to the
IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
2 − p
Z = p ⋅ ZI L  
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN-US (Equation 115)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that
is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is
most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is
normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally
increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect
the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and earthed M17048-477

M17048-479 v3
v7

188 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000251_1_en.vsd
IEC09000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 114: The parallel line is out of service and earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both line ends on the bus bar side of the
line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero
sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 115.

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 115: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in series with parallel of (Z0-
Z0m) and Z0m which is equal to equation 116.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 116)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence,
mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence, mutual reactance
X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters according to equation 117
and equation 118 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the
underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 117)

 X 0m 2 
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 118)

Line distance protection REL670 189

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Parallel line out of service and not earthed M17048-537 v5

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000254_1_en.vsd
IEC09000254 V1 EN-US

Figure 116: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the
zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero-
sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit
shown in figure 116

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance
protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence
impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and
earthed at both ends.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 117: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not earthed
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 119.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f )
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f ( )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN-US (Equation 119)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 120 and equation 121.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN-US (Equation 120)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN-US (Equation 121)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 122.

190 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

( )
Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
Re K u = 1 +
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2 2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN-US (Equation 122)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 123.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN-US (Equation 123)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at
least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

8.3.2.7 Tapped line application M17048-243 v3

M17048-245 v4

A
B

BC

IEC09000160-3-en.vsd
IEC09000160 V3 EN-US

Figure 118: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed
from remote end" , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will
be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 124)

Line distance protection REL670 191

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

 I A + IC   U 2 2
Z C = Z Trf +  Z CT + ⋅ Z TF  ⋅  
 IC   U1 
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3510 V3 EN-US (Equation 125)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the

transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf Transformer impedance

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the
fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(see the dotted line in figure 118), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in
one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1
settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance M17048-597 v8

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance,
resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be
calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 126)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and to give extra margin to the
influence of wind speed and temperature.
I is the actual fault current in A.

192 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth RFPE and phase-to-phase
RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to
obtain reliable fault detection. However for zone1 it is necessary to limit the reach according to
setting instructions in order to avoid overreach.

8.3.3 Setting guidelines IP14962-1 v1

8.3.3.1 General SEMOD55087-5 v7

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) are done in
primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is
used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in
ZMQPDIS.

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.The load transfer on the protected line should
be considered for resistive phase to earth faults
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.3.3.2 Setting of zone 1 SEMOD55087-22 v3

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section
"Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in the
particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the
parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in
both ends. The setting of earth-fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel
line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).

8.3.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone SEMOD55087-26 v6

The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at
remote end is considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

Line distance protection REL670 193

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the
protected line.

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current infeed
from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If any of the above gives a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must be
increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the
telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone 2
must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered
under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F see figure 119, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 127)

Z AC Z CB

F
A IA C Z CF IB B

I A+ I C

Z< IC

IEC09000256-2-en.vsd
IEC09000256 V2 EN-US

Figure 119: Setting of overreaching zone

8.3.3.4 Setting of reverse zone SEMOD55087-74 v4

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal
logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus
bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching
zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
Equation 128 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN-US (Equation 128)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.

194 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

8.3.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application SEMOD55087-50 v2

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1 SEMOD55087-52 v3

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of the
protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2 SEMOD55087-55 v4

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all
cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in
service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent
zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 113 in section
"Parallel line in service".

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to
at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN-US (Equation 129)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN-US (Equation 130)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN-US (Equation 131)

If the denominator in equation 131 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and
imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN-US (Equation 132)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN-US (Equation 133)

Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends SEMOD55087-77 v3

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means
that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single
phase-to-earth faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

Line distance protection REL670 195

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R +X ø 0 0

EQUATION561 V1 EN-US (Equation 134)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN-US (Equation 135)

8.3.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction SEMOD55087-84 v7

Set the resistive reach R1 independently for each zone.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the phase-
to-earth faults RFPE for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining reach setting
parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically
follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the
protected zone is equal to equation 136.

1
R  2  R1Zx  R0Zx   RFPEZx
3
IECEQUATION2303 V2 EN-US (Equation 136)

 loop  arctan
 2  X1Zx  X0Zx 
 2  R1Zx  R0Zx 
EQUATION2304 V2 EN-US (Equation 137)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition to
minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPEZx  4.5  X1Zx

IECEQUATION2305 V2 EN-US (Equation 138)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault
resistance for phase-to-earth faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit the setting of
the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement in the phase
domain to:

RFPPZx  6  X 1Zx
IECEQUATION2306 V3 EN-US (Equation 139)

8.3.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function SEMOD55087-97 v9

The following instructions are valid when Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS is not used. The setting of the load resistance
RLdFw and RLdRv in FDPSPDIS must in this case be set to max value (3000). If FDPSPDISis to
be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according
to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to
ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load
impedance. The minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

196 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 140)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 141)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

As a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase

conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under
combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-
phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

RFFwPE ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Zload

IEC13000273 V1 EN-US (Equation 142)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-
earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance
angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three times the load-
impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 143.

 2 ⋅ R1 + R 0 
RFFwPE ≤ 0.8 ⋅ Zload min ⋅  cos ∂ − ⋅ sin ∂ 
 2 ⋅ X1+ X 0 
IEC13000274 V1 EN-US (Equation 143)

Where:
∂ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load
impedance.

RFFwPE ≤ 1.6 ⋅ Zload

IEC13000275 V1 EN-US (Equation 144)

Line distance protection REL670 197

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Equation 144 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase
faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More
accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 145.

 R1 
RFFwPP ≤ 1.6 ⋅ Zload min ⋅  cos ∂ − ⋅ sin ∂ 
 X1 
IEC13000276 V1 EN-US (Equation 145)

Set the fault resistance coverage RFRwPP and RFRwPE to the same value as in forward
direction, if that suits the application. All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no
Power swing detection function ZMRPSB is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety
margin of approximately 20% in cases when a ZMRPSB function is activated in the IED, refer to
the description of Power swing detection function ZMRPSB.

8.3.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load

encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function activated SEMOD55087-138 v5

The parameters for shaping of the load encroachment characteristic are found in the
description of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
(FDPSPDIS).

8.3.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents SEMOD55087-141 v5

The operation of Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) can be

blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and
IMinOpPE.

The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen
current for the analogue input channels. The value has been proven in practice to be suitable in
most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to
increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IBase. This
happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of
very long transmission lines.

Setting IMinOpIN blocks the phase-to-earth loop if 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of
IMinOpIN is 5% of IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the
distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

8.3.3.10 Directional impedance element for quadrilateral characteristics M16923-139 v6

The evaluation of the directionality takes place in Directional impedance quadrilateral function
ZDRDIR. Equation 146 and equation 147 are used to classify that the fault is in forward
direction for phase-to-earth fault and phase-to-phase fault.

0.8 × U 1L1 + 0.2 × U 1L1 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
EQUATION725 V2 EN-US (Equation 146)

For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.

198 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

0.8 × U 1L1 L 2 + 0.2 × U 1L1 L 2 M

- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1 L 2
EQUATION726 V2 EN-US (Equation 147)

where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 120.
is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1
is positive sequence memorized phase voltage in phase L1
U 1L1M
is phase current in phase L1
I L1
is voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2
is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
U 1L1L 2 M
is current difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
I L1L 2

The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees respectively
(as shown in figure 120). It should not be changed unless system studies have shown the
necessity.

ZDRDIR gives binary coded directional information per measuring loop on the output
STDIRCND.

STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048

Line distance protection REL670 199

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

ArgNegRes

ArgDir
R

en05000722.vsd
IEC05000722 V1 EN-US

Figure 120: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault in Directional
impedance quadrilateral function ZDRDIR

The reverse directional characteristic is equal to the forward characteristic rotated by 180
degrees.

The polarizing voltage is available as long as the positive sequence voltage exceeds 5% of the
set base voltage UBase. So the directional element can use it for all unsymmetrical faults
including close-in faults.

For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same positive
sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.

The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is restored.

After 100 ms the following occurs:

• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current (between 10
and 30% of the set IED rated current IBase), the condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in the
reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets until the
positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.

8.3.3.11 Setting of timers for distance protection zones SEMOD55087-147 v6

The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of each
other . Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity
reasons. Time delays for all zones can be set in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping
function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation
parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the phase-to-earthtPE and for the
phase-to-phase tPP measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further
increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.

200 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.4 Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic

ZMHPDIS SEMOD154227-1 v4

8.4.1 Identification
SEMOD154447-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE

identification identification C37.2 device
number
Full-scheme distance protection, ZMHPDIS 21
mho characteristic

Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

8.4.2 Application SEMOD154444-1 v1

8.4.2.1 Functionality SEMOD154453-4 v6

Transmission and sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and
more complex, consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very
different lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands
on the fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level
of the power system.

Full-scheme distance measuring, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) in the IED is designed
to meet basic requirements for application on transmission and sub-transmission lines (solid
earthed systems) although it also can be used on distribution levels.

8.4.2.2 System earthing SEMOD154453-11 v3

The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system. In
the following some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted.

Solid earthed networks SEMOD154453-14 v5

In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any
impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 121: Solidly earthed network

The earth-fault current is as high as or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance has
very limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have
some marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

Line distance protection REL670 201

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The earth-fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 148:

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 148)

Where:
UL1 is the phase to earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero-sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance
measuring technique to detect earth fault. However, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented
with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.

Effectively earthed networks SEMOD154453-40 v5

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-
fault factor is defined according to equation 149.

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 149)

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equation 150 and
equation 151.

X 0 ≤ 3 ⋅ X1
EQUATION1269 V4 EN-US (Equation 150)

R0 £ X 1
EQUATION1270 V4 EN-US (Equation 151)

202 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Where
R0 is the zero sequence resistance

X0 is the zero sequence reactance

X1 is the positive sequence reactance

The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring element to detect earth fault. However, in the same way as for solid
earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults
and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry
out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance earthed networks SEMOD154453-58 v4

In high impedance networks the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth
through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed
networks.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth-fault current is very
low compared to the short-circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a
magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero-sequence voltage (3U0) will
have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop
distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 152.

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN-US (Equation 152)

where
3I0 is the earth-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the
inductive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN-US (Equation 153)

Line distance protection REL670 203

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IEC05000216 V2 EN-US

Figure 122: High impedance earthing network

The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed
networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed
networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-earth faults immediately; they
clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network
operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth faults. To handle this type phenomena
Phase preference logic function (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common to be used in
transmission applications.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and
clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of
the zero-sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For
this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault
clearance for single phase-to-earth fault.

8.4.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end SEMOD154453-84 v4

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 123, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage VA at left side as:

(
U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z L + I A + I B ⋅ Rf )
EQUATION1273-IEC-650 V2 EN-US (Equation 154)

If we divide VA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

UA IA + IB
ZA = = p ·ZL + ·Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274-IEC-650 V1 EN-US (Equation 155)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

204 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

UA UB
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL ESB
ESA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

IEC09000247-1-en.vsd
IEC09000247 V1 EN-US

Figure 123: Influence of fault current infeed from remote end.

The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors for justify
complementary protection to distance protection.

8.4.2.4 Load encroachment SEMOD154453-97 v4

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an
external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The
effect of load encroachment for the mho circle is illustrated to the left in figure 124. The
entrance of the load impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed and the way
to handle this with conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings, that
is, to have a security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance.
This has the drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to
detect resistive faults.

jX jX

Load Load Load Load

R R
Load Load Load
Load
No
operation

en06000403.vsd
IEC06000403 V1 EN-US

Figure 124: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
The Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function shapes
the characteristic according to the diagram on the right in figure 124. The load encroachment
algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-
earth faults at remote line end. For example, for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd (see
figure 125) for the Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho function
(FMPSPDIS), the zone reach can be expanded according to the diagram on the right in
figure 124 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to
load encroachment. The part of the load encroachment sector that comes inside the mho
circle will not cause a trip if FMPSPDIS is activated for the zone measurement. This is valid in
both directions.

Line distance protection REL670 205

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

RLdFw

ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000127-1-en.vsd
IEC09000127 V1 EN-US

Figure 125: Load encroachment of Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for
mho function FMPSPDIS characteristic
The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium
long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and
load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function
could preferably be switched off.

The main settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in Faulty phase
identification with load encroachment for mho function FMPSPDIS. The operation of load
encroachment function is always activated. To deactivate the function, setting LoadEnchMode
should be set off or the setting of RLdFw and RLdRv must be set to a value much higher than
the maximal load impedance.

8.4.2.5 Short line application SEMOD154453-105 v6

The definition of short, medium and long lines is found in IEEE Std C37.113-1999. The length
classification is defined by the ratio of the source impedance at the protected line’s terminal
to the protected line’s impedance (SIR). SIR’s of about 4 or greater generally define a short line.
Medium lines are those with SIR’s greater than 0.5 and less than 4.

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a
fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see
table 21.

206 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Table 21: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 1.1-5.5 km 5-25 km
Short line 5-11 km 25-50 km

The use of load encroachment algorithm in Full-scheme distance protection, mho

characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults
without conflict with the load impedance (see to the right of figure 124).

For very short line applications the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to that the
voltage drop distribution through out the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching.

Load encroachment is normally not a problem for short line applications so the load
encroachment function could be switched off meaning LoadEnchMode = Off. This will increase
the possibility to detect resistive close-in faults.

8.4.2.6 Long transmission line application SEMOD154453-127 v5

For long transmission lines the load encroachment will normally be a major concern. It is well
known that it is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote end of a
long line when the line is heavily loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection is
noted in table 22.

Table 22: Definition of long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

The possibility to use the binary information from the load encroachment algorithm improves
the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk
for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated). The possibility to also use the
blinder together with the load encroachment algorithm will considerably increase the security
but might also lower the dependability since the blinder might cut off a larger part of the
operating area of the circle (see to the right of figure 124).

It is recommended to use at least one of the load discrimination functions for long heavy
loaded transmission lines.

8.4.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling SEMOD154453-148 v2

General SEMOD154453-150 v4
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
lines. The lines need not to be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling, and
some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The reason to
the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence voltage
inversion that occurs.

Line distance protection REL670 207

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small and it is a practice to neglect them.

Mutual coupling effect

The mutual coupling is based on the known induction law, that a current induces a longitudinal
voltage in the parallel circuit.

The induced voltage is:

U = ZM × I
IECEQUATION14002 V1 EN-US (Equation 156)

ZM

IEC13000253-1-en.vsd
IEC13000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 126: Mutual coupling

Mutual induction on three-phase transmission lines

In case of three phase lines, mutual coupling in the positive and negative sequence
components is relatively weak and can be neglected. These are of the order of 5% of the
related self-impedance for non-transposed and lower than 3% for transposed lines. The zero-
sequence currents are equal and in phase in all the three conductors of the three-phase line. In
this case, the three-phase conductors can be replaced by a representative single conductor for
each parallel line and the mutual coupling between lines and their earth return wires is then
reduced to a single-phase problem.

IO
IO
IO

EO

UO

IEC13000254-1-en.vsd
IEC13000254 V1 EN-US

Figure 127: Mutual coupling of two three-phase lines

U0
Z 0m = = 3× ZM
I0
IECEQUATION14003 V1 EN-US (Equation 157)

Where ZM is the mutual impedance between two conductors with earth return as defined
above. This zero sequence mutual impedance can be as high as 70% of the self-zero sequence
impedance of a protected line when the parallel lines are mounted on the same tower. The
mutual coupling effect has therefore a strong impact on the earth-fault relaying.

208 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2% of the self impedance) and it is a
practice to neglect them.

Classes of networks
From an application point-of-view, there are three types of network configurations (classes)
which must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Class 1: Parallel line with common positive and zero-sequence network

2. Class 2: Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated or separated zero-sequence
network
3. Class 3: Parallel circuits with positive and zero-sequence sources isolated or separated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

The most used configuration is class 1 network: Parallel circuit with common positive and zero-
sequence sources. In this type of networks, the parallel transmission lines terminate at
common nodes at both ends.

For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be
in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups
to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

Impact on distance protection

Distance relaying of ph-ph and three-phase faults is not influenced by the parallel line. For
protection of phase-to-earth faults, however a measuring error occurs. In principle, this error
appears due to the fact that the parallel line earth-current (IEP = 3.I0P) induces a voltage IEP.
Z0m/3 in to the fault loop.

The distance relay phase-to-earth units measure:

U ph
Z =
I ph + K N × I E
IECEQUATION14004 V1 EN-US (Equation 158)

Where:
Uph is phase to earth short circuit voltage at the relay location in
the faulted phase
Iph is short circuit current in the faulted phase

IE earth current of faulty line

KN is earth compensation factor for single circuit set at the relay

given by equation

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
IECEQUATION14005 V1 EN-US (Equation 159)

Line distance protection REL670 209

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The short circuit voltage can be calculated as:

Z 0 - Z1 Z Z - Z1 Z
U ph = I ph × Z1 + × I E + 0 m × I Ep = Z1 ( I ph + 0 × I E + 0 m × I Ep )
3 3 3Z1 3Z1
IECEQUATION14006 V1 EN-US (Equation 160)

Where IEp is the ground current in the parallel line.

As explained above, the distance relay phase-to-earth measures:

U ph
Z =
I ph + K N × I E
IECEQUATION14004 V1 EN-US (Equation 161)

Z 0 - Z1 Z
I ph + × I E + 0 m × I Ep
U ph 3Z1 3Z1
Z = = Z1 ×
I ph + K n × I E I ph + K n × I E
IECEQUATION14007 V1 EN-US (Equation 162)

Z 0 - Z1 Z0m
KN = K Nm =
Taking earth compensation factor 3Z 1 for single circuit and 3Z1 impedance
measured by distance relay can be written as:

é K Nm × I Ep ù
Z = Z1 ê1 + ú
êë I ph + K N × I E úû
IECEQUATION14010 V1 EN-US (Equation 163)

Where:
IE earth current of faulty line

IEP is earth current of the parallel line

Z1 is line positive sequence impedance

KN is earth compensation factor for single circuit set at the relay

given by equation
Z0m is the zero sequence mutual coupling between the faulted and
the parallel line

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
IECEQUATION14005 V1 EN-US (Equation 164)

Z0m
K Nm =
3 ⋅ Z1
IEC13000297 V1 EN-US (Equation 165)

210 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

From the above it can be deduced:

• Error is proportional to the mutual coupling factor K0m

• The error increases with the parallel line earth current in relation to the relay current
• The relay underreaches when IEP is in phase with Iph + KN . IE .

For a remote end terminal fault, this underreaching effect can be as high as 25%.

The distance protection zone reaches vary with the switching state of the parallel line
configuration. We consider the three most common operation modes:

1. Case 1: Parallel line out of service and earthed at both ends

2. Case 2: Parallel line switched off and not earthed or earthed only at one line end
3. Case 3: Both lines in service.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line.

Compensation of the mutual zero sequence impedance of parallel circuit can be achieved by
appropriate selection of zero-sequence compensation factor KN when parallel line can be in
service, out of service, or out of service and earthed at both ends.

Five zone distance protection, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) can compensate for the
influence of a zero sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth
faults in the following two ways, by using:

• Different setting values that influence the earth -return compensation for different
distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

8.4.2.8 Tapped line application SEMOD154453-265 v2

Line distance protection REL670 211

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

SEMOD154453-267 v4

A
B

BC

IEC09000160-3-en.vsd
IEC09000160 V3 EN-US

Figure 128: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed
from remote end", that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will
be

IA + IC
Z A = Z AT + × Z TF
IA
EQUATION2302 V1 EN-US (Equation 166)

æ ö æ U2 ö
2
I A + IC
ZC = Z Trf + ç ZCT + × Z TF ÷ × ç ÷
è IC ø è U1 ø
IECEQUATION1750 V1 EN-US (Equation 167)

where
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the

transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the
fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the

212 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(see the dotted line in figure 128), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in
one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1
settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

8.4.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD154496-1 v2

8.4.3.1 General SEMOD154469-4 v7

The settings for Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic function (ZMHPDIS) are
done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog
input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary
values used in ZMHPDIS.

The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the terminals of the protected line, the fault
resistance is considerable and the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

The setting values of all parameters that belong to ZMHPDIS must correspond to the
parameters of the protected line and be coordinated to the selectivity plan for the network.

Use different setting groups for the cases when the parallel line is in operation, out of service
and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. In this way it is possible to
optimize the settings for each system condition.

Appropriate selection of zero sequence compensation factor KNMagx and KNAngx (where
x=1-5) when parallel line can be in service, out of service, or out of service and earthed at both
ends.

Line distance protection REL670 213

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

When Directional impedance element for mho characteristic (ZDMRDIR) is used

together with Fullscheme distance protection, mho characteristic (ZMHPDIS)
the following settings for parameter DirEvalType in ZDMRDIR is vital:

• alternative Comparator is strongly recommended

• alternative Imp/Comp should generally not be used
• alternative Impedance should not be used. This alternative is intended for
use together with Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic
(ZMQPDIS)

8.4.3.2 Setting of zone 1 GUID-4A9FE32F-DA27-401A-ADA1-94060A9F6C76 v1

The zone 1 distance elements must be set to underreach a protected circuit to ensure external
fault security.

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section
“Setting of zones for parallel line application” and select the case(s) / options that are valid in
the particular application.

By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the parallel line is in
operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends.

8.4.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone

8.4.3.4 Setting of zone 2 GUID-5A41709F-8AB2-4A4B-9B3E-3B48EBD0DE0D v1

Zone 2 distance elements must be set according to the following criteria:

• Zone 2 should overreach all terminals of the protected circuit by an acceptable margin
(typically 20% of highest impedance seen) for all fault conditions and for all intended
modes of system operation
• As far as possible, zone 2 reach should be less than zone 1 coverage of all adjacent lines to
minimize the required zone 2 time delay setting.

It is necessary to consider the underreaching effects of zero sequence mutual coupling on

earth-fault impedance measurement when setting the reach of zone 2 distance protection to
meet the primary reach criterion for parallel circuits.

8.4.3.5 Setting of zone 3 GUID-9FAC19EC-3334-4CA5-80A7-4CF8404E9383 v1

Zone 3 distance elements must be set according to the following criteria where possible:

• Zone 3 should overreach the remote terminal of the longest adjacent line by an acceptable
margin (typically 20% of highest impedance seen) for all fault conditions and in feed
conditions associated with all intended modes of system operation
• Zone 3 reach should be less than the zone 2 protection coverage of the shortest adjacent
transmission circuit, and it should not see through power transformers into distribution
systems in order to minimize the required zone 3 time delay setting.

214 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.4.3.6 Setting of reverse zone GUID-F79912AC-E34A-4A6B-90B4-5F4619613CE5 v1

The criterion for setting zone 4 reverse reach would be as under.

• The zone 4 reverse reach must adequately cover expected levels of apparent bus bar fault
resistance when allowing for multiple in feeds from other circuits.

It is difficult to precisely apply the above criterion and in such cases the practice is to set zone
4 reverse reach to about 25% of the associated zone 1 forward reach.

With a reverse reach setting of less than the zone 1 reach of distance protection for the
shortest line connected to the local bus bar, the zone 4 time delay would only need to co-
ordinate with bus bar main protection fault clearance and with zone 1 fault clearance for lines
out of the same substation. This would be according to the zone 2 time setting guidelines.

Parallel line in service

Setting of zones for parallel line application GUID-27298DF4-E681-47D4-BD44-709F76B85344 v2

The distance protection zone reaches vary with the switching state of the parallel line
configuration. Below the configurations and the corresponding formulas for the reach
calculation are given for the most important cases. In these equations, x stands for ratio of
distance to fault and length of the line, and Z stands for the impedance seen by the relay.

Case 1: Parallel line switched-off and earthed at both ends:

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
x Ph-G
IEC13000255-1-en.vsd
IEC13000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 129: The parallel line is out of service and earthed

Z 0 - Z1 Z
1+ ( - K Nm 0 m )
3Z1 Z0
Z = x × Z1 ×
1 + KN
IECEQUATION14011 V1 EN-US (Equation 168)

Where:
Z1 is line positive sequence impedance

KN is earth compensation factor for single circuit set at the relay

given by equation
Z0m is the zero sequence mutual coupling between the faulted and
the parallel line
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 215

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

x is the ratio of distance to fault and length of the line

Z 0 - Z1
KN =
3 × Z1
IECEQUATION14005 V1 EN-US (Equation 169)

Z0m
K Nm =
3 ⋅ Z1
IEC13000297 V1 EN-US (Equation 170)

Case 2: Parallel line switched off and not earthed or earthed at one line end

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
x Ph-G
IEC13000256-1-en.vsd
IEC13000256 V1 EN-US

Figure 130: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed

Z 0 - Z1
1+
3Z1
Z = x × Z1 ×
1 + KN
IECEQUATION14012 V1 EN-US (Equation 171)

Case 3: Both lines in service

x Ph-G

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< IEC13000257-1-en.vsd

IEC13000257 V1 EN-US

Figure 131: Class 1, parallel line in service

GUID-354B9143-D19E-4835-BCEA-737D7C5E02AA V1 EN-US (Equation 172)

216 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Some observations from above equations for case 1, 2, and 3 GUID-6B411616-EB82-4447-BC2D-375D042BE110 v1

In case 1, the lowest impedance is measured, that is, the highest reach occurs due to the
parallel connection of the zero-sequence systems of both lines.

In case 3, the highest impedance is measured, which corresponds to the shortest reach.

The mutual impedance will influence the distance measurement of ground faults and cause
either an extension or a reduction of the reach relative to the set reach.

The maximum overreach will occur when the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both
ends. During an earth fault, a counteracting current is induced in the earthed line. The counter
current will reduce the apparent zero sequence impedance seen by the relay in the faulty line.

When both lines are in service under normal generating conditions, the distance relay will
underreach, but in the case of an extremely weak source behind the relay, an overreach may
occur. However, this overreach will not cause the relay to operate for faults beyond the end of
the protected line.

From the operational point-of-view, an extension of the zone 1 beyond the end of the line is
not acceptable.

Alternatives for underreaching and overreaching zones GUID-A881F22E-D827-4B20-9C0F-477B3A20B0EA v2

As stated earlier, the distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a
zero sequence mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the
following ways, by using:

• Alternative 1: The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return
compensation for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters
• Alternative 2: Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of
a protected multi circuit line.

Alternative 1: Different kN setting values within the same setting group

Setting of underreaching zone GUID-68709DD6-D5A7-4F04-ACE5-350B1F835364 v1
The set zone should fulfill two criteria:

• It should avoid overreach beyond the remote line terminal in case 1

• It should cover as much of the line as possible, at least 50% plus a safety margin in the
most unfavorable case 3.

A possible setting strategy is to set the zone to for example 85% of line length for case 1 and
check afterwards if sufficient reach exists in the cases 2 and 3.

Setting of zone 1 GUID-B0D8E294-C850-4776-B31A-2669D2684C4C v2

For case 1, parallel line having both ends earthed , zone 1 overreach caused by the earthed
parallel line can be avoided by the KN factor setting for zone 1 suitably.

The compensation factor KN compensates for the additional loop impedance under earth fault
conditions. To eliminate the overreach caused by the earthed parallel line, set the KN1 for the
zone 1 as:

Z 0 - Z1 Z
KN1 = - K Nm 0 m
3Z1 Z0
IECEQUATION14018 V1 EN-US (Equation 173)

This KN1 setting for zone 1 only affects the reach for earth faults while the reach for two and
three-phase faults are unaffected.

Line distance protection REL670 217

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

For case 2, when the parallel line is out of operation but not earthed, the zone 1 nominal reach
for earth faults is reduced. The measured impedance can be calculated:

Z 0 - Z1
1+
3Z1
Z = x × Z1 ×
1 + KN1
IECEQUATION14015 V1 EN-US (Equation 174)

The reduced reach must be taken into account when using a permissive underreaching
scheme.

For case 3, when the parallel line is in service, the reach for earth faults can further reduce
because of the mutual coupling. The measured impedance can be calculated:

Z 0 - Z1 x
1+ + K Nm
3Z1 2-x
Z = x × Z1 ×
1 + KN1
IECEQUATION14014 V1 EN-US (Equation 175)

This reduction of the reach is most pronounced with no in-feed in the line terminal nearest
fault. When the reach is reduced at one line end, it is extended in the opposite one. Therefore,
this reach reduction does not affect a permissive underreaching scheme.

Setting of overreaching zone GUID-1C500D3E-12A2-4F0F-A5A8-A8054677DF4D v1

Zone 1 is not allowed to overreach under any condition. Overreaching zones 2 and 3 are not
allowed to underreach the whole line under any condition.

Setting of zone 2 GUID-DB83C2EF-A40F-4E18-BFC5-D617CE0C0438 v2

The overreaching zone 2 for backup or permissive overreaching distance protection schemes
must at least safely cover 100% of the line with a safety margin of about 20%. This must be
guaranteed for the most unfavorable condition of case 3.

The earth-fault compensation factor must be adjusted to the case of parallel line in service
(case 3) where the highest earth-fault impedance occurs.

Z 0 - Z1
KN 2 = - K Nm
3Z1
IECEQUATION14019 V1 EN-US (Equation 176)

For case 1, the measured impedance can be calculated by the following expression:

Z 0 - Z1 Z
1+ ( - K Nm 0 m )
3Z1 Z0
Z = x × Z1 ×
1 + KN 2
IECEQUATION14017 V1 EN-US (Equation 177)

For case 2, the measured impedance can be calculated by the following expression:

218 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Z 0 - Z1
1+
3Z1
Z = x × Z1 ×
1 + KN 2
IECEQUATION14016 V1 EN-US (Equation 178)

For both case 1 and 2, the overreach would be much higher. For case 3, the function measures
the correct impedance.

The normal influence of infeeds is to be added to these influences of the mutual coupling for
setting of remote backup zones.

Setting of zone 3 GUID-3F20E209-A29C-4D16-84AB-F0594DC10AC0 v1

The reach of zone 3 is affected as well, but when zone is normally set with sufficient margin to
always overreach the remote line end, KN3 for zone 3 can be set as for a single line, that is:

Z 0 - Z1
KN 3 =
3Z1
IECEQUATION14020 V1 EN-US (Equation 179)

Alternative 2: Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a

protected multi circuit line GUID-DB67F163-289C-40C6-A850-074FFE61DEBC v2
Different group of setting parameters can be used for the three cases:

• Parallel line switched off and earthed at both ends

• Parallel line switched off and not earthed or earthed at only one end
• Both lines in service.

With this method of setting the zero sequence compensation factor KN can for zone 1 and zone
2 be even better adapted for the real system conditions.

The table describes earth-fault compensation settings to be adopted for different groups.

Table 23: Different groups of settings

Group Operation mode Zone 1 and Zone 2 Zone 3 and Reverse Zone
Group1 Case 1: Parallel
line switched off Z 0 - Z1 Z Z 0 - Z1
and earthed at
KN1 = - K Nm 0 m KN =
both ends
3Z1 Z0 3 × Z1
Group2 Case 2: Parallel
line switched off Z 0 - Z1 Z 0 - Z1
and not earthed
KN = KN =
or earthed at only
3 × Z1 3 × Z1
one end
Group3 Both lines in
service Z 0 - Z1 Z0L - Z L
KN = - K Nm KN =
3Z1 3Z L

For a discussion on other options of settings, refer to CIGRE SC34 report, WG-04 November
1991 “Application guide on protection of complex transmission network configuration”.

Line distance protection REL670 219

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.4.3.7 Consideration of zero sequence mutual coupling for parallel circuits GUID-D25BD616-CED9-4B82-8958-F90C4F819692 v1

For both zone 2 and zone 3 elements, the underreaching effect of zero sequence mutual
coupling for remote earth faults must also be considered in relation to the primary reach
setting criterion.

8.4.3.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function SEMOD154469-91 v5

The following instruction is valid when the load encroachment function or blinder function is
not activated (BlinderMode=Off).The load encroachment function will not be activated if
RLdFw and RLdRv is set to a value higher than expected minimal load impedance. If the load
encroachment or blinder function is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the
load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum
permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin
between the relay boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance
(Ω/phase) is calculated as:

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 180)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 181)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set impedance
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

For setting of the earth-fault loop, the following formula can be used:

Z Load
ZPE £ 1.6 ×
2(1 - cos( b ))
EQUATION1604 V1 EN-US (Equation 182)

where:
Zload = magnitude of minimum load impedance

ZPE = 180°-2·g =180°–2(ArgPE-QLoad)

220 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The formula is derived by trigonometric analyze of the figure 132. The length of the vector from
the origin O to the point F on the circle is defined by the law of cosine. The result gives the
maximum diameter (RFPE) for which the load impedance touch the circle with the given load
condition. Use an extra margin of 20% to give sufficient distance between the calculated
minimum load impedance and relay boundary.

jX

ZPE/2 (Ref)
rc
φ
F
? ArgLd
ß
Load R
O Ohm/phase
2
d|/
oa
|Zl
d|
oa
|Zl

en06000406.vsd
IEC06000406 V1 EN-US

Figure 132: Definition of the setting condition to avoid load encroachment for earth-fault
loop
The maximum setting for phase-to-phase fault can be defined by trigonometric analyze of the
same figure 132. The formula to avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring
elements will thus be according to equation 183.

Z Load
ZPP £ 1.6 ×
2 × (1 - cos(j PP))
EQUATION1605 V1 EN-US (Equation 183)

where:
jPP = 180°–2·(ArgPP-QLoad)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element or blinder
is activated for the protection zones. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in
cases when a power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the
description of the power swing detection function.

8.4.3.9 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated SEMOD154469-129 v3

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the
description of Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS), refer
to section "Load encroachment characteristics".

Line distance protection REL670 221

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.4.3.10 Setting of minimum operate currents SEMOD154469-132 v5

The operation of the distance function will be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is
below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE.

The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base
current for the analog input channels. The values have been proven in practice to be suitable in
most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to
increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operate current down to 10% of IBase.

The minimum operate fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the
distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

8.4.3.11 Setting of directional mode SEMOD154469-176 v3

Setting of the directional mode is by default set to forward by setting the parameter DirMode
to Forward.

The selection of Offset mho can be used for sending block signal in blocking teleprotection
scheme, switch onto fault application and so on.

The Reverse mode might be use in comparison schemes where it is necessary to absolute
discriminate between forward and reverse fault.

8.4.3.12 Setting of direction for offset mho SEMOD154469-181 v3

If offset mho has been selected, one can select if the offset mho shall be Non-Directional,
Forward or Reverse by setting the parameter OfffsetMhoDir.

When forward or reverse operation is selected, then the operation characteristic will be cut off
by the directional lines used for the mho characteristic. The setting is by default set to Non-
Directional.

8.4.3.13 Setting of timers for distance protection zones SEMOD154469-138 v7

The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of each
other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay if so required for selectivity
reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping
function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation
parameter to Off.

Different time delays are possible for the phase-to-earth tPE and for the phase-to-phase tPP
measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the total
flexibility of a distance protection.

In the case of evolving faults or momentary current transformer saturation conditions, the pick
up of the zones may get delayed. Zone timer logic improves the operating time in such
conditions. The zone timer logic can be set using the parameter ZnTimerSel. The triggering
signal of phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase timers can be selected using ZnTimerSel.

222 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.5 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for

earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS SEMOD154561-1 v2

8.5.1 Identification
SEMOD154542-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMPDIS 21
quadrilateral for earth faults (zone 1)
Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Fullscheme distance protection, ZMMAPDIS 21

quadrilateral for earth faults (zone
2-5) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

8.5.2 Application SEMOD154697-1 v1

8.5.2.1 Introduction SEMOD154680-4 v2

Sub transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex,
consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different
lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the
fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the
power system.

The distance protection function in IED is designed to meet basic requirements for application
on transmission and sub transmission lines (solid earthed systems) although it also can be
used on distribution levels.

8.5.2.2 System earthing SEMOD154680-11 v2

The type of system earthing plays an important roll when designing the protection system. In
the following some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted.

Solid earthed networks SEMOD154680-14 v3

In solid earthed systems the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any
impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 133: Solidly earthed network

The earth fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the earth fault current. The shunt admittance has

Line distance protection REL670 223

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

very limited influence on the earth fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have
some marginal influence on the earth fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The earth fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation184:

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 184)

Where:
UL1 is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)
Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive
ZN is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance
measuring technique to detect earth fault. However, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented
with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.

Effectively earthed networks SEMOD154680-40 v4

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth
fault factor is defined according to equation 185.

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 185)

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equation 186 and
equation 187.

X 0 ≤ 3 ⋅ X1
EQUATION1269 V4 EN-US (Equation 186)

224 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

R0 £ X 1
EQUATION1270 V4 EN-US (Equation 187)

The magnitude of the earth fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring element to detect fault. However, in the same way as for solid earthed
networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and
should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out
the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance earthed networks SEMOD154680-58 v3

In high impedance networks the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the earth
through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating
meshed.

Typically, for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth fault current is very low
compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a magnitude
of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will have the
same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to the formula below:

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN-US (Equation 188)

Where:
3I0 is the earth-fault current (A)
IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)
IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)
IC is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the
reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN-US (Equation 189)

Line distance protection REL670 225

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IEC05000216 V2 EN-US

Figure 134: High impedance earthing network

The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compare to solid earthed
networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed
networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-earth faults immediately; they
clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross country faults, many network
operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth-faults. To handle this type phenomena
a separate function called Phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common
to be used in transmission applications.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and
clearance of earth-faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of
the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For
this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault
clearance for single phase-to-earth fault.

8.5.2.3 Fault infeed from remote end SEMOD154680-84 v2

All transmission and most all sub transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that we will have fault infeed from remote end when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 135, we can draw the equation for the bus voltage Va at left side as:

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN-US (Equation 190)

If we divide Va by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN-US (Equation 191)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

226 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

VA VA
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL EsB
EsA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

en05000217.vsd
IEC05000217 V1 EN-US

Figure 135: Influence of fault infeed from remote end.

The effect of fault current infeed from remote end is one of the most driving factors for justify
complementary protection to distance protection.

8.5.2.4 Load encroachment SEMOD154680-97 v3

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an
external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The
effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 136. The entrance of the load
impedance inside the characteristic is of cause not allowed and the way to handle this with
conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings that is, to have a security
margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the drawback
that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection that is, the ability to detect resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure 4.
The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault resistances,
especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote end. For example for a given setting of the load
angle ARGLd for the load encroachment function, the resistive blinder for the zone
measurement can be expanded according to the right in figure 136 given higher fault
resistance coverage without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is
valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. ZMMPDIS function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded
medium long lines. For short lines the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance
coverage and load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load
encroachment function could preferable be switched off.

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in the Phase selection with
load enchroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (FDPSPDIS).

Line distance protection REL670 227

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Zm Zm

ZL

Load impedance
area in forward ARGLd ARGLd
R
direction R
ARGLd
ARGLd

RLdRv RLdFw

en05000495.vsd
IEC05000495 V1 EN-US

Figure 136: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic

8.5.2.5 Short line application SEMOD154680-105 v2

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a
fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see
table "Short line application".

Table 24: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 1.1-5.5 km 5-25 km
Short line
5.5-11 km 25-50 km

The possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero
sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high
resistive faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 136.

For very short line applications the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to that the
voltage drop distribution through out the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching.

Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications so the load
encroachment function could be switched off (OperationLdCmp = Off). This will increase the
possibility to detect resistive close-in faults.

8.5.2.6 Long transmission line application SEMOD154680-127 v2

For long transmission lines the margin to the load impedance that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for
phase-to-earth fault at remote end of a long lines when the line is heavy loaded.

The definition of long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection is noted in
table 25.

228 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Table 25: Definition of long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

As mentioned in the previous chapter, the possibility in IED to set resistive and reactive reach
independent for positive and zero sequence fault loops and individual fault resistance settings
for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault together with load encroachment algorithm
improves the possibility to detect high resistive faults at the same time as the security is
improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load encroachment is eliminated).

8.5.2.7 Parallel line application with mutual coupling SEMOD154680-148 v1

General SEMOD154680-150 v2
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
parallel lines. The lines need not to be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual
coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more.
The reason to the introduced error in measuring due to mutual coupling is the zero sequence
voltage inversion that occurs.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is
practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes)
that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function. Those are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero-sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class we can have three different topologies; the parallel line can be
in service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. It is therefore recommended to use the different setting groups
to handle the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero-sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation
for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

Line distance protection REL670 229

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits. The application guide mentioned
below recommends in more detail the setting practice for this particular type of line. The basic
principles also apply to other multi circuit lines.

Parallel line applications SEMOD154680-168 v2

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends. We consider the three most common operation
modes:

1. parallel line in service.

2. parallel line out of service and earthed.
3. parallel line out of service and not earthed.

Parallel line in service SEMOD154680-175 v2

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

A simplified single line diagram is shown in figure 137.

V ph Vph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN-US (Equation 192)

Where:
Vph is phase-to-earth voltage at the IED point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is earth to fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< en05000221.vsd

IEC05000221 V1 EN-US

Figure 137: Class 1, parallel line in service.

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 138.

230 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Z0 - Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
99000038.vsd
IEC99000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 138: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the IED point A will be changed.

If the current on the parallel line have negative sign compare to the current on the protected
line that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compare to the current on
the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same direction,
the distance protection will underreach.

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that
is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero-sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is
most pronounced with no infeed in the line IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is
normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally
increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect
the operation of a permissive under-reach scheme.

Parallel line out of service and earthed SEMOD154680-226

SEMOD154680-228 v2
v1

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
en05000222.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG867 V1 EN-US

Figure 139: The parallel line is out of service and earthed.

When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both ends on the bus bar side of the line
CT so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero sequence
circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 139.

Line distance protection REL670 231

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

A I0 Z 0 Zm0

Zm0 I0
C

B Z 0 Zm0

99000039.vsd
DOCUMENT11520-IMG7100 V1 EN-US

Figure 140: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends.
Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-
Z0m)/Z0-Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 193.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 193)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings. It is a recommendation to use a separate setting
group for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerable when the line is in
operation. All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero
sequence, mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero-sequence, mutual
reactance X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero-sequence parameters according to
equation 194 and equation 195 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the
reach for the underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 194)

 X 0m 2 
X 0E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 195)

Parallel line out of service and not earthed SEMOD154680-242 v2

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
en05000223.vsd
IEC05000223 V1 EN-US

Figure 141: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed.

232 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero
sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero
sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit
shown in figure 141

The line zero-sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance
protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence
impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and
earthed at both ends.

I0 Z0 Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 Z0m
B
99000040.vsd
IEC99000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 142: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not earthed.
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 196.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f ) (
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN-US (Equation 196)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 197 and equation 198.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN-US (Equation 197)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN-US (Equation 198)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 199.

( )
Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
Re K u = 1 +
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2 2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN-US (Equation 199)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 200.

Line distance protection REL670 233

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN-US (Equation 200)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at
least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

8.5.2.8 Tapped line application SEMOD154680-265 v1

SEMOD154680-267 v2

A IA IB B
T

Z< IC Z<

-IB

Z<
C

en05000224.vsd
DOCUMENT11524-IMG869 V1 EN-US

Figure 143: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed
from remote end" that is, increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will
be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 201)

 I A + IC   U 2 2
Z C = Z Trf +  Z CT + ⋅ Z TF  ⋅  
 IC   U1 
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3510 V3 EN-US (Equation 202)

234 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the B respective C station to the T point.
IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.
U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the
transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the
fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(see the dotted line in figure 143), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone2 trip in one
end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone1
settings that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance SEMOD154680-288 v2

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance,
resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be
calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 203)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three-times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately
50 km/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth (RFPE) and phase-to-phase
(RFPP) should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to
obtain reliable fault detection.

Line distance protection REL670 235

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD154701-1 v1

8.5.3.1 General SEMOD154704-4 v2

The settings for the Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults (ZMMPDIS)
function are done in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the
analogue input card is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to
primary values used in ZMMPDIS function.

The following basics should be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.5.3.2 Setting of zone1 SEMOD154704-15 v1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according
tosection"Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in
your application. We recommend to compensate setting for the cases when the parallel line is
in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in both ends. The
setting of earthed fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel line is out of
service and earthed at both ends (worst case).

8.5.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone SEMOD154704-19 v4

The first overreaching zone (normally zone2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at
remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the
protected line.

If the requirements in the dotted paragraphs above gives a zone2 reach less than 120%, the
time delay of zone2 must be increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation
in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during

236 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

faults. The zone2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line
must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted wit a simple example below.

If a fault occurs at point F, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 

EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 204)

Z AC Z CB

F
A IA C Z CF B
IB

I A+ I C
Z< IC

IEC05000457-2-en.vsd

IEC05000457 V2 EN-US

Figure 144: Setting of overreaching zone

8.5.3.4 Setting of reverse zone SEMOD154704-33 v3

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal
logic, weak-end-infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus
bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching
zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
Equation 205 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN-US (Equation 205)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone2 setting at remote end of protected line

In some applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

8.5.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application SEMOD154704-48 v1

Line distance protection REL670 237

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone1 SEMOD154704-50 v1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of
protected line.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone2 SEMOD154704-53 v2

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all
cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in
service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent
zero-sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 138 in section
"Parallel line applications".

The components of the zero-sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to
at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN-US (Equation 206)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN-US (Equation 207)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN-US (Equation 208)

If the denominator in equation 208 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and
imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN-US (Equation 209)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN-US (Equation 210)

Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends SEMOD154704-69 v3

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means
that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single
phase-to-earth faults. Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and
reactance) equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R +X ø 0 0

EQUATION561 V1 EN-US (Equation 211)

238 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø
EQUATION562 V1 EN-US (Equation 212)

8.5.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction SEMOD154704-76 v1

Set the resistive reach independently for each zone, for phase-to-earth loop (RIPE)
measurement.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for the phase-to-earth faults (RFPE) for each zone.
Set all remaining reach setting parameters independently of each other for each distance zone.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically
follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the
protected zone is equal to equation 213.

1
R = --- ( 2 × R1PE + R0PE ) + RFPE
3
EQUATION567 V1 EN-US (Equation 213)

é ù
j loop = arctan êê 22××X1PE + X0
ú
R1PE + R0 ú
ë û
EQUATION1457 V1 EN-US (Equation 214)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone1 should follow the condition:

RFPE £ 4.5 × X 1
EQUATION569 V2 EN-US (Equation 215)

8.5.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function SEMOD154704-91 v2

The following instructions is valid when the load encroachment function is not activated
(OperationLdCmp is set to Off). If the load encroachment function is to be used for all or some
of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those zones according to this chapter can be
omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a
sufficient setting margin between the IED boundary and the minimum load impedance. The
minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 216)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Line distance protection REL670 239

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 217)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

Because a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-

phase conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under
combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-
phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load

EQUATION792 V2 EN-US (Equation 218)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-
earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance
angle. More accurate calculations are necessary according to the equation below:

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load min  cos  

 2  R1Zx  R 0 Zx
 sin 

 2  X 1Zx  X 0 Zx 
EQUATION578 V5 EN-US (Equation 219)

Where:
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the minimum load impedance conditions.

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no power swing detection element is in the
protection scheme. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a
power swing detection element is in the protection scheme, refer to the description of the
power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function.

8.5.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with load encroachment function activated SEMOD154704-129 v1

The parameters for load encroachment shaping of the characteristic are found in the
description of the phase selection with load encroachment function, section "Resistive reach
with load encroachment characteristic". If the characteristic for the impedance measurement
shall be shaped with the load encroachment algorithm, the parameter OperationLdCmp in the
phase selection has to be switched On.

8.5.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents SEMOD154704-132 v2

The operation of the distance function will be blocked if the magnitude of the currents is
below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPE.

The default setting of IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen base current for the
analog input channels. The value have been proven in practice to be suitable in most of the
applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to increase the
sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of the IED base current.

240 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

This happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series
of very long transmission lines.

If the load current compensation is activated, there is an additional criteria IMinOpIN that will
block the phase-earth loop if the 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of IMinOpIN is 5% of the
IED base current IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the
distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

8.5.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones SEMOD154704-138 v1

The required time delays for different distance-protection zones are independent of each
other. Distance protection zone1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity
reasons. One can set the time delays for all zones (basic and optional) in a range of 0 to 60
seconds. The tripping function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the
corresponding Operation parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the ph-E
(tPE) measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further increase the
total flexibility of a distance protection.

8.6 Additional distance protection directional function for

earth faults ZDARDIR SEMOD175630-1 v3

8.6.1 Identification
GUID-39299546-12A2-4D9D-86D0-A33F423944E4 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Additional distance protection ZDARDIR -
directional function for earth faults
Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

8.6.2 Application SEMOD154885-5 v9

The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be supervised by a phase unselective directional

function based on symmetrical components (option).

8.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD154897-5 v6

AngleRCA and AngleOp: these settings define the operation characteristic. Setting AngleRCA is
used to turn the directional characteristic, if the expected fault current angle does not
coincide with the polarizing quantity to produce the maximum torque. The angle is positive, if
operating quantity lags the polarizing quantity and negative if it leads the polarizing quantity.
The setting AngleOp (max. 180 degrees) defines the wideness of the operating sector. The
sector is mirror-symmetric along the MTA (Maximum Torque Axis).

Directional elements for earth-faults must operate at fault current values below the magnitude
of load currents. As phase quantities are adversely affected by load, the use of sequence
quantities are preferred as polarizing quantities for the earth directional elements. Optionally
six modes are available:

Line distance protection REL670 241

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

• Zero-sequence voltage polarized (-U0)

• Negative-sequence voltage polarized (-U2)
• Zero-sequence current (I0)
• Dual polarization (-U0/I0)
• Zero-sequence voltage with zero-sequence current compensation (-U0Comp)
• Negative-sequence voltage with negative-sequence current compensation (-U2Comp)

The zero-sequence voltage polarized earth directional unit compares the phase angles of zero
sequence current I0 with zero sequence voltage -U0 at the location of the protection.

The negative-sequence voltage polarized earth directional unit compares correspondingly I2

with -U2.

In general the zero sequence voltage is higher than the negative sequence voltage at the fault,
but decreases more rapidly the further away from the fault it is measured. This makes the -U0
polarization preferable in short line applications, where no mutual coupling problems exist.

Negative sequence polarization has the following advantages compared to zero sequence
polarization:

• on solidly earthed systems U2 may be larger than U0. If the bus behind the IED location is a
strong zero-sequence source, the negative sequence voltage available at the IED location
is higher than the zero-sequence voltage.
• negative sequence polarization is not affected by zero sequence mutual coupling (zero
sequence polarized directional elements may misoperate in parallel lines with high zero-
sequence mutual coupling and isolated zero sequence sources).
• negative sequence polarization is less affected by the effects of VT neutral shift (possible
caused by unearthed or multiple earths on the supplying VT neutral)
• no open-delta winding is needed in VTs as only 2 VTs are required (U2 = (UL12 - a · UL23)/3)

The zero sequence current polarized earth directional unit compares zero sequence current I0
of the line with some reference zero-sequence current, for example the current in the neutral
of a power transformer. The relay characteristic AngleRCA is fixed and equals 0 degrees. Care
must be taken to ensure that neutral current direction remains unchanged during all network
configurations and faults, and therefore all transformer configurations/constructions are not
suitable for polarization.

In dual polarization, zero sequence voltage polarization and zero sequence current polarization
elements function in a “one-out-of-two mode”. Typically when the zero sequence current is
high, then the zero sequence voltage is low and vice versa. Thus combining a zero sequence
voltage polarized and a zero sequence current polarized (neutral current polarized) directional
element into one element, the IED can benefit from both elements as the two polarization
measurements function in a “one-out-of-two mode” complementing each other. In this mode,
if IPOL is greater than IPOL> setting, then only IPOL based direction is detected and UPOL
based direction will be blocked. Flexibility is also increased as zero sequence voltage
polarization can be used, if the zero sequence current polarizing source is switched out of
service. When the zero sequence polarizing current exceeds the set value for IPOL>, zero
sequence current polarizing is used. For values of zero sequence polarizing current less than
the set value for startPolCurrLevel, zero sequence voltage polarizing is used.

Zero-sequence voltage polarization with zero-sequence current compensation (-U0Comp)

compares the phase angles of zero sequence current I0 with zero-sequence voltage added by a
phase-shifted portion of zero-sequence current (see equation 220) at the location of the
protection. The factor k = setting Kmag. This type of polarization is intended for use in
applications where the zero sequence voltage can be too small to be used as the polarizing
quantity, and there is no zero sequence polarizing current (transformer neutral current)
available. The zero sequence voltage is “boosted” by a portion of the measured line zero
sequence current to form the polarizing quantity. This method requires that a significant

242 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

difference must exist in the magnitudes of the zero sequence currents for close-up forward
and reverse faults, that is, it is a requirement that |U0| >> |k · I0| for reverse faults, otherwise
there is a risk that reverse faults can be seen as forward.

- U 0 + k × I0 × e
AngleRCA

EQUATION1638 V2 EN-US (Equation 220)

The negative-sequence voltage polarization with negative-sequence current compensation (-

U2Comp) compares correspondingly I2 with (see equation 221), and similarly it must be
ensured that |U2| >> |k · I2| for reverse faults.

-U2 + k × I2 × e
AngleRCA

EQUATION1639 V2 EN-US (Equation 221)

8.7 Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC SEMOD153841-1 v3

8.7.1 Identification
GUID-030C086A-8301-481E-BA0A-6550A9C1482E v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Mho Impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC - -

8.7.2 Application SEMOD154555-4 v3

The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes features for fault inception
detection and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as
well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.

One part of ZSMGAPC function identifies a loss of phase potential that is the result of a long
term (steady state) condition such as a blown fuse or an open voltage transformer winding or
connection. This will block all trips by the distance protection since they are based on voltage
measurement.

In the pilot channel blocking scheme a fault inception detected by a fast acting change
detector is used to send a block signal to the remote end in order to block an overreaching
zone. If the fault is later detected as a forward fault the earlier sent blocking signal is stopped.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on the
protected line if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it is less secure than
permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach of the tripping
function if the communication channel is out of service. Inadequate speed or dependability
can cause spurious tripping for external faults. Inadequate security can cause delayed tripping
for internal faults.

ZSMGAPC function also includes functionality for blocking the sample based distance
protection due to high SIR. SIR directly influences the fault voltage level for a given voltage
level, and this is the major factor that affects the severity of CVT transients. Therefore, in
cases where the SIR value is too high, further filtering of the measured signals will be needed.

Line distance protection REL670 243

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.7.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD174968-1 v1

SEMOD154558-7 v4
GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

PilotMode: Set PilotMode to On when pilot scheme is to be used. In this mode fault inception
function will send a block signal to remote end to block the overreaching zones, when
operated.

DeltaI: The setting of DeltaI for fault inception detection is by default set to 10% of IBase,
which is suitable in most cases.

Delta3I0: The setting of the parameter Delta3I0 for fault inception detection is by default set
to 10% of UBase, which is suitable in most cases.

DeltaU: The setting of DeltaU for fault inception detection is by default set to 5% of IBase,
which is suitable in most cases.

Delta3U0: The setting of Delta3U0 for fault inception detection is by default set to 5% of
UBase, which is suitable in most cases.

Zreach: The setting of Zreach must be adopted to the specific application. The setting is used
in the SIR calculation for detection of high SIR.

SIRLevel: The setting of the parameter SIRLevel is by default set to 10. This is a suitable setting
for applications with CVT to avoid transient overreach due to the CVT dynamics. If magnetic
voltage transformers are used, set SIRLevel to 15 the highest level.

IMinOp: The minimum operate current for the SIR measurement is by default set to 20% of
IBase.

8.8 Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS SEMOD153819-1 v5

8.8.1 Identification
SEMOD155879-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Faulty phase identification with load FMPSPDIS 21
encroachment for mho
Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

8.8.2 Application SEMOD154764-4 v6

The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. Due
to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement of the power system
is reduced for example, difficulties to get permission to build new power lines.

The ability to accurately and reliably classifying different types of fault so that single pole
tripping and autoreclosing can be used which plays an important roll in this matter.

Faulty phase identification with load encroachment for mho (FMPSPDIS) function is designed
to accurately select the proper fault loop in the Distance protection function dependent on the
fault type.

244 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be
in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, FMPSPDIS has an built-in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of
both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.

The load encroachment algorithm and the blinder functions are always activated in the phase
selector. The influence from these functions on the zone measurement characteristic has to be
activated by switching the setting parameter LoadEnchMode for the respective measuring
zone(s) to On.

8.8.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD154771-1 v2

SEMOD154782-4 v6
GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

INRelPE: The setting of INRelPE for release of the phase-to-earth loop is by default set to 20%
of IBase. The default setting is suitable in most applications.

The setting must normally be set to at least 10% lower than the setting of INBlockPPto give
priority to open phase-to-earth loop. INRelPE must be above the normal un-balance current
(3I0) that might exist due to un-transposed lines.

The setting must also be set higher than the 3I0 that occurs when one pole opens in single pole
trip applications.

INBlockPP: The setting of INBlockPP is by default set to 40% of IBase, which is suitable in most
applications.

I1LowLevel: The setting of the positive current threshold I1LowLevel used in the sequence
based part of the phase selector for identifying three-phase fault, is by default set to 10% of
IBase.

The default setting is suitable in most cases, but must be checked against the minimum three-
phase current that occurs at remote end of the line with reasonable fault resistance.

IMaxLoad: The setting IMaxLoad must be set higher than the maximum load current transfer
during emergency conditions including a safety margin of at least 20%. The setting is
proposed to be according to equation 222:

IMaxLoad =1.2 ILoad

EQUATION1614 V2 EN-US (Equation 222)

where:
1.2 is the security margin against the load current and
ILoad is the maximal load current during emergency conditions.

The current ILoad can be defined according to equation 223.

Line distance protection REL670 245

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

S max
ILoad =
3 × ULmn
EQUATION1615 V1 EN-US (Equation 223)

where:
Smax is the maximal apparent power transfer during emergency conditions and
ULmn is the phase-to-phase voltage during the emergency conditions at the IED location.

8.8.3.1 Load encroachment SEMOD154782-39 v4

The load encroachment function has two setting parameters, RLd for the load resistance and
ArgLd for the inclination of the load sector (see figure 145).

RLdFw
ARGLd ARGLd
R

ARGLd ARGLd
RLdRv

en05000226.vsd
IEC05000226 V1 EN-US

Figure 145: Load encroachment characteristic

The calculation of the apparent load impedance Zload and minimum load impedance Zloadmin
can be done according to equations:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 224)

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 225)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load angle ArgLd can be derived according to equation 226:

246 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

æ P max ö
ArgLd = a cos ç ÷
è S max ø
EQUATION1623 V1 EN-US (Equation 226)

where:
Pmax is the maximal active power transfer during emergency conditions and
Smax is the maximal apparent power transfer during emergency conditions.

The RLd can be calculated according to equation 227:

RLd = ZLoad × cos( ArgLd )

EQUATION1624 V1 EN-US (Equation 227)

The setting of RLd and ArgLd is by default set to 80 ohm/phase and 20 degrees. Those values
must be adapted to the specific application.

8.9 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic,

separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS and ZDRDIR GUID-7308DB86-32CE-4615-95DC-92BEEF69E184 v1

8.9.1 Identification
GUID-420DD49A-C65B-4F04-B317-9558DCCE7A52 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Distance protection zone, ZMRPDIS 21
quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings (zone 1) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

Distance protection zone, ZMRAPDIS 21

quadrilateral characteristic, separate
settings (zone 2-5) Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

GUID-119120A5-8600-44C6-9C85-81136DBBE280 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR Z<-> 21D

8.9.2 Application IP14961-1 v2

GUID-FC735AD1-D8C5-4513-87B3-7313AF09CBB3 v1
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex,
consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different
lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the
fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the
power system.

Line distance protection REL670 247

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The distance protection function in the IED is designed to meet basic requirements for
application on transmission and sub-transmission lines although it also can be used on
distribution levels.

8.9.2.1 System earthing GUID-AA9E698B-D0B5-45FC-ABA5-6A2CD988E16D v1

The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system.
Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solid earthed networks GUID-02632014-090D-4D95-B678-6DFC7DE998A7 v1

In solidly earthed systems, the transformer neutrals are connected solidly to earth without any
impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 146: Solidly earthed network.

The earth-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very
limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some
marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The earth-fault current at single phase-to- earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation :

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 228)

Where:
UL1 is the phase-to- earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the earth return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero sequence current in solid earthed networks makes it possible to use impedance
measuring technique to detect earth-fault. However, distance protection has limited
possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be complemented
with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those cases.

248 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Effectively earthed networks GUID-5F4CCC18-2BAC-4140-B56C-B9002CD36318 v1

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-
fault factor is defined according to equation 229.

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 229)

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network source impedances are valid, see equation 230
and equation 231.

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN-US (Equation 230)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN-US (Equation 231)

Where
R0 is the resistive zero sequence source impedance

X0 is the reactive zero sequence source impedance

R1 is the resistive positive sequence source impedance

X1 is the reactive positive sequence source impedance

The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring element to detect earth-fault. However, in the same way as for solid
earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults
and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry
out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance earthed networks GUID-099F53F9-7CD8-4D96-811D-7B55EF249FFF v1

In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the
earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is many times operated in radial, but can also be found operating meshed
networks.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth fault current is very
low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a
magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will
have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop
distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation 232.

Line distance protection REL670 249

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN-US (Equation 232)

Where:
3I0 is the earth-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the
reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network that is:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN-US (Equation 233)

IEC05000216 V2 EN-US

Figure 147: High impedance earthing network.

The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed
networks where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed
networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to- earth faults immediately; they
clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network
operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth-faults. To handle this type phenomena,
a separate function called Phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is needed, which is not common
to be used in transmission applications.

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and
clearance of earth-faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of
the zero sequence measurement element or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For
this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault
clearance for single phase-to-earth fault.

8.9.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end GUID-4380CD3A-BCB0-45F1-A821-BC3E6D070C04 v1

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 148, the equation for the bus voltage UA at A side is:

250 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

VA = IA × p × ZL + ( IA + IB ) × Rf
EQUATION1273 V1 EN-US (Equation 234)

If we divide UA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.

Va IA + IB
ZA = = p × ZL + × Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274 V2 EN-US (Equation 235)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

UA UB
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL ESB
ESA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

IEC09000247-1-en.vsd
IEC09000247 V1 EN-US

Figure 148: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end
The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving factors for
justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built in algorithm
which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1, at the exporting end. No settings are
required for this function.

8.9.2.3 Load encroachment GUID-86D5DE98-621C-40E6-9EBB-F23363C1DB4F v2

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an
external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The
effect of load encroachment is illustrated to the left in figure 149. The entrance of the load
impedance inside the characteristic is of course not allowed and the way to handle this with
conventional distance protection is to consider this with the settings, that is, to have a
security margin between the distance zone and the minimum load impedance. This has the
drawback that it will reduce the sensitivity of the protection, that is, the ability to detect
resistive faults.

The IED has a built in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right figure of
figure 149. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault
resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at remote line end. For example, for a given
setting of the load angle ArgLd for Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic function (FRPSPDIS), the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be
expanded according to the figure 149 given higher fault resistance coverage without risk for
unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

Line distance protection REL670 251

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavy loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium
long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage and
load encroachment is not a major problem. So, for short lines, the load encroachment function
could preferably be switched off. See section "Load impedance limitation, without load
encroachment function".

The settings of the parameters for load encroachment are done in , FRPSPDIS function.

Z1

ArgLd

[1]
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-3-en.vsdx
IEC09000248 V3 EN-US

Figure 149: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic defined in Phase selection and load encroachment function
(FRPSPDIS)

8.9.2.4 Short line application GUID-504F03E4-37CA-4CCF-9DBB-82B8F1C3B3DD v1

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a
fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see
table 26.

Table 26: Typical length of short and very short line

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 1.1-5.5 km 5-25 km
Short line 5.5-11 km 25-50 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 149.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the voltage
drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching.

Load encroachment is normally no problems for short line applications.

252 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.9.2.5 Long transmission line application GUID-40F06841-F192-4159-87BA-7BC7E4B014AA v1

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to achieve
high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote line end of a long line when the line is heavy
loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection
can generally be described as in table 27, long lines have Source impedance ratio (SIR’s) less
than 0.5.

Table 27: Typical length of long and very long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated), see figure 149.

8.9.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling M17048-417 v2

General GUID-8136A6E6-085F-46A1-9BB4-F02730393D02 v1
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to experience mutual coupling,
and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more. The mutual
coupling does influence the zero sequence impedance to the fault point but it does not
normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is a
practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes)
that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can be in
service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends.

Line distance protection REL670 253

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different setting groups for
handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation
for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications GUID-9980E92C-EDB1-4E0C-A4BD-167C896199A1 v1

This type of networks are defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three most common operation modes are:

1. parallel line in service.

2. parallel line out of service and earthed.
3. parallel line out of service and not earthed.

Parallel line in service GUID-F792E7FD-2265-4250-9026-1F03039FB0B5 v1

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 150.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for normal
lines without mutual coupling according to equation 236.

U ph U ph

Z = =
Z -Z0 1 I + 3I × K
ph 0 N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION2311 V1 EN-US (Equation 236)

V ph V
ph

Z = =
Z -Z 0 1 I + 3I 0 × K
ph N

I + 3I ×
ph 0

3× Z 1

EQUATION1275 V3 EN-US (Equation 236)

Where:
Uph is phase to earth voltage at the relay point

Iph is phase current in the faulty phase

3I0 is earth fault current

Z1 is positive sequence impedance

Z0 is zero sequence impedance

254 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< IEC09000250_1_en.vsd

IEC09000250 V1 EN-US

Figure 150: Class 1, parallel line in service.

The equivalent zero sequence circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 151.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 151: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar.
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed according
to equation 237.

æ Z0 - Z1
L L Z0 m ö
U ph = Z1 × ç I + 3I ×
L ph 0 + 3I 0p
÷
è 3 × Z1 L 3 × Z1 L ø
EQUATION2312 V1 EN-US (Equation 237)

By dividing equation 237 by equation 236 and after some simplification we can write the
impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN-US (Equation 238)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line
impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected
line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current
on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same
direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is weak. If
considering a single phase-to-earth fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel
line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end is zero, the voltage UA in
the faulty phase at A side as in equation 239.

Line distance protection REL670 255

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

U A = p × Z1 L (I
ph + K × 3I + K × 3I
N 0 Nm 0p )
EQUATION2313 V1 EN-US (Equation 239)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN-US (Equation 240)

Simplification of equation 240, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation
239 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

æ 3I 0 × p ö
VA = p × Z 1L ç I ph + K N × 3I 0 + K Nm × ÷
è 2-p ø
EQUATION1280 V2 EN-US (Equation 241)

If we finally divide equation 241 with equation 236 we can draw the impedance present to the
IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
2 − p
Z = p ⋅ ZI L  
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN-US (Equation 242)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that
is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is
most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is
normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally
increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect
the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and earthed GUID-0242E2DB-A7F8-4D7F-91D1-1C744E3378BF v1

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000251_1_en.vsd
IEC09000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 152: The parallel line is out of service and earthed.

When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both line ends on the bus bar side of the
line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero
sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 153.

256 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 153: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends.
Here the equivalent zero sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-
Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 243.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 243)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate setting group
for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably when the line is in
operation.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence,
mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence, mutual reactance
X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters according to equation 244
and equation 245 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the
underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 244)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 245)

Parallel line out of service and not earthed GUID-0458F8AF-BDAC-4F07-B289-15B172FB39D9 v1

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000254_1_en.vsd
IEC09000254 V1 EN-US

Figure 154: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed.

When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the zero
sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero

Line distance protection REL670 257

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit
shown in figure 154

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 155: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not earthed.

8.9.2.7 Tapped line application GUID-1230B60C-8C3C-4405-8209-E089CAF07847 v1

A
B

BC

IEC09000160-3-en.vsd
IEC09000160 V3 EN-US

Figure 156: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer.

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed
from remote end" , that is increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will
be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 246)

258 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

 I A + IC   U 2 2
Z C = Z Trf +  Z CT + ⋅ Z TF  ⋅  
 IC   U1 
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3510 V3 EN-US (Equation 247)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the

transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf Transformer impedance

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the
fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(see the dotted line in figure 156), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in
one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1
settings, that is without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance GUID-115D7410-1398-45FB-BDDD-E778740E1641 v1

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance,
resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.The resistance is also
depending on the presence of earth shield conductor at the top of the tower, connecting
tower-footing resistance in parallel. The arc resistance can be calculated according to
Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 248)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately
50 km/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

Line distance protection REL670 259

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth RFPE and phase-to-phase
RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to
obtain reliable fault detection.

8.9.3 Setting guidelines IP14962-1 v1

8.9.3.1 General GUID-FE2F8421-83BA-47FF-AB07-77C242D9650D v1

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic ((ZMRPDIS) are done in
primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analogue input
module is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary
values used in (ZMRPDIS).

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect from load transfer together with fault resistance may be considerable in some
extreme cases.
• Zero sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.9.3.2 Setting of zone 1 GUID-36A888E8-F209-478E-B8C4-76370B644386 v1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section
"Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in the
particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the
parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in
both ends. The setting of earth-fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel
line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).

8.9.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone GUID-2C36623A-7A29-4881-9F33-DA5F5FD36DE5 v1

The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even longer if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at
remote end are considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the
protected line.

260 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current infeed
from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If any of the above indicates a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must be
increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the
telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone 2
must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered
under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F see figure 157, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 

EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 249)

Z AC Z CB

F
A IA C Z CF IB B

I A+ I C

Z< IC

IEC09000256-2-en.vsd
IEC09000256 V2 EN-US

Figure 157: Setting of overreaching zone

8.9.3.4 Setting of reverse zone GUID-0EDCDC8F-A2C9-4625-A6BD-0E7D2B4B1F04 v1

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal
logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus
bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching
zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
Equation 250 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed etc.

Z rev ³ 1.2 × Z2 rem - ZL

EQUATION2314 V1 EN-US (Equation 250)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance

Z2rem is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

Line distance protection REL670 261

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.9.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application SEMOD55087-50 v2

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1 GUID-F10BF2FF-7B0F-40B0-877B-081E1D5B067B v1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of
protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2 GUID-8EAD617A-D33B-453C-83FC-21E3CFC37CB1 v1

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all
cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in
service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent
zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 113 in section
"Parallel line applications".

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to
at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN-US (Equation 251)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN-US (Equation 252)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN-US (Equation 253)

If the denominator in equation 253 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and
imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN-US (Equation 254)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN-US (Equation 255)

Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends GUID-AEF4E5D3-A486-4DC7-8B95-83AADE67F966 v1

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means
that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single
phase-to-earth faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

262 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R +X ø 0 0

EQUATION561 V1 EN-US (Equation 256)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN-US (Equation 257)

8.9.3.6 Setting of reach in resistive direction GUID-3BFE80FD-8A51-4B71-8762-73DFA73AB28B v2

Set the resistive independently for each zone.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the phase-
to-earth faults RFPE for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining reach setting
parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically
follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the
protected zone is equal to equation 258.

1
R  2  R1Zx  R0Zx   RFPEZx
3
IECEQUATION2303 V2 EN-US (Equation 258)

 loop  arctan
 2  X1Zx  X0Zx 
 2  R1Zx  R0Zx 
EQUATION2304 V2 EN-US (Equation 259)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition to
minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPEZx  4.5  X1Zx

IECEQUATION2305 V2 EN-US (Equation 260)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault
resistance for phase-to-earth faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit the setting of
the zone1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement in the phase
domain to:

RFPPZx  6  X 1Zx
IECEQUATION2306 V3 EN-US (Equation 261)

8.9.3.7 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function GUID-A7CDE76A-D5B5-4641-9324-2E9A99071DF5 v1

The following instructions are valid when Phase selection with load enchroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FRPSPDIS is not activated. To deactivate the function, the
setting of the load resistance RLdFw and RLdRv in FRPSPDIS must be set to max value (3000).
If FRPSPDIS is to be used for all or some of the measuring zones, the load limitation for those
zones according to this chapter can be omitted. Check the maximum permissible resistive
reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient setting margin between the boundary
and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

Line distance protection REL670 263

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 262)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 263)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

As a safety margin is required to avoid load encroachment under three-phase

conditions and to guarantee correct healthy phase IED operation under
combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, consider both: phase-to-
phase and phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load

EQUATION792 V2 EN-US (Equation 264)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-
earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance
angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three times the load-
impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 265.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load min  cos  

 2  R1Zx  R 0 Zx
 sin 

 2  X 1Zx  X 0 Zx 
EQUATION578 V5 EN-US (Equation 265)

Where:
∂ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load
impedance.

RFPPZx  1.6  Zload

EQUATION579 V3 EN-US (Equation 266)

264 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Equation 266 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase
faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More
accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 267.

 cos   
R1Zx
RFPPZx  1.6  Zload min  sin 
 X1Zx 
IECEQUATION2307 V2 EN-US (Equation 267)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function ZMRPSB
is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a
ZMRPSB function is activated in the IED, refer to the description of Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB.

8.9.3.8 Load impedance limitation, with Phase selection with load

encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function activated GUID-68C89E77-77E1-47A2-A0D2-B6236CB63AB1 v1

The parameters for shaping of the load encroachment characteristic are found in the
description of Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
(FRPSPDIS).

8.9.3.9 Setting of minimum operating currents GUID-DAFBA182-ABD1-42F7-B958-E292B8E0E161 v1

The operation of Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMQPDIS) can be

blocked if the magnitude of the currents is below the set value of the parameter IMinOpPP and
IMinOpPE.

The default setting of IMinOpPP and IMinOpPE is 20% of IBase where IBase is the chosen
current for the analogue input channels. The value has been proven in practice to be suitable in
most of the applications. However, there might be applications where it is necessary to
increase the sensitivity by reducing the minimum operating current down to 10% of IBase. This
happens especially in cases, when the IED serves as a remote back-up protection on series of
very long transmission lines.

Setting IMinOpIN blocks the phase-to-earth loop if 3I0<IMinOpIN. The default setting of
IMinOpIN is 5% of IBase.

The minimum operating fault current is automatically reduced to 75% of its set value, if the
distance protection zone has been set for the operation in reverse direction.

8.9.3.10 Setting of timers for distance protection zones GUID-E6DD460D-2189-45E9-AD4D-E127DCA8EBAC v1

The required time delays for different distance protection zones are independent of each
other. Distance protection zone 1 can also have a time delay, if so required for selectivity
reasons. Time delays for all zones can be set in a range of 0 to 60 seconds. The tripping
function of each particular zone can be inhibited by setting the corresponding Operation
parameter to Off. Different time delays are possible for the phase-to-earthtPE and for the
phase-to-phase tPP measuring loops in each distance protection zone separately, to further
increase the total flexibility of a distance protection.

Line distance protection REL670 265

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.10 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with

settable angle FRPSPDIS GUID-29E9C424-5AF7-40EE-89D9-F6BB4F0A0836 v2

8.10.1 Identification
GUID-07DB9506-656C-4E5F-A043-3DAA624313C7 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase selection, quadrilateral FRPSPDIS 21
characteristic with settable angle
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN-US

8.10.2 Application GUID-D07A7B62-FDB9-4728-859A-9CE7423BE128 v1

The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. The
ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) is designed to accurately select the
proper fault loop in the distance measuring function depending on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be
in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of
both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously

measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values.

The extensive output signals from FRPSPDIS give also important information about faulty
phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

Load encroachment
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based on the
corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always active, but can
be switched off by selecting a high setting.

The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 158. As illustrated, the resistive blinders
are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector is the same in
all four quadrants.

266 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ARGLd ARGLd
R

ARGLd ARGLd
RLdRv

en05000196.vsd
IEC05000196 V1 EN-US

Figure 158: Characteristic of load encroachment function

The influence of load encroachment function on the operation characteristic is dependent on
the chosen operation mode of the FRPSPDIS function. When output signal STCNDZis selected,
the characteristic for the FRPSPDIS (and also zone measurement depending on settings) can
be reduced by the load encroachment characteristic (as shown in figure 159).

X X

R R

STCNDZ STCNDLE

IEC10000099-1-
en.vsd
IEC10000099 V1 EN-US

Figure 159: Operating characteristic when load encroachment is activated

When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone the
resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 160. The figure shows a
distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operating area of the zone
together with the load encroachment area is highlighted in black.

Line distance protection REL670 267

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone

Distance measuring zone

Load encroachment
characteristic

Directional line

en05000673.vsd
IEC05000673 V1 EN-US

Figure 160: Operation characteristic in forward direction when load encroachment is

enabled
Figure 160 is valid for phase-to-earth. During a three-phase fault, or load, when the
"quadrilateral" phase-to-phase characteristic is subject to enlargement and rotation the
operate area is transformed according to figure 161. Notice in particular what happens with
the resistive blinders of the "phase selection" "quadrilateral" zone. Due to the 30-degree
rotation, the angle of the blinder in quadrant one is now 100 degrees instead of the original 70
degrees. The blinder that is nominally located to quadrant four will at the same time tilt
outwards and increase the resistive reach around the R-axis. Consequently, it will be more or
less necessary to use the load encroachment characteristic in order to secure a margin to the
load impedance.

268 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X (ohm/phase)

Phase selection
”Quadrilateral” zone

Distance measuring zone

R (ohm/phase)

en05000674.vsd
IEC05000674 V1 EN-US

Figure 161: Operation characteristic for FRPSPDIS in forward direction for three-phase
fault, ohm/phase domain
The result from rotation of the load characteristic at a fault between two phases is presented
in fig 162. Since the load characteristic is based on the same measurement as the quadrilateral
characteristic, it will rotate with the quadrilateral characteristic clockwise by 30 degrees when
subject to a pure phase-to-phase fault. At the same time, the characteristic "shrinks" by 2/√3,
from the full RLdFw/RLdRv reach, which is valid at load or three-phase fault.

Line distance protection REL670 269

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IEC08000437.vsd

IEC08000437 V1 EN-US

Figure 162: Rotation of load characteristic for a fault between two phases
This rotation may seem a bit awkward, but there is a gain in selectivity by using the same
measurement as for the quadrilateral characteristic since not all phase-to-phase loops will be
fully affected by a fault between two phases. It should also provide better fault resistive
coverage in quadrant 1. The relative loss of fault resistive coverage in quadrant 4 should not be
a problem even for applications on series compensated lines.

8.10.3 Load encroachment characteristics GUID-DD9A62C3-A56D-411B-8303-6F7BC4C6092D v1

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve correct
phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire line. It is not
necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at least 10% is
recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones, the phase selection output
STCNDZ or STCNDLE must be connected to input STCND on distance zones.

For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance φ for phase-to-earth fault defined
according to equation 268.

X1L + XN
arctan j =
R1L + RN
EQUATION2115 V1 EN-US (Equation 268)

But in some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than the
set angle. In these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and
reverse direction, RFFwPE and RFRvPE for phase-to-earth faults and RFFwPP and RFRvPP for
phase-to-phase faults have to be increased to avoid that the phase selection characteristic
must cut off some part of the zone characteristic. The necessary increased setting of the fault

270 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

resistance coverage can be derived from trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic
for respectively fault type.

The following setting guideline considers normal overhead lines applications and provides two
different setting alternatives:

A) A recommended characteristic angle of 60 degrees

for the phase selection
B) A characteristic angle of 90 and 70 degrees for
phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase respectively, like
implemented in the REL500 series

The following figures illustrate alternative B).

8.10.3.1 Phase-to-earth fault in forward direction GUID-47B1D249-60C8-4F71-A4FF-D57594219952 v1

With reference to figure 163, the following equations for the setting calculations can be
obtained.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection with
load encroachment function (FRPSPDIS) and index Zm reference settings for
Distance protection function (ZMRPDIS).

R1PEPHS + RNPHS R0 PEPHS - R1PEPHS

RNPHS =
(Minimum setting) 3
X
RFRvPEPHS RFFwPEPHS
PHS
R1Zm+RN

RFPEZm RFPEZm
Zm

X1PHS+XNPHS

X1Zm+XNZm 90°

φloop
φloop

R
(Ohm/loop)

X1Zm+XNZm
X1PHS+XNPHS

RFPEZm RFPEZm

R1Zm+RN

IEC08000435.vsd
IEC08000435 V1 EN-US

Figure 163: Relation between measuring zone and FRPSPDIS characteristic

Line distance protection REL670 271

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Reactive reach GUID-8C693495-10FA-47D5-BEFC-E72C8577E88B v1

The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring zone
used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 269 and equation 270 gives the
minimum recommended reactive reach.

These recommendations are valid for both 60 and 90 deg. characteristic angle.

X1PHS ³ 1.44 × X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN-US (Equation 269)

X0 PHS ³ 1.44 × X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN-US (Equation 270)

where:
X1Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS, and the constant

1.44 is a safety margin

X0Zm is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS

The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for forward
direction. No additional setting is required.

Fault resistance reach GUID-CB13A35F-0BF8-4CFA-9311-EADE194C1D85 v1

The resistive reach must cover RFPE for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly zone 2.
Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in the
application. Equation 271 and 272 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.

A) 60 degrees

RFFwPE ³ 1.1 × RFPE Zm

EQUATION2223 V2 EN-US (Equation 271)

B) 90 degrees

1
RFFwPE > × ( 2 × R1PEZm + R 0 PEZm ) + RFPEZm
3
EQUATION2224 V2 EN-US (Equation 272)

The security margin has to be increased in the case where φloop<60° to avoid that FRPSPDIS
characteristic cuts off some part of the zone measurement characteristic.

RFFwPP and RFFRvPP must be set in a way that the loop characteristic angle can be 60
degrees (or alternatively the same or lower compared to the measuring zone that must be
covered). If the characteristic angle for IEDs in the 500 series of 90 degrees is desired, RFFwPP
and RFFRvPP must be set to minimum setting values.

8.10.3.2 Phase-to-earth fault in reverse direction M13142-151 v4

Reactive reach M13142-153 v2

The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional setting is
required.

272 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Resistive reach M13142-156 v4

The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse zones. In
blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote end that is used
in the communication scheme. In equation 273 the index ZmRv references the specific zone to
be coordinated to.

RFRvPE min ³ 1.2 × RFPE ZmRv

EQUATION1316 V1 EN-US (Equation 273)

8.10.3.3 Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction M13142-168 v2

Reactive reach M13142-170 v3

The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-earth reach setting X1. No extra
setting is required.

Resistive reach GUID-01D7AB58-12CD-44EB-89E4-4D11828141D1 v1

R1PE and R0PE must be set in a way that the loop characteristic angle can be 60 deg (this gives
a characteristic angle of 90 deg. at three-phase faults). If the 500-series characteristic angle of
70 deg. is desired, R1PE and R0PE must be set accordingly.

Fault resistance reach GUID-CA51D9C7-7D9A-4DE5-92F1-FA1280BB899D v1

The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFFwPP, must cover RFPPZm with at least
25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-to-phase fault for the longest
overreaching zone to be covered by FRPSPDIS, as shown in figure 164. The minimum
recommended reach can be calculated according to equation 274 and 275.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection,
quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle function FRPSPDISand index Zm
reference settings for Distance protection function ZMRPDIS.

A) 60°

RFFwPP ³ 1.25 × RFPP zm

EQUATION1318 V3 EN-US (Equation 274)

B) 70°

RFFwPP > 1.82 × R1PPZm + 0.32 × X 1PPZm + 0.91 × RFPPZm

EQUATION2226 V1 EN-US (Equation 275)

where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by FRPSPDIS.

Equation 274 and 275 are is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will
cater for the risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-
phase fault when FRPSPDIScharacteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90 degrees or
from 70 degrees to 100 degrees (rotated 30° anti-clock wise).

Line distance protection REL670 273

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

X ( W / phase )
X 1PHS
R1PP= tan 70°

0.5 × RFRvPP 0.5 × RFFwPP

PHS 0.5*RFPPZm
0.5*RFPPPm
R1Zm

Zm
X1

X1Zm

70
j
R

j
70
( W / phase )
0.5*RFPPZm 0.5*RFPPZm
X1Zm

0.5*RFPPZM R1Zm 0.5*RFPPZm

0.5 × RFRvPP
X 1PHS
R1PP= tan 70°
en08000249.vsd
IEC08000249 V1 EN-US

Figure 164: Relation between measuring zone and FRPSPDIS characteristic for phase-to-
phase fault for φline>70° (setting parameters in italic)

8.10.4 Setting guidelines IP14959-1 v2

The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where φloop and
φline is greater than 60°.

8.10.4.1 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic M13142-312 v4

The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically to
define the load angle ArgLd, the blinder RLdFw in forward direction and blinder RLdRv in
reverse direction, as shown in figure 165.

274 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000050-1-en.vsd

IEC09000050 V1 EN-US

Figure 165: Load encroachment characteristic

The load angle ArgLd is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be suitable to
begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the maximum possible
load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20° must be used.

The blinder in forward direction, RLdFw, can be calculated according to equation 277.

2
U min
RLdFw = 0.8 ×
P exp max

where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power
Umin is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs
0.8 is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFw can be lesser than the calculated minimal
resistive load.

The resistive boundary RLdRv for load encroachment characteristic in reverse direction can be
calculated in the same way as RLdFw, but use maximum importing power that might occur
instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Umin voltage for this condition.

8.10.4.2 Minimum operate currents GUID-5B4DF48C-48ED-433D-92D8-B146E8A8A7E0 v1

FRPSPDIS has two current setting parameters, which blocks the respective phase-to-earth
loop and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn) and phase difference
current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.

The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-earth (IMinOpPE) is set to the
default value or a level to securely detect a single line-to-earth fault at the furthest reach of the
phase selection. It is recommended to set IMinOpPP to double value of IMinOpPE.

The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-earth fault (INReleasePE) is set
securely detect single line-to-earth fault at remote end on the protected line. It is
recommended to set INBlockPP to double value of INReleasePE.

Line distance protection REL670 275

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.11 Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, load encroachment

FDPSPDIS IP12400-1 v4

8.11.1 Identification

8.11.1.1 Identification M14850-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase selection, quad, fixed angle, FDPSPDIS 21
load encroachment
Z<phs

SYMBOL-DD V1 EN-US

8.11.2 Application M13138-3 v3

The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability limit. The
ability to accurately and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in this matter. Phase selection with load
encroachment function FDPSPDIS is designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the
distance measuring function depending on the fault type.

The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some cases be
in opposite to the wanted fault resistance coverage. Therefore, the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of
both the Phase selection with load encroachment and the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The measuring elements continuously

measure three phase currents and the residual current and, compare them with the set values.

The extensive output signals from FDPSPDIS give also important information about faulty
phase(s), which can be used for fault analysis.

8.11.3 Setting guidelines IP14959-1 v2

The following setting guideline consider normal overhead lines applications where φloop and
φline is greater than 60°.

8.11.3.1 Load encroachment characteristics M13142-3 v6

The phase selector must at least cover the overreaching zone 2 in order to achieve correct
phase selection for utilizing single-phase autoreclosing for faults on the entire line. It is not
necessary to cover all distance protection zones. A safety margin of at least 10% is
recommended. In order to get operation from distance zones , the phase selection outputs
STCNDZ or STCNDLE must be connected to input on ZMQPDIS, distance measuring block.

For normal overhead lines, the angle for the loop impedance φ for phase-to-earth fault is
defined according to equation 278.

X1L + XN
arctan j =
R1L + RN
EQUATION2115 V1 EN-US (Equation 278)

276 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

In some applications, for instance cable lines, the angle of the loop might be less than 60°. In
these applications, the settings of fault resistance coverage in forward and reverse direction,
RFFwPE and RFRvPE for phase-to-earth faults and RFFwPP and RFRvPP for phase-to-phase
faults have to be increased to avoid that FDPSPDIS characteristic shall cut off some part of the
zone characteristic. The necessary increased setting of the fault resistance coverage can be
derived from trigonometric evaluation of the basic characteristic for respectively fault type.

Phase-to-earth fault in forward direction M13142-6 v7

With reference to figure 166, the following equations for the setting calculations can be
obtained.

Index PHS in images and equations reference settings for Phase selection with
load encroachment function FDPSPDIS and index Zm reference settings for
Distance protection function (ZMQPDIS).

Line distance protection REL670 277

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

X
( W / loop)
3 4 5
1

6 6

60°

60° R
8 ( W / loop)

6 6

3 4 5
IEC09000043_1_en.vsd
IEC09000043 V1 EN-US

Figure 166: Relation between distance protection phase selection (FDPSPDIS) and
impedance zone (ZMQPDIS) for phase-to-earth fault φloop>60° (setting
parameters in italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection)(red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone)
3 RFltRevPGPHS
4 (X1PHS+XN)/tan(60°)

5 RFltFwdPGPHS

6 RFPGZM

7 X1PHS+XN
8 φloop
9 X1ZM+XN

Reactive reach M13142-9 v4

The reactive reach in forward direction must as minimum be set to cover the measuring zone
used in the Teleprotection schemes, mostly zone 2. Equation 279 and equation 280 gives the
minimum recommended reactive reach.

X1PHS ³ 1.44 × X1Zm

EQUATION1309 V1 EN-US (Equation 279)

278 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X0 PHS ³ 1.44 × X0 Zm
EQUATION1310 V1 EN-US (Equation 280)

where:
X1Zm is the reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS, and the constant

1.44 is a safety margin

X0Zm is the zero-sequence reactive reach for the zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS

The reactive reach in reverse direction is automatically set to the same reach as for forward
direction. No additional setting is required.

Fault resistance reach M13142-103 v5

The resistive reach must cover RFPE for the overreaching zone to be covered, mostly zone 2.
Consider the longest overreaching zone if correct fault selection is important in the
application. Equation 281 gives the minimum recommended resistive reach.

RFFwPEmin ³ 1.1× RFPEzm

EQUATION1312 V2 EN-US (Equation 281)

where:
RFPEZm is the setting RFPE for the longest overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS .

The security margin has to be increased to at least 1.2 in the case where φloop<60° to avoid
that FDPSPDIS characteristic shall cut off some part of the zone measurement characteristic.

Phase-to-earth fault in reverse direction M13142-151 v4

Reactive reach M13142-153 v2

The reactive reach in reverse direction is the same as for forward so no additional setting is
required.

Resistive reach M13142-156 v4

The resistive reach in reverse direction must be set longer than the longest reverse zones. In
blocking schemes it must be set longer than the overreaching zone at remote end that is used
in the communication scheme. In equation 282 the index ZmRv references the specific zone to
be coordinated to.

RFRvPE min ³ 1.2 × RFPE ZmRv

EQUATION1316 V1 EN-US (Equation 282)

Phase-to-phase fault in forward direction M13142-168 v2

Reactive reach M13142-170 v3

The reach in reactive direction is determined by phase-to-earth reach setting X1. No extra
setting is required.

Resistive reach M13142-173 v4

In the same way as for phase-to-earth fault, the reach is automatically calculated based on
setting X1. The reach will be X1/tan(60°) =X1/√(3).

Line distance protection REL670 279

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Fault resistance reach M13142-176 v7

The fault resistance reaches in forward direction RFFwPP, must cover RFPPZm with at least
25% margin. RFPPZm is the setting of fault resistance for phase-to-phase fault for the longest
overreaching zone to be covered by FDPSPDIS, see Figure 167. The minimum recommended
reach can be calculated according to equation 283.

RFFwPP ³ 1.25 × RFPP zm

EQUATION1318 V3 EN-US (Equation 283)

where:
RFPPZm is the setting of the longest reach of the overreaching zones that must be covered by FDPSPDIS .

Equation 283 modified is applicable also for the RFRvPP as follows:

RFRvPPmin ³ 1.25 × RFPPzmRv

EQUATION2264 V1 EN-US (Equation 284)

Equation 283 is also valid for three-phase fault. The proposed margin of 25% will cater for the
risk of cut off of the zone measuring characteristic that might occur at three-phase fault when
FDPSPDIS characteristic angle is changed from 60 degrees to 90 degrees (rotated 30° anti-
clock wise).

280 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X ( W / phase)

3 4 5
1

6 6

8 60°

60° 6 6
R (W / phase)
8

6 6

3 4 5

IEC09000257_1_en.vsd
IEC09000257 V1 EN-US

Figure 167: Relation between distance protection (ZMQPDIS) and FDPSPDIS

characteristic for phase-to-phase fault for φline>60° (setting parameters in
italic)

1 FDPSPDIS (phase selection) (red line)

2 ZMQPDIS (Impedance protection zone)
3 0.5 · RFRvPP PHS

4
X1PHS
tan ( 60° )

5 0.5 · RFFwPPPHS

6 0.5 · RFPPZm

7 X1PHS
8 X1Zm

Line distance protection REL670 281

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.11.3.2 Resistive reach with load encroachment characteristic M13142-312 v4

The procedure for calculating the settings for the load encroachment consist basically to
define the load angle ArgLd, the blinder RLdFw in forward direction and blinder RLdRv in
reverse direction, as shown in figure 168.

RLdFw
ArgLd ArgLd
R

ArgLd ArgLd
RLdRv

IEC09000050-1-en.vsd

IEC09000050 V1 EN-US

Figure 168: Load encroachment characteristic

The load angle ArgLd is the same in forward and reverse direction, so it could be suitable to
begin to calculate the setting for that parameter. Set the parameter to the maximum possible
load angle at maximum active load. A value bigger than 20° must be used.

The blinder in forward direction, RLdFw, can be calculated according to equation 285.

2
U min
RLdFw = 0.8 ×
P exp max

where:
Pexp max is the maximum exporting active power
Umin is the minimum voltage for which the Pexp max occurs
0.8 is a security factor to ensure that the setting of RLdFw can be lesser than the calculated minimal
resistive load.

The resistive boundary RLdRv for load encroachment characteristic in reverse direction can be
calculated in the same way as RLdFw, but use maximum importing power that might occur
instead of maximum exporting power and the relevant Umin voltage for this condition.

8.11.3.3 Minimum operate currents M13142-334 v5

FDPSPDIShas two current setting parameters which blocks the respective phase-to-earth loop
and phase-to-phase loop if the RMS value of the phase current (ILn) and phase difference
current (ILmILn) is below the settable threshold.

The threshold to activate the phase selector for phase-to-earth (IMinOpPE) is set to securely
detect a single phase-to-earth fault at the furthest reach of the phase selection. It is
recommended to set IMinOpPP to double value of IMinOpPE.

The threshold for opening the measuring loop for phase-to-earth fault (INReleasePE) is set
securely detect single line-to-earth fault at remote end on the protected line. It is
recommended to set INBlockPP to double value of INReleasePE.

282 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.12 High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS GUID-CC4F7338-2281-411D-B55A-67BF03F31681 v4

8.12.1 Identification GUID-8ACD3565-C607-4399-89D2-A05657840E6D v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFPDIS 21

Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

8.12.2 Application IP14961-1 v2

GUID-2F952D87-6BEB-4425-B823-DF8511B9E742 v3
The fast distance protection function ZMFPDIS in the IED is designed to provide sub-cycle,
down to half-cycle operating time for basic faults. At the same time, it is specifically designed
for extra care during difficult conditions in high-voltage transmission networks, like faults on
long heavily loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults are
handled with utmost security and dependability, although sometimes with a reduced
operating speed.

8.12.2.1 System earthing GUID-EB5B5594-AA81-4FC5-BBC0-7627A8609A23 v1

The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system.
Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solidly earthed networks GUID-6B0F02F4-18ED-415E-8D48-0A1648F7CE00 v2

In solidly earthed systems, the transformer neutrals are connected directly to earth without
any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 169: Solidly earthed network

The earth-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very
limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some
marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The earth-fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 286:

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 286)

Line distance protection REL670 283

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Where:
UL1 is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase)

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive

ZN is the earth-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3

The high zero-sequence current in solidly earthed networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring techniques to detect earth faults. However, distance protection has
limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those
cases.

Effectively earthed networks GUID-39CAF169-315E-4E3E-9EE6-28CBF624B90E v5

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-
fault factor is defined according to equation 287.

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 287)

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equation 288 and 289.

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN-US (Equation 288)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN-US (Equation 289)

Where
R0 is the resistive zero sequence of the source

X0 is the reactive zero sequence of the source

R1 is the resistive positive sequence of the source

X1 is the reactive positive sequence of the source

The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring elements to detect earth faults. However, in the same way as for solidly
earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults

284 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry
out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance earthed networks GUID-02F306F5-1038-42AC-AFAE-3F8423C4C066 v5

In high impedance networks, the neutral of the system transformers are connected to the
earth through high impedance, mostly a reactance in parallel with a high resistor.

This type of network is often operated radially, but can also be found operating as a meshed
network.

What is typical for this type of network is that the magnitude of the earth -fault current is very
low compared to the short circuit current. The voltage on the healthy phases will get a
magnitude of √3 times the phase voltage during the fault. The zero sequence voltage (3U0) will
have the same magnitude in different places in the network due to low voltage drop
distribution.

The magnitude of the total fault current can be calculated according to equation290.

I R 2 + ( IL - IC )
2
3I 0 =
EQUATION1271 V3 EN-US (Equation 290)

Where:
3I0 is the earth-fault current (A)

IR is the current through the neutral point resistor (A)

IL is the current through the neutral point reactor (A)

IC is the total capacitive earth-fault current (A)

The neutral point reactor is normally designed so that it can be tuned to a position where the
reactive current balances the capacitive current from the network:

1
wL =
3 ×w × C
EQUATION1272 V1 EN-US (Equation 291)

IEC05000216 V2 EN-US

Figure 170: High impedance earthing network

The operation of high impedance earthed networks is different compared to solid earthed
networks, where all major faults have to be cleared very fast. In high impedance earthed
networks, some system operators do not clear single phase-to-earth faults immediately; they
clear the line later when it is more convenient. In case of cross-country faults, many network
operators want to selectively clear one of the two earth faults.

Line distance protection REL670 285

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and
clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of
the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For
this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault
clearance for single phase-to-earth fault. For cross-country faults and when using phase
preference, it is necessary to make sure that the distance protection is operating in the phase-
to-earth loops independently, whenever possible. See guidelines for setting INReleasePE.

8.12.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end GUID-E28CCC52-497F-4B79-9430-8A2155FED936 v4

All transmission and most all sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

With reference to figure 171, the equation for the bus voltage UA at A side is:

(
U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z L + I A + I B ⋅ Rf )
EQUATION1273-IEC-650 V2 EN-US (Equation 292)

If we divide UA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side.

UA IA + IB
ZA = = p ·ZL + ·Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274-IEC-650 V1 EN-US (Equation 293)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

UA UB
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL ESB
ESA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

IEC09000247-1-en.vsd
IEC09000247 V1 EN-US

Figure 171: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end
The effect of fault current infeed from the remote line end is one of the most driving factors to
justify complementary protection for distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in algorithm,
which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1 at the exporting end. No settings are
required for this feature.

286 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.12.2.3 Load encroachment GUID-6785BF05-2775-4422-8077-A663D01C6C07 v6

In some cases the measured load impedance might enter the set zone characteristic without
any fault on the protected line. This phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might
occur when an external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred onto the
protected line. The effect of load encroachment is illustrated on the left in figure 172. A load
impedance within the characteristic would cause an unwanted trip. The traditional way of
avoiding this situation is to set the distance zone resistive reach with a security margin to the
minimum load impedance. The drawback with this approach is that the sensitivity of the
protection to detect resistive faults is reduced.

The IED has a built in feature which shapes the characteristic according to the characteristic
shown in figure 172. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect
high fault resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at the remote line end. For example,
for a given setting of the load angle ArgLd, the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can
be set according to figure 172 affording higher fault resistance coverage without risk for
unwanted operation due to load encroachment. Separate resistive blinder settings are
available in forward and reverse direction.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded, medium
long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not a major problem. .

Z1

ArgLd

[1]
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-3-en.vsdx
IEC09000248 V3 EN-US

Figure 172: Load encroachment phenomena and shaped load encroachment

characteristic
[1]

8.12.2.4 Short line application GUID-331451C9-EA93-481A-BA2E-D729EDB98828 v4

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not such a common problem. The line length that can be recognized as a
short line is not a fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source
impedance, see table 28.

[1] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

Line distance protection REL670 287

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Table 28: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 1.1-5.5 km 5-25 km
Short line 5.5-11 km 25-50 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults without conflict with the load impedance.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 can not be used due to the fact that
the voltage drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching.

8.12.2.5 Long transmission line application GUID-0C99A197-06CD-4668-A017-3CA9E5E01ED2 v4

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance, that is, to avoid load
encroachment, will normally be a major concern. It is well known that it is difficult to achieve
high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote line end of long lines when the line is heavy
loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection
can generally be described as in table 29. Long lines have Source impedance ratio (SIR’s) less
than 0.5.

Table 29: Definition of long and very long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated), see figure 172.

8.12.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling GUID-4720AB55-0E59-4531-AE14-6A6EEC72C924 v1

General GUID-E2FFF4A4-7D81-4440-87CE-3DCEAE2E42BD v2
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
land to build new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the measurement due to the mutual coupling between the
parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage level in order to experience mutual
coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more.
The mutual coupling does influence the zero sequence impedance to the fault point but it does
not normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is a
common practice to neglect them.

288 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes)
that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but isolated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources isolated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can be in
service, out of service, out of service and earthed in both ends.

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 shall be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different setting groups for
handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation
for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications GUID-905ACED8-CD00-4651-90F1-96D1885BA856 v1

This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three most common operation modes are:

1. Parallel line in service.

2. Parallel line out of service and earthed.
3. Parallel line out of service and not earthed.

Parallel line in service GUID-22E1A46C-92BD-4EE4-9A2D-9EFE2DB7B4D8 v3

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 173.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for normal
lines without mutual coupling according to equation 294.

U ph U ph
Z= =
Z 0 − Z 1 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ K N
I ph + 3I 0 ⋅
3⋅ Z1
IECEQUATION1275 V2 EN-US (Equation 294)

Line distance protection REL670 289

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Where:
Uph is phase to earth voltage at the relay point
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase
3I0 is earth fault current
Z1 is positive sequence impedance
Z0 is zero sequence impedance

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< IEC09000250_1_en.vsd

IEC09000250 V1 EN-US

Figure 173: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 174.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 174: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed according
to equation 295.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
U ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
IECEQUATION1276 V3 EN-US (Equation 295)

By dividing equation 295 by equation 294 and after some simplification we can write the
impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN-US (Equation 296)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line
impedance.

290 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected
line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current
on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same
direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is weak. If
considering a single phase-to-earth fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel
line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end is zero, the voltage UA in
the faulty phase at A side as in equation 297.

(
U A = p ⋅ ZI L I ph + K N ⋅ 3I 0 + K Nm ⋅ 3I 0 p )
IECEQUATION1278 V2 EN-US (Equation 297)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN-US (Equation 298)

Simplification of equation 298, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation
297 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

 3I ⋅ p 
U A = p ⋅ ZI L  I ph + K N ⋅ 3I 0 + K Nm ⋅ 0 
 2− p 
IECEQUATION1280 V2 EN-US (Equation 299)

If we finally divide equation 299 with equation 294 we can draw the impedance present to the
IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
 2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN-US (Equation 300)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that
is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is
most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is
normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally
increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect
the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and earthed GUID-574F8EE5-EAEC-40B8-A615-FDAD2808CD6D

GUID-8EB3A8EF-119D-4530-8F01-0879A7478E1F v1

Line distance protection REL670 291

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000251_1_en.vsd
IEC09000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 175: The parallel line is out of service and earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both line ends on the bus bar side of the
line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero
sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 176.

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 176: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-
Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 301.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 301)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate setting group
for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably when the line is in
operation.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence,
mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence, mutual reactance
X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters according to equation 302
and equation 303 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the
underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 302)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 303)

292 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Parallel line out of service and not earthed GUID-949669D3-8B9F-4ECA-8F09-52A783A494E1 v2

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000254_1_en.vsd
IEC09000254 V1 EN-US

Figure 177: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the
zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero-
sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit
shown in figure 177

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance
protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence
impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and
earthed at both ends.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 178: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not earthed
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 304.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f )
Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f ( )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN-US (Equation 304)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 305 and equation 306.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN-US (Equation 305)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN-US (Equation 306)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 307.

Line distance protection REL670 293

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

( )
Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
Re K u = 1 +
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2 2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN-US (Equation 307)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 308.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN-US (Equation 308)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at
least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

8.12.2.7 Tapped line application GUID-740E8C46-45EE-4CE8-8718-9FAE658E9FCE v1

GUID-7AA566A4-B6E9-41A7-9927-4DAB50BE8D1A v1

A
B

BC

IEC09000160-3-en.vsd
IEC09000160 V3 EN-US

Figure 179: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to similar problem that was highlighted in section "Fault infeed
from remote end", that is increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will
be

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 309)

294 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

 I A + IC   U 2 2
Z C = Z Trf +  Z CT + ⋅ Z TF  ⋅  
 IC   U1 
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3510 V3 EN-US (Equation 310)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the

transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf Transformer impedance

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the
fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(see the dotted line in figure 179), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in
one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1
settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance GUID-83E3E475-3243-4308-9A91-B8DD9B47C276 v4

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance,
resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance.The resistance is also
depending on the presence of earth shield conductor at the top of the tower, connecting
tower-footing resistance in parallel. The arc resistance can be calculated according to
Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 311)

where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for the zone 2 and wind speed of approximately
50 km/h
I is the actual fault current in A.

Line distance protection REL670 295

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth RFPEZx and phase-to-phase
RFPPZx should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to
obtain reliable fault detection.

8.12.3 Setting guidelines IP14962-1 v1

8.12.3.1 General GUID-BA20D421-4435-44CA-A6E9-743E461F8C59 v2

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMFPDIS) are done in
primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card is
used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used in
ZMFPDIS .

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.
• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.12.3.2 Setting of zone 1 GUID-ABD9A3B1-E420-471E-A798-4A56371E715E v1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(normally zone 1) to 75 - 90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section
"Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in the
particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the
parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in
both ends. The setting of earth-fault reach should be selected to be <95% also when parallel
line is out of service and earthed at both ends (worst case).

8.12.3.3 Setting of overreaching zone GUID-8D7D4C9D-468B-465F-85D9-3D64500474DB v2

The first overreaching zone (normally zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at
remote end is considerable higher than the fault current at the IED location.

The setting shall generally not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the
protected line.

296 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current infeed
from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If any of the above gives a zone 2 reach less than 120%, the time delay of zone 2 must be
increased by approximately 200ms to avoid unwanted operation in cases when the
telecommunication for the short adjacent line at remote end is down during faults. The zone 2
must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line section. The whole line must be covered
under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F see figure 180, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 312)

Z AC Z CB

F
A IA C Z CF IB B

I A+ I C

Z< IC

IEC09000256-2-en.vsd
IEC09000256 V2 EN-US

Figure 180: Setting of overreaching zone

8.12.3.4 Setting of reverse zone GUID-B633CF2C-28B2-4FDD-BE0E-D09CA434F01F v1

The reverse zone is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current reversal
logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of the bus
bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the overreaching
zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
Equation 313 can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.

Zrev ³ 1.2 × ( ZL - Z 2 rem )

EQUATION1525 V5 EN-US (Equation 313)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance
Z2rem is zone 2 setting at remote end of protected line.

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

Line distance protection REL670 297

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.12.3.5 Setting of zones for parallel line application GUID-4E0C3824-41B6-410F-A10E-AB9C3BFE9B12 v1

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1 GUID-8A62367C-2636-4EC1-90FF-397A51F586F7 v1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of the
protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2 GUID-98D11A72-C5BE-4C67-ADB5-95124C2AF987 v1

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all
cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in
service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent
zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 174 in section
Parallel line in service.

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to
at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN-US (Equation 314)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN-US (Equation 315)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN-US (Equation 316)

If the denominator in equation 316 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and
imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN-US (Equation 317)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN-US (Equation 318)

Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends GUID-345B36A6-B5FB-46DD-B5AE-81A1599FFC6E v1

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means
that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single
phase-to-earth faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

298 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R +X ø 0 0

EQUATION561 V1 EN-US (Equation 319)

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2
-
2÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN-US (Equation 320)

8.12.3.6 Setting the reach with respect to load GUID-ED84BDE6-16CD-45ED-A45D-5CFB828A9040 v6

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPPZx and for the
phase-to-earth faults RFPEZx for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining reach
setting parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in the resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement
automatically follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the
end of the protected zone is equal to equation 321.

1
R  2  R1Zx  R0Zx   RFPEZx
3
IECEQUATION2303 V2 EN-US (Equation 321)

 loop  arctan
 2  X1Zx  X0Zx 
 2  R1Zx  R0Zx 
EQUATION2304 V2 EN-US (Equation 322)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition to
minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPEZx  4.5  X1Zx

IECEQUATION2305 V2 EN-US (Equation 323)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low compared to the fault
resistance for phase-to-earth faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit the setting of
the zone1 reach in the resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement based on
equation 324.

RFPPZx  6  X 1Zx
IECEQUATION2306 V3 EN-US (Equation 324)

The setting XLd is primarily there to define the border between what is considered a fault and
what is just normal operation. See figure 181 In this context, the main examples of normal
operation are reactive load from reactive power compensation equipment or the capacitive
charging of a long high-voltage power line. XLd needs to be set with some margin towards
normal apparent reactance; not more than 90% of the said reactance or just as much as is
needed from a zone reach point of view.

As with the settings RLdFw and RLdRv [2], XLd is representing a per-phase load impedance of a
symmetrical star-coupled representation. For a symmetrical load or three-phase and phase-to-

[2] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

Line distance protection REL670 299

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

phase faults, this means per-phase, or positive-sequence, impedance. During a phase-to-earth

fault, it means the per-loop impedance, including the earth return impedance.

8.12.3.7 Zone reach setting lower than minimum load impedance GUID-68C336F4-5285-4167-B3F8-B0963BD85439 v5

Even if the resistive reach of all protection zones is set lower than the lowest expected load
impedance and there is no risk for load encroachment, it is still necessary to set RLdFw, RLdRv
[3] and ArgLd according to the expected load situation, since these settings are used internally

in the function as reference points to improve the performance of the phase selection.

The maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone must be checked to ensure that there is
a sufficient setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load impedance. The
minimum load impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated with equation 325.

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 325)

Where:
U the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 326)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

As a safety margin, it is required to avoid load encroachment under three-

phase conditions. To guarantee correct, healthy phase IED operation under
combined heavy three-phase load and earth faults, both phase-to-phase and
phase-to-earth fault operating characteristics should be considered.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load

EQUATION792 V2 EN-US (Equation 327)

Equation 327 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-earth
faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. For
the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three times the load-impedance angle,
more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 328.

[3] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

300 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection


RFPEZx  0.8  Z load min  cos  
2  R1Zx  R 0 Zx
 sin 

 2  X 1Zx  X 0 Zx 
EQUATION578 V5 EN-US (Equation 328)

Where:
∂ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load
impedance.

RFPPZx  1.6  Zload

EQUATION579 V3 EN-US (Equation 329)

Equation 329 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase
faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. For
other cases a more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 330.

 cos   
R1Zx
RFPPZx  1.6  Zload min  sin 
 X1Zx 
IECEQUATION2307 V2 EN-US (Equation 330)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function ZMRPSB
is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a
ZMRPSB function is activated in the IED, refer to the description of Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB.

8.12.3.8 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance GUID-78D0227F-2568-4C9A-8921-45812B4ABAF2 v5

The impedance zones are enabled as soon as the (symmetrical) load impedance crosses the
vertical boundaries defined by RLdFw and RLdRv [4] or the lines defined by ArgLd. So, it is
necessary to consider some margin. It is recommended to set RLdFw and RLdRv to 90% of the
per-phase resistance that corresponds to maximum load.

RLdFw < 0.9 × Rload min

IECEQUATION2419 V2 EN-US (Equation 331)

RLdRv < 0.9 × Rload min

IECEQUATION2420 V2 EN-US (Equation 332)

The absolute value of the margin to the closest ArgLd line should be of the same order, that is,
at least 0.1 • Zload min.

The load encroachment settings are related to a per-phase load impedance in a symmetrical
star-coupled representation. For symmetrical load or three-phase and phase-to-phase faults,
this corresponds to the per-phase, or positive-sequence, impedance. For a phase-to-earth
fault, it corresponds to the per-loop impedance, including the earth return impedance.

[4] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

Line distance protection REL670 301

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

X X

XLd
RLdFw
10%
90% RLdFw
ARGLd 10% ARGLd R
ARGLd ARGLd
R
ARGLd ArgLd Possible
RLdRv load ARGLd ARGLd

RLdRv

XLd
IEC12000176-2-en.vsd
IEC12000176 V2 EN-US

Figure 181: Load impedance limitation with load encroachment

During the initial current change for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-earth faults, operation
may be allowed also when the apparent impedance of the load encroachment element is
located in the load area. This improves the dependability for fault at the remote end of the line
during high load. Although it is not associated to any standard event, there is one potentially
hazardous situation that should be considered. Should one phase of a parallel circuit open a
single pole, even though there is no fault, and the load current of that phase increase, there is
actually no way of distinguish this from a real fault with similar characteristics. Should this
accidental event be given precaution, the phase-to-earth reach (RFPEZx) of all instantaneous
zones has to be set below the emergency load for the pole-open situation. Again, this is only
for the application where there is a risk that one breaker pole would open without a preceding
fault. If this never happens, for example when there is no parallel circuit, there is no need to
change any phase-to-earth reach according to the pole-open scenario.

8.12.3.9 Other settings GUID-9D65B411-6FE2-433B-AE6C-C6DD716D1181 v7

IMinOpPEZx and IMinOpPPZx

The ability for a specific loop and zone to issue a start or a trip is inhibited if the magnitude of
the input current for this loop falls below the threshold value defined by these settings. The
output of a phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IminOpPE(Zx). In is the RMS value of the
fundamental current in phase n.

The output of a phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPP(Zx). ILmLn is the
RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

Both current limits IMinOpPEZx and IMinOpPPZx are automatically reduced to 75% of regular
set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir is set to
Reverse.

OpModePPZx and OpModePEZx

These settings, two per zone (x=1,2..5&RV), with options {Off, Quadrilateral, Mho, Offset}, are
used to set the operation and characteristic for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults,
respectively.

For example, in one zone it is possible to choose Mho characteristic for the three Ph-Ph
measuring loops and Quadrilateral characteristic for the three Ph-E measuring loops.

DirModeZx

302 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

This setting defines the operating direction for zones Z3, Z4 and Z5 (the directionality of zones
Z1, Z2 and ZRV is fixed). The options are Non-directional, Forward or Reverse. The result from
respective set value is illustrated in figure182, where the positive impedance corresponds to
the direction out on the protected line.

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 182: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones 3 to 5

tPPZx, tPEZx, TimerModeZx, ZoneLinkStart and TimerLinksZx

The logic for the linking of the timer settings can be described with a module diagram. The
figure 183 shows only the case when TimerModeZx is selected to Ph-Ph and Ph-E.

Line distance protection REL670 303

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

TimerModeZx =
Enable PhPh or
Ph-E PhPh
PPZx AND tPPZx
OR AND
AND t
PEZx
AND tPEZx OR
OR
AND t
AND

BLOCK
VTSZ
BLKZx OR
BLKTRZx
OR TimerLinksZx
LoopLink (tPP-tPE)
ZoneLinkStart LoopLink & ZoneLink
OR
Phase Selection No Links
1st starting zone
External start FALSE (0)
LNKZ2
LNKZx
AND
OR
TimerLinksZx =
LNKZ4 LoopLink & ZoneLink
LNKZ5

EXTNST

IEC12000139-4-en.vsdx
IEC12000139 V4 EN-US

Figure 183: Logic for linking of timers

CVTtype

If possible, the type of capacitive voltage transformer (CVT) used for measurement should be
identified. The alternatives are strongly related to the type of ferro-resonance suppression
circuit included in the CVT. There are two main choices:

Passive type For CVTs that use a nonlinear component, like a saturable inductor, to limit overvoltages
(caused by ferro-resonance). This component is practically idle during normal load and fault
conditions, hence the name "passive." CVTs that have a high resistive burden to mitigate
ferro-resonance also fall into this category.
Any This option is primarily related to the so-called active type CVT, which uses a set of reactive
components to form a filter circuit that essentially attenuates frequencies other than the
nominal to restrain the ferro-resonance. The name "active" refers to this circuit always being
involved during transient conditions, regardless of the voltage level. This option should also
be used for the types that do not fall under the other two categories, for example, CVTs with
power electronic damping devices, or if the type cannot be identified at all.
None This option should be selected if the voltage transformer is fully magnetic.
(Magnetic)

INReleasePE

This setting opens an opportunity to enable phase-to-earth measurement for phase-to-phase-

earth faults. It determines the level of residual current (3I0) above which phase-to-earth
measurement is activated (and phase-to-phase measurement is blocked). The relations are
defined with the equation.

304 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

IN Re leasePE
3× I0 ³ × Iph max
100
EQUATION2548 V1 EN-US (Equation 333)

Where:
INReleasePE the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-to-
earth fault loops in %
Iphmax the maximum phase current in any of the three phases

By default, this setting is set excessively high to always enable phase-to-phase measurement
for phase-to-phase-earth faults. This default setting value must be maintained unless there
are very specific reasons to enable phase-to-earth measurement. Even with the default setting
value, phase-to-earth measurement is activated whenever appropriate, like in the case of
simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one each on the two circuits of a
double line.

One specific situation where the INReleasePE setting should be altered is for cross-country
faults in high impedance earthed networks, in order to make sure that operation is phase-to-
earth. This is particularly important when using phase preference logic, since it is only working
per phase, not for phase-to-phase measurement. The limit should be set so that it will be
exceeded during a cross-country fault.

8.12.3.10 ZMMMXU settings GUID-42F340C5-93CC-40AE-B67D-DC1B7D0520DA v1

ZZeroDb

Minimum level of impedance in % of range (ZMax-ZMin) used as indication of zero impedance

(zero point clamping). Measured values below ZZeroDb are forced to zero.

ZHiHiLim, ZHiLim, ZLowLim and ZLowLowLim

All measured values are supervised against these four settable limits. It provides the attribute
"range" in the data class MV (measured value) with the type ENUMERATED (normal, high, low,
high-high and low-low) in ZMFPDIS.ZMMMXU.

ZLimHys

Hysteresis value in % of range (ZMax-ZMin), common for all limits. It is used to avoid the
frequent update of the value for the attribute “range”.

ZMax

Estimated maximum impedance value. An impedance that is higher than ZMax has the quality
attribute as “Out of Range”.

ZMin

Estimated minimum impedance value. An impedance that is lower than ZMin has the quality
attribute as “Out of Range”.

Line distance protection REL670 305

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.13 High speed distance protection for series

compensated lines ZMFCPDIS GUID-ED71CF5A-1453-4F2F-9C64-3A73C59EA948 v4

8.13.1 Identification GUID-0F03DA72-0687-4762-91CB-EC8E59B86E06 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
High speed distance protection zone ZMFCPDIS 21
(zone 1-6)
Z
S00346 V2 EN-US

8.13.2 Application IP14961-1 v2

GUID-12188AB4-5922-428B-86F5-5F3897D29807 v4
Sub-transmission networks are being extended and often become more and more complex,
consisting of a high number of multi-circuit and/or multi terminal lines of very different
lengths. These changes in the network will normally impose more stringent demands on the
fault clearing equipment in order to maintain an unchanged or increased security level of the
power system.

The high speed distance protection function (ZMFCPDIS) in the IED is designed to provide sub-
cycle, down to half-cycle operate time for basic faults. At the same time, it is specifically
designed for extra care during difficult conditions in high voltage transmission networks, like
faults on long heavily loaded lines and faults generating heavily distorted signals. These faults
are handled with utmost security and dependability, although sometimes with reduced
operating speed.

8.13.2.1 System earthing GUID-FC9BF10E-8CA1-4B23-887D-2EAB6A2A0A6E v1

The type of system earthing plays an important role when designing the protection system.
Some hints with respect to distance protection are highlighted below.

Solidly earthed networks GUID-6870F6A8-EB28-47CF-AF26-7CE758BF934E v1

In solidly earthed systems, the transformer neutrals are connected directly to earth without
any impedance between the transformer neutral and earth.

IEC05000215 V2 EN-US

Figure 184: Solidly earthed network

The earth-fault current is as high or even higher than the short-circuit current. The series
impedances determine the magnitude of the fault current. The shunt admittance has very
limited influence on the earth-fault current. The shunt admittance may, however, have some
marginal influence on the earth-fault current in networks with long transmission lines.

The earth-fault current at single phase-to-earth in phase L1 can be calculated as equation 334:

306 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

3 × U L1 U L1
3I 0 = =
Z1 + Z 2 + Z 0 + 3Z f Z1 + Z N + Z f
EQUATION1267 V3 EN-US (Equation 334)

Where:
UL1 is the phase-to-earth voltage (kV) in the faulty phase before
fault.
Z1 is the positive sequence impedance (Ω/phase).

Z2 is the negative sequence impedance (Ω/phase).

Z0 is the zero sequence impedance (Ω/phase).

Zf is the fault impedance (Ω), often resistive.

ZN is the earth-return impedance defined as (Z0-Z1)/3.

The voltage on the healthy phases is generally lower than 140% of the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage. This corresponds to about 80% of the nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

The high zero-sequence current in solidly earthed networks makes it possible to use
impedance measuring techniques to detect earth faults. However, distance protection has
limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults and should therefore always be
complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry out the fault clearance in those
cases.

Effectively earthed networks GUID-613296E6-A612-4B8B-9F23-311D07CFDB0E v2

A network is defined as effectively earthed if the earth-fault factor fe is less than 1.4. The earth-
fault factor is defined according to equation 335:

U max
fe =
U pn
EQUATION1268 V4 EN-US (Equation 335)

Where:
Umax is the highest fundamental frequency voltage on one of the healthy phases at single
phase-to-earth fault.
Upn is the phase-to-earth fundamental frequency voltage before fault.

Another definition for effectively earthed network is when the following relationships between
the symmetrical components of the network impedances are valid, see equations 336 and 337:

X 0 < 3 × X1
EQUATION2122 V1 EN-US (Equation 336)

R0 £ R1
EQUATION2123 V1 EN-US (Equation 337)

Where
R0 is the resistive zero sequence of the source

X0 is the reactive zero sequence of the source

Line distance protection REL670 307

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

R1 is the resistive positive sequence of the source

X1 is the reactive positive sequence of the source

The magnitude of the earth-fault current in effectively earthed networks is high enough for
impedance measuring elements to detect earth faults. However, in the same way as for solidly
earthed networks, distance protection has limited possibilities to detect high resistance faults
and should therefore always be complemented with other protection function(s) that can carry
out the fault clearance in this case.

High impedance earthed networks GUID-123D2D9D-8055-4A2F-9CC2-6EAE0C9F905B v2

In this type of network, it is mostly not possible to use distance protection for detection and
clearance of earth faults. The low magnitude of the earth-fault current might not give start of
the zero-sequence measurement elements or the sensitivity will be too low for acceptance. For
this reason a separate high sensitive earth-fault protection is necessary to carry out the fault
clearance for single phase-to-earth fault.

8.13.2.2 Fault infeed from remote end GUID-DDFE8B5C-A064-4956-B8BB-49DEAC38558E v3

All transmission and most sub-transmission networks are operated meshed. Typical for this
type of network is that fault infeed from remote end will happen when fault occurs on the
protected line. The fault current infeed will enlarge the fault impedance seen by the distance
protection. This effect is very important to keep in mind when both planning the protection
system and making the settings.

The equation for the bus voltage UA at A side is:

(
U A = I A ⋅ p ⋅ Z L + I A + I B ⋅ Rf )
EQUATION1273-IEC-650 V2 EN-US (Equation 338)

If we divide UA by IA we get Z present to the IED at A side:

UA IA + IB
ZA = = p ·ZL + ·Rf
IA IA
EQUATION1274-IEC-650 V1 EN-US (Equation 339)

The infeed factor (IA+IB)/IA can be very high, 10-20 depending on the differences in source
impedances at local and remote end.

UA UB
p*ZL (1-p)*ZL ESB
ESA A IA IB B ZSB
ZSA
ZL

Z< Z<
Rf

IEC09000247-1-en.vsd
IEC09000247 V1 EN-US

Figure 185: Influence of fault current infeed from remote line end

308 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The effect of fault current infeed from remote line end is one of the most driving factors to
justify complementary protection to distance protection.

When the line is heavily loaded, the distance protection at the exporting end will have a
tendency to overreach. To handle this phenomenon, the IED has an adaptive built-in algorithm,
which compensates the overreach tendency of zone 1 at the exporting end and reduces the
underreach at the importing end. No settings are required for this function.

8.13.2.3 Load encroachment GUID-D846C3D9-4C79-40B5-9ED2-23934214AADB v7

In some cases the load impedance might enter the zone characteristic without any fault on the
protected line. The phenomenon is called load encroachment and it might occur when an
external fault is cleared and high emergency load is transferred on the protected line. The
effect of load encroachment is illustrated in the left part of figure 186. A load impedance
within the characteristic would cause an unwanted trip. The traditional way of avoiding this
situation is to set the distance zone resistive reach with a security margin to the minimum
load impedance. The drawback with this approach is that the sensitivity of the protection to
detect resistive faults is reduced.

The IED has a built-in function which shapes the characteristic according to the right part of
figure 186. The load encroachment algorithm will increase the possibility to detect high fault
resistances, especially for phase-to-earth faults at the remote line end. For example, for a
given setting of the load angle ArgLd the resistive blinder for the zone measurement can be
expanded according to the right part of the figure 186, given higher fault resistance coverage
without risk for unwanted operation due to load encroachment. This is valid in both directions.

The use of the load encroachment feature is essential for long heavily loaded lines, where there
might be a conflict between the necessary emergency load transfer and necessary sensitivity
of the distance protection. The function can also preferably be used on heavy loaded medium
long lines. For short lines, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not a major problem. Nevertheless, always set RLdFw, RLdRv [5] and ArgLd
according to the expected maximum load since these settings are used internally in the
function as reference points to improve the performance of the phase selection.

Z1

ArgLd

[1]
RLdRv RLdFw

IEC09000248-3-en.vsdx
IEC09000248 V3 EN-US

Figure 186: Load encroachment phenomena

8.13.2.4 Short line application GUID-7FA1B585-C979-4D51-A502-9C4070B99F0E v2

In short line applications, the major concern is to get sufficient fault resistance coverage. Load
encroachment is not so common. The line length that can be recognized as a short line is not a

[5] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw.

Line distance protection REL670 309

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

fixed length; it depends on system parameters such as voltage and source impedance, see
table 30.

Table 30: Definition of short and very short line

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Very short line 1.1-5.5 km 5-25 km
Short line 5.5-11 km 25-50 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults without conflict with the load impedance, see figure 186.

For very short line applications, the underreaching zone 1 cannot be used due to the voltage
drop distribution throughout the line will be too low causing risk for overreaching.

Load encroachment is normally no problem for short line applications.

8.13.2.5 Long transmission line application GUID-AD1A1A5B-B4F5-4B48-9DBD-59D28D71BA9C v3

For long transmission lines, the margin to the load impedance to avoid load encroachment is a
major concern. It is difficult to achieve high sensitivity for phase-to-earth fault at remote line
end of long lines when the line is heavy loaded.

What can be recognized as long lines with respect to the performance of distance protection
can generally be described as in table 31, long lines have source impedance ratio (SIR’s) less
than 0.5.

Table 31: Definition of long and very long lines

Line category Un Un
110 kV 500 kV
Long lines 77 km - 99 km 350 km - 450 km
Very long lines > 99 km > 450 km

The IED's ability to set resistive and reactive reach independent for positive and zero sequence
fault loops and individual fault resistance settings for phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth fault
together with load encroachment algorithm improves the possibility to detect high resistive
faults at the same time as the security is improved (risk for unwanted trip due to load
encroachment is eliminated), see figure 187.

310 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Zm

ZL

ARGLd ARGLd
R
ARGLd
ARGLd

RLdRv RLdFw

en05000220.vsd
IEC05000220 V1 EN-US

Figure 187: Characteristic for zone measurement for a long line

[6]

8.13.2.6 Parallel line application with mutual coupling GUID-1F856628-0CEE-4679-BB71-40177187390D v1

General GUID-1D633249-8BF6-4992-A06E-E8BD23B2C315 v3
Introduction of parallel lines in the network is increasing due to difficulties to get necessary
area for new lines.

Parallel lines introduce an error in the zero sequence measurement due to the mutual coupling
between the parallel lines. The lines need not be of the same voltage in order to have mutual
coupling, and some coupling exists even for lines that are separated by 100 meters or more.
The mutual coupling does not normally cause voltage inversion.

It can be shown from analytical calculations of line impedances that the mutual impedances
for positive and negative sequence are very small (< 1-2%) of the self impedance and it is a
practice to neglect them.

From an application point of view there exists three types of network configurations (classes)
that must be considered when making the settings for the protection function.

The different network configuration classes are:

1. Parallel line with common positive and zero sequence network

2. Parallel circuits with common positive but separated zero sequence network
3. Parallel circuits with positive and zero sequence sources separated.

One example of class 3 networks could be the mutual coupling between a 400 kV line and rail
road overhead lines. This type of mutual coupling is not so common although it exists and is
not treated any further in this manual.

For each type of network class, there are three different topologies; the parallel line can be in
service, out of service or out of service and earthed in both ends.

[6] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw.

Line distance protection REL670 311

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The reach of the distance protection zone 1 will be different depending on the operation
condition of the parallel line. This can be handled by the use of different setting groups for
handling the cases when the parallel line is in operation and out of service and earthed at both
ends.

The distance protection within the IED can compensate for the influence of a zero sequence
mutual coupling on the measurement at single phase-to-earth faults in the following ways, by
using:

• The possibility of different setting values that influence the earth-return compensation
for different distance zones within the same group of setting parameters.
• Different groups of setting parameters for different operating conditions of a protected
multi circuit line.

Most multi circuit lines have two parallel operating circuits.

Parallel line applications GUID-74355B21-61D3-47A9-A3AE-2D56B2EDDC3C v2

This type of networks is defined as those networks where the parallel transmission lines
terminate at common nodes at both ends.

The three operation modes are:

1. Parallel line in service.

2. Parallel line out of service and earthed.
3. Parallel line out of service and not earthed.

Parallel line in service GUID-0C0B1323-C69D-4EFE-A3CF-C81D762ED146 v2

This type of application is very common and applies to all normal sub-transmission and
transmission networks.

Let us analyze what happens when a fault occurs on the parallel line see figure 188.

From symmetrical components, we can derive the impedance Z at the relay point for normal
lines without mutual coupling according to equation 340.

U ph U ph
Z= =
Z 0 − Z 1 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ K N
I ph + 3I 0 ⋅
3⋅ Z1
IECEQUATION1275 V2 EN-US (Equation 340)

Where:
Uph is phase to earth voltage at the relay point.
Iph is phase current in the faulty phase.
3I0 is earth fault current.
Z1 is positive sequence impedance.
Z0 is zero sequence impedance.

312 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A B

Z0m

Z< Z< IEC09000250_1_en.vsd

IEC09000250 V1 EN-US

Figure 188: Class 1, parallel line in service

The equivalent circuit of the lines can be simplified, see figure 189.

Z0 -Z0m
A

Z0m
C
Z0 -Z0m
B
IEC09000253_1_en.vsd
IEC09000253 V1 EN-US

Figure 189: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit of the double-circuit, parallel,
operating line with a single phase-to-earth fault at the remote busbar
When mutual coupling is introduced, the voltage at the relay point A will be changed according
to equation 341.

æ Z 0 - Z1L Z 0m ö
U ph = Z1L × ç I ph + 3I 0 × L + 3I 0 p ÷
è 3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L ø
IECEQUATION1276 V3 EN-US (Equation 341)

By dividing equation 341 by equation 340 and after some simplification we can write the
impedance present to the relay at A side as:

æ 3I 0 × KNm ö
Z = Z 1L ç 1 + ÷
è I ph + 3I 0 × KN ø
EQUATION1277 V3 EN-US (Equation 342)

Where:
KNm = Z0m/(3 · Z1L)

The second part in the parentheses is the error introduced to the measurement of the line
impedance.

If the current on the parallel line has negative sign compared to the current on the protected
line, that is, the current on the parallel line has an opposite direction compared to the current
on the protected line, the distance function will overreach. If the currents have the same
direction, the distance protection will underreach.

Maximum overreach will occur if the fault current infeed from remote line end is weak. If
considering a single phase-to-earth fault at 'p' unit of the line length from A to B on the parallel
line for the case when the fault current infeed from remote line end is zero, the voltage UA in
the faulty phase at A side as in equation 343.

Line distance protection REL670 313

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

(
U A = p ⋅ ZI L I ph + K N ⋅ 3I 0 + K Nm ⋅ 3I 0 p )
IECEQUATION1278 V2 EN-US (Equation 343)

One can also notice that the following relationship exists between the zero sequence currents:

3I 0 ⋅ Z 0 L = 3I 0 p ⋅ Z 0 L ( 2 − p )
EQUATION1279 V3 EN-US (Equation 344)

Simplification of equation 344, solving it for 3I0p and substitution of the result into equation
343 gives that the voltage can be drawn as:

 3I ⋅ p 
U A = p ⋅ ZI L  I ph + K N ⋅ 3I 0 + K Nm ⋅ 0 
 2− p 
IECEQUATION1280 V2 EN-US (Equation 345)

If we finally divide equation 345 with equation 340 we can draw the impedance present to the
IED as

 3I 0 ⋅ p 
 I ph + KN ⋅ 3I 0 + KN m ⋅ 
2− p 
Z = p ⋅ ZI L 
 I ph + 3I 0 ⋅ KN 
 
 
EQUATION1379 V3 EN-US (Equation 346)

Calculation for a 400 kV line, where we for simplicity have excluded the resistance, gives with
X1L=0.303 Ω/km, X0L=0.88 Ω/km, zone 1 reach is set to 90% of the line reactance p=71% that
is, the protection is underreaching with approximately 20%.

The zero sequence mutual coupling can reduce the reach of distance protection on the
protected circuit when the parallel line is in normal operation. The reduction of the reach is
most pronounced with no current infeed in the IED closest to the fault. This reach reduction is
normally less than 15%. But when the reach is reduced at one line end, it is proportionally
increased at the opposite line end. So this 15% reach reduction does not significantly affect
the operation of a permissive underreaching scheme.

Parallel line out of service and earthed GUID-DFB5C5AD-407D-4325-BE46-092F5F5D2F59

GUID-A93E0062-A4E1-447B-A3A3-74B49581AD70 v1

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000251_1_en.vsd
IEC09000251 V1 EN-US

Figure 190: The parallel line is out of service and earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and earthed at both line ends on the bus bar side of the
line CTs so that zero sequence current can flow on the parallel line, the equivalent zero
sequence circuit of the parallel lines will be according to figure 191.

314 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A I0 Z0 - Z0m

Z0m
I0
C

B Z0 -Z0m

IEC09000252_1_en.vsd
IEC09000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 191: Equivalent zero sequence impedance circuit for the double-circuit line that
operates with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both ends
Here the equivalent zero-sequence impedance is equal to Z0-Z0m in parallel with (Z0-Z0m)/Z0-
Z0m+Z0m which is equal to equation 347.

2 2
Z 0 - Z om
ZE =
Z0
EQUATION2002 V4 EN-US (Equation 347)

The influence on the distance measurement will be a considerable overreach, which must be
considered when calculating the settings. It is recommended to use a separate setting group
for this operation condition since it will reduce the reach considerably when the line is in
operation.

All expressions below are proposed for practical use. They assume the value of zero sequence,
mutual resistance R0m equals to zero. They consider only the zero sequence, mutual reactance
X0m. Calculate the equivalent X0E and R0E zero sequence parameters according to equation 348
and equation 349 for each particular line section and use them for calculating the reach for the
underreaching zone.

 X 0m 2 
R0 E = R0 ⋅ 1 + 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3502 V2 EN-US (Equation 348)

 X 0m 2 
X 0 E = X 0 ⋅ 1 − 
 R 2+X 2 
 0 0 
DOCUMENT11520-IMG3503 V2 EN-US (Equation 349)

Parallel line out of service and not earthed GUID-DF8B0C63-E6D1-4E11-A8CB-D0C8EAE10FF0 v1

A B

Z0m

Z< Z<
IEC09000254_1_en.vsd
IEC09000254 V1 EN-US

Figure 192: Parallel line is out of service and not earthed

When the parallel line is out of service and not earthed, the zero sequence on that line can only
flow through the line admittance to the earth. The line admittance is high which limits the
zero-sequence current on the parallel line to very low values. In practice, the equivalent zero-

Line distance protection REL670 315

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

sequence impedance circuit for faults at the remote bus bar can be simplified to the circuit
shown in figure 192

The line zero sequence mutual impedance does not influence the measurement of the distance
protection in a faulty circuit. This means that the reach of the underreaching distance
protection zone is reduced if, due to operating conditions, the equivalent zero sequence
impedance is set according to the conditions when the parallel system is out of operation and
earthed at both ends.

I0 Z0 - Z0m
A
Z0m I0
C
Z0 - Z0m
B
IEC09000255_1_en.vsd
IEC09000255 V1 EN-US

Figure 193: Equivalent zero-sequence impedance circuit for a double-circuit line with one
circuit disconnected and not earthed
The reduction of the reach is equal to equation 350.

1
3
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 E + R f ) Zm0
2

KU = = 1-
1
(
× 2 × Z1 + Z 0 + R f ) Z 0 × 2 × Z 1 + Z 0 + 3R f ( )
3
EQUATION1284 V1 EN-US (Equation 350)

This means that the reach is reduced in reactive and resistive directions. If the real and
imaginary components of the constant A are equal to equation 351 and equation 352.

Re( A ) = R 0 × (2 × R1 + R 0 + 3 × Rf ) - X 0 × ( X 0 + 2 × X 1)
EQUATION1285 V1 EN-US (Equation 351)

Im( A ) = X 0 × (2 × R1 + R0 + 3 × R1 ) + R0 × (2 × X 1 + X 0 )
EQUATION1286 V1 EN-US (Equation 352)

The real component of the KU factor is equal to equation 353.

( )
Re A ⋅ X m 0 2
( )
Re K u = 1 +
 Re ( A )  +  Im ( A ) 
2 2

   
EQUATION1287 V3 EN-US (Equation 353)

The imaginary component of the same factor is equal to equation 354.

( )
Im A × X m 0 2
( )
Im K U =
é Re ( A ) ù + é Im ( A ) ù
2 2

ë û ë û
EQUATION1288 V2 EN-US (Equation 354)

Ensure that the underreaching zones from both line ends will overlap a sufficient amount (at
least 10%) in the middle of the protected circuit.

316 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.13.2.7 Tapped line application GUID-4DFD6015-E97C-4F7E-84CA-C7CD2438C55A v1

GUID-77388095-4EE8-4915-A1D4-D0767D1E04F5 v1

A
B

BC

IEC09000160-3-en.vsd
IEC09000160 V3 EN-US

Figure 194: Example of tapped line with Auto transformer

This application gives rise to a similar problem that was highlighted in section Fault infeed
from remote end, that is increased measured impedance due to fault current infeed. For
example, for faults between the T point and B station the measured impedance at A and C will
be:

IA + IC
ZA =ZAT + ·ZTF
IA
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3509 V3 EN-US (Equation 355)

 I A + IC   U 2 2
Z C = Z Trf +  Z CT + ⋅ Z TF  ⋅  
 IC   U1 
DOCUMENT11524-IMG3510 V3 EN-US (Equation 356)

Where:
ZAT and ZCT is the line impedance from the A respective C station to the T point.

IA and IC is fault current from A respective C station for fault between T and B.

U2/U1 Transformation ratio for transformation of impedance at U1 side of the

transformer to the measuring side U2 (it is assumed that current and voltage
distance function is taken from U2 side of the transformer).
ZTF is the line impedance from the T point to the fault (F).

ZTrf is transformer impedance.

For this example with a fault between T and B, the measured impedance from the T point to
the fault will be increased by a factor defined as the sum of the currents from T point to the

Line distance protection REL670 317

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

fault divided by the IED current. For the IED at C, the impedance on the high voltage side U1
has to be transferred to the measuring voltage level by the transformer ratio.

Another complication that might occur depending on the topology is that the current from one
end can have a reverse direction for fault on the protected line. For example, for faults at T the
current from B might go in reverse direction from B to C depending on the system parameters
(see the dotted line in figure 194), given that the distance protection in B to T will measure
wrong direction.

In three-end application, depending on the source impedance behind the IEDs, the impedances
of the protected object and the fault location, it might be necessary to accept zone 2 trip in
one end or sequential trip in one end.

Generally for this type of application it is difficult to select settings of zone 1 that both gives
overlapping of the zones with enough sensitivity without interference with other zone 1
settings, that is, without selectivity conflicts. Careful fault calculations are necessary to
determine suitable settings and selection of proper scheme communication.

Fault resistance GUID-D42B3721-E63B-411E-A7DD-5F606ECA4576 v1

The performance of distance protection for single phase-to-earth faults is very important,
because normally more than 70% of the faults on transmission lines are single phase-to-earth
faults. At these faults, the fault resistance is composed of three parts: arc resistance,
resistance of a tower construction, and tower-footing resistance. The arc resistance can be
calculated according to Warrington's formula:

28707 × L
Rarc =
I1.4
EQUATION1456 V1 EN-US (Equation 357)

Where:
L represents the length of the arc (in meters). This equation applies for the distance protection zone 1.
Consider approximately three times arc foot spacing for zone 2 to get a reasonable margin against
the influence of wind.
I is the actual fault current in A.

In practice, the setting of fault resistance for both phase-to-earth RFPE and phase-to-phase
RFPP should be as high as possible without interfering with the load impedance in order to
obtain reliable fault detection.

8.13.3 Series compensation in power systems GUID-7F3BBF91-4A17-4B31-9828-F2757672C440 v2

The main purpose of series compensation in power systems is virtual reduction of line
reactance in order to enhance the power system stability and increase loadability of
transmission corridors. The principle is based on compensation of distributed line reactance
by insertion of series capacitor (SC). The generated reactive power provided by the capacitor
is continuously proportional to the square of the current flowing at the same time through the
compensated line and series capacitor. This means that the series capacitor has a self-
regulating effect. When the system loading increases, the reactive power generated by series
capacitors increases as well. The response of SCs is automatic, instantaneous and continuous.

The main benefits of incorporating series capacitors in transmission lines are:

318 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

• Steady state voltage regulation and raise of voltage collapse limit

• Increase power transfer capability by raising the dynamic stability limit
• Improved reactive power balance
• Increase in power transfer capacity
• Reduced costs of power transmission due to decreased investment costs for new power
lines

8.13.3.1 Steady state voltage regulation and increase of voltage collapse limit GUID-0AB9B4B5-92DF-4A3B-9046-FC3A460DA658 v1

A series capacitor is capable of compensating the voltage drop of the series inductance in a
transmission line, as shown in figure 195. During low loading, the system voltage drop is lower
and at the same time, the voltage drop on the series capacitor is lower. When the loading
increases and the voltage drop become larger, the contribution of the series capacitor
increases and therefore the system voltage at the receiving line end can be regulated.

Series compensation also extends the region of voltage stability by reducing the reactance of
the line and consequently the SC is valuable for prevention of voltage collapse. Figure 196
presents the voltage dependence at receiving bus B (as shown in figure 195) on line loading
and compensation degree KC, which is defined according to equation 358. The effect of series
compensation is in this particular case obvious and self explanatory.

XC
KC =
X Line
EQUATION1895 V1 EN-US (Equation 358)

A typical 500 km long 500 kV line is considered with source impedance

Z SA1 = 0
EQUATION1896 V1 EN-US (Equation 359)

A B
Z SA1 Power line Load
EA ~
Seires
capacitor

en06000585.vsd
IEC06000585 V1 EN-US

Figure 195: A simple radial power system

500

U limit
400

300
U[kV]

200
P30

P50

P70
P0

100

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800

P[MW]

en06000586.vsd
IEC06000586 V1 EN-US

Figure 196: Voltage profile for a simple radial power line with 0, 30, 50 and 70% of
compensation

Line distance protection REL670 319

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.13.3.2 Increase in power transfer GUID-C9163D4E-CC2B-4645-B2AC-2C8A3FE3D337 v3

The increase in power transfer capability as a function of the degree of compensation for a
transmission line can be explained by studying the circuit shown in figure 197. The power
transfer on the transmission line is given by the equation 360:

U A × U B × sin (d ) U A × U B × sin ( d )
P= =
X Line - X C X Line × (1 - K C )
EQUATION1897 V1 EN-US (Equation 360)

The compensation degree Kc is defined as equation

UA DU UB

PA A B PB
-jX C +jXL
UA UB
QA QB
d

en06000590.vsd
IEC06000590 V1 EN-US

Figure 197: Transmission line with series capacitor

The effect on the power transfer when considering a constant angle difference (δ) between
the line ends is illustrated in figure 198. Practical compensation degree runs from 20 to 70
percent. Transmission capability increases of more than two times can be obtained in practice.

Multiple of power over

a non-compensated line
Power transfer with constant angle difference
3.5

3
Increase in power transfer

2.5

1.5

1
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Degree of series compensation [%] Degree of
compensation
IEC06000592-2-en.vsd
IEC06000592 V2 EN-US

Figure 198: Increase in power transfer over a transmission line depending on degree of
series compensation

8.13.3.3 Voltage and current inversion GUID-CB215C0F-F4FA-4646-9235-AE6DB0255E80 v1

Series capacitors influence the magnitude and the direction of fault currents in series
compensated networks. They consequently influence phase angles of voltages measured in
different points of series compensated networks and this performances of different
protection functions, which have their operation based on properties of measured voltage and
current phasors.

Voltage inversion GUID-E649A7CB-9877-48F7-8AB3-25D5E8695673 v1

Figure 199 presents a part of series compensated line with reactance XL1 between the IED
point and the fault in point F of series compensated line. The voltage measurement is
supposed to be on the bus side, so that series capacitor appears between the IED point and

320 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

fault on the protected line. Figure 200 presents the corresponding phasor diagrams for the
cases with bypassed and fully inserted series capacitor.

Voltage distribution on faulty lossless serial compensated line from fault point F to the bus is
linearly dependent on distance from the bus, if there is no capacitor included in scheme (as
shown in figure 200). Voltage UM measured at the bus is equal to voltage drop D UL on the
faulty line and lags the current IF by 90 electrical degrees.

The situation changes with series capacitor included in circuit between the IED point and the
fault position. The fault current IF (see figure 200) is increased due to the series capacitor,
generally decreases total impedance between the sources and the fault. The reactive voltage
drop D UL on XL1 line impedance leads the current by 90 degrees. Voltage drop DUC on series
capacitor lags the fault current by 90 degrees. Note that line impedance XL1 could be divided
into two parts: one between the IED point and the capacitor and one between the capacitor
and the fault position. The resulting voltage UM in IED point is this way proportional to sum of
voltage drops on partial impedances between the IED point and the fault position F, as
presented by

U M = I F × j ( X L1 - X C )
EQUATION1901 V1 EN-US (Equation 361)

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
Source voltage

Pre -fault voltage

U’ M Fault voltage

UM
U

Source
XS XL1
~
XC F
IF

Z<

en06000605.vsd
IEC06000605 V1 EN-US

Figure 199: Voltage inversion on series compensated line

US
xUS

xUS
US

With bypassed With inserted

capacitor capacitor
x UL
U’M=xU L

IF IF
x UC

UM

en06000606.vsd
IEC06000606 V1 EN-US

Figure 200: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted
series capacitor during voltage inversion

Line distance protection REL670 321

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

It is obvious that voltage UM will lead the fault current IF as long as XL1> XC. This situation
corresponds, from the directionality point of view, to fault conditions on line without series
capacitor. Voltage UM in IED point will lag the fault current IF in case when:

X L1 < X C < X S + X L1
EQUATION1902 V1 EN-US (Equation 362)

Where
XS is the source impedance behind the IED

The IED point voltage inverses its direction due to presence of series capacitor and its
dimension. It is a common practice to call this phenomenon voltage inversion. Its
consequences on operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend
on their operating principle. The most known effect has voltage inversion on directional
measurement of distance IEDs (see chapter "Distance protection" for more details), which
must for this reason comprise special measures against this phenomenon.

There will be no voltage inversion phenomena for reverse faults in system with VTs located on
the bus side of series capacitor. The allocation of VTs to the line side does not eliminate the
phenomenon, because it appears again for faults on the bus side of IED point.

Current inversion GUID-9F7FDF59-D0B4-4972-9CB0-B3D56DACA09E v1

Figure 201 presents part of a series compensated line with corresponding equivalent voltage
source. It is generally anticipated that fault current IF flows on non-compensated lines from
power source towards the fault F on the protected line. Series capacitor may change the
situation.

With inserted
U capacitor
Source voltage
UM

Pre -fault voltage

With bypassed
capacitor U’ M Fault voltage

Source
XS XL1
~
XC F
IF

Z<
en06000607.vsd
IEC06000607 V1 EN-US

Figure 201: Current inversion on series compensated line

The relative phase position of fault current IF compared to the source voltage US depends in
general on the character of the resultant reactance between the source and the fault position.
Two possibilities appear:

X S - X C + X L1 > 0
X S - X C + X L1 < 0
EQUATION1935 V1 EN-US (Equation 363)

322 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The first case corresponds also to conditions on non compensated lines and in cases, when
the capacitor is bypassed either by spark gap or by the bypass switch, as shown in phasor
diagram in figure 202. The resultant reactance is in this case of inductive nature and the fault
currents lags source voltage by 90 electrical degrees.

The resultant reactance is of capacitive nature in the second case. Fault current will for this
reason lead the source voltage by 90 electrical degrees, which means that reactive current will
flow from series compensated line to the system. The system conditions are in such case
presented by equation 364

X C > X S + X L1
EQUATION1936 V1 EN-US (Equation 364)

US HUS
US
HUS

UM
With bypassed With inserted

HUC
capacitor capacitor
U’M=HU L

IF IF
HUL

en06000608.vsd
IEC06000608 V1 EN-US

Figure 202: Phasor diagrams of currents and voltages for the bypassed and inserted
series capacitor during current inversion
It is a common practice to call this phenomenon current inversion. Its consequences on
operation of different protections in series compensated networks depend on their operating
principle. The most known effect has current inversion on operation of distance IEDs (as
shown in section "Distance protection" for more details), which cannot be used for the
protection of series compensated lines with possible current inversion. Equation 364 shows
also big dependence of possible current inversion on series compensated lines on location of
series capacitors. XL1 = 0 for faults just behind the capacitor when located at line IED and only
the source impedance prevents current inversion. Current inversion has been considered for
many years only a theoretical possibility due to relatively low values of source impedances (big
power plants) compared to the capacitor reactance. The possibility for current inversion in
modern networks is increasing and must be studied carefully during system preparatory
studies.

The current inversion phenomenon should not be studied only for the purposes of protection
devices measuring phase currents. Directional comparison protections, based on residual
(zero sequence) and negative sequence currents should be considered in studies as well.
Current inversion in zero sequence systems with low zero sequence source impedance (a
number of power transformers connected in parallel) must be considered as practical
possibility in many modern networks.

Location of instrument transformers GUID-A8283D59-622B-4EB3-8C0A-8C886C3CF9D0 v1

Location of instrument transformers relative to the line end series capacitors plays an
important role regarding the dependability and security of a complete protection scheme. It is
on the other hand necessary to point out the particular dependence of those protection
schemes, which need for their operation information on voltage in IED point.

Line distance protection REL670 323

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Protection schemes with their operating principle depending on current measurement only,
like line current differential protection are relatively independent on CT location. Figure 203
shows schematically the possible locations of instrument transformers related to the position
of line-end series capacitor.

- jX C
CT 1 CT 2

VT1 VT 2
en06000611.vsd
IEC06000611 V1 EN-US

Figure 203: Possible positions of instrument transformers relative to line end series
capacitor

Bus side instrument transformers GUID-B7D1F10A-5467-4F91-9BC1-AB8906357428 v1

CT1 and VT1 on figure 203 represent the case with bus side instrument transformers. The
protection devices are in this case exposed to possible voltage and current inversion for line
faults, which decreases the required dependability. In addition to this may series capacitor
cause negative apparent impedance to distance IEDs on protected and adjacent lines as well
for close-in line faults (see also figure 205 LOC=0%), which requires special design of distance
measuring elements to cope with such phenomena. The advantage of such installation is that
the protection zone covers also the series capacitor as a part of protected power line, so that
line protection will detect and cleared also parallel faults on series capacitor.

Line side instrument transformers GUID-3E5897C4-9A15-4A51-90C2-F619D4E083A6 v1

CT2 and VT2 on figure 203 represent the case with line side instrument transformers. The
protective devices will not be exposed to voltage and current inversion for faults on the
protected line, which increases the dependability. Distance protection zone 1 may be active in
most applications, which is not the case when the bus side instrument transformers are used.

Distance IEDs are exposed especially to voltage inversion for close-in reverse faults, which
decreases the security. The effect of negative apparent reactance must be studied seriously in
case of reverse directed distance protection zones used by distance IEDs for teleprotection
schemes. Series capacitors located between the voltage instruments transformers and the
buses reduce the apparent zero sequence source impedance and may cause voltage as well as
current inversion in zero sequence equivalent networks for line faults. It is for this reason
absolutely necessary to study the possible effect on operation of zero sequence directional
earth-fault overcurrent protection before its installation.

Dual side instrument transformers GUID-3B737D75-F1D0-45AB-92A1-E0AEA9A1CCFD v1

Installations with line side CT2 and bus side VT1 are not very common. More common are
installations with line side VT2 and bus side CT1. They appear as de facto installations also in
switchyards with double-bus double-breaker and 1½ breaker arrangement. The advantage of
such schemes is that the unit protections cover also for shunt faults in series capacitors and at
the same time the voltage inversion does not appear for faults on the protected line.

Many installations with line-end series capacitors have available voltage instrument
transformers on both sides. In such case it is recommended to use the VTs for each particular
protection function to best suit its specific characteristics and expectations on dependability
and security. The line side VT can for example be used by the distance protection and the bus
side VT by the directional residual OC earth fault protection.

Apparent impedances and MOV influence GUID-A0FBC954-D581-4B24-81CD-AD69661A020D v2

Series capacitors reduce due to their character the apparent impedance measured by distance
IEDs on protected power lines. Figure 204 presents typical locations of capacitor banks on
power lines together with corresponding compensation degrees. Distance IED near the
feeding bus will see in different cases fault on remote end bus depending on type of

324 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

overvoltage protection used on capacitor bank (spark gap or MOV) and SC location on
protected power line.

100 %
66 %
50 %
33 %
0%
EA ~

K C = 80% 33% 50 % 33 % 80 %
Z<

en06000612.vsd
IEC06000612 V1 EN-US

Figure 204: Typical locations of capacitor banks on series compensated line

Implementation of spark gaps for capacitor overvoltage protection makes the picture
relatively simple, because they either flash over or not. The apparent impedance corresponds
to the impedance of non-compensated line, as shown in figure 205 case KC = 0%.

KC = 80% KC = 50% KC = 2 x 33% KC = 80%

KC = 0% LOC = 0% LOC = 50% LOC = 33%, 66% LOC = 100%
jX
jX

jX

jX

jX
R R R R R

en06000613.vsd
IEC06000613 V1 EN-US

Figure 205: Apparent impedances seen by distance IED for different SC locations and
spark gaps used for overvoltage protection

M OV
iM

-jXC
iL iC

uC

MOV protected series capacitor

20 100

10 50

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60

50
10

100
20
Line current as a function of time Capacitor voltage as a function of time

20 20

10 10

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 20 30 40 50 60

10
10

20
20

Capacitor current as a function of time MOV current as a function of time

en06000614.vsd

IEC06000614 V1 EN-US

Figure 206: MOV protected capacitor with examples of capacitor voltage and
corresponding currents
The impedance apparent to distance IED is always reduced for the amount of capacitive
reactance included between the fault and IED point, when the spark gap does not flash over, as

Line distance protection REL670 325

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

presented for typical cases in figure 205. Here it is necessary to distinguish between two
typical cases:

• Series capacitor only reduces the apparent impedance, but it does not cause wrong
directional measurement. Such cases are presented in figure 205 for 50% compensation
at 50% of line length and 33% compensation located on 33% and 66% of line length. The
remote end compensation has the same effect.
• The voltage inversion occurs in cases when the capacitor reactance between the IED point
and fault appears bigger than the corresponding line reactance, Figure 205, 80%
compensation at local end. A voltage inversion occurs in IED point and the distance IED
will see wrong direction towards the fault, if no special measures have been introduced in
its design.

The situation differs when metal oxide varistors (MOV) are used for capacitor overvoltage
protection. MOVs conduct current, for the difference of spark gaps, only when the
instantaneous voltage drop over the capacitor becomes higher than the protective voltage
level in each half-cycle separately, see figure 206.

Extensive studies at Bonneville Power Administration in USA ( ref. Goldsworthy, D,L “A

Linearized Model for MOV-Protected series capacitors” Paper 86SM357–8 IEEE/PES summer
meeting in Mexico City July 1986) have resulted in construction of a non-linear equivalent
circuit with series connected capacitor and resistor. Their value depends on complete line
(fault) current and protection factor kp. The later is defined by equation 365.

U MOV
kp =
U NC
EQUATION1910 V1 EN-US (Equation 365)

Where
UMOV is the maximum instantaneous voltage expected between the capacitor immediately before the MOV
has conducted or during operation of the MOV, divaded by √2
UNC is the rated voltage in RMS of the series capacitor
jX

jX

jX

I I
£1 =2
Kp × In Kp × In

I
Kp × In
= 10

R R R

en06000615.vsd
IEC06000615 V1 EN-US

Figure 207: Equivalent impedance of MOV protected capacitor in dependence of

protection factor KP
Figure 207 presents three typical cases for series capacitor located at line end (case LOC=0%
in figure 205).

• Series capacitor prevails the scheme as long as the line current remains lower or equal to
its protective current level (I £ kp · INC). Line apparent impedance is in this case reduced for
the complete reactance of a series capacitor.

326 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

• 50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to

approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the
protective current level (I £ 2· kp· INC). This information has high importance for setting of
distance protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to earth fault measurement
as well as for phase to phase measurement.

• Series capacitor becomes nearly completely bridged by MOV when the line current
becomes higher than 10-times the protective current level (I £ 10· kp· INC).

8.13.3.4 Impact of series compensation on protective IED of adjacent lines GUID-DA1DBB5B-0AFD-49F4-87C7-0E8AB5006051 v2

Voltage inversion is not characteristic for the buses and IED points closest to the series
compensated line only. It can spread also deeper into the network and this way influences the
selection of protection devices (mostly distance IEDs) on remote ends of lines adjacent to the
series compensated circuit, and sometimes even deeper in the network.

UA UD
ZSA IA
EA
~ ZLA
A
-jX C
IF
F
UB ZLF
ZSB IB
EB
~ ZLB
B
D

en06000616.vsd
IEC06000616 V1 EN-US

Figure 208: Voltage inversion in series compensated network due to fault current infeed
Voltage at the B bus (as shown in figure 208) is calculated for the loss-less system according
to the equation below.

( )
U B = U D + I B ⋅ jX LB = I A + I B ⋅ j ( X LF − X C ) + I B ⋅ jX LB
EQUATION1911 V2 EN-US (Equation 366)

Further development of equation 366 gives the following expressions:

  IA  
U B = jI B ⋅  X LB + 1 +  ⋅ ( X LF − X C )
  IB  
EQUATION1912 V2 EN-US (Equation 367)

X LB
X C (U B = 0 ) = + X LF
I
1+ A
IB
EQUATION1913 V1 EN-US (Equation 368)

Equation 367 indicates the fact that the infeed current IA increases the apparent value of
capacitive reactance in system: bigger the infeed of fault current, bigger the apparent series
capacitor in a complete series compensated network. It is possible to say that equation 368
indicates the deepness of the network to which it will feel the influence of series
compensation through the effect of voltage inversion.

It is also obvious that the position of series capacitor on compensated line influences in great
extent the deepness of voltage inversion in adjacent system. Line impedance XLF between D
bus and the fault becomes equal to zero, if the capacitor is installed near the bus and the fault
appears just behind the capacitor. This may cause the phenomenon of voltage inversion to be

Line distance protection REL670 327

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

expanded very deep into the adjacent network, especially if on one hand the compensated line
is very long with high degree of compensation, and the adjacent lines are, on the other hand,
relatively short.

Extensive system studies are necessary before final decision is made on implementation and
location of series capacitors in network. It requires to correctly estimate their influence on
performances of (especially) existing distance IEDs. It is possible that the costs for number of
protective devices, which should be replaced by more appropriate ones due to the effect of
applied series compensation, influences the future position of series capacitors in power
network.

Possibilities for voltage inversion at remote buses should not be studied for short circuits with
zero fault resistance only. It is necessary to consider cases with higher fault resistances, for
which spark gaps or MOVs on series capacitors will not conduct at all. At the same time this
kind of investigation must consider also the maximum sensitivity and possible resistive reach
of distance protection devices, which on the other hand simplifies the problem.

Application of MOVs as non-linear elements for capacitor overvoltage protection makes simple
calculations often impossible. Different kinds of transient or dynamic network simulations are
in such cases unavoidable.

8.13.3.5 Distance protection GUID-B8441469-8B23-494F-9BA8-D6A88DB2DC38 v2

Distance protection due to its basic characteristics, is the most used protection principle on
series compensated and adjacent lines worldwide. It has at the same time caused a lot of
challenges to protection society, especially when it comes to directional measurement and
transient overreach.

Distance IED in fact does not measure impedance or quotient between line current and
voltage. Quantity 1= Operating quantity - Restrain quantity Quantity 2= Polarizing quantity.
Typically Operating quantity is the replica impedance drop. Restraining quantity is the system
voltage Polarizing quantity shapes the characteristics in different way and is not discussed
here.

Distance IEDs comprise in their replica impedance only the replicas of line inductance and
resistance, but they do not comprise any replica of series capacitor on the protected line and
its protection circuits (spark gap and or MOV). This way they form wrong picture of the
protected line and all “solutions” related to distance protection of series compensated and
adjacent lines are concentrated on finding some parallel ways, which may help eliminating the
basic reason for wrong measurement. The most known of them are decrease of the reach due
to presence of series capacitor, which apparently decreases the line reactance, and
introduction of permanent memory voltage in directional measurement.

Series compensated and adjacent lines are often the more important links in a transmission
networks and delayed fault clearance is undesirable. This makes it necessary to install distance
protection in combination with telecommunication. The most common is distance protection
in Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip mode (POTT).

8.13.3.6 Underreaching and overreaching schemes GUID-3090702F-508B-480C-9AC7-2D5A82B9AD1E v2

It is a basic rule that the underreaching distance protection zone should under no
circumstances overreach for the fault at the remote end bus, and the overreaching zone should
always, under all system conditions, cover the same fault. In order to obtain section selectivity,
the first distance (underreaching) protection zone must be set to a reach less than the
reactance of the compensated line in accordance with figure 209.

328 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Zone 2 A
A B
-j X
C
Zone 1 A
X 12

X 11
Zone 1 B
G
DA DB

Zone 2 B
en06000618.vsd
IEC06000618 V1 EN-US

Figure 209: Underreaching (Zone 1) and overreaching (Zone 2) on series compensated line
The underreaching zone will have reduced reach in cases of bypassed series capacitor, as
shown in the dashed line in figure 209. The overreaching zone (Zone 2) can this way cover
bigger portion of the protected line, but must always cover with certain margin the remote
end bus. Distance protection Zone 1 is often set to

X Z 1 = K S × ( X 11 + X 12 - X C )
EQUATION1914 V1 EN-US (Equation 369)

Here KS is a safety factor, presented graphically in figure 210, which covers for possible
overreaching due to low frequency (sub-harmonic) oscillations. Here it should be noted
separately that compensation degree KC in figure 210 relates to total system reactance,
inclusive line and source impedance reactance. The same setting applies regardless MOV or
spark gaps are used for capacitor overvoltage protection.

Equation 369 is applicable for the case when the VTs are located on the bus side of series
capacitor. It is possible to remove XC from the equation in cases of VTs installed in line side,
but it is still necessary to consider the safety factor KS .

If the capacitor is out of service or bypassed, the reach with these settings can be less than
50% of protected line dependent on compensation degree and there will be a section, G in
figure 209, of the power line where no tripping occurs from either end.

1.0
KS

0.8

0.6

0.4
0.2

0 20 40 60 80 100
KC[%]

en06000619.vsd
IEC06000619 V1 EN-US

Figure 210: Underreaching safety factor KS in dependence on system compensation

degree KC
For that reason permissive underreaching schemes can hardly be used as a main protection.
Permissive overreaching distance protection or directional or unit protection must be used.

The overreach must be of an order so it overreaches when the capacitor is bypassed or out of
service. Figure 211 shows the permissive zones. The first underreaching zone can be kept in the
total protection but it only has the feature of a back-up protection for close up faults. The
overreach is usually of the same order as the permissive zone. When the capacitor is in
operation the permissive zone will have a very high degree of overreach which can be
considered as a disadvantage from a security point of view.

Line distance protection REL670 329

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

A B
- jX C Permissive Zone A
X 12
X 11
Permissive Zone B

DA DB

en06000620.vsd
IEC06000620 V1 EN-US

Figure 211: Permissive overreach distance protection scheme

Negative IED impedance, positive fault current (voltage inversion) GUID-4FB71D72-36F1-4FCD-9321-D069CF6E9835 v2

Assume in equation 370

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN-US (Equation 370)

and in figure 212

a three phase fault occurs beyond the capacitor. The resultant IED impedance seen from the
DB IED location to the fault may become negative (voltage inversion) until the spark gap has
flashed.

Distance protections of adjacent power lines shown in figure 212 are influenced by this
negative impedance. If the intermediate infeed of short circuit power by other lines is taken
into consideration, the negative voltage drop on XC is amplified and a protection far away
from the faulty line can maloperate by its instantaneous operating distance zone, if no
precaution is taken. Impedances seen by distance IEDs on adjacent power lines are presented
by equations 371 to 374.

I = I1 + I 2 + I 3
EQUATION1915 V1 EN-US (Equation 371)

IF
X DA1 = X A1 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A1
EQUATION1916 V2 EN-US (Equation 372)

IF
X DA2 = X A2 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A2
EQUATION1917 V2 EN-US (Equation 373)

IF
X DA3 = X A3 + ⋅ ( X C − X11 )
I A3
EQUATION1918 V2 EN-US (Equation 374)

330 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A1 B
jX 1
IA1
A2
-jX C
jX 2 jX11

A3 IA2 F
IF
jX 3

DA1 IA3
DB
DA2

DA3

en06000621.vsd
IEC06000621 V1 EN-US

Figure 212: Distance IED on adjacent

power lines are influenced by
the negative impedance

Normally the first zone of this protection must be delayed until the gap flashing has taken
place. If the delay is not acceptable, some directional comparison must also be added to the
protection of all adjacent power lines. As stated above, a good protection system must be able
to operate correctly both before and after gap flashing occurs. Distance protection can be
used, but careful studies must be made for each individual case. The rationale described
applies to both conventional spark gap and MOV protected capacitors.

Special attention should be paid to selection of distance protection on shorter adjacent power
lines in cases of series capacitors located at the line end. In such case the reactance of a short
adjacent line may be lower than the capacitor reactance and voltage inversion phenomenon
may occur also on remote end of adjacent lines. Distance protection of such line must have
built-in functionality which applies normally to protection of series compensated lines.

It usually takes a bit of a time before the spark gap flashes, and sometimes the fault current
will be of such a magnitude that there will not be any flashover and the negative impedance
will be sustained. If equation 375 is valid

X 11 < X C < X S + X 11
EQUATION1898 V1 EN-US (Equation 375)

in figure 213, the fault current will have the same direction as when the capacitor is bypassed.
So, the directional measurement is correct but the impedance measured is negative and if the
characteristic crosses the origin shown in figure 213 the IED cannot operate. However, if there
is a memory circuit designed so it covers the negative impedance, a three phase fault can be
successfully cleared by the distance protection. As soon as the spark gap has flashed the
situation for protection will be as for an ordinary fault. However, a good protection system
should be able to operate correctly before and after gap flashing occurs.

Line distance protection REL670 331

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

jX jX X12

X 12
R RV

X11

X FW
X 11

R R FW
ZS

X RV
XC
ZS

XC

en06000584_small.vsd
en06000625.vsd IEC06000584-SMALL V1 EN-US
IEC06000625 V1 EN-US

Figure 213: Cross-polarized Figure 214: Quadrilateral

quadrilateral characteristic with
characteristic separate impedance and
directional measurement

If the distance protection is equipped with an earth-fault measuring unit, the negative
impedance occurs when

3 × X C > 2 × X 1 _ 11 + X 0 _ 11
EQUATION1919 V1 EN-US (Equation 376)

Cross-polarized distance protection (either with mho or quadrilateral characteristic) will

normally handle earth-faults satisfactory if the negative impedance occurs inside the
characteristic. The operating area for negative impedance depends upon the magnitude of the
source impedance and calculations must be made on a case by case basis, as shown in figure
213. Distance IEDs with separate impedance and directional measurement offer additional
setting and operational flexibility when it comes to measurement of negative apparent
impedance (as shown in figure 214).

Negative IED impedance, negative fault current (current inversion) GUID-F858877A-E736-4B1C-97B4-8A2B5F8EE644 v2

If equation 377 is valid in Figure 201 and a fault occurs behind the capacitor, the resultant
reactance becomes negative and the fault current will have an opposite direction compared
with fault current in a power line without a capacitor (current inversion). The negative
direction of the fault current will persist until the spark gap has flashed. Sometimes there will
be no flashover at all, because the fault current is less than the setting value of the spark gap.
The negative fault current will cause a high voltage on the network. The situation will be the
same even if a MOV is used. However, depending upon the setting of the MOV, the fault
current will have a resistive component.

X C > X S + X11
EQUATION2036 V2 EN-US (Equation 377)

The problems described here are accentuated with a three phase or phase-to-phase fault, but
the negative fault current can also exist for a single-phase fault. The condition for a negative
current in case of an earth fault can be written as follows:

3 × X C > 2 × X 1_ L1 + X 0 _ L1 + 2 × X 0 _ S + X 1_ S
EQUATION1920 V1 EN-US (Equation 378)

332 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

All designations relates to figure 201. A good protection system must be able to cope with
both positive and negative direction of the fault current, if such conditions can occur. A
distance protection cannot operate for negative fault current. The directional element gives
the wrong direction. Therefore, if a problem with negative fault current exists, distance
protection is not a suitable solution. In practice, negative fault current seldom occurs. In
normal network configurations the gaps will flash in this case.

Double circuit, parallel operating series compensated lines GUID-7A384A24-143F-4695-8214-33E181AD0AB7 v2

Two parallel power lines running in electrically close vicinity to each other and ending at the
same busbar at both ends (as shown in figure 215) causes some challenges for distance
protection because of the mutual impedance in the zero sequence system. The current reversal
phenomenon also raises problems from the protection point of view, particularly when the
power lines are short and when permissive overreach schemes are used.

A -jXC B
ZAC ZCB

Zm0AC Zm0CB
-jXC
ZAC ZCB

en06000627.vsd
IEC06000627 V1 EN-US

Figure 215: Double circuit, parallel operating line

Zero sequence mutual impedance Zm0 cannot significantly influence the operation of distance
protection as long as both circuits are operating in parallel and all precautions related to
settings of distance protection on series compensated line have been considered. Influence of
disconnected parallel circuit, which is earthed at both ends, on operation of distance
protection on operating circuit is known.

Series compensation additionally exaggerates the effect of zero sequence mutual impedance
between two circuits, see figure 216. It presents a zero sequence equivalent circuit for a fault
at B bus of a double circuit line with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both IEDs. The
effect of zero sequence mutual impedance on possible overreaching of distance IEDs at A bus
is increased compared to non compensated operation, because series capacitor does not
compensate for this reactance. The reach of underreaching distance protection zone 1 for
phase-to-earth measuring loops must further be decreased for such operating conditions.

A -jXC B
j(X0L -Xm0)

jXm0

j(X0L -Xm0) -jXC

en06000628.vsd
IEC06000628 V1 EN-US

Figure 216: Zero sequence equivalent circuit of a series compensated double circuit line
with one circuit disconnected and earthed at both IEDs
Zero sequence mutual impedance may disturb also correct operation of distance protection
for external evolving faults, when one circuit has already been disconnected in one phase and
runs non-symmetrical during dead time of single pole autoreclosing cycle. All such operating
conditions must carefully be studied in advance and simulated by dynamic simulations in order
to fine tune settings of distance IEDs.

If the fault occurs in point F of the parallel operating circuits, as presented in figure 217, than
also one distance IED (operating in POTT teleprotection scheme) on parallel, healthy circuit will
send a carrier signal CSAB to the remote line end, where this signal will be received as a carrier
receive signal CRBB.

Line distance protection REL670 333

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

RAA IFC1 IFC1 RBA RAA IFC1 RBA

F F

RAB IFC2 RBB RAB IFC2 RBB

CSAB CRBB CSAB CRBB

en06000629.vsd
IEC06000629 V1 EN-US

Figure 217: Current reversal phenomenon on parallel operating circuits

It is possible to expect faster IED operation and breaker opening at the bus closer to fault,
which will reverse the current direction on the healthy circuit. Distance IED RBB will suddenly
detect fault in forward direction and, if CRBB signal is still present due to long reset time of
IED RAB and especially telecommunication equipment, trip its related circuit breaker, since all
conditions for POTT have been fulfilled. Zero sequence mutual impedance will additionally
influence this process, since it increases the magnitude of fault current in healthy circuit after
the opening of first circuit breaker. The so called current reversal phenomenon may cause
unwanted operation of protection on healthy circuit and this way endangers even more the
complete system stability.

To avoid the unwanted tripping, some manufacturers provide a feature in their distance
protection which detects that the fault current has changed in direction and temporarily
blocks distance protection. Another method employed is to temporarily block the signals
received at the healthy line as soon as the parallel faulty line protection initiates tripping. The
second mentioned method has an advantage in that not the whole protection is blocked for
the short period. The disadvantage is that a local communication is needed between two
protection devices in the neighboring bays of the same substation.

Distance protection used on series compensated lines must have a high overreach to cover the
whole transmission line also when the capacitors are bypassed or out of service. When the
capacitors are in service, the overreach will increase tremendously and the whole system will
be very sensitive for false teleprotection signals. Current reversal difficulties will be
accentuated because the ratio of mutual impedance against self-impedance will be much
higher than for a non-compensated line.

If non-unit protection is to be used in a directional comparison mode, schemes based on

negative sequence quantities offer the advantage that they are insensitive to mutual coupling.
However, they can only be used for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults. For three-phase
faults an additional protection must be provided.

8.13.4 Setting guidelines IP14962-1 v1

8.13.4.1 General GUID-B9958CEF-90ED-4644-B169-C6B4A018193B v1

The settings for Distance measuring zones, quadrilateral characteristic (ZMFCPDIS) are done
in primary values. The instrument transformer ratio that has been set for the analog input card
is used to automatically convert the measured secondary input signals to primary values used
in ZMFCPDIS.

The following basics must be considered, depending on application, when doing the setting
calculations:

• Errors introduced by current and voltage instrument transformers, particularly under

transient conditions.
• Inaccuracies in the line zero-sequence impedance data, and their effect on the calculated
value of the earth-return compensation factor.
• The effect of infeed between the IED and the fault location, including the influence of
different Z0/Z1 ratios of the various sources.

334 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

• The phase impedance of non transposed lines is not identical for all fault loops. The
difference between the impedances for different phase-to-earth loops can be as large as
5-10% of the total line impedance.
• The effect of a load transfer between the IEDs of the protected fault resistance is
considerable, the effect must be recognized.
• Zero-sequence mutual coupling from parallel lines.

8.13.4.2 Setting of zone 1 GUID-12E84C05-93A2-4FA3-B7BA-0963FB1C098F v1

The different errors mentioned earlier usually require a limitation of the underreaching zone
(zone 1) to 75%...90% of the protected line.

In case of parallel lines, consider the influence of the mutual coupling according to section
"Parallel line application with mutual coupling" and select the case(s) that are valid in the
particular application. By proper setting it is possible to compensate for the cases when the
parallel line is in operation, out of service and not earthed and out of service and earthed in
both ends. The setting of the earth-fault reach should be <85% also when the parallel line is
out of service and earthed at both ends (the worst case).

8.13.4.3 Setting of overreaching zone GUID-E5F09722-47BB-47E2-80B1-8D47DA44A158 v1

The first overreaching zone (zone 2) must detect faults on the whole protected line.
Considering the different errors that might influence the measurement in the same way as for
zone 1, it is necessary to increase the reach of the overreaching zone to at least 120% of the
protected line. The zone 2 reach can be even higher if the fault infeed from adjacent lines at the
remote end is considerably higher than the fault current that comes from behind of the IED
towards the fault.

The setting must not exceed 80% of the following impedances:

• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the first zone reach of the
shortest adjacent line.
• The impedance corresponding to the protected line, plus the impedance of the maximum
number of transformers operating in parallel on the bus at the remote end of the
protected line.

Larger overreach than the mentioned 80% can often be acceptable due to fault current infeed
from other lines. This requires however analysis by means of fault calculations.

If the chosen zone 2 reach gives such a value that it will interfere with zone 2 on adjacent lines,
the time delay of zone 2 must be increased by approximately 200 ms to avoid unwanted
operation in cases when the telecommunication for the short adjacent line at the remote end
is down during faults. The zone 2 must not be reduced below 120% of the protected line
section. The whole line must be covered under all conditions.

The requirement that the zone 2 shall not reach more than 80% of the shortest adjacent line at
remote end is highlighted in the example below.

If a fault occurs at point F, see figure 218, the IED at point A senses the impedance:

VA I A + IC I A + IC + IB  IC   IC + IB 
Z AF = = Z AC + ⋅ Z CF + ⋅ RF = Z AC + 1 +  ⋅ Z CF + 1 +  ⋅ RF
IA IA IA  IA   IA 
EQUATION302 V5 EN-US (Equation 379)

Line distance protection REL670 335

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Z AC Z CB

F
A IA C Z CF IB B

I A+ I C

Z< IC

IEC09000256-2-en.vsd
IEC09000256 V2 EN-US

Figure 218: Setting of overreaching zone

8.13.4.4 Setting of reverse zone GUID-C08EC148-B90C-4A20-8993-707E63545946 v2

The reverse zone (zone RV) is applicable for purposes of scheme communication logic, current
reversal logic, weak-end infeed logic, and so on. The same applies to the back-up protection of
the bus bar or power transformers. It is necessary to secure, that it always covers the
overreaching zone, used at the remote line IED for the telecommunication purposes.

Consider the possible enlarging factor that might exist due to fault infeed from adjacent lines.
The equation can be used to calculate the reach in reverse direction when the zone is used for
blocking scheme, weak-end infeed, and so on.

Zrev >
_ 1.2 × (Z2rem - ZL)
GUID-ABFB1C53-F12A-45D5-90CC-907C9FA0EFC3 V1 EN-US (Equation 380)

Where:
ZL is the protected line impedance.
Z2rem is the zone 2 setting (zone used in the POTT scheme) at the remote end of the protected line.

In many applications it might be necessary to consider the enlarging factor due to the fault
current infeed from adjacent lines in the reverse direction in order to obtain certain sensitivity.

8.13.4.5 Series compensated and adjacent lines GUID-33C23BA9-5807-4E9E-859A-12D6A76304C0 v1

Setting of zone 1 GUID-69E8535D-F3E2-483D-8463-089063712C67 v2

A voltage reversal can cause an artificial internal fault (voltage zero) on faulty line as well as on
the adjacent lines. This artificial fault always have a resistive component, this is however small
and can mostly not be used to prevent tripping of a healthy adjacent line.

An independent tripping zone 1 facing a bus which can be exposed to voltage reversal have to
be set with reduced reach with respect to this false fault. When the fault can move and pass
the bus, the zone 1 in this station must be blocked. Protection further out in the net must be
set with respect to this apparent fault as the protection at the bus.

Different settings of the reach for the zone (ZMFCPDIS) characteristic in forward and reverse
direction makes it possible to optimize the settings in order to maximize dependability and
security for independent zone1.

Due to the sub-harmonic oscillation swinging caused by the series capacitor at fault
conditions the reach of the under-reaching zone 1 must be further reduced. Zone 1 can only be
set with a percentage reach to the artificial fault according to the curve in 219

336 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

p
%
100

80

60

40

20

0 C
20 40 60 80 100 %

99000202.vsd
IEC99000202 V1 EN-US

Figure 219: Reduced reach due to the expected sub-harmonic oscillations at different
degrees of compensation

æX ö
c = degree of compensation çç c ÷÷
è Xl ø
EQUATION1894 V1 EN-US (Equation 381)

Xc is the reactance of the series capacitor

p is the maximum allowable reach for an under-reaching zone with respect to the sub-
harmonic swinging related to the resulting fundamental frequency reactance the zone is not
allowed to over-reach.

The degree of compensation C in figure 219 has to be interpreted as the relation between
series capacitor reactance XC and the total positive sequence reactance X1 to the driving
source to the fault. If only the line reactance is used the degree of compensation will be too
high and the zone 1 reach unnecessary reduced. The highest degree of compensation will occur
at three phase fault and therefore the calculation need only to be performed for three phase
faults.

The compensation degree in earth return path is different than in phases. It is for this reason
possible to calculate a compensation degree separately for the phase-to-phase and three-
phase faults on one side and for the single phase-to-earth fault loops on the other side.
Different settings of the reach for the ph-ph faults and ph-E loops makes it possible to
minimise the necessary decrease of the reach for different types of faults.

Line distance protection REL670 337

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Reactive Reach

jX
Xline - XC

R RV

XLLOC

X1FW
XC

R FW
Z
ZSS

X1RV
XC

en06000584-2.vsd
IEC06000584 V2 EN-US

Figure 220: Measured impedance at voltage inversion

Forward direction:
Where
XLLoc equals line reactance up to the series capacitor(in the picture approximate
33% of XLine)
X1Fw is set to (XLine-XC) · p/100.

X1Rv = max( 1.5 x (XC-XLLOCC); X1Fw is defined according to figure 219

When the calculation of X1Fwgives a negative value the zone 1 must be

permanently blocked.

For protection on non compensated lines facing series capacitor on next line. The setting is
thus:

• X1Fw is set to (XLine-XC · K) · p/100.

• X1Rvcan be set to the same value as X1Fw

• K equals side infeed factor at next busbar.

338 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

When the calculation of X1Fwgives a negative value the zone 1 must be

permanently blocked.

Fault resistance GUID-5F350226-4C8C-400E-93B3-7975CF1456B9 v1

The resistive reach is, for all affected applications, restricted by the set reactive reach and the
load impedance and same conditions apply as for a non-compensated network.

However, special notice has to be taken during settings calculations due to the ZnO because
50% of capacitor reactance appears in series with resistance, which corresponds to
approximately 36% of capacitor reactance when the line current equals two times the
protective current level. This information has high importance for setting of distance
protection IED reach in resistive direction, for phase to earth- fault measurement as well as,
for phase-to-phase measurement.

Overreaching zone 2 GUID-F3704F5E-5604-470D-829F-C4594329ABFB v2

In series compensated network where independent tripping zones will have reduced reach due
to the negative reactance in the capacitor and the sub-harmonic swinging the tripping will to a
high degree be achieved by the communication scheme.

With the reduced reach of the under-reaching zones not providing effective protection for all
faults along the length of the line, it becomes essential to provide over-reaching schemes like
permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) or blocking scheme can be used.

Thus it is of great importance that the zone 2 can detect faults on the whole line both with the
series capacitor in operation and when the capacitor is bridged (short circuited). It is
supposed also in this case that the reactive reach for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-earth
faults is the same. The X1Fw, for all lines affected by the series capacitor, are set to:

• X1 >= 1,5 · XLine

The safety factor of 1.5 appears due to speed requirements and possible under reaching
caused by the sub harmonic oscillations.

The increased reach related to the one used in non compensated system is recommended for
all protections in the vicinity of series capacitors to compensate for delay in the operation
caused by the sub harmonic swinging.

Settings of the resistive reaches are limited according to the minimum load impedance.

Reverse zone GUID-BDDB2E91-3E37-4F78-99C2-8A9C3E3B275B v2

The reverse zone that is normally used in the communication schemes for functions like fault
current reversal logic, weak-in-feed logic or issuing carrier send in blocking scheme must
detect all faults in the reverse direction which is detected in the opposite IED by the
overreaching zone 2. The maximum reach for the protection in the opposite IED can be
achieved with the series capacitor in operation.

The reactive reach can be set according to the following formula: X1=1.3·(X12Rem-0.5(X1L-XC))

Settings of the resistive reaches are according to the minimum load impedance:

Optional higher distance protection zones GUID-506F93E2-1E1C-4EEC-B260-F362F3897C4F v1

When some additional distance protection zones (zone 4, for example) are used they must be
set according to the influence of the series capacitor.

8.13.4.6 Setting of zones for parallel line application GUID-E1228762-EBF7-4E58-9A52-96C5D22A0F0D v1

Line distance protection REL670 339

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Parallel line in service – Setting of zone 1 GUID-1EDD265C-43D4-4D1A-A9DC-830E18B3267C v1

With reference to section "Parallel line applications", the zone reach can be set to 85% of the
protected line.

However, influence of mutual impedance has to be taken into account.

Parallel line in service – setting of zone 2 GUID-0985014F-B0CB-4872-8644-F87B34973B1F v1

Overreaching zones (in general, zones 2 and 3) must overreach the protected circuit in all
cases. The greatest reduction of a reach occurs in cases when both parallel circuits are in
service with a single phase-to-earth fault located at the end of a protected line. The equivalent
zero sequence impedance circuit for this case is equal to the one in figure 189.

The components of the zero sequence impedance for the overreaching zones must be equal to
at least:

R0E = R0 + R m0
EQUATION553 V1 EN-US (Equation 382)

X 0E = X 0 + Xm0

EQUATION554 V1 EN-US (Equation 383)

Check the reduction of a reach for the overreaching zones due to the effect of the zero
sequence mutual coupling. The reach is reduced for a factor:

Z 0m
K 0 = 1-
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + Rf
EQUATION1426 V1 EN-US (Equation 384)

If the denominator in equation 384 is called B and Z0m is simplified to X0m, then the real and
imaginary part of the reach reduction factor for the overreaching zones can be written as:

X 0m × Re ( B )
( )
Re K 0 = 1 -
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1427 V2 EN-US (Equation 385)

X 0m × Im ( B )
( )
Im K 0 =
Re ( B ) + Im ( B )
2 2

EQUATION1428 V2 EN-US (Equation 386)

Parallel line is out of service and earthed in both ends GUID-EC052207-C9AF-47EC-999A-BD485378FD9E v1

Apply the same measures as in the case with a single set of setting parameters. This means
that an underreaching zone must not overreach the end of a protected circuit for the single
phase-to-earth faults.

Set the values of the corresponding zone (zero-sequence resistance and reactance) equal to:

2
æ Xm0 ö
R 0E = R 0 × ç 1 + -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R +X ø 0 0

EQUATION561 V1 EN-US (Equation 387)

340 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

2
æ X m0 ö
X 0E = X 0 × ç 1 – -------------------------
2 2
-÷
è R0 + X0 ø

EQUATION562 V1 EN-US (Equation 388)

8.13.4.7 Setting of reach in resistive direction GUID-43EE13AF-BEBC-4A13-95B3-53C28B9164CB v3

Set the resistive reach R1 independently for each zone.

Set separately the expected fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults RFPP and for the phase-
to-earth faults RFPE for each zone. For each distance zone, set all remaining reach setting
parameters independently of each other.

The final reach in resistive direction for phase-to-earth fault loop measurement automatically
follows the values of the line-positive and zero-sequence resistance, and at the end of the
protected zone is equal to equation 389.

1
R  2  R1Zx  R0Zx   RFPEZx
3
IECEQUATION2303 V2 EN-US (Equation 389)

 loop  arctan
 2  X1Zx  X0Zx 
 2  R1Zx  R0Zx 
EQUATION2304 V2 EN-US (Equation 390)

Setting of the resistive reach for the underreaching zone 1 should follow the condition to
minimize the risk for overreaching:

RFPEZx  4.5  X1Zx

IECEQUATION2305 V2 EN-US (Equation 391)

The fault resistance for phase-to-phase faults is normally quite low, compared to the fault
resistance for phase-to-earth faults. To minimize the risk for overreaching, limit the setting of
the zone 1 reach in resistive direction for phase-to-phase loop measurement to:

RFPPZx  6  X 1Zx
IECEQUATION2306 V3 EN-US (Equation 392)

Note that RLdFw and RLdRv [7] are not only defining the load encroachment boundary. They are
used internally as reference points to improve the performance of the phase selection. In
addition, they define the impedance area where the phase selection element gives indications,
so do not set RLdFw and RLDRVFactor to excessive values even if the load encroachment
functionality is not needed (that is, when the load is not encroaching on the distance zones).
Always define the load encroachment boundary according to the actual load or in
consideration of how far the phase selection must actually reach.

8.13.4.8 Load impedance limitation, without load encroachment function GUID-16C2EB30-7FEA-42E4-98C8-52CCC36644C6 v5

The following instructions are valid when setting the resistive reach of the distance zone itself
with a sufficient margin towards the maximum load, that is, without the common load
encroachment characteristic (set by RLdFw, RLdRv [8] and ArgLd). Observe that even though

[7] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw.
[8] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw.

Line distance protection REL670 341

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

the zones themselves are set with a margin, RLdFw and RLdRvFactor still have to be set
according to maximum load for the phase selection to achieve the expected performance.

Check the maximum permissible resistive reach for any zone to ensure that there is a sufficient
setting margin between the boundary and the minimum load impedance. The minimum load
impedance (Ω/phase) is calculated as:

2
U
Z loadmin = -------
S
EQUATION571 V1 EN-US (Equation 393)

Where:
U is the minimum phase-to-phase voltage in kV
S is the maximum apparent power in MVA.

The load impedance [Ω/phase] is a function of the minimum operation voltage and the
maximum load current:

Umin
Z load = ---------------------
-
3 × Imax
EQUATION574 V1 EN-US (Equation 394)

Minimum voltage Umin and maximum current Imax are related to the same operating
conditions. Minimum load impedance occurs normally under emergency conditions.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-earth measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 80% of the minimum load impedance.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load

EQUATION792 V2 EN-US (Equation 395)

This equation is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the single phase-to-
earth faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance
angle. For the case when the loop characteristic angle is less than three times the load-
impedance angle, more accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 396.

RFPEZx  0.8  Z load min  cos  

 2  R1Zx  R 0 Zx
 sin 

 2  X 1Zx  X 0 Zx 
EQUATION578 V5 EN-US (Equation 396)

Where:
ϑ is a maximum load-impedance angle, related to the maximum load power.

To avoid load encroachment for the phase-to-phase measuring elements, the set resistive
reach of any distance protection zone must be less than 160% of the minimum load
impedance.

RFPPZx  1.6  Zload

EQUATION579 V3 EN-US (Equation 397)

342 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Equation 397 is applicable only when the loop characteristic angle for the phase-to-phase
faults is more than three times as large as the maximum expected load-impedance angle. More
accurate calculations are necessary according to equation 398.

 cos   
R1Zx
RFPPZx  1.6  Zload min  sin 
 X1Zx 
IECEQUATION2307 V2 EN-US (Equation 398)

All this is applicable for all measuring zones when no Power swing detection function ZMRPSB
is activated in the IED. Use an additional safety margin of approximately 20% in cases when a
ZMRPSB function is activated in the IED, refer to the description of Power swing detection
function ZMRPSB.

8.13.4.9 Zone reach setting higher than minimum load impedance GUID-78D0227F-2568-4C9A-8921-45812B4ABAF2 v5

The impedance zones are enabled as soon as the (symmetrical) load impedance crosses the
vertical boundaries defined by RLdFw and RLdRv [9] or the lines defined by ArgLd. So, it is
necessary to consider some margin. It is recommended to set RLdFw and RLdRv to 90% of the
per-phase resistance that corresponds to maximum load.

RLdFw < 0.9 × Rload min

IECEQUATION2419 V2 EN-US (Equation 399)

RLdRv < 0.9 × Rload min

IECEQUATION2420 V2 EN-US (Equation 400)

The absolute value of the margin to the closest ArgLd line should be of the same order, that is,
at least 0.1 • Zload min.

The load encroachment settings are related to a per-phase load impedance in a symmetrical
star-coupled representation. For symmetrical load or three-phase and phase-to-phase faults,
this corresponds to the per-phase, or positive-sequence, impedance. For a phase-to-earth
fault, it corresponds to the per-loop impedance, including the earth return impedance.

X X
XLd

RLdFw
10%
90% RLdFw
ARGLd 10% ARGLd R
ARGLd ARGLd
R
ARGLd ArgLd Possible
RLdRv load ARGLd ARGLd

RLdRv
XLd

IEC12000176-2-en.vsd
IEC12000176 V2 EN-US

Figure 221: Load impedance limitation with load encroachment

During the initial current change for phase-to-phase and for phase-to-earth faults, operation
may be allowed also when the apparent impedance of the load encroachment element is
located in the load area. This improves the dependability for fault at the remote end of the line

[9] RLdRv=RLdRvFactor*RLdFw

Line distance protection REL670 343

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

during high load. Although it is not associated to any standard event, there is one potentially
hazardous situation that should be considered. Should one phase of a parallel circuit open a
single pole, even though there is no fault, and the load current of that phase increase, there is
actually no way of distinguish this from a real fault with similar characteristics. Should this
accidental event be given precaution, the phase-to-earth reach (RFPEZx) of all instantaneous
zones has to be set below the emergency load for the pole-open situation. Again, this is only
for the application where there is a risk that one breaker pole would open without a preceding
fault. If this never happens, for example when there is no parallel circuit, there is no need to
change any phase-to-earth reach according to the pole-open scenario.

8.13.4.10 Parameter setting guidelines GUID-B28677F4-B909-42C1-B1B7-1C118B26E67D v5

IMinOpPEZx and IMinOpPPZx

The ability for a specific loop and zone to issue start or trip is inhibited if the magnitude of the
input current for this loop falls below the threshold value defined by these settings. The
output of a phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn < IminOpPEZx. ILn is the RMS value of the
fundamental current in phase Ln.

The output of a phase-to-phase loop LmLn is blocked if ILmLn < IMinOpPPZx. ILmLn is the RMS
value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.

Both current limits IMinOpPEZx and IMinOpPPZx are automatically reduced to 75% of regular
set values if the zone is set to operate in reverse direction, that is, OperationDir=Reverse.

OpModePPZx and OpModePEZx

These settings, two per zone (x=1,2..5&RV), with options {Off, Quadrilateral, Mho, Offset}, are
used to set the operation and characteristic for phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase faults,
respectively.

For example, in one zone it is possible to choose Mho characteristic for the three Ph-Ph
measuring loops and Quadrilateral characteristic for the three Ph-E measuring loops.

DirModeZx

These settings define the operating direction for Zones Z3, Z4 and Z5 (the directionality of
zones Z1, Z2 and ZRV is fixed). The options are Non-directional, Forward or Reverse. The result
from respective set value is illustrated in figure 222 below, where positive impedance
corresponds to the direction out on the protected line.

344 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X X X

R R R

Non-directional Forward Reverse

IEC05000182-2-en.vsdx

IEC05000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 222: Directional operating modes of the distance measuring zones 3 to 5

tPPZx, tPEZx, TimerModeZx, ZoneLinkStart and TimerLinksZx

Refer to chapter Simplified logic schemes in Technical Manual for the application of these
settings.

OperationSC

Choose the setting value SeriesComp if the protected line or adjacent lines are compensated
with series capacitors. Otherwise maintain the NoSeriesComp setting value.

CVTtype

If possible, the type of capacitive voltage transformer (CVT) that is used for measurement
should be identified. Note that the alternatives are strongly related to the type of ferro-
resonance suppression circuit that is included in the CVT. There are two main choices:

Passive type For CVTs that use a non-linear component, like a saturable inductor, to limit overvoltages
(caused by ferro-resonance). This component is practically idle during normal load and fault
conditions, hence the name ‘passive’. CVTs that have a high resistive burden to mitigate ferro-
resonance also fall in to this category.
Any This option is primarily related to the so-called active type CVT, which uses a set of reactive
components to form a filter circuit that essentially attenuates frequencies other than the
nominal in order to restrain the ferro-resonance. The name ‘active’ refers to the fact that this
circuit is always involved during transient conditions, regardless of voltage level. This option
should also be used for types that do not fall under the other two categories, for example,
CVTs with power electronic damping devices, or if the type cannot be identified at all.
None This option should be selected if the voltage transformer is fully magnetic.
(Magnetic)

INReleasePE

This setting opens up an opportunity to enable phase-to-earth measurement for phase-to-

phase-earth faults. It determines the level of residual current (3I0) above which phase-to-earth
measurement is activated (and phase-to-phase measurement is blocked). The relations are
defined by the following equation.

Line distance protection REL670 345

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

IN Re leasePE
3× I0 ³ × Iph max
100
EQUATION2548 V1 EN-US (Equation 401)

Where:
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the phase-to-
earth fault loops in %
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases

By default this setting is set excessively high to always enable phase-to-phase measurement
for phase-to-phase-earth faults. Maintain this default setting value unless there are very
specific reasons to enable phase-to-earth measurement. Please note that, even with the
default setting value, phase-to-earth measurement is activated whenever appropriate, like in
the case of simultaneous faults: two earth faults at the same time, one each on the two
circuits of a double line.

Transient directional element

There are no special settings for the transient directional element. However, since this element
is activated only when phase selector release the phases, the settings for phase selector such
as UBase, IBase, RLdFw, RLdRvFactor, ArgLd will affect the performance of the element.

The directionalities given by the transient directional element are suitable for the permissive
overreaching transfer trip (POTT) scheme. By cooperation with the remote end directionalities
through a directional comparison scheme, it can clear faults on 100% of the transmission lines.

While applying directional comparison scheme, it is NOT recommended to mix

the directional output STFWLx and STRVLx (where, x = 1-3) or start from
distance zones (STZx) calculated from fundamental frequency component with
the directional outputs STTDFWLx and STTDRVLx (where, x = 1-3) from
transient method (on the same channel).

8.13.4.11 ZMMMXU settings GUID-760E7792-1BA4-47B3-A437-1C7777425F57 v1

ZZeroDb

Minimum level of impedance in % of range (ZMax-ZMin) used as indication of zero impedance

(zero point clamping). Measured values below ZZeroDb are forced to zero.

ZHiHiLim, ZHiLim, ZLowLim and ZLowLowLim

All measured values are supervised against these four settable limits. It provides the attribute
"range" in the data class MV (measured value) with the type ENUMERATED (normal, high, low,
high-high and low-low) in ZMFCPDIS.ZMMMXU.

ZLimHys

Hysteresis value in % of range (ZMax-ZMin), common for all limits. It is used to avoid the
frequent update of the value for the attribute “range”.

ZMax

Estimated maximum impedance value. An impedance that is higher than ZMax has the quality
attribute as “Out of Range”.

346 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

ZMin

Estimated minimum impedance value. An impedance that is lower than ZMin has the quality
attribute as “Out of Range”.

8.14 Power swing detection ZMRPSB IP14499-1 v3

8.14.1 Identification
M14853-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 68

Zpsb

SYMBOL-EE V1 EN-US

8.14.2 Application IP14969-1 v1

8.14.2.1 General M13874-3 v3

Various changes in power system may cause oscillations of rotating units. The most typical
reasons for these oscillations are big changes in load or changes in power system
configuration caused by different faults and their clearance. As the rotating masses strive to
find a stable operate condition, they oscillate with damped oscillations until they reach the
final stability.

The extent of the oscillations depends on the extent of the disturbances and on the natural
stability of the system.

The oscillation rate depends also on the inertia of the system and on the total system
impedance between different generating units. These oscillations cause changes in phase and
amplitude of the voltage difference between the oscillating generating units in the power
system, which reflects further on in oscillating power flow between two parts of the system -
the power swings from one part to another - and vice versa.

Distance IEDs located in interconnected networks see these power swings as the swinging of
the measured impedance in relay points. The measured impedance varies with time along a
locus in an impedance plane, see figure 223. This locus can enter the operating characteristic
of a distance protection and cause, if no preventive measures have been considered, its
unwanted operation.

Line distance protection REL670 347

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

jX

Operating characteristic

Impedance locus at
power swing

IEC09000224_1_en.vsd
IEC09000224 V1 EN-US

Figure 223: Impedance plane with Power swing detection operating characteristic and
impedance locus at power swing

8.14.2.2 Basic characteristics M13874-11 v6

Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB) reliably detects power swings with periodic time of
swinging as low as 200 ms (which means slip frequency as high as 10% of the rated frequency
on the 50 Hz basis). It detects the swings under normal system operation conditions as well as
during the dead time of a single-pole automatic reclosing cycle.

ZMRPSB function is able to secure selective operation for internal faults during power swing.
The operation of the distance protection function remains stable for external faults during the
power swing condition, even with the swing (electrical) centre located on the protected power
line.

The operating characteristic of the ZMRPSB function is easily adjustable to the selected
impedance operating characteristics of the corresponding controlled distance protection
zones as well as to the maximum possible load conditions of the protected power lines. See
the corresponding description in “Technical reference manual” for the IEDs.

8.14.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD52042-5 v5

Setting guidelines are prepared in the form of a setting example for the protected power line
as part of a two-machine system presented in figure 224.

EA EB

dA= const dB= f(t)

A B
ZSA ZSB
ZL
~ ~
R
99001019.vsd
IEC99001019 V1 EN-US

Figure 224: Protected power line as part of a two-machine system

Reduce the power system with protected power line into an equivalent two-machine system
with positive sequence source impedances ZSA behind the protective relay R and ZSB behind
the remote end bus B. Observe the fact that these impedances cannot be directly calculated
from the maximum three-phase short circuit currents for faults on the corresponding busbar.
It is necessary to consider separate contributions of different connected circuits.

348 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

The required data is as follows:

Rated system voltage

U r = 400 kV
EQUATION1321 V1 EN-US

Minimum expected system voltage under critical system

U min = 380 kV conditions
EQUATION1322 V1 EN-US

Rated system frequency

f r = 50 Hz
EQUATION1323 V1 EN-US

Rated primary voltage of voltage (or potential) transformers

400 used
Up = kV
3
EQUATION1324 V1 EN-US

Rated secondary voltage of voltage (or potential)

0.11 transformers used
Us = kV
3
EQUATION1325 V1 EN-US

Rated primary current of current transformers used

I p = 1200 A
EQUATION1326 V1 EN-US

Rated secondary current of current transformers used

I s = 1A
EQUATION1327 V1 EN-US

Positive sequence line impedance

Z L1 = (10.71 + j 75.6 ) W
EQUATION1328 V1 EN-US

Positive sequence source impedance behind A bus

Z SA1 = (1.15 + j 43.5) W
EQUATION1329 V1 EN-US

Positive sequence source impedance behind B bus

Z SB1 = ( 5.3 + j 35.7 ) W
EQUATION1330 V1 EN-US

Maximum expected load in direction from A to B (with

S max = 1000 MVA minimum system operating voltage Umin)
EQUATION1331 V1 EN-US

Power factor at maximum line loading

cos (j max ) = 0.95
EQUATION1332 V1 EN-US

Maximum expected load angle

j max = 25°
EQUATION1333 V1 EN-US

Maximum possible initial frequency of power oscillation

f si = 2.5 Hz
EQUATION1334 V1 EN-US

Maximum possible consecutive frequency of power

f sc = 7.0 Hz oscillation
EQUATION1335 V1 EN-US

The minimum load impedance at minimum expected system voltage is equal to equation 402.

2
U min 3802
Z L min = = = 144.4W
S max 1000
EQUATION1337 V1 EN-US (Equation 402)

Line distance protection REL670 349

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The minimum load resistance RLmin at maximum load and minimum system voltage is equal to
equation 403.

RL min = Z L min × cos (j max ) = 144.4 × 0.95 = 137.2W

EQUATION1338 V1 EN-US (Equation 403)

The system impedance ZS is determined as a sum of all impedances in an equivalent two-

machine system, see figure 224. Its value is calculated according to equation 404.

Z S = Z SA1 + Z L1 + Z SB1 = (17.16 + j154.8 ) W

EQUATION1339 V1 EN-US (Equation 404)

The calculated value of the system impedance is of informative nature and helps in
determining the position of the oscillation center, see figure 225, which is for a general case
calculated according to equation 405.

ZS
Z CO = - Z SA1
EB
1+
EA
EQUATION1340 V1 EN-US (Equation 405)

In particular cases, when

E A = EB
EQUATION1342 V1 EN-US (Equation 406)

The center of oscillation resides on the impedance point according to equation 407.

ZS
Z CO = - Z SA1 = ( 7.43 + j 33.9 ) W
2
EQUATION1341 V1 EN-US (Equation 407)

350 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

jX
R
jX

ArgLd
ArgLd (ZMRPSB)
(FDPSPDIS)
R

IEC09000225-2-en.vsdx

IEC09000225 V2 EN-US

Figure 225: Impedance diagrams with corresponding impedances under consideration

The outer boundary of oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction RLdOutFw
should be set with certain safety margin KL compared to the minimum expected load
resistance RLmin. When the exact value of the minimum load resistance is not known, the
following approximations may be considered for lines with a rated voltage of 400 kV:

• KL = 0.9 for lines longer than 150 km

• KL = 0.85 for lines between 80 and 150 km
• KL = 0.8 for lines shorter than 80 km

Multiply the required resistance for the same safety factor KL with the ratio between actual
voltage and 400kV when the rated voltage of the line under consideration is higher than
400kV. The outer boundary RLdOutFw obtains in this particular case its value according to
equation 408.

RLdOutFw = K L × RL min = 0.9 ×137.2 = 123.5W

EQUATION1343 V1 EN-US (Equation 408)

Line distance protection REL670 351

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

It is a general recommendation to set the inner boundary RLdInFw of the oscillation detection
characteristic to 80% or less of its outer boundary. Take special care during the settings of
timers tP1 and tP2 which is included in the oscillation detection logic. This requires the
maximum permitted setting values of factor kLdRFw = 0.8. Equation 409 presents the
corresponding maximum possible value of RLdInFw.

RLdInFw = kLdRFw × RLdOutFw = 98.8W

EQUATION1344 V3 EN-US (Equation 409)

The load angles, which correspond to external δOut and internal δIn boundary of proposed
oscillation detection characteristic in forward direction, are calculated with sufficient accuracy
according to equation 410 and 411 respectively.

æ ZS ö æ 155.75 ö
d Out = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 64.5°
ç 2 × RLdOutFw ÷ è 2 × 123.5 ø
è ø
EQUATION1345 V1 EN-US (Equation 410)

æ ZS ö æ 155.75 ö
d In = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 2 × arc tan ç ÷ = 76.5°
ç 2 × RLdInFwmax ÷ è 2 × 98.8 ø
è ø
EQUATION1346 V1 EN-US (Equation 411)

The required setting tP1 of the initial oscillation detection timer depends on the load angle
difference according to equation 412.

d In - d Out 76.5° - 64.5°

tP1 = = = 13.3ms
f si × 360° 2.5 × 360°
EQUATION1347 V1 EN-US (Equation 412)

The general tendency should be to set the tP1 time to at least 30 ms, if possible. Since it is not
possible to further increase the external load angle δOut, it is necessary to reduce the inner
boundary of the oscillation detection characteristic. The minimum required value is calculated
according to the procedure listed in equation 413, 414, 415 and 416.

tP1min = 30 ms
EQUATION1348 V1 EN-US (Equation 413)

d In - min = 360° × f si × tP1min + d Out = 360° × 2.5 × 0.030 + 64.5° = 91.5°

EQUATION1349 V1 EN-US (Equation 414)

ZS 155.75
RLdInFwmax1 = = = 75.8W
æd ö æ 91.5 ö
2 × tan ç in - min ÷ 2 × tan ç ÷
è 2 ø è 2 ø
EQUATION1350 V1 EN-US (Equation 415)

352 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

RLdInFwmax1 75.8
kLdRFw = = = 0.61
RLdOutFw 123.5
EQUATION1351 V1 EN-US (Equation 416)

Also check if this minimum setting satisfies the required speed for detection of consecutive
oscillations. This requirement will be satisfied if the proposed setting of tP2 time remains
higher than 10 ms, see equation 417.

d In - d Out 91.5° - 64.5°

tP 2 max = = = 10.7 ms
f sc × 360° 7 × 360°
EQUATION1352 V1 EN-US (Equation 417)

The final proposed settings are as follows:

RLdOutFw = 123.5Ω

kLdRFw = 0.61

tP1 = 30 ms

tP2 = 10 ms

Consider RLdInFw = 75.0Ω.

Do not forget to adjust the setting of load encroachment resistance RLdFw in

Phase selection with load encroachment (FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS) to the value
equal to or less than the calculated value RLdInFw. It is at the same time
necessary to adjust the load angle in FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS to follow the
condition presented in equation 418.

Index PHS designates correspondence to FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS function and

index PSD the correspondence to ZMRPSB function.

tan( ArgLdPSD)
ArgLdPHS ³ arc tan
kLdRFw
EQUATION1353 V2 EN-US (Equation 418)

Consider equation 419,

ArgLd PSD = j max = 25°

EQUATION1354 V1 EN-US (Equation 419)

then it is necessary to set the load argument in FDPSPDIS or FRPSPDIS function to not less
than equation 420.

é tan ( ArgLd PSD ) ù é tan ( 25° ) ù

ArgLd PHS ³ arc tan ê ú = arc tan ê ú = 37.5°
ë kLdRFw û ë 0.61 û
EQUATION1355 V1 EN-US (Equation 420)

Line distance protection REL670 353

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

It is recommended to set the corresponding resistive reach parameters in reverse direction

(RLdOutRv and kLdRRv) to the same values as in forward direction, unless the system
operating conditions, which dictate motoring and generating types of oscillations, require
different values. This decision must be made on basis of possible system contingency studies
especially in cases when the direction of transmitted power may change fast in short periods
of time. It is recommended to use different setting groups for operating conditions, which are
changing only between different periods of year (summer, winter).

System studies should determine the settings for the hold timer tH. The purpose of this timer
is to secure continuous output signal from the Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB)
during the power swing, even after the transient impedance leaves ZMRPSB operating
characteristic and is expected to return within a certain time due to continuous swinging.
Consider the minimum possible speed of power swinging in a particular system.

The tR1 inhibit timer delays the influence of the detected residual current on the inhibit criteria
for ZMRPSB. It prevents operation of the function for short transients in the residual current
measured by the IED.

The tR2 inhibit timer disables the output START signal from ZMRPSB function, if the measured
impedance remains within ZMRPSB operating area for a time longer than the set tR2 value.
This time delay was usually set to approximately two seconds in older power-swing devices.

The setting of the tEF timer must cover, with sufficient margin, the opening time of a circuit
breaker and the dead-time of a single-phase autoreclosing together with the breaker closing
time.

8.15 Power swing logic PSLPSCH SEMOD153597-1 v3

8.15.1 Identification
SEMOD175682-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power swing logic PSLPSCH - -

8.15.2 Application SEMOD131359-4 v3

Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection

(ZMRPSB) function. It enables a reliable fault clearing for different faults on protected lines
during power swings in power systems.

It is a general goal, to secure fast and selective operation of the distance protection scheme
for the faults, which occur on power lines during power swings. It is possible to distinguish
between the following main cases:

• A fault occurs on a so far healthy power line, over which the power swing has been
detected and the fast distance protection zone has been blocked by ZMRPSB element.
• The power swing occurs over two phases of a protected line during the dead time of a
singlepole auto-reclosing after the Ph-E fault has been correctly cleared by the distance
protection. The second fault can, but does not need to, occur within this time interval.
• Fault on an adjacent line (behind the B substation, see figure 226) causes the measured
impedance to enter the operate area of ZMRPSB function and, for example, the zone 2
operating characteristic (see figure 227). Correct fault clearance initiates an evolving
power swing so that the locus of the measured impedance continues through zone 1

354 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

operating characteristic and causes its unwanted operation, if no preventive measures

have been taken, see figure 227.

C ZSC
EC
A B
ZSA RA
EA F
ZSD
ED
D
xx06000238.vsd
IEC06000238 V1 EN-US

Figure 226: Fault on adjacent line and its clearance causes power swinging between
sources A and C
PSLPSCH function and the basic operating principle of ZMRPSB function operate reliably for
different faults on parallel power lines with detected power swings. It is, however, preferred to
keep the distance protection function blocked in cases of single phase-to-earth faults on so
far healthy lines with detected power swings. In these cases, it is recommended to use an
optionally available directional overcurrent earth-fault protection with scheme communication
logic.

jX
Measured
impedance at initital
fault position
Zone 2

Zone 1

Impedance locus at initial power

swing after the fault clearance

A
R

ZMRPSB operating characteristic

IEC99000181_2_en.vsd
IEC99000181 V2 EN-US

Figure 227: Impedance trajectory within the distance protection zones 1 and 2 during and
after the fault on line B – D

Line distance protection REL670 355

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.15.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171741-1 v1

8.15.3.1 Scheme communication and tripping for faults occurring during power
swinging over the protected line SEMOD131360-4 v2

The IED includes generally up to five distance protection zones. It is possible to use one or two
of them intentionally for selective fault clearing during power swings only. Following are the
basic conditions for the operation of the so called (underreaching and overreaching) power-
swing zones:

• They must generally be blocked during normal operation and released during power
swings.
• Their operation must be time delayed but shorter (with sufficient margin) than the set
time delay of normal distance protection zone 2, which is generally blocked by the power
swing.
• Their resistive reach setting must secure, together with the set time delay for their
operation, that the slowest expected swings pass the impedance operate area without
initiating their operation.

Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection zones is
schematically presented in figure 228.

The operation of the power swing zones is conditioned by the operation of Power swing
detection (ZMRPSB) function. They operate in PUTT or POTT communication scheme with
corresponding distance protection zones at the remote line end. It is preferred to use the
communication channels over the optionally available “Line Data Communication Module -
LDCM” and the “Binary signal transfer to remote end” function. It is also possible to include, in
an easy way (by means of configuration possibilities), the complete functionality into regular
scheme communication logic for the distance protection function. The communication
scheme for the regular distance protection does not operate during the power-swing
conditions, because the distance protection zones included in the scheme are normally
blocked. The powerswing zones can for this reason use the same communication facilities
during the power-swing conditions.

Only one power swing zone is necessary in distance protection at each line terminal, if the
POTT communication scheme is applied. One underreaching power swing zone, which sends
the time delayed carrier signal, and one overreaching power swing zone, which performs the
local tripping condition, are necessary with PUTT schemes.

The operation of the distance protection zones with long time delay (for example, zone 3) is in
many cases not blocked by the power swing detection elements. This allows in such cases the
distance protection zone 3 (together with the full-scheme design of the distance protection
function) to be used at the same time as the overreaching power-swing zone.

356 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

STDEF
AR1P1 &

STPSD tCS
CS
BLOCK & t &

CSUR
BLKZMPS
tBlkTr &
tTrip t
t

CACC TRIP
>1
CR &

en06000236.vsd
IEC06000236 V1 EN-US

Figure 228: Simplified logic diagram - power swing communication and tripping logic

Configuration SEMOD131360-17 v2
Configure the BLOCK input to any combination of conditions, which are supposed to block the
operation of logic. Connection to detected fuse failure conditions is required as a minimum.

The STDEF functional input should be configured to the START signal of any line earth fault
overcurrent protection function within the IED. When the directional earth fault O/C function
is used an OR combination of forward and reverse operation should be used.

Connect the AR1P1 to the output signal of the autoreclosing function, which signals the
activation of the single pole autoreclosing dead time.

The STPSD input should be connected to the starting signal of the power swing detection
(ZMRPSB) function, which becomes active in cases of detected system oscillations.

The CSUR functional input should be connected to the starting output of the power swing
distance protection zone, which is used as a local tripping criteria during power swings in
PUTT schemes. When the POTT scheme is used (also on series compensated networks) the
local criteria and the carrier sending zone are one and the same. It is preferred to use separate
communication facilities for distance protection and for power swing communication logic,
but combination of functionality within the same communication channel is possible as well.

Connect the CACC functional input to start output signal of the local overreaching power
swing distance protection zone, which serves as a local criteria at receiving of carrier signal
during the power swing cycle.

The CR signal should be configured to the functional input which provides the logic with
information on received carrier signal sent by the remote end power swing distance protection
zone.

The CS functional output signal should be configured to either output relay or to

corresponding input of the “Binary signal transfer to remote end” function.

The BLKZMPS output signal should be configured to BLOCK input of the power swing distance
protection zones.

The TRIP signal should be connected correspondingly towards the tripping functionality of the
complete distance protection within the IED.

Setting calculations SEMOD131360-29 v1

Line distance protection REL670 357

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Time delay of power swing carrier send distance protection zones SEMOD131360-32 v2
Time delay for the underreaching or overreaching carrier send power swing zone should be set
shorter (with sufficient margin) than the time delay of normal distance protection zone 2 to
obtain selective time grading also in cases of faults during power swings. The necessary time
difference depends mostly on the speed of the communication channel used, speed of the
circuit breaker used, etc. Time difference between 100 ms and 150 ms is generally sufficient.

Reactive reach setting of power swing distance protection zones SEMOD131360-37 v2

Set the reactive reach for the power swing zones according to the system selectivity planning.
The reach of the underreaching zone should not exceed 85% of the protected line length. The
reach of the overreaching zone should be at least 120% of the protected line length.

Resistive reach setting of carrier send power swing distance protection zone SEMOD131360-40 v2
Determine the minimum possible speed of impedance ΔZ / Δt in primary Ω / s of the expected
power swings. When better information is not available from system studies, the following
equation may be used:

vz = 2 × Z L min × f s min
EQUATION1537 V1 EN-US (Equation 421)

Where:
vz is a minimum expected speed of swing impedance in Ω / s

ZLmin is a minimum expected primary load impedance in Ω

fsmin is a minimum expected oscillation (swing) frequency in Hz

Calculate the maximum permissible resistive reach for each power swing zone separately
according to the following equations.

RFPPn = vz × tnPP × 0.8

EQUATION1538 V1 EN-US (Equation 422)

vz × tnPE
RFPEn = × 0.8
2
EQUATION1539 V1 EN-US (Equation 423)

Here is factor 0.8

considered for safety
reasons and:
RFPEn phase-to-earth resistive reach setting for a power swing distance protection zone n
in Ω
RFPPn phase-to-phase resistive reach setting for a power swing distance protection zone
n in Ω
tnPE time delay for phase-to-earth fault measurement of power swing distance
protection zone n in s
tnPP time delay for phase-to-phase fault measurement of power swing distance
protection zone n in s

Time-delay for the overreaching power swing zone SEMOD131360-43 v2

Time delay for the overreaching power swing zone is not an important parameter, if the zone
is used only for the protection purposes at power-swings.

358 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Consider the normal time grading, if the overreaching zone serves as a time delayed back-up
zone, which is not blocked by the operation of Power swing detection (ZMRPSB) function.

Timers within the power swing logic SEMOD131360-47 v3

Settings of the timers within Power swing logic (PSLPSCH) depend to a great extent on the
settings of other time delayed elements within the complete protection system. These
settings differ within different power systems. The recommended settings consider only the
general system conditions and the most used practice at different utilities. It is always
necessary to check the local system conditions.

The carrier send timer tCS is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires continuous
presence of the input signal STPSD, before it can issue a carrier send signal. A time delay
between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient.

The trip timer tTrip is used for safety reasons within the logic. It requires continuous presence
of the input signal STPSD, before it can issue a tripping command during the power swings. A
time delay between 50 and 100 ms is generally sufficient.

The blocking timer tBlkTr prolongs the presence of the BLKZMOR output signals, which can be
used to block the operation of the power swing zones after the detected single-phase-to-earth
faults during the power swings. It is necessary to permit the O/C EF protection to eliminate
the initial fault and still make possible for the power swing zones to operate for possible
consecutive faults. A time delay between 150 and 300 ms is generally sufficient.

8.15.3.2 Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings SEMOD131360-55 v3

The second part of a complete Power swing logic (PSLPSCH) functionality is a blocking and
tripping logic for evolving power swings, see figure 226 and figure 227. The simplified logic is
presented in figure 229. The logic controls the operation of the underreaching distance
protection zone (Zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance on the
adjacent power lines. The logic should generally be configured between distance protection
zones 1 and 2.

Configuration SEMOD131360-60 v2
The fault impedance should be detected within the external boundary of Power Swing
Detection (ZMRPSB) function without power swing detected during the entire fault duration.
Configure for this reason the STZMPSD to the functional output signal of ZMRPSB function,
which indicates the measured impedance within its external boundaries.

&

BLKZMH
&
STZML tZL
STZMLL
BLOCK & t >1
&
STMZH tDZ
STZMPSD & t
>1
STPSD

&
-loop

en06000237.vsd
IEC06000237 V1 EN-US

Figure 229: Blocking and tripping logic for evolving power swings

Line distance protection REL670 359

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

No system oscillation should be detected in power system. Configure for this reason the
STPSD functional input to the START functional output of ZMRPSB function or to any binary
input signal indicating the detected oscillations within the power system.

Configure the functional input STZMUR to the start output of the instantaneous
underreaching distance protection zone (usually START of distance protection zone 1). The
function will determine whether the start signal of this zone is permitted to be used in further
logic or not, dependent on time difference on appearance of overreaching distance protection
zone (usually zone 2).

Configure for this reason the functional output signal STZMURPS to the start output of the
overreaching distance protection zone (usually START of distance protection zone 2).

Functional output PUZMLL replaces the start (and trip) signals of the distance protection zone
1 in all following logic. Configure it accordingly within the logic.

Functional output signal BLKZMOR should be configured to block the overreach distance
protection zone (generally zone 2) in order to prevent its maloperation during the first
swinging of the system. Configure it accordingly to BLOCK functional input of distance
protection zone 2.

Setting calculations SEMOD131360-70 v1

Setting of the differentiating timer tDZ influences to a great extent the performance of the
protection during the power swings, which develops by occurrence and clearance of the faults
on adjacent power lines. It is necessary to consider the possibility for the faults to occur close
to the set reach of the underreaching distance protection zone, which might result in
prolonged operate times of zone 1 (underreaching zone) compared to zone 2 starting time
(overreaching zone). A setting between 80 and 150 ms is generally sufficient.

The release timer tZL permits unconditional operation of the underreaching zone, if the
measured impedance remains within its operate characteristic longer than the set time tZL. Its
setting depends on the expected speed of the initial swings and on the setting of the time
delay for the overreaching zone 2. The release timer must still permit selective tripping of the
distance protection within the complete network. A setting between 200 and 300 ms is
generally sufficient.

8.16 Pole slip protection PSPPPAM SEMOD156709-1 v2

8.16.1 Identification
SEMOD158949-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM Ucos 78

8.16.2 Application SEMOD143248-4 v3

Normally, the generator operates synchronously with the power system, that is, all the
generators in the system have the same angular velocity and approximately the same phase
angle difference. If the phase angle between the generators gets too large the stable
operation of the system cannot be maintained. In such a case the generator loses the
synchronism (pole slip) to the external power system.

The situation with pole slip of a generator can be caused by different reasons.

360 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

A short circuit occurs in the external power grid, close to the generator. If the fault clearance
time is too long, the generator will accelerate so much, so the synchronism cannot be
maintained. The relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip, relative to the external
power system, is shown in figure 230.

en06000313.vsd
IEC06000313 V1 EN-US

Figure 230: Relative generator phase angle at a fault and pole slip relative to the external
power system
The relative angle of the generator is shown for different fault duration at a three-phase short
circuit close to the generator. As the fault duration increases the angle swing amplitude
increases. When the critical fault clearance time is reached the stability cannot be maintained.

Un-damped oscillations occur in the power system, where generator groups at different
locations, oscillate against each other. If the connection between the generators is too weak
the amplitude of the oscillations will increase until the angular stability is lost. At the moment
of pole slip there will be a centre of this pole slip, which is equivalent with distance protection
impedance measurement of a three-phase. If this point is situated in the generator itself, the
generator should be tripped as fast as possible. If the locus of the out of step centre is located
in the power system outside the generators the power system should, if possible, be split into
two parts, and the generators should be kept in service. This split can be made at predefined
locations (trip of predefined lines) after function from pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) in the
line protection IED.

Line distance protection REL670 361

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

en06000314.vsd
IEC06000314 V1 EN-US

Figure 231: Undamped oscillations causing pole slip

The relative angle of the generator is shown a contingency in the power system, causing un-
damped oscillations. After a few periods of the oscillation the swing amplitude gets to large
and the stability cannot be maintained.

If the excitation of the generator gets too low there is a risk that the generator cannot
maintain synchronous operation. The generator will slip out of phase and operate as an
induction machine. Normally the under-excitation protection will detect this state and trip the
generator before the pole slip. For this fault the under-excitation protection and PSPPPAM
function will give mutual redundancy.

The operation of a generator having pole slip will give risk of damages to the generator block.

• At each pole slip there will be significant torque impact on the generator-turbine shaft.
• In asynchronous operation there will be induction of currents in parts of the generator
normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence can be
damages on insulation and stator/rotor iron.
• At asynchronous operation the generator will absorb a significant amount of reactive
power, thus risking overload of the windings.

PSPPPAM function shall detect out of step conditions and trip the generator as fast as
possible if the locus of the pole slip is inside the generator. If the centre of pole slip is outside
the generator, situated out in the power grid, the first action should be to split the network
into two parts, after line protection action. If this fails there should be operation of the
generator pole slip protection, to prevent further damages to the generator block.

362 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.16.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD167596-1 v1

SEMOD167582-4 v4
GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On or Off.

MeasureMode: The voltage and current used for the impedance measurement is set by the
parameter MeasureMode. The setting possibilities are: PosSeq, L1-L2, L2-L3, or L3-L1. If all
phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the IED the PosSeq alternative is recommended
(default).

Further settings can be illustrated in figure 232.

Zone 1 Zone 2

EB X’d XT EA
ZS

IED
B A

jX

ZA

Pole slip
impedance
movement Zone 2
ZC
TripAngle Zone 1
WarnAngle
f
R

ZB

IEC06000548_2_en.vsd
IEC06000548 V2 EN-US

Figure 232: Settings for the Pole slip detection function

The ImpedanceZA is the forward impedance as show in figure 232. ZA should be the sum of the
transformer impedance XT and the equivalent impedance of the external system ZS. The
impedance is given in % of the base impedance, according to equation 425.

Line distance protection REL670 363

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

UBase
3
Z Base =
IBase
EQUATION1883 V1 EN-US (Equation 425)

The ImpedanceZB is the reverse impedance as show in figure 232. ZB should be equal to the
generator transient reactance X'd. The impedance is given in % of the base impedance, see
equation 425.

The ImpedanceZC is the forward impedance giving the borderline between zone 1 and zone 2.
ZC should be equal to the transformer reactance ZT. The impedance is given in % of the base
impedance, see equation 425.

The angle of the impedance line ZB – ZA is given as AnglePhi in degrees. This angle is normally
close to 90°.

StartAngle: An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle
exceeds the angle set for StartAngle. The default value 110° is recommended. It should be
checked so that the points in the impedance plane, corresponding to the chosen StartAngle
does not interfere with apparent impedance at maximum generator load.

TripAngle: If a pole slip has been detected: change of rotor angle corresponding to slip
frequency 0.2 – 8 Hz, the slip line ZA – ZB is crossed and the direction of rotation is the same as
at start, a trip is given when the rotor angle gets below the set TripAngle. The default value 90°
is recommended.

N1Limit: The setting N1Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before trip, if the
crossing of the slip line ZA – ZB is within zone 1, that is, the node of the pole slip is within the
generator transformer block. The default value 1 is recommended to minimize the stress on
the generator and turbine at out of step conditions.

N2Limit: The setting N2Limit gives the number of pole slips that should occur before trip, if the
crossing of the slip line ZA – ZB is within zone 2, that is, the node of the pole slip is in the
external network. The default value 3 is recommended give external protections possibility to
split the network and thus limit the system consequencies.

ResetTime: The setting ResetTime gives the time for (PSPPPAM) function to reset after start
when no pole slip been detected. The default value 5s is recommended.

8.16.3.1 Setting example for line application SEMOD172162-25 v3

In case of out of step conditions this shall be detected and the line between substation 1 and 2
shall be tripped.

ZA = forward source impedance

ZB
Line impedance = ZC

IED

IEC07000014_2_en.vsd
IEC07000014 V2 EN-US

Figure 233: Line application of pole slip protection

If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB – ZA this is the detection criterion of
out of step conditions, see figure 234.

364 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

X ZA

ZC

Apparent
anglePhi impedance at
normal load
R

ZB

IEC07000015_2_en.vsd
IEC07000015 V2 EN-US

Figure 234: Impedances to be set for pole slip protection

The setting parameters of the protection is:

ZA: Line + source impedance in the forward direction

ZB: The source impedance in the reverse direction

ZC: The line impedance in the forward direction

AnglePhi: The impedance phase angle

Use the following data:

UBase: 400 kV
SBase set to 1000 MVA
Short circuit power at station 1 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a
pure reactance)
Short circuit power at station 2 without infeed from the protected line: 5000 MVA (assumed to a
pure reactance
Line impedance: 2 + j20 ohm

With all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED, it is
recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence.

The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:

Line distance protection REL670 365

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

UBase 2 400 2
ZBase = = = 160ohm
SBase 1000
EQUATION1960 V1 EN-US (Equation 426)

400 2
ZA = Z (line ) + Zsc ( station 2) = 2 + j 20 + j = 2 + j 52ohm
5000
EQUATION1961 V1 EN-US (Equation 427)

This corresponds to:

2 + j 52
ZA = = 0.0125 + j 0.325 pu = 0.325Ð88° pu
160
EQUATION1962 V1 EN-US (Equation 428)

Set ZA to 0.32.

400 2
ZB = Zsc ( station1) = j = j 32ohm
5000
EQUATION1963 V1 EN-US (Equation 429)

This corresponds to:

j 32
ZB = = j 0.20 pu = 0.20Ð90° pu
160
EQUATION1964 V1 EN-US (Equation 430)

Set ZB to 0.2

This corresponds to:

2 + j 20
ZC = = 0.0125 + j 0.125 pu = 0.126Ð84° pu
160
EQUATION1966 V1 EN-US (Equation 431)

Set ZC to 0.13 and AnglePhi to 88°

The warning angle (StartAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating area. The
maximum line power is assumed to be 2000 MVA. This corresponds to apparent impedance:

U2 400 2
Z= = = 80ohm
S 2000
EQUATION1967 V1 EN-US (Equation 432)

Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 235.

366 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

ZA

Zload
R

ZB

en07000016.vsd
IEC07000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 235: Simplified figure to derive StartAngle

ZB ZA 32 52
angleStart ³ arctan + arctan = arctan + arctan = 21.80 + 33.0 » 550
Zload Zload 80 80
EQUATION1968 V2 EN-US (Equation 433)

In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection to
start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin.

Set StartAngle to 110°

For the TripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90° to assure limited stress for
the circuit breaker.

In a power system it is desirable to split the system into predefined parts in case of pole slip.
The protection is therefore situated at lines where this predefined split shall take place.

Normally the N1Limit is set to 1 so that the line will be tripped at the first pole slip.

If the line shall be tripped at all pole slip situations also the parameter N2Limit is set to 1. In
other cases a larger number is recommended.

8.16.3.2 Setting example for generator application SEMOD172162-90 v4

In case of out of step conditions this shall be checked if the pole slip centre is inside the
generator (zone 1) or if it is situated in the network (zone 2).

Line distance protection REL670 367

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

ZA
ZB
ZC

en07000017.vsd
IEC07000017 V1 EN-US

Figure 236: Generator application of pole slip protection

If the apparent impedance crosses the impedance line ZB – ZA this is the detected criterion of
out of step conditions, see figure 237.

X ZA

ZC

Apparent
anglePhi impedance at
normal load
R

ZB

IEC07000015_2_en.vsd
IEC07000015 V2 EN-US

Figure 237: Impedances to be set for pole slip protection PSPPPAM

The setting parameters of the protection are:

ZA Block transformer + source impedance in the forward direction

ZB The generator transient reactance

ZC The block transformer reactance

AnglePhi The impedance phase angle

Use the following generator data:

UBase: 20 kV
SBase set to 200 MVA
Xd': 25%

368 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Use the following block transformer data:

UBase: 20 kV (low voltage side)
SBase set to 200 MVA
ek: 15%

Short circuit power from the external network without infeed from the protected line: 5000
MVA (assumed to a pure reactance).

We have all phase voltages and phase currents available and fed to the protection IED.
Therefore it is recommended to set the MeasureMode to positive sequence.

The impedance settings are set in pu with ZBase as reference:

UBase 2 20 2
ZBase = = = 2.0ohm
SBase 200
EQUATION1969 V1 EN-US (Equation 434)

202 202
ZA = Z (transf ) + Zsc(network ) = j × 0.15 + j = j 0.38ohm
200 5000
EQUATION1970 V1 EN-US (Equation 435)

This corresponds to:

j 0.38
ZA = = j 0.19 pu = 0.19Ð90° pu
2.0
EQUATION1971 V1 EN-US (Equation 436)

Set ZA to 0.19

20 2
ZB = jX d ' = j × 0.25 = j 0.5ohm
200
EQUATION1972 V2 EN-US (Equation 437)

This corresponds to:

j 0.5
ZB = = j 0.25 pu = 0.25Ð90° pu
2.0
EQUATION1973 V1 EN-US (Equation 438)

Set ZB to 0.25

202
ZC = jX T = j × 0.15 = j 0.3ohm
200
EQUATION1974 V1 EN-US (Equation 439)

This corresponds to:

Line distance protection REL670 369

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

j 0.3
ZC = = j 0.15 pu = 0.15Ð90o pu
2.0
EQUATION1975 V2 EN-US (Equation 440)

Set ZC to 0.15 and AnglePhi to 90°.

The warning angle (StartAngle) should be chosen not to cross into normal operating area. The
maximum line power is assumed to be 200 MVA. This corresponds to apparent impedance:

U2 20 2
Z= = = 2ohm
S 200
EQUATION1976 V1 EN-US (Equation 441)

Simplified, the example can be shown as a triangle, see figure 238.

ZA

Zload
R

ZB

en07000016.vsd
IEC07000016 V1 EN-US

Figure 238: Simplified figure to derive StartAngle

ZB ZA 0.25 0.19
angleStart ³ arctan + arctan = arctan + arctan = 7.10 + 5.4 » 130
Zload Zload 2 2
EQUATION1977 V2 EN-US (Equation 442)

In case of minor damped oscillations at normal operation we do not want the protection to
start. Therefore we set the start angle with large margin.

Set StartAngle to 110°.

For the TripAngle it is recommended to set this parameter to 90° to assure limited stress for
the circuit breaker.

370 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

If the centre of pole slip is within the generator block set N1Limit to 1 to get trip at first pole
slip.

If the centre of pole slip is within the network set N2Limit to 3 to get enable split of the system
before generator trip.

8.17 Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM GUID-8321AC72-187C-4E43-A0FC-AAC7829397C3 v1

8.17.1 Identification
GUID-BF2F1533-BA39-48F0-A55C-0B13A393F780 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 78

<

8.17.2 Application GUID-11643CF1-4EF5-47F0-B0D4-6715ACEEC8EC v6

Under balanced and stable conditions, a generator operates with a constant rotor (power)
angle, delivering an active electrical power to the power system, which is equal to the
mechanical input power on the generator axis, minus the small losses in the generator. In the
case of a three-phase fault electrically close to the generator, no active power can be delivered.
Almost all mechanical power from the turbine is under this condition used to accelerate the
moving parts, that is, the rotor and the turbine. If the fault is not cleared quickly, the generator
may not remain in synchronism after the fault has been cleared. If the generator loses
synchronism (Out-of-step) with the rest of the system, pole slipping occurs. This is
characterized by a wild flow of synchronizing power, which reverses in direction twice for every
slip cycle.

The out-of-step phenomenon occurs when a phase opposition occurs periodically between
different parts of a power system. This is often shown in a simplified way as two equivalent
generators connected to each other via an equivalent transmission line and the phase
difference between the equivalent generators is 180 electrical degrees.

Synchronous Synchronous
machine 1 machine 2

SM1 SM2
Voltages of all
E1 U, I phases to E2
earth are zero
in the centre
E1 of oscillation

E2
Centre of oscillation

IEC10000107-1-en.vsd
IEC10000107 V1 EN-US

Figure 239: The centre of electromechanical oscillation

Line distance protection REL670 371

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

The center of the electromechanical oscillation can be in the generator unit (or generator-
transformer unit) or outside, somewhere in the power system. When the center of the
electromechanical oscillation occurs within the generator it is essential to trip the generator
immediately. If the center of the electromechanical oscillation is outside any of the generators
in the power system, the power system should be split into two different parts; so each part
may have the ability to restore stable operating conditions. This is sometimes called
“islanding”. The objective of islanding is to prevent an out-of-step condition from spreading to
the healthy parts of the power system. For this purpose, uncontrolled tripping of
interconnections or generators must be prevented. It is evident that a reasonable strategy for
out-of-step relaying as well as, appropriate choice of other protection relays, their locations
and settings require detailed stability studies for each particular power system and/or
subsystem. On the other hand, if severe swings occur, from which a fast recovery is
improbable, an attempt should be made to isolate the affected area from the rest of the
system by opening connections at predetermined points. The electrical system parts swinging
to each other can be separated with the lines closest to the center of the power swing allowing
the two systems to be stable as separated islands. The main problem involved with systemic
islanding of the power system is the difficulty, in some cases, of predicting the optimum
splitting points, because they depend on the fault location and the pattern of generation and
load at the respective time. It is hardly possible to state general rules for out-of-step relaying,
because they shall be defined according to the particular design and needs of each electrical
network. The reason for the existence of two zones of operation is selectivity, required for
successful islanding. If there are several out-of-step relays in the power system, then
selectivity between separate relays is obtained by the relay reach (for example zone 1) rather
then by time grading.

The out-of-step condition of a generator can be caused by different reasons. Sudden events in
an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault occurrence or slow fault
clearance, can cause power oscillations, that are called power swings. In a non-recoverable
situation, the power swings become so severe that the synchronism is lost: this condition is
called pole slipping.

Undamped oscillations occur in power systems, where generator groups at different locations
are not strongly electrically connected and can oscillate against each other. If the connection
between the generators is too weak the magnitude of the oscillations may increase until the
angular stability is lost. More often, a three-phase short circuit (unsymmetrical faults are much
less dangerous in this respect) may occur in the external power grid, electrically close to the
generator. If the fault clearing time is too long, the generator accelerates so much, that the
synchronism cannot be maintained even if the power system is restored to the pre-fault
configuration, see Figure 240.

372 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

1.1
unstable
stable
3-ph ← 3-rd pole-slip

Generator rotational speed in per unit →

fault

260 ms ← 2-nd pole-slip

1.05
← For 260 ms long 3-phase fault generator
200
1-st loses synchronism. Generator operates in
ms
pole-slip asynchronous mode at speeds > nominal

← damped
oscillations
1

1 corresponds ← For fault clearing time 200 ms generator remains

to 50 or 60 Hz stable and in synchronism. After oscillations around
the nominal speed, the rotational speed returns to
the nominal, corresponding to 50 or 60 Hz

0.95
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
time in milliseconds →

IEC10000108-2-en.vsd
IEC10000108 V2 EN-US

Figure 240: Stable and unstable case. For the fault clearing time tcl = 200 ms, the
generator remains in synchronism, for tcl = 260 ms, the generator loses step.
A generator out-of-step condition, with successive pole slips, can result in damages to the
generator, shaft and turbine.

• Stator windings are under high stress due to electrodynamic forces.

• The current levels during an out-of-step condition can be higher than those during a three-
phase fault and, therefore, there is significant torque impact on the generator-turbine
shaft.
• In asynchronous operation there is induction of currents in parts of the generator
normally not carrying current, thus resulting in increased heating. The consequence can be
damages on insulation and iron core of both rotor and stator.

Measurement of the magnitude, direction and rate-of-change of load impedance relative to a

generator’s terminals provides a convenient and generally reliable means of detecting whether
pole-slipping is taking place. The out-of-step protection should protect a generator or motor
(or two weakly connected power systems) against pole-slipping with severe consequences for
the machines and stability of the power system. In particular it should:

1. Remain stable for normal steady state load.

2. Distinguish between stable and unstable rotor swings.
3. Locate electrical centre of a swing.
4. Detect the first and the subsequent pole-slips.
5. Prevent stress on the circuit breaker.
6. Distinguish between generator and motor out-of-step conditions.
7. Provide information for post-disturbance analysis.

8.17.3 Setting guidelines GUID-CB86FCF6-8718-40BE-BDF2-028C24AB367D v6

The setting example for generator protection application shows how to calculate the most
important settings ForwardR, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ReverseX.

Line distance protection REL670 373

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Table 32: An example how to calculate values for the settings ForwardR, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ReverseX

Turbine Generator Transformer Double power line Equivalent

(hydro) 200 MVA 300 MVA 230 kV, 300 km power
system

13.8 kV

CT 1
To OOS relay
CT 2

to OOS relay

IEC10000117-2-en.vsd
IEC10000117 V2 EN-US

Generator Step-up transformer Single power line Power system

Data UBase = Ugen = 13.8 kV U1 = 13.8 kV Uline = 230 kV Unom = 230 kV
required U2 = 230 kV SC level = 5000 MVA
IBase = Igen = 8367 A usc = 10% SC current = 12 551 A
I1 = 12 551 A φ = 84.289°
Xd' = 0.2960 pu Xline/km = 0.4289 Ω/km Ze = 10.5801 Ω
Rs = 0.0029 pu Xt = 0.1000 pu (transf. ZBase) Rline/km = 0.0659 Ω/km
Rt = 0.0054 pu (transf. ZBase)
1-st step in ZBase = 0.9522 Ω (generator) ZBase (13.8 kV) = 0.6348 Ω
calculation Xd' = 0.2960 · 0.952 = 0.282 Ω Xt = 0.100 · 0.6348 = 0.064 Ω Xline = 300 · 0.4289 = 128.7 Ω Xe = Ze · sin (φ) = 10.52 Ω
Rs = 0.0029 · 0.952 = 0.003 Ω Rt = 0.0054 · 0.635 = 0.003 Ω Rline = 300 · 0.0659 = 19.8 Ω Re = Ze · cos (φ) = 1.05 Ω
(X and R above on 230 kV (Xe and Re on 230 kV basis)
basis)
2-nd step in Xd' = 0.2960 · 0.952 = 0.282 Ω Xt = 0.100 · 0.6348 = 0.064 Ω Xline= 128.7 · (13.8/230)2 = Xe = 10.52 · (13.8/230)2 = 0.038
calculation Rs = 0.0029 · 0.952 = 0.003 Ω Rt = 0.0054 · 0.635 = 0.003 Ω 0.463 Ω Ω
Rline = 19.8 · (13.8/230)2 = Re = 1.05 · (13.8/230)2 = 0.004
0.071 Ω Ω
(X and R referred to 13.8 kV) (X and R referred to 13.8 kV)
3-rd step in ForwardX = Xt + Xline + Xe = 0.064 + 0.463 + 0.038 = 0.565 Ω; ReverseX = Xd' = 0.282 Ω (all referred to gen. voltage 13.8 kV)
calculation ForwardR = Rt + Rline + Re = 0.003 + 0.071 + 0.004 = 0.078 Ω; ReverseR = Rs = 0.003 Ω (all referred to gen. voltage 13.8 kV)
Final ForwardX = 0.565/0.9522 · 100 = 59.33 in % ZBase; ReverseX = 0.282/0.9522 · 100 = 29.6 in % ZBase (all referred to 13.8 kV)
resulted ForwardR = 0.078/0.9522 · 100 = 8.19 in % ZBase; ReverseR = 0.003/0.9522 · 100 = 0.29 in % ZBase (all referred to 13.8 kV)
settings

Settings ForwardR, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ReverseX.

• A precondition in order to be able to use the Out-of-step protection and construct a

suitable lens characteristic is that the power system in which the Out-of-step protection
is installed, is modeled as a two-machine equivalent system, or as a single machine –
infinite bus equivalent power system. Then the impedances from the position of the Out-
of-step protection in the direction of the normal load flow can be taken as forward.
• The settings ForwardX, ForwardR, ReverseX and ReverseR must, if possible, take into
account, the post-disturbance configuration of the simplified power system. This is not
always easy, in particular with islanding. But for the two machine model as in Table 32, the
most probable scenario is that only one line is in service after the fault on one power line
has been cleared by line protections. The settings ForwardX, ForwardR must therefore
take into account the reactance and resistance of only one power line.
• All the reactances and resistances (ForwardX, ForwardR, ReverseX and ReverseR) must be
referred to the voltage level where the Out-of-step relay is installed; for the example case
shown in Table 32, this is the generator nominal voltage UBase = 13.8 kV. This affects all
the forward reactances and resistances in Table 32.
• All reactances and resistances must be finally expressed in percent of ZBase, where ZBase
is for the example shown in Table 32 the base impedance of the generator, ZBase = 0.9522
Ω. Observe that the power transformer’s base impedance is different, ZBase = 0.6348 Ω.
Observe that this latter power transformer ZBase = 0.6348 Ω must be used when the
power transformer reactance and resistance are transformed.

374 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

• For the synchronous machines as the generator in Table 32, the transient reactance Xd'
shall be used. This due to the relatively slow electromechanical oscillations under out-of-
step conditions.
• Sometimes the equivalent resistance of the generator is difficult to get. A good estimate
is 1 percent of transient reactance Xd'. No great error is done if this resistance is set to
zero (0).
• Inclination of the Z-line, connecting points SE and RE, against the real (R) axis can be
calculated as arctan ((ReverseX + ForwardX) / (ReverseR + ForwardR)), and is for the case
in Table 32 equal to 84.55 degrees, which is a typical value.

Other settings:

• ReachZ1: Determines the reach of the zone 1 in the forward direction. Determines the
position of the X-line which delimits zone 1 from zone 2. Set in % of ForwardX. In the case
shown in Table 32, where the reactance of the step-up power transformer is 11.32 % of the
total ForwardX, the setting ReachZ1 should be set to ReachZ1 = 12 %. This means that the
generator – step-up transformer unit would be in the zone 1. In other words, if the centre
of oscillation would be found to be within the zone 1, only a very limited number of pole-
slips would be allowed, usually only one.
• StartAngle: Angle between the two equivalent rotors induced voltages (that is, the angle
between the two internal induced voltages E1 and E2 in an equivalent simplified two-
machine system) to get the start signal, in degrees. The width of the lens characteristic is
determined by the value of this setting. Whenever the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters
the lens, this is a sign of instability. The angle recommended is 110 or 120 degrees,
because it is at this rotor angle where problems with dynamic stability usually begin.
Power angle 120 degrees is sometimes called “the angle of no return” because if this angle
is reached under generator swings, the generator is most likely to lose synchronism. When
the complex impedance Z(R, X) enters the lens the start output signal (START) is set to 1
(TRUE).
• TripAngle: The setting TripAngle specifies the value of the rotor angle where the trip
command is sent to the circuit breaker in order to minimize the stress to which the
breaker is exposed when breaking the currents. The range of this value is from 15° to 90°,
with higher values suitable for longer breaker opening times. If a breaker opening is
initiated at for example 60°, then the circuit breaker opens its contacts closer to 0°, where
the currents are smaller. If the breaker opening time tBreaker is known, then it is possible
to calculate more exactly when opening must be initiated in order to open the circuit
breaker contacts as close as possible to 0°, where the currents are smallest. If the breaker
opening time tBreaker is specified (that is, higher than the default 0.0 s, where 0.0 s
means that tBreaker is unknown), then this alternative way to determine the moment
when a command to open the breaker is sent, is automatically chosen instead of the more
approximate method, based on the TripAngle.
• tReset: Interval of time since the last pole-slip detected, when the Out-of-step protection
is reset. If there is no more pole slips detected under the time interval specified by tReset
since the previous one, the function is reset. All outputs are set to 0 (FALSE). If no pole slip
at all is detected under interval of time specified by tReset since the start signal has been
set (for example a stable case with synchronism retained), the function is as well reset,
which includes the start output signal (START), which is reset to 0 (FALSE) after tReset
interval of time has elapsed. However, the measurements of analogue quantities such as
R, X, P, Q, and so on continue without interruptions. Recommended setting of tReset is in
the range of 6 to 12 seconds.
• NoOfSlipsZ1: Maximum number of pole slips with centre of electromechanical oscillation
within zone 1 required for a trip. Usually, NoOfSlipsZ1= 1.
• NoOfSlipsZ2: Maximum number of pole slips with centre of electromechanical oscillation
within zone 2 required for a trip. The reason for the existence of two zones of operation is
selectivity, required particularly for successful islanding. If there are several pole slip (out-
of-step) relays in the power system, then selectivity between relays is obtained by the
relay reach (for example zone 1) rather then by time grading. In a system, as in Table 32,
the number of allowed pole slips in zone 2 can be the same as in zone 1. Recommended
value: NoOfSlipsZ2 = 2 or 3.

Line distance protection REL670 375

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

• Operation: With the setting Operation OOSPPAM function can be set On/Off.
• OperationZ1: Operation zone 1 On, Off. If OperationZ1 = Off, all pole-slips with centre of
the electromechanical oscillation within zone 1 are ignored. Default setting = On. More
likely to be used is the option to extend zone 1 so that zone 1 even covers zone 2. This
feature is activated by the input to extend the zone 1 (EXTZ1).
• OperationZ2: Operation zone 2 On, Off. If OperationZ1 = Off, all pole-slips with centre of
the electromechanical oscillation within zone 2 are ignored. Default setting = On.
• tBreaker: Circuit breaker opening time. Use the default value tBreaker = 0.000 s if
unknown. If the value is known, then a value higher than 0.000 is specified, for example
tBreaker = 0.040 s: the out-of-step function gives a trip command approximately 0.040
seconds before the currents reach their minimum value. This in order to decrease the
stress imposed to the circuit breaker.
• GlobalBaseSel: This setting identifies the Global Base Values Group where UBase and
IBase are defined. In particular: UBase is the voltage at the point where the Out-of-step
protection is connected. If the protection is connected to the generator output terminals,
then UBase is the nominal (rated) phase to phase voltage of the protected generator. All
the resistances and reactances are measured and displayed referred to voltage Ubase.
Observe that ReverseX, ForwardX, ReverseR, and ForwardR must be given referred to
UBase.IBase is the protected generator nominal (rated) current, if the Out-of-step
protection belongs to a generator protection scheme.
• InvertCTCurr: If the currents fed to the Out-of-step protection are measured on the
protected generator neutral side (LV-side) then inversion is not necessary (InvertCTCurr =
Off), provided that the CT’s star point earthing complies with ABB recommendations, as it
is shown in Table 32. If the currents fed to the Out-of-step protection are measured on the
protected generator terminals side, then invertion is necessary (InvertCTCurr = On),
provided that the CT’s star point earthing complies with ABB recommendations, as it is
shown in Table 32.

8.18 Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF SEMOD153633-1 v3

8.18.1 Identification
SEMOD155890-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF - -

8.18.2 Application M13830-3 v7

Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage- and current-based function ZCVPSOF is a
complementary function to impedance measuring functions, but may use the information
from such functions.

With ZCVPSOF, a fast trip is achieved for a fault on the whole line when the line is being
energized. The ZCVPSOF tripping is generally non-directional to secure a trip at fault
situations where directional information cannot be established, for example, due to lack of
polarizing voltage when a line potential transformer is used.

Automatic activation based on dead-line detection can only be used when the voltage
transformer is situated on the line side of a circuit breaker.

When line side voltage transformers are used, the use of the nondirectional distance zones
secures switch onto fault tripping for close-in three-phase short circuits. The use of the

376 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

nondirectional distance zones also gives a fast fault clearance when energizing a bus from the
line with a short circuit fault on the bus.

Other protection functions like time-delayed phase and zero-sequence overcurrent function
can be connected to ZCVPSOF to increase the dependability in the scheme.

When the voltage transformers are situated on the bus side, the automatic switch onto fault
detection based on dead-line detection is not possible. In such cases the deadline detection is
bypassed using the breaker closing status and the switch onto fault logic is activated.

8.18.3 Setting guidelines M13855-4 v10

The parameters for automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage- and current-based function
ZCVPSOF are set via the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager PCM600.

The distance protection zone used for instantaneous trip by ZCVPSOF has to be set to cover
the entire protected line with a safety margin of minimum 20%.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel is used to select GBASVAL for reference of base values.

Operation: The operation of ZCVPSOF is by default set to On. The parameter must be set to
Off if ZCVPSOF is not to be used.

IPh< is used to set the current level for the detection of a dead line. IPh< is, by default, set to
20% of IBase. It shall be set with a sufficient margin (15–20%) below the minimum expected
load current. In many cases, the minimum load current of a line is close to zero and even can be
zero. The operating value must exceed the maximum charging current of an overhead line
when only one phase is disconnected (mutual coupling in the other phases).

UPh< is used to set the voltage level for the detection of a dead line. UPh< is, by default, set to
70% of UBase. This is a suitable setting in most cases, but it is recommended to check the
suitability in the actual application.

AutoInitMode: automatic activating of ZCVPSOF is, by default, set to DLD disabled, which
means the dead-line logic detection is disabled. If an automatic activation of the dead-line
detection is required, the parameter AutoInitMode has to be set to either Voltage, Current or
Current & Voltage.

When AutoInitMode is set to Voltage, the dead-line detection logic checks that the three-phase
voltages are lower than the set UPh< level.

When AutoInitMode is set to Current, the dead-line detection logic checks if the three-phase
currents are lower than the set IPh< level.

When AutoInitMode is set to Current & Voltage, the dead-line detection logic checks that both
three-phase currents and three-phase voltages are lower than the set IPh< and UPh< levels.

Otherwise, the logic is activated by an external BC input.

tSOTF: the drop delay of ZCVPSOF is, by default, set to 1.0 seconds, which is suitable for most
applications.

tDLD: The time delay for activating ZCVPSOF by the internal dead-line detection is, by default,
set to 0.2 seconds. It is suitable in most applications. The delay shall not be set too short to
avoid unwanted activations during transients in the system.

Mode: The operation of ZCVPSOF has three modes for defining the criteria for tripping. The
setting of Mode is, by default, UILevel, which means that the tripping criterion is based on the

Line distance protection REL670 377

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

setting of IPh< and UPh<. The choice of UILevel gives a faster and more sensitive operation of
the function, which is important for reducing the stress that might occur when energizing
onto a fault. However, the voltage recovery can be slow in some systems when energizing the
line. Therefore, if the timer tDuration is set too short, ZCVPSOF can interpret this as a fault
and release a trip.

When Mode is set to Impedance, the operate criterion is based on the BC input (breaker
closing), which can be the start of the overreaching zone from the impedance zone
measurement or a tOperate-delayed START_DLYD input. A nondirectional output signal should
be used from an overreaching zone. The selection of the Impedance mode gives increased
security.

When Mode is set to UILvl&Imp, the condition for tripping is an ORed between UILevel and
Impedance.

tDuration: The setting of the timer for the release of UILevel is, by default, 0.02 seconds, which
has proven to be suitable in most cases from field experience. If a shorter time delay is to be
set, it is necessary to consider the voltage recovery time during line energization.

tOperate: The time delay for the START_DLYD input to activate TRIP when Mode is set to
Impedance or UILvl&Imp is, by default, set to 0.03 seconds.

8.19 Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ SEMOD151920-1 v2

8.19.1 Identification
SEMOD151937-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ - -

8.19.2 Application SEMOD167856-4 v5

Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ is an auxiliary function to Distance protection zone,
quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS and Phase selection with load encroachment,
quadrilateral characteristic function FDPSPDIS. The purpose is to create the logic in resonance
or high resistive earthed systems (normally sub-transmission) to achieve the correct phase
selective tripping during two simultaneous single-phase earth-faults in different phases on
different line sections.

Due to the resonance/high resistive earthing principle, the earth faults in the system gives
very low fault currents, typically below 25 A. At the same time, the occurring system voltages
on the healthy phases will increase to line voltage level as the neutral displacement is equal to
the phase voltage level at a fully developed earth fault. This increase of the healthy phase
voltage, together with slow tripping, gives a considerable increase of the risk of a second fault
in a healthy phase and the second fault can occur at any location. When it occurs on another
feeder, the fault is commonly called cross-country fault.

Different practices for tripping is used by different utilities. The main use of this logic is in
systems where single phase-to-earth faults are not automatically cleared, only alarm is given
and the fault is left on until a suitable time to send people to track down and repair the fault.
When cross-country faults occur, the practice is to trip only one of the faulty lines. In other
cases, a sensitive, directional earth-fault protection is provided to trip, but due to the low fault
currents long tripping times are utilized.

378 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

Figure 241 shows an occurring cross-country fault. Figure 242 shows the achievement of line
voltage on healthy phases and an occurring cross-country fault.

Load

L3N

Load
L1N

en06000550.vsd
IEC06000550 V1 EN-US

Figure 241: An occurring cross-country fault on different feeders in a sub-transmission

network, high impedance (resistance, reactance) earthed
UL1

UL
F
3
UL

2F

3 UL
UL 2
3U0

F
3
UL

en06000551.vsd
IEC06000551 V1 EN-US

Figure 242: The voltage increase on healthy phases and occurring neutral point voltage
(3U0) at a single phase-to-earth fault and an occurring cross-country fault on
different feeders in a sub-transmission network, high impedance (resistance,
reactance) earthed
PPLPHIZ is connected between Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic function
ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS and Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral
characteristic function FDPSPDIS as shown in figure 243. The integer from the phase selection
function, which gives the type of fault undergoes a check and will release the distance
protection zones as decided by the logic. The logic includes a check of the fault loops given by
the phase selection and if the fault type indicates a two or three phase fault the integer
releasing the zone is not changed.

If the fault indicates and earth-fault checks are done which mode of tripping to be used, for
example 1231c, which means that fault in the phases are tripped in the cyclic order L1 before L2
before L3 before L1. Local conditions to check the phase-to-earth voltage levels and occurring
zero sequence current and voltages completes the logic.

Line distance protection REL670 379

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

ZMQAPDIS
FDPSPDIS
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* TRIP
I3P* TRIP
W2_VT_B_U3P U3P* TRL1
U3P* START FALSE BLOCK TRL2
BLOCK STFWL1 PHS_L1 W2_FSD1-BLKZ VTSZ TRL3
DIRCND STFWL2 PHS_L2 FALSE BLKTR START
STFWL3 PHS_L3 STCND STL1
STFWPE
DIRCND STL2
STRVL1
STL3
STRVL2
STND
STRVL3
STRVPE
STNDL1 ZMQPDIS
STNDL2 I3P* TRIP
W2_CT_B_I3P
STNDL3 U3P* TRL1
W2_VT_B_U3P
STNDPE FALSE BLOCK TRL2
STFW1PH VTSZ TRL3
W2_FSD1-BLKZ
STFW2PH BLKTR START
FALSE
STFW3PH
STCND STL1
STPE DIRCND STL2
STPP STL3
STCNDZ STND
STCNDLE

PPLPHIZ
W2_CT_B_I3P I3P* START
W2_VT_B_U3P U3P* ZREL
FALSE BLOCK
FALSE RELL1N
FALSE RELL2N
FALSE RELL3N
STCND
IEC06000552-3-en.vsd
IEC06000552 V3 EN-US

Figure 243: The connection of Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ between Distance
protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS and ZMQAPDIS and
Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS
As the fault is a double earth-faults at different locations of the network, the fault current in
the faulty phase on each of the lines will be seen as a phase current and at the same time as a
neutral current as the remaining phases on each feeder virtually carries no (load) current. A
current through the earthing impedance does not exist. It is limited by the impedance to below
the typical, say 25 to 40 A. Occurring neutral current is thus a sign of a cross-country fault (a
double earth- fault)

IL3=IN

IL1=IN

en06000553.vsd
IEC06000553 V1 EN-US

Figure 244: The currents in the phases at a double earth fault

The function has a block input (BLOCK) to block start from the function if required in certain
conditions.

380 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

8.19.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD167997-4 v5

The parameters for the Phase preference logic function PPLPHIZ are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Phase preference logic function is an intermediate logic between Distance

protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic function ZMQPDIS and Phase
selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic function
FDPSPDIS. Phase selection and zones are set according to normal praxis,
including earth-fault loops, although earth-fault loops will only be active during
a cross-country fault.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

OperMode: The operating mode is selected. Choices includes cyclic or acyclic phase selection
in the preferred mode. This setting must be identical for all IEDs in the same galvanic
connected network part.

UPN<: The setting of the phase-to- earth voltage level (phase voltage) which is used by the
evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in the phase. Normally in a high impedance earthed
system, the voltage drop is big and the setting can typically be set to 70% of base voltage
(UBase)

UPP<: The setting of the phase-to-phase voltage level (line voltage) which is used by the
evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in two or more phases. The voltage must be set to
avoid that a partly healthy phase-to-phase voltage, for example, L2-L3 for a L1-L2 fault, picks-
up and gives an incorrect release of all loops. The setting can typically be 40 to 50% of rated
voltage (UBase) divided by √3, that is 40%.

3U0>: The setting of the residual voltage level (neutral voltage) which is used by the evaluation
logic to verify that an earth-fault exists. The setting can typically be 20% of base voltage
(UBase).

IN>: The setting of the residual current level (neutral current) which is used by the evaluation
logic to verify that a cross-country fault exists. The setting can typically be 20% of base
current (IBase) but the setting shall be above the maximum current generated by the system
earthing. Note that the systems are high impedance earthed which means that the earth-fault
currents at earth-faults are limited and the occurring IN above this level shows that there
exists a two-phase fault on this line and a parallel line where the IN is the fault current level in
the faulty phase. A high sensitivity need not to be achieved as the two-phase fault level
normally is well above base current.

tIN: The time delay for detecting that the fault is cross-country. Normal time setting is 0.1 -
0.15 s.

tUN: The time delay for a secure UN detecting that the fault is an earth-fault or double earth-
fault with residual voltage. Normal time setting is 0.1 - 0.15 s.

tOffUN: The UN voltage has a reset drop-off to ensure correct function without timing
problems. Normal time setting is 0.1 s

Line distance protection REL670 381

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

8.20 Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ GUID-80133640-FB3E-400C-B7FF-C2BB0AD1A045 v1

8.20.1 Identification
GUID-850E4134-E912-45EC-981E-E1A2C12A91A8 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ - -

8.20.2 Application GUID-FFAB7FE9-8BB8-4EFD-A2B7-20FA759D47D6 v1

The Phase preference logic function PPL2PHIZ provides a supplementary phase selection to
the High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS. The application is for resonance (Petersen coil)
or high resistive earthed systems where phase preference based tripping is required for so-
called cross-country faults, two simultaneous single phase-to-earth-faults in different phases
and on different line sections.

Due to the resonance/high resistive earthing, single phase-to-earth faults give relatively low
fault currents. However, it also raises the voltages in the healthy phases drastically, which
increases the risk for a second earth fault. When the second fault occurs on another feeder, the
two faults are commonly called a cross-country fault.

Regardless of the practice to trip, or not trip single phase-to-earth faults a cross-country fault
may still occur before the earth fault protection has had the time to trip.

Cross-country faults can generate relatively high currents and need to be tripped
automatically and fast. The strategy is still often to trip only one of the two faulty feeders
during the cross-country fault and then continue to run the system. The PPL2PHIZ function is
designed to enable this strategy, being able to properly select the phase which shall be tripped
first based on set phase preference scheme.

If the cross-country faults are very far apart or the network is relatively meshed, it can be
difficult to obtain phase preference. The PPL2PHIZ function will still enable tripping, although
it might be unselectively.

If fault current levels are low, it might also be a good idea to consider earth fault protection as
a backup.

Figure 245 shows a typical cross-country fault situation. Figure 246 shows phase voltage
relations before and during a single phase-to-earth fault.

Load

L3N

Load
L1N

en06000550.vsd
IEC06000550 V1 EN-US

Figure 245: A typical cross-country fault situation

382 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

UL1

UL
F
3
UL

2F
3 UL
UL 2
3U0

F
3
UL

en06000551.vsd
IEC06000551 V1 EN-US

Figure 246: Voltage distribution before and during a single phase-to-earth fault
During a cross-country fault, the fault current path for the fault that is not on the protected
feeder will not go through the relay. (For a more meshed network though, there will be some
current.) See Figure 247. Only in the one phase with the fault on the protected feeder, a
significant fault current may be measured by the relay. The result is a residual current of the
same magnitude. This residual current may be used as an indication of a cross-country fault.

IL3=IN

IL1=IN

en06000553.vsd
IEC06000553 V1 EN-US

Figure 247: The currents in the phases at a double earth fault

However, it should be considered that a quite substantial residual current can also appear
temporarily at the onset of a single phase fault. This is why detection of cross-country faults,
using residual current, is typically time delayed. The time delay should then be long enough to
cover the duration of the transient residual current.

Line distance protection REL670 383

Application manual
Section 8 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Impedance protection

Even though there is no considerable current in the phase where the external fault is, the
voltage magnitude in this phase will decrease more or less. This voltage drop will be the only
lasting sign of a fault in this phase, as seen from the relay. The phase with the fault on the
protected feeder will of course also experience a voltage drop. The healthy phase voltage will
stay around its rated value.

Using the voltage drops, it is possible to detect the two faulty phases of the cross-country
fault.

Another advantage with using voltage, and voltage only, is that it will be the same for all the
feeders on a bus and similar for other buses. This will give the relays a better opportunity to
detect the same two faulty phases. This is important since phase preference can only be
obtained when all relays detect the two correct phases.

The PPL2PHIZ function is using the voltage criteria described above. Once the faulty phases
are detected, together with residual current, preference may be obtained and transferred to
the distance protection by activating one of three enabling signals, one for each phase.
Technically, the three signals are first coded into a word together with three signals
representing the phase-to-phase measuring loops (the ZREL output). This is to simplify the
connection between PPL2PHIZ and the distance protection.

The phase-to-phase measuring loops have actually nothing to do with phase preference and
are always enabled.

The ZREL output of the PPL2PHIZ function should be connected to the RELCNDZx inputs of the
High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS. Figure 248 shows how the information from
PPL2PHIZ is affecting the interior of the distance protection. As can be seen from the figure,
the enabling signals for the six measuring loops are in AND condition with the corresponding
signals of the phase selection, loop by loop. In other words, the phase selection inside the
distance protection has to detect the fault as well before a trip from the distance zones can be
achieved.

PPL2PHIZ ZMFPDIS
Phase
Phase selection
preference
Zone1
L1N relcndphs TRZ1
L1N bitwise enable
L2N AND
L2N
L3N Zone2
L3N Bool to ZREL bitwise
TRUE L1L2 Integer AND
enable
RELCNDZ1
TRUE L2L3
Zone3
TRUE L3L1 RELCNDZ2 bitwise
enable
AND
RELCNDZ3
Zone4
RELCNDZ4 bitwise
enable
TRZ4
AND
RELCNDZ5 Zone5
bitwise
enable
TRZ5
RELCNDZRV AND
ZoneRV
bitwise
enable
TRZRV
AND

IEC16000017-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000017 V1 EN-US

Figure 248: The connection of Phase preference logic function

8.20.3 Setting guidelines GUID-01929A71-DFDA-4321-88C4-B3CDD7581F8C v1

The parameters for the Phase preference logic function PPL2PHIZ are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

384 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 8
Impedance protection

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

OperMode: The operating mode is selected. Choices includes cyclic or acyclic phase selection
in the preferred mode. This setting must be identical for all IEDs in the same galvanic
connected network part.

UPN<: The setting of the phase-to- earth voltage level (phase voltage) which is used by the
evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in the phase. Normally in a high impedance earthed
system, the voltage drop is big and the setting can typically be set to 70%, which is 70% of
UBase divided by √3.

UPP<: The setting of the phase-to-phase voltage level (line voltage) which is used by the
evaluation logic to verify that a fault exists in two or more phases. The voltage must be set to
avoid that a partly healthy phase-to-phase voltage, for example, L2-L3 for a L1-L2 fault, picks-
up and gives an incorrect release of all loops. The setting value should therefore not, without
special reasons, be set higher than 50% (of UBase), which corresponds to 85% of the minimum
voltage for the partly healthy loops (i.e. 85% of UBase divided by √3).

3U0>: The setting of the residual voltage level (neutral voltage) which is used by the evaluation
logic to verify that an earth-fault exists. The setting can typically be 20% of base voltage
(UBase).

IN>: The setting of the residual current level (neutral current) which is used by the evaluation
logic to verify that a cross-country fault exists. The setting can typically be 20% of base
current (IBase) but the setting shall be above the maximum current generated during a single
earth-fault. A high sensitivity is not crucial as the two-phase fault level normally is well above
base current.

tIN: The time delay for detecting that the fault is cross-country. It should be set longer than
the expected duration of a transient residual current appearing for a single earth-fault. Normal
time setting is 0.1 - 0.15 s.

tUN: The time delay for a secure UN detecting that the fault is an earth-fault or double earth-
fault with residual voltage. Normal time setting is 0.1 - 0.15 s. It should not be set shorter than
tIN because that might bypass tIN prematurely.

tOffUN: The UN voltage has a reset drop-off to ensure correct function without timing
problems. Normal time setting is 0.1 s.

In the High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, setting INReleasePE needs to be set lower
than the expected residual current during a cross-country fault. Otherwise the distance
protection might operate in the phase-to-phase loops which will bypass the Phase preference
logic.

Line distance protection REL670 385

Application manual
386
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Section 9 Current protection

9.1 Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC IP14506-1 v6

9.1.1 Identification
M14880-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous phase overcurrent PHPIOC 50
protection
3I>>

SYMBOL-Z V1 EN-US

9.1.2 Application M12911-3 v6

Long transmission lines often transfer great quantities of electric power from generation to
consumption areas. The unbalance of the produced and consumed electric power at each end
of the transmission line is very large. This means that a fault on the line can easily endanger
the stability of a complete system.

The transient stability of a power system depends mostly on three parameters (at constant
amount of transmitted electric power):

• The type of the fault. Three-phase faults are the most dangerous, because no power can
be transmitted through the fault point during fault conditions.
• The magnitude of the fault current. A high fault current indicates that the decrease of
transmitted power is high.
• The total fault clearing time. The phase angles between the EMFs of the generators on
both sides of the transmission line increase over the permitted stability limits if the total
fault clearing time, which consists of the protection operating time and the breaker
opening time, is too long.

The fault current on long transmission lines depends mostly on the fault position and
decreases with the distance from the generation point. For this reason the protection must
operate very quickly for faults very close to the generation (and relay) point, for which very
high fault currents are characteristic.

The instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC can operate in 10 ms for faults
characterized by very high currents.

9.1.3 Setting guidelines IP14979-1 v1

M12915-4 v9
The parameters for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC are set via the local
HMI or PCM600.

This protection function must operate only in a selective way. So check all system and
transient conditions that could cause its unwanted operation.

Line distance protection REL670 387

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Only detailed network studies can determine the operating conditions under which the
highest possible fault current is expected on the line. In most cases, this current appears
during three-phase fault conditions. But also examine single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-
to-earth conditions.

Also study transients that could cause a high increase of the line current for short times. A
typical example is a transmission line with a power transformer at the remote end, which can
cause high inrush current when connected to the network and can thus also cause the
operation of the built-in, instantaneous, overcurrent protection.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: Set the protection to On/Off.

OpMode: This parameter can be set to 2 out of 3 or 1 out of 3. The setting controls the
minimum number of phase currents that must be larger than the set operate current IP>> for
operation. Normally this parameter is set to 1 out of 3and will thus detect all fault types. If the
protection is to be used mainly for multi phase faults, 2 out of 3 should be chosen.

IP>>: Set operate current in % of IB.

IP>>Max and IP>>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current level, IP>>,
is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the IP>> setting. If IP>> is set
outside IP>>Max and IP>>Min, the closest of the limits to IP>> is used by the function. If
IP>>Max is smaller than IP>>Min, the limits are swapped.

StValMult: The set operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input ENMULT to
the set factor StValMult.

9.1.3.1 Meshed network without parallel line M12915-9 v8

The following fault calculations have to be done for three-phase, single-phase-to-earth and
two-phase-to-earth faults. With reference to Figure 249, apply a fault in B and then calculate
the current through-fault phase current IfB. The calculation should be done using the minimum
source impedance values for ZA and the maximum source impedance values for ZB in order to
get the maximum through fault current from A to B.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault

IEC09000022-1-en.vsd
IEC09000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 249: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

Then a fault in A has to be applied and the through fault current IfA has to be calculated,
Figure 250. In order to get the maximum through fault current, the minimum value for ZB and
the maximum value for ZA have to be considered.

388 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
IEC09000023-1-en.vsd
IEC09000023 V1 EN-US

Figure 250: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The IED must not trip for any of the two through-fault currents. Hence the minimum
theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfB )

EQUATION78 V1 EN-US (Equation 443)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum protection static inaccuracy and a safety margin of
5% for the maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is
suggested due to the inaccuracy of the instrument transformers under transient conditions
and inaccuracy in the system data.

The minimum primary setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase overcurrent protection is then:

I s ³ 1.3 × I min
EQUATION79 V3 EN-US (Equation 444)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is
equal to or less than the maximum fault current that the IED has to clear, IF in Figure 251.

IF
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
IEC09000024-1-en.vsd
IEC09000024 V1 EN-US

Figure 251: Fault current: IF

Is
IP >>= × 100
IBase
EQUATION1147 V3 EN-US (Equation 445)

Line distance protection REL670 389

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.1.3.2 Meshed network with parallel line M12915-34 v7

In case of parallel lines, the influence of the induced current from the parallel line to the
protected line has to be considered. One example is given in Figure 252, where the two lines
are connected to the same busbars. In this case the influence of the induced fault current from
the faulty line (line 1) to the healthy line (line 2) is considered together with the two through
fault currents IfA and IfB mentioned previously. The maximal influence from the parallel line for
the IED in Figure 252 will be with a fault at the C point with the C breaker open.

A fault in C has to be applied, and then the maximum current seen from the IED (IM ) on the
healthy line (this applies for single-phase-to-earth and two-phase-to-earth faults) is
calculated.

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

IM

IED Line 2
IEC09000025-1-en.vsd
IEC09000025 V1 EN-US

Figure 252: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM

The minimum theoretical current setting for the overcurrent protection function (Imin) will be:

Imin ³ MAX(I fA, IfB , IM )

EQUATION82 V1 EN-US (Equation 446)

Where IfA and IfB have been described in the previous paragraph. Considering the safety
margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) for the instantaneous phase
overcurrent protection 3-phase output is then:

Is ³1.3·Imin
EQUATION83 V2 EN-US (Equation 447)

The protection function can be used for the specific application only if this setting value is
equal or less than the maximum phase fault current that the IED has to clear.

The IED setting value IP>> is given in percentage of the primary base current value, IBase. The
value for IP>> is given from this formula:

Is
IP >>= × 100
IBase
EQUATION1147 V3 EN-US (Equation 448)

390 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

9.2 Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps

OC4PTOC SEMOD129998-1 v8

9.2.1 Identification
M14885-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional phase overcurrent OC4PTOC 51_67
protection, four steps

TOC-REVA V2 EN-US

9.2.2 Application M15335-3 v9

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC is used in several applications
in the power system. Some applications are:

• Short circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally

these feeders have a radial structure.
• Back-up short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power transformers.
• Short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system
such as; shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors, motors and others.
• Back-up short circuit protection of power generators.

In many applications several steps with different current pickup levels and time delays are
needed. OC4PTOC can have up to four different, individually settable steps. The following
options are possible:

Non-directional / Directional function: In most applications the non-directional functionality is

used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself.
In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be
necessary.

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, the setting parameter DirModex
(x = step 1, 2, 3 or 4) shall be left to the default value Non-directional.

Choice of time delay characteristics: There are several types of time delay characteristics
available such as definite time delay and different types of inverse time delay characteristics.
The selectivity between different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination
between the function time delays of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination
between all overcurrent protections, they should have the same time delay characteristic.
Therefore, a wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available for IEC and
ANSI. It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally, it is required that the phase overcurrent protection shall reset as fast as possible
when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed
reset is required. Therefore, different kinds of reset characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications, there can be a need to change the current pick-up level for
some time. A typical case is when the protection will measure the current to a large motor. At

Line distance protection REL670 391

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

the start up sequence of a motor the start current can be significantly larger than the rated
current of the motor. Therefore, there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor
to the current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a binary input signal to
the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This phenomenon
is due to saturation of the transformer magnetic core during parts of the period. There is a
risk that inrush current will reach levels above the pick-up current of the phase overcurrent
protection. The inrush current has a large 2nd harmonic content. This can be used to avoid
unwanted operation of the protection function. Therefore, OC4PTOC has a possibility of 2nd
harmonic restrain if the level of 2nd harmonic current reaches a value above a set percent of the
fundamental current.

The phase overcurrent protection is often used as a protection for two and three phase short
circuits. In some cases, it is not wanted to detect single-phase earth faults by the phase
overcurrent protection. This fault type is detected and cleared after operation of earth fault
protection. Therefore, it is possible to make a choice how many phases, at minimum, that have
to have current above the pick-up level, to enable operation. If set 1 of 3 it is sufficient to have
high current in one phase only. If set 2 of 3 or 3 of 3 single-phase earth faults are not detected.

9.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14982-1 v1

M12982-4 v14

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

The parameters for the directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC are set
via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for OC4PTOC.

Common base IED values for the primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

MeasType: Selection of discrete Fourier filtered (DFT) or true RMS filtered (RMS) signals. RMS
is used when the harmonic contents are to be considered, for example in applications with
shunt capacitors.

Operation: The protection can be set to On or Off.

AngleRCA: Protection characteristic angle set in degrees. If the angle of the fault loop current
has the angle RCA, the direction to the fault is forward.

AngleROA: Angle value, given in degrees, to define the angle sector of the directional function,
shown in Figure 253.

StartPhSel: Number of phases, with high current, required for operation. The setting
possibilities are: 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 and 3 out of 3. The default setting is 1 out of 3.

IMinOpPhSel: Minimum current setting level for releasing the directional start signals in % of
IB. This setting should be less than the lowest step setting. The default setting is 7% of IB.

2ndHarmStab: Operate level of 2nd harmonic current restrain set in % of the fundamental
current. The setting range is 5 - 100% in steps of 1%. The default setting is 20%.

392 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Uref

2
4

Idir
IEC09000636_2_vsd
IEC09000636 V2 EN-US

Figure 253: Directional function characteristic

1. RCA = Relay characteristic angle
2. ROA = Relay operating angle
3. Reverse
4. Forward

9.2.3.1 Settings for each step M12982-19 v10

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModex: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Off/Non-directional/Forward/

Reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different
types of inverse time characteristics are available according to Table 33.

Table 33: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 393

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Curve name
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG or RD (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in Technical manual.

Ix>: Operate phase current level for step x given in % of IB.

Ix>Max and Ix>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current level, Ix>, is
used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the Ix> setting. If Ix> is set outside
Ix>Max and Ix>Min, the closest of the limits to Ix> is used by the function. If Ix>Max is smaller
than Ix>Min, the limits are swapped.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when inverse
time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between activation of the
start and the trip outputs.

kx: Time multiplier for inverse time delay for step x.

IMinx: Minimum operate current in % of IB for all inverse time characteristics, below which no
operation takes place.

IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Ix> for every step to
achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above Ix> for any step
the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx.

txMin: Minimum operate time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse
time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the
operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting. Setting range: 0.000 -
60.000s in steps of 0.001s.

IxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal ENMULTx
(enableMultiplier) is activated the current operation level is increased by this setting constant.
Setting range: 1.0-10.0

394 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Operate time

tx

txMin

IMinx Current

IEC10000058
IEC10000058 V2 EN-US

Figure 254: Minimum operate current and operate time for inverse time characteristics
In order to fully comply with the definition of the curve, the setting parameter txMin shall be
set to a value equal to the operating time of the selected inverse curve for twenty times the set
current pickup value. Note that the operate time is dependent on the selected time multiplier
setting kx.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made as shown in Table 34.

Table 34: Reset possibilities

Curve name Curve index no.
Instantaneous 1
IEC Reset (constant time) 2
ANSI Reset (inverse time) 3

The delay characteristics are described in Technical manual. There are some restrictions
regarding the choice of the reset delay.

For the definite time delay characteristics, the possible delay time setting instantaneous (1)
and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time characteristics, all three types of reset time characteristics are available:
instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset
time).

For IEC inverse time characteristics, the possible delay time settings are instantaneous (1) and
IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor-made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17), all three types of
reset time characteristics are available: instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and
ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current-dependent type is used, settings pr, tr
and cr must be given.

tResetx: Constant reset time delay in seconds for step x.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: These parameters are used by the customer to create the
inverse time characteristic curve. See equation 449 for the time characteristic equation. For
more information, refer to Technical manual.

Line distance protection REL670 395

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

æ ö
ç A ÷
t [s] = ç + B ÷ × IxMult
çæ ö ÷
p
i
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1261 V2 EN-US (Equation 449)

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: These parameters are used by the customer to create the inverse
reset time characteristic curve. For more information, refer to Technical manual.

HarmRestrainx: Enables the block of step x from the harmonic restrain function (2nd
harmonic). This function should be used when there is a risk of an unwanted trip caused by
power transformer inrush currents. It can be set to Off/On.

9.2.3.2 Setting example GUID-20729467-24AB-42F0-9FD1-D2959028732E v1

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps can be used in different ways, depending
on the application where the protection is used. A general description is given below.

The operating current setting of the inverse time protection, or the lowest current step of the
definite time protection, must be defined so that the highest possible load current does not
cause protection operation. The protection reset current must also be considered so that a
short peak of overcurrent does not cause the operation of a protection even when the
overcurrent has ceased. This phenomenon is described in Figure 255.

Current (A)

Line phase current

Operate current

Reset current

The IED does not reset

Time (s)

IEC05000203-en-2.vsd
IEC05000203 V4 EN-US

Figure 255: Operate and reset current for an overcurrent protection

The lowest setting value can be written according to Equation 450.

396 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Im ax
Ipu ³ 1.2 ×
k
EQUATION1262 V2 EN-US (Equation 450)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
k is the reset ratio of the protection
Imax is the maximum load current

The load current up to the present situation can be found from operation statistics. The
current setting must remain valid for several years. In most cases, the setting values are
updated once every five years or less often. Investigate the maximum load current that the
equipment on the line can withstand. Study components, such as line conductors, current
transformers, circuit breakers, and disconnectors. The manufacturer of the equipment
normally gives the maximum thermal load current of the equipment.

The maximum load current on the line has to be estimated. There is also a demand that all
faults within the zone that the protection shall cover must be detected by the phase
overcurrent protection. The minimum fault current Iscmin to be detected by the protection
must be calculated. Taking this value as a base, the highest pickup current setting can be
written according to Equation 451.

Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min

EQUATION1263 V2 EN-US (Equation 451)

where:
0.7 is a safety factor
Iscmin is the smallest fault current to be detected by the overcurrent protection.

As a summary, the operating current shall be chosen within the interval stated in Equation 452.

Im ax
1.2 × £ Ipu £ 0.7 × Isc min
k
EQUATION1264 V2 EN-US (Equation 452)

The high current function of the overcurrent protection, which only has a short-delay trip time,
must be given a current setting so that the protection is selective to other protection
functions in the power system. It is desirable to have rapid tripping of faults within a large part
of the power system to be protected by the protection (primary protected zone). A fault
current calculation gives the largest current of faults, Iscmax, at the most remote part of the
primary protected zone. The risk of transient overreach must be considered, due to a possible
DC component of the short circuit current. The lowest current setting of the fastest stage can
be written according to

Line distance protection REL670 397

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

I high ³ 1.2 × kt × I sc max

EQUATION1265 V1 EN-US (Equation 453)

where:
1.2 is a safety factor
kt is a factor that takes care of the transient overreach due to the DC component of the fault current
and can be considered to be less than 1.05
Iscmax is the largest fault current at a fault at the most remote point of the primary protection zone.

The operate time of the phase overcurrent protection has to be chosen so that the fault time
is short enough that the protected equipment will not be destroyed due to thermal overload
while, at the same time, selectivity is assured. For overcurrent protection in a radial fed
network, the time setting can be chosen in a graphical way. This is mostly used in the case of
inverse time overcurrent protection. Figure 256 shows how the time-versus-current curves are
plotted in a diagram. The time setting is chosen to get the shortest fault time with maintained
selectivity. Selectivity is assured if the time difference between the curves is larger than a
critical time difference.

Time-current curves
10

tfunc1n
Trip time

tfunc2n

0.01
10 Strn 10000
Fault Current
en05000204.ai
IEC05000204 V2 EN-US

Figure 256: Fault time with maintained selectivity

The operation time can be set individually for each overcurrent protection.

To assure selectivity between different protection functions in the radial network, there has to
be a minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. To determine
the shortest possible time difference, the operation time of the protection, the breaker
opening time and the protection resetting time must be known. These time delays can vary

398 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

significantly between different protective equipment. The following time delays can be
estimated:

Protection operation 15-60 ms

time:
Protection resetting 15-60 ms
time:
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

Example for time coordination

Assume two substations A and B directly connected to each other via one line, as shown in the
Figure 257. Consider a fault located at another line from the station B. The fault current to the
overcurrent protection of IED B1 has a magnitude so that the overcurrent protection will start
and subsequently trip, and the overcurrent protection of IED A1 must have a delayed operation
in order to avoid maloperation. The sequence of events during the fault can be described using
a time axis shown in Figure 257.

A1 B1
Feeder

Fault
I> I>

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3 t=t4

The fault B1 and A1 B1 trips and Breaker at Protection
occurs start A1 starts B1 opens A1 resets
=IEC05000205=2=en=Original.vsd
IEC05000205 V2 EN-US

Figure 257: Sequence of events during fault

where:
t=0 is when the fault occurs
t=t1 is when protection IED B1 and protection IED A1 start

t=t2 is when the trip signal from the overcurrent protection at IED B1 is sent to the circuit breaker.

t=t3 is when the circuit breaker at IED B1 opens. The circuit breaker opening time is t3 - t2

t=t4 is when the overcurrent protection at IED A1 resets. The protection resetting time is t4 - t3.

To ensure that the overcurrent protection at IED A1 is selective to the overcurrent protection
at IED B1, the minimum time difference must be larger than the time t3. There are uncertainties
in the values of protection operation time, breaker opening time and protection resetting
time. Therefore a safety margin has to be included. With normal values the needed time
difference can be calculated according to Equation 454.

Line distance protection REL670 399

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Dt ³ 40 ms + 100 ms + 40 ms + 40 ms = 220 ms
EQUATION1266 V1 EN-US (Equation 454)

where it is considered that:

the operate time of overcurrent protection B1 is 40 ms
the breaker open time is 100 ms
the resetting time of protection A1 is 40 ms and
the additional margin is 40 ms

9.3 Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC IP14508-1 v3

9.3.1 Identification
M14887-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC 50N
protection
IN>>

IEF V1 EN-US

9.3.2 Application M12699-3 v5

In many applications, when fault current is limited to a defined value by the object impedance,
an instantaneous earth-fault protection can provide fast and selective tripping.

The Instantaneous residual overcurrent EFPIOC, which can operate in 15 ms (50 Hz nominal
system frequency) for faults characterized by very high currents, is included in the IED.

9.3.3 Setting guidelines IP14985-1 v1

M12762-44
M12762-4 v4
v2
The parameters for the Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC are set via the
local HMI or PCM600.

Some guidelines for the choice of setting parameter for EFPIOC is given.
M12762-6 v8
Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in the global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: This is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

The basic requirement is to assure selectivity, that is EFPIOC shall not be allowed to operate
for faults at other objects than the protected object (line).

For a normal line in a meshed system single phase-to-earth faults and phase-to-phase-to-earth
faults shall be calculated as shown in Figure 258 and Figure 259. The residual currents (3I0) to
the protection are calculated. For a fault at the remote line end this fault current is IfB. In this
calculation the operational state with high source impedance ZA and low source impedance ZB
should be used. For the fault at the home busbar this fault current is IfA. In this calculation the

400 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

operational state with low source impedance ZA and high source impedance ZB should be
used.

I fB
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault

IEC09000022-1-en.vsd
IEC09000022 V1 EN-US

Figure 258: Through fault current from A to B: IfB

I fA
A B
ZA ZL ZB
~ ~
IED

Fault
IEC09000023-1-en.vsd
IEC09000023 V1 EN-US

Figure 259: Through fault current from B to A: IfA

The function shall not operate for any of the calculated currents to the protection. The
minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will be:

Im in  MAX  I fA , I fB 
EQUATION284 V2 EN-US (Equation 455)

A safety margin of 5% for the maximum static inaccuracy and a safety margin of 5% for
maximum possible transient overreach have to be introduced. An additional 20% is suggested
due to inaccuracy of instrument transformers under transient conditions and inaccuracy in the
system data.

The minimum primary current setting (Is) is:

Is = 1.3 × Imin
EQUATION285 V3 EN-US (Equation 456)

In case of parallel lines with zero sequence mutual coupling a fault on the parallel line, as
shown in Figure 260, should be calculated.

Line distance protection REL670 401

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Line 1
A C B
ZL1

ZA ZB
~ Fault M ~
ZL2

IM

IED Line 2
IEC09000025-1-en.vsd
IEC09000025 V1 EN-US

Figure 260: Two parallel lines. Influence from parallel line to the through fault current: IM
The minimum theoretical current setting (Imin) will in this case be:

I m in ³ M A X ( IfA, I fB, I M )
EQUATION287 V1 EN-US (Equation 457)

Where:
IfA and IfB have been described for the single line case.

Considering the safety margins mentioned previously, the minimum setting (Is) is:

Is = 1.3 × Imin
EQUATION288 V3 EN-US (Equation 458)

The IED setting value IN>> is given in percent of the primary base current value, IBase. The
value for IN>> is given by the formula:

IN  ( I s IBase)  100

IECEQUATION17003 V1 EN-US (Equation 459)

Transformer inrush current shall be considered.

The setting of the protection is set as a percentage of the base current (IBase).

Operation: set the protection to On or Off.

IN>>: Set operate current in % of IB.

IN>>Max and IN>>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current level,
IN>>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the IN>> setting. If IN>> is
set outside IN>>Max and IN>>Min, the closest of the limits to IN>> is used by the function. If
IN>>Max is smaller than IN>>Min, the limits are swapped.

StValMult: The set operate current can be changed by activation of the binary input ENMULT to
the set factor StValMult.

402 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

9.4 Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps

EF4PTOC IP14509-1 v8

9.4.1 Identification
M14881-1 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional residual overcurrent EF4PTOC 51N_67N
4(IN>)
protection, four steps
4
alt
4
TEF-REVA V2 EN-US

9.4.2 Application M12509-12 v10

The directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC is used in several
applications in the power system. Some applications are:

• Earth-fault protection of feeders in effectively earthed distribution and subtransmission

systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure.
• Back-up earth-fault protection of transmission lines.
• Sensitive earth-fault protection of transmission lines. EF4PTOC can have better sensitivity
to detect resistive phase-to-earth-faults compared to distance protection.
• Back-up earth-fault protection of power transformers.
• Earth-fault protection of different kinds of equipment connected to the power system
such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.

In many applications, several steps with different current operating levels and time delays are
needed. EF4PTOC can have up to four, individual settable steps. The flexibility of each step of
EF4PTOC is great. The following options are possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional functionality is

used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself.
In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be
necessary. This can be the case for earth-fault protection in meshed and effectively earthed
transmission systems. The directional residual overcurrent protection is also well suited to
operate in teleprotection communication schemes, which enables fast clearance of earth
faults on transmission lines. The directional function uses the polarizing quantity as decided
by setting. Voltage polarizing is the most commonly used, but alternatively current polarizing
where currents in transformer neutrals providing the neutral source (ZN) is used to polarize (IN
· ZN) the function. Dual polarizing, where the sum of both voltage and current components is
allowed to polarize can also be selected.

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available such as
definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The selectivity between
different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the operate
time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent protections,
to be co-ordinated against each other, should have the same time characteristic. Therefore a
wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available for IEC and ANSI.

Line distance protection REL670 403

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Table 35: Time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG or RD (logarithmic)

It is also possible to tailor make the inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that EF4PTOC shall reset as fast as possible when the current level gets
lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of delayed reset is required. Therefore
different kinds of reset characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications, there can be a need to change the current operating level
for some time. Therefore, there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor
INxMult to the residual current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a
binary input signal ENMULTx to the function.

Power transformers can have a large inrush current, when being energized. This inrush current
can produce residual current component. The phenomenon is due to saturation of the
transformer magnetic core during parts of the cycle. There is a risk that inrush current will give
a residual current that reaches level above the operating current of the residual overcurrent
protection. The inrush current has a large second harmonic content. This can be used to avoid
unwanted operation of the protection. Therefore, EF4PTOC has a possibility of second
harmonic restrain if the level of 2nd harmonic current reaches a value above a set percent of the
fundamental current.

9.4.3 Setting guidelines IP14988-1 v1

M15282-3 v12

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

404 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

The parameters for the four step residual overcurrent protection are set via the local HMI or
PCM600. The following settings can be done for the function.

Common base IED values for the primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

SeqTypeUPol: This is used to select the type of voltage polarising quantity i.e. Zero seq or Neg
seq for direction detection.

SeqTypeIPol: This is used to select the type of current polarising quantity i.e. Zero seq or Neg
seq for direction detection.

SeqTypeIDir: This is used to select the type of operating current quantity i.e. Zero seq or Neg
seq for direction detection.

9.4.3.1 Common settings for all steps M15282-81 v10

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degree. This angle is defined as shown in
Figure 261. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference voltage
(Upol = 3U0 or U2)

RCA Upol = -3U0 or -3U2

Operation
IN>Dir

IEC05000135-5-en.vsdx
IEC05000135 V5 EN-US

Figure 261: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a normal transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 65°. The setting range is -180°
to +180°.

polMethod: Defines if the directional polarization is from

• Voltage (3U0 or U2)
• Current (3I0 · ZNpol or 3I2 ·ZNpol where ZNpol is RNpol + jXNpol), or
• both currents and voltage, Dual (dual polarizing, (3U0 + 3I0 · ZNpol) or (U2 + I2 · ZNpol)).

Normally voltage polarizing from the internally calculated residual sum or an external open
delta is used.

Line distance protection REL670 405

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Current polarizing is useful when the local source is strong and a high sensitivity is required. In
such cases the polarizing voltage (3U0) can be below 1% and it is then necessary to use current
polarizing or dual polarizing. Multiply the required set current (primary) with the minimum
impedance (ZNpol) and check that the percentage of the phase-to-earth voltage is definitely
higher than 1% (minimum 3U0>UPolMin setting) as a verification.

RNPol, XNPol: The zero-sequence source is set in primary ohms as base for the current
polarizing. The polarizing voltage is then achieved as 3I0 · ZNpol. The ZNpol can be defined as
(ZS1-ZS0)/3, that is the earth return impedance of the source behind the protection. The
maximum earth-fault current at the local source can be used to calculate the value of ZN as
U/(√3 · 3I0) Typically, the minimum ZNPol (3 · zero sequence source) is set. The setting is in
primary ohms.

When the dual polarizing method is used, it is important that the setting INx> or the product
3I0 · ZNpol is not greater than 3U0. If so, there is a risk for incorrect operation for faults in the
reverse direction.

IPolMin: is the minimum earth-fault current accepted for directional evaluation. For smaller
currents than this value, the operation will be blocked. A typical setting is 5-10% of IB.

UPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) polarizing voltage for the directional function,
given in % of UBase/√3.

IN>Dir: Operate residual current release level in % of IB for directional comparison scheme. The
setting is given in % of IB and must be set below the lowest INx> setting, set for the
directional measurement. The output signals, STFW and STRV can be used in a teleprotection
scheme. The appropriate signal should be configured to the communication scheme block.

9.4.3.2 2nd harmonic restrain M15282-90 v6

If a power transformer is energized there is a risk that the current transformer core will
saturate during part of the period, resulting in a transformer inrush current. This will give a
declining residual current in the network, as the inrush current is deviating between the
phases. There is a risk that the residual overcurrent function will give an unwanted trip. The
inrush current has a relatively large ratio of 2nd harmonic component. This component can be
used to create a restrain signal to prevent this unwanted function.

At current transformer saturation a false residual current can be measured by the protection.
Here the 2nd harmonic restrain can prevent unwanted operation as well.

2ndHarmStab: The rate of 2nd harmonic current content for activation of the 2nd harmonic
restrain signal. The setting is given in % of the fundamental frequency residual current.

9.4.3.3 Parallel transformer inrush current logic M15282-97 v6

In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current. If one of the
transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in, the asymmetric
inrush current of the switched-in transformer will cause partial saturation of the transformer
already in service. This is called transferred saturation. The 2nd harmonic of the inrush currents
of the two transformers will be in phase opposition. The summation of the two currents will
thus give a small 2nd harmonic current. The residual fundamental current will however be
significant. The inrush current of the transformer in service before the parallel transformer
energizing, will be a little delayed compared to the first transformer. Therefore, we will have
high 2nd harmonic current initially. After a short period this current will however be small and
the normal 2nd harmonic blocking will reset.

406 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

IN> IN>
Power System

en05000136.vsd
IEC05000136 V1 EN-US

Figure 262: Application for parallel transformer inrush current logic

If the BlkParTransf function is activated, the 2nd harmonic restrain signal will latch as long as
the residual current measured by the relay is larger than a selected step current level. Assume
that step 4 is chosen to be the most sensitive step of the four step residual overcurrent
protection function EF4PTOC. The harmonic restrain blocking is enabled for this step. Also the
same current setting as this step is chosen for the blocking at parallel transformer energizing.

The settings for the parallel transformer logic are described below.

BlkParTransf: This is used to On blocking at energising of parallel transformers.

UseStartValue: Gives which current level should be used for the activation of the blocking
signal. This is given as one of the settings of the steps: Step 1/2/3/4. Normally, the step
having the lowest operation current level should be set.

9.4.3.4 Switch onto fault logic M15282-106 v4

In case of energizing a faulty object there is a risk of having a long fault clearance time, if the
fault current is too small to give fast operation of the protection. The switch on to fault
function can be activated from auxiliary signals from the circuit breaker, either the close
command or the open/close position (change of position).

This logic can be used to issue a fast trip if one breaker pole does not close properly at a
manual or automatic closing.

SOTF and under time are similar functions to achieve fast clearance at asymmetrical closing
based on requirements from different utilities.

The function is divided into two parts. The SOTF function will give operation from step 2 or 3
during a set time after change in the position of the circuit breaker. The SOTF function has a
set time delay. The under time function, which has 2nd harmonic restrain blocking, will give
operation from step 4. The 2nd harmonic restrain will prevent unwanted function in case of
transformer inrush current. The under time function has a set time delay.

Below the settings for switch on to fault logics are described.

SOTF: This parameter can be set: Off/SOTF/Under Time/SOTF+Under Time.

ActivationSOTF: This setting will select the signal to activate SOTF function; CB position
open/CB position closed/CB close command.

StepForSOTF: If this parameter is set on step 3, the step 3 start signal will be used as current
set level. If set on step 2, the step 2 start signal will be used as current set level.

HarmBlkSOTF: This is used to On/Off harmonic restrain during SOTF conditions.

Line distance protection REL670 407

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

tSOTF: Time delay for operation of the SOTF function. The setting range is 0.000 - 60.000 s in
step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.100 s

t4U: Time interval when the SOTF function is active after breaker closing. The setting range is
0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 1.000 s.

ActUnderTime: Describes the mode to activate the sensitive undertime function. The function
can be activated by Circuit breaker position (change) or Circuit breaker command.

tUnderTime: Time delay for operation of the sensitive undertime function. The setting range is
0.000 - 60.000 s in step of 0.001 s. The default setting is 0.300 s

9.4.3.5 Settings for each step (x = 1, 2, 3 and 4) M15282-9 v12

Operation: Sets the protection to On or Off.

DirModex: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are Off/Non-directional/Forward/

Reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different
types of inverse time characteristics are available.

Inverse time characteristic enables fast fault clearance of high current faults at the same time
as selectivity to other inverse time phase overcurrent protections can be assured. This is
mainly used in radial fed networks but can also be used in meshed networks. In meshed
networks, the settings must be based on network fault calculations.

To assure selectivity between different protections, in the radial network, there has to be a
minimum time difference Dt between the time delays of two protections. To determine the
shortest possible time difference, the operation time of protections, breaker opening time
and protection resetting time must be known. These time delays can vary significantly
between different protective equipment. The following time delays can be estimated:

Protection operate time: 15-60 ms

Protection resetting time: 15-60 ms
Breaker opening time: 20-120 ms

The different characteristics are described in the technical reference manual.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when inverse
time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between activation of the
start and the trip outputs.

INx>: Operate residual current level for step x given in % of IB.

INx>Max and INx>Min should only be changed if remote setting of operation current level,
INx>, is used. The limits are used for decreasing the used range of the INx> setting. If INx> is
set outside INx>Max and INx>Min, the closest of the limits to INx> is used by the function. If
INx>Max is smaller than INx>Min, the limits are swapped.

kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic for step x.

IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IB. Set IMinx below INx> for every step to
achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above INx> for any step,
signal will reset at current equals to zero.

408 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

txMin: Minimum operating time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents, the inverse
time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter, the
operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Operate time

tx

txMin

IMinx Current

IEC10000058
IEC10000058 V2 EN-US

Figure 263: Minimum operate current and operate time for inverse time characteristics
In order to fully comply with the curves definition, the setting parameter txMin shall be set to
the value which is equal to the operate time of the selected IEC inverse curve for measured
current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the operate time value is
dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier kx.

INxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal (ENMULTx) is
activated, the current operation level is increased by this setting constant.

ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. The possibilities
are described in the technical reference manual.

tResetx: Constant reset time delay in s for step x.

HarmBlockx: This is used to enable block of step x from 2nd harmonic restrain function.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse time
characteristic curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 460:

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1189 V1 EN-US (Equation 460)

Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for user programmable of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the technical reference manual.

9.4.3.6 Line application example M15282-184 v8

Line distance protection REL670 409

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Four step residual overcurrent protection can be used in different ways. Below is described
one application possibility to be used in meshed and effectively earthed systems.

The protection measures the residual current out on the protected line. The protection
function has a directional function where the polarizing voltage (zero-sequence voltage) is the
polarizing quantity.

The polarizing voltage and current can be internally generated when a three-phase set of
voltage transformers and current transformers are used.

IN>

IEC05000149-2-en.vsdx
IEC05000149 V2 EN-US

Figure 264: Connection of polarizing voltage from an open delta

The different steps can be described as follows.

Step 1 M15282-123 v6
This step has directional instantaneous function. The requirement is that overreaching of the
protected line is not allowed.

410 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

3I0

IN

One- or two-phase earth-fault

or unsymmetric short circuit
without earth connection
IEC05000150-3-en.vsd
IEC05000150 V4 EN-US

Figure 265: Step 1, first calculation

The residual current out on the line is calculated at a fault on the remote busbar (one- or two-
phase-to-earth fault). To assure selectivity it is required that step 1 shall not give a trip at this
fault. The requirement can be formulated according to Equation 461.

Istep1 ³ 1.2 × 3I 0 (remote busbar)

EQUATION1199 V3 EN-US (Equation 461)

As a consequence of the distribution of zero sequence current in the power system, the
current to the protection might be larger if one line out from the remote busbar is taken out of
service, see Figure 266.

3I0

IN >

One- or two-phase-earth-fault
IEC05000151-en-2.vsd
IEC05000151 V2 EN-US

Figure 266: Step 1, second calculation. Remote busbar with, one line taken out of service
The requirement is now according to Equation 462.

Istep1 ³ 1.2 × 3I 0 (remote busbar with one line out)

EQUATION1200 V3 EN-US (Equation 462)

A higher value of step 1 might be necessary if a big power transformer (Y0/D) at remote bus
bar is disconnected.

Line distance protection REL670 411

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

A special case occurs at double circuit lines, with mutual zero-sequence impedance between
the parallel lines, see Figure 267.

3I0

IN >

One phase-to-earth fault

IEC05000152-en-2.vsd
IEC05000152 V2 EN-US

Figure 267: Step 1, third calculation

In this case the residual current out on the line can be larger than in the case of earth fault on
the remote busbar.

Istep1 ³ 1.2 × 3I 0
EQUATION1201 V3 EN-US (Equation 463)

The current setting for step 1 is chosen as the largest of the above calculated residual
currents, measured by the protection.

Step 2 M15282-144 v7
This step has directional function and a short time delay, often about 0.4 s. Step 2 shall
securely detect all earth faults on the line, not detected by step 1.

3I0

IN >

One- or two-phase earth-fault

IEC05000154-en-2.vsd
IEC05000154 V2 EN-US

Figure 268: Step 2, check of reach calculation

The residual current, out on the line, is calculated at an operational case with minimal earth-
fault current. The requirement that the whole line shall be covered by step 2 can be formulated
according to equation 464.

412 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Istep2 ³ 0.7 × 3I0 (at remote busbar)

EQUATION1202 V4 EN-US (Equation 464)

To assure selectivity the current setting must be chosen so that step 2 does not operate at
step 2 for faults on the next line from the remote substation. Consider a fault as shown in
Figure 269.

3I0 3I01

IN > IN >

One phase-to-earth
fault
IEC05000155-en-2.vsd
IEC05000155 V3 EN-US

Figure 269: Step 2, selectivity calculation

A second criterion for step 2 is according to equation 465.

3I0
Istep2 ³ 1.2 × × Istep1
3I01
EQUATION1203 V4 EN-US (Equation 465)

where:
Istep1 is the current setting for step 1 on the faulted line.

Step 3 M15282-164 v6
This step has directional function and a time delay slightly larger than step 2, often 0.8 s. Step
3 shall enable selective trip of earth faults having higher fault resistance to earth, compared to
step 2. The requirement on step 3 is selectivity to other earth-fault protections in the network.
One criterion for setting is shown in Figure 270.

3I0 3I02

IN > IN >

One phase-to-
earth fault
IEC05000156-3-en.vsd
IEC05000156 V3 EN-US

Figure 270: Step 3, Selectivity calculation

Line distance protection REL670 413

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

3I0
Istep3 ³ 1.2 × × Istep2
3I02
EQUATION1204 V4 EN-US (Equation 466)

where:
Istep2 is the chosen current setting for step 2 on the faulted line.

Step 4 M15282-177 v4
This step normally has non-directional function and a relatively long time delay. The task for
step 4 is to detect and initiate trip for earth faults with large fault resistance, for example tree
faults. Step 4 shall also detect series faults where one or two poles, of a breaker or other
switching device, are open while the other poles are closed.

Both high resistance earth faults and series faults give zero-sequence current flow in the
network. Such currents give disturbances on telecommunication systems and current to earth.
It is important to clear such faults both concerning personal security as well as risk of fire.

The current setting for step 4 is often set down to about 100 A (primary 3I0). In many
applications definite time delay in the range 1.2 - 2.0 s is used. In other applications a current
dependent inverse time characteristic is used. This enables a higher degree of selectivity also
for sensitive earth-fault current protection.

9.5 Four step directional negative phase sequence

overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-E8CF8AA2-AF54-4FD1-A379-3E55DCA2FA3A v1

9.5.1 Identification
GUID-E1720ADA-7F80-4F2C-82A1-EF2C9EF6A4B4 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Four step negative sequence NS4PTOC 46I2
overcurrent protection I2
4
alt
4
IEC10000053 V1 EN-US

9.5.2 Application GUID-343023F8-AFE3-41C2-8440-1779DD7F5621 v2

Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC is used in several applications
in the power system. Some applications are:

• Earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of feeders in effectively earthed

distribution and subtransmission systems. Normally these feeders have radial structure.
• Back-up earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of transmission lines.
• Sensitive earth-fault protection of transmission lines. NS4PTOC can have better
sensitivity to detect resistive phase-to-earth-faults compared to distance protection.
• Back-up earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of power transformers.
• Earth-fault and phase-phase short circuit protection of different kinds of equipment
connected to the power system such as shunt capacitor banks, shunt reactors and others.

414 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

In many applications several steps with different current operating levels and time delays are
needed. NS4PTOC can have up to four, individual settable steps. The flexibility of each step of
NS4PTOC function is great. The following options are possible:

Non-directional/Directional function: In some applications the non-directional functionality is

used. This is mostly the case when no fault current can be fed from the protected object itself.
In order to achieve both selectivity and fast fault clearance, the directional function can be
necessary. This can be the case for unsymmetrical fault protection in meshed and effectively
earthed transmission systems. The directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is
also well suited to operate in teleprotection communication schemes, which enables fast
clearance of unsymmetrical faults on transmission lines. The directional function uses the
voltage polarizing quantity.

Choice of time characteristics: There are several types of time characteristics available such as
definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics. The selectivity between
different overcurrent protections is normally enabled by co-ordination between the operating
time of the different protections. To enable optimal co-ordination all overcurrent relays, to be
co-ordinated against each other, should have the same time characteristic. Therefore a wide
range of standardized inverse time characteristics are available: IEC and ANSI.

Table 36: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

There is also a user programmable inverse time characteristic.

Normally it is required that the negative sequence overcurrent function shall reset as fast as
possible when the current level gets lower than the operation level. In some cases some sort of
delayed reset is required. Therefore different kinds of reset characteristics can be used.

For some protection applications there can be a need to change the current operating level for
some time. Therefore there is a possibility to give a setting of a multiplication factor IxMult to
the negative sequence current pick-up level. This multiplication factor is activated from a
binary input signal ENMULTx to the function.

Line distance protection REL670 415

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.5.3 Setting guidelines GUID-460D6C58-598C-421E-AA9E-FD240210A6CC v3

The parameters for Four step negative sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC are set via
the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

The following settings can be done for the four step negative sequence overcurrent
protection:

Operation: Sets the protection to On or Off.

Common base IED values for the primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.
GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

9.5.3.1 Settings for each step GUID-CFB327EF-C5C4-44B5-AB4B-9C2916355FC5 v5

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

DirModeSelx: The directional mode of step x. Possible settings are off/nondirectional/

forward/reverse.

Characteristx: Selection of time characteristic for step x. Definite time delay and different
types of inverse time characteristics are available.

Table 37: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
Table continues on next page

416 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Curve name
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

The different characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM).

Ix>: Operation negative sequence current level for step x given in % of IBase.

tx: Definite time delay for step x. The definite time tx is added to the inverse time when inverse
time characteristic is selected. Note that the value set is the time between activation of the
start and the trip outputs.

kx: Time multiplier for the dependent (inverse) characteristic.

IMinx: Minimum operate current for step x in % of IBase. Set IMinx below Ix> for every step to
achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above Ix> for any step
the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when current drops below IMinx.

IxMult: Multiplier for scaling of the current setting value. If a binary input signal (ENMULTx) is
activated the current operation level is multiplied by this setting constant.

txMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse
time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the
operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Operate time

tx

txMin

IMinx Current

IEC10000058
IEC10000058 V2 EN-US

Figure 271: Minimum operate current and operation time for inverse time characteristics
ResetTypeCrvx: The reset of the delay timer can be made in different ways. By choosing
setting there are the following possibilities:

Curve name
Instantaneous
IEC Reset (constant time)
ANSI Reset (inverse time)

Line distance protection REL670 417

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

The different reset characteristics are described in the Technical Reference Manual (TRM).
There are some restrictions regarding the choice of reset delay.

For the independent time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are
instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time characteristics are
available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent
reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics the possible delay time settings are instantaneous
(1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the programmable inverse time delay characteristics all three types of reset time
characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time reset) and ANSI (3 =
current dependent reset time). If the current dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr
must be given.

tPCrvx, tACrvx, tBCrvx, tCCrvx: Parameters for programmable inverse time characteristic
curve. The time characteristic equation is according to equation 467:

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1189 V1 EN-US (Equation 467)

Further description can be found in the Technical reference manual (TRM).

tPRCrvx, tTRCrvx, tCRCrvx: Parameters for customer creation of inverse reset time
characteristic curve. Further description can be found in the Technical Reference Manual.

9.5.3.2 Common settings for all steps GUID-A00A942B-E760-42EE-8FEB-F723426783F3 v1

x means step 1, 2, 3 and 4.

AngleRCA: Relay characteristic angle given in degrees. This angle is defined as shown in
figure 272. The angle is defined positive when the residual current lags the reference voltage
(Upol = -U2)

418 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Reverse
Area

AngleRCA Upol=-U2

Forward
Area
Iop = I2

IEC10000031-1-en.vsd
IEC10000031 V1 EN-US

Figure 272: Relay characteristic angle given in degree

In a transmission network a normal value of RCA is about 80°.

UPolMin: Minimum polarization (reference) voltage % of UBase.

I>Dir: Operate residual current level for directional comparison scheme. The setting is given in
% of IBase. The start forward or start reverse signals can be used in a communication scheme.
The appropriate signal must be configured to the communication scheme block.

9.6 Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power

protection SDEPSDE SEMOD171436-1 v4

9.6.1 Identification
SEMOD172025-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sensitive directional residual over SDEPSDE - 67N
current and power protection

Line distance protection REL670 419

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.6.2 Application SEMOD171959-4 v12

In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase-to-earth fault current is significantly
smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault protection is that the
magnitude of the phase-to-earth fault current is almost independent of the fault location in
the network.

Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-earth
faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual current
component 3I0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the residual
voltage (-3U0), compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively, the function can be set
to strict 3I0 level with a check of angle φ.

Directional residual power can also be used to detect and give selective trip of phase-to-earth
faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual power
component 3I0 · 3U0 · cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and the
reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.

A normal non-directional residual current function can also be used with definite or inverse
time delay.

A backup neutral point voltage function is also available for non-directional residual
overvoltage protection.

In an isolated network, that is, the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase shift
compared to the residual voltage (3U0). The characteristic angle is chosen to -90º in such a
network.

In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil earthed, with a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for the earth
fault detection. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º.

As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location, the selectivity of
the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.

When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and when
should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? Consider the following:

• Sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection gives possibility for better sensitivity.
The setting possibilities of this function are down to 0.25 % of IBase, 1 A or 5 A. This
sensitivity is in most cases sufficient in high impedance network applications, if the
measuring CT ratio is not too high.
• Sensitive directional residual power protection gives possibility to use inverse time
characteristics. This is applicable in large high impedance earthed networks, with large
capacitive earth fault currents. In such networks, the active fault current would be small
and by using sensitive directional residual power protection, the operating quantity is
elevated. Therefore, better possibility to detect earth faults. In addition, in low impedance
earthed networks, the inverse time characteristic gives better time-selectivity in case of
high zero-resistive fault currents.

420 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Phase
currents
IN

Phase-
ground
voltages
UN

IEC13000013-1-en.vsd
IEC13000013 V1 EN-US

Figure 273: Connection of SDEPSDE to analog preprocessing function block

Overcurrent functionality uses true 3I0, i.e. sum of GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3. For 3I0 to be
calculated, connection is needed to all three phase inputs.

Directional and power functionality uses IN and UN. If a connection is made to GRPxN this
signal is used, else if connection is made to all inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 the
internally calculated sum of these inputs (3I0 and 3U0) will be used.

9.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171961-4 v10

The sensitive earth fault protection is intended to be used in high impedance earthed systems,
or in systems with resistive earthing where the neutral point resistor gives an earth fault
current larger than what normal high impedance gives but smaller than the phase-to-phase
short circuit current.

In a high impedance system the fault current is assumed to be limited by the system zero
sequence shunt impedance to earth and the fault resistance only. All the series impedances in
the system are assumed to be zero.

In the setting of earth fault protection, in a high impedance earthed system, the neutral point
voltage (zero sequence voltage) and the earth fault current will be calculated at the desired
sensitivity (fault resistance). The complex neutral point voltage (zero sequence) can be
calculated as:

U phase
U0 =
3× Rf
1+
Z0
EQUATION1943 V1 EN-US (Equation 468)

Where
Uphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault,

Rf is the resistance to earth in the fault point and

Z0 is the system zero sequence impedance to earth

Line distance protection REL670 421

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

The fault current, in the fault point, can be calculated as:

3 × U phase
I j = 3I 0 =
Z0 + 3 × R f
EQUATION1944 V1 EN-US (Equation 469)

The impedance Z0 is dependent on the system earthing. In an isolated system (without neutral
point apparatus) the impedance is equal to the capacitive coupling between the phase
conductors and earth:

3 × U phase
Z 0 = - jX c = - j
Ij
EQUATION1945 V1 EN-US (Equation 470)

Where
Ij is the capacitive earth fault current at a non-resistive phase-to-earth fault

Xc is the capacitive reactance to earth

In a system with a neutral point resistor (resistance earthed system) the impedance Z0 can be
calculated as:

- jX c × 3R n
Z0 =
- jX c + 3R n
EQUATION1946 V1 EN-US (Equation 471)

Where
Rn is the resistance of the neutral point resistor

In many systems there is also a neutral point reactor (Petersen coil) connected to one or more
transformer neutral points. In such a system the impedance Z0 can be calculated as:

9R n X n X c
Z 0 = - jX c // 3R n // j3X n =
3X n X c + j3R n × ( 3X n - X c )
EQUATION1947 V1 EN-US (Equation 472)

Where
Xn is the reactance of the Petersen coil. If the Petersen coil is well tuned we have 3Xn = Xc In this case the
impedance Z0 will be: Z0 = 3Rn

Now consider a system with an earthing via a resistor giving higher earth fault current than the
high impedance earthing. The series impedances in the system can no longer be neglected.
The system with a single phase to earth fault can be described as in Figure 274.

422 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Source impedance
Zsc (pos. seq)

ZT,1 (pos. seq)

ZT,0 (zero seq) RN

U0A Substation A

3I0

ZlineAB,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineAB,0 (zero seq)

U0B Substation B

ZlineBC,1 (pos. seq)

ZlineBC,0 (zero seq)

Phase to earth fault

en06000654.vsd
IEC06000654 V1 EN-US

Figure 274: Equivalent of power system for calculation of setting

The residual fault current can be written:

3U phase
3I 0 =
2 × Z1 + Z 0 + 3 × R f
EQUATION1948 V1 EN-US (Equation 473)

Where
Uphase is the phase voltage in the fault point before the fault

Z1 is the total positive sequence impedance to the fault point. Z1 = Zsc+ZT,1+ZlineAB,1+ZlineBC,1

Z0 is the total zero sequence impedance to the fault point. Z0 = ZT,0+3RN+ZlineAB,0+ZlineBC,0

Rf is the fault resistance.

The residual voltages in stations A and B can be written:

U 0 A = 3I 0 × ( Z T ,0 + 3R N )
EQUATION1949 V1 EN-US (Equation 474)

U OB = 3I 0 × (Z T ,0 + 3R N + Z lineAB,0 )
EQUATION1950 V1 EN-US (Equation 475)

The residual power, measured by the sensitive earth fault protections in A and B will be:

Line distance protection REL670 423

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

S0 A = 3U 0 A × 3I 0
EQUATION1951 V1 EN-US (Equation 476)

S0 B = 3U 0 B × 3I 0
EQUATION1952 V1 EN-US (Equation 477)

The residual power is a complex quantity. The protection will have a maximum sensitivity in
the characteristic angle RCA. The apparent residual power component in the characteristic
angle, measured by the protection, can be written:

S0 A ,prot = 3U 0 A × 3I 0 × cos j A
EQUATION1953 V1 EN-US (Equation 478)

S0 B,prot = 3U 0 B × 3I 0 × cos j B
EQUATION1954 V1 EN-US (Equation 479)

The angles φA and φB are the phase angles between the residual current and the residual
voltage in the station compensated with the characteristic angle RCA.

The protection will use the power components in the characteristic angle direction for
measurement, and as base for the inverse time delay.

The inverse time delay is defined as:

kSN × (3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(reference))

t inv =
3I0 × 3U 0 × cos j(measured)
EQUATION1942 V2 EN-US (Equation 480)

The function can be set On/Off with the setting of Operation.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

RotResU: It is a setting for rotating the polarizing quantity ( 3U0) by 0 or 180 degrees. This
parameter is set to 180 degrees by default in order to inverse the residual voltage ( 3U0) to
calculate the reference voltage (-3U0 e-jRCADir). Since the reference voltage is used as the
polarizing quantity for directionality, it is important to set this parameter correctly.

With the setting OpMode the principle of directional function is chosen.

With OpMode set to 3I0cosfi the current component in the direction equal to the characteristic
angleRCADir has the maximum sensitivity. The characteristic for RCADir is equal to 0° is shown
in Figure 275.

424 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

RCADir = 0o,ROADir = 90o

3I0

j = ang(3I0 ) - ang(3Uref )
-3U0 = Uref
3I0 × cosj

IEC06000648-4-en.vsd
IEC06000648 V4 EN-US

Figure 275: Characteristic for RCADir equal to 0°

The characteristic is for RCADir equal to -90° is shown in Figure 276.

Uref
RCADir = −90 , ROADir = 90

3I0

3I0 ⋅ cos ϕ

ϕ = ang (3I0 ) − ang (Uref )

−3U0

IEC06000649_3_en.vsd
IEC06000649 V3 EN-US

Figure 276: Characteristic for RCADir equal to -90°

When OpMode is set to 3U03I0cosfi the apparent residual power component in the direction is
measured.

When OpMode is set to 3I0 and fi the function will operate if the residual current is larger than
the setting INDir> and the residual current angle is within the sector RCADir ± ROADir.

The characteristic for this OpMode when RCADir = 0° and ROADir = 80° is shown in figure 277.

Line distance protection REL670 425

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

RCADir = 0º

ROADir = 80º

Operate area

3I0

-3U0

IEC06000652-3-en.vsd
IEC06000652 V3 EN-US

Figure 277: Characteristic for RCADir = 0° and ROADir = 80°

DirMode is set Forward or Reverse to set the direction of the operation for the directional
function selected by the OpMode.

All the directional protection modes have a residual current release level setting INRel> which
is set in % of IBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or equal to the lowest fault
current to be detected.

All the directional protection modes have a residual voltage release level setting UNRel> which
is set in % of UBase. This setting should be chosen smaller than or equal to the lowest fault
residual voltage to be detected.

tDef is the definite time delay, given in s, for the directional residual current protection.

tReset is the time delay before the definite timer gets reset, given in s. With a tReset time of
few cycles, there is an increased possibility to clear intermittent earth faults correctly. The
setting shall be much shorter than the set trip delay. In case of intermittent earth faults, the
fault current is intermittently dropping below the set value during consecutive cycles.
Therefore the definite timer should continue for a certain time equal to tReset even though the
fault current has dropped below the set value.

The characteristic angle of the directional functions RCADir is set in degrees. RCADir is
normally set equal to 0° in a high impedance earthed network with a neutral point resistor as
the active current component is appearing out on the faulted feeder only. RCADir is set equal
to -90° in an isolated network as all currents are mainly capacitive.

ROADir is Relay Operating Angle. ROADir is identifying a window around the reference
direction in order to detect directionality. ROADir is set in degrees. For angles differing more
than ROADir from RCADir the function is blocked. The setting can be used to prevent
unwanted operation for non-faulted feeders, with large capacitive earth fault current
contributions, due to CT phase angle error.

INCosPhi> is the operate current level for the directional function when OpMode is set
3I0Cosfi. The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the
active or capacitive earth fault current at required sensitivity of the protection.

426 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

SN> is the operate power level for the directional function when OpMode is set 3I03U0Cosfi.
The setting is given in % of SBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the active or
capacitive earth fault residual power at required sensitivity of the protection.

The input transformer for the Sensitive directional residual over current and power protection
function has the same short circuit capacity as the phase current transformers. Hence, there is
no specific requirement for the external CT core, i.e. any CT core can be used.

If the time delay for residual power is chosen the delay time is dependent on two setting
parameters. SRef is the reference residual power, given in % of SBase. kSN is the time
multiplier. The time delay will follow the following expression:

kSN × Sref
t inv =
3I 0 × 3U 0 × cos j (measured)
EQUATION1957 V1 EN-US (Equation 481)

INDir> is the operate current level for the directional function when OpMode is set 3I0 and fi.
The setting is given in % of IBase. The setting should be based on calculation of the earth fault
current at required sensitivity of the protection.

OpINNonDir> is set On to activate the non-directional residual current protection.

INNonDir> is the operate current level for the non-directional function. The setting is given in
% of IBase. This function can be used for detection and clearance of cross-country faults in a
shorter time than for the directional function. The current setting should be larger than the
maximum single-phase residual current on the protected line.

TimeChar is the selection of time delay characteristic for the non-directional residual current
protection. Definite time delay and different types of inverse time characteristics are available:

Table 38: Inverse time characteristics

Curve name
ANSI Extremely Inverse
ANSI Very Inverse
ANSI Normal Inverse
ANSI Moderately Inverse
ANSI/IEEE Definite time
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse
ANSI Long Time Inverse
IEC Normal Inverse
IEC Very Inverse
IEC Inverse
IEC Extremely Inverse
IEC Short Time Inverse
IEC Long Time Inverse
IEC Definite Time
User Programmable
ASEA RI
RXIDG (logarithmic)

Line distance protection REL670 427

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

See chapter “Inverse time characteristics” in Technical Manual for the description of different
characteristics

tPCrv, tACrv, tBCrv, tCCrv: Parameters for customer creation of inverse time characteristic
curve (Curve type = 17). The time characteristic equation is:

æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B ÷ × InMult
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION1958 V1 EN-US (Equation 482)

tINNonDir is the definite time delay for the non directional earth fault current protection, given
in s.

OpUN> is set On to activate the trip function of the residual over voltage protection.

tUN is the definite time delay for the trip function of the residual voltage protection, given in s.

9.7 Thermal overload protection, one time constant,

Celsius/Fahrenheit LCPTTR/LFPTTR IP14512-1 v7

9.7.1 Identification
M17106-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Thermal overload protection, one LCPTTR 26
time constant, Celsius

Thermal overload protection, one LFPTTR 26

time constant, Fahrenheit

9.7.2 Application M15283-3 v9

Lines and cables in the power system are designed for a certain maximum load current level. If
the current exceeds this level the losses will be higher than expected. As a consequence the
temperature of the conductors will increase. If the temperature of the lines and cables reaches
too high values the equipment might be damaged:

• The sag of overhead lines can reach unacceptable value.

• If the temperature of conductors, for example aluminium conductors, gets too high the
material will be destroyed.
• In cables the insulation can be damaged as a consequence of the overtemperature. As a
consequence of this phase to phase or phase to earth faults can occur.

428 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

In stressed situations in the power system it can be required to overload lines and cables for a
limited time. This should be done while managing the risks safely.

The thermal overload protection provides information that makes a temporary overloading of
cables and lines possible. The thermal overload protection estimates the conductor
temperature continuously, in Celsius or Fahrenheit depending on whether LCPTTR or LFPTTR
is chosen. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the line/cable based on the
current measurement.

If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level AlarmTemp, a signal
ALARM can be given to the operator. This enables actions in the power system to be taken
before dangerous temperatures are reached. If the temperature continues to increase to the
trip value TripTemp, the protection initiates trip of the protected line.

9.7.3 Setting guideline IP14994-1 v1

M15094-3 v8
The parameters for the Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius/Fahrenheit
LCPTTR/LFPTTR are set via the local HMI or PCM600.
M15094-5 v10
The following settings can be done for the thermal overload protection.

Operation: Off/On

GlobalBaseSel is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values, primary
current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary power (SBase).

Imult: Enter the number of lines in case the protection function is applied on multiple parallel
lines sharing one CT.

IRef: Reference, steady state current, given in % of IBase that will give a steady state (end)
temperature rise TRef. It is suggested to set this current to the maximum steady state current
allowed for the line/cable under emergency operation (a few hours per year).

TRef: Reference temperature rise (end temperature) corresponding to the steady state current
IRef. From cable manuals current values with corresponding conductor temperature are often
given. These values are given for conditions such as earth temperature, ambient air
temperature, way of laying of cable and earth thermal resistivity. From manuals for overhead
conductor temperatures and corresponding current is given.

Tau: The thermal time constant of the protected circuit given in minutes. Please refer to
manufacturers manuals for details.

TripTemp: Temperature value for trip of the protected circuit. For cables, a maximum allowed
conductor temperature is often stated to be 90°C (194°F). For overhead lines, the critical
temperature for aluminium conductor is about 90 - 100°C (194-212°F). For a copper conductor
a normal figure is 70°C (158°F).

AlarmTemp: Temperature level for alarm of the protected circuit. ALARM signal can be used as
a warning before the circuit is tripped. Therefore the setting shall be lower than the trip level.
It shall at the same time be higher than the maximum conductor temperature at normal
operation. For cables this level is often given to 65°C (149°F). Similar values are stated for
overhead lines. A suitable setting can be about 15°C (59°F) below the trip value.

ReclTemp: Temperature where lockout signal LOCKOUT from the protection is released. When
the thermal overload protection trips, a lock-out signal is activated. This signal is intended to
block switch in of the protected circuit as long as the conductor temperature is high. The
signal is released when the estimated temperature is below the set value. This temperature
value should be chosen below the alarm temperature.

Line distance protection REL670 429

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.8 Breaker failure protection CCRBRF IP14514-1 v6

9.8.1 Identification
M14878-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker failure protection, 3-phase CCRBRF 50BF
activation and output
3I>BF

SYMBOL-U V1 EN-US

9.8.2 Application M13916-3 v8

In the design of the fault clearance system the N-1 criterion is often used. This means that a
fault needs to be cleared even if any component in the fault clearance system is faulty. One
necessary component in the fault clearance system is the circuit breaker.

It is from practical and economical reason not feasible to duplicate the circuit breaker for the
protected object. Instead a breaker failure protection is used.

Breaker failure protection CCRBRF will issue a backup trip command to adjacent circuit
breakers in case of failure to trip of the “normal” circuit breaker for the protected object. The
detection of failure to break the current through the breaker is made either by means of
current measurement or as detection of closed status using auxiliary contact.

CCRBRF can also give a retrip command. This means that a second trip signal is sent to the
protected object circuit breaker. The retrip function can be used to increase the probability of
operation of the breaker, or it can be used to avoid backup trip of many breakers in case of
mistakes during relay maintenance and testing.

9.8.3 Setting guidelines M11546-4 v10

The parameters for Breaker failure protection CCRBRF are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the breaker failure protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: Off/On to enable/disable the complete function.

FunctionMode: It defines the way the detection of failure of the breaker is performed. In the
Current mode, the current measurement is used for the detection. In the CB Pos mode, the CB
auxiliary contact status is used as an indicator of the failure of the breaker. The mode Current
or CB Pos means that both ways of detections can be activated. The CB Pos mode is used in
applications where the fault current through the circuit breaker is small. This can be the case
for some generator protection application (for example, reverse power protection) or in the
case of line ends with weak end infeed.

StartMode: By this setting it is possible to select how t1 and t2 timers are run and
consequently how output commands are given from the function:

• Option 1 - LatchedStart: “By external start signals which is internally latched”.

430 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

When function is once started by external START signal, the timers t1 and t2 will always
elapse and then measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode will be
always checked in order to verify if the appropriate command shall be given out from the
function. Timers cannot be stopped by removing the external START signal. Function can
be started again only when all of the following three timers t1, t2 and fixed timer of 150ms
in function internal design has expired and the measurement criterion defined by
parameter FunctionMode has deactivated, see Figure 278. Note that this option
corresponds to the function behavior in previous versions of the 670 Series from version
1.0 up to and including version 2.1.

• Option 2 - FollowStart: “Follow the external start signal only”.

The timers t1 and t2 will run while external START signal is present. If they elapse then
measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode will be checked in order to
verify if the appropriate command shall be given out from the function. Timers can be
always stopped by resetting the external START signal, see Figure 279.

• Option 3- FollowStart&Mode: “Follow external start signal and selected FunctionMode” .

The timers t1 and t2 will run while external START signal is present and in the same time
the measurement criterion defined by parameter FunctionMode is active. If they elapse
then the appropriate command will be given out from the function. Timers can be stopped
by resetting the external START signal or if the measurement criterion de-activates, see
Figure 280.

When one of the two “follow modes” is used, there is a settable timer tStartTimeout which will
block the external START input signal when it times-out. This will automatically also reset the
t1 and t2 timers and consequently prevent any backup trip command. At the same time the
STALARM output from the function will have logical value one. To reset this signal external
START signal shall be removed. This is done in order to prevent unwanted operation of the
breaker failure function for cases where a permanent START signal is given by mistake (e.g.
due to a fault in the station battery system). Note that any backup trip command will inhibit
running of tStartTimeout timer.

30ms t1 30ms
START OR TRRET
S Q t AND

t2 30ms
OR TRBU
t AND

Current Check
CB Position Check OR

150ms
AND
t
NOT

IEC18001002-1-en.vsdx

IEC18001002 V1 EN-US

Figure 278: Simplified overall logic for LatchedStart

Line distance protection REL670 431

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

t1
START OR TRRET
t AND

Current Check
CB Position Check OR

t2
TRBU
t AND
OR

IEC18001003-1-en.vsdx
IEC18001003 V1 EN-US

Figure 279: Simplified overall logic for FollowStart

START t1 TRRET
AND t

Current Check
CB Position Check OR t2 TRBU
t

IEC18001004-1-en.vsdx
IEC18001004 V1 EN-US

Figure 280: Simplified overall logic for FollowStart&Mode

RetripMode: This setting defines how the re-trip function shall operate. Refer to Table 39 for
more details.

Table 39: Dependencies between parameters RetripMode and FunctionMode

RetripMode FunctionMode Description
Off N/A The re-trip function is disabled
UseFunctionMode Current A phase current should be larger
than the set operate level to allow
re-trip once the t1 timer elapses
CB Pos Re-trip is done when the breaker
position indicates that breaker is
still closed after re-trip time has
elapsed
Current or CB Pos Both the methods are used
Always N/A Re-trip is always given when t1
elapses without any further
checks

BuTripMode: Defines how many current criterias to be fulfilled in order to detect failure of the
breaker. For Current operation 2 out of 4 means that at least two currents, of the three-phase
currents and the residual current, shall be high to indicate breaker failure. 1 out of 3 means
that at least one current of the three-phase currents shall be high to indicate breaker failure. 1
out of 4 means that at least one current of the three phase currents or the residual current
shall be high to indicate breaker failure. In most applications 1 out of 3 is sufficient. For CB Pos
operation 1 out of 3 is always used.

432 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

IP>: Current level for detection of breaker failure, set in % of IBase. This parameter should be
set so that faults with small fault current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in
accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection.
Default setting is 10% of IBase. Note that this setting shall not be set lower than 4% of Ir,
where Ir is rated current of the IED CT input where the function is connected. In principle Ir is
either 1A or 5A depending on the ordered IED.

I>BlkCBPos: If the FunctionMode is set to Current or CB pos breaker failure for high current
faults are safely detected by the current measurement function. To increase security for low
currents the contact based function will be enabled only if the current at the moment of
starting is below this set level. The setting can be given within the range 5 – 200% of IBase. It
is strongly recommended to set this level above IPh> set level.

IN>: Residual current level for detection of breaker failure set in % of IBase. In high impedance
earthed systems the residual current at phase- to-earth faults are normally much smaller than
the short circuit currents. In order to detect breaker failure at single phase-to-earth faults in
such systems it is necessary to measure the residual current separately. The BuTripMode shall
be set 1 out of 4 in such systems The current setting should be chosen in accordance to the
setting of the sensitive earth-fault protection. The setting can be given within the range 2 –
200 % of IBase.

t1: Time delay of the retrip. The setting can be given within the range 0 – 60s in steps of 0.001
s. Typical setting is within range 0 – 50ms.

t2: Time delay of the backup trip. The choice of this setting is made as short as possible at the
same time as unwanted operation must be avoided. Typical setting is within range 90 – 200ms
(also dependent of retrip timer).

Timer t2 is used when function is started in one phase only (i.e. for single-phase to ground
fault on an OHL (Over Head Lines) when single-pole auto-reclosing is used).

The minimum time delay for the backup trip can be estimated as:

t2  t1  tCB_open  tBFP_reset  tmargin

IECEQUATION18191 V1 EN-US (Equation 483)

where:
tCB_open is the maximum opening time for the circuit breaker

tBFP_reset is the maximum time for breaker failure protection to detect correct breaker function
(the current criteria reset)
tmargin is a safety margin

It is often required that the total fault clearance time shall be less than a given critical time.
This time is often dependent of the ability of the power system to maintain transient stability
in case of a fault close to a power plant.

Line distance protection REL670 433

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Protection
operate time
Normal tcbopen

The fault Retrip delay t1 tcbopen after re-trip

occurs
tBFPreset
Margin

Minimum back-up trip delay t2

Critical fault clearance time for stability

Time

Trip and Start

CCRBRF
IEC05000479_2_en.vsd
IEC05000479 V2 EN-US

Figure 281: Time sequence

t2MPh: Time delay of the backup trip at multi-phase start. The critical fault clearance time is
often shorter in case of multi-phase faults, compared to single phase-to-earth faults.
Therefore there is a possibility to reduce the backup trip delay for multi-phase faults. Typical
setting is 90 – 150 ms.

Note that for a protected object which are always tripped three-phase (e.g. transformers,
generators, reactors, cables, etc.) this timer shall always be set to the same value as t2 timer.

t3: Additional time delay to t2 for a second backup trip TRBU2. In some applications there
might be a requirement to have separated backup trip functions, tripping different backup
circuit breakers.

tCBAlarm: Time delay for alarm in case of indication of faulty circuit breaker. There is a binary
input CBFLT from the circuit breaker. This signal is activated when internal supervision in the
circuit breaker detect that the circuit breaker is unable to clear fault. This could be the case
when gas pressure is low in a SF6 circuit breaker, of others. After the set time an alarm is
given, so that actions can be done to repair the circuit breaker. Note that the time delay for
backup trip t2 is bypassed when the CBFLT is active. Typical setting is 2.0 seconds..

tPulse: Trip pulse duration. This setting must be larger than the opening time of circuit
breakers to be tripped from the breaker failure protection. Typical setting is 200 ms.

tStartTimeout: When one of the two “Follow Modes” is used, there is a settable timer
tStartTimeout which will block the external START input signal when it times-out. This will
automatically also reset the t1 and t2 timers and consequently prevent any backup trip
command. At the same time the STALARM output from the function will have logical value one.
To reset that condition external START signal shall be removed. This is done in order to
prevent unwanted operation of the breaker failure function for cases where a permanent
START signal is given by mistake (e.g.due to a fault in the station battery system). Note that
any backup trip command will inhibit running of tStartTimeout timer.

434 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

GUID-845257FF-2774-472A-B982-E9DDD8966988 v1

Table 40: Setting summary for FunctionMode, StartMode, RetripMode and BuTripMode
No. StartMode RetripMode t1 and t2 initiated When t1 has When t2 or t2MPh t1 and t2 and t2MPh
with elapsed, TRRET will has elapsed, TRBU will be stopped
will be given if (reset) if
FunctionMode = Current
1 LatchedStart Off external START never be given current is above t1 and (t2 or
set level *) t2MPh) and 150ms
expires and
current is below
set level *)
2 LatchedStart UseFunction external START be given if current current is above t1 and (t2 or
Mode is above set level set level *) t2MPh) and 150ms
of IPh> expires and
current is below
set level *)
3 LatchedStart Always external START always be given current is above t1 and (t2 or
set level *) t2MPh) and 150ms
expires and
current is below
set level *)
4 FollowStart Off external START never be given current is above external START
set level *) disappears
5 FollowStart UseFunction external START be given if current current is above external START
Mode is above set level set level *) disappears
of IPh>
6 FollowStart Always external START be given if external current is above external START
START is present set level *) disappears
7 FollowStart& Off external START never be given current is above current is below
Mode and current set level *) and set level *) or
above set level external START external START
present disappears
8 FollowStart& UseFunction external START be given if current current is above current is below
Mode Mode and current is above set level set level *) and set level *) or
above set level of IPh> and external START external START
external START is present disappears
present
9 FollowStart& Always external START be given if external current is above current is below
Mode and current START is present set level *) and set level *) or
above set level external START external START
present disappears
*) Set level depends on selected BuTripMode, that is, set level can be either IPh> or IN> or both.

No. StartMode RetripMode t1 and t2 initiated When t1 has When t2 or t2MPh t1 and t2 and
with elapsed, TRRET will has elapsed, TRBU t2MPh will be
will be given if stopped (reset) if
FunctionMode = CB Pos
10 LatchedStart Off external START never be given CBCLDLx input has t1 and (t2 or
logical value one t2MPh) and 150ms
expires and
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
zero
11 LatchedStart UseFunction external START be given if CBCLDLx input has t1 and (t2 or
Mode CBCLDLx input has logical value one t2MPh) and 150ms
logical value one expires and
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
zero
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 435

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

No. StartMode RetripMode t1 and t2 initiated When t1 has When t2 or t2MPh t1 and t2 and
with elapsed, TRRET will has elapsed, TRBU t2MPh will be
will be given if stopped (reset) if
12 LatchedStart Always external START always be given CBCLDLx input has t1 and (t2 or
logical value one t2MPh) and 150ms
expires and
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
zero
13 FollowStart Off external START never be given CBCLDLx input has external START
logical value one disappears
14 FollowStart UseFunction external START be given if CBCLDLx input has external START
Mode CBCLDLx input has logical value one disappears
logical value one
15 FollowStart Always external START if external START is CBCLDLx input has external START
present logical value one disappears
16 FollowStart& Off external START never be given be given if CBCLDLx input
Mode and CBCLDLx CBCLDLx input has has logical value
input has logical logical value one zero or external
value one and external START disappears
START is present
17 FollowStart& UseFunction external START be given if be given if CBCLDLx input
Mode Mode and CBCLDLx CBCLDLx input has CBCLDLx input has has logical value
input has logical logical value one logical value one zero or external
value one and external and external START disappears
START is present START is present
18 FollowStart& Always external START be given if external be given if CBCLDLx input
Mode and CBCLDLx START is present CBCLDLx input has has logical value
input has logical logical value one zero or external
value one and external START disappears
START is present

No. StartMode RetripMode t1 and t2 initiated When t1 has When t2 or t2MPh t1 and t2 and
with elapsed, TRRET will has elapsed, TRBU t2MPh will be
will be given if stopped (reset) if
FunctionMode = Current or CB Pos
19 LatchedStart Off external START never be given current is above t1 and (t2 or
set level *) and t2MPh) and 150ms
higher than expires and
I>BlkCBPos or current is below
CBCLDLx input set level *) or
has logical value CBCLDLx input
one when current has logical value
is smaller than zero
I>BlkCBPos
20 LatchedStart UseFunction external START be given if current current is above t1 and (t2 or
Mode is above set level set level *) and t2MPh) and 150ms
of IPh> and higher higher than expires and
than I>BlkCBPos or I>BlkCBPos or current is below
CBCLDLx input has CBCLDLx input set level *) or
logical value one has logical value CBCLDLx input
when current is one when current has logical value
smaller than is smaller than zero
I>BlkCBPos I>BlkCBPos
Table continues on next page

436 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

No. StartMode RetripMode t1 and t2 initiated When t1 has When t2 or t2MPh t1 and t2 and
with elapsed, TRRET will has elapsed, TRBU t2MPh will be
will be given if stopped (reset) if
21 LatchedStart Always external START always be given current is above t1 and (t2 or
set level *) and t2MPh) and 150ms
higher than expires and
I>BlkCBPos or current is below
CBCLDLx input set level *) or
has logical value CBCLDLx input
one when current has logical value
is smaller than zero
I>BlkCBPos
22 FollowStart Off external START never be given current is above external START
set level *) and disappears
higher than
I>BlkCBPos or
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
one when current
is smaller than
I>BlkCBPos
23 FollowStart UseFunction external START be given if current current is above external START
Mode is above set level set level *) and disappears
of IPh> and higher higher than
than I>BlkCBPos or I>BlkCBPos or
CBCLDLx input has CBCLDLx input
logical value one has logical value
when current is one when current
smaller than is smaller than
I>BlkCBPos I>BlkCBPos
24 FollowStart Always external START be given if external current is above external START
START is present set level *) and disappears
higher than
I>BlkCBPos or
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
one when current
is smaller than
I>BlkCBPos
25 FollowStart& Off external START never be given current is above current is below
Mode and current above set level *) and set level *) or
set level higher than external START
I>BlkCBPos or disappears
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
one when current
is smaller than
I>BlkCBPos
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 437

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

No. StartMode RetripMode t1 and t2 initiated When t1 has When t2 or t2MPh t1 and t2 and
with elapsed, TRRET will has elapsed, TRBU t2MPh will be
will be given if stopped (reset) if
26 FollowStart& UseFunction external START be given if current current is above current is below
Mode Mode and current above is above set level set level *) and set level *) or
set level of IPh> and higher higher than external START
than I>BlkCBPos or I>BlkCBPos or disappears
CBCLDLx input has CBCLDLx input
logical value one has logical value
when current is one when current
smaller than is smaller than
I>BlkCBPos I>BlkCBPos
27 FollowStart& Always external START be given if external current is above current is below
Mode and current above START is present set level *) and set level *) or
set level higher than external START
I>BlkCBPos or disappears
CBCLDLx input
has logical value
one when current
is smaller than
I>BlkCBPos
*) Set level depends on selected BuTripMode, that is, set level can be either IPh> or IN> or both.

9.9 Stub protection STBPTOC IP14515-1 v3

9.9.1 Identification
M17108-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Stub protection STBPTOC 50STB

3I>STUB

SYMBOL-T V1 EN-US

9.9.2 Application M12904-3 v5

In a 1½-breaker switchyard the line protection and the busbar protection normally have
overlap when a connected object is in service. When an object is taken out of service it is
normally required to keep the diagonal of the 1½-breaker switchyard in operation. This is done
by opening the disconnector to the protected object. This will, however, disable the normal
object protection (for example the distance protection) of the energized part between the
circuit breakers and the open disconnector.

Stub protection STBPTOC is a simple phase overcurrent protection, fed from the two current
transformer groups feeding the object taken out of service. The stub protection is only
activated when the disconnector of the object is open. STBPTOCenables fast fault clearance of
faults at the section between the CTs and the open disconnector.

438 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

IEC05000465 V2 EN-US

Figure 282: Typical connection for STBPTOC in 1½-breaker arrangement.

9.9.3 Setting guidelines M12909-3 v5

The parameters for Stub protection STBPTOC are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the stub protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: Off/On

ReleaseMode: This parameter can be set Release or Continuous. With theRelease setting the
function is only active when a binary release signal RELEASE into the function is activated. This
signal is normally taken from an auxiliary contact (normally closed) of the line disconnector
and connected to a binary input RELEASE of the IED. With the settingContinuous the function
is activated independent of presence of any external release signal.

I>: Current level for the Stub protection, set in % of IBase. This parameter should be set so that
all faults on the stub can be detected. The setting should thus be based on fault calculations.

t: Time delay of the operation. Normally the function shall be instantaneous.

9.10 Pole discordance protection CCPDSC IP14516-1 v5

Line distance protection REL670 439

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.10.1 Identification
M14888-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 52PD

PD

SYMBOL-S V1 EN-US

9.10.2 Application M13270-3 v6

There is a risk that a circuit breaker will get discordance between the poles at circuit breaker
operation: closing or opening. One pole can be open and the other two closed, or two poles
can be open and one closed. Pole discordance of a circuit breaker will cause unsymmetrical
currents in the power system. The consequence of this can be:

• Negative sequence currents that will give stress on rotating machines

• Zero sequence currents that might give unwanted operation of sensitive earth-fault
protections in the power system.

It is therefore important to detect situations with pole discordance of circuit breakers. When
this is detected the breaker should be tripped directly.

Pole discordance protection CCPDSC will detect situation with deviating positions of the poles
of the protected circuit breaker. The protection has two different options to make this
detection:

• By connecting the auxiliary contacts in the circuit breaker so that logic is created, a signal
can be sent to the protection, indicating pole discordance. This logic can also be realized
within the protection itself, by using opened and close signals for each circuit breaker
pole, connected to the protection.
• Each phase current through the circuit breaker is measured. If the difference between the
phase currents is larger than a CurrUnsymLevel this is an indication of pole discordance,
and the protection will operate.

9.10.3 Setting guidelines M13274-3 v8

The parameters for the Pole discordance protection CCPDSC are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the pole discordance protection.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: Off or On

tTrip: Time delay of the operation.

ContSel: Operation of the contact based pole discordance protection. Can be set: Off/PD
signal from CB. If PD signal from CB is chosen the logic to detect pole discordance is made in
the vicinity to the breaker auxiliary contacts and only one signal is connected to the pole
discordance function. If the Pole pos aux cont. alternative is chosen each open close signal is
connected to the IED and the logic to detect pole discordance is realized within the function
itself.

440 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

CurrSel: Operation of the current based pole discordance protection. Can be set: Off/CB oper
monitor/Continuous monitor. In the alternative CB oper monitor the function is activated only
directly in connection to breaker open or close command (during 200 ms). In the alternative
Continuous monitor function is continuously activated.

CurrUnsymLevel: Unsymmetrical magnitude of lowest phase current compared to the highest,

set in % of the highest phase current. Natural difference between phase currents in 1 1/2
breaker installations must be considered. For circuit breakers in 1 1/2 breaker configured
switch yards there might be natural unbalance currents through the breaker. This is due to the
existence of low impedance current paths in the switch yard. This phenomenon must be
considered in the setting of the parameter.

CurrRelLevel: Current magnitude for release of the function in % of IBase.

9.11 Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP SEMOD156693-1 v4

9.11.1 Identification
SEMOD158941-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 37
P<
2
SYMBOL-LL V2 EN-US

9.11.2 Application SEMOD151283-4 v5

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque
on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not
cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a
synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This
operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for
the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of
electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power
system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task
of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator
itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the steam
ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have reverse power
protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse power: break of a main
steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or inadvertent closing of the
main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to have a reliable reverse power
protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power protection gives
the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By doing so, one prevents the
disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has become zero. Earlier disconnection
would cause an acceleration of the turbine generator at all routine shutdowns. This should
have caused overspeed and high centrifugal stresses.

Line distance protection REL670 441

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses. Instead,
the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the blades. When
a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power consumption will be about
2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it will soon become overheated and
damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades will
become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy blades. The
conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the turbine manufacturer in
each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer connected
to the secondary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a start-up
service transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the reverse power
protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of power to the power
plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only Kaplan
turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that the turbine
runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to
withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake may
cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse power protection
in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power from
the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If there is only
air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about 15% of its
rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps 25% of the rated
power to motor it. An engine that is good run in might need no more than 5%. It is necessary
to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during
commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 283 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower protection and with
overpower protection. The underpower protection gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after
synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower protection (reference angle set
to 0) to trip if the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower protection (reference angle set to 180) to trip if the power flow from the network
to the generator is higher than 1%.

442 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Underpower protection Overpower protection

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC09000019-2-en.vsd
IEC09000019 V2 EN-US

Figure 283: Reverse power protection with underpower or overpower protection

9.11.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD172134-4 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off.

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting possibilities are
shown in table 41.

Table 41: Complex power calculation

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN-US (Equation 485)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN-US (Equation 486)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN-US (Equation 487)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN-US (Equation 488)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN-US (Equation 489)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN-US (Equation 490)
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN-US (Equation 491)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN-US (Equation 492)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN-US (Equation 493)

Line distance protection REL670 443

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set On/Off.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is smaller than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P
Operate

en06000441.vsd
IEC06000441 V1 EN-US

Figure 284: Underpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2) direction. The
setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 494.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the IED are
used.

S N = 3 × UBase × IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN-US (Equation 494)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the power
protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set angle should be
0° or 180°. 0° should be used for generator low forward active power protection.

444 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Operate
Angle1(2) = 0°
P
Power1(2)

en06000556.vsd
IEC06000556 V1 EN-US

Figure 285: For low forward power the set angle should be 0° in the underpower function
TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 495.

S N = 3 × UBase × IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN-US (Equation 495)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown in the
formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1893 V1 EN-US (Equation 496)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter

The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is normally
quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated current/
voltage:

IAmpComp5, IAmpComp30, IAmpComp100

Line distance protection REL670 445

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

UAmpComp5, UAmpComp30, UAmpComp100

IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The values
should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

9.12 Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP SEMOD172360-1 v4

9.12.1 Identification
SEMOD176574-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 32
P>
2
DOCUMENT172362-IMG158942
V2 EN-US

9.12.2 Application SEMOD172358-4 v2

The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as a torque
on a rotating shaft to electric energy.

Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it does not
cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator becomes a
synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the power system. This
operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate as motors, implies no risk for
the machine itself. If the generator under consideration is very large and if it consumes lots of
electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect it to ease the task for the rest of the power
system.

Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state. The task
of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect the generator
itself.

Steam turbines easily become overheated if the steam flow becomes too low or if the steam
ceases to flow through the turbine. Therefore, turbo-generators should have reverse power
protection. There are several contingencies that may cause reverse power: break of a main
steam pipe, damage to one or more blades in the steam turbine or inadvertent closing of the
main stop valves. In the last case, it is highly desirable to have a reliable reverse power
protection. It may prevent damage to an otherwise undamaged plant.

During the routine shutdown of many thermal power units, the reverse power protection gives
the tripping impulse to the generator breaker (the unit breaker). By doing so, one prevents the
disconnection of the unit before the mechanical power has become zero. Earlier disconnection
would cause an acceleration of the turbine generator at all routine shutdowns. This should
have caused overspeed and high centrifugal stresses.

When the steam ceases to flow through a turbine, the cooling of the turbine blades will
disappear. Now, it is not possible to remove all heat generated by the windage losses. Instead,
the heat will increase the temperature in the steam turbine and especially of the blades. When
a steam turbine rotates without steam supply, the electric power consumption will be about

446 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

2% of rated power. Even if the turbine rotates in vacuum, it will soon become overheated and
damaged. The turbine overheats within minutes if the turbine loses the vacuum.

The critical time to overheating of a steam turbine varies from about 0.5 to 30 minutes
depending on the type of turbine. A high-pressure turbine with small and thin blades will
become overheated more easily than a low-pressure turbine with long and heavy blades. The
conditions vary from turbine to turbine and it is necessary to ask the turbine manufacturer in
each case.

Power to the power plant auxiliaries may come from a station service transformer connected
to the primary side of the step-up transformer. Power may also come from a start-up service
transformer connected to the external network. One has to design the reverse power
protection so that it can detect reverse power independent of the flow of power to the power
plant auxiliaries.

Hydro turbines tolerate reverse power much better than steam turbines do. Only Kaplan
turbine and bulb turbines may suffer from reverse power. There is a risk that the turbine
runner moves axially and touches stationary parts. They are not always strong enough to
withstand the associated stresses.

Ice and snow may block the intake when the outdoor temperature falls far below zero.
Branches and leaves may also block the trash gates. A complete blockage of the intake may
cause cavitations. The risk for damages to hydro turbines can justify reverse power protection
in unattended plants.

A hydro turbine that rotates in water with closed wicket gates will draw electric power from
the rest of the power system. This power will be about 10% of the rated power. If there is only
air in the hydro turbine, the power demand will fall to about 3%.

Diesel engines should have reverse power protection. The generator will take about 15% of its
rated power or more from the system. A stiff engine may require perhaps 25% of the rated
power to motor it. An engine that is well run in might need no more than 5%. It is necessary to
obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during
commissioning.

Gas turbines usually do not require reverse power protection.

Figure 286 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower IED and with overpower
IED. The underpower IED gives a higher margin and should provide better dependability. On
the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately after synchronization may be
higher. One should set the underpower IED to trip if the active power from the generator is
less than about 2%. One should set the overpower IED to trip if the power flow from the
network to the generator is higher than 1%.

Underpower IED Overpower IED

Operate
Q Q
Operate
Line Line

Margin Margin
P P

Operating point Operating point

without without
turbine torque turbine torque

IEC06000315-2-en.vsd
IEC06000315 V2 EN-US

Figure 286: Reverse power protection with underpower IED and overpower IED

Line distance protection REL670 447

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.12.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD172150-4 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: With the parameter Operation the function can be set On/Off.

Mode: The voltage and current used for the power measurement. The setting possibilities are
shown in table 42.

Table 42: Complex power calculation

Set value Mode Formula used for complex power calculation
L1, L2, L3
S = U L1 × I L1* + U L 2 × I L 2* + U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1697 V1 EN-US (Equation 498)
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1698 V1 EN-US (Equation 499)
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq*
EQUATION1699 V1 EN-US (Equation 500)
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
EQUATION1700 V1 EN-US (Equation 501)
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
EQUATION1701 V1 EN-US (Equation 502)
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
EQUATION1702 V1 EN-US (Equation 503)
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
EQUATION1703 V1 EN-US (Equation 504)
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
EQUATION1704 V1 EN-US (Equation 505)
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
EQUATION1705 V1 EN-US (Equation 506)

The function has two stages that can be set independently.

With the parameter OpMode1(2) the function can be set On/Off.

The function gives trip if the power component in the direction defined by the setting
Angle1(2) is larger than the set pick up power value Power1(2)

448 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

Operate

Power1(2)

Angle1(2)
P

en06000440.vsd
IEC06000440 V1 EN-US

Figure 287: Overpower mode

The setting Power1(2) gives the power component pick up value in the Angle1(2) direction. The
setting is given in p.u. of the generator rated power, see equation 507.

Minimum recommended setting is 0.2% of SN when metering class CT inputs into the IED are
used.

S N = 3 × UBase × IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN-US (Equation 507)

The setting Angle1(2) gives the characteristic angle giving maximum sensitivity of the power
protection function. The setting is given in degrees. For active power the set angle should be
0° or 180°. 180° should be used for generator reverse power protection.

Line distance protection REL670 449

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

Operate Angle1(2 ) = 180 o

P
Power1(2)

IEC06000557-2-en.vsd
IEC06000557 V2 EN-US

Figure 288: For reverse power the set angle should be 180° in the overpower function
TripDelay1(2) is set in seconds to give the time delay for trip of the stage after pick up.

Hysteresis1(2) is given in p.u. of generator rated power according to equation 508.

S N = 3 × UBase × IBase
EQUATION1708 V1 EN-US (Equation 508)

The drop out power will be Power1(2) - Hysteresis1(2).

The possibility to have low pass filtering of the measured power can be made as shown in the
formula:

S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
EQUATION1893 V1 EN-US (Equation 509)

Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle

SCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter

The value of k=0.92 is recommended in generator applications as the trip delay is normally
quite long.

The calibration factors for current and voltage measurement errors are set % of rated current/
voltage:

450 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

IAmpComp5, IAmpComp30, IAmpComp100

UAmpComp5, UAmpComp30, UAmpComp100

IAngComp5, IAngComp30, IAngComp100

The angle compensation is given as difference between current and voltage angle errors.

The values are given for operating points 5, 30 and 100% of rated current/voltage. The values
should be available from instrument transformer test protocols.

9.13 Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171761-1 v3

9.13.1 Identification
SEMOD172362-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC - 46

9.13.2 Application SEMOD171858-5 v3

Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. Broken
conductor check (BRCPTOC) function, consisting of continuous current unsymmetrical check
on the line where the IED connected will give alarm or trip at detecting broken conductors.

9.13.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171866-5 v4

Broken conductor check BRCPTOC must be set to detect open phase/s (series faults) with
different loads on the line. BRCPTOC must at the same time be set to not operate for
maximum asymmetry which can exist due to, for example, not transposed power lines.

All settings are in primary values or percentage.

Set IBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) to power line rated current or CT rated current.

Set minimum operating level per phase IP> to typically 10-20% of rated current.

Set the unsymmetrical current, which is relation between the difference of the minimum and
maximum phase currents to the maximum phase current to typical Iub> = 50%.

Note that it must be set to avoid problem with asymmetry under minimum
operating conditions.

Set the time delay tOper = 5 - 60 seconds and reset time tReset = 0.010 - 60.000 seconds.

Line distance protection REL670 451

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.14 Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection

VRPVOC GUID-613620B1-4092-4FB6-901D-6810CDD5C615 v4

9.14.1 Identification GUID-7835D582-3FF4-4587-81CE-3B40D543E287 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent VRPVOC I>/U< 51V
protection

9.14.2 Application GUID-622CDDDD-6D03-430E-A82D-861A4CBE067C v7

A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and earth
results in a short-circuit or an earth fault. Such faults can result in large fault currents and may
cause severe damage to the power system primary equipment.

A typical application of the voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection is in the generator

protection system, where it is used as backup protection. If a phase-to-phase fault affects a
generator, the fault current amplitude is a function of time, and it depends on generator
characteristic (reactances and time constants), its load conditions (immediately before the
fault) and excitation system performance and characteristic. So the fault current amplitude
may decay with time. A voltage-restrained overcurrent relay can be set in order to remain in
the picked-up state in spite of the current decay, and perform a backup trip in case of failure
of the main protection.

The IED can be provided with a voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC). The
VRPVOC function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in
the configuration tool, but it will always measure the maximum phase current and the
minimum phase-to-phase voltage.

VRPVOC function module has two independent protection each consisting of:

• One overcurrent step with the following built-in features:

• Selectable definite time delay or Inverse Time IDMT characteristic
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the start level of
the overcurrent stage in proportion to the magnitude of the measured voltage
• One undervoltage step with the following built-in feature:
• Definite time delay

The undervoltage function can be enabled or disabled. Sometimes in order to obtain the
desired application functionality it is necessary to provide interaction between the two
protection elements within the VRPVOC function by appropriate IED configuration (for
example, overcurrent protection with under-voltage seal-in). Sometimes in order to obtain the
desired application functionality it is necessary to provide interaction between the two
protection elements within the D2PTOC function by appropriate IED configuration (for
example, overcurrent protection with under-voltage seal-in).

9.14.2.1 Base quantities GUID-08944177-73CF-4FB4-818E-3B7AC4F625EE v4

GlobalBaseSel defines the particular Global Base Values Group where the base quantities of
the function are set. In that Global Base Values Group:

IBase shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes.

452 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

UBase shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV.

9.14.2.2 Application possibilities GUID-5053F964-C2D6-4611-B5EF-AC3DB0889F51 v5

VRPVOC function can be used in one of the following applications:

• voltage controlled over-current

• voltage restrained over-current

In both applications a seal-in of the overcurrent function at under-voltage can be included by

configuration.

9.14.2.3 Undervoltage seal-in GUID-13BE02D3-1322-4075-859B-617CFF608657 v7

In the case of a generator with a static excitation system, which receives its power from the
generator terminals, the magnitude of a sustained phase short-circuit current depends on the
generator terminal voltage. In case of a nearby multi-phase fault, the generator terminal
voltage may drop to quite low level, for example, less than 25%, and the generator fault current
may consequently fall below the pickup level of the overcurrent protection. The short-circuit
current may drop below the generator rated current after 0.5...1 s. Also, for generators with an
excitation system not fed from the generator terminals, a fault can occur when the automatic
voltage regulator is out of service. In such cases, to ensure tripping under such conditions,
overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in can be used.

To apply the VRPVOC function, the configuration is done according to figure 289. As seen in
the figure, the pickup of the overcurrent stage will enable the undervoltage stage. Once
enabled, the undervoltage stage will start a timer, which causes function tripping, if the
voltage does not recover above the set value. To ensure a proper reset, the function is blocked
two seconds after the trip signal is issued.

VRPVOC
I3P* TRIP Trip output
OR U3P* TROC
BLOCK TRUV
t
BLKOC START
OR BLKUV STOC
STUV

IEC12000183-1-en.vsd
IEC12000183 V1 EN-US

Figure 289: Undervoltage seal-in of current start

9.14.3 Setting guidelines GUID-2AE85EC4-669E-47C0-ADD4-3DBA83581096 v3

Common base IED values for the primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Line distance protection REL670 453

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

9.14.3.1 Explanation of the setting parameters GUID-9B777E6D-602B-4214-9170-A44ED2D725BF v3

Operation: Set to On in order to activate the function; set to Off to switch off the complete
function.

StartCurr: Operation phase current level given in % of IBase.

Characterist: Selection of time characteristic: Definite time delay and different types of inverse
time characteristics are available; see Technical Manual for details.

tDef_OC: Definite time delay. It is used if definite time characteristic is chosen; it shall be set
to 0 s if the inverse time characteristic is chosen and no additional delay shall be added. Note
that the value set is the time between activation of the start and the trip outputs.

k: Time multiplier for inverse time delay.

tMin: Minimum operation time for all inverse time characteristics. At high currents the inverse
time characteristic might give a very short operation time. By setting this parameter the
operation time of the step can never be shorter than the setting.

Operation_UV: it sets On/Off the operation of the under-voltage stage.

StartVolt: Operation phase-to-phase voltage level given in % of UBase for the under-voltage
stage. Typical setting may be, for example, in the range from 70% to 80% of the rated voltage
of the generator.

tDef_UV: Definite time delay. Since it is related to a backup protection function, a long time
delay (for example 0.5 s or more) is typically used. Note that the value set is the time between
activation of the start and the trip outputs.

EnBlkLowV: This parameter enables the internal block of the undervoltage stage for low
voltage condition; the voltage level is defined by the parameter BlkLowVolt.

BlkLowVolt: Voltage level under which the internal blocking of the undervoltage stage is
activated; it is set in % of UBase. This setting must be lower than the setting StartVolt. The
setting can be very low, for example, lower than 10%.

VDepMode: Selection of the characteristic of the start level of the overcurrent stage as a
function of the phase-to-phase voltage; two options are available: Slope and Step. See
Technical Manual for details about the characteristics.

VDepFact: Slope mode: it is the start level of the overcurrent stage given in % of StartCurr
when the voltage is lower than 25% of UBase; so it defines the first point of the characteristic
(VDepFact*StartCurr/100*IBase ; 0.25*UBase). Step mode: it is the start level of the
overcurrent stage given in % of StartCurr when the voltage is lower than UHighLimit/
100*UBase.

UHighLimit: when the measured phase-to-phase voltage is higher than UHighLimit/

100*UBase, than the start level of the overcurrent stage is StartCurr/100*IBase. In particular, in
Slope mode it define the second point of the characteristic (StartCurr/100*IBase ; UHighLimit/
100*UBase).

9.14.3.2 Voltage-restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer GUID-263B960B-2280-461C-B455-F17B7D278F60 v8

An example of how to use VRPVOC function to provide voltage restrained overcurrent

protection for a generator is given below. Let us assume that the time coordination study
gives the following required settings:

454 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 9
Current protection

• Inverse Time Over Current IDMT curve: IEC very inverse, with multiplier k=1
• Start current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Start current 25% of the original start current value for generator voltages below 25% of
rated voltage

To ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Set Operation to On
2. Set GlobalBaseSel to the right value in order to select the Global Base Values Group with
UBase and IBase equal to the rated phase-to-phase voltage and the rated phase current of
the generator.
3. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to VRPVOC in the application
configuration.
4. Select Characterist to match the type of overcurrent curves used in the network IEC Very
inv.
5. Set the multiplier k = 1 (default value).
6. Set tDef_OC = 0.00 s, in order to add no additional delay to the trip time defined by the
inverse time characteristic.
7. If required, set the minimum operating time for this curve by using the parameter tMin
(default value 0.05 s).
8. Set StartCurr to the value 185%.
9. Set VDepMode to Slope (default value).
10. Set VDepFact to the value 25% (default value).
11. Set UHighLimit to the value 100% (default value).

All other settings can be left at the default values.

9.14.3.3 Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in GUID-B58E1CD6-F9AE-4301-ABE7-90DBFC987D69 v6

To obtain this functionality, the IED application configuration shall include a logic in
accordance to figure 289 and, of course, the relevant three-phase generator currents and
voltages shall be connected to VRPVOC. Let us assume that, taking into account the
characteristic of the generator, the excitation system and the short circuit study, the following
settings are required:

• Start current of the overcurrent stage: 150% of generator rated current at rated generator
voltage;
• Start voltage of the undervoltage stage: 70% of generator rated voltage;
• Trip time: 3.0 s.

The overcurrent stage and the undervoltage stage shall be set in the following way:

1. Set Operation to On.

2. Set GlobalBaseSel to the right value in order to select the Global Base Values Group with
UBase and IBase equal to the rated phase-to-phase voltage and the rated phase current of
the generator.
3. Set StartCurr to the value 150%.
4. Set Characteristic to IEC Def. Time.
5. Set tDef_OC to 6000.00 s, if no trip of the overcurrent stage is required.
6. Set VDepFact to the value 100% in order to ensure that the start value of the overcurrent
stage is constant, irrespective of the magnitude of the generator voltage.
7. Set Operation_UV to On to activate the undervoltage stage.
8. Set StartVolt to the values 70%.
9. Set tDef_UV to 3.0 s.
10. Set EnBlkLowV to Off (default value) to disable the cut-off level for low-voltage of the
undervoltage stage.

Line distance protection REL670 455

Application manual
Section 9 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Current protection

The other parameters may be left at their default value.

456 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

Section 10 Voltage protection

10.1 Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV IP14544-1 v3

10.1.1 Identification
M16876-1 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 27

3U<

V2 EN-US
SYMBOL-R-2U-GREATER-THAN

10.1.2 Application M13790-3 v8

Two-step undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) is applied to power system elements,

such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect low voltage
conditions. It is used as a supervision and fault detection function for other protection
functions as well, to increase the security of a complete protection system. Low voltage
conditions are caused by abnormal operation or faults in the power system, such as:

• Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control

(symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Overload (symmetrical voltage decrease)
• Short circuits, often as phase-to-earth faults (unsymmetrical voltage decrease)

UV2PTUV is used in combination with overcurrent protections, either as restraint or in logic

"and gates" of the trip signals issued by the two functions. It can also be used to:

• Detect no voltage conditions, for example, before the energization of a HV line or for
automatic breaker trip in case of a blackout
• Initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt capacitor banks to
compensate for reactive load and thereby increasing the voltage
• Disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when subject to
service under low voltage conditions.

The function has a high measuring accuracy and a settable hysteresis to allow applications to
control reactive load.

In many cases, UV2PTUV is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation
processes in the power system.

10.1.3 Setting guidelines M13851-3 v9

All the voltage conditions in the system where UV2PTUV performs its functions should be
considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time
characteristic.

Line distance protection REL670 457

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

There is a very wide application area where general undervoltage functions are used. All
voltage-related settings are made as a percentage of the global base value UBase, which
normally is set to the primary rated voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the
high voltage equipment under consideration.

The trip time setting for UV2PTUV is normally not critical, since there must be enough time
available for the main protection to clear short circuits and earth faults.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are described in the
following sections.

10.1.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators M13851-50 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage for the equipment.

10.1.3.2 Disconnected equipment detection M13851-53 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage, caused by inductive or capacitive coupling, when the equipment is
disconnected.

10.1.3.3 Power supply quality M13851-56 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the lowest
acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

10.1.3.4 Voltage instability mitigation M13851-59 v3

This setting is very much dependent on the power system characteristics, and thorough
studies have to be made to find the suitable levels.

10.1.3.5 Backup protection for power system faults M13851-62 v3

The setting must be below the lowest occurring "normal" voltage and above the highest
occurring voltage during the fault conditions under consideration.

10.1.3.6 Settings for two step undervoltage protection M13851-65 v14

The following settings can be done for Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV:

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-
to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value.

Operation: Off or On.

UBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase-to-phase in primary kV. This voltage is
used as reference for voltage setting. UV2PTUV will operate if the voltage becomes lower than
the set percentage of UBase. This setting is used when ConnType is set to PhPh DFT or PhPh
RMS. Therefore, always set UBase as rated primary phase-to-phase voltage of the protected
object. For more information, refer to the Technical manual.

The setting parameters described below are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2). Therefore,
the setting parameters are described only once.

458 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be
Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Prog. inv. curve. The selection is dependent on
the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages should be
below the set level to give operation for step n. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3 or 3 out
of 3. In most applications, it is sufficient that one phase voltage is low to give operation. If
UV2PTUV shall be insensitive for single phase-to-earth faults, 2 out of 3 can be chosen. In
subtransmission and transmission networks the undervoltage function is mainly a system
supervision function and 3 out of 3 is selected.

Un<: Set operate undervoltage operation value for step n, given as % of the parameter UBase.
The setting is highly dependent on the protection application. It is essential to consider the
minimum voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally, this non-faulted voltage is larger than
90% of the nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. This setting is dependent on the protection application. In
many applications the protection function shall not directly trip when there is a short circuit or
earth faults in the system. The time delay must be coordinated to the other short circuit
protections.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25
ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. When
using inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage function during very low voltages can
give a short operation time. This might lead to unselective tripping. By setting t1Min longer
than the operation time for other protections, such unselective tripping can be avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set to Instantaneous,
Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25
ms.

kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for coordination
between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to create a programmable under voltage
inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the Technical manual.

CrvSatn: Tuning parameter that is used to compensate for the undesired discontinuity created
when the denominator in the equation for the customer programmable curve is equal to zero.
For more information, see the Technical manual.

IntBlkSeln: This parameter can be set to Off, Block of trip, Block all. In case of a low voltage the
undervoltage function can be blocked. This function can be used to prevent function when the
protected object is switched off. If the parameter is set Block of trip or Block all unwanted trip
is prevented.

IntBlkStValn: Voltage level under which the blocking is activated set in % of UBase. This setting
must be lower than the setting Un<. As switch of shall be detected the setting can be very low,
that is, about 10%.

tBlkUVn: Time delay to block the undervoltage step n when the voltage level is below
IntBlkStValn, given in s. It is important that this delay is shorter than the operate time delay of
the undervoltage protection step.

10.2 Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV IP14545-1 v3

Line distance protection REL670 459

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

10.2.1 Identification
M17002-1 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 59

3U>

SYMBOL-C-2U-SMALLER-THAN V2 EN-US

10.2.2 Application M13799-3 v9

Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV is applicable in all situations, where reliable
detection of high voltage is necessary. OV2PTOV is used for supervision and detection of
abnormal conditions, which, in combination with other protection functions, increase the
security of a complete protection system.

High overvoltage conditions are caused by abnormal situations in the power system. OV2PTOV
is applied to power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power
lines in order to detect high voltage conditions. OV2PTOV is used in combination with low
current signals, to identify a transmission line, open in the remote end. In addition to that,
OV2PTOV is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, like insertion of shunt reactors,
to compensate for low load, and thereby decreasing the voltage. The function has a high
measuring accuracy and hysteresis setting to allow applications to control reactive load.

OV2PTOV is used to disconnect apparatuses, like electric motors, which will be damaged when
subject to service under high voltage conditions. It deals with high voltage conditions at
power system frequency, which can be caused by:

1. Different kinds of faults, where a too high voltage appears in a certain power system, like
metallic connection to a higher voltage level (broken conductor falling down to a crossing
overhead line, transformer flash over fault from the high voltage winding to the low
voltage winding and so on).
2. Malfunctioning of a voltage regulator or wrong settings under manual control
(symmetrical voltage decrease).
3. Low load compared to the reactive power generation (symmetrical voltage decrease).
4. Earth-faults in high impedance earthed systems causes, beside the high voltage in the
neutral, high voltages in the two non-faulted phases, (unsymmetrical voltage increase).

OV2PTOV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause their
overheating or stress of insulation material, and, thus, shorten their life time expectancy. In
many cases, it is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the
power system.

10.2.3 Setting guidelines M13852-4 v10

The parameters for Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

All the voltage conditions in the system where OV2PTOV performs its functions should be
considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage and time
characteristic.

There are wide applications where general overvoltage functions are used. All voltage related
settings are made as a percentage of a settable base primary voltage, which is normally set to

460 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

the nominal voltage level (phase-to-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment
under consideration.

The time delay for the OV2PTOV can sometimes be critical and related to the size of the
overvoltage - a power system or a high voltage component can withstand smaller overvoltages
for some time, but in case of large overvoltages the related equipment should be disconnected
more rapidly.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the voltage level are given below:

The hysteresis is for overvoltage functions very important to prevent that a transient voltage
over set level is not “sealed-in” due to a high hysteresis. Typical values should be ≤ 0.5%.

10.2.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformers M13852-10 v3

High voltage will cause overexcitation of the core and deteriorate the winding insulation. The
setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest
acceptable voltage for the equipment.

10.2.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors M13852-13 v1

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectricum and the insulation. The setting has to be well
above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and well below the highest acceptable voltage
for the capacitor.

10.2.3.3 Power supply quality M13852-16 v1

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the highest
acceptable voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

10.2.3.4 High impedance earthed systems M13852-19 v6

In high impedance earthed systems, earth-faults cause a voltage increase in the non-faulty
phases. Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) is used to detect such faults. The setting
must be above the highest occurring "normal" voltage and below the lowest occurring voltage
during faults. A metallic single-phase earth-fault causes the non-faulted phase voltages to
increase a factor of √3.

10.2.3.5 The following settings can be done for the two step overvoltage
protection M13852-22 v10

ConnType: Sets whether the measurement shall be phase-to-earth fundamental value, phase-
to-phase fundamental value, phase-to-earth RMS value or phase-to-phase RMS value.

Operation: Off/On.

UBase (given in GlobalBaseSel): Base voltage phase to phase in primary kV. This voltage is used
as reference for voltage setting. OV2PTOV measures selectively phase-to-earth voltages, or
phase-to-phase voltage chosen by the setting ConnType. The function will operate if the
voltage gets lower than the set percentage of UBase. When ConnType is set to PhN DFT or PhN
RMS then the IED automatically divides set value for UBase by √3. When ConnType is set to
PhPh DFT or PhPh RMS then set value for UBase is used. Therefore, always set UBase as rated
primary phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object. If phase to neutral (PhN)
measurement is selected as setting, the operation of phase-to-earth over voltage is
automatically divided by sqrt3. This means operation for phase-to-earth voltage over:

Line distance protection REL670 461

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

U > (%) × UBase(kV ) / 3

and operation for phase-to-phase voltage over:

U > (%) × UBase(kV)

EQUATION1993 V1 EN-US (Equation 511)

The below described setting parameters are identical for the two steps (n = 1 or 2). Therefore
the setting parameters are described only once.

Characteristicn: This parameter gives the type of time delay to be used. The setting can be
Definite time, Inverse Curve A, Inverse Curve B, Inverse Curve C or I/Prog. inv. curve. The choice
is highly dependent of the protection application.

OpModen: This parameter describes how many of the three measured voltages that should be
above the set level to give operation. The setting can be 1 out of 3, 2 out of 3, 3 out of 3. In
most applications it is sufficient that one phase voltage is high to give operation. If the
function shall be insensitive for single phase-to-earth faults 1 out of 3 can be chosen, because
the voltage will normally rise in the non-faulted phases at single phase-to-earth faults. In
subtransmission and transmission networks the UV function is mainly a system supervision
function and 3 out of 3 is selected.

Un>: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of UBase. The setting is
highly dependent of the protection application. Here it is essential to consider the maximum
voltage at non-faulted situations. Normally this voltage is less than 110% of nominal voltage.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent of the protection
application. In many applications the protection function is used to prevent damages to the
protected object. The speed might be important for example in case of protection of
transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be co-ordinated with other
automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25
ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very
high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short
operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation
time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: This parameter for inverse time characteristic can be set: Instantaneous,
Frozen time, Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25
ms.

kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-ordination
between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters to set to create programmable under voltage
inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical reference manual.

CrvSatn: When the denominator in the expression of the programmable curve is equal to zero
the time delay will be infinity. There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning
parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval Un> up
to Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: Un> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the
programmable curve is used, this parameter must be calculated so that:

462 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN-US (Equation 512)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is highly
dependent of the application. If the function is used as control for automatic switching of
reactive compensation devices the hysteresis must be set smaller than the voltage change
after switching of the compensation device.

10.3 Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV IP14546-1 v4

10.3.1 Identification
SEMOD54295-2 v6

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Two step residual overvoltage ROV2PTOV 59N
protection
2(U0>)

IEC15000108 V1 EN-US

10.3.2 Application M13809-3 v8

Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is primarily used in high impedance
earthed distribution networks, mainly as a backup for the primary earth-fault protection of the
feeders and the transformer. To increase the security for different earth-fault related
functions, the residual overvoltage signal can be used as a release signal. The residual voltage
can be measured either at the transformer neutral or from a voltage transformer open delta
connection. The residual voltage can also be calculated internally, based on the measurement
of the three phase-to-earth voltages.

In high impedance earthed systems the residual voltage will increase in case of any fault
connected to earth. Depending on the type of fault and fault resistance the residual voltage
will reach different values. The highest residual voltage, equal to three times the phase-to-
earth voltage, is achieved for a single phase-to-earth fault. The residual voltage increases
approximately to the same level in the whole system and does not provide any guidance in
finding the faulted component. Therefore, ROV2PTOV is often used as a backup protection or
as a release signal for the feeder earth-fault protection.

10.3.3 Setting guidelines M13853-3 v8

All the voltage conditions in the system where ROV2PTOV performs its functions should be
considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its voltage withstand
capability and time characteristic.

All voltage-related settings are made as a percentage of a settable base voltage, which shall be
set to the primary nominal voltage (phase-phase) level of the power system or the high-
voltage equipment under consideration.

The time delay for ROV2PTOV is seldom critical, since residual voltage is related to earth faults
in a high-impedance earthed system, and enough time must normally be given for the primary
protection to clear the fault. In some more specific situations, where the residual overvoltage
protection is used to protect some specific equipment, the time delay is shorter.

Line distance protection REL670 463

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the residual voltage level are given below.

10.3.3.1 Equipment protection, such as for motors, generators, reactors and

transformersEquipment protection for transformers M13853-9 v8

High residual voltage indicates earth-fault in the system, perhaps in the component to which
two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV) is connected. For selectivity reasons to
the primary protection for the faulted device, ROV2PTOV must trip the component with some
time delay. The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and
below the highest acceptable residual voltage for the equipment.

10.3.3.2 Equipment protection, capacitors M13853-12 v4

High voltage will deteriorate the dielectric and the insulation. Two step residual overvoltage
protection (ROV2PTOV) has to be connected to a neutral or open delta winding. The setting
must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the highest
acceptable residual voltage for the capacitor.

10.3.3.3 Power supply quality M13853-15 v3

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" residual voltage and below the
highest acceptable residual voltage, due to regulation, good practice or other agreements.

10.3.3.4 High impedance earthed systems M13853-18 v10

In high impedance earthed systems, earth faults cause a neutral voltage in the feeding
transformer neutral. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV is used to trip the
transformer, as a backup protection for the feeder earth-fault protection, and as a backup for
the transformer primary earth-fault protection. The setting must be above the highest
occurring "normal" residual voltage, and below the lowest occurring residual voltage during
the faults under consideration. A metallic single-phase earth fault causes a transformer neutral
to reach a voltage equal to the nominal phase-to-earth voltage.

The voltage transformers measuring the phase-to-earth voltages measure zero voltage in the
faulty phase. The two healthy phases will measure full phase-to-phase voltage, as the faulty
phase will be connected to earth. The residual overvoltage will be three times the phase-to-
earth voltage. See figure 290.

464 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

UL1
3U0

IEC07000190-2-en.vsd

IEC07000190 V2 EN-US

Figure 290: Earth fault in Non-effectively earthed systems

10.3.3.5 Direct earthed system GUID-EA622F55-7978-4D1C-9AF7-2BAB5628070A v8

In direct earthed systems, an earth fault on one phase is indicated by voltage collapse in that
phase. The other healthy phase will still have normal phase-to-earth voltage. The residual sum
will have the same value as the remaining phase-to-earth voltage, which is shown in Figure 291.
UL1

IEC07000189-2-en.vsd

IEC07000189 V2 EN-US

Figure 291: Earth fault in Direct earthed system

10.3.3.6 Settings for two step residual overvoltage protection M13853-21 v13

Operation: Off or On

UBase (given in GlobalBaseSel) is used as voltage reference for the set pickup values. The
voltage can be fed to the IED in different ways:

Line distance protection REL670 465

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

1. The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual voltage is
calculated internally from the phase-to-earth voltages within the protection. The setting
of the analog input is given as UBase=Uph-ph.
2. The IED is fed from a broken delta connection normal voltage transformer group. In an
open delta connection the protection is fed by the voltage 3U0 (single input). Section
Analog inputs in the Application manual explains how the analog input needs to be set.
3. The IED is fed from a single voltage transformer connected to the neutral point of a power
transformer in the power system. In this connection the protection is fed by the voltage
UN=U0 (single input). Section Analog inputs in the Application manual explains how the
analog input needs to be set.

ROV2PTOV will measure the residual voltage corresponding to the nominal phase-to-earth
voltage for a high-impedance earthed system. The measurement will be based on the neutral
voltage displacement.

The setting parameters described below are identical for the two steps (n = step 1 and 2).
Therefore the setting parameters are described only once.

OperationStepn: This is to enable/disable operation of step n.

Characteristicn: Selected inverse time characteristic for step n. This parameter gives the type
of time delay to be used. The setting can be, Definite time or Inverse curve A or Inverse curve B
or Inverse curve C or Prog. inv. curve. The choice is highly dependent of the protection
application.

Un>: Set operate overvoltage operation value for step n, given as % of residual voltage
corresponding to UBase:

U > ( % ) × UBase ( kV ) 3
IECEQUATION2290 V1 EN-US (Equation 513)

The setting depends on the required sensitivity of the protection and the type of system
earthing. In non-effectively earthed systems, the residual voltage cannot be higher than three
times the rated phase-to-earth voltage, which should correspond to 100%.

In effectively earthed systems, this value depends on the ratio Z0/Z1. The required setting to
detect high resistive earth faults must be based on network calculations.

tn: time delay of step n, given in s. The setting is highly dependent on the protection
application. In many applications, the protection function has the task to prevent damage to
the protected object. The speed might be important, for example, in the case of the protection
of a transformer that might be overexcited. The time delay must be co-ordinated with other
automated actions in the system.

tResetn: Reset time for step n if definite time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25
ms.

tnMin: Minimum operation time for inverse time characteristic for step n, given in s. For very
high voltages the overvoltage function, using inverse time characteristic, can give very short
operation time. This might lead to unselective trip. By setting t1Min longer than the operation
time for other protections such unselective tripping can be avoided.

ResetTypeCrvn: Set reset type curve for step n. This parameter can be set:
Instantaneous,Frozen time,Linearly decreased. The default setting is Instantaneous.

tIResetn: Reset time for step n if inverse time delay is used, given in s. The default value is 25
ms.

kn: Time multiplier for inverse time characteristic. This parameter is used for co-ordination
between different inverse time delayed undervoltage protections.

466 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

ACrvn, BCrvn, CCrvn, DCrvn, PCrvn: Parameters for step n, to set to create programmable
undervoltage inverse time characteristic. Description of this can be found in the technical
reference manual.

CrvSatn: Set tuning parameter for step n. When the denominator in the expression of the
programmable curve is equal to zero, the time delay will be infinite. There will be an undesired
discontinuity. Therefore, a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set to compensate for this
phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be:
U> · (1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable curve is used this parameter must be calculated
so that:

CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100
EQUATION1448 V1 EN-US (Equation 514)

HystAbsn: Absolute hysteresis for step n, set in % of UBase. The setting of this parameter is
highly dependent of the application. The hysteresis is used to avoid oscillations of the START
output signal. This signal resets when the measured voltage drops below the setting level and
leaves the hysteresis area. Make sure that the set value for parameter HystABSn is somewhat
smaller than the set pickup value. Otherwise there is a risk that step n will not reset properly.

10.4 Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH IP14547-1 v3

10.4.1 Identification
M14867-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 24

U/f >

SYMBOL-Q V1 EN-US

10.4.2 Application M13785-3 v6

When the laminated core of a power transformer is subjected to a magnetic flux density
beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components not designed to
carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy currents can cause excessive heating and
severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time.

Overvoltage, or underfrequency, or a combination of both, will result in an excessive flux

density level, which is denominated overfluxing or over-excitation.

The greatest risk for overexcitation exists in a thermal power station when the generator-
transformer block is disconnected from the rest of the network, or in network “islands”
occuring at disturbance where high voltages and/or low frequencies can occur. Overexcitation
can occur during start-up and shut-down of the generator if the field current is not properly
adjusted. Loss-of load or load-shedding can also result in overexcitation if the voltage control
and frequency governor is not functioning properly. Loss of load or load-shedding at a
transformer substation can result in overexcitation if the voltage control function is
insufficient or out of order. Low frequency in a system isolated from the main network can
result in overexcitation if the voltage regulating system maintains normal voltage.

According to the IEC standards, the power transformers shall be capable of delivering rated
load current continuously at an applied voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated frequency). For

Line distance protection REL670 467

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

special cases, the purchaser may specify that the transformer shall be capable of operating
continuously at an applied voltage 110% of rated value at no load, reduced to 105% at rated
secondary load current.

According to ANSI/IEEE standards, the transformers shall be capable of delivering rated load
current continuously at an output voltage of 105% of rated value (at rated frequency) and
operate continuously with output voltage equal to 110% of rated value at no load.

The capability of a transformer (or generator) to withstand overexcitation can be illustrated in

the form of a thermal capability curve, that is, a diagram which shows the permissible time as
a function of the level of over-excitation. When the transformer is loaded, the induced voltage
and hence the flux density in the core can not be read off directly from the transformer
terminal voltage. Normally, the leakage reactance of each separate winding is not known and
the flux density in the transformer core can then not be calculated. In two-winding
transformers, the low voltage winding is normally located close to the core and the voltage
across this winding reflects the flux density in the core. However, depending on the design, the
flux flowing in the yoke may be critical for the ability of the transformer to handle excess flux.

The Overexcitation protection (OEXPVPH) has current inputs to allow calculation of the load
influence on the induced voltage. This gives a more exact measurement of the magnetizing
flow. For power transformers with unidirectional load flow, the voltage to OEXPVPH should
therefore be taken from the feeder side.

Heat accumulated in critical parts during a period of overexcitation will be reduced gradually
when the excitation returns to the normal value. If a new period of overexcitation occurs after
a short time interval, the heating will start from a higher level, therefore, OEXPVPH must have
thermal memory. A fixed cooling time constant is settable within a wide range.

The general experience is that the overexcitation characteristics for a number of power
transformers are not in accordance with standard inverse time curves. In order to make
optimal settings possible, a transformer adapted characteristic is available in the IED. The
operate characteristic of the protection function can be set to correspond quite well with any
characteristic by setting the operate time for six different figures of overexcitation in the
range from 100% to 180% of rated V/Hz.

When configured to a single phase-to-phase voltage input, a corresponding phase-to-phase

current is calculated which has the same phase angle relative the phase-to-phase voltage as
the phase currents have relative the phase voltages in a symmetrical system. The function
should preferably be configured to use a three-phase voltage input if available. It then uses the
positive sequence quantities of voltages and currents.

Analog measurements shall not be taken from any winding where a load tap
changer is located.

Some different connection alternatives are shown in figure 292.

468 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

24
U/f>

24 24
U/f> U/f>

en05000208.vsd
IEC05000208 V1 EN-US

Figure 292: Alternative connections of an Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH(Volt/Hertz)

10.4.3 Setting guidelines IP15039-1 v1

10.4.3.1 Recommendations for input and output signals M6496-75 v4

Recommendations for Input signals M6496-79 v5

Please see the default factory configuration.

BLOCK: The input will block the operation of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH, for
example, the block input can be used to block the operation for a limited time during special
service conditions.

RESET: OEXPVPH has a thermal memory, which can take a long time to reset. Activation of the
RESET input will reset the function instantaneously.

Recommendations for Output signals M6496-84 v7

Please see the default factory configuration for examples of configuration.

ERROR: The output indicates a measuring error. The reason, for example, can be configuration
problems where analogue signals are missing.

START: The START output indicates that the level V/Hz>> has been reached. It can be used to
initiate time measurement.

TRIP: The TRIP output is activated after the operate time for the U/f level has expired. TRIP
signal is used to trip the circuit breaker(s).

ALARM: The output is activated when the alarm level has been reached and the alarm timer has
elapsed. When the system voltage is high this output sends an alarm to the operator.

10.4.3.2 Settings M6496-91 v7

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Line distance protection REL670 469

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

Operation: The operation of the Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH can be set to On/Off.

MeasuredU: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. Normally the three phase
measurement measuring the positive sequence voltage should be used but when only
individual VT's are used a single phase-to-phase can be used.

MeasuredI: The phases involved in the measurement are set here. MeasuredI: must be in
accordance with MeasuredU.

V/Hz>: Operating level for the inverse characteristic, IEEE or tailor made. The operation is
based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as a percentage
factor. Normal setting is around 108-110% depending of the capability curve for the
transformer/generator.

V/Hz>>: Operating level for the tMin definite time delay used at high overvoltages. The
operation is based on the relation between rated voltage and rated frequency and set as a
percentage factor. Normal setting is around 110-180% depending of the capability curve of the
transformer/generator. Setting should be above the knee-point when the characteristic starts
to be straight on the high side.

XLeak: The transformer leakage reactance on which the compensation of voltage

measurement with load current is based. The setting shall be the transformer leak reactance in
primary ohms. If no current compensation is used (mostly the case) the setting is not used.

TrPulse: The length of the trip pulse. Normally the final trip pulse is decided by the trip function
block. A typical pulse length can be 50 ms.

CurveType: Selection of the curve type for the inverse delay. The IEEE curves or tailor made
curve can be selected depending of which one matches the capability curve best.

kForIEEE: The time constant for the inverse characteristic. Select the one giving the best
match to the transformer capability.

tCooling: The cooling time constant giving the reset time when voltages drops below the set
value. Shall be set above the cooling time constant of the transformer. The default value is
recommended to be used if the constant is not known.

tMin: The operating times at voltages higher than the set V/Hz>>. The setting shall match
capabilities on these high voltages. Typical setting can be 1-10 second.

tMax: For overvoltages close to the set value times can be extremely long if a high K time
constant is used. A maximum time can then be set to cut the longest times. Typical settings
are 1800-3600 seconds (30-60 minutes)

AlarmLevel: Setting of the alarm level in percentage of the set trip level. The alarm level is
normally set at around 98% of the trip level.

tAlarm: Setting of the time to alarm is given from when the alarm level has been reached.
Typical setting is 5 seconds.

10.4.3.3 Service value report M6496-144 v4

A number of internal parameters are available as service values for use at commissioning and
during service. Remaining time to trip (in seconds) TMTOTRIP, flux density VPERHZ, internal
thermal content in percentage of trip value THERMSTA. The values are available at local HMI,
Substation SAsystem and PCM600.

470 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

10.4.3.4 Setting example M6496-108 v5

Sufficient information about the overexcitation capability of the protected object(s) must be
available when making the settings. The most complete information is given in an
overexcitation capability diagram as shown in figure 293.

The settings V/Hz>> and V/Hz> are made in per unit of the rated voltage of the transformer
winding at rated frequency.

Set the transformer adapted curve for a transformer with overexcitation characteristics in
according to figure 293.

V/Hz> for the protection is set equal to the permissible continuous overexcitation according
to figure 293 = 105%. When the overexcitation is equal to V/Hz>, tripping is obtained after a
time equal to the setting of t1.

This is the case when UBase is equal to the transformer rated voltages. For
other values, the percentage settings need to be adjusted accordingly.

When the overexcitation is equal to the set value of V/Hz>>, tripping is obtained after a time
equal to the setting of t6. A suitable setting would be V/Hz>> = 140% and t6 = 4 s.

The interval between V/Hz>> and V/Hz> is automatically divided up in five equal steps, and the
time delays t2 to t5 will be allocated to these values of overexcitation. In this example, each
step will be (140-105) /5 = 7%. The setting of time delays t1 to t6 are listed in table 43.

Table 43: Settings

U/f op (%) Timer Time set (s)
105 t1 7200 (max)
112 t2 600
119 t3 60
126 t4 20
133 t5 8
140 t6 4

Information on the cooling time constant Tcool should be retrieved from the power
transformer manufacturer.

Line distance protection REL670 471

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

V/Hz
%

150

transformer capability curve

relay operate characteristic

140

130

120

110

Continous

100
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 Time
(minutes)
t6 t5 t4 t3 t2 t1

en01000377.vsd
IEC01000377 V1 EN-US

Figure 293: Example on overexcitation capability curve and V/Hz protection settings for
power transformer

10.5 Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV SEMOD153860-1 v2

10.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167723-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV - 60

10.5.2 Application SEMOD153893-5 v3

The Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV functions can be used in some different
applications.

• Voltage unbalance protection for capacitor banks. The voltage on the bus is supervised
with the voltage in the capacitor bank, phase- by phase. Difference indicates a fault, either
short-circuited or open element in the capacitor bank. It is mainly used on elements with
external fuses but can also be used on elements with internal fuses instead of a current
unbalance protection measuring the current between the neutrals of two half’s of the
capacitor bank. The function requires voltage transformers in all phases of the capacitor
bank. Figure 294 shows some different alternative connections of this function.

472 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

U1

Ud>L1
Single earthed wye
U2

Ph L3 Ph L2

Double wye
Ud>L1
U1 U2

Ph L3 Ph L2 Ph L3 Ph L2

IEC06000390_1_en.vsd
IEC06000390 V3 EN-US

Figure 294: Connection of voltage differential protection VDCPTOV function to detect

unbalance in capacitor banks (one phase only is shown)
VDCPTOV function has a block input (BLOCK) where a fuse failure supervision (or MCB tripped)
can be connected to prevent problems if one fuse in the capacitor bank voltage transformer
set has opened and not the other (capacitor voltage is connected to input U2). It will also
ensure that a fuse failure alarm is given instead of a Undervoltage or Differential voltage alarm
and/or tripping.

Fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) function for voltage transformers. In many application the
voltages of two fuse groups of the same voltage transformer or fuse groups of two separate
voltage transformers measuring the same voltage can be supervised with this function. It will
be an alternative for example, generator units where often two voltage transformers are
supplied for measurement and excitation equipment.

The application to supervise the voltage on two voltage transformers in the generator circuit
is shown in figure 295.

Line distance protection REL670 473

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

To Protection
U1
Ud>
U2
To Excitation

Gen en06000389.vsd

IEC06000389 V1 EN-US

Figure 295: Supervision of fuses on generator circuit voltage transformers

10.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD153915-5 v3

The parameters for the voltage differential function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings are done for the voltage differential function.

Operation: Off/On

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

BlkDiffAtULow: The setting is to block the function when the voltages in the phases are low.

RFLx: Is the setting of the voltage ratio compensation factor where possible differences
between the voltages is compensated for. The differences can be due to different voltage
transformer ratios, different voltage levels e.g. the voltage measurement inside the capacitor
bank can have a different voltage level but the difference can also e.g. be used by voltage drop
in the secondary circuits. The setting is normally done at site by evaluating the differential
voltage achieved as a service value for each phase. The factor is defined as U2 · RFLx and shall
be equal to the U1 voltage. Each phase has its own ratio factor.

UDTrip: The voltage differential level required for tripping is set with this parameter. For
application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage and the
number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Capacitor banks must be tripped before
excessive voltage occurs on the healthy capacitor elements. The setting values required are
normally given by the capacitor bank supplier. For other applications it has to be decided case
by case. For fuse supervision normally only the alarm level is used.

tTrip: The time delay for tripping is set by this parameter. Normally, the delay does not need to
be so short in capacitor bank applications as there is no fault requiring urgent tripping.

474 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

tReset: The time delay for reset of tripping level element is set by this parameter. Normally, it
can be set to a short delay as faults are permanent when they occur.

For the advanced users following parameters are also available for setting. Default values are
here expected to be acceptable.

U1Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the first voltage input is decided by this
parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

U2Low: The setting of the undervoltage level for the second voltage input is decided by this
parameter. The proposed default setting is 70%.

tBlock: The time delay for blocking of the function at detected undervoltages is set by this
parameter.

UDAlarm: The voltage differential level required for alarm is set with this parameter. For
application on capacitor banks the setting will depend of the capacitor bank voltage and the
number of elements per phase in series and parallel. Normally values required are given by
capacitor bank supplier.

For fuse supervision normally only this alarm level is used and a suitable voltage level is 3-5% if
the ratio correction factor has been properly evaluated during commissioning.

For other applications it has to be decided case by case.

tAlarm: The time delay for alarm is set by this parameter. Normally, few seconds delay can be
used on capacitor banks alarm. For fuse failure supervision (SDDRFUF) the alarm delay can be
set to zero.

10.6 Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171868-1 v2

10.6.1 Identification
SEMOD171954-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV - 27

10.6.2 Application SEMOD171876-4 v3

The trip of the circuit breaker at a prolonged loss of voltage at all the three phases is normally
used in automatic restoration systems to facilitate the system restoration after a major
blackout. Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV) generates a TRIP signal only if the voltage in all the
three phases is low for more than the set time. If the trip to the circuit breaker is not required,
LOVPTUV is used for signallization only through an output contact or through the event
recording function.

10.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD171929-4 v5

Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV) is in principle independent of the protection functions. It

requires to be set to open the circuit breaker in order to allow a simple system restoration
following a main voltage loss of a big part of the network and only when the voltage is lost
with breakers still closed.

All settings are in primary values or per unit. Set operate level per phase to typically 70% of the
global parameter UBase level. Set the time delay tTrip=5-20 seconds.

Line distance protection REL670 475

Application manual
Section 10 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Voltage protection

10.6.3.1 Advanced users settings SEMOD171929-8 v4

For advanced users the following parameters need also to be set. Set the length of the trip
pulse to typical tPulse=0.15 sec. Set the blocking time tBlock to block Loss of voltage check
(LOVPTUV), if some but not all voltage are low, to typical 5.0 seconds and set the time delay
for enabling the function after restoration tRestore to 3 - 40 seconds.

10.7 Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC GUID-831891A3-B5AB-4532-8901-311C541F0ABB v1

10.7.1 Identification GUID-1B7B3DC5-DD7B-4017-928D-0C41768E94D9 v1

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 identification ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device
number
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC U< 27

10.7.2 Application GUID-7EAA8D3C-F71A-4B97-80C8-31115DF381EE v1

The most common application of the PAPGAPC function is to provide tripping at the remote
end of lines with passive load or with weak end infeed. The function must be included in the
terminal at the weak infeed end of the feeder.

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection at the
remote end of a feeder can detect the fault. The detection requires a minimum of fault current,
normally >20% of Ir.

The fault current can be low due to absence of generated power or low short circuit current of
the source. The fault current can initially be too low due to the fault current distribution.

In this case, the fault current increases when the breaker opens at the strong line end and a
sequential tripping is achieved.

The detection of the fault by an independent tripping zone 1 is then required.

To avoid sequential tripping as described or when zone 1 is not available, the protection
terminal must be provided with this application function.

10.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-D0C8F29C-2C8D-4F9A-BB25-1A93E6E7C392 v2

The parameters for PAPGAPC application function are set via the local HMI or Protection and
Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: The function can be set On/Off.

GlobalBaseSel: Used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values, primary current
(IBase), primary voltage (UBase ) and primary power (SBase).

UPhSel<: Faulted phase voltage in % of quadrature phase – phase voltage divided by sqrt (3).
Setting this value to 100% is equivalent to disabling the voltage operation.

Tau: Time constant for reference voltage.

FastOperation: Enabling of fast fault clearing.

t3Ph: Time delay for three phase operation.

IN>: Residual current detection in % of IBase.

476 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 10
Voltage protection

ResCurrCheck: Enabling of residual current check for delayed operation at single phase faults.

Del1PhOp: Enabling of delayed single phase operation.

t1Ph: Time delay for single phase operation.

Del3PhOp: Enabling of delayed three phase operation.

ResCurrOper: Enabling of residual current operation.

tResCurr: Time delay for residual current indication.

Line distance protection REL670 477

Application manual
478
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 11
Frequency protection

Section 11 Frequency protection

11.1 Underfrequency protection SAPTUF IP15746-1 v3

11.1.1 Identification
M14865-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 81

f<

SYMBOL-P V1 EN-US

11.1.2 Application M13350-3 v4

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF is applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of

low fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power system frequency, and the
rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between the actual generation and
the load demand. Low fundamental frequency in a power system indicates that the available
generation is too low to fully supply the power demanded by the load connected to the power
grid. SAPTUF detects such situations and provides an output signal, suitable for load
shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-set-point change, gas turbine start up and so on.
Sometimes shunt reactors are automatically switched in due to low frequency, in order to
reduce the power system voltage and hence also reduce the voltage dependent part of the
load.

SAPTUF is very sensitive and accurate and is used to alert operators that frequency has slightly
deviated from the set-point, and that manual actions might be enough. The underfrequency
signal is also used for overexcitation detection. This is especially important for generator step-
up transformers, which might be connected to the generator but disconnected from the grid,
during a roll-out sequence. If the generator is still energized, the system will experience
overexcitation, due to the low frequency.

11.1.3 Setting guidelines M13355-3 v8

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTUF performs its
functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its
frequency and time characteristic.

There are two specific application areas for SAPTUF:

1. to protect equipment against damage due to low frequency, such as generators,

transformers, and motors. Overexcitation is also related to low frequency
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding
load, in generation deficit situations.

Line distance protection REL670 479

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Frequency protection

The under frequency start value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are made
as a percentage of a global base voltage parameter. The UBase value should be set as a
primary phase-to-phase value.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given below:

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the
lowest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by load shedding

The setting has to be below the lowest occurring "normal" frequency and well above the lowest
acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of
levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency) depends very much on
the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of
production" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large
systems, the load shedding can be set at a fairly high frequency level, and the time delay is
normally not critical. In smaller systems the frequency start level has to be set at a lower value,
and the time delay must be rather short.

The voltage related time delay is used for load shedding. The settings of SAPTUF could be the
same all over the power system. The load shedding is then performed firstly in areas with low
voltage magnitude, which normally are the most problematic areas, where the load shedding
also is most efficient.

11.2 Overfrequency protection SAPTOF IP15747-1 v3

11.2.1 Identification
M14866-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 81

f>

SYMBOL-O V1 EN-US

11.2.2 Application M14952-3 v4

Overfrequency protection function SAPTOF is applicable in all situations, where reliable

detection of high fundamental power system frequency is needed. The power system
frequency, and rate of change of frequency, is a measure of the unbalance between the actual
generation and the load demand. High fundamental frequency in a power system indicates
that the available generation is too large compared to the power demanded by the load
connected to the power grid. SAPTOF detects such situations and provides an output signal,
suitable for generator shedding, HVDC-set-point change and so on. SAPTOF is very sensitive
and accurate and can also be used to alert operators that frequency has slightly deviated from
the set-point, and that manual actions might be enough.

480 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 11
Frequency protection

11.2.3 Setting guidelines M14959-3 v7

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPTOF performs its
functions must be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its
frequency and time characteristic.

There are two application areas for SAPTOF:

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high frequency, such as generators, and
motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown, by shedding
generation, in over production situations.

The overfrequency start value is set in Hz. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a
percentage of a settable global base voltage parameter UBase. The UBase value should be set
as a primary phase-to-phase value.

Some applications and related setting guidelines for the frequency level are given below:

Equipment protection, such as for motors and generators

The setting has to be well above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and well below the
highest acceptable frequency for the equipment.

Power system protection, by generator shedding

The setting must be above the highest occurring "normal" frequency and below the highest
acceptable frequency for power stations, or sensitive loads. The setting level, the number of
levels and the distance between two levels (in time and/or in frequency) depend very much on
the characteristics of the power system under consideration. The size of the "largest loss of
load" compared to "the size of the power system" is a critical parameter. In large systems, the
generator shedding can be set at a fairly low frequency level, and the time delay is normally not
critical. In smaller systems the frequency START level has to be set at a higher value, and the
time delay must be rather short.

11.3 Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC IP15748-1 v4

11.3.1 Identification
M14868-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Rate-of-change of frequency SAPFRC 81
protection
df/dt >
<

SYMBOL-N V1 EN-US

11.3.2 Application M14966-3 v5

Rate-of-change of frequency protection (SAPFRC) is applicable in all situations, where reliable

detection of change of the fundamental power system voltage frequency is needed. SAPFRC
can be used both for increasing frequency and for decreasing frequency. SAPFRC provides an
output signal, suitable for load shedding or generator shedding, generator boosting, HVDC-
set-point change, gas turbine start up and so on. Very often SAPFRC is used in combination

Line distance protection REL670 481

Application manual
Section 11 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Frequency protection

with a low frequency signal, especially in smaller power systems, where loss of a fairly large
generator will require quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such
situations load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level, but in
combination with a large negative rate-of-change of frequency the underfrequency protection
can be used at a rather high setting.

11.3.3 Setting guidelines M14971-3 v7

The parameters for Rate-of-change frequency protection SAPFRC are set via the local HMI or or
through the Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

All the frequency and voltage magnitude conditions in the system where SAPFRC performs its
functions should be considered. The same also applies to the associated equipment, its
frequency and time characteristic.

There are two application areas for SAPFRC:

1. to protect equipment against damage due to high or too low frequency, such as
generators, transformers, and motors
2. to protect a power system, or a part of a power system, against breakdown by shedding
load or generation, in situations where load and generation are not in balance.

SAPFRC is normally used together with an overfrequency or underfrequency function, in small

power systems, where a single event can cause a large imbalance between load and
generation. In such situations load or generation shedding has to take place very quickly, and
there might not be enough time to wait until the frequency signal has reached an abnormal
value. Actions are therefore taken at a frequency level closer to the primary nominal level, if the
rate-of-change frequency is large (with respect to sign).

The start value for SAPFRC is set in Hz/s. All voltage magnitude related settings are made as a
percentage of a settable base voltage, which normally is set to the primary nominal voltage
level (phase-phase) of the power system or the high voltage equipment under consideration.

SAPFRC is not instantaneous, since the function needs some time to supply a stable value. It is
recommended to have a time delay long enough to take care of signal noise. However, the
time, rate-of-change frequency and frequency steps between different actions might be
critical, and sometimes a rather short operation time is required, for example, down to 70 ms.

Smaller industrial systems might experience rate-of-change frequency as large as 5 Hz/s, due
to a single event. Even large power systems may form small islands with a large imbalance
between load and generation, when severe faults (or combinations of faults) are cleared - up
to 3 Hz/s has been experienced when a small island was isolated from a large system. For
more "normal" severe disturbances in large power systems, rate-of-change of frequency is
much less, most often just a fraction of 1.0 Hz/s.

482 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Section 12 Multipurpose protection

12.1 General current and voltage protection CVGAPC IP14552-1 v2

12.1.1 Identification
M14886-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
General current and voltage CVGAPC 2(I>/U<) -
protection

12.1.2 Application IP15008-1 v1

M13084-3 v5
A breakdown of the insulation between phase conductors or a phase conductor and earth
results in a short circuit or an earth fault respectively. Such faults can result in large fault
currents and may cause severe damage to the power system primary equipment. Depending
on the magnitude and type of the fault different overcurrent protections, based on
measurement of phase, earth or sequence current components can be used to detect these
faults. Additionally it is sometimes required that these overcurrent protections shall be
directional and/or voltage controlled/restrained.

The over/under voltage protection is applied on power system elements, such as generators,
transformers, motors and power lines in order to detect abnormal voltage conditions.
Depending on the type of voltage deviation and type of power system abnormal condition
different over/under voltage protections based on measurement of phase-to-earth, phase-to-
phase, residual- or sequence- voltage components can be used to detect and operate for such
incident.

The IED can be provided with multiple General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC)
protection modules. The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one
voltage quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.

Each CVGAPC function module has got four independent protection elements built into it.

1. Two overcurrent steps with the following built-in features:

• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent (TOC/IDMT) delay for both steps
• Second harmonic supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the content of the second harmonic in the measured current
is lower than pre-set level
• Directional supervision is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the fault location is in the pre-set direction (Forward or
Reverse). Its behavior during low-level polarizing voltage is settable (Non-
Directional, Block, Memory)
• Voltage restrained/controlled feature is available in order to modify the pick-up level
of the overcurrent stage(s) in proportion to the magnitude of the measured voltage
• Current restrained feature is available in order to only allow operation of the
overcurrent stage(s) if the measured current quantity is bigger than the set
percentage of the current restrain quantity.
2. Two undercurrent steps with the following built-in features:

Line distance protection REL670 483

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Multipurpose protection

• Definite time delay for both steps

3. Two overvoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps
4. Two undervoltage steps with the following built-in features
• Definite time delay or Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT delay for both steps

All these four protection elements within one general protection function works independently
from each other and they can be individually enabled or disabled. However, note that all these
four protection elements measure one selected current quantity and one selected voltage
quantity (see table 44 and table 45). It is possible to simultaneously use all four protection
elements and their individual stages. Sometimes, it is necessary to provide interaction
between two or more protection elements/stages within one CVGAPC function by appropriate
IED configuration to obtain desired application functionality.

12.1.2.1 Current and voltage selection for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-6 v4

CVGAPC function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input in
the configuration tool, but it will always measure only the single current and the single voltage
quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.

The user can select a current input, by a setting parameter CurrentInput, to measure one of
the current quantities shown in table 44.

Table 44: Available selection for current quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"CurrentInput”
1 phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 current phasor
2 phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 current phasor
3 phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 current phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
current phasor
5 NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
current phasor
6 3 · ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence current
phasor multiplied by factor 3
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure current phasor of the phase with minimum
magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
current phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and current
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0° all the time
10 phase1-phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as
the vector difference between the phase L1 current phasor and phase L2
current phasor (IL1-IL2)
11 phase2-phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as
the vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3
current phasor (IL2-IL3)
12 phase3-phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as
the vector difference between the phase L3 current phasor and phase L1
current phasor ( IL3-IL1)
Table continues on next page

484 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Set value for parameter Comment

"CurrentInput”
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the
time

The user can select a voltage input, by a setting parameter VoltageInput, to measure one of
the voltage quantities shown in table 45.

Table 45: Available selection for voltage quantity within CVGAPC function
Set value for parameter Comment
"VoltageInput"
1 phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L1 voltage phasor
2 phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L2 voltage phasor
3 phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the phase L3 voltage phasor
4 PosSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated positive sequence
voltage phasor
5 -NegSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated negative sequence
voltage phasor. This voltage phasor will be intentionally rotated for 180°
in order to enable easier settings for the directional feature when used.
6 -3*ZeroSeq CVGAPC function will measure internally calculated zero sequence voltage
phasor multiplied by factor 3. This voltage phasor will be intentionally
rotated for 180° in order to enable easier settings for the directional
feature when used.
7 MaxPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
maximum magnitude
8 MinPh CVGAPC function will measure voltage phasor of the phase with
minimum magnitude
9 UnbalancePh CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
voltage phasor of the phase with maximum magnitude and voltage
phasor of the phase with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to
0° all the time
10 phase1-phase2 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as
the vector difference between the phase L1 voltage phasor and phase L2
voltage phasor (UL1-UL2)
11 phase2-phase3 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as
the vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3
voltage phasor (UL2-UL3)
12 phase3-phase1 CVGAPC function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as
the vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1
voltage phasor (UL3-UL1)
13 MaxPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure ph-ph voltage phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph CVGAPC function will measure magnitude of unbalance voltage, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
ph-ph voltage phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph voltage
phasor with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the
time

Line distance protection REL670 485

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Multipurpose protection

Note that the voltage selection from table 45 is always applicable regardless the actual
external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be connected to IED as either three
phase-to-earth voltages, UL1, UL2 and UL3 or three phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 and
UL3L1 . This information about actual VT connection is entered as a setting parameter for the
pre-processing block, which will then be taken care automatically.

12.1.2.2 Base quantities for CVGAPC function SEMOD53443-112 v4

The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (100%) for pickup
levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for every CVGAPC
function.

Base current shall be entered as:

1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the measured
Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 44.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3 (1.732 x
Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table
44.

Base voltage shall be entered as:

1. rated phase-to-earth voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured
Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 45.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the measured
Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 45.

12.1.2.3 Application possibilities SEMOD53443-136 v3

Due to its flexibility the general current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) function can be used,
with appropriate settings and configuration in many different applications. Some of possible
examples are given below:

1. Transformer and line applications:

• Underimpedance protection (circular, non-directional characteristic)
• Underimpedance protection (circular mho characteristic)
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection
• Phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence (Non-Directional or Directional)
Overcurrent protection
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under voltage
protection
• Thermal overload protection
• Open Phase protection
• Unbalance protection
2. Generator protection
• 80-95% Stator earth fault protection (measured or calculated 3Uo)
• Rotor earth fault protection (with external COMBIFLEX RXTTE4 injection unit)
• Underimpedance protection
• Voltage Controlled/Restrained Overcurrent protection
• Turn-to-Turn & Differential Backup protection (directional Negative Sequence.
Overcurrent protection connected to generator HV terminal CTs looking into
generator)
• Stator Overload protection
• Rotor Overload protection
• Loss of Excitation protection (directional positive sequence OC protection)
• Reverse power/Low forward power protection (directional positive sequence OC
protection, 2% sensitivity)

486 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

• Dead-Machine/Inadvertent-Energizing protection
• Breaker head flashover protection
• Improper synchronizing detection
• Sensitive negative sequence generator over current protection and alarm
• Phase or phase-to-phase or Negative/Positive/Zero Sequence over/under voltage
protection
• Generator out-of-step detection (based on directional positive sequence OC)
• Inadvertent generator energizing

12.1.2.4 Inadvertent generator energization SEMOD151947-4 v2

When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the generator
circuit breaker is closed by mistake.

Three-phase energizing of a generator, which is at standstill or on turning gear, causes it to

behave and accelerate similarly to an induction motor. The machine, at this point, essentially
represents the subtransient reactance to the system and it can be expected to draw from one
to four per unit current, depending on the equivalent system impedance. Machine terminal
voltage can range from 20% to 70% of rated voltage, again, depending on the system
equivalent impedance (including the block transformer). Higher quantities of machine current
and voltage (3 to 4 per unit current and 50% to 70% rated voltage) can be expected if the
generator is connected to a strong system. Lower current and voltage values (1 to 2 per unit
current and 20% to 40% rated voltage) are representative of weaker systems.

Since a generator behaves similarly to an induction motor, high currents will develop in the
rotor during the period it is accelerating. Although the rotor may be thermally damaged from
excessive high currents, the time to damage will be on the order of a few seconds. Of more
critical concern, however, is the bearing, which can be damaged in a fraction of a second due
to low oil pressure. Therefore, it is essential that high speed tripping is provided. This tripping
should be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).

There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be limited so
that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect the dangerous
situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long. The reverse power
protection might detect the situation but the operation time of this protection is normally too
long.

For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.

The protection against inadvertent energization can be made by a combination of

undervoltage, overvoltage and overcurrent protection functions. The undervoltage function
will, with a delay for example 10 s, detect the situation when the generator is not connected to
the grid (standstill) and activate the overcurrent function. The overvoltage function will detect
the situation when the generator is taken into operation and will disable the overcurrent
function. The overcurrent function will have a pick-up value about 50% of the rated current of
the generator. The trip delay will be about 50 ms.

12.1.3 Setting guidelines IP15009-1 v2

GUID-F7AA2194-4D1C-4475-8853-C7D064912614 v4

When inverse time overcurrent characteristic is selected, the operate time of

the stage will be the sum of the inverse time delay and the set definite time
delay. Thus, if only the inverse time delay is required, it is important to set the
definite time delay for that stage to zero.

Line distance protection REL670 487

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Multipurpose protection

M13088-237 v4
The parameters for the general current and voltage protection function (CVGAPC) are set via
the local HMI or Protection and Control Manager (PCM600).

Common base IED values for the primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

The overcurrent steps has a IMinx (x=1 or 2 depending on step) setting to set
the minimum operate current. Set IMinx below StartCurr_OCx for every step to
achieve ANSI reset characteristic according to standard. If IMinx is set above
StartCurr_OCx for any step the ANSI reset works as if current is zero when
current drops below IMinx.

12.1.3.1 Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection M13088-3 v5

Directional negative sequence overcurrent protection is typically used as sensitive earth-fault

protection of power lines where incorrect zero sequence polarization may result from mutual
induction between two or more parallel lines. Additionally, it can be used in applications on
underground cables where zero-sequence impedance depends on the fault current return
paths, but the cable negative-sequence impedance is practically constant. It shall be noted
that directional negative sequence OC element offers protection against all unbalance faults
(phase-to-phase faults as well). Care shall be taken that the minimum pickup of such
protection function shall be set above natural system unbalance level.

An example will be given, how sensitive-earth-fault protection for power lines can be achieved
by using negative-sequence directional overcurrent protection elements within a CVGAPC
function.

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following shall be done
to ensure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase power line currents and three-phase power line voltages to one
CVGAPC instance (for example, GF04)
2. Set CurrentInput to NegSeq (please note that CVGAPC function measures I2 current and
NOT 3I2 current; this is essential for proper OC pickup level setting)
3. Set VoltageInput to -NegSeq (please note that the negative sequence voltage phasor is
intentionally inverted in order to simplify directionality
4. Set base current IBase value equal to the rated primary current of power line CTs
5. Set base voltage UBase value equal to the rated power line phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Set RCADir to value +65 degrees (NegSeq current typically lags the inverted NegSeq
voltage for this angle during the fault)
7. Set ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set LowVolt_VM to value 2% (NegSeq voltage level above which the directional element
will be enabled)
9. Enable one overcurrent stage (for example, OC1)
10. By parameter CurveType_OC1 select appropriate TOC/IDMT or definite time delayed curve
in accordance with your network protection philosophy
11. Set StartCurr_OC1 to value between 3-10% (typical values)
12. Set tDef_OC1 or parameter “k” when TOC/IDMT curves are used to insure proper time
coordination with other earth-fault protections installed in the vicinity of this power line
13. Set DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U
15. Set ActLowVolt1_VM to Block
• In order to insure proper restraining of this element for CT saturations during three-
phase faults it is possible to use current restraint feature and enable this element to
operate only when NegSeq current is bigger than a certain percentage (10% is

488 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

typical value) of measured PosSeq current in the power line. To do this the following
settings within the same function shall be done:
16. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
17. Set RestrCurrInput to PosSeq
18. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.10

If required, this CVGAPC function can be used in directional comparison protection scheme for
the power line protection if communication channels to the remote end of this power line are
available. In that case typically two NegSeq overcurrent steps are required. One for forward
and one for reverse direction. As explained before the OC1 stage can be used to detect faults
in forward direction. The built-in OC2 stage can be used to detect faults in reverse direction.

However the following shall be noted for such application:

• the set values for RCADir and ROADir settings will be as well applicable for OC2 stage
• setting DirMode_OC2 shall be set to Reverse
• setting parameter StartCurr_OC2 shall be made more sensitive than pickup value of
forward OC1 element (that is, typically 60% of OC1 set pickup level) in order to insure
proper operation of the directional comparison scheme during current reversal situations
• start signals from OC1 and OC2 elements shall be used to send forward and reverse
signals to the remote end of the power line
• the available scheme communications function block within IED shall be used between
multipurpose protection function and the communication equipment in order to insure
proper conditioning of the above two start signals

Furthermore the other built-in UC, OV and UV protection elements can be used for other
protection and alarming purposes.

12.1.3.2 Negative sequence overcurrent protection M13088-5 v4

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide negative sequence inverse
time overcurrent protection for a generator with capability constant of 20s, and maximum
continuous negative sequence rating of 7% of the generator rated current.

The capability curve for a generator negative sequence overcurrent protection, often used
world-wide, is defined by the ANSI standard in accordance with the following formula:

k
top = 2
æ I NS ö
ç ÷
è Ir ø
EQUATION1372 V1 EN-US (Equation 515)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the negative sequence overcurrent IED

k is the generator capability constant in seconds

INS is the measured negative sequence current

Ir is the generator rated current

By defining parameter x equal to maximum continuous negative sequence rating of the

generator in accordance with the following formula

Line distance protection REL670 489

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Multipurpose protection

x = 7% = 0, 07 pu
EQUATION1373 V1 EN-US (Equation 516)

Equation 515 can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the operate
time of the negative sequence inverse overcurrent IED:

1
k×
top = x2
2
æ I NS ö
ç ÷
è x × Ir ø
EQUATION1374 V1 EN-US (Equation 517)

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the following
must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value NegSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

æ A ö
top = k × ç P + B÷
è M -C ø
EQUATION1375 V1 EN-US (Equation 518)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm
k is time multiplier (parameter setting)
M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 515 is compared with the equation 517 for the inverse time characteristic of
the OC1 it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set k equal to the generator negative sequence capability value

2. set A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1=0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
4. set StartCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative sequence
inverse overcurrent protection.

For this particular example the following settings shall be entered to insure proper function
operation:

1. select negative sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for the CVGAPC function is equal to the generator
rated current
3. set k_OC1 = 20

490 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

4. set A_OC1= 1/0.072 = 204.0816

5. set B_OC1 = 0.0, C_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
6. set StartCurr_OC1 = 7%

Proper timing of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary
injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required delayed time reset for
OC1 step can be set in order to ensure proper function operation in case of repetitive
unbalance conditions.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes (for example, use OC2 for negative sequence overcurrent alarm and OV1 for
negative sequence overvoltage alarm).

12.1.3.3 Generator stator overload protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI

standards M13088-81 v3

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide generator stator overload
protection in accordance with IEC or ANSI standard if minimum-operating current shall be set
to 116% of generator rating.

The generator stator overload protection is defined by IEC or ANSI standard for turbo
generators in accordance with the following formula:

k
top = 2
æ Im ö
ç ÷ -1
è Ir ø
EQUATION1376 V1 EN-US (Equation 519)

where:
top is the operating time of the generator stator overload IED

k is the generator capability constant in accordance with the relevant standard (k = 37.5 for the IEC
standard or k = 41.4 for the ANSI standard)
Im is the magnitude of the measured current

Ir is the generator rated current

This formula is applicable only when measured current (for example, positive sequence
current) exceeds a pre-set value (typically in the range from 105 to 125% of the generator rated
current).

By defining parameter x equal to the per unit value for the desired pickup for the overload IED
in accordance with the following formula:

x = 116% = 1.16 pu
EQUATION1377 V2 EN-US (Equation 520)

formula 3.5can be re-written in the following way without changing the value for the operate
time of the generator stator overload IED:

Line distance protection REL670 491

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Multipurpose protection

1
k×
top = x2
2
æ Im ö 1
ç ÷ - 2
è x × Ir ø x
EQUATION1378 V1 EN-US (Equation 521)

In order to achieve such protection functionality with one CVGAPC functions the following
must be done:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents to one CVGAPC instance (for example, GF01)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to value PosSeq
3. Set base current value to the rated generator current in primary amperes
4. Enable one overcurrent step (for example OC1)
5. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value Programmable

æ A ö
top = k × ç P + B÷
è M -C ø
EQUATION1375 V1 EN-US (Equation 522)

where:
top is the operating time in seconds of the Inverse Time Overcurrent TOC/IDMT algorithm

k is time multiplier (parameter setting)

M is ratio between measured current magnitude and set pickup current level
A, B, C and P are user settable coefficients which determine the curve used for Inverse Time Overcurrent
TOC/IDMT calculation

When the equation 521 is compared with the equation 522 for the inverse time characteristic of
the OC1 step in it is obvious that if the following rules are followed:

1. set k equal to the IEC or ANSI standard generator capability value

2. set parameter A_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
3. set parameter C_OC1 equal to the value 1/x2
4. set parameters B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1=2.0
5. set StartCurr_OC1 equal to the value x

then the OC1 step of the CVGAPC function can be used for generator negative sequence
inverse overcurrent protection.

1. select positive sequence current as measuring quantity for this CVGAPC function
2. make sure that the base current value for CVGAPC function is equal to the generator rated
current
3. set k = 37.5 for the IEC standard or k = 41.4 for the ANSI standard
4. set A_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
5. set C_OC1= 1/1.162 = 0.7432
6. set B_OC1 = 0.0 and P_OC1 = 2.0
7. set StartCurr_OC1 = 116%

Proper timing of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary
injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. If required delayed time reset for
OC1 step can be set in order to insure proper function operation in case of repetitive overload
conditions.

492 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

In the similar way rotor overload protection in accordance with ANSI standard can be achieved.

12.1.3.4 Open phase protection for transformer, lines or generators and circuit
breaker head flashover protection for generators M13088-142 v3

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide open phase protection. This
can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function by comparing the unbalance current with a pre-
set level. In order to make such a function more secure it is possible to restrain it by requiring
that at the same time the measured unbalance current must be bigger than 97% of the
maximum phase current. By doing this it will be insured that function can only pickup if one of
the phases is open circuited. Such an arrangement is easy to obtain in CVGAPC function by
enabling the current restraint feature. The following shall be done in order to insure proper
operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase currents from the protected object to one CVGAPC instance (for
example, GF03)
2. Set CurrentInput to value UnbalancePh
3. Set EnRestrainCurr to On
4. Set RestrCurrInput to MaxPh
5. Set RestrCurrCoeff to value 0.97
6. Set base current value to the rated current of the protected object in primary amperes
7. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
8. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
9. Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 5%
10. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to desired time delay (for example, 2.0s)

Proper operation of CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary
injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall be noted that set
values for restrain current and its coefficient will as well be applicable for OC2 step as soon as
it is enabled.

Furthermore the other built-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes. For example, in case of generator application by enabling OC2 step with
set pickup to 200% and time delay to 0.1s simple but effective protection against circuit
breaker head flashover protection is achieved.

12.1.3.5 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection for generator and step-up

transformer M13088-158 v4

Example will be given how to use one CVGAPC function to provide voltage restrained
overcurrent protection for a generator. Let us assume that the time coordination study gives
the following required settings:

• Inverse Time Over Current TOC/IDMT curve: ANSI very inverse

• Pickup current of 185% of generator rated current at rated generator voltage
• Pickup current 25% of the original pickup current value for generator voltages below 25%
of rated voltage

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following shall be done
in order to ensure proper operation of the function:

Line distance protection REL670 493

Application manual
Section 12 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Multipurpose protection

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and voltages to one CVGAPC instance (for
example, GF05)
2. Set CurrentInput to value MaxPh
3. Set VoltageInput to value MinPh-Ph (it is assumed that minimum phase-to-phase voltage
shall be used for restraining. Alternatively, positive sequence voltage can be used for
restraining by selecting PosSeq for this setting parameter)
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
7. Select CurveType_OC1 to value ANSI Very inv
8. If required set minimum operating time for this curve by using parameter tMin_OC1
(default value 0.05s)
9. Set StartCurr_OC1 to value 185%
10. Set VCntrlMode_OC1 to On
11. Set VDepMode_OC1 to Slope
12. Set VDepFact_OC1 to value 0.25
13. Set UHighLimit_OC1 to value 100%
14. Set ULowLimit_OC1 to value 25%

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary
injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. Furthermore the other built-in
protection elements can be used for other protection and alarming purposes.

12.1.3.6 Loss of excitation protection for a generator M13088-182 v3

Example will be given how by using positive sequence directional overcurrent protection
element within a CVGAPC function, loss of excitation protection for a generator can be
achieved. Let us assume that from rated generator data the following values are calculated:

• Maximum generator capability to contentiously absorb reactive power at zero active

loading 38% of the generator MVA rating
• Generator pull-out angle 84 degrees

This functionality can be achieved by using one CVGAPC function. The following shall be done
in order to insure proper operation of the function:

1. Connect three-phase generator currents and three-phase generator voltages to one

CVGAPC instance (for example, GF02)
2. Set parameter CurrentInput to PosSeq
3. Set parameter VoltageInput to PosSeq
4. Set base current value to the rated generator current primary amperes
5. Set base voltage value to the rated generator phase-to-phase voltage in kV
6. Set parameter RCADir to value -84 degree (that is, current lead voltage for this angle)
7. Set parameter ROADir to value 90 degree
8. Set parameter LowVolt_VM to value 5%
9. Enable one overcurrent step (for example, OC1)
10. Select parameter CurveType_OC1 to value IEC Def. Time
11. Set parameter StartCurr_OC1 to value 38%
12. Set parameter tDef_OC1 to value 2.0s (typical setting)
13. Set parameter DirMode_OC1 to Forward
14. Set parameter DirPrinc_OC1 to IcosPhi&U
15. Set parameter ActLowVolt1_VM to Block

Proper operation of the CVGAPC function made in this way can easily be verified by secondary
injection. All other settings can be left at the default values. However it shall be noted that set
values for RCA & ROA angles will be applicable for OC2 step if directional feature is enabled for
this step as well. Figure 296 shows overall protection characteristic

494 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 12
Multipurpose protection

Furthermore the other build-in protection elements can be used for other protection and
alarming purposes.

Q [pu]
Operating region
A
0.8

ILowSet
0.6 B IPS
0.4

rca
0.2

0
P
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4
[pu] UPS
-rca
-0.2
C
-0.4 ILowSet
D

-0.6 Operating Region

-0.8
en05000535.vsd
IEC05000535 V2 EN-US

Figure 296: Loss of excitation

Line distance protection REL670 495

Application manual
496
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 13
System protection and control

Section 13 System protection and control

13.1 Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC GUID-6B541154-D56B-452F-B143-4C2A1B2D3A1F v1

13.1.1 Identification GUID-8224B870-3DAA-44BF-B790-6600F2AD7C5D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC - -

13.1.2 Application GUID-A1F20DD8-571E-42C3-84F3-C557EC352ED0 v2

The multi-purpose filter, function block with name SMAI HPAC, is arranged as a three-phase
filter. It has very much the same user interface (e.g. function block outputs) as the standard
pre-processing function block SMAI. However the main difference is that it can be used to
extract any frequency component from the input signal. For all four analogue input signals into
this filter (i.e. three phases and the residual quantity) the input samples from the TRM module,
which are coming at rate of 20 samples per fundamental system cycle, are first stored. When
enough samples are available in the internal memory, the phasor values at set frequency
defined by the setting parameter SetFrequency are calculated. The following values are
internally available for each of the calculated phasors:

• Magnitude
• Phase angle
• Exact frequency of the extracted signal

The SMAI HPAC filter is always used in conjunction with some other protection function (e.g.
multi-purpose protection function or overcurrent function or over-voltage function or over-
power function). In this way many different protection applications can be arranged. For
example the following protection, monitoring or measurement features can be realized:

• Sub-synchronous resonance protection for turbo generators

• Sub-synchronous protection for wind turbines/wind farms
• Detection of sub-synchronous oscillation between HVDC links and synchronous
generators
• Super-synchronous protection
• Detection of presence of the geo-magnetic induced currents
• Overcurrent or overvoltage protection at specific frequency harmonic, sub-harmonic,
inter-harmonic etc.
• Presence of special railway frequencies (e.g. 16.7Hz or 25Hz) in the three-phase power
system
• Sensitive reverse power protection
• Stator or rotor earth fault protection for special injection frequencies (e.g. 25Hz)
• etc.

The filter output can also be connected to the measurement function blocks such as CVMMXN
(Measurements), CMMXU (Phase current measurement), VMMXU (Phase-phase voltage
measurement), etc. in order to report the extracted phasor values to the supervisory system
(e.g. MicroSCADA).

Line distance protection REL670 497

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
System protection and control

It is recommended that the trip time delay of under voltage or under current
functions is set longer than the SMAIHPAC FilterLength to allow time for the
SAMIHPAC outputs to stabilize at startup.

The following figure shoes typical configuration connections required to utilize this filter in
conjunction with multi-purpose function as non-directional overcurrent protection.

IEC13000179-1-en.vsd
IEC13000179 V1 EN-US

Figure 297: Required ACT configuration

Such overcurrent arrangement can be for example used to achieve the subsynchronous
resonance protection for turbo generators.

13.1.3 Setting guidelines

13.1.3.1 Setting example GUID-5A3F67BD-7D48-4734-948C-01DAF9470EF8 v2

A relay type used for generator subsynchronous resonance overcurrent protection shall be
replaced. The relay had inverse time operating characteristic as given with the following
formula:

K
top = T01 +
Is
EQUATION13000029 V1 EN-US (Equation 523)

Where:

• top is the operating time of the relay

• T01 is fixed time delay (setting)
• K is a constant (setting)
• IS is measured subsynchronous current in primary amperes

The existing relay was applied on a large 50Hz turbo generator which had shaft mechanical
resonance frequency at 18.5Hz. The relay settings were T01 = 0.64 seconds, K= 35566 Amperes
and minimal subsynchronous current trip level was set at IS0=300 Amperes primary.

Solution:

First the IED configuration shall be arranged as shown in Figure 297. Then the settings for
SMAI HPAC filter and multipurpose function shall be derived from existing relay settings in the
following way:

The subsynchronous current frequency is calculated as follows:

498 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 13
System protection and control

fs = 50 Hz - 18.5Hz = 31.5Hz
EQUATION13000030 V1 EN-US (Equation 524)

In order to properly extract the weak subsynchronous signal in presence of the dominating
50Hz signal the SMAI HPAC filter shall be set as given in the following table:

Table 46: Proposed settings for SMAIHPAC

I_HPAC_31_5Hz: SMAIHPAC:1
ConnectionType Ph — N
SetFrequency 31.5
FreqBandWidth 0.0
FilterLength 1.0 s
OverLap 75
Operation On

Now the settings for the multi-purpose overcurrent stage one shall be derived in order to
emulate the existing relay operating characteristic. To achieve exactly the same inverse time
characteristic the programmable IDMT characteristic is used which for multi-purpose
overcurrent stage one, which has the following equation (for more information see Section
“Inverse time characteristics” in the TRM).

æ ö
ç ÷
A
t [s] = ç + B ÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø
EQUATION13000031 V1 EN-US (Equation 525)

In order to adapt to the previous relay characteristic the above equation can be re-written in
the following way:

æ K ö
ç ÷
ç I so ÷
t [s] = + T01 ÷ × 1
ç 1
ç æç I s ö÷ - 0 ÷
ç I ÷
è è so ø ø
EQUATION13000032 V1 EN-US (Equation 526)

Thus if the following rules are followed when multi-purpose overcurrent stage one is set:

• in > = IS0= 300A

•
K 35566
A= = = 118.55
I so 300
•
B = T01 = 0.64
• C = 0.0
• p = 1.0
• k = 1.0

Line distance protection REL670 499

Application manual
Section 13 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
System protection and control

then exact replica of the existing relay will be achieved. The following table summarizes all
required settings for the multi-purpose function:

Setting Group1
Operation On
CurrentInput MaxPh
IBase 1000
VoltageInput MaxPh
UBase 20.50
OPerHarmRestr Off
I_2ndI_fund 20.0
BlkLevel2nd 5000
EnRestrainCurr Off
RestrCurrInput PosSeq
RestrCurrCoeff 0.00
RCADir -75
ROADir 75
LowVolt_VM 0.5

OC1
Setting Group1
Operation_OC1 On
StartCurr_OC1 30.0
CurrMult_OC1 2.0
CurveType_OC1 Programmable
tDef_OC1 0.00
k_OC1 1.00
tMin1 30
tMin_OC1 1.40
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous
tResetDef_OC1 0.00
P_OC1 1.000
A_OC1 118.55
B_OC1 0.640
C_OC1 0.000

500 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 14
Secondary system supervision

Section 14 Secondary system supervision

14.1 Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC IP14555-1 v5

14.1.1 Identification
M14870-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC - 87

14.1.2 Application M12395-13 v9

Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of many
protection functions such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current
functions. When currents from two independent three-phase sets of CTs, or CT cores,
measuring the same primary currents are available, reliable current circuit supervision can be
arranged by comparing the currents from the two sets. If an error in any CT circuit is detected,
the protection functions concerned can be blocked and an alarm given.

In case of large currents, unequal transient saturation of CT cores with different remanence or
different saturation factor may result in differences in the secondary currents from the two CT
sets. Unwanted blocking of protection functions during the transient stage must then be
avoided.

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC must be sensitive and have short operate time in order to
prevent unwanted tripping from fast-acting, sensitive numerical protections in case of faulty
CT secondary circuits.

Open CT circuits creates extremely high voltages in the circuits which is

extremely dangerous for the personnel. It can also damage the insulation and
cause new problems. The application shall, thus, be done with this in
consideration, especially if the protection functions are blocked.

14.1.3 Setting guidelines M12397-17 v8

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC compares the residual current from a three-phase set of
current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from
another set of cores on the same current transformer.

IMinOp: It must be set as a minimum to twice the residual current in the supervised CT circuits
under normal service conditions and rated primary current.

Ip>Block: It is normally set at 150% to block the function during transient conditions.

Line distance protection REL670 501

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Secondary system supervision

The FAIL output is connected to the blocking input of the protection function to be blocked at
faulty CT secondary circuits.

14.2 Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC IP14556-1 v3

14.2.1 Identification
M14869-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC - -

14.2.2 Application SEMOD113803-4 v10

Different protection functions within the protection IED, operates on the basis of the
measured voltage in the relay point. Examples are:

• impedance protection functions

• undervoltage function
• energizing check function and voltage check for the weak infeed logic

These functions can operate unintentionally if a fault occurs in the secondary circuits between
the voltage instrument transformers and the IED.

It is possible to use different measures to prevent such unwanted operations. Miniature circuit
breakers in the voltage measuring circuits should be located as close as possible to the
voltage instrument transformers, and shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts that are wired
to the IEDs. Separate fuse-failure monitoring IEDs or elements within the protection and
monitoring devices are another possibilities. These solutions are combined to get the best
possible effect in the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC).

FUFSPVC function built into the IED products can operate on the basis of external binary
signals from the miniature circuit breaker or from the line disconnector. The first case
influences the operation of all voltage-dependent functions while the second one does not
affect the impedance measuring functions.

The negative sequence detection algorithm, based on the negative-sequence measuring

quantities is recommended for use in isolated or high-impedance earthed networks: a high
value of voltage 3U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence current 3I2 is a condition
that is related to a fuse failure event.

The zero sequence detection algorithm, based on the zero sequence measuring quantities is
recommended for use in directly or low impedance earthed networks: a high value of voltage
3U0 without the presence of the residual current 3I0 is a condition that is related to a fuse
failure event. In cases where the line can have a weak-infeed of zero sequence current this
function shall be avoided.

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to the fuse
failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure. This is beneficial for
example during three phase transformer switching.

502 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 14
Secondary system supervision

14.2.3 Setting guidelines IP15000-1 v1

14.2.3.1 General M13683-3 v5

The negative and zero sequence voltages and currents always exist due to different non-
symmetries in the primary system and differences in the current and voltage instrument
transformers. The minimum value for the operation of the current and voltage measuring
elements must always be set with a safety margin of 10 to 20%, depending on the system
operating conditions.

Pay special attention to the dissymmetry of the measuring quantities when the function is
used on long untransposed lines, on multicircuit lines and so on.

The settings of negative sequence, zero sequence and delta algorithm are in percent of the
base voltage and base current for the function. Common base IED values for primary current
(IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary power (SBase) are set in Global Base Values
GBASVAL. The setting GlobalBaseSel is used to select a particular GBASVAL and used its base
values.

14.2.3.2 Setting of common parameters M13683-9 v9

Set the operation mode selector Operation to On to release the fuse failure function.

The voltage threshold USealIn< is used to identify low voltage condition in the system. Set
USealIn< below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency
conditions. We propose a setting of approximately 70% of UBase.

The drop off time of 200 ms for dead phase detection makes it recommended to always set
SealIn to On since this will secure a fuse failure indication at persistent fuse fail when closing
the local breaker when the line is already energized from the other end. When the remote
breaker closes the voltage will return except in the phase that has a persistent fuse fail. Since
the local breaker is open there is no current and the dead phase indication will persist in the
phase with the blown fuse. When the local breaker closes the current will start to flow and the
function detects the fuse failure situation. But due to the 200 ms drop off timer the output
BLKZ will not be activated until after 200 ms. This means that distance functions are not
blocked and due to the “no voltage but current” situation might issue a trip.

The operation mode selector OpMode has been introduced for better adaptation to system
requirements. The mode selector enables selecting interactions between the negative
sequence and zero sequence algorithm. In normal applications, the OpMode is set to either
UNsINs for selecting negative sequence algorithm or UZsIZs for zero sequence based
algorithm. If system studies or field experiences shows that there is a risk that the fuse failure
function will not be activated due to the system conditions, the dependability of the fuse
failure function can be increased if the OpMode is set to UZsIZs OR UNsINs or OptimZsNs. In
mode UZsIZs OR UNsINs both negative and zero sequence based algorithms are activated and
working in an OR-condition. Also in mode OptimZsNs both negative and zero sequence
algorithms are activated and the one that has the highest magnitude of measured negative or
zero sequence current will operate. If there is a requirement to increase the security of the fuse
failure function OpMode can be selected to UZsIZs AND UNsINs which gives that both negative
and zero sequence algorithms are activated and working in an AND-condition, that is, both
algorithms must give condition for block in order to activate the output signals BLKU or BLKZ.

14.2.3.3 Negative sequence based M13683-17 v9

The relay setting value 3U2> is given in percentage of the base voltage UBase and should not
be set lower than the value that is calculated according to equation 527.

Line distance protection REL670 503

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Secondary system supervision

U2
3U 2   100
UBase 3
EQUATION1519 V5 EN-US (Equation 527)

where:
U2 is the maximal negative sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
UBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I2< is in percentage of parameter IBase. The setting of 3I2<
must be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the system and can be
calculated according to equation 528.

I2
3 I 2  100
IBase
EQUATION1520 V5 EN-US (Equation 528)

where:
I2 is the maximal negative sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of
10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

14.2.3.4 Zero sequence based M13683-43 v8

The IED setting value 3U0> is given in percentage of the base voltage UBase. The setting of
3U0> should not be set lower than the value that is calculated according to equation 529.

3U 0
3U 0   100
UBase 3
EQUATION1521 V4 EN-US (Equation 529)

where:
3U0 is the maximal zero sequence voltage during normal operation conditions, plus a margin of 10...20%
UBase is the base voltage for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

The setting of the current limit 3I0< is done in percentage of IBase. The setting of 3I0< must
be higher than the normal unbalance current that might exist in the system. The setting can be
calculated according to equation 530.

3I 0
3I 0< = ×100
IBase
EQUATION2293 V3 EN-US (Equation 530)

where:
3I0< is the maximal zero sequence current during normal operating conditions, plus a margin of 10...20%
IBase is the base current for the function according to the setting GlobalBaseSel

504 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 14
Secondary system supervision

14.2.3.5 Delta U and delta I GUID-02336F26-98C0-419D-8759-45F5F12580DE v7

Set the operation mode selector OpDUDI to On if the delta function shall be in operation.

The setting of DU> should be set high (approximately 60% of UBase) and the current threshold
DI< low (approximately 10% of IBase) to avoid unwanted operation due to normal switching
conditions in the network. The delta current and delta voltage function shall always be used
together with either the negative or zero sequence algorithm. If USetprim is the primary voltage
for operation of dU/dt and ISetprim the primary current for operation of dI/dt, the setting of
DU> and DI< will be given according to equation 531 and equation 532.

USet prim
DU > = .100
UBase
EQUATION1523 V3 EN-US (Equation 531)

ISet prim
DI< = . 100
IBase
EQUATION1524 V4 EN-US (Equation 532)

The voltage thresholds UPh> is used to identify low voltage condition in the system. Set UPh>
below the minimum operating voltage that might occur during emergency conditions. A
setting of approximately 70% of UBase is recommended.

The current threshold IPh> shall be set lower than the IMinOp for the distance protection
function. A 5...10% lower value is recommended.

14.2.3.6 Dead line detection M13683-78 v4

The condition for operation of the dead line detection is set by the parameters IDLD< for the
current threshold and UDLD< for the voltage threshold.

Set the IDLD< with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected load current. A safety
margin of at least 15-20% is recommended. The operate value must however exceed the
maximum charging current of an overhead line, when only one phase is disconnected (mutual
coupling to the other phases).

Set the UDLD< with a sufficient margin below the minimum expected operating voltage. A
safety margin of at least 15% is recommended.

14.3 Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-9C5BA1A7-DF2F-49D4-A13A-C6B483DDFCDC v2

14.3.1 Identification GUID-109434B0-23E5-4053-9E6E-418530A07F9C v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC VTS 60

14.3.2 Application GUID-AD63BF6C-0351-4E48-9FB2-9AB5CF0C521E v2

Some protection functions operate on the basis of measured voltage at the relay point.
Examples of such protection functions are distance protection function, undervoltage function

Line distance protection REL670 505

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Secondary system supervision

and energisation-check function. These functions might mal-operate if there is an incorrect

measured voltage due to fuse failure or other kind of faults in voltage measurement circuit.

VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage measurement circuit based on
comparison of the voltages of the main and pilot fused circuits phase wise. VDSPVC output
can be configured to block voltage dependent protection functions such as high-speed
distance protection, undervoltage relays, underimpedance relays and so on.

L1 L2 L3

U1L1

U1L2

U1L3
U2L1

U2L2

U2L3

Main Vt circuit
Pilot VT circuit

IED
FuseFailSupvn

IEC12000143-1-en.vsd
IEC12000143 V1 EN-US

Figure 298: Application of VDSPVC

14.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0D5A517C-1F92-46B9-AC2D-F41ED4E7C39E v1

GUID-52BF4E8E-0B0C-4F75-99C4-0BCB22CDD166 v2
The parameters for Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC are set via the local HMI or PCM600.
GUID-0B298162-C939-47E4-A89B-7E6BD7BEBB2C v2
The voltage input type (phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral) is selected using ConTypeMain
and ConTypePilot parameters, for main and pilot fuse groups respectively.

The connection type for the main and the pilot fuse groups must be consistent.

The settings Ud>MainBlock, Ud>PilotAlarm and USealIn are in percentage of the base voltage,
UBase. Set UBase to the primary rated phase-to-phase voltage of the potential voltage

506 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 14
Secondary system supervision

transformer. UBase is available in the Global Base Value groups; the particular Global Base
Value group, that is used by VDSPVC, is set by the setting parameter GlobalBaseSel.

The settings Ud>MainBlock and Ud>PilotAlarm should be set low (approximately 30% of
UBase) so that they are sensitive to the fault on the voltage measurement circuit, since the
voltage on both sides are equal in the healthy condition. If USetPrim is the desired pick up
primary phase-to-phase voltage of measured fuse group, the setting of Ud>MainBlock and
Ud>PilotAlarm will be given according to equation 533.

US etPrim
Ud > MainBloc k or Ud > PilotAlarm = × 100
UBase
IECEQUATION2424 V2 EN-US (Equation 533)

USetPrim is defined as phase to neutral or phase to phase voltage dependent of the selected
ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot. If ConTypeMain and ConTypePilot are set to Ph-N than the
function performs internally the rescaling of USetPrim.

When SealIn is set to On and the fuse failure has last for more than 5 seconds, the blocked
protection functions will remain blocked until normal voltage conditions are restored above
the USealIn setting. The fuse failure outputs are deactivated when the normal voltage
conditions are restored.

14.4 Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC GUID-579ED249-B8C9-4755-9E80-28E2BA8E5377 v2

14.4.1 Identification
GUID-C7108931-DECA-4397-BCAF-8BFF3B57B4EF v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC – 7V_78V

14.4.2 Application GUID-D179DBA4-B068-4A1E-A53E-477BD3B6ACFC v2

In a weak grid networks, fault detection and operation of other protection functions is reliably
done by delta supervision functionality. In this type of network, a delta based release criteria is
used to release the trip signal. The measurement of delta differs from country to country
between magnitude, vector or sample based detection.

In this function, a voltage based delta supervision is implemented in a phase segregated

design. The delta function has the following features:

• Instantaneous sample based delta detection

• True RMS value based delta detection
• DFT magnitude based delta detection
• Vector shift protection

The Delta detection mode is selected on the basis of application requirements. For example,
Instantaneous sample based delta supervision is very fast; the delta is detected in less than a
cycle typically. Hence, instantaneous sample based delta supervision can be used for functions
that are used as protection enablers or fault detectors

All the other supervision modes like RMS/DFT Mag or Angle requires minimum one cycle for
delta detection and can be used for time delay functions.

Line distance protection REL670 507

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Secondary system supervision

Angle shift mode

Use of distributed generation (DG) units is increasing due to liberalized markets (deregulation)
and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy. They generate power in the
range of 10 kW to 10 MW and most of them are interconnected to the distribution network.
They can supply power into the network as well as to the local loads. It is not common to
connect generators directly to the distribution networks and thus the distributed generation
can cause some challenges for the protection of distribution networks. From the protection
point of view, one of the most challenging issue is islanding.

Islanding is defined as a condition in which a distributed generation unit continues to supply

power to a certain part of the distribution network when power from the larger utility main
grid is no longer available after opening of a circuit-breaker.

Islanding is also referred as Loss of Mains (LOM) or Loss of Grid (LOG). When LOM occurs,
neither the voltage nor the frequency is controlled by the utility supply. Also, these distributed
generators are not equipped with voltage and frequency control; therefore, the voltage
magnitude of an islanded network may not be kept within the desired limits resulting into
undefined voltage magnitudes during islanding situations and frequency instability. Further,
uncontrolled frequency represents a high risk for drives and other machines.

Islanding can occur as a consequence of :

• a fault in the network

• circuit-breaker maloperation
• circuit-breaker opening during maintenance

If the distributed generator continues its operation after the utility supply is disconnected,
faults do not clear under certain conditions as the arc is charged by the distributed
generators. Moreover, the distributed generators are incompatible with the current reclosing
practices. During the reclosing sequence dead time, the generators in the network usually tend
to drift out of synchronism with the grid and, reconnecting them without synchronizing may
damage the generators introducing high currents and voltages in the neighbouring network.

Due to the technical difficulties mentioned above, protection should be provided, which
disconnects the distributed generation once it is electrically isolated from the main grid
supply. Various techniques are used for detecting Loss of Mains. However, the present feature
of voltage supervision focuses on voltage vector shift.

For islanding based on vector shift protection, the logic shown in Figure 299 should be used to
trip the breaker. With this logic, reliable tripping can be ensured as angle shift has been
detected in all the three phase voltages.

DELVSPVC
U3P* START
BLOCK STARTL1
STARTL2 AND VectorShiftSTART
STARTL3
STRISE
STRISEL1
STRISEL2
STRISEL3
STLOW
STLOWL1
STLOWL2
STLOWL3
DELMAGL1
DELMAGL2
DELMAGL3

IEC18000903‐1‐en.vsdx
IEC18000903 V1 EN-US

Figure 299: DELVSPVC connection diagram

508 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 14
Secondary system supervision

The vector shift detection guarantees fast and reliable detection of mains failure in almost all
operational conditions when a distributed generation unit is running in parallel with the mains
supply, but in certain cases this may fail.

If the active and reactive power generated by the distributed generation units is nearly
balanced (for example, if the power mismatch or unbalance is less than 5...10%) with the active
and reactive power consumed by loads, a large enough voltage phase shift may not occur
which can be detected by the vector shift algorithm. This means that the vector shift
algorithm has a small non-detectionzone (NDZ) which is also dependent on the type of
generators, loads, network and start or operate value of the vector shift algorithm.

Other network events like capacitor switching, switching of very large loads in weak network
or connection of parallel transformer at HV/MV substation, in which the voltage magnitude is
not changed considerably (unlike in faults) can potentially cause maloperation of vector shift
algorithm, if very sensitive settings are used.

The vector shift detection also protects synchronous generators from damaging due to
islanding or loss-of-mains.

14.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-9356F1C8-9EBA-43E3-8445-CB74E12BC57E v2

Operation: This setting is used to enable/disable the delta supervision function.

Umin: The minimum start level setting should be set as % of UBase. This setting enables the
function to start detecting delta. Typical setting is 10% of UBase. If the MeasMode setting is
set as phase to ground, this setting is taken as 50% of the set value.

MeasMode: This setting is used to detect the mode of measurement; phase to phase or phase
to ground.

OpMode: This setting is used to select the mode of operation. For protection applications, this
should be set to Instantaneous 1 cycle old. Load supervision can be done using vector shift
mode or DFT mag mode.

DelU>: This setting is used to detect the start value for instantaneous sample, RMS, DFT mag
based delta detection. Set a typical value of 50% of UBase to use this function as fault
detection.

DelUang>: This setting is used for angle based delta detection. This setting could be used to
detect islanding condition. A typical setting of 8-10 deg. is good to detect a major islanding
condition.

DeltaT: This setting defines the number of old cycles data to be used for delta calculation in
RMS/DFT Mag and angle mode. Typical value is 2 cycles. This value is not used if OpMode is
chosen as instantaneous 1 cycle or instantaneous 2 cycle.

tHold: This setting defines the pulse length for supervision start signal. Typical value is 100 ms.

14.5 Current based delta supervision DELISPVC GUID-4F012876-FA0A-4A97-9E23-387974304CED v2

14.5.1 Identification
GUID-0B735A27-6A7D-40E1-B981-91B689608495 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current based delta supervision DELISPVC – 7I < >

Line distance protection REL670 509

Application manual
Section 14 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Secondary system supervision

14.5.2 Application GUID-5CEAE117-C7BA-46B6-BF24-477285050894 v2

In power system networks, fault detection and operation of other protection functions is
reliably done by delta supervision functionality. Single phase networks are an important
application of delta supervision. In this type of network, a delta based release criteria is used
to release the protection funciton. The measurement of delta differs from country to country
between magnitude, vector or sample based detection.

In this function, a current based delta supervision is implemented in a phase segregated

design. The delta function has the following features:

• Instantaneous sample based delta detection (vectorial delta)

• True RMS value based delta detection
• DFT magnitude based delta detection
• 2nd harmonic blocking of delta function
• 3rd harmonic based adaption of starting value

Instantaneous sample based delta supervision is very fast; the delta is detected in less than a
cycle typically. This mode can be used for high impedance earth fault detection. All the other
supervision modes like RMS/DFT Mag requires minimum one cycle for delta detection.

Therefore, the choice of delta detection mode should be based on the application
requirement. Instantaneous sample based delta supervision can be used for functions that are
used as protection enabler or fault detector. For time delayed functions, other modes can be
used. Current based function can be used for load supervision also in DFT Mag based delta
mode.

14.5.3 Setting guidelines GUID-69D28046-FAC4-4EF3-9886-F7B0F6341196 v2

Operation: This setting is used to enable/disable the delta supervision function.

Imin: The minimum start level setting should be set as % of IBase. This setting enables the
function to start detecting delta. Typical setting is 10% of IBase.

MeasMode: This setting is used to detect the mode of measurement; phase to phase or phase
to ground.

OpMode: This setting is used to select the mode of operation. For protection applications, this
should be set to Instantaneous 1 cycle old. Load supervision can be done using DFT mag mode.

DelI>: This setting is used to detect the start value for instantaneous sample, RMS, DFT mag
based delta detection. Set a typical value of 200% of IBase to use this function as fault
detection.

DeltaT: This setting defines the number of old cycles data to be used for delta calculation in
RMS/DFT Mag mode. Typical value is 2 cycles.

tHold: This setting defines the pulse length for supervision start signal. Typical value is 100 ms.

EnaHarm2Blk: This setting should be set to ON, to enable blocking for heavy inrush currents or
other sources of 2nd harmonic injections.

Harm2BlkLev: This is the blocking level of 2nd harmonic with respect to the fundamental signal.
Typical setting is 15% of fundamental signal.

EnStValAdap: This setting should be set to ENABLE in special networks where settings in the
network are adapted with respect to 3rd harmonic level.

510 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 14
Secondary system supervision

Harm3Level: This is the set level of 3rd harmonic with respect to fundamental signal at which
the DelI> should be modified. Typical setting is 15% of fundamental signal.

StValGrad: This setting is used to modify the DelI> based on 3rd harmonic level. Typical setting
is 10% to modify the DelI>.

14.6 Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC GUID-470F7470-F3D1-46BC-B0EA-CD180FBA0AB2 v1

14.6.1 Identification
GUID-66CFBA71-B3A4-489F-B7F4-F1909B75E1DD v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC – –

14.6.2 Application GUID-C7F56ACE-D1F2-4F33-96CA-108D7F11FDD5 v1

Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC is a general processed input delta supervision. It is
used to configure any processed inputs such as:

• Power (S)
• Active power (P)
• Reactive power (P)
• Thermal heat content (ɸ)
• Energy

The change over time of these quantities with respect to the old value can be supervised with
this function.

14.6.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0D420893-4266-4EED-8790-1FFA0F41C962 v1

Operation: This setting is used to enable/disable the delta supervision function.

MinStVal: The minimum start level of the function. If the input is below this level, the function
will be blocked. It should be set depending on the input connected.

DelSt>: This setting is used to set the start value for delta detection.

DeltaT: This setting defines the number of execution cycles of old data to be used for delta
calculation. That is, if DeltaT setting is set as 6 for a 3 ms function, an 18 ms old value will be
used to compare the change against.

tHold: This setting defines the pulse length for the start signal. A typical value of this setting is
100 ms.

Line distance protection REL670 511

Application manual
512
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

Section 15 Control

15.1 Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing

SESRSYN IP14558-1 v4

15.1.1 Identification
M14889-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and SESRSYN 25
synchronizing
sc/vc

SYMBOL-M V1 EN-US

15.1.2 Application IP15111-1 v1

15.1.2.1 Synchronizing SEMOD171992-5 v9

To allow closing of breakers between asynchronous networks, a synchronizing feature is

provided. The breaker close command is issued at the optimum time when conditions across
the breaker are satisfied in order to avoid stress on the network and its components.

The systems are defined as asynchronous when the frequency difference between bus and line
is larger than an adjustable parameter. If the frequency difference is less than this threshold
value the system is defined to have a parallel circuit and the synchrocheck function is used.

The synchronizing function measures the difference between the U-Line and the U-Bus. It
operates and enables a closing command to the circuit breaker when the calculated closing
angle is equal to the measured phase angle and the following conditions are simultaneously
fulfilled:

• The voltages U-Line and U-Bus are higher than the set values for UHighBusSynch and
UHighLineSynch of the respective base voltages GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine.
• The difference in the voltage is smaller than the set value of UDiffSynch.
• The difference in frequency is less than the set value of FreqDiffMax and larger than the
set value of FreqDiffMin. If the frequency is less than FreqDiffMin the synchrocheck is
used and the value of FreqDiffMin must thus be identical to the value FreqDiffM resp
FreqDiffA for synchrocheck function. The bus and line frequencies must also be within a
range of ±5 Hz from the rated frequency. When the synchronizing option is included also
for autoreclose there is no reason to have different frequency setting for the manual and
automatic reclosing and the frequency difference values for synchronism check should be
kept low.
• The frequency rate of change is less than set value for both U-Bus and U-Line.
• The difference in the phase angle is smaller than the set value of CloseAngleMax.
• The closing angle is decided by the calculation of slip frequency and required pre-closing
time.

Line distance protection REL670 513

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

The synchronizing function compensates for the measured slip frequency as well as the circuit
breaker closing delay. The phase angle advance is calculated continuously. The calculation of
the operation pulse sent in advance is using the measured SlipFrequency and the set tBreaker
time. To prevent incorrect closing pulses, a maximum closing angle between bus and line is set
with CloseAngleMax. Table 47 below shows the maximum settable value for tBreaker when
CloseAngleMax is set to 15 or 30 degrees, at different allowed slip frequencies for
synchronizing. To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing near a power station, a
narrower limit for the CloseAngleMax needs to be used.

Table 47: Dependencies between tBreaker and SlipFrequency with different CloseAngleMax values
tBreaker [s] (max settable value) tBreaker [s] (max settable value) with SlipFrequency [Hz]
with CloseAngleMax = 15 degrees CloseAngleMax = 30 degrees [max (BusFrequency - LineFrequency)
[default value] value]
0.040 0.080 1.000
0.050 0.100 0.800
0.080 0.160 0.500
0.200 0.400 0.200
0.400 0.810 0.100
1.000 0.080
0.800 0.050
1.000 0.040

The reference voltage can be phase-neutral L1, L2, L3 or phase-phase L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1 or
positive sequence (Require a three phase voltage, that is UL1, UL2 and UL3) . By setting the
phases used for SESRSYN, with the settings SelPhaseBus1, SelPhaseBus2, SelPhaseLine2 and
SelPhaseLine2, a compensation is made automatically for the voltage amplitude difference
and the phase angle difference caused if different setting values are selected for the two sides
of the breaker. If needed an additional phase angle adjustment can be done for selected line
voltage with the PhaseShift setting.

15.1.2.2 Synchrocheck M12309-6 v10

The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of circuit
breakers in power networks in order to prevent closing if conditions for synchronism are not
detected. It is also used to prevent the re-connection of two systems, which are divided after
islanding and after a three pole reclosing.

Single pole auto-reclosing does not require any synchrocheck since the system
is tied together by two phases.

SESRSYN function block includes both the synchrocheck function and the energizing function
to allow closing when one side of the breaker is dead. SESRSYN function also includes a built in
voltage selection scheme which allows adoption to various busbar arrangements.

514 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

~ ~

en04000179.vsd
IEC04000179 V1 EN-US

Figure 300: Two interconnected power systems

Figure 300 shows two interconnected power systems. The cloud means that the
interconnection can be further away, that is, a weak connection through other stations. The
need for a check of synchronization increases if the meshed system decreases since the risk of
the two networks being out of synchronization at manual or automatic closing is greater.

The synchrocheck function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker and compares
them to set limits. Output is generated only when all measured conditions are within their set
limits simultaneously. The check consists of:

• Live line and live bus.

• Voltage level difference.
• Frequency difference (slip). The bus and line frequency must also be within a range of ±5
Hz from rated frequency.
• Phase angle difference.

A time delay is available to ensure that the conditions are fulfilled for a minimum period of
time.

In very stable power systems the frequency difference is insignificant or zero for manually
initiated closing or closing by automatic restoration. In steady conditions a bigger phase angle
difference can be allowed as this is sometimes the case in a long and loaded parallel power
line. For this application we accept a synchrocheck with a long operation time and high
sensitivity regarding the frequency difference. The phase angle difference setting can be set
for steady state conditions.

Another example is the operation of a power network that is disturbed by a fault event: after
the fault clearance a highspeed auto-reclosing takes place. This can cause a power swing in
the net and the phase angle difference may begin to oscillate. Generally, the frequency
difference is the time derivative of the phase angle difference and will, typically oscillate
between positive and negative values. When the circuit breaker needs to be closed by auto-
reclosing after fault-clearance some frequency difference should be tolerated, to a greater
extent than in the steady condition mentioned in the case above. But if a big phase angle
difference is allowed at the same time, there is some risk that auto-reclosing will take place
when the phase angle difference is big and increasing. In this case it should be safer to close
when the phase angle difference is smaller.

To fulfill the above requirements the synchrocheck function is provided with duplicate
settings, one for steady (Manual) conditions and one for operation under disturbed conditions
(Auto).

Line distance protection REL670 515

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

SynchroCheck Bus voltage

UHighBusSC > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelBus Fuse fail
UHighLineSC > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelLine Line voltage Line
UDiffSC < 0.02 – 0.50 p.u. reference
PhaseDiffM < 5 - 90 degrees voltage
Fuse fail
PhaseDiffA < 5 - 90 degrees
FreqDiffM < 3 - 1000 mHz
FreqDiffA < 3 - 1000 mHz

IEC10000079-2-en.vsd
IEC10000079 V2 EN-US

Figure 301: Principle for the synchrocheck function

15.1.2.3 Energizing check M12310-3 v12

The main purpose of the energizing check function is to facilitate the controlled re-connection
of disconnected lines and buses to energized buses and lines.

The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them to both
high and low threshold values. The output is given only when the actual measured conditions
match the set conditions. Figure 302 shows two substations, where one (1) is energized and
the other (2) is not energized. The line between CB A and CB B is energized (DLLB) from
substation 1 via the circuit breaker A and energization of station 2 is done by CB B energization
check device for that breaker DBLL. (or Both).

1 2
A B

Bus voltage Line voltage

EnergizingCheck
UHighBusEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelBus
UHighLineEnerg > 50 - 120 % of GblBaseSelLine
ULowBusEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelBus
ULowLineEnerg < 10 - 80 % of GblBaseSelLine
UMaxEnerg < 50 - 180 % of GblBaseSelBus and/or
GblBaseSelLine

IEC10000078-4-en.vsd
IEC10000078 V4 EN-US

Figure 302: Principle for the energizing check function

The energizing operation can operate in the dead line live bus (DLLB) direction, dead bus live
line (DBLL) direction, or in both directions over the circuit breaker. Energizing from different
directions can be different for automatic reclosing and manual closing of the circuit breaker.

516 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

For manual closing it is also possible to allow closing when both sides of the breaker are dead,
Dead Bus Dead Line (DBDL).

The equipment is considered energized (Live) if the voltage is above the set value for
UHighBusEnerg or UHighLineEnerg of the base voltages GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine,
which are defined in the Global Base Value groups; in a similar way, the equipment is
considered non-energized (Dead) if the voltage is below the set value for ULowBusEnerg or
ULowLineEnerg of the respective Global Base Value groups. A disconnected line can have a
considerable potential due to factors such as induction from a line running in parallel, or
feeding via extinguishing capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 50%
or more of the base voltage of the line. Normally, for breakers with single breaking elements
(<330 kV) the level is well below 30%.

When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to remain
constant for a certain period of time before the close signal is permitted. The purpose of the
delayed operate time is to ensure that the dead side remains de-energized and that the
condition is not due to temporary interference.

15.1.2.4 Voltage selection M12321-3 v11

The voltage selection function is used for the connection of appropriate voltages to the
synchrocheck, synchronizing and energizing check functions. For example, when the IED is
used in a double bus arrangement, the voltage that should be selected depends on the status
of the breakers and/or disconnectors. By checking the status of the disconnectors auxiliary
contacts, the right voltages for the synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check
functions can be selected.

Available voltage selection types are for single circuit breaker with double busbars and the 1½
circuit breaker arrangement. A double circuit breaker arrangement and single circuit breaker
with a single busbar do not need any voltage selection function. Neither does a single circuit
breaker with double busbars using external voltage selection need any internal voltage
selection.

Manual energization of a completely open diameter in 1½ circuit breaker switchgear is allowed

by internal logic.

The voltages from busbars and lines must be physically connected to the voltage inputs in the
IED and connected, using the PCM software, to each of the SESRSYN functions available in the
IED.

15.1.2.5 External fuse failure M12322-3 v12

Either external fuse-failure signals or signals from a tripped fuse (or miniature circuit breaker)
are connected to HW binary inputs of the IED; these signals are connected to inputs of
SESRSYN function in the application configuration tool of PCM600. The internal fuse failure
supervision function can also be used if a three phase voltage is present. The signal BLKU,
from the internal fuse failure supervision function, is then used and connected to the fuse
supervision inputs of the SESRSYN function block. In case of a fuse failure, the SESRSYN
energizing function is blocked.

The UB1OK/UB2OK and UB1FF/UB2FF inputs are related to the busbar voltage and the
ULN1OK/ULN2OK and ULN1FF/ULN2FF inputs are related to the line voltage.

External selection of energizing direction M12322-10 v8

The energizing can be selected by use of the available logic function blocks. Below is an
example where the choice of mode is done from a symbol ,created in the Graphical Design
Editor (GDE) tool on the local HMI, through selector switch function block, but alternatively
there can for example, be a physical selector switch on the front of the panel which is
connected to a binary to integer function block (B16I).

Line distance protection REL670 517

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

If the PSTO input is used, connected to the Local-Remote switch on the local HMI, the choice
can also be from the station HMI system, typically ABB Microscada through IEC 61850–8–1
communication.

The connection example for selection of the manual energizing mode is shown in figure 303.
Selected names are just examples but note that the symbol on the local HMI can only show the
active position of the virtual selector.

IEC07000118 V3 EN-US

Figure 303: Selection of the energizing direction from a local HMI symbol through a
selector switch function block.

15.1.3 Application examples M12323-3 v7

The synchronizing function block can also be used in some switchyard arrangements, but with
different parameter settings. Below are some examples of how different arrangements are
connected to the IED analogue inputs and to the function block SESRSYN. One function block
is used per circuit breaker.

The input used below in example are typical and can be changed by use of
configuration and signal matrix tools.

The SESRSYN and connected SMAI function block instances must have the
same cycle time in the application configuration.

518 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

15.1.3.1 Single circuit breaker with single busbar M12324-3 v12

WA1 SESRSYN
WA1_VT
U3PBB1*
GRP_OFF U3PBB2*
LINE_VT
U3PLN1*
U3PLN2*
QB1
WA1_MCB WA1_MCB UB1OK
WA1_MCB UB1FF

WA1_VT

QA1

LINE_MCB LINE_MCB ULN1OK

ULN1FF

LINE_VT

LINE IEC10000093-4-en.vsd
IEC10000093 V4 EN-US

Figure 304: Connection of SESRSYN function block in a single busbar arrangement

Figure 304 illustrates connection principles for a single busbar. For the SESRSYN function
there is one voltage transformer on each side of the circuit breaker. The voltage transformer
circuit connections are straightforward; no special voltage selection is necessary.

The voltage from busbar VT is connected to U3PBB1 and the voltage from the line VT is
connected to U3PLN1. The conditions of the VT fuses shall also be connected as shown above.
The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel.

15.1.3.2 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, external voltage selection M12325-3 v8

WA1
WA2
WA1_VT/
SESRSYN
WA2_VT
U3PBB1*
GRP_OFF U3PBB2*
LINE_VT
U3PLN1*
WA1_MCB WA2_MCB U3PLN2*
WA1_MCB / WA2_MCB WA1_MCB/
WA2_MCB UB1OK
UB1FF

QB1

QB2
WA1_VT / WA2_VT LINE_MCB ULN1OK
ULN1FF

LINE_MCB
QA1

LINE_VT

LINE IEC10000094-4-en.vsd
IEC10000094 V4 EN-US

Figure 305: Connection of SESRSYN function block in a single breaker, double busbar
arrangement with external voltage selection
In this type of arrangement no internal voltage selection is required. The voltage selection is
made by external relays typically connected according to figure 305. Suitable voltage and VT
fuse failure supervision from the two busbars are selected based on the position of the busbar
disconnectors. This means that the connections to the function block will be the same as for
the single busbar arrangement. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage
sel.

Line distance protection REL670 519

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

15.1.3.3 Single circuit breaker with double busbar, internal voltage selection M12326-3 v7

WA1
WA2

WA1_MCB
SESRSYN
WA1_MCB WA2_MCB WA1_VT
U3PBB1*
WA2_VT
U3PBB2*

WA1_VT LINE_VT
U3PLN1*
WA2_VT
GRP_OFF U3PLN2*

QB1 QB1 B1QOPEN

QB1 B1QCLD
QB2 B2QOPEN
B2QCLD
QB2
QB2

WA1_MCB UB1OK
UB1FF
QA1 LINE_MCB WA2_MCB UB2OK
UB2FF
LINE_MCB ULN1OK
ULN1FF

LINE_VT

LINE IEC10000095-6-en.vsd
IEC10000095 V4 EN-US

Figure 306: Connection of the SESRSYN function block in a single breaker, double busbar
arrangement with internal voltage selection
When internal voltage selection is needed, the voltage transformer circuit connections are
made according to figure 306. The voltage from the busbar 1 VT is connected to U3PBB1 and
the voltage from busbar 2 is connected to U3PBB2. The voltage from the line VT is connected
to U3PLN1. The positions of the disconnectors and VT fuses shall be connected as shown in
figure 306. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to Double bus.

15.1.3.4 Double circuit breaker M12329-3 v7

WA1_QA1
WA1_VT SESRSYN
U3PBB1*
WA1
GRP_OFF U3PBB2*
LINE_VT
WA2 U3PLN1*

U3PLN2*

WA2_ WA1_MCB UB1OK

WA1_MCB MCB WA2_MCB
UB1FF
WA1_MCB

WA1_VT LINE_MCB ULN1OK

ULN1FF
WA2_VT

WA1_QA1
WA2_QA1
WA2_QA1 SESRSYN
WA2_VT
U3PBB1*

GRP_OFF U3PBB2*
LINE_VT
LINE_MCB U3PLN1*

U3PLN2*

WA2_MCB UB1OK
LINE_VT
UB1FF
LINE_MCB
LINE_MCB ULN1OK
ULN1FF

LINE

IEC10000096-6-en.vsd
IEC10000096 V4 EN-US

Figure 307: Connections of the SESRSYN function block in a double breaker arrangement
A double breaker arrangement requires two function blocks, one for breaker WA1_QA1 and one
for breaker WA2_QA1. No voltage selection is necessary, because the voltage from busbar 1 VT
is connected to U3PBB1 on SESRSYN for WA1_QA1 and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is

520 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

connected to U3PBB1 on SESRSYN for WA2_QA1. The voltage from the line VT is connected to
U3PLN1 on both function blocks. The condition of VT fuses shall also be connected as shown in
figure 306. The voltage selection parameter CBConfig is set to No voltage sel. for both
function blocks.

15.1.3.5 1 1/2 circuit breaker M12330-3 v8

Figure 308 describes a 1 ½ breaker arrangement with three SESRSYN functions in the same
IED, each of them handling voltage selection for WA1_QA1, TIE_QA1 and WA2_QA1 breakers
respectively. The voltage from busbar 1 VT is connected to U3PBB1 on all three function blocks
and the voltage from busbar 2 VT is connected to U3PBB2 on all three function blocks. The
voltage from line1 VT is connected to U3PLN1 on all three function blocks and the voltage from
line2 VT is connected to U3PLN2 on all three function blocks. The positions of the
disconnectors and VT fuses shall be connected as shown in Figure 308.

Line distance protection REL670 521

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

Setting parameter CBConfig = 1 ½ bus CB

WA1_QA1
WA1_VT SESRSYN
U3 PBB1*
WA2_VT
U3 PBB2*
LINE1_VT
U3 PLN1*
LINE2_VT
U3 PLN2*
TIE_QA1 B1 QOPEN
B1 QCLD
WA2_QA1 B2 QOPEN
B2 QCLD
LINE1_QB9 LN1 QOPEN
LN1 QCLD
LINE2_QB9 LN2 QOPEN
LN2 QCLD
WA1_MCB UB1OK
UB1FF
WA2_MCB UB2OK
UB2FF
LINE1_MCB ULN1OK
ULN1FF
LINE2_MCB ULN2OK
WA1 ULN2FF

WA2
Setting parameter CBConfig = Tie CB
QB1 QB2
TIE_QA1
WA1_QA1 WA2_QA1 WA1_VT SESRSYN
U3 PBB1*
WA1_MCB
WA1_QB6 WA2_QB6 WA2_VT
U3 PBB2*
WA1_VT LINE1_VT
U3 PLN1*
WA2_MCB LINE2_VT
U3 PLN2*
WA2_VT
WA1_QA1 B1 QOPEN
B1 QCLD
WA2_QA1 WA2_QA1 B2 QOPEN
WA1_QA1 B2 QCLD
LINE1_QB9 LN1 QOPEN
LN1 QCLD
TIE_QA1 LINE2_QB9 LN2 QOPEN
LN2 QCLD
WA1_MCB UB1OK
QB61 QB62 UB1FF
WA2_MCB UB2OK
UB2FF
TIE_QA1 LINE1_MCB ULN1OK
ULN1FF
LINE1_QB9 LINE2_MCB ULN2OK
LINE1_QB9
ULN2FF
LINE2_QB9
LINE2_QB9

LINE1_MCB
Setting parameter CBConfig = 1 ½ bus alt. CB
LINE1_VT
WA2_QA1
LINE2_MCB WA1_VT SESRSYN
U3 PBB1*
LINE2_VT WA2_VT
U3 PBB2*
LINE1_VT
U3 PLN1*
LINE2_VT
U3 PLN2*
LINE1 LINE2 WA1_QA1 B1 QOPEN
B1 QCLD
TIE_QA1 B2 QOPEN
B2 QCLD
LINE1_QB9 LN1 QOPEN
LN1 QCLD
LINE2_QB9 LN2 QOPEN
LN2 QCLD
WA1_MCB UB1OK
UB1FF
WA2_MCB UB2OK
UB2FF
LINE1_MCB ULN1OK
ULN1FF
LINE2_MCB ULN2OK
ULN2FF

IEC10000097-4-en.vsd
IEC10000097 V4 EN-US

Figure 308: Connections of the SESRSYN function block in a 1 ½ breaker arrangement with internal
voltage selection
The connections are similar in all SESRSYN functions, apart from the breaker position
indications. The physical analog connections of voltages and the connection to the IED and
SESRSYN function blocks must be carefully checked in PCM600. In all SESRSYN functions the
connections and configurations must abide by the following rules: Normally apparatus
position is connected with contacts showing both open (b-type) and closed positions (a-type).

522 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

WA1_QA1:

• B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• B2QOPEN/CLD = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• UB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• UB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus CB

TIE_QA1:

• B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• B2QOPEN/CLD = Position of WA2_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• UB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• UB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = Tie CB

WA2_QA1:

• B1QOPEN/CLD = Position of WA1_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors

• B2QOPEN/CLD = Position of TIE_QA1 breaker and belonging disconnectors
• LN1QOPEN/CLD = Position of LINE1_QB9 disconnector
• LN2QOPEN/CLD = Position of LINE2_QB9 disconnector
• UB1OK/FF = Supervision of WA1_MCB fuse
• UB2OK/FF = Supervision of WA2_MCB fuse
• ULN1OK/FF = Supervision of LINE1_MCB fuse
• ULN2OK/FF = Supervision of LINE2_MCB fuse
• Setting CBConfig = 1 1/2 bus alt. CB

If only two SESRSYN functions are provided in the same IED, the connections and settings are
according to the SESRSYN functions for WA1_QA1 and TIE_QA1.

15.1.4 Setting guidelines M12550-3 v14

The setting parameters for the Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check function
SESRSYN are set via the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guidelines describes the settings of the SESRSYN function via the LHMI.

Common base IED value for primary voltage ( UBase ) is set in a Global base value function,
GBASVAL, found under Main menu//Configuration/Power system/GlobalBaseValue/
GBASVAL_X/UBase. The SESRSYN function has one setting for the bus reference voltage
(GblBaseSelBus) and one setting for the line reference voltage (GblBaseSelLine) which
independently of each other can be set to select one of the twelve GBASVAL functions used for
reference of base values. This means that the reference voltage of bus and line can be set to
different values. The settings for the SESRSYN function are found under Main menu/
Settings/IED Settings/Control/Synchronizing(25,SC/VC)/SESRSYN(25,SC/VC):X has been
divided into four different setting groups: General, Synchronizing, Synchrocheck and
Energizingcheck.

Line distance protection REL670 523

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

General settings
Operation: The operation mode can be set On or Off. The setting Off disables the whole
function.

GblBaseSelBus and GblBaseSelLine

These configuration settings are used for selecting one of twelve GBASVAL functions, which
then is used as base value reference voltage, for bus and line respectively.

SelPhaseBus1 and SelPhaseBus2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for busbar 1 and 2
respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-phase) or a
positive sequence voltage.

SelPhaseLine1 and SelPhaseLine2

Configuration parameters for selecting the measuring phase of the voltage for line 1 and 2
respectively, which can be a single-phase (phase-neutral), two-phase (phase-phase) or a
positive sequence voltage.

CBConfig

This configuration setting is used to define type of voltage selection. Type of voltage selection
can be selected as:

• no voltage selection, No voltage sel.

• single circuit breaker with double bus, Double bus
• 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 1, 1 1/2 bus CB
• 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to busbar 2, 1 1/2 bus alt. CB
• 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangement with the breaker connected to line 1 and 2, Tie CB

PhaseShift

This setting is used to compensate the phase shift between the measured bus voltage and line
voltage when:

• different phase-neutral voltages are selected (for example UL1 for bus and UL2 for line);
• one available voltage is phase-phase and the other one is phase-neutral (for example
UL1L2 for bus and UL1 for line).

The set value is added to the measured line phase angle. The bus voltage is reference voltage.

Synchronizing settings
OperationSynch

The setting Off disables the Synchronizing function. With the setting On, the function is in the
service mode and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch

The voltage level settings shall be chosen in relation to the bus/line network voltage. The
threshold voltages UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch have to be set lower than the value
where the network is expected to be synchronized. A typical value is 80% of the rated voltage.

UDiffSynch

524 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

Setting of the voltage difference between the line voltage and the bus voltage. The difference
is set depending on the network configuration and expected voltages in the two networks
running asynchronously. A normal setting is 0.10-0.15 p.u.

FreqDiffMin

The setting FreqDiffMin is the minimum frequency difference where the systems are defined
to be asynchronous. For frequency differences lower than this value, the systems are
considered to be in parallel. A typical value for FreqDiffMin is 10 mHz. Generally, the value
should be low if both synchronizing and synchrocheck functions are provided, and it is better
to let the synchronizing function close, as it will close at exactly the right instance if the
networks run with a frequency difference.

To avoid overlapping of the synchronizing function and the synchrocheck

function the setting FreqDiffMin must be set to a higher value than used
setting FreqDiffM, respective FreqDiffA used for synchrocheck.

FreqDiffMax

The setting FreqDiffMax is the maximum slip frequency at which synchronizing is accepted. 1/
FreqDiffMax shows the time for the vector to move 360 degrees, one turn on the
synchronoscope, and is called Beat time. A typical value for FreqDiffMax is 200-250 mHz, which
gives beat times on 4-5 seconds. Higher values should be avoided as the two networks
normally are regulated to nominal frequency independent of each other, so the frequency
difference shall be small.

FreqRateChange

The maximum allowed rate of change for the frequency.

CloseAngleMax

The setting CloseAngleMax is the maximum closing angle between bus and line at which
synchronizing is accepted. To minimize the moment stress when synchronizing near a power
station, a narrower limit should be used. A typical value is 15 degrees.

tBreaker

The tBreaker shall be set to match the closing time for the circuit breaker and should also
include the possible auxiliary relays in the closing circuit. It is important to check that no slow
logic components are used in the configuration of the IED as there then can be big variations
in closing time due to those components. Typical setting is 80-150 ms depending on the
breaker closing time.

tClosePulse

The setting for the duration of the breaker close pulse.

tMaxSynch

The setting tMaxSynch is set to reset the operation of the synchronizing function if the
operation does not take place within this time. The setting must allow for the setting of
FreqDiffMin, which will decide how long it will take maximum to reach phase equality. At the
setting of 10 mHz, the beat time is 100 seconds and the setting would thus need to be at least
tMinSynch plus 100 seconds. If the network frequencies are expected to be outside the limits
from the start, a margin needs to be added. A typical setting is 600 seconds.

tMinSynch

Line distance protection REL670 525

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

The setting tMinSynch is set to limit the minimum time at which the synchronizing closing
attempt is given. The synchronizing function will not give a closing command within this time,
from when the synchronizing is started, even if a synchronizing condition is fulfilled. A typical
setting is 200 ms.

Synchrocheck settings
OperationSC

The OperationSC setting Off disables the synchrocheck function and sets the outputs
AUTOSYOK, MANSYOK, TSTAUTSY and TSTMANSY to low. With the setting On, the function is
in the service mode and the output signal depends on the input conditions.

UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage. The
threshold voltages UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC have to be set lower than the value at which
the breaker is expected to close with the synchronism check. A typical value can be 80% of the
base voltages.

UDiffSC

The setting for voltage difference between line and bus in p.u. This setting in p.u. is defined as
(U-Bus/GblBaseSelBus) - (U-Line/GblBaseSelLine). A normal setting is 0,10-0,15 p.u.

FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA

The frequency difference level settings, FreqDiffM and FreqDiffA, shall be chosen depending
on the condition in the network. At steady conditions a low frequency difference setting is
needed, where the FreqDiffM setting is used. For autoreclosing a bigger frequency difference
setting is preferable, where the FreqDiffA setting is used. A typical value for FreqDiffM can
be10 mHz, and a typical value for FreqDiffA can be 100-200 mHz.

PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA

The phase angle difference level settings, PhaseDiffM and PhaseDiffA, shall also be chosen
depending on conditions in the network. The phase angle setting must be chosen to allow
closing under maximum load condition. A typical maximum value in heavy-loaded networks can
be 45 degrees, whereas in most networks the maximum occurring angle is below 25 degrees.
The PhaseDiffM setting is a limitation to PhaseDiffA setting. Fluctuations occurring at high
speed autoreclosing limit PhaseDiffA setting.

tSCM and tSCA

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tSCM and tSCA, is to ensure that the synchrocheck
conditions remains constant and that the situation is not due to a temporary interference.
Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the
procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit breaker closing is thus
not permitted until the synchrocheck situation has remained constant throughout the set
delay setting time. Manual closing is normally under more stable conditions and a longer
operation time delay setting is needed, where the tSCM setting is used. During auto-reclosing,
a shorter operation time delay setting is preferable, where the tSCA setting is used. A typical
value for tSCM can be 1 second and a typical value for tSCA can be 0.1 seconds.

Energizingcheck settings
AutoEnerg and ManEnerg

Two different settings can be used for automatic and manual closing of the circuit breaker.
The settings for each of them are:

526 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

• Off, the energizing function is disabled.

• DLLB, Dead Line Live Bus, the line voltage is below set value of ULowLineEnerg and the
bus voltage is above set value of UHighBusEnerg.
• DBLL, Dead Bus Live Line, the bus voltage is below set value of ULowBusEnerg and the line
voltage is above set value of UHighLineEnerg.
• Both, energizing can be done in both directions, DLLB or DBLL.

ManEnergDBDL

If the parameter is set to On, manual closing is also enabled when both line voltage and bus
voltage are below ULowLineEnerg and ULowBusEnerg respectively, and ManEnerg is set to
DLLB, DBLL or Both.

UHighBusEnerg and UHighLineEnerg

The voltage level settings must be chosen in relation to the bus or line network voltage. The
threshold voltages UHighBusEnerg and UHighLineEnerg have to be set lower than the value at
which the network is considered to be energized. A typical value can be 80% of the base
voltages.

ULowBusEnerg and ULowLineEnerg

The threshold voltages ULowBusEnerg and ULowLineEnerg, have to be set to a value greater
than the value where the network is considered not to be energized. A typical value can be 40%
of the base voltages.

A disconnected line can have a considerable potential due to, for instance,
induction from a line running in parallel, or by being fed via the extinguishing
capacitors in the circuit breakers. This voltage can be as high as 30% or more
of the base line voltage.

Because the setting ranges of the threshold voltages UHighBusEnerg/UHighLineEnerg and

ULowBusEnerg/ULowLineEnerg partly overlap each other, the setting conditions may be such
that the setting of the non-energized threshold value is higher than that of the energized
threshold value. The parameters must therefore be set carefully to avoid overlapping.

UMaxEnerg

This setting is used to block the closing when the voltage on the live side is above the set value
of UMaxEnerg.

tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg

The purpose of the timer delay settings, tAutoEnerg and tManEnerg, is to ensure that the dead
side remains de-energized and that the condition is not due to a temporary interference.
Should the conditions not persist for the specified time, the delay timer is reset and the
procedure is restarted when the conditions are fulfilled again. Circuit breaker closing is thus
not permitted until the energizing condition has remained constant throughout the set delay
setting time.

15.2 Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 phase

operation SMBRREC IP14559-1 v6

Line distance protection REL670 527

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

15.2.1 Identification
M14890-1 v7

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Autorecloser for 1 phase, 2 phase and/or 3 SMBRREC 79
phase
5(0 -->1)
IEC15000204 V1 EN-US

15.2.2 Application M12391-3 v8

Automatic reclosing is a well-established method for the restoration of service in a power

system after a transient line fault. The majority of line faults are flashovers, which are transient
by nature. When the power line is switched off by the operation of line protection and line
breakers, the arc de-ionizes and recovers its ability to withstand voltage at a somewhat
variable rate. Thus, a certain dead time with a de-energized line is necessary. Line service can
then be resumed by automatic reclosing of the line breakers. The dead time selected should be
long enough to ensure a high probability of arc de-ionization and successful reclosing.

For individual line breakers, auto reclosing equipment, the required circuit breaker dead time
is used to determine the “dead time” setting value. When simultaneous tripping and reclosing
at the two line ends occurs, line dead time is approximately equal to the auto recloser “dead
time”. If the auto reclosing dead time and line “dead time” differ then, the line will be energized
until the breakers at both ends have opened.
Instant of fault

Operates
Operates

Line
Resets

Resets
Fault

protection

Operate time Operate time

Closed
Circuit
breaker

Open

Break time Closing time Break time

Contact closed
Contacts separated

Close command
Arc extinguishers
Trip command

Fault duration Circuit breaker open time Fault duration

Set AR dead time Reclaim time

Auto-reclosing
Reclosing
command
Start AR

function
AR reset

IEC04000146-3-en.vsd
IEC04000146 V3 EN-US

Figure 309: Single-shot automatic reclosing at a permanent fault

Single-phase tripping and single-phase automatic reclosing is a way of limiting the effect of a
single-phase line fault on power system operation. Especially at higher voltage levels, the

528 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

majority of faults are of single-phase type (around 90%). To maintain system stability in power
systems with limited meshing or parallel routing single-phase auto reclosing is of particular
value. During the single-phase dead time the system is still capable of transmitting load on the
two healthy phases and the system is still synchronized. It requires that each circuit breaker
pole can be operated individually, which is usually the case for higher transmission voltages.

A somewhat longer dead time may be required for single-phase reclosing compared to high-
speed three-phase reclosing. This is due to the influence on the fault arc from the voltage and
the current in the non-faulted phases.

To maximize the availability of the power system it is possible to choose single-phase tripping
and automatic reclosing during single-phase faults and three-phase tripping and automatic
reclosing during multi-phase faults. Three-phase automatic reclosing can be performed with
or without the use of synchrocheck.

During the single-phase dead time there is an equivalent "series"-fault in the system resulting
in a flow of zero sequence current. It is therefore necessary to coordinate the residual current
protections (earth fault protection) with the single-phase tripping and the auto reclosing
function. Attention shall also be paid to "pole discordance" that arises when circuit breakers
are provided with single-phase operating devices. These breakers need pole discordance
protection. They must also be coordinated with the single-phase auto recloser and blocked
during the dead time when a normal discordance occurs. Alternatively, they should use a trip
time longer than the set single-phase dead time.

For the individual line breakers and auto reclosing equipment, the auto reclosing dead time
expression is used. This is the dead time setting for the auto recloser. During simultaneous
tripping and reclosing at the two line ends, auto reclosing dead time is approximately equal to
the line dead time. Otherwise these two times may differ as one line end might have a slower
trip than the other end which means that the line will not be dead until both ends have opened.

If the fault is permanent, the line protection will trip again when reclosing is attempted in
order to clear the fault.

It is common to use one automatic reclosing function per line circuit breaker (CB). When one
CB per line end is used, then there is one auto- recloser per line end. If auto reclosers are
included in duplicated line protection, which means two auto reclosers per CB, one should take
measures to avoid uncoordinated reclosing commands. In 1 1/2 breaker, double-breaker and
ring bus arrangements, two CBs per line end are operated. One auto recloser per CB is
recommended. Arranged in such a way, that sequential reclosing of the two CBs can be
arranged with a priority circuit available in the auto recloser. In case of a permanent fault and
unsuccessful reclosing of the first CB, reclosing of the second CB is cancelled and thus the
stress on the power system is limited.

The auto recloser can be selected to perform single-phase and/or three-phase automatic
reclosing from several single-shot to multiple-shot reclosing programs. The three-phase auto
reclosing dead time can be set to give either High-Speed Automatic Reclosing (HSAR) or
Delayed Automatic Reclosing (DAR). These expressions, HSAR and DAR, are mostly used for
three-phase auto reclosing as single-phase auto reclosing is always high speed to avoid
maintaining the unsymmetrical condition. HSAR usually means a dead time of less than 1
second.

In power transmission systems it is common practice to apply single- and/or three-phase,

single-shot auto reclosing. In sub-transmission and distribution systems tripping and auto
reclosing are usually three-phase. The mode of automatic reclosing varies however. Single-
shot and multi-shot are in use. The first shot can have a short delay, HSAR, or a longer delay,
DAR. The second and following reclosing shots have a rather long delay. When multiple shots
are used the dead time must harmonize with the breaker duty-cycle capacity.

Automatic reclosing is usually started by the line protection and in particular by instantaneous
tripping of such protection. The auto recloser can be inhibited (blocked) when certain
protection functions detecting permanent faults, such as shunt reactor, cable or busbar

Line distance protection REL670 529

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

protection are in operation. Back-up protection zones indicating faults outside the own line
are typically connected to inhibit the auto recloser.

Automatic reclosing should not be attempted when closing a CB and energizing a line onto a
fault (SOTF), except when multiple-shots are used where shots 2 etc. will be started at SOTF.
Likewise a CB in a multi-breaker busbar arrangement which was not closed when a fault
occurred should not be closed by operation of the auto recloser. Auto reclosing is often
combined with a release condition from synchrocheck and dead line or dead busbar check. In
order to limit the stress on turbo generator sets from auto reclosing onto a permanent fault,
one can arrange to combine auto reclosing with a synchrocheck on line terminals close to such
power stations and attempt energizing from the side furthest away from the power station
and perform the synchrocheck at the local end if the energizing was successful.

Transmission protection systems are usually sub-divided and provided with two redundant
protection IEDs. In such systems it is common to provide auto reclosing in only one of the sub-
systems as the requirement is for fault clearance and a failure to reclose because of the auto
recloser being out of service is not considered a major disturbance. If two auto reclosers are
provided on the same breaker, the application must be carefully checked and normally one
must be the master and be connected to inhibit the other auto recloser if it has started. This
inhibit can, for example, be done from an auto recloser for 3-phase operation in progress
signal.

When Single and/or three phase auto reclosing is considered, there are a number of cases
where the tripping shall be three phase anyway. For example:

• Evolving fault where the fault during the dead-time spreads to another phase. The other
two phases must then be tripped and a three phase dead-time and auto reclose initiated
• Permanent fault
• Fault during three-phase dead time
• Auto recloser out of service or circuit breaker not ready for an auto reclosing cycle

“Prepare three-phase tripping” is then used to switch the tripping to three-phase. This signal
is generated by the auto recloser and connected to the trip function block and also connected
outside the IED through IO when a common auto recloser is provided for two sub-systems. An
alternative signal “Prepare 1-phase tripping” is also provided and can be used as an alternative
when the autorecloser is shared with another subsystem. This provides a fail safe connection
so that even a failure in the IED with the auto recloser will mean that the other sub-system will
start a three-phase trip.

A permanent fault will cause the line protection to trip again when it recloses in an attempt to
energize the line.

The auto reclosing function allows a number of parameters to be adjusted.

Examples:

• number of auto reclosing shots

• auto reclosing program
• auto reclosing dead times for each shot

15.2.2.1 Auto reclosing operation Off and On M12391-91 v6

Operation of the automatic recloser can be set to Off and On by a setting parameter or by
external control. The setting parameter Operation = Off, or On sets the function to Off or On.
With the settings Operation = On and ExternalCtrl = On , the control is made by input signal
pulses to the inputs On and Off, for example, from a control system or by a control switch.

When the auto recloser is set On, the SETON output is set, and the auto recloser becomes
operative if other conditions such as circuit breaker is closed and circuit breaker is ready are

530 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

also fulfilled, the READY output is activated (high). Then the auto recloser is ready to accept a
start.

15.2.2.2 Start auto reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle M12391-94 v5

The usual way to start an auto reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it at selective tripping by
line protection by applying a signal to the START input. Starting signals can be either, general
trip signals or, only the conditions for differential, distance protection zone 1 and distance
protection aided trip. In some cases also directional earth fault protection aided trip can be
connected to start an auto reclose attempt. If general trip is used to start the auto recloser it
is important to block it from other functions that should not start an auto reclosing sequence.

In cases where one wants to differentiate three-phase auto reclosing dead time, for different
power system configuration or at tripping by different protection stages, one can also use the
STARTHS input (start high-speed reclosing). When initiating STARTHS, the auto reclosing dead
time for three-phase shot 1, t1 3PhHS is used and the closing is done without checking the
synchrocheck condition.

A number of conditions need to be fulfilled for the start to be accepted and a new auto
reclosing cycle to be started. They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are:

• CBREADY, circuit breaker ready for a reclosing cycle, for example, charged operating gear.
• CBCLOSED to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed when the line fault occurred and
start was applied.
• No signal at INHIBIT input that is, no blocking or inhibit signal present. After the start has
been accepted, it is latched in and an internal signal “start” is set. It can be interrupted by
certain events, like an “inhibit” signal.

15.2.2.3 Start auto reclosing from circuit breaker open information M12391-100 v6

If a user wants to initiate auto reclosing from the circuit breaker open position instead of from
protection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode is selected
with the setting parameter StartByCBOpen=On. Typically a circuit breaker auxiliary contact of
type NO (normally open) is connected to CBCLOSED and START. When the signal changes from
circuit breaker closed to circuit breaker open an auto reclosing start pulse is generated and
latched in the function, subject to the usual checks. The auto reclosing sequence continues
then as usual. Signals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent auto
reclosing, need to be connected to the INHIBIT input.

15.2.2.4 Blocking of the auto recloser M12391-103 v4

Auto reclose attempts are expected to take place only for faults on the own line. The auto
recloser must be blocked by activating the INHIBIT input for the following conditions:

• Tripping from delayed distance protection zones

• Tripping from back-up protection functions
• Tripping from breaker failure function
• Intertrip received from remote end circuit breaker failure function
• Busbar protection tripping

Depending of the starting principle (general trip or only instantaneous trip) adopted above the
delayed and back-up zones might not be required. Breaker failure trip local and remote must
however always be connected.

Line distance protection REL670 531

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

15.2.2.5 Control of the auto reclosing dead time for shot 1 M12391-113 v5

Up to four different time settings can be used for the first shot, and one extension time. There
are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto reclosing dead time, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph,
t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied, and an auto reclosing program with single-phase
auto reclosing is selected, the auto reclosing dead time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the TR2P
or TR3P inputs is activated in connection with the start, the auto reclosing dead time for two-
phase or three-phase auto reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for
three-phase high-speed auto reclosing without synchrocheck, t1 3PhHS, available for use when
required. It is activated by the STARTHS input.

A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time delay for the first shot. It
is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line protection is
lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time difference in fault clearance at the two
line ends, where a longer auto reclosing dead time can be useful. This time extension is
controlled by the setting Extended t1 = On and the PLCLOST input. If this functionality is used
the auto recloser start must also be allowed from distance protection zone 2 time delayed trip.
Time extension delay is not possible to add to the three-phase high-speed auto reclosing dead
time, t1 3PhHS.

15.2.2.6 Long trip signal M12391-117 v4

In normal circumstances the auto recloser is started with a protection trip command which
resets quickly due to fault clearing. The user can set a maximum start pulse duration
tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by setting LongStartInhib.

When start pulse duration signal is longer than set maximum start pulse duration, the auto
reclosing sequence interrupts in the same way as for a signal to the INHIBIT input.

15.2.2.7 Maximum number of reclosing shots M12391-120 v7

The maximum number of auto reclosing shots in an auto reclosing cycle is selected by the
setting NoOfShots. A maximum of five shots can be done. The type of auto reclosing used at
the first auto reclosing shot is set by the setting ARMode. The first alternative is three-phase
auto reclosing. The other alternatives include some single-phase or two-phase auto reclosing.
Usually there is no two-phase tripping arranged, and then there will be no two-phase auto
reclosing.

The decision for single- and three-phase trip is also made in the tripping logic (SMPTTRC)
function block where the setting 3 phase, 1ph/3Ph (or 1ph/2ph/3Ph) is selected.

15.2.2.8 ARMode = 3ph, (normal setting for a three-phase shot) M12391-124 v5

Three-phase auto reclosing, one to five shots according to the NoOfShots setting. The prepare
three-phase trip PREP3P output is always set (high). A trip operation is made as a three-phase
trip for all type of faults. The auto reclosing is as a three-phase auto reclosing as in mode
1/2/3ph described below. All signals, blockings, inhibits, timers, requirements and so on, are
the same as in the example described below.

15.2.2.9 ARMode = 1/2/3ph M12391-127 v8

Single-phase, two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing first shot, followed by 3-phase auto
reclosing shots, if selected. Here, the auto recloser is assumed to be "On" and "Ready". The
circuit breaker is closed and the operation gear ready (operating energy stored). START input
(or STARTHS) is received and sealed-in. The READY output is reset (set to false). ACTIVE output
is set.

532 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

• If TR2P and TR3P inputs are low (i.e. single-phase trip): The timer for single-phase auto
reclosing dead time is started and the 1PT1 output (single-phase reclosing in progress) is
activated. It can be used to suppress pole disagreement and earth-fault protection trip
during the single-phase dead time interval..
• If TR2P input is high and TR3P input is low (i.e. two-phase trip): The timer for two-phase
auto reclosing dead time is started and the 2PT1 output (two-phase reclosing in progress)
is activated.
• If TR3P input is high (i.e. three-phase trip): The timer for three-phase auto reclosing dead
time, t1 3Ph or t1 3PhHS, is started depending on if START or STARTHS input has been
activated and 3PT1 output (three-phase reclosing shot 1 in progress) is set..

While any of the auto reclosing dead time timers are running, the INPROGR output is activated.
When the dead time runs out, the respective internal signal is transmitted to the output
module for further checks and to issue a breaker closing command.

When a circuit breaker closing command is issued, the prepare three-phase output trip is set.
When issuing a circuit breaker closing command the tReclaim timer is started. If no tripping
takes place during that time, the auto recloser resets to the “Ready” state and the ACTIVE
output resets. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-phase trip will be initiated and three-
phase reclosing can follow, if selected.

15.2.2.10 ARMode = 1/2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot M12391-136 v5

At single-phase or two-phase tripping, the operation is as in the example described above,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-phase trip will be issued and
three-phase auto reclosing can follow, if selected. In the event of a three-phase trip, TR3P input
high, the auto recloser will be inhibited and no auto reclosing takes place.

15.2.2.11 ARMode = 1ph+1*2ph, 1-phase or 2-phase reclosing in the first shot M12391-139 v5

At single-phase tripping, the operation is as in the above described example, program mode
1/2/3ph. The single-phase auto reclosing attempt can be followed by three-phase reclosing, if
selected. At two-phase trip, a failure of a two-phase auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the
auto recloser. No more shots are attempted. If the first trip is a three-phase trip, the auto-
reclosing will be inhibited. No more shots are attempted. The expression “1*2ph” should be
understood as “Only one shot at two-phase auto reclosing”.

15.2.2.12 ARMode = 1/2ph + 1*3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot GUID-9C2FB801-F324-465E-8FD2-715A9C3D0BD8 v2

At single-phase or two-phase tripping, the operation is as in the example described above,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-phase trip will be issued and
three-phase reclosing will follow, if selected. At three-phase trip, a failure of a three-phase
auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the auto recloser. No more shots are attempted. The
expression “1*3ph” should be understood as “Only one shot at three-phase auto reclosing”.

15.2.2.13 ARMode = 1ph + 1*2/3ph, 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase reclosing in the

first shot M12391-146 v5

At single-phase or two-phase tripping, the operation is as in the above described example,

program mode 1/2/3ph. If the first reclosing shot fails, a three-phase trip will be issued and
three-phase reclosing will follow, if selected. At two-phase or three-phase trip a failure of a
two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing attempt will inhibit the auto recloser. No more shots
are attempted. The expression “1*2/3ph” should be understood as “Only one shot at two-
phase or three-phase auto reclosing”.

Line distance protection REL670 533

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

Table 48: Type of reclosing shots at different settings of ARMode or integer inputs to MODEINT
MODEINT (integer) ARMode Type of fault 1st shot 2nd-5th shot
1ph 3ph 3ph
1 3ph 2ph 3ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
2 1/2/3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph 3ph
1ph 1ph 3ph
3 1/2ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph ..... .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
4 1ph + 1*2ph 2ph 2ph .....
3ph ..... .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
5 1/2ph + 1*3ph 2ph 2ph 3ph
3ph 3ph .....
1ph 1ph 3ph
6 1ph + 1*2/3ph 2ph 2ph .....
3ph 3ph .....

A start of a new auto reclosing cycle during the set “reclaim time” is blocked when the set
number of reclosing shots have been reached.

15.2.2.14 External selection of auto reclosing mode M12391-241 v5

The auto reclosing mode can be selected by use of available logic function blocks. Below is an
example where the choice of mode, ARMode=3ph or ARMode=1/2/3ph, is done from a
hardware function key at the front of the IED, but alternatively there can for example, be a
physical selector switch on the front of the panel which is connected to a binary to integer
function block (BTIGAPC).

The connection example for selection of the auto reclosing mode is shown in Figure 310.

IEC14000040-1-en.vsd
IEC07000119 V3 EN-US

Figure 310: Selection of the auto-reclose mode from a hardware functional key in front of
the IED

534 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

15.2.2.15 Auto reclosing reclaim timer M12391-202 v4

The tReclaim timer defines the time it takes from issue of the breaker closing command, until
the auto recloser resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as a
continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the circuit breaker closing
command is given.

15.2.2.16 Pulsing of the circuit breaker closing command and counter M12391-205 v4

The circuit breaker closing command, CLOSECB is given as a pulse with a duration set by the
tPulse setting. For circuit breakers without an anti-pumping function, close pulse cutting can
be used. It is selected by the CutPulse setting. In case of a new start pulse (trip), the breaker
closing command pulse is then cut (interrupted). The minimum breaker closing command
pulse length is always 50ms. At the issue of the breaker closing command, the appropriate
auto recloser operation counter is incremented. There is a counter for each type of auto
reclosing command and one for the total number of auto reclosing commands.

15.2.2.17 Transient fault M12391-208 v4

After the breaker closing command the reclaim timer keeps running for the set tReclaim time.
If no start (trip) occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. The circuit breaker remains
closed and the operating gear recharges. The CBCLOSED and CBREADY input signals will be
set.

15.2.2.18 Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signal M12391-211 v5

If a new start occurs, and the number of auto reclosing shots is set to 1, and a new START or
TRSOTF input signal appears, after the circuit breaker closing command, the UNSUCCL output
(unsuccessful reclosing) is set high. The timer for the first shot can no longer be started.
Depending on the set number of auto reclosing shots further shots may be made or the auto
reclosing sequence is ended. After reclaim timer time-out the auto recloser resets, but the
circuit breaker remains open. The circuit breaker closed information through the CBCLOSED
input is missing. Thus, the auto recloser is not ready for a new auto reclosing cycle. Normally,
the UNSUCCL output appears when a new start is received after the last auto reclosing shot
has been made and the auto recloser is inhibited. The output signal resets after reclaim time.
The “unsuccessful” signal can also be made to depend on the circuit breaker position input.
The UnsucClByCBChk setting should then be set to CBCheck, and the tUnsucCl timer should be
set too. If the circuit breaker does not respond to the breaker closing command and does not
close, but remains open, the UNSUCCL output is set high after the set tUnsucCl time. The
UNSUCCL output can for example, be used in multi-breaker arrangement to cancel the auto
reclosing for the second circuit breaker, if the first circuit breaker closed onto a persistent
fault. It can also be used to generate a lock-out of manual circuit breaker closing until the
operator has reset the lock-out, see separate section.

15.2.2.19 Lock-out initiation M12391-214 v8

In many cases there is a requirement that a lock-out is generated when the auto reclosing
attempt fails. This is done with logic connected to the in- and outputs of the auto recloser and
connected to binary I/O as required. Many alternative ways of performing the logic exist
depending on whether manual circuit breaker closing is interlocked in the IED, whether an
external physical lock-out relay exists and whether the reset is hardwired, or carried out by
means of communication. There are also different alternatives regarding what shall generate
lock-out. Examples of questions are:

Line distance protection REL670 535

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

• shall back-up time delayed trip give lock-out (normally yes)

• shall lock-out be generated when closing onto a fault (mostly)
• shall lock-out be generated when the auto recloser is Off at the fault or for example, in
single-phase auto recloser mode and the fault was multi-phase (normally not as no closing
attempt has been given)
• shall lock-out be generated if the circuit breaker did not have sufficient operating power
for an auto reclosing sequence (normally not as no auto closing attempt has been given)

In Figures 311 and 312 the logic shows how a closing lock-out logic can be designed with the
lock-out relay as an external relay alternatively with the lock-out created internally with the
manual closing going through the synchrocheck function. An example of lock-out logic.

SMBRREC
BU-TRIP
ZCVPSOF-TRIP OR INHIBIT

UNSUCCL

SMBO
OR

Lock-out
CCRBRF RXMD1
11
TRBU 21
12

MAIN ZAK CLOSE CLOSE COMMAND

IEC05000315-4-en.vsd
IEC05000315-WMF V4 EN-US

Figure 311: Lock-out arranged with an external lock-out relay

SMBRREC
BU-TRIP
ZCVPSOF-TRIP OR INHIBIT

UNSUCCL
SMPPTRC

OR SETLKOUT

CLLKOUT
CCRBRF Functional key,
SOFTWARE RESET LOCK-OUT RSTLKOUT
TRBU OR IO RESET

MAN CLOSE SMBO

OR AND
SMBRREC CLOSE

SESRSYN

MANENOK CLOSE COMMAND

OR
MANSYOK

IEC05 000 316-4-en.vsdx

IEC05000316-WMF V4 EN-US

Figure 312: Lock-out arranged with internal logic with manual closing going through in
IED

15.2.2.20 Evolving fault M12391-217 v4

An evolving fault starts as a single-phase fault which leads to single-phase tripping and then
the fault spreads to another phase. The second fault is then cleared by three-phase tripping.

The auto recloser will first receive a start signal (START) without any three-phase signal (TR3P).
The auto recloser will start a single-phase auto reclosing sequence, if programmed to do so. At
the evolving fault clearance there will be a new START signal and three-phase trip information,

536 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

TR3P. The single-phase auto reclosing sequence will then be stopped, and instead the timer, t1
3Ph, for three-phase auto reclosing will be started from zero. The sequence will continue as a
three-phase auto reclosing sequence, if it is a selected alternative reclosing mode. The second
fault which can be single-phase is tripped three-phase because the trip function (SMPPTRC) in
the IED has an evolving fault timer which ensures that the second fault is always tripped three-
phase. For other types of relays where the relays do not include this function, the PREP3PH
output (or the inverted PERMIT1PH output) is used to prepare the other sub-system for three-
phase tripping. This signal will, for evolving fault situations, be activated a short time after the
first trip has reset and will thus ensure that new starts (trips) will be three phase.

15.2.2.21 Automatic continuation of the auto reclosing sequence M12391-223 v5

The auto recloser can be programmed to proceed to the next auto reclosing shots (if multiple
shots are selected) even if start signals are not received from protection functions, but the
circuit breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting AutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to
the required delay for the function to proceed without a new start.

15.2.2.22 Thermal overload protection holding the auto recloser back M12391-226 v3

If the THOLHOLD input (thermal overload protection holding auto reclosing back) is activated,
it will keep the auto recloser on a hold until it is reset. There may thus be a considerable delay
between start of the auto recloser and the breaker closing command to the circuit breaker. An
external logic limiting the time and sending an inhibit to the INHIBIT input can be used. The
input can also be used to set the auto recloser on hold for a longer or shorter period.

15.2.3 Setting guidelines IP14929-1 v1

15.2.3.1 Configuration M12399-3 v3

Use the PCM600 configuration tool to configure signals.

Auto recloser function parameters are set via the local HMI or Parameter Setting Tool (PST).
Parameter Setting Tool is a part of PCM600.

Recommendations for input signals M12399-7 v10

Please see Figure 313, Figure 314 and Figure 315 and default factory configuration for
examples.

BLKOFF
Used to unblock the auto recloser when it has been blocked due to activating BLKON input or
by an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt if the BlockByUnsucCl setting is set to On.

BLKON
Used to block the auto recloser, for example, when certain special service conditions arise.
When used, blocking must be reset with BLKOFF.

CBCLOSED and CBREADY

These binary inputs should pick-up information from the circuit breaker. At three operating
gears in the circuit breaker (single pole operated circuit breakers) the connection should be
“All poles closed” (series connection of the NO contacts) or “At least one pole open” (parallel
connection of NC contacts). The CBREADY is a signal meaning that the circuit breaker is ready
for an auto reclosing operation, either Close-Open (CO), or Open-Close-Open (OCO). If the
available signal is of type “circuit breaker not charged” or “not ready”, an inverter can be
inserted in front of the CBREADY input.

Line distance protection REL670 537

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

INHIBIT
To this input shall be connected signals that interrupt an auto reclosing cycle or prevent a start
from being accepted. Such signals can come from protection for a line connected shunt
reactor, from transfer trip receive, from back-up protection functions, busbar protection trip
or from breaker failure protection. When the circuit breaker open position is set to start the
auto recloser, then manual opening must also be connected here. The inhibit is often a
combination of signals from external IEDs via the I/O and internal functions. An OR-gate is
then used for the combination.

MODEINT
The auto reclosing mode is selected with the ARMode setting. As an alternative to the setting,
the mode can be selected by connecting an integer, for example from function block B16I, to
the MODEINT input. The six possible modes are described in table 6 with their corresponding
MODEINT integer value. When a valid integer is connected to the input MODEINT the selected
ARMode setting will be invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected
mode is reported as an integer on the MODE output.

ON and OFF
These inputs can be connected to binary inputs or to a communication interface block for
external control.

PLCLOST
This is intended for line protection permissive signal channel lost (fail) for example, PLC=
Power Line Carrier failure. It can be connected, when it is required to prolong the auto
reclosing dead time when communication is not working, that is, one line end might trip with a
zone2 delay. If this is used the auto recloser must also be started from zone2 time delayed trip.

RESET
Used to reset the auto recloser to start conditions. Possible hold by thermal overload
protection will be reset. Circuit breaker position will be checked and time settings will be
restarted with their set times.

RSTCOUNT
There is a counter for each type of auto reclosing and one for the total number of circuit
breaker close commands issued. All counters are reset with the RSTCOUNT input or by an
IEC 61850 command.

SKIPHS
The high-speed auto reclosing sequence can be skipped and be replaced by normal auto
reclosing sequence by activating SKIPHS input before the STARTHS high-speed start input is
activated. The replacement is done for the 1st shot.

START
The START input should be connected to the trip function (SMPPTRC) output, which starts the
auto recloser for 1/2/3-phase operation. It can also be connected to a binary input for start
from an external contact. A logical OR-gate can be used to combine the number of start
sources.

If StartByCBOpen is used, the circuit breaker open condition shall also be

connected to the START input.

538 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

STARTHS, Start high-speed auto reclosing

It may be used when one wants to use two different dead times in different protection trip
operations. This input starts the dead time t1 3PhHS. High-speed reclosing shot 1 started by
this input is without a synchronization check.

SYNC
This input is connected to the internal synchrocheck function when required or to an external
device for synchronism. If neither internal nor external synchronism or energizing check is
required, it can be connected to a permanently high source, TRUE. The signal is required for
three-phase shots 1-5 to proceed (Note! Not the high-speed step).

THOLHOLD
Signal “Thermal overload protection holding back auto reclosing”. It can be connected to a
thermal overload protection trip signal which resets only when the thermal content has fallen
to an acceptable level, for example, 70%. As long as the signal is high, indicating that the line is
hot, the auto reclosing is held back. When the signal resets, a reclosing cycle will continue.
Observe that this have a considerable delay. Input can also be used for other purposes if for
some reason the auto reclosing shot needs to be halted.

TR2P and TR3P

Signals for two-phase and three-phase trip. They are usually connected to the corresponding
output of the trip function block. They control the choice of dead time and the auto reclosing
cycle according to the selected program. Signal TR2P needs to be connected only if the trip
function block has been selected to give 1ph/2ph/3ph trip and an auto reclosing cycle with
two phase reclosing is foreseen.

TRSOTF
This is the signal “Trip by Switch Onto Fault”. It is usually connected to the “switch onto fault”
output of line protection if multi-shot auto reclosing attempts are used. The input will start
the shots two to five.

WAIT
Used to hold back reclosing of the “low priority unit” during sequential auto reclosing. See
“Recommendation for multi-breaker arrangement” below. The signal is activated from output
WFMASTER on the second breaker auto recloser in multi-breaker arrangements.

ZONESTEP
The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers and down
stream auto reclosers is needed. When this input is activated the auto recloser increases its
actual shot number by one and enters “reclaim time” status. If a start is received during this
reclaim time the auto recloser is proceeding as usual but with the dead time for the increased
shot number. Every new increase of the shot number needs a new activation of the ZONESTEP
input. This functionality is controlled by the setting ZoneSeqCoord.

Recommendations for output signals M12399-46 v9

Please see Figure 313, Figure 314 and Figure 315 and default factory configuration for
examples.

1PT1 and 2PT1

Indicates that single-phase or two-phase auto reclosing is in progress. It is used to temporarily
block an earth-fault and/or pole disagreement function during the single-phase or two-phase
open interval.

Line distance protection REL670 539

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

3PT1, 3PT2, 3PT3, 3PT4 and 3PT5

Indicates that three-phase auto reclosing shots one to five are in progress. The signals can be
used as an indication of progress or for own logic.

ABORTED
The ABORTED output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited while it is in one of the
following internal states:

• inProgress: auto recloser is started and dead time is in progress

• reclaimTimeStarted: the circuit breaker closing command has started the reclaim timer
• wait: an auto recloser, acting as slave, is waiting for a release from the master to proceed
with its own reclosing sequence

ACTIVE
Indicates that the auto recloser is active, from start until end of reclaim time.

BLOCKED
Indicates that auto recloser is temporarily or permanently blocked.

CLOSECB
Connect to a binary output for circuit breaker closing command.

COUNT1P, COUNT2P, COUNT3P1, COUNT3P2, COUNT3P3, COUNT3P4 and

COUNT3P5
Indicates the number of auto reclosing shots made for respective shot.

COUNTAR
Indicates the total number of auto reclosing shots made.

INHIBOUT
If the INHIBIT input is activated it is reported on the INHIBOUT output.

INPROGR
Indicates that an auto recloser sequence is in progress, from start until circuit breaker close
command.

MODE
When a valid integer is connected to the MODEINT input, the selected ARMode setting will be
invalid and the MODEINT input value will be used instead. The selected mode is reported as an
integer on the MODE output. The six possible modes are described in Table 48 with their
corresponding MODEINT integer value.

PERMIT1P
Permit single-phase trip is the inverse of PREP3P. It can be connected to a binary output relay
for connection to external protection or trip relays. In case of a total loss of auxiliary power,
the output relay drops and does not allow single-phase trip.

PREP3P
Prepare three-phase trip is usually connected to the trip block to force a coming trip to be a
three-phase one. If the auto recloser cannot make a single-phase or two-phase auto reclosing,
the tripping should be three-phase.

540 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

READY
Indicates that the auto recloser is ready for a new and complete auto reclosing sequence. It
can be connected to the zone extension if a line protection should have extended zone reach
before auto reclosing.

SETON
Indicates that auto recloser is switched on and operative.

SUCCL
If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is closed within the set
time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the set time interval tSuccessful.

SYNCFAIL
The SYNCFAIL output indicates that the auto recloser is inhibited because the synchrocheck or
energizing check condition has not been fulfilled within the set time interval, tSync. Also
ABORTED output will be activated.

UNSUCCL
Indicates unsuccessful reclosing.

WFMASTER
Wait from master is used in high priority units to hold back auto reclosing of the low priority
unit during sequential auto reclosing. Refer to the recommendation for multi-breaker
arrangements in Figure 315.

Connection and setting examples

Figure 313 is showing an example of how to connect the auto recloser when used for three-
phase auto reclosing and Figure 314 is showing an example of how to connect the auto
recloser when used for single-phase, two-phase or three-phase auto reclosing.

Line distance protection REL670 541

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

BIM BOM
INPUT SMBRREC OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUCCL xx
xx SUCCL xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx CBCLOSED xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECB xx
xx xx
RESET PERMIT1P
PREP3P
PROTECTION READY
xxxx-TRIP OR START
STARTHS 1PT1
SKIPHS 2PT1
ZCVPSOF-TRIP 3PT1
TRSOTF
3PT2
3PT3
THOLHOLD
3PT4
TR2P
TRUE TR3P 3PT5

SESRSYN-AUTOOK
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER
=IEC04000135=5=en=Original.vsd
IEC04000135 V5 EN-US

Figure 313: Example of I/O-signal connections at a three-phase auto reclosing sequence

542 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

BIM BOM
INPUT SMBRREC OUTPUT
xx ON BLOCKED xx
xx OFF SETON xx
xx BLKON INPROGR xx
xx BLKOFF ACTIVE xx
xx INHIBIT UNSUCCL xx
xx SUCCL xx
xx CBREADY xx
xx CBCLOSED xx
xx PLCLOST CLOSECB xx
xx PERMIT1P xx
RESET
PREP3P TRIP-P3PTR
PROTECTION START READY
xxxx-TRIP OR 1PT1 EF4PTOC-BLOCK
OR
2PT1
STARTHS 3PT1
3PT2
SKIPHS
ZCVPSOF-TRIP 3PT3
TRSOTF 3PT4
3PT5
THOLHOLD
TRIP-TR2P
TR2P
TRIP-TR3P TR3P
SESRSYN-AUTOOK
SYNC
WAIT
RSTCOUNT

WFMASTER

=IEC04000136=4=en=Original.vsd
IEC04000136 V4 EN-US

Figure 314: Example of I/O-signal connections for a single-phase, two-phase or three-

phase auto reclosing sequence

Setting recommendations for multi-breaker arrangements M12399-87 v6

Sequential reclosing in multi-breaker arrangements, like 1 1/2-breaker, double breaker and ring
bus, is achieved by giving the two line breakers different priorities. Refer to figure 315. In a
single breaker arrangement the setting is Priority = None. In a multi-breaker arrangement the
setting for the first circuit breaker, the master, is Priority = High and for the other circuit
breaker Priority = Low.

While the auto reclosing of the master is in progress, it issues the WFMASTER output. After an
unsuccessful reclosing the WFMASTER output is also maintained by the UNSUCCL signal. When
activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave, every dead timer is changed to the
value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the auto reclosing operation. When the WAIT
input is reset at the time of a successful reclosing of the first circuit breaker, the slave is
released to continue the reclosing sequence after the set tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for
shortening the time, for the normal dead timers with the value of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give
the slave permission to react almost immediately when the WAIT input resets. The mimimum
settable time for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master and slave should not send the
breaker closing command at the same time. The slave should take the duration of the breaker
closing time of the master into consideration before sending the breaker closing command. A
setting tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT input to reset. If the wait time
expires, the reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. If auto reclosing of the first breaker is
unsuccessful, the UNSUCCL output connected to the INHIBIT input of the slave unit interrupts
the auto reclosing sequence of the latter.

Line distance protection REL670 543

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

The signals can be cross-connected to allow simple changing of the priority by

just setting the High and the Low priorities without changing the
configuration. The input CBCLOSED for each circuit breaker is important in
multi-breaker arrangements to ensure that the circuit breaker was closed at
the beginning of the cycle. If the High priority circuit breaker is not closed the
High priority moves to the low priority circuit breaker.

Terminal ‘‘ Master ”
Priority = High
SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON INPROGR
BLKOFF ACTIVE
INHIBIT UNSUCCL
RESET SUCCL
PLCLOST READY
START CLOSECB CB1
x
STARTHS
PERMIT1P
SKIPHS
PREP3P
THOLHOLD
TRSOTF 1PT1
2PT1
CBREADY 3PT1
CBCLOSED 3PT2
SYNC 3PT3
3PT4
WAIT 3PT5
RSTCOUNT
WFMASTER

Terminal ‘‘ Slave ”
Priority = Low
SMBRREC
ON BLOCKED
OFF SETON
BLKON INPROGR
BLKOFF ACTIVE
INHIBIT
UNSUCCL
RESET
SUCCL
PLCLOST READY
START x
CLOSECB CB2
STARTHS
SKIPHS PERMIT1P
PREP3P
TRSOTF
THOLHOLD 1PT1
2PT1
CBREADY
3PT1
CBCLOSED
3PT2
SYNC 3PT3
WAIT 3PT4
3PT5
WFMASTER

*) Other input/output signals as in previous single

breaker arrangements
IEC04000137-4-en.vsd
IEC04000137 V4 EN-US

Figure 315: Additional input and output signals at multi-breaker arrangement. The
connections can be made "symmetrical" to make it possible to control the
priority by the settings, Priority: High/Low

544 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

15.2.3.2 Auto recloser settings GUID-74980A07-CF89-488F-AB17-E5351D0032EE v1

The settings for the auto recloser are set using the local HMI (LHMI) or PCM600.

This setting guideline describes the settings of the auto recloser using the LHMI.

The settings for the auto recloser are found under Main menu/Settings/IED Settings/
Control/AutoRecloser(79,5(0->1))/SMBRREC(79,5(0->)):X and have been divided into four
different setting groups: General, CircuitBreaker, DeadTime and MasterSlave.

General settings
Operation: The operation of the auto recloser can be switched On or Off.

ExternalCtrl: This setting makes it possible to switch the auto recloser On or Off using an
external switch via IO or communication ports.

ARMode: There are six different possibilities in the selection of auto reclosing programs. The
type of auto reclosing used for different kinds of faults depends on the power system
configuration and the users practices and preferences. When the circuit breaker only have
three-phase operation, then three-phase auto reclosing has to be chosen. This is usually the
case in sub-transmission and distribution lines. Three-phase tripping and reclosing for all
types of faults is also widely accepted in completely meshed power systems. In transmission
systems with few parallel circuits, single-phase reclosing for single-phase faults is an
attractive alternative for maintaining service and system stability.

AutoContinue: Automatic continuation to the next shot if the circuit breaker is not closed
within the set time of tAutoContWait. The normal setting is AutoContinue = Off.

tAutoContWait: This is the length in time the auto recloser waits to see if the circuit breaker is
closed when AutoContinue is set to On. Normally, the setting of tAutoContWait can be 2 sec.

StartByCBOpen: The normal setting Off is used when the function is started by protection trip
signals. If set On the start of the auto recloser is controlled by an circuit breaker auxiliary
contact.

LongStartInhib: Usually the protection trip command, used as an auto reclosing start signal,
resets quickly as the fault is cleared. A prolonged trip command may depend on a circuit
breaker failing to clear the fault. A protection trip signal present when the circuit breaker is
reclosed will result in a new trip. The user can set a maximum start pulse duration time
tLongStartInh. This start pulse duration time is controlled by the LongStartInhib setting. When
the start pulse duration signal is longer than set maximum start pulse duration, the auto
reclosing sequence interrupts in the same way as for a signal to the INHIBIT input.

tLongStartInh: The user can set a maximum start pulse duration time tLongStartInh. At a set
time somewhat longer than the auto reclosing dead time, this facility will not influence the
auto reclosing. A typical setting of tLongStartInh could be close to the auto reclosing dead
time.

tInhibit: To ensure reliable interruption and temporary blocking of the auto recloser a resetting
time delay tInhibit is used. The auto recloser will be blocked this time after the deactivation of
the INHIBIT input. A typical resetting delay is 5.0 s.

ZoneSeqCoord: The ZONESTEP input is used when coordination between local auto reclosers
and down stream auto reclosers is needed. When this input is activated the auto recloser
increases its actual shot number by one and enters “reclaim time” status. If a start is received
during this reclaim time the auto recloser is proceeding as usual but with the dead time for the
increased shot number. Every new increase of the shot number needs a new activation of the
ZONESTEP input. The setting NoOfShots limits of course the possibility to increase the shot
number. This functionality is controlled by the setting ZoneSeqCoord.

Line distance protection REL670 545

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

CircuitBreaker settings
CBReadyType: The selection depends on the type of performance available from the circuit
breaker operating gear. At setting OCO (circuit breaker ready for an Open – Close – Open
cycle), the condition is checked only at the start of the auto reclosing cycle. The signal will
disappear after tripping, but the circuit breaker will still be able to perform the C-O sequence.
For the selection CO (circuit breaker ready for a Close – Open cycle) the condition is also
checked after the set auto reclosing dead time. This selection has a value first of all at multi-
shot auto reclosing to ensure that the circuit breaker is ready for a C-O sequence at shot two
and further shots. During single-shot auto reclosing, the OCO selection can be used. A breaker
shall according to its duty cycle always have storing energy for a CO operation after the first
trip. (IEC 56 duty cycle is O – 0.3sec – CO – 3min – CO).

FollowCB: The usual setting is Follow CB = Off. The setting On can be used for delayed auto
reclosing with long delay, to cover the case when a circuit breaker is being manually closed
during the auto reclosing dead time before the auto recloser has issued its breaker close
command.

UnsucClByCBChk: The normal setting is NoCBCheck and the auto reclosing unsuccessful event
is then decided by a new trip within the reclaim time after the last reclosing shot. If one wants
to get the UNSUCCL (Reclosing is unsuccessful) signal in the case the circuit breaker does not
respond to the circuit breaker close command, one can set UnsucClByCBCheck = CB Check and
set tUnsucCl for instance to 1.0 s.

BlockByUnsucCl: Setting of whether an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt shall set the auto
recloser in blocked status. If used the BLKOFF input must be configured to unblock the
function after an unsuccessful auto reclosing attempt. Normal setting is Off.

CutPulse: In circuit breakers without anti-pumping relays, the setting CutPulse = On can be
used to avoid repeated closing operation when reclosing onto a fault. A new start will then cut
the ongoing pulse.

tPulse: The circuit breaker closing command should be long enough to ensure reliable
operation of the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker closing command pulse has a duration set
by the tPulse setting. A typical setting may be tPulse = 200 ms. A longer pulse setting may
facilitate dynamic indication at testing, for example, in debug mode of the Application
Configuration Tool (ACT) in PCM600. In circuit breakers without anti-pumping relays, the
setting CutPulse = On can be used to avoid repeated closing operations when reclosing onto a
fault. A new start will then cut the ongoing pulse.

tReclaim: The reclaim time sets the time for resetting the function to its original state, after
which a line fault and tripping will be treated as an independent new case with a new auto
reclosing cycle. One may consider a nominal CB duty cycle of for instance, O – 0.3sec – CO –
3min – CO. However the 3 minute (180 s) recovery time is usually not critical as fault levels are
mostly lower than rated value and the risk of a new fault within a short time is negligible. A
typical time may be tReclaim = 60 or 180 s dependent on the fault level and circuit breaker duty
cycle.

tSync: Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions. The time window should be
coordinated with the operate time and other settings of the synchrocheck function. Attention
should also be paid to the possibility of a power swing when reclosing after a line fault. Too
short a time may prevent a potentially successful auto reclosing.

tCBClosedMin: A typical setting is 5.0 s. If the circuit breaker has not been closed for at least
this minimum time, an auto reclosing start will not be accepted.

tSuccessful: If the circuit breaker closing command is given and the circuit breaker is closed
within the set time interval tUnsucCl, the SUCCL output is activated after the set time interval
tSuccessful.

546 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

tUnsucCl: The reclaim timer, tReclaim, is started each time a circuit breaker closing command
is given. If no start occurs within this time, the auto recloser will reset. A new start received in
“reclaim time” status will reenter the auto recloser to “in progress” status as long as the final
shot is not reached. The auto recloser will reset and enter “inactive” status if a new start is
given during the final reclaim time. This will also happen if the circuit breaker has not closed
within set time interval tUnsucCl at the end of the reclaim time. This latter case is controlled by
setting UnsucClByCBChk. The auto reclosing sequence is considered unsuccessful for both
above cases and the UNSUCCL output is activated.

DeadTime settings
NoOfShots: In power transmission one shot is mostly used. In most cases one auto reclosing
shot is sufficient as the majority of arcing faults will cease after the first auto reclosing shot. In
power systems with many other types of faults caused by other phenomena, for example wind,
a greater number of auto reclosing attempts (shots) can be motivated.

t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph: There are separate settings for the first shot for single-, two- and three-
phase auto reclosing dead times.

Single-phase auto reclosing dead time: A typical setting is t1 1Ph = 800ms. Due to the influence
of energized phases the arc extinction may not be instantaneous. In long lines with high
voltage the use of shunt reactors in the form of a star with a neutral reactor improves the arc
extinction.

Three-phase auto reclosing dead time: Different local phenomena, such as moisture, salt,
pollution, can influence the required dead time. Some users apply Delayed Auto Reclosing
(DAR) with delays of 10s or more.

Extended t1: The time extension below is controlled by the Extended t1 setting.

tExtended t1: A time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the dead time delay for
the first shot. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for permissive line
protection is lost. The communication link in a permissive (not strict) line protection scheme,
for instance a power line carrier (PLC) link, may not always be available. If lost, it can result in
delayed tripping at one end of a line. There is a possibility to extend the auto reclosing dead
time in such a case by use of the PLCLOST input, and the tExtended t1 setting. Typical setting
in such a case: Extended t1 = On and tExtended t1 = 0.8 s.

t1 3PhHS: There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto
reclosing, t1 3PhHS. This high-speed auto reclosing is activated by the STARTHS input and is
used when auto reclosing is done without the requirement of synchrocheck conditions to be
fulfilled. A typical dead time is 400ms.

t2 3Ph, t3 3Ph, t4 3Ph, t5 3Ph: The delay of auto reclosing shot two and possible later shots are
usually set at 30s or more. A check that the circuit breaker duty cycle can manage the selected
setting must be done. The setting can in some cases be restricted by national regulations. For
multiple shots the setting of shots two to five must be longer than the circuit breaker duty
cycle time.

MasterSlave settings
Priority: In single circuit breaker applications, one sets Priority = None. At sequential reclosing
the auto recloser for the first circuit breaker, e.g. near the busbar, is set as master (High) and
the auto recloser for the second circuit breaker is set as slave (Low).

tWaitForMaster: The slave should take the duration of the circuit breaker closing time of the
master into consideration before sending the circuit breaker closing command. A setting
tWaitForMaster sets a maximum wait time for the WAIT input to reset. If the wait time expires,
the auto reclosing cycle of the slave is inhibited. The maximum wait time, tWaitForMaster for
the second circuit breaker is set longer than the auto reclosing dead time plus a margin for
synchrocheck conditions to be fulfilled for the first circuit breaker. Typical setting is 2sec.

Line distance protection REL670 547

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

tSlaveDeadTime: When activating the WAIT input, in the auto recloser set as slave, every dead
timer is changed to the value of setting tSlaveDeadTime and holds back the auto reclosing
operation. When the WAIT input is reset at the time of a successful reclosing of the first circuit
breaker, the slave is released to continue the auto reclosing sequence after the set
tSlaveDeadTime. The reason for shortening the time, for the normal dead timers with the value
of tSlaveDeadTime, is to give the slave permission to react almost immediately when the WAIT
input resets. The minimum settable time for tSlaveDeadTime is 0.1sec because both master
and slave should not send the circuit breaker closing command at the same time.

15.3 Apparatus control IP14560-1 v3

15.3.1 Application M13443-4 v14

The apparatus control is a functionality for control and supervising of circuit breakers,
disconnectors, and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator
place selection and external or internal blockings.

The complete apparatus control function is not included in this product, and
the information below is included for understanding of the principle for the use
of QCBAY, LOCREM, LOCREMCTRL, SCILO, SCSWI, SXCBR.

Figure 316 shows from which places the apparatus control function receives commands. The
commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the Control Centre (CC), the station HMI or
the local HMI on the IED front.

cc

Station HMI

GW

Station bus

Local Local Local

HMI HMI HMI
IED IED IED
Apparatus Apparatus Apparatus
Control Control Control
I/O I/O I/O

breakers disconnectors earthing switches

IEC08000227.vsd
IEC08000227 V1 EN-US

Figure 316: Overview of the apparatus control functions

Features in the apparatus control function:

548 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

• Operation of primary apparatuses

• Select-Execute principle to give high security
• Selection and reservation function to prevent simultaneous operation
• Selection and supervision of operator place
• Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications
• Substitution of position indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
• Overriding of synchrocheck
• Pole discordance supervision
• Operation counter
• Suppression of mid position

The apparatus control function is realized by means of a number of function blocks

designated:

• Switch controller SCSWI

• Circuit breaker SXCBR
• Circuit switch SXSWI
• Bay control QCBAY
• Bay reserve QCRSV
• Reservation input RESIN
• Local remote LOCREM
• Local remote control LOCREMCTRL

The signal flow between the function blocks is shown in Figure 317. To realize the reservation
function, the function blocks Reservation input (RESIN) and Bay reserve (QCRSV) also are
included in the apparatus control function. The application description for all these functions
can be found below. The function SCILO in the Figure below is the logical node for interlocking.

When the circuit breaker or switch is located in a breaker IED, two more functions are added:

• GOOSE receive for switching device GOOSEXLNRCV

• Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY

The extension of the signal flow and the usage of the GOOSE communication are shown in
Figure 318.

Line distance protection REL670 549

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

IEC 61850

en05000116.vsd
IEC05000116 V2 EN-US

Figure 317: Signal flow between apparatus control function blocks when all functions are
situated within the IED

550 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

IEC 61850 on
station bus

Bay level IED

QCBAY SCSWI

SCILO

GOOSEXLNRCV XLNPROXY

SCSWI

SCILO

GOOSEXLNRCV XLNPROXY

GOOSE over process bus

Merging Unit
XCBR
XCBR -QB1
XCBR -QA1

XSWI -QB9

IEC16000070-1-EN.vsdx
IEC16000070 V1 EN-US

Figure 318: Signal flow between apparatus control functions with XCBR and XSWI located
in a breaker IED
Control operation can be performed from the local IED HMI. If users are defined in the IED,
then the local/remote switch is under authority control, otherwise the default user can
perform control operations from the local IED HMI without logging in. The default position of
the local/remote switch is on remote.

Accepted originator categories for PSTO

If the requested command is accepted by the authority control, the value will change.
Otherwise the attribute blocked-by-switching-hierarchy is set in the cause signal. If the PSTO
value is changed during a command, then the command is aborted.

Line distance protection REL670 551

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

The accepted originator categories for each PSTO value are shown in Table 49.

Table 49: Accepted originator categories for each PSTO

Permitted Source To Operate Originator (orCat)

0 = Off 4,5,6
1 = Local 1,4,5,6
2 = Remote 2,3,4,5,6
3 = Faulty 4,5,6
4 = Not in use 4,5,6
5 = All 1,2,3,4,5,6
6 = Station 2,4,5,6
7 = Remote 3,4,5,6

PSTO = All, then it is no priority between operator places. All operator places are allowed to
operate.

According to IEC 61850 standard the orCat attribute in originator category are defined in
Table 50

Table 50: orCat attribute according to IE C61850

Value Description
0 not-supported
1 bay-control
2 station-control
3 remote-control
4 automatic-bay
5 automatic-station
6 automatic-remote
7 maintenance
8 process

15.3.2 Bay control QCBAY M16595-3 v10

The Bay control (QCBAY) is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The
function gives permission to operate from two main types of locations either from Remote
(for example, control centre or station HMI) or from Local (local HMI on the IED) or from all
(Local and Remote). The Local/Remote switch position can also be set to Off, which means no
operator place selected that is, operation is not possible either from local or from remote.

For IEC 61850-8-1 communication, the Bay Control function can be set to discriminate between
commands with orCat station and remote (2 and 3). The selection is then done through the IEC
61850-8-1 edition 2 command LocSta.

QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different apparatuses
within the bay. There are two different blocking alternatives:

• Blocking of update of positions

• Blocking of commands

552 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

IEC13000016-2-en.vsd
IEC13000016 V2 EN-US

Figure 319: APC - Local remote function block

15.3.3 Switch controller SCSWI M16596-3 v6

SCSWI may handle and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching
devices.

After the selection of an apparatus and before the execution, the switch controller performs
the following checks and actions:

• A request initiates to reserve other bays to prevent simultaneous operation.

• Actual position inputs for interlocking information are read and evaluated if the operation
is permitted.
• The synchrocheck/synchronizing conditions are read and checked, and performs
operation upon positive response.
• The blocking conditions are evaluated
• The position indications are evaluated according to given command and its requested
direction (open or closed).

The command sequence is supervised regarding the time between:

• Select and execute.

• Select and until the reservation is granted.
• Execute and the final end position of the apparatus.
• Execute and valid close conditions from the synchrocheck.

At error the command sequence is cancelled.

Line distance protection REL670 553

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

In the case when there are three one-phase switches (SXCBR) connected to the switch
controller function, the switch controller will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In case of a pole discordance situation, that is, the positions of
the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than a settable time; an error signal will
be given.

The switch controller is not dependent on the type of switching device SXCBR or SXSWI. The
switch controller represents the content of the SCSWI logical node (according to IEC 61850)
with mandatory functionality.

15.3.4 Switches SXCBR/SXSWI M16602-3 v7

Switches are functions used to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal
conditions, or to interrupt the circuit under fault, or emergency conditions. The intention with
these functions is to represent the lowest level of a power-switching device with or without
short circuit breaking capability, for example, circuit breakers, disconnectors, earthing
switches etc.

The purpose of these functions is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform the
control operations, that is, pass all the commands to the primary apparatus via output boards
and to supervise the switching operation and position.

Switches have the following functionalities:

• Local/Remote switch intended for the switchyard

• Block/deblock for open/close command respectively
• Update block/deblock of position indication
• Substitution of position indication
• Supervision timer that the primary device starts moving after a command
• Supervision of allowed time for intermediate position
• Definition of pulse duration for open/close command respectively

The realizations of these functions are done with SXCBR representing a circuit breaker and
with SXSWI representing a circuit switch that is, a disconnector or an earthing switch.

Circuit breaker (SXCBR) can be realized either as three one-phase switches or as one three-
phase switch.

The content of this function is represented by the IEC 61850 definitions for the logical nodes
Circuit breaker (SXCBR) and Circuit switch (SXSWI) with mandatory functionality.

15.3.5 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY GUID-2DA1E47C-5A9A-4C53-8D60-7B1729EF6B90 v1

The purpose of the proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE (XLNPROXY) is to give
the same internal representation of the position status and control response for a switch
modeled in a breaker IED as if represented by a SXCBR or SXSWI function.

The command response functionality is dependent on the connection of the execution

information, XIN, from the SCSWI function controlling the represented switch. Otherwise, the
function only reflects the current status of the switch, such as blocking, selection, position,
operating capability and operation counter.

Since different switches are represented differently on IEC 61850, the data that is mandatory
to model in IEC 61850 is mandatory inputs and the other useful data for the command and
status following is optional. To make it easy to choose which data to use for the XLNPROXY
function, their usage is controlled by the connection of each data’s signal input and valid input.
These connections are usually from the GOOSEXLNRCV function (see Figure 320 and Figure
321).

554 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

IEC16000071 V1 EN-US

Figure 320: Configuration with XLNPROXY and GOOSEXLNRCV where all the IEC 61850
modelled data is used, including selection

IEC16000072 V1 EN-US

Figure 321: Configuration with XLNPROXY and GOOSEXLNRCV where only the mandatory
data in the IEC 61850 modelling is used
All the information from the XLNPROXY to the SCSWI about command following status, causes
for failed command and selection status is transferred in the output XPOS. The other outputs

Line distance protection REL670 555

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

may be used by other functions in the same way as the corresponding outputs of the SXCBR
and SXSWI function.

When a command has been issued from the connected SCSWI function, the XLNPROXY
function awaits the response on it from the represented switch through the inputs POSVAL
and OPOK. While waiting for the switch to start moving, it checks if the switch is blocked for
the operation. When the switch has started moving and no blocking condition has been
detected, XLNPROXY issues a response to the SCSWI function that the command has started.
If OPOK is used, this response is given when XLNPROXY receives the signal.

If no movement of the switch is registered within the limit tStartMove, the command is
considered failed, and the cause of the failure is evaluated. In the evaluation, the function
checks if the state of the represented switch is indicating that the command is blocked in any
way during the command, and gives the appropriate cause to the SCSWI function. This cause is
also shown on the output L_CAUSE as indicated in the following table:

Table 51: Possible cause values from XLNPROXY

Cause No Cause Description Conditions
8 Blocked-by-Mode The BEH input is 5.
2 Blocked-by-switching- The LOC input indicates that only local commands
hierarchy are allowed for the breaker IED function.
-24 Blocked-for-open-cmd The BLKOPN is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for open commands.
-25 Blocked-for-close-cmd The BLKCLS is active indicating that the switch is
blocked for close commands.
9 Blocked-by-process If the Blk input is connected and active indicating
that the switch is dynamically blocked. Or if the
OPCAP input is connected, it indicates that the
operation capability of the switch is not enough to
perform the command.
5 Position-reached Switch is already in the intended position.
-31 Switch-not-start-moving Switch did not start moving within tStartMove.
-32 Persistent-intermediate-state The switch stopped in intermediate state for longer
than tIntermediate.
-33 Switch-returned-to-init-pos Switch returned to the initial position.
-34 Switch-in-bad-state Switch is in a bad position.
-35 Not-expected-final-position Switch did not reach the expected final position.

The OPCAP input and output are used for the CBOpCap data of a XCBR
respectively SwOpCap for a XSWI. The interpretation for the command
following is controlled through the setting SwitchType.

15.3.6 Reservation function (QCRSV and RESIN) M16609-3 v4

The purpose of the reservation function is primarily to transfer interlocking information

between IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard part, or
complete substation.

For interlocking evaluation in a substation, the position information from switching devices,
such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches can be required from the same
bay or from several other bays. When information is needed from other bays, it is exchanged
over the station bus between the distributed IEDs. The problem that arises, even at a high
speed of communication, is a space of time during which the information about the position

556 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

of the switching devices are uncertain. The interlocking function uses this information for
evaluation, which means that also the interlocking conditions are uncertain.

To ensure that the interlocking information is correct at the time of operation, a unique
reservation method is available in the IEDs. With this reservation method, the bay that wants
the reservation sends a reservation request to other bays and then waits for a reservation
granted signal from the other bays. Actual position indications from these bays are then
transferred over the station bus for evaluation in the IED. After the evaluation the operation
can be executed with high security.

This functionality is realized over the station bus by means of the function blocks QCRSV and
RESIN. The application principle is shown in Figure 322.

The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. It sends out either the reservation request
to other bays or the acknowledgement if the bay has received a request from another bay.

The other function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The
number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances are
available). The received signals are either the request for reservation from another bay or the
acknowledgment from each bay respectively, which have received a request from this bay. Also
the information of valid transmission over the station bus must be received.

IED IED

SCSWI
RES_GRT
RES_RQ

3 RESIN
EXCH_IN
QCRSV
EXCH_OUT
RES_RQ1
From other ..
...
SCSWI in RES_RQ8
...

the bay
RES_GRT1 To other
RESIN ..
SCSWI
EXCH_IN RES_GRT8
in the
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA bay
3 2

...

Station bus

en05000117.vsd
IEC05000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 322: Application principles for reservation over the station bus
The reservation can also be realized with external wiring according to the application example
in Figure 323. This solution is realized with external auxiliary relays and extra binary inputs and
outputs in each IED, but without use of function blocks QCRSV and RESIN.

Line distance protection REL670 557

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

IED IED

SCSWI

RES_EXT
SELECTED

OR
Other SCSWI in the bay

BI BO BI BO

en05000118.vsd
IEC05000118 V2 EN-US

Figure 323: Application principles for reservation with external wiring

The solution in Figure 323 can also be realized over the station bus according to the
application example in Figure 324. The solutions in Figure 323 and Figure 324 do not have the
same high security compared to the solution in Figure 322, but instead have a higher
availability, since no acknowledgment is required.

IED IED

IntlReceive SCSWI
RESGRANT RES_EXT
SELECTED
. . .
. . .

IntlReceive SPGAPC
RESGRANT Other SCWI in OR IN
the bay

...
Station bus

IEC05000178-3-en.vsd
IEC05000178 V3 EN-US

Figure 324: Application principle for an alternative reservation solution

15.3.7 Interaction between modules M16626-3 v9

A typical bay with apparatus control function consists of a combination of logical nodes or
functions that are described here:

• The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes all operations for one apparatus. It is the
command interface of the apparatus. It includes the position reporting as well as the
control of the position
• The Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is the process interface to the circuit breaker for the
apparatus control function.
• The Circuit switch (SXSWI) is the process interface to the disconnector or the earthing
switch for the apparatus control function.
• The Bay control (QCBAY) fulfils the bay-level functions for the apparatuses, such as
operator place selection and blockings for the complete bay.
• The Reservation (QCRSV) deals with the reservation function.
• The Protection trip logic (SMPPTRC) connects the "trip" outputs of one or more protection
functions to a common "trip" to be transmitted to SXCBR.

558 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

• The Autorecloser (SMBRREC) consists of the facilities to automatically close a tripped

breaker with respect to a number of configurable conditions.
• The logical node Interlocking (SCILO) provides the information to SCSWI whether it is
permitted to operate due to the switchyard topology. The interlocking conditions are
evaluated with separate logic and connected to SCILO .
• The Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing (SESRSYN) calculates and
compares the voltage phasor difference from both sides of an open breaker with
predefined switching conditions (synchrocheck). Also the case that one side is dead
(energizing-check) is included.
• The Generic Automatic Process Control function, GAPC, handles generic commands from
the operator to the system.

The overview of the interaction between these functions is shown in Figure 325 below.

Line distance protection REL670 559

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

SMPPTRC SESRSYN Synchronizing OK

(Trip logic) (Synchrocheck & Synchronizer)

Trip

Synchronizing
Synchrocheck

Synchronizing

in progress
Start
OK
QCBAY Operator place
(Bay control) selection Open cmd
Start AR

Close cmd
Res. req. SCSWI SXCBR
(Switching control) (Circuit breaker)
QCRSV Res. granted
(Reservation) Res. req.

Close CB
SMBRREC
Enable

Enable
close
open

(Auto- Position
reclosure)
I/O
SCILO
(Interlocking)
other bays
Pos. from

Open rel.
Interlocking Close rel.
function Open rel.
block Close rel. SCILO
(Not a LN) Position (Interlocking)
Enable Enable
open close

GAPC Res.
granted Open cmd
(Generic
Close cmd
Automatic SCSWI SXSWI
Process Open/Close (Switching control) (Disconnector)
Control) Open/Close

Position

I/O

IEC05000120-3-EN.vsdx
IEC05000120 V3 EN-US

Figure 325: Example overview of the interactions between functions in a typical bay

15.3.8 Setting guidelines M16669-3 v5

The setting parameters for the apparatus control function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

15.3.8.1 Bay control (QCBAY) M16670-3 v7

If the parameter AllPSTOValid is set to No priority, all originators from local and remote are
accepted without any priority.

560 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

If the parameter RemoteIncStation is set to Yes, commands from IEC 61850-8-1 clients at both
station and remote level are accepted, when the QCBAY function is in Remote. If set to No, the
command LocSta controls which operator place is accepted when QCBAY is in Remote. If
LocSta is true, only commands from station level are accepted, otherwise only commands
from remote level are accepted.

The parameter RemoteIncStation has only effect on the IEC 61850-8-1

communication. Further, when using IEC 61850 edition 1 communication, the
parameter should be set to Yes, since the command LocSta is not defined in
IEC 61850-8-1 edition 1.

15.3.8.2 Switch controller (SCSWI) M16673-3 v6

The parameter CtlModel specifies the type of control model according to IEC 61850. The
default for control of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing switches the control model
is set to SBO Enh (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security.

When the operation shall be performed in one step, and no monitoring of the result of the
command is desired, the model direct control with normal security is used.

At control with enhanced security there is an additional supervision of the status value by the
control object, which means that each command sequence must be terminated by a
termination command.

The parameter PosDependent gives permission to operate depending on the position

indication, that is, at Always permitted it is always permitted to operate independent of the
value of the position. At Not perm at 00/11 it is not permitted to operate if the position is in
bad or intermediate state.

tSelect is the maximum allowed time between the select and the execute command signal,
that is, the time the operator has to perform the command execution after the selection of the
object to operate. When the time has expired, the selected output signal is set to false and a
cause-code is given.

The time parameter tResResponse is the allowed time from reservation request to the
feedback reservation granted from all bays involved in the reservation function. When the time
has expired, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given.

tSynchrocheck is the allowed time for the synchrocheck function to fulfill the close conditions.
When the time has expired, the function tries to start the synchronizing function. If
tSynchrocheck is set to 0, no synchrocheck is done, before starting the synchronizing function.

The timer tSynchronizing supervises that the signal synchronizing in progress is obtained in
SCSWI after start of the synchronizing function. The start signal for the synchronizing is set if
the synchrocheck conditions are not fulfilled. When the time has expired, the control function
is reset, and a cause-code is given. If no synchronizing function is included, the time is set to 0,
which means no start of the synchronizing function is done, and when tSynchrocheck has
expired, the control function is reset and a cause-code is given.

tExecutionFB is the maximum time between the execute command signal and the command
termination. When the time has expired, the control function is reset and a cause-code is
given.

tPoleDiscord is the allowed time to have discrepancy between the poles at control of three
one-phase breakers. At discrepancy an output signal is activated to be used for trip or alarm,
and during a command, the control function is reset, and a cause-code is given.

Line distance protection REL670 561

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

SuppressMidPos when On suppresses the mid-position during the time tIntermediate of the
connected switches.

The parameter InterlockCheck decides if interlock check should be done at both select and
operate, Sel & Op phase, or only at operate, Op phase.

15.3.8.3 Switch (SXCBR/SXSWI) M16675-3 v8

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution is done from the SCSWI function. When the time has expired, the command
supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.

During the tIntermediate time, the position indication is allowed to be in an intermediate (00)
state. When the time has expired, the command supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.
The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed during this time period when the
position changes from open to close or vice-versa if the parameter SuppressMidPos is set to
On in the SCSWI function.

If the parameter AdaptivePulse is set to Adaptive the command output pulse resets when a
new correct end position is reached. If the parameter is set to Not adaptive the command
output pulse remains active until the timer tOpenPulsetClosePulse has elapsed.

tOpenPulse is the output pulse length for an open command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The default
length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a disconnector (SXSWI).

tClosePulse is the output pulse length for a close command. If AdaptivePulse is set to
Adaptive, it is the maximum length of the output pulse for an open command. The default
length is set to 200 ms for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and 500 ms for a disconnector (SXSWI).

15.3.8.4 Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE XLNPROXY GUID-7C253FE7-6E02-4F94-96C7-81C9129D925D v1

The SwitchType setting controls the evaluation of the operating capability. If SwitchType is set
to Circuit Breaker, the input OPCAP is interpreted as a breaker operating capability, otherwise
it is interpreted as a switch operating capability.

Table 52: Operating capability values for breaker/switches

Value Breaker operating capability, CbOpCap Switch operating capability, SwOpCap
1 None None
2 Open Open
3 Close – Open Close
4 Open – Close – Open Close and Open
5 Close – Open – Close – Open Larger values handled as 4, both Close and Open
6 Open – Close – Open – Close – Open
7 more

tStartMove is the supervision time for the apparatus to start moving after a command
execution is done from the SCSWI function. When the time has expired, the command
supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.

During the tIntermediate time, the position indication is allowed to be in an intermediate (00)
state. When the time has expired, the command supervision is reset, and a cause-code is given.
The indication of the mid-position at SCSWI is suppressed during this time period when the
position changes from open to close or vice-versa if the parameter SuppressMidPos is set to
On in the SCSWI function.

562 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

In most cases, the same value can be used for both tStartMove and tIntermediate as in the
source function. However, tStartMove may need to be increased to accommodate for the
communication delays, mainly when representing a circuit breaker.

15.3.8.5 Bay Reserve (QCRSV) M16677-3 v3

The timer tCancelRes defines the supervision time for canceling the reservation, when this
cannot be done by requesting bay due to for example communication failure.

When the parameter ParamRequestx (x=1-8) is set to Only own bay res. individually for each
apparatus (x) in the bay, only the own bay is reserved, that is, the output for reservation
request of other bays (RES_BAYS) will not be activated at selection of apparatus x.

15.3.8.6 Reservation input (RESIN) M16678-3 v3

With the FutureUse parameter set to Bay future use the function can handle bays not yet
installed in the SA system.

15.4 Interlocking IP15572-1 v2

M13530-4 v4
The main purpose of switchgear interlocking is:

• To avoid the dangerous or damaging operation of switchgear

• To enforce restrictions on the operation of the substation for other reasons for example,
load configuration. Examples of the latter are to limit the number of parallel transformers
to a maximum of two or to ensure that energizing is always from one side, for example,
the high voltage side of a transformer.

This section only deals with the first point, and only with restrictions caused by switching
devices other than the one to be controlled. This means that switch interlock, because of
device alarms, is not included in this section.

Disconnectors and earthing switches have a limited switching capacity. Disconnectors may
therefore only operate:

• With basically zero current. The circuit is open on one side and has a small extension. The
capacitive current is small (for example, < 5A) and power transformers with inrush current
are not allowed.
• To connect or disconnect a parallel circuit carrying load current. The switching voltage
across the open contacts is thus virtually zero, thanks to the parallel circuit (for example, <
1% of rated voltage). Paralleling of power transformers is not allowed.

Earthing switches are allowed to connect and disconnect earthing of isolated points. Due to
capacitive or inductive coupling there may be some voltage (for example < 40% of rated
voltage) before earthing and some current (for example < 100A) after earthing of a line.

Circuit breakers are usually not interlocked. Closing is only interlocked against running
disconnectors in the same bay, and the bus-coupler opening is interlocked during a busbar
transfer.

The positions of all switching devices in a bay and from some other bays determine the
conditions for operational interlocking. Conditions from other stations are usually not
available. Therefore, a line earthing switch is usually not fully interlocked. The operator must
be convinced that the line is not energized from the other side before closing the earthing
switch. As an option, a voltage indication can be used for interlocking. Take care to avoid a

Line distance protection REL670 563

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

dangerous enable condition at the loss of a VT secondary voltage, for example, because of a
blown fuse.

The switch positions used by the operational interlocking logic are obtained from auxiliary
contacts or position sensors. For each end position (open or closed) a true indication is
needed - thus forming a double indication. The apparatus control function continuously checks
its consistency. If neither condition is high (1 or TRUE), the switch may be in an intermediate
position, for example, moving. This dynamic state may continue for some time, which in the
case of disconnectors may be up to 10 seconds. Should both indications stay low for a longer
period, the position indication will be interpreted as unknown. If both indications stay high,
something is wrong, and the state is again treated as unknown.

In both cases an alarm is sent to the operator. Indications from position sensors shall be self-
checked and system faults indicated by a fault signal. In the interlocking logic, the signals are
used to avoid dangerous enable or release conditions. When the switching state of a switching
device cannot be determined operation is not permitted.

For switches with an individual operation gear per phase, the evaluation must consider
possible phase discrepancies. This is done with the aid of an AND-function for all three phases
in each apparatus for both open and close indications. Phase discrepancies will result in an
unknown double indication state.

15.4.1 Configuration guidelines M13529-4 v4

The following sections describe how the interlocking for a certain switchgear configuration
can be realized in the IED by using standard interlocking modules and their interconnections.
They also describe the configuration settings. The inputs for delivery specific conditions
(Qx_EXy) are set to 1=TRUE if they are not used, except in the following cases:

• QB9_EX2 and QB9_EX4 in modules BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B

• QA1_EX3 in module AB_TRAFO

when they are set to 0=FALSE.

15.4.2 Interlocking for line bay ABC_LINE IP14139-1 v2

15.4.2.1 Application M13561-3 v8

The interlocking for line bay (ABC_LINE) function is used for a line connected to a double
busbar arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 326. The function can also be
used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar
arrangement with/without transfer busbar.

564 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

QB9
QC9

en04000478.vsd
IEC04000478 V1 EN-US

Figure 326: Switchyard layout ABC_LINE

M13560-4 v5
The signals from other bays connected to the module ABC_LINE are described below.

15.4.2.2 Signals from bypass busbar M13560-6 v5

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB7_D_OP All line disconnectors on bypass WA7 except in the own bay are open.
VP_BB7_D The switch status of disconnectors on bypass busbar WA7 are valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from any bay containing disconnectors on bypass
busbar WA7

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE) except that of the own bay are needed:

Signal
QB7OPTR Q7 is open
VPQB7TR The switch status for QB7 is valid.
EXDU_BPB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bay n, these conditions are valid:

Line distance protection REL670 565

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

QB7OPTR (bay 1)
QB7OPTR (bay 2) & BB7_D_OP
. . .
. . .
QB7OPTR (bay n-1)

VPQB7TR (bay 1)
VPQB7TR (bay 2) & VP_BB7_D
. . .
. . .
VPQB7TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_BPB (bay 1)
EXDU_BPB (bay 2) & EXDU_BPB
. . .
. . .
EXDU_BPB (bay n-1)
en04000477.vsd
IEC04000477 V1 EN-US

Figure 327: Signals from bypass busbar in line bay n

15.4.2.3 Signals from bus-coupler M13560-31 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus sections, the busbar-busbar
connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within the other bus
section.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE ABC_BC
en04000479.vsd
IEC04000479 V1 EN-US

Figure 328: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
BC_17_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA1 and WA7.
BC_17_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1and WA7.
BC_27_OP No bus-coupler connection between busbar WA2 and WA7.
BC_27_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and WA7.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VP_BC_17 The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VP_BC_27 The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

566 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2.
BC17OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1
and WA7.
BC17CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar
WA1 and WA7.
BC27OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA2
and WA7.
BC27CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar
WA2 and WA7.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
VPBC17TR The switch status of BC_17 is valid.
VPBC27TR The switch status of BC_27 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For
B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC)
is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used.
For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module
(A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS
and B1B2_BS.

Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a line bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

Line distance protection REL670 567

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

BC12CLTR (sect.1)
BC_12_CL
DCCLTR (A1A2) >1
DCCLTR (B1B2) &
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) & VP_BC_12
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

BC17OPTR (sect.1)
BC_17_OP
&
DCOPTR (A1A2) >1
BC17OPTR (sect.2)

BC17CLTR (sect.1)
BC_17_CL
>1
DCCLTR (A1A2) &
BC17CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC17TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) & VP_BC_17
VPBC17TR (sect.2)

BC27OPTR (sect.1)
BC_27_OP
&
DCOPTR (B1B2) >1
BC27OPTR (sect.2)

BC27CLTR (sect.1)
BC_27_CL
>1
DCCLTR (B1B2) &
BC27CLTR (sect.2)

VPBC27TR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (B1B2) & VP_BC_27
VPBC27TR (sect.2)

EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) & EXDU_BC
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.2)

en04000480.vsd
IEC04000480 V1 EN-US

Figure 329: Signals to a line bay in section 1 from the bus-coupler bays in each section
For a line bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section 1 to
section 2 and vice versa.

15.4.2.4 Configuration setting M13560-108 v4

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no QB7 disconnector, then the interlocking for QB7
is not used. The states for QB7, QC71, BB7_D, BC_17, BC_27 are set to open by setting the
appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• QB7_OP = 1
• QB7_CL = 0

568 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

• QC71_OP = 1
• QC71_CL = 0

• BB7_D_OP = 1

• BC_17_OP = 1
• BC_17_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• EXDU_BPB = 1

• VP_BB7_D = 1
• VP_BC_17 = 1
• VP_BC_27 = 1

If there is no second busbar WA2 and therefore no QB2 disconnector, then the interlocking for
QB2 is not used. The state for QB2, QC21, BC_12, BC_27 are set to open by setting the
appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated
0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• QB2_OP = 1
• QB2_CL = 0

• QC21_OP = 1
• QC21_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• BC_27_OP = 1
• BC_27_CL = 0

• VP_BC_12 = 1

15.4.3 Interlocking for bus-coupler bay ABC_BC IP14144-1 v2

15.4.3.1 Application M13555-3 v8

The interlocking for bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) function is used for a bus-coupler bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 330. The function can also be
used for a single busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement
without transfer busbar.

Line distance protection REL670 569

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1

QA1

QC2

en04000514.vsd
IEC04000514 V1 EN-US

Figure 330: Switchyard layout ABC_BC

15.4.3.2 Configuration M13553-138 v4

The signals from the other bays connected to the bus-coupler module ABC_BC are described
below.

15.4.3.3 Signals from all feeders M13553-6 v4

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-coupler.
VP_BBTR The switch status is valid for all apparatuses involved in the busbar transfer.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to the WA1/WA2 busbars.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and bus-
coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bus-coupler bay are needed:

Signal
QQB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are open.
VPQB12TR The switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For bus-coupler bay n, these conditions are valid:

570 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

QB12OPTR (bay 1)
QB12OPTR (bay 2) & BBTR_OP
. . .
. . .
QB12OPTR (bay n-1)

VPQB12TR (bay 1)
VPQB12TR (bay 2) & VP_BBTR
. . .
. . .
VPQB12TR (bay n-1)

EXDU_12 (bay 1)
EXDU_12 (bay 2) & EXDU_12
. . .
. . .
EXDU_12 (bay n-1)
en04000481.vsd
IEC04000481 V1 EN-US

Figure 331: Signals from any bays in bus-coupler bay n

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals BBTR are
connected in parallel - if both bus-section disconnectors are closed. So for the basic project-
specific logic for BBTR above, add this logic:

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE ABC_BC ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO
en04000482.vsd
IEC04000482 V1 EN-US

Figure 332: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The following signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are needed. For
B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC)
is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC), have to be
used. For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module
(A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS
and B1B2_BS.

Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

Line distance protection REL670 571

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

BBTR_OP (sect.1)
BBTR_OP
DCOPTR (A1A2) &
DCOPTR (B1B2) >1
BBTR_OP (sect.2)

VP_BBTR (sect.1)
VPDCTR (A1A2) & VP_BBTR
VPDCTR (B1B2)
VP_BBTR (sect.2)

EXDU_12 (sect.1)
EXDU_DC (A1A2) & EXDU_12
EXDU_DC (B1B2)
EXDU_12 (sect.2)
en04000483.vsd
IEC04000483 V1 EN-US

Figure 333: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from any bays in each section
For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section
1 to section 2 and vice versa.

15.4.3.4 Signals from bus-coupler M13553-58 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the signals BC_12 from
the busbar coupler of the other busbar section must be transmitted to the own busbar coupler
if both disconnectors are closed.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
ABC_BC ABC_BC
en04000484.vsd
IEC04000484 V1 EN-US

Figure 334: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BC_12_CL Another bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus-coupler bay (BC).

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC), except the own bay, are needed:

Signal
BC12CLTR A bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler exists between busbar
WA1 and WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

572 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For
B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC)
is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC.

Signal
DCCLTR The bus-section disconnector is closed.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS), rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC), must be used.
For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module
(A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS
and B1B2_BS.

Signal
S1S2CLTR A bus-section coupler connection exists between bus sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay containing the above information.

For a bus-coupler bay in section 1, these conditions are valid:

DCCLTR (A1A2)
DCCLTR (B1B2) & BC_12_CL
BC12CLTR (sect.2)

VPDCTR (A1A2)
VPDCTR (B1B2) & VP_BC_12
VPBC12TR (sect.2)

EXDU_DC (A1A2)
EXDU_DC (B1B2) & EXDU_BC
EXDU_BC (sect.2)
en04000485.vsd
IEC04000485 V1 EN-US

Figure 335: Signals to a bus-coupler bay in section 1 from a bus-coupler bay in another
section
For a bus-coupler bay in section 2, the same conditions as above are valid by changing section
1 to section 2 and vice versa.

15.4.3.5 Configuration setting M13553-107 v4

If there is no bypass busbar and therefore no QB2 and QB7 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for QB2 and QB7 is not used. The states for QB2, QB7, QC71 are set to open by
setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are
designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• QB2_OP = 1
• QB2_CL = 0

• QB7_OP = 1
• QB7_CL = 0

Line distance protection REL670 573

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

• QC71_OP = 1
• QC71_CL = 0

If there is no second busbar B and therefore no QB2 and QB20 disconnectors, then the
interlocking for QB2 and QB20 are not used. The states for QB2, QB20, QC21, BC_12, BBTR are
set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs as follows. In the functional block
diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and 1=TRUE:

• QB2_OP = 1
• QB2_CL = 0

• QB20_OP = 1
• QB20_CL = 0

• QC21_OP = 1
• QC21_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

15.4.4 Interlocking for transformer bay AB_TRAFO IP14149-1 v2

15.4.4.1 Application M13567-3 v7

The interlocking for transformer bay (AB_TRAFO) function is used for a transformer bay
connected to a double busbar arrangement according to figure 336. The function is used when
there is no disconnector between circuit breaker and transformer. Otherwise, the interlocking
for line bay (ABC_LINE) function can be used. This function can also be used in single busbar
arrangements.

574 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1

QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2

QC3

QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking

QB3 QB4

en04000515.vsd
IEC04000515 V1 EN-US

Figure 336: Switchyard layout AB_TRAFO

M13566-4 v4
The signals from other bays connected to the module AB_TRAFO are described below.

15.4.4.2 Signals from bus-coupler M13566-6 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors into bus-sections, the busbar-busbar

connection could exist via the bus-section disconnector and bus-coupler within the other bus-
section.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
AB_TRAFO ABC_BC AB_TRAFO ABC_BC
en04000487.vsd
IEC04000487 V1 EN-US

Figure 337: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic for input signals concerning bus-coupler are the same as the specific
logic for the line bay (ABC_LINE):

Signal
BC_12_CL A bus-coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and WA2.
VP_BC_12 The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from bus-coupler bay (BC).

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals from bus-coupler“.

Line distance protection REL670 575

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

15.4.4.3 Configuration setting M13566-22 v5

If there are no second busbar B and therefore no QB2 disconnector, then the interlocking for
QB2 is not used. The state for QB2, QC21, BC_12 are set to open by setting the appropriate
module inputs as follows. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and
1=TRUE:

• QB2_OP = 1
• QB2QB2_CL = 0

• QC21_OP = 1
• QC21_CL = 0

• BC_12_CL = 0
• VP_BC_12 = 1

If there is no second busbar B at the other side of the transformer and therefore no QB4
disconnector, then the state for QB4 is set to open by setting the appropriate module inputs
as follows:

• QB4_OP = 1
• QB4_CL = 0

15.4.5 Interlocking for bus-section breaker A1A2_BS IP14154-1 v2

15.4.5.1 Application M15110-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section breaker (A1A2_BS) function is used for one bus-section circuit
breaker between section 1 and 2 according to figure 338. The function can be used for
different busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.

WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QB1 QB2 QC2

QA1

QC3 QC4

en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
IEC04000516 V1 EN-US

Figure 338: Switchyard layout A1A2_BS

M15111-4 v3
The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_BS are described below.

15.4.5.2 Signals from all feeders M15111-6 v4

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers into bus-sections and both circuit
breakers are closed, the opening of the circuit breaker must be blocked if a bus-coupler

576 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

connection exists between busbars on one bus-section side and if on the other bus-section
side a busbar transfer is in progress:

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_BS
ABC_BC B1B2_BS ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO
en04000489.vsd
IEC04000489 V1 EN-US

Figure 339: Busbars divided by bus-section circuit breakers

To derive the signals:

Signal
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress concerning this bus-section.
VP_BBTR The switch status of BBTR is valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from any bay connected to busbar 1(A) and 2(B).

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and bus-
coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are open.
VPQB12TR The switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid.
EXDU_12 No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
BC12OPTR No bus-coupler connection through the own bus-coupler between busbar WA1
and WA2.
VPBC12TR The switch status of BC_12 is valid.
EXDU_BC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from the bus-section circuit breaker bay (A1A2_BS, B1B2_BS) are needed.

Signal
S1S2OPTR No bus-section coupler connection between bus-sections 1 and 2.
VPS1S2TR The switch status of bus-section coupler BS is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

For a bus-section circuit breaker between A1 and A2 section busbars, these conditions are
valid:

Line distance protection REL670 577

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)
QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) >1
... & & BBTR_OP
...
QB12OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (B1B2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)
QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) >1
... &
...
QB12OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (B1B2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1)
& VP_BBTR
VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (B1B2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
& EXDU_12
EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)
en04000490.vsd
IEC04000490 V1 EN-US

Figure 340: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections A1
and A2
For a bus-section circuit breaker between B1 and B2 section busbars, these conditions are
valid:

578 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.1)
QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.2) >1
... & & BBTR_OP
...
QB12OPTR (bay n/sect.2)

S1S2OPTR (A1A2)
BC12OPTR (sect.2)
QB12OPTR (bay 1/sect.1) >1
... &
...
QB12OPTR (bay n /sect.1)

VPS1S2TR (A1A2)
VPBC12TR (sect.1)
VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1)
& VP_BBTR
VPBC12TR (sect.2)
VPQB12TR (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
VPQB12TR (bay n/sect.1)

EXDU_BS (A1A2)
EXDU_BC (sect.1)
EXDU_12(bay 1/sect.2)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.2)
& EXDU_12
EXDU_BC (sect.2)
EXDU_12 (bay 1/sect.1)
...
...
EXDU_12 (bay n /sect.1)
en04000491.vsd
IEC04000491 V1 EN-US

Figure 341: Signals from any bays for a bus-section circuit breaker between sections B1
and B2

15.4.5.3 Configuration setting M15111-57 v3

If there is no other busbar via the busbar loops that are possible, then either the interlocking
for the QA1 open circuit breaker is not used or the state for BBTR is set to open. That is, no
busbar transfer is in progress in this bus-section:

• BBTR_OP = 1
• VP_BBTR = 1

15.4.6 Interlocking for bus-section disconnector A1A2_DC IP14159-1 v2

Line distance protection REL670 579

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

15.4.6.1 Application M13544-3 v7

The interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC) function is used for one bus-section
disconnector between section 1 and 2 according to figure 342. A1A2_DC function can be used
for different busbars, which includes a bus-section disconnector.

QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)

QC1 QC2

A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd

IEC04000492 V1 EN-US

Figure 342: Switchyard layout A1A2_DC

M13542-4 v4
The signals from other bays connected to the module A1A2_DC are described below.

15.4.6.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement M13542-6 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition no other disconnector

connected to the bus-section must be made by a project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B
are used.

Section 1 Section 2 A2
(WA1)A1 A3
B2
(WA2)B1 B3
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS) ABC_BC
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO
en04000493.vsd
IEC04000493 V1 EN-US

Figure 343: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and each bus-
coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

580 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

Signal
QB1OPTR QB1 is open.
QB2OPTR QB2 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE).
QB220OTR QB2 and QB20 are open (ABC_BC).
VPQB1TR The switch status of QB1 is valid.
VPQB2TR The switch status of QB2 is valid.
VQB220TR The switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section disconnector, the signal from the bus-section

disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If there is an additional bus-section circuit breaker rather than an additional bus-section

disconnector the signals from the bus-section, circuit-breaker bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the
bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used:

Signal
QB1OPTR QB1 is open.
QB2OPTR QB2 is open.
VPQB1TR The switch status of QB1 is valid.
VPQB2TR The switch status of QB2 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains
the above information.

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & S1DC_OP
...
...
QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & VPS1_DC
...
...
VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1) en04000494.vsd
IEC04000494 V1 EN-US

Figure 344: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

Line distance protection REL670 581

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & S2DC_OP
...
...
QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A2/A3)

VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & VPS2_DC
...
...
VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A2/A3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A2/A3) en04000495.vsd
IEC04000495 V1 EN-US

Figure 345: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... & S1DC_OP
...
...
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)

VPQB2TR (VQB220TR)(bay 1/sect.B1)

... & VPS1_DC
...
...
VPQB2TR (VQB220TR)(bay n/sect.B1)
EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)
... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
en04000496.vsd
IEC04000496 V1 EN-US

Figure 346: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

582 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B2) S2DC_OP

... &
...
...
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B2/B3)

VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & VPS2_DC
...
...
VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B2/B3)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B2/B3) en04000497.vsd
IEC04000497 V1 EN-US

Figure 347: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector

15.4.6.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement M13542-80 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a
project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B
are used.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS DB_BUS
en04000498.vsd
IEC04000498 V1 EN-US

Figure 348: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from double-breaker bay (DB) that contains the above
information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Line distance protection REL670 583

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

Signal
QB1OPTR QB1 is open.
QB2OPTR QB2 is open.
VPQB1TR The switch status of QB1 is valid.
VPQB2TR The switch status of QB2 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration “Signals in single breaker
arrangement”.

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & S1DC_OP
...
...
QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)

VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & VPS1_DC
...
...
VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A1) en04000499.vsd
IEC04000499 V1 EN-US

Figure 349: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & S2DC_OP
...
...
QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)

VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & VPS2_DC
...
...
VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.A2)
en04000500.vsd
IEC04000500 V1 EN-US

Figure 350: Signals from double-breaker bays in section A2 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

584 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

QB2OPTR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... & S1DC_OP
...
...
QB2OPTR (bay n/sect.B1)

VPQB2TR (bay 1/sect.B1)

... & VPS1_DC
...
...
VPQB2TR (bay n/sect.B1)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B1) en04000501.vsd
IEC04000501 V1 EN-US

Figure 351: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B1 to a bus-section disconnector

For a bus-section disconnector, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

QB2OPTR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & S2DC_OP
...
...
QB2OPTR (bay n/sect.B2)

VPQB2TR (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & VPS2_DC
...
...
VPQB2TR (bay n/sect.B2)

EXDU_DB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_DB (bay n/sect.B2) en04000502.vsd
IEC04000502 V1 EN-US

Figure 352: Signals from double-breaker bays in section B2 to a bus-section disconnector

15.4.6.4 Signals in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement M13542-127 v5

If the busbar is divided by bus-section disconnectors, the condition for the busbar
disconnector bay no other disconnector connected to the bus-section must be made by a
project-specific logic.

The same type of module (A1A2_DC) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section
disconnector A1A2_DC and B1B2_DC. But for B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B
are used.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE BH_LINE
en04000503.vsd
IEC04000503 V1 EN-US

Figure 353: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

Line distance protection REL670 585

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

The project-specific logic is the same as for the logic for the double-breaker configuration.

Signal
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 1 are open.
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus-section 2 are open.
VPS1_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 1 is valid.
VPS2_DC The switch status of disconnectors on bus-section 2 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from breaker and a half (BH) that contains the above
information.

15.4.7 Interlocking for busbar earthing switch BB_ES IP14164-1 v4

15.4.7.1 Application M15015-3 v7

The interlocking for busbar earthing switch (BB_ES) function is used for one busbar earthing
switch on any busbar parts according to figure 354.

QC

en04000504.vsd
IEC04000504 V1 EN-US

Figure 354: Switchyard layout BB_ES

M15053-4 v4
The signals from other bays connected to the module BB_ES are described below.

15.4.7.2 Signals in single breaker arrangement M15053-6 v5

The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-section
are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2
(WA7)C C
A1A2_DC(BS)
B1B2_DC(BS)
BB_ES ABC_BC BB_ES
ABC_LINE AB_TRAFO ABC_LINE
en04000505.vsd
IEC04000505 V1 EN-US

Figure 355: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnector on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay containing the above information.

586 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

These signals from each line bay (ABC_LINE), each transformer bay (AB_TRAFO), and each bus-
coupler bay (ABC_BC) are needed:

Signal
QB1OPTR QB1 is open.
QB2OPTR QB2 is open (AB_TRAFO, ABC_LINE)
QB220OTR QB2 and QB20 are open (ABC_BC)
QB7OPTR QB7 is open.
VPQB1TR The switch status of QB1 is valid.
VPQB2TR The switch status of QB2 is valid.
VQB220TR The switch status of QB2and QB20 is valid.
VPQB7TR The switch status of QB7 is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For
B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC)
is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and
B1B2_DC.

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

If no bus-section disconnector exists, the signal DCOPTR, VPDCTR and EXDU_DC are set to 1
(TRUE).

If the busbar is divided by bus-section circuit breakers, the signals from the bus-section
coupler bay (A1A2_BS) rather than the bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) must be used.
For B1B2_BS, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module
(A1A2_BS) is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section circuit breakers A1A2_BS
and B1B2_BS.

Signal
QB1OPTR QB1 is open.
QB2OPTR QB2 is open.
VPQB1TR The switch status of QB1 is valid.
VPQB2TR The switch status of QB2 is valid.
EXDU_BS No transmission error from the bay BS (bus-section coupler bay) that contains
the above information.

For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A1 busbar section are valid:

Line distance protection REL670 587

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & BB_DC_OP
...
...
QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A1)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & VP_BB_DC
...
...
VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A1)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A1)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A1)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2) en04000506.vsd
IEC04000506 V1 EN-US

Figure 356: Signals from any bays in section A1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same
section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the A2 busbar section are valid:

QB1OPTR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & BB_DC_OP
...
...
QB1OPTR (bay n/sect.A2)
DCOPTR (A1/A2)

VPQB1TR (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & VP_BB_DC
...
...
VPQB1TR (bay n/sect.A2)
VPDCTR (A1/A2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.A2)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.A2)
EXDU_DC (A1/A2) en04000507.vsd
IEC04000507 V1 EN-US

Figure 357: Signals from any bays in section A2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same
section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B1 busbar section are valid:

588 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

QB2OPTR(QB220OTR)(bay 1/sect.B1)
... & BB_DC_OP
...
...
QB2OPTR (QB220OTR)(bay n/sect.B1)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VPQB2TR(VQB220TR)
. . .(bay 1/sect.B1) VP_BB_DC
&
...
...
VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B1)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B1)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B1)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2) en04000508.vsd
IEC04000508 V1 EN-US

Figure 358: Signals from any bays in section B1 to a busbar earthing switch in the same
section
For a busbar earthing switch, these conditions from the B2 busbar section are valid:

QB2OPTR(QB220OTR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & BB_DC_OP
...
...
QB2OPTR(QB220OTR) (bay n/sect.B2)
DCOPTR (B1/B2)

VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & VP_BB_DC
...
...
VPQB2TR(VQB220TR) (bay n/sect.B2)
VPDCTR (B1/B2)

EXDU_BB (bay 1/sect.B2)

... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n/sect.B2)
EXDU_DC (B1/B2) en04000509.vsd
IEC04000509 V1 EN-US

Figure 359: Signals from any bays in section B2 to a busbar earthing switch in the same
section
For a busbar earthing switch on bypass busbar C, these conditions are valid:

Line distance protection REL670 589

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

QB7OPTR (bay 1)
... & BB_DC_OP
...
...
QB7OPTR (bay n)

VPQB7TR (bay 1)
... & VP_BB_DC
...
...
VPQB7TR (bay n)

EXDU_BB (bay 1)
... & EXDU_BB
...
...
EXDU_BB (bay n) en04000510.vsd
IEC04000510 V1 EN-US

Figure 360: Signals from bypass busbar to busbar earthing switch

15.4.7.3 Signals in double-breaker arrangement M15053-83 v4

The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus section
are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
DB_BUS DB_BUS
en04000511.vsd
IEC04000511 V1 EN-US

Figure 361: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

To derive the signals:

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors of this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar are valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each double-breaker bay (DB_BUS) are needed:

Signal
QB1OPTR QB1 is open.
QB2OPTR QB2 is open.
VPQB1TR The switch status of QB1 is valid.
VPQB2TR The switch status of QB2 is valid.
EXDU_DB No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

These signals from each bus-section disconnector bay (A1A2_DC) are also needed. For
B1B2_DC, corresponding signals from busbar B are used. The same type of module (A1A2_DC)

590 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

is used for different busbars, that is, for both bus-section disconnectors A1A2_DC and
B1B2_DC.

Signal
DCOPTR The bus-section disconnector is open.
VPDCTR The switch status of bus-section disconnector DC is valid.
EXDU_DC No transmission error from the bay that contains the above information.

The logic is identical to the double busbar configuration described in section “Signals in single
breaker arrangement”.

15.4.7.4 Signals in 1 1/2 breaker arrangement M15053-123 v4

The busbar earthing switch is only allowed to operate if all disconnectors of the bus-section
are open.

Section 1 Section 2
(WA1)A1 A2
(WA2)B1 B2

A1A2_DC(BS)
BB_ES B1B2_DC(BS) BB_ES
BH_LINE BH_LINE
en04000512.vsd
IEC04000512 V1 EN-US

Figure 362: Busbars divided by bus-section disconnectors (circuit breakers)

The project-specific logic are the same as for the logic for the double busbar configuration
described in section “Signals in single breaker arrangement”.

Signal
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this part of the busbar are open.
VP_BB_DC The switch status of all disconnectors on this part of the busbar is valid.
EXDU_BB No transmission error from any bay that contains the above information.

15.4.8 Interlocking for double CB bay DB IP14167-1 v2

15.4.8.1 Application M13585-3 v10

The interlocking for a double busbar double circuit breaker bay including DB_BUS_A,
DB_BUS_B and DB_LINE functions are used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement according to figure 363.

Line distance protection REL670 591

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4

QA1 QA2

DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5

QB61 QB62

QC3

QB9
DB_LINE

QC9

en04000518.vsd
IEC04000518 V1 EN-US

Figure 363: Switchyard layout double circuit breaker

M13584-4 v4
For a double circuit-breaker bay, the modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B must be
used.

15.4.8.2 Configuration setting M13584-6 v5

For application without QB9 and QC9, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and
1=TRUE:

• QB9_OP = 1
• QB9_CL = 0

• QC9_OP = 1
• QC9_CL = 0

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting QB9 to open state,
specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• QB9_OP = VOLT_OFF
• QB9_CL = VOLT_ON

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

15.4.9 Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB BH IP14173-1 v3

592 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

15.4.9.1 Application M13570-3 v6

The interlocking for 1 1/2 breaker diameter (BH_CONN, BH_LINE_A, BH_LINE_B) functions are
used for lines connected to a 1 1/2 breaker diameter according to figure 364.

WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1

QA1 QA1

QC2 QC2

QB6 QB6

QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B

QB61 QA1 QB62

QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9

BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd

IEC04000513 V1 EN-US

Figure 364: Switchyard layout 1 1/2 breaker

M13570-7 v4
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and BH_LINE_B are
the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the connection between the two lines of
the diameter in the 1 1/2 breaker switchyard layout.
M13569-4 v4
For a 1 1/2 breaker arrangement, the modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B must be
used.

15.4.9.2 Configuration setting M13569-6 v5

For application without QB9 and QC9, just set the appropriate inputs to open state and
disregard the outputs. In the functional block diagram, 0 and 1 are designated 0=FALSE and
1=TRUE:

• QB9_OP = 1
• QB9_CL = 0

• QC9_OP = 1
• QC9_CL = 0

If, in this case, line voltage supervision is added, then rather than setting QB9 to open state,
specify the state of the voltage supervision:

• QB9_OP = VOLT_OFF
• QB9_CL = VOLT_ON

Line distance protection REL670 593

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

If there is no voltage supervision, then set the corresponding inputs as follows:

• VOLT_OFF = 1
• VOLT_ON = 0

15.5 Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI

presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114936-1 v5

15.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167845-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic rotating switch for function SLGAPC - -
selection and LHMI presentation

15.5.2 Application SEMOD114927-4 v7

The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation function (SLGAPC) (or
the selector switch function block, as it is also known) is used to get a selector switch
functionality similar with the one provided by a hardware multi-position selector switch.
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in order to have different
functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches are however sources for
maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual
selector switches eliminate all these problems.

SLGAPC function block has two operating inputs (UP and DOWN), one blocking input (BLOCK)
and one operator position input (PSTO).

SLGAPC can be activated both from the local HMI and from external sources (switches) via the
IED binary inputs. It also allows the operation from remote (like the station computer).
SWPOSN is an integer value output, giving the actual output number. Since the number of
positions of the switch can be established by settings (see below), one must be careful in
coordinating the settings with the configuration (if one sets the number of positions to x in
settings – for example, there will be only the first x outputs available from the block in the
configuration). Also the frequency of the (UP or DOWN) pulses should be lower than the
setting tPulse.

From the local HMI, the selector switch can be operated from Single-line diagram (SLD).

15.5.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD115063-294 v7

The following settings are available for the Logic rotating switch for function selection and
LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) function:

Operation: Sets the operation of the function On or Off.

NrPos: Sets the number of positions in the switch (max. 32).

OutType: Steady or Pulsed.

tPulse: In case of a pulsed output, it gives the length of the pulse (in seconds).

594 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

tDelay: The delay between the UP or DOWN activation signal positive front and the output
activation.

StopAtExtremes: Sets the behavior of the switch at the end positions – if set to Disabled, when
pressing UP while on first position, the switch will jump to the last position; when pressing
DOWN at the last position, the switch will jump to the first position; when set to Enabled, no
jump will be allowed.

15.6 Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158754-1 v3

15.6.1 Identification
SEMOD167850-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Selector mini switch VSGAPC - 43

15.6.2 Application SEMOD158803-5 v9

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function is a multipurpose function used in the configuration
tool in PCM600 for a variety of applications, as a general purpose switch. VSGAPC can be used
for both acquiring an external switch position (through the IPOS1 and the IPOS2 inputs) and
represent it through the single line diagram symbols (or use it in the configuration through the
outputs POS1 and POS2) as well as, a command function (controlled by the PSTO input), giving
switching commands through the CMDPOS12 and CMDPOS21 outputs.

The output POSITION is an integer output, showing the actual position as an integer number 0
– 3, where 0 = MidPos, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed and 3 = Error.

An example where VSGAPC is configured to switch Autorecloser on–off from a button symbol
on the local HMI is shown in figure365. The I and O buttons on the local HMI are normally used
for on–off operations of the circuit breaker.

INVERTER
VSGAPC INPUT OUT
PSTO
INTONE
IPOS1
IPOS2
SMBRREC
NAM_POS1 CMDPOS12 ON SETON
OFF
ON NAM_POS2 CMDPOS21 OFF

IEC07000112-3-en.vsd
IEC07000112 V3 EN-US

Figure 365: Control of Autorecloser from local HMI through Selector mini switch
VSGAPC is also provided with IEC 61850 communication so it can be controlled from SA
system as well.

15.6.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD158807-4 v4

Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function can generate pulsed or steady commands (by setting
the Mode parameter). When pulsed commands are generated, the length of the pulse can be

Line distance protection REL670 595

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

set using the tPulse parameter. Also, being accessible on the single line diagram (SLD), this
function block has two control modes (settable through CtlModel): Dir Norm and SBO Enh.

15.7 Generic communication function for Double Point

indication DPGAPC SEMOD55384-1 v4

15.7.1 Identification
GUID-E16EA78F-6DF9-4B37-A92D-5C09827E2297 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Generic communication function for DPGAPC - -
Double Point indication

15.7.2 Application SEMOD55391-5 v8

Generic communication function for Double Point indication (DPGAPC) function block is used
to send double point position indication to other systems, equipment or functions in the
substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is especially intended
to be used in the interlocking station-wide logics. To be able to get the signals into other
systems, equipment or functions, one must use other tools, described in the Engineering
manual, and define which function block in which systems, equipment or functions should
receive this information.

More specifically, DPGAPC function reports a combined double point position indication
output POSITION, by evaluating the value and the timestamp attributes of the inputs OPEN
and CLOSE, together with the logical input signal VALID.

When the input signal VALID is active, the values of the OPEN and CLOSE inputs determine the
two-bit integer value of the output POSITION. The timestamp of the output POSITION will have
the latest updated timestamp of the inputs OPEN and CLOSE.

When the input signal VALID is inactive, DPGAPC function forces the position to intermediated
state.

When the value of the input signal VALID changes, the timestamp of the output POSITION will
be updated as the time when DPGAPC function detects the change.

Refer to Table 53 for the description of the input-output relationship in terms of the value and
the quality attributes.

Table 53: Description of the input-output relationship

POSITION
VALID OPEN CLOSE
Value Description
0 - - 0 Intermediate
1 0 0 0 Intermediate
1 1 0 1 Open
1 0 1 2 Closed
1 1 1 3 Bad State

596 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

15.7.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD55398-5 v5

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

15.8 Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176448-1 v3

15.8.1 Identification
SEMOD176456-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC - -

15.8.2 Application SEMOD176511-4 v7

The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function block is a collection of 8 single
point commands that can be used for direct commands for example reset of LED's or putting
IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be sent directly to
the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is
supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.

PSTO is the universal operator place selector for all control functions. Even if
PSTO can be configured to allow LOCAL or ALL operator positions, the only
functional position usable with the SPC8GAPC function block is REMOTE.

15.8.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD176518-4 v7

The parameters for the single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) function are set via
the local HMI or PCM600.

Operation: turning the function operation On/Off.

There are two settings for every command output (totally 8):

PulseModex: decides if the command signal for output x is Latched (steady) or Pulsed.

tPulsex: if PulseModex is set to Pulsed, then tPulsex will set the length of the pulse (in
seconds).

15.9 AutomationBits, command function for DNP3.0

AUTOBITS SEMOD158589-1 v3

Line distance protection REL670 597

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

15.9.1 Identification
GUID-C3BB63F5-F0E7-4B00-AF0F-917ECF87B016 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
AutomationBits, command function
AUTOBITS - -
for DNP3

15.9.2 Application SEMOD158637-5 v4

Automation bits, command function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within PCM600 in order to
get into the configuration the commands coming through the DNP3.0 protocol.The AUTOBITS
function plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV
(for LON).AUTOBITS function block have 32 individual outputs which each can be mapped as a
Binary Output point in DNP3. The output is operated by a "Object 12" in DNP3. This object
contains parameters for control-code, count, on-time and off-time. To operate an AUTOBITS
output point, send a control-code of latch-On, latch-Off, pulse-On, pulse-Off, Trip or Close. The
remaining parameters are regarded as appropriate. For example, pulse-On, on-time=100, off-
time=300, count=5 would give 5 positive 100 ms pulses, 300 ms apart.

For description of the DNP3 protocol implementation, refer to the Communication manual.

15.9.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD158639-5 v3

AUTOBITS function block has one setting, (Operation: On/Off) enabling or disabling the
function. These names will be seen in the DNP3 communication management tool in PCM600.

15.10 Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD SEMOD119849-1 v2

15.10.1 Identification
GUID-2217CCC2-5581-407F-A4BC-266CD6808984 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Single command, 16 signals SINGLECMD - -

15.10.2 Application M12445-3 v3

Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) is a common function and always included in the
IED.

The IEDs may be provided with a function to receive commands either from a substation
automation system or from the local HMI. That receiving function block has outputs that can
be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses in switchyards. For local control
functions, the local HMI can also be used. Together with the configuration logic circuits, the
user can govern pulses or steady output signals for control purposes within the IED or via
binary outputs.

Figure 366 shows an application example of how the user can connect SINGLECMD via
configuration logic circuit to control a high-voltage apparatus. This type of command control
is normally carried out by sending a pulse to the binary outputs of the IED. Figure 366 shows a

598 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 15
Control

close operation. An open breaker operation is performed in a similar way but without the
synchro-check condition.

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLECMD

Close CB1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- &
defined
conditions
Synchro-
check
en04000206.vsd
IEC04000206 V2 EN-US

Figure 366: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of a circuit breaker
via configuration logic circuits
Figure 367 and figure 368 show other ways to control functions, which require steady On/Off
signals. Here, the output is used to control built-in functions or external devices.

Single
command
function Function n
SINGLECMD

Function n CMDOUTy

OUTy

en04000207.vsd
IEC04000207 V2 EN-US

Figure 367: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of built-in functions

Line distance protection REL670 599

Application manual
Section 15 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Control

Single
command
function Configuration logic circuits
SINGLESMD

Device 1 CMDOUTy

OUTy
User- &
defined
conditions

en04000208.vsd
IEC04000208 V2 EN-US

Figure 368: Application example showing a logic diagram for control of external devices
via configuration logic circuits

15.10.3 Setting guidelines M12448-3 v2

The parameters for Single command, 16 signals (SINGLECMD) are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Parameters to be set are MODE, common for the whole block, and CMDOUTy which includes
the user defined name for each output signal. The MODE input sets the outputs to be one of
the types Off, Steady, or Pulse.

• Off, sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level, that is, the
operator station or remote-control gateway.
• Steady, sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent from the
station level.
• Pulse, gives a pulse with 100 ms duration, if a value sent from the station level is changed
from 0 to 1. That means the configured logic connected to the command function block
may not have a cycle time longer than the cycle time for the command function block.

600 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

Section 16 Scheme communication

16.1 Scheme communication logic for distance or

overcurrent protection ZCPSCH IP15749-1 v3

16.1.1 Identification
M14854-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ZCPSCH - 85
distance or overcurrent protection

16.1.2 Application IP15020-1 v1

M16866-3 v5
To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the
instantaneous zone 1, the stepped distance protection function can be supported with logic
that uses a communication channel.

One communication channel in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is required.
The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channel
speed and security against false or lost signals. Communication speed, or minimum time
delay, is always of utmost importance because the purpose for using communication is to
improve the tripping speed of the scheme.

To avoid false signals that could cause false tripping, it is necessary to pay attention to the
security of the communication channel. At the same time it is important to pay attention to
the communication channel dependability to ensure that proper signals are communicated
during power system faults, the time during which the protection schemes must perform their
tasks flawlessly.

The logic supports the following communications schemes:

• blocking schemes (blocking and delta blocking)

• permissive schemes (overreaching and underreaching)
• unblocking scheme and direct intertrip

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a
blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depend on a received CR signal for a
fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

16.1.2.1 Blocking schemes M16866-24 v5

In a blocking scheme a reverse looking zone is used to send a block signal to the remote end to
block an overreaching zone.

Since the scheme is sending the blocking signal during conditions where the protected line is
healthy, it is common to use the line itself as communication media (PLC). The scheme can be
used on all line lengths.

Line distance protection REL670 601

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on the
protected line if the communication channel is out of service. On the other hand, it is less
secure than permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach of the
tripping function if the communication channel is out of service.

Inadequate speed or dependability can cause spurious tripping for external faults. Inadequate
security can cause delayed tripping for internal faults.

To secure that the send signal will arrive before the zone used in the communication scheme
will trip, the trip is released first after the time delay tCoord has elapsed. The setting of tCoord
must be set longer than the maximal transmission time of the channel. A security margin of at
least 10 ms should be considered.

The timer tSendMin for prolonging the send signal is proposed to set to zero.

Z revA

A B

ORB

Z revA CSA TRIPB = ORB+ tCoord+ CR

IEC09000015_2_en.vsd
IEC09000015 V2 EN-US

Figure 369: Principle of blocking scheme

OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send
Z revA: Reverse zone

16.1.2.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-D699D2D8-6479-4B40-8B09-7B24CA86C24B v1

In the delta blocking scheme a fault inception detection element using delta based quantities
of voltage and current will send a block signal to the remote end to block an overreaching
zone.

The delta based start is very fast and if the transmission channel is fast then there is no need
for delaying the operation of remote distance element. If the fault is in forward direction, the
sending is inhibited by a forward directed distance (or directional current or directional earth
fault) element.

Since the scheme is sending the blocking signal during conditions where the protected line is
healthy, it is common to use the line itself as communication media (PLC). The scheme can be
used on all line lengths.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on the
protected line if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it is less secure than
permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach of the tripping
function if the communication channel is out of service.

602 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

Inadequate speed or dependability can cause spurious tripping for external faults. Inadequate
security can cause delayed tripping for internal faults.

Since the blocking signal is initiated by the delta based detection which is very fast the time
delay tCoord can be set to zero seconds, except in cases where the transmission channel is
slow.

The timer tSendMin for prolonging the send signal is proposed to set to zero.

DeltaBasedDetection (deltaA)

A B

ORB

deltaA CS TRIPB = ORB+ tCoord+ CR

IEC11000252-1-en.vsd
IEC11000252 V1 EN-US

Figure 370: Principle of delta blocking scheme

OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send
deltaA: Delta based fault inception detection on A side that gets inhibited for forward faults

16.1.2.3 Permissive schemes M16866-33 v4

In permissive schemes, the permission to trip is sent from the local end to the remote end(s),
when the protection at the local end has detected a fault on the protected object. The received
signal(s) is combined with an overreaching zone and gives an instantaneous trip if the received
signal is present during the time the chosen zone has detected a fault.

Either end may send a permissive (or command) signal to trip to the other end(s), and the
teleprotection equipment needs to be able to receive while transmitting.

A general requirement on permissive schemes is that it shall be fast and secure.

If the sending signal(s) is issued by underreaching or overreaching zone, it is divided into a

permissive underreach or permissive overreach scheme.

Permissive underreaching scheme M16866-53 v4

Permissive underreaching scheme is not suitable to use on short line length due to difficulties
for distance protection measurement in general to distinguish between internal and external
faults in those applications.

The underreaching zones at the local and remote end(s) must overlap in reach to prevent a gap
between the protection zones where faults would not be detected. If the underreaching zone
do not meet the required sensitivity due to for instance fault infeed from the remote end, a
blocking or permissive overreaching scheme should be considered.

The received signal (CR) must be received when the overreaching zone is activated to achieve
an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to the fault current distribution, the overreaching
zone can operate only after the fault has been cleared at the terminal nearest to the fault.

Line distance protection REL670 603

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

There is a certain risk that in case of a trip from an independent tripping zone, the zone issuing
the send signal (CS) resets before the overreaching zone has started at the remote terminal.
To assure a sufficient duration of the received signal (CR), the send signal (CS) can be
prolonged by a tSendMin reset timer. The recommended setting of tSendMin is 100 ms.

Since the received communication signal is combined with the output from an overreaching
zone, there is less concern about a false signal causing an incorrect trip. Therefore set the
timer tCoord to zero.

Failure of the communication channel does not affect the selectivity, but delays tripping at one
end(s) for certain fault locations.

ORA
URA
CSA

A B
URB
CSB
ORB

TRIP: UR or OR+CR
IEC09000013-2-en.vsd
IEC09000013 V2 EN-US

Figure 371: Principle of Permissive underreaching scheme

UR: Underreaching
OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send

Permissive overreaching scheme M16866-41 v4

In a permissive overreaching scheme there is an overreaching zone that issues the send signal.
At the remote end the received signal together with the start of an overreaching zone will give
an instantaneous trip. The scheme can be used for all line lengths.

In permissive overreaching schemes, the communication channel plays an essential roll to

obtain fast tripping at both ends. Failure of the communication channel may affect the
selectivity and delay the tripping at one end at least, for faults anywhere along the protected
circuit.

Teleprotection, operating in permissive overreaching scheme, must consider besides the

general requirement of fast and secure operation also consider requirement on the
dependability. Inadequate security can cause unwanted tripping for external faults.
Inadequate speed or dependability can cause delayed tripping for internal faults or even
unwanted operations.

This scheme may use virtually any communication media that is not adversely affected by
electrical interference from fault generated noise or by electrical phenomena, such as
lightning. Communication media that uses metallic paths are particularly subjected to this
type of interference, therefore they must be properly shielded or otherwise designed to
provide an adequate communication signal during power system faults.

604 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

The send signal (CS) might be issued in parallel both from an overreaching zone and an
underreaching, independent tripping zone. The CS signal from the overreaching zone must not
be prolonged while the CS signal from zone 1 can be prolonged.

To secure correct operations of current reversal logic in case of parallel lines the send signal CS
shall not be prolonged. Set the tSendMin to zero in this case.

There is no need to delay the trip at receipt of the signal, so set the timer tCoord to zero.

ORA

A B

ORB

ORA CSA TRIPB = ORB+ CRB , ORB+ T2

IEC09000014-1-en.vsd
IEC09000014 V1 EN-US

Figure 372: Principle of Permissive overreaching scheme

OR: Overreaching
CR: Communication signal received
CS: Communication signal send
T2: Timer step 2

Unblocking scheme M16866-67 v5

Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault generated noise may not be suitable
for conventional permissive schemes that rely on a signal transmitted during a protected line
fault. With power line carrier for example, the communication signal may be attenuated by the
fault, especially when the fault is close to the line end, thereby disabling the communication
channel.

To overcome the lower dependability in permissive schemes, an unblocking function can be

used. Use this function at older, less reliable, power-line carrier (PLC) communication, where
the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The unblocking function uses a guard
signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of
the CRG signal during the security time is used as a CR signal. This also enables a permissive
scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity to 35
ms.

16.1.2.4 Intertrip scheme M16866-71 v4

In some power system applications, there is a need to trip the remote end breaker
immediately from local protections. This applies for instance when transformers or reactors
are connected to the system without circuit-breakers or for remote tripping following
operation of breaker failure protection.

In an intertrip scheme, the send signal is initiated by an underreaching zone or from an

external protection (transformer or reactor protection). At the remote end, the received
signals initiate a trip without any further protection criteria. To limit the risk for an unwanted
trip due to the spurious sending of signals, the timer tCoord should be set to 10-30 ms
dependant on the type of communication channel.

Line distance protection REL670 605

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

The general requirement for teleprotection equipment operating in intertripping applications

is that it should be very secure and very dependable, since both inadequate security and
dependability may cause unwanted operation. In some applications the equipment shall be
able to receive while transmitting, and commands may be transmitted over longer time period
than for other teleprotection systems.

16.1.3 Setting guidelines IP15021-1 v1

M13869-4 v4
The parameters for the scheme communication logic function are set via the local HMI or
PCM600.

Configure the zones used for the CS send and for scheme communication tripping by using
the ACT configuration tool.

The recommended settings of tCoord timer are based on maximal recommended transmission
time for analogue channels according to IEC 60834-1. It is recommended to coordinate the
proposed settings with actual performance for the teleprotection equipment to get optimized
settings.

16.1.3.1 Blocking scheme M13869-8 v6

Set Operation = On
Set = Blocking
SchemeType
Set tCoord = 25 ms (10 ms + maximal transmission time)
Set tSendMin =0s
Set Unblock = Off
(Set to NoRestart if Unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is to
be used.
Set to Restart if Unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is to be used)
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

16.1.3.2 Delta blocking scheme GUID-F4359690-F433-46CB-A173-8C14559E3FCF v1

Set Operation = On
Set SchemeType = DeltaBlocking
Set tCoord =0s
Set tSendMin =0s
Set Unblock = Off
(Set to NoRestart if Unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is
to be used.
Set to Restart if Unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is to be
used)
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s
Set DeltaI = 10 %IB
Set DeltaU = 5 %UB
Set Delta3I0 = 10 %IB
Set Delta3U0 = 5 %UB

606 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

16.1.3.3 Permissive underreaching scheme M13869-25 v4

Set Operation = On
Set SchemeType = Permissive UR
Set tCoord = 0 ms
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s
Set Unblock = Off
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

16.1.3.4 Permissive overreaching scheme M13869-34 v4

Set Operation = On
Set Scheme type = Permissive OR
Set tCoord = 0 ms
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s (0 s in parallel line applications)
Set Unblock = Off
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

16.1.3.5 Unblocking scheme M13869-43 v4

Set Unblock = Restart

(Loss of guard signal will give both trip and alarm
Choose NoRestart if only trip is required)
Set tSecurity = 0.035 s

16.1.3.6 Intertrip scheme M13869-62 v5

Set Operation = On
Set SchemeType = Intertrip
Set tCoord = 50 ms (10 ms + maximal transmission time)
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s (0 s in parallel line applications)
Set Unblock = Off
Set tSecurity = 0.015 s

16.2 Phase segregated scheme communication logic for

distance protection ZC1PPSCH SEMOD141690-1 v2

16.2.1 Identification
SEMOD141699-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Phase segregated Scheme ZC1PPSCH - 85
communication logic for distance
protection

Line distance protection REL670 607

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

16.2.2 Application SEMOD141787-1 v1

SEMOD141790-4 v2
To achieve fast fault clearing for a fault on the part of the line not covered by the
instantaneous zone1, the stepped distance protection function can be supported with logic
that uses communication channels.

For the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (ZC1PPSCH)
three channels in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal is required.

The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission channels
speed, and security against false or lost signals. Special communication channels are used for
this purpose. When power line carrier is used for communication, these special channels are
strongly recommended due to the communication disturbance caused by the primary fault.

Communication speed, or minimum time delay, is always of utmost importance because the
purpose for using communication is to improve the total tripping speed of the scheme. To
avoid false signals that could cause false tripping, it is necessary to pay attention to the
security of the communication channel. At the same time, it is important pay attention to the
communication channel dependability to ensure that proper signals are communicated during
power system faults, the time during which the protection schemes must perform their tasks
flawlessly.

The logic supports the following communications schemes:

• blocking scheme
• permissive schemes (overreach and underreach)
• direct intertrip

A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping than a
blocking scheme. On the other hand, permissive scheme depends on a received CR signal for a
fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking scheme.

When single-pole tripping is required on parallel lines, an unwanted three-phase trip can occur
for simultaneous faults near the line end (typical last 20%). Simultaneous faults are one fault
on each of the two lines but in different phases, see figure 373. When simultaneous faults
occur, the phase selectors at the remote protection IED - relative to the faults, see the A side in
figure 373 - cannot discriminate between the fault on the protected line and on the parallel line.
The phase selector must be set to cover the whole line with a margin and will also detect a
fault on the parallel line. Instantaneous phase-selective tripping for simultaneous faults close
to line end is not possible with the information that is available locally in the remote protection
IEDs relative to the faults. The protection IED near the faults detects the faults on the
protected line as a forward fault, and on the parallel line in reverse direction. The directional
phase selector in the two IEDs near the faults can discriminate between the faults and issue
correct single-pole tripping commands.

608 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

Station A Station B
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

Earth

IED IED

IEC06000309_2_en.vsd
IEC06000309 V2 EN-US

Figure 373: Simultaneous faults on two parallel lines

By using phase-segregated channels for the communication scheme, the correct phase
information in the protection IED near the faults can be transferred to the other side
protection IED. A correct single-pole trip can be achieved on both lines and at both line IEDs.

ZC1PPSCH requires three individual channels between the protection IEDs on each line in both
directions. In case of single-phase faults, only one channel is activated at a time. But in case of
multi-phase faults, two or three channels are activated simultaneously.

The following descriptions of the schemes generally presents one of the three identical
phases.

When only one channel is available in each direction, use the optionally available
three phase communication scheme logic ZCPSCH . Note that this logic can
issue an unwanted three-pole trip at the described simultaneous faults close to
one line end.

16.2.2.1 Blocking scheme SEMOD141790-25 v1

In blocking scheme a reverse looking zone is used to send a block signal to remote end to
block an overreaching zone. Since the scheme is sending the blocking signal during conditions
where the protected line is healthy, it is common to use the line itself as communication media
(PLC). The scheme can be used on all types of line length.

The blocking scheme is very dependable because it will operate for faults anywhere on the
protected line if the communication channel is out of service. Conversely, it is less secure than
permissive schemes because it will trip for external faults within the reach of the tripping
function if the communication channel is out of service. Inadequate speed or dependability
can cause spurious tripping for external faults. Inadequate security can cause delayed tripping
for internal faults. To secure that the carrier send signal will arrive before the zone used in the
communication scheme will trip, the trip is released first after the time delay tCoord has
elapsed. The setting of tCoord must be set longer than the maximum transmission time of the
channel. A security margin of at least 10 ms should be considered.

The timer tSendMin for prolonging the carrier send signal is proposed to set to zero in
blocking schemes.

Line distance protection REL670 609

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

16.2.2.2 Permissive schemes SEMOD141790-30 v2

In permissive scheme permission to trip is sent from local end to remote end(s) that is,
protection at local end have detected a fault on the protected object. The received signal(s) is
combined with an overreaching zone and gives an instantaneous trip if the received signal is
present during the time the chosen zone is detected a fault in forward direction. Either end
may send a permissive (or command) signal to trip to the other end(s), and the teleprotection
equipment need to be able to receive while transmitting.

Depending on if the sending signal(s) is issued by underreaching or overreaching zone, it is

divided into Permissive underreach (PUR) or Permissive overreach (POR) scheme.

Permissive underreach scheme SEMOD141790-35 v2

Permissive underreach scheme is not suitable to use on short line length due to difficulties for
distance protection measurement in general to distinguish between internal and external
faults in those applications.

The underreaching zones at local and remote end(s) must overlap in reach to prevent a gap
between the protection zones where faults would not be detected. If the underreaching zone
do not meet required sensitivity due to for instance fault infeed from remote end blocking or
permissive overreach scheme should be considered.

The carrier received signal (CR) must be received when the overreaching zone is still activated
to achieve an instantaneous trip. In some cases, due to the fault current distribution, the
overreaching zone can operate only after the fault has been cleared at the IED nearest to the
fault.

There is a certain risk that in case of a trip from an independent tripping zone, the zone issuing
the carrier send signal (CS) resets before the overreaching zone has operated at the remote
IED. To assure a sufficient duration of the received signal (CR), the send signal (CS), can be
prolonged by a tSendMin reset timer. The recommended setting of tSendMin is 100 ms. Since
the received communication signal is combined with the output from an overreaching zone,
there is less concern about false signal causing an incorrect trip. Therefore set the timer
tCoord to zero. Failure of the communication channel does not affect the selectivity, but
delays tripping at one end(s) for certain fault locations.

Permissive overreach scheme SEMOD141790-41 v1

In permissive overreach scheme there is an overreaching zone that issue the carrier send
signal. At remote end the received signal together with activating of an overreaching zone
gives instantaneous trip of the protected object. The overreaching zone used in the
teleprotection scheme must be activated at the same time as the received signal is present.
The scheme can be used for all type line lengths.

In permissive overreach schemes, the communication channel plays an essential roll to

obtaining fast tripping at both ends. Failure of the communication channel may affect the
selectivity and delay tripping at one end at least, for faults anywhere along the protected
circuit. Teleprotection operating in permissive overreach scheme must beside the general
requirement of fast and secure operation also requirement on dependability must be
considered. Inadequate security can cause unwanted tripping for external faults. Inadequate
speed or dependability can cause delayed tripping for internal faults or even unwanted
operations.

This scheme may use virtually any communication media that is not adversely affected by
electrical interference from fault generated noise or by electrical phenomena, such as
lightning, that cause faults. Communication media that uses metallic path are particularly
subjected to this type of interference, therefore, they must be properly shielded or otherwise
designed to provide an adequate communication signal during power system faults. At the
permissive overreaching scheme, the carrier send signal (CS) might be issued in parallel both
from an overreaching zone and an underreaching, independent tripping zone. The CS signal
from the overreaching zone must not be prolonged while the CS signal from zone1 can be

610 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

prolonged. To secure correct operations of current reversal logic in case of parallel lines, when
applied, the carrier send signal CS shall not be prolonged. So set the tSendMin to zero in this
case. There is no need to delay the trip at receive of the carrier signal, so set the timer tCoord
to zero.

Unblocking scheme SEMOD141790-46 v2

Unblocking scheme cannot be used at ZC1PPSCH as a failure of the communication channel
cannot give any information about which phase/phases have a fault.

16.2.2.3 Intertrip scheme SEMOD141790-49 v2

In some power system applications, there is a need to trip the remote end breaker
immediately from local protections. This applies, for instance, when transformers or reactors
are connected to the system without circuit-breakers or for remote tripping following
operation of Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF).

In intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal is initiated by an underreaching zone or from an
external protection (transformer or reactor protection). At remote end, the received signals
initiate a trip without any further protection criteria. To limit the risk for unwanted trip due to
spurious sending of signals, the timer tCoord should be set to 10-30 ms dependant on type
and security of the communication channel.

The general requirement for teleprotection equipment operating in intertripping applications

is that it should be very secure and very dependable, since both inadequate security and
dependability may cause unwanted operation. In some applications the equipment shall be
able to receive while transmitting, and commands may be transmitted over longer time period
than for other teleprotection systems.

16.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD141796-1 v1

SEMOD141800-4 v2
The parameters for the Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance
protection function ZC1PPSCH are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Configure the zones used for the CS carrier send and for scheme communication tripping by
using the Application Configuration tool. The recommended settings of tCoord timer are
based on maximal recommended transmission time for analog channels according to IEC
60834-1. It is recommended to coordinate the proposed settings with actual performance for
the teleprotection equipment to get optimized settings.

16.2.3.1 Permissive underreache scheme SEMOD141800-6 v1

Set Operation = On
Set Scheme = Permissive UR
type
Set tCoord = 0 ms
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s

16.2.3.2 Permissive overreach scheme SEMOD141800-9 v1

Set Operation = On
Set Scheme = Permissive OR
type
Set tCoord = 0 ms
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s

Line distance protection REL670 611

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

16.2.3.3 Blocking scheme SEMOD141800-12 v1

Set Operation = On
Set Scheme = Blocking
type
Set tCoord = 25 ms (10 ms + maximal transmission time)
Set tSendMin = 0s

16.2.3.4 Intertrip scheme SEMOD141800-15 v1

Set Operation = On
Set Scheme = Intertrip
type
Set tCoord = 50 ms (10 ms + maximal transmission time)
Set tSendMin = 0.1 s

16.3 Current reversal and Weak-end infeed logic for

distance protection 3-phase ZCRWPSCH IP15751-1 v4

16.3.1 Identification
M15073-1 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end ZCRWPSCH - 85
infeed logic for distance protection
3-phase

16.3.2 Application IP15023-1 v1

16.3.2.1 Current reversal logic M13895-4 v6

To avoid this kind of disturbances, a fault current reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can
be used.

The unwanted operations that might occur can be explained by looking into Figure 374 and
Figure 375. Initially the protection A2 at A side will detect a fault in forward direction and send
a communication signal to the protection B2 at remote end, which is measuring a fault in
reverse direction.

L1

A1 B1

L2

A2 B2

IEC9900043-2.vsd

IEC99000043 V3 EN-US

Figure 374: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when all breakers are closed

612 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

When the breaker B1 opens for clearing the fault, the fault current through B2 bay will invert. If
the communication signal has not reset at the same time as the distance protection function
used in the teleprotection scheme has switched on to forward direction, we will have an
unwanted operation of breaker B2 at B side.

L1

A1 B1

L2

A2 B2

IEC99000044-2.vsd

IEC99000044 V3 EN-US

Figure 375: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when breaker B1 has opened
To handle this the send signal CS or CSLn from B2 is held back until the reverse zone IRVLn has
reset and the tDelayRev time has been elapsed. To achieve this the reverse zone on the
distance protection shall be connected to input IRV and the output IRVL shall be connected to
input BLKCS on the communication function block ZCPSCH.

The function can be blocked by activating the input IRVBLK or the general BLOCK input.

16.3.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic M13895-16 v8

Permissive communication schemes can only operate when the protection in the remote IED
can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current, normally >20%
of Ir. The fault current can be too low due to an open breaker or low short-circuit power of the
source. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The fault
current can also be initially too low due to the fault current distribution. Here, the fault current
increases when the breaker opens at the strong terminal, and a sequential tripping is achieved.
This requires a detection of the fault by an independent tripping zone 1. To avoid sequential
tripping as described, and when zone 1 is not available, weak-end infeed tripping logic is used.
The weak end infeed function only works together with permissive overreach communication
schemes as the carrier send signal must cover the complete line length.

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received signal under the condition that no fault has
been detected on the weak-end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in
forward and reverse direction).

Also, the WEI function can be additionally extended to trip the breaker in the weak side. The
trip is achieved when one or more phase voltages are low during an echo function.

In case of single-pole tripping, the phase voltages are used as phase selectors together with
the received signal CRLn.

When used with the blocking teleprotection scheme some limitations apply:

• Only the trip part of the function can be used together with the blocking scheme. It is not
possible to use the echo function to send the echo signal to the remote line IED. The echo
signal would block the operation of the distance protection at the remote line end and in
this way prevents the correct operation of a complete protection scheme.
• A separate direct intertrip channel must be arranged from the remote end when a trip or
accelerated trip is given there. The intertrip receive signal is connect to input CRL.
• The WEI function shall be set to WEI=Echo&Trip. The WEI function block will then give
phase selection and trip the local breaker.

Avoid using WEI function at both line ends. It shall only be activated at the weak-end.

Line distance protection REL670 613

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

16.3.3 Setting guidelines IP15024-1 v1

M13856-4 v6
The parameters for the current reversal logic and the weak-end infeed logic (WEI) function are
set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for the primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

16.3.3.1 Current reversal logic M13856-6 v7

The forward zone timer must be set longer than the tDelayRev set value.

Set CurrRev to On to activate the function.

Set tDelayRev timer of the maximum reset time for the communication equipment that gives
the carrier receive (CRL) signal plus 30 ms. A minimum setting of 40 ms is recommended,
typical 60 ms.

A long tDelayRev setting increases security against unwanted tripping, but delays the fault
clearing time in case of a fault from one line that evolves to the other one. The probability of
this type of fault is small. Therefore set tDelayRev with a good margin.

Set the pick-up delay tPickUpRev to <80% of the minimum sum of breaker operate time +
communication delay time, but with a minimum of 20 ms.

16.3.3.2 Weak-end infeed logic M13856-10 v8

Set WEI to Echo, to activate the weak-end infeed function with only echo function.

Set WEI to Echo&Trip to obtain echo with trip.

The tPickUpWEI is the on-time delay to activate the weak-end infeed function. Set tPickUpWEI
to 10 ms, a short delay is recommended to avoid that spurious carrier received signals will
activate WEI and cause unwanted carrier send (ECHO) signals.

When single phase tripping is required, a detailed study of the voltages during
phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults should be done, at different fault
locations.

16.4 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase

segregated communication ZC1WPSCH SEMOD155635-1 v2

16.4.1 Identification
SEMOD156467-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end ZC1WPSCH - 85
infeed logic for phase segregated
communication

614 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

16.4.2 Application SEMOD156558-1 v1

SEMOD156537-5 v4

Current reversal logic

If parallel lines are connected to common buses at both terminals, overreaching permissive
communication schemes can trip unselectable due to current reversal. The unwanted tripping
affects the healthy line when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of security results in a
total loss of interconnection between the two buses.

To avoid this kind of disturbances, fault current reversal logic (transient blocking logic) can be
used.

The unwanted operations that might occur can be explained by looking into Figure 376 and
Figure 377. Assume that the fault has been taken place close to breaker B1. At first, the
protection A2 at A side will detect a fault in forward direction and send a communication
signal to the protection B2 at remote end, which is measuring a fault in reverse direction.

L1

A1 B1

L2

A2 B2

IEC14000002-1-en.vsd
IEC14000002 V1 EN-US

Figure 376: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when all breakers are closed
When the breaker B1 opens for clearing the fault, the fault current through B2 bay will invert. If
the communication signal has not reset at the same time as the distance protection function
used in the teleprotection scheme has switched on to forward direction, we will have an
unwanted operation of breaker B2 at B side.

L1

A1 B1

L2

A2 B2

IEC14000003-1-en.vsd
IEC14000003 V1 EN-US

Figure 377: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when breaker B1 is opened
To handle this, the send signal CS or CSLx from B2 is held back until the reverse zone IRVLx has
reset and the tDelayRev time has elapsed. To achieve this, the reverse zone on the distance
protection shall be connected to input IRVLx and the output IRVOPLx shall be connected to
input BLKCS on the communication function block ZCPSCH.

Weak-end infeed logic

Permissive communication schemes can basically operate only when the protection in the
remote IED can detect the fault. The detection requires a sufficient minimum fault current,
normally >20% of Ir. The fault current can be too low due to an open breaker or low short-
circuit power of the source. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed (WEI) echo logic is
used. The fault current can also be initially too low due to the fault current distribution. Here,
the fault current increases when the breaker opens in the strong terminal, and a sequential
tripping is achieved. This requires a detection of the fault by an independent tripping zone 1.
To avoid sequential tripping as described, and when zone 1 is not available, weak-end infeed
tripping logic is used.

Line distance protection REL670 615

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received signal under the condition that no fault has
been detected on the weak-end by different fault detection elements (distance protection in
forward and reverse direction).

The WEI function can be extended to trip also the breaker in the weak side. The trip is achieved
when one or more phase voltages are low during an echo function.

Together with the blocking teleprotection scheme some limitations apply:

• Only the trip part of the function can be used together with the blocking scheme. It is not
possible to use the echo function to send the echo signal to the remote line IED. The echo
signal would block the operation of the distance protection at the remote line end and in
this way prevents the correct operation of a complete protection scheme.
• A separate direct intertrip channel must be arranged from remote end when a trip or
accelerated trip is given there. The intertrip receive signal is connected to input CRL.
• The WEI function shall be set to OperationWEI=Echo&Trip. The WEI function block will then
give phase selection and trip the local breaker.

16.4.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD156555-1 v2

SEMOD156562-5 v4
The parameters for the current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated
communication function (ZC1WPSCH) are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Current reversal logic

Set OperCurrRev to On to activate the function.

Set tDelayRev timer at the maximum reset time for the communication equipment that gives
the carrier receive (CRLx) signal plus 30 ms. A minimum setting of 40 ms is recommended,
typical 60 ms.

A long tDelayRev setting increases security against unwanted tripping, but delay the fault
clearing in case of a fault developing from one line to involve the other one. The probability of
this type of fault is small. Therefore set tDelayRev with a good margin.

Set the pick-up delay tPickUpRev to <80% of the minimum sum of breaker operate time +
communication delay time, but with a minimum of 20 ms.

Weak-end infeed logic

Set OperationWEI to Echo, to activate the weak-end infeed function with only echo function.

Set OperationWEI to Echo&Trip to obtain echo with trip.

Set tPickUpWEI to 10 ms, a short delay is recommended to avoid that spurious carrier received
signals will activate WEI and cause unwanted communications.

Set the voltage criterion UPP< and UPE< for the weak-end trip to 70% of the system base
voltage UBase. The setting should be below the minimum operate voltage of the system but
above the voltage that occurs for fault on the protected line. The phase-to-phase elements
must be verified to not operate for phase to earth faults.

616 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

When single phase tripping is required a detailed study of the voltages at

phase-to-phase respectively phase-to-earth faults, at different fault locations,
is normally required.

16.5 Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH SEMOD52894-1 v4

16.5.1 Identification
M14860-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH - -

16.5.2 Application M13821-3 v4

The local acceleration logic (ZCLCPSCH) is used in applications where a conventional

teleprotection scheme is not available (no communication channel), but where the user still
requires fast clearance for faults on the whole line.

The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone extension) or by the loss-of-load
current (loss-of-load acceleration).

The loss-of-load acceleration gives selected overreach zone permission to operate

instantaneously after checking the loss-of-load condition. It can not operate for three-phase
faults.

16.5.3 Setting guidelines M13854-4 v4

The parameters for the local acceleration logic functions are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Set ZoneExtension to On when the first trip from selected overreaching zone shall be
instantaneous and the definitive trip after autoreclosure a normal time-delayed trip.

Set LossOfLoad to On when the acceleration shall be controlled by loss-of-load in healthy

phase(s).

LoadCurr must be set below the current that will flow on the healthy phase when one or two of
the other phases are faulty and the breaker has opened at remote end. Calculate the setting
according to equation 534.

0.5 × ILoad min

LoadCurr =
IBase
EQUATION1320 V1 EN-US (Equation 534)

where:
ILoadmin is the minimum load current on the line during normal operation conditions.

The timer tLoadOn is used to increase the security of the loss-of-load function for example to
avoid unwanted release due to transient inrush current when energizing the line power

Line distance protection REL670 617

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

transformer. The loss-of-load function will be released after the timer tLoadOn has elapsed at
the same time as the load current in all three phases are above the setting LoadCurr. In normal
acceleration applications there is no need for delaying the release, so set the tLoadOn to zero.

The drop-out timer tLoadOff is used to determine the window for the current release
conditions for Loss-of-load. The timer is by default set to 300ms, which is judged to be
enough to secure the current release.

The setting of the minimum current detector, MinCurr, should be set higher than the
unsymmetrical current that might flow on the non faulty line, when the breaker at remote end
has opened. At the same time it should be set below the minimum load current transfer during
normal operations that the line can be subjected to. By default, MinCurr is set to 5% of IBase.

The pick-up timer tLowCurr determine the window needed for pick-up of the minimum current
value used to release the function. The timer is by default set to 200 ms, which is judged to be
enough to avoid unwanted release of the function (avoid unwanted trip).

16.6 Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent

protection ECPSCH IP14711-1 v2

16.6.1 Identification
M14882-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Scheme communication logic for ECPSCH - 85
residual overcurrent protection

16.6.2 Application M13919-3 v6

To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by the
instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent
protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication channels.

One communication channel is used in each direction, which can transmit an on/off signal if
required. The performance and security of this function is directly related to the transmission
channel speed and security against false or lost signals.

In the directional scheme, information of the fault current direction must be transmitted to
the other line end.

With directional comparison in permissive schemes, a short operate time of the protection
including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid
autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.

During a single-phase reclosing cycle, the autoreclosing device must block the directional
comparison earth-fault communication scheme.

The communication logic module enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreaching

schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and current
reversal, included in the Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent
protection (ECRWPSCH) function.

Metallic communication paths adversely affected by fault generated noise may not be suitable
for conventional permissive schemes that rely on signal transmitted during a protected line
fault. With power line carrier, for example, the communication signal may be attenuated by the

618 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

fault, especially when the fault is close to the line end, thereby disabling the communication
channel.

To overcome the lower dependability in permissive schemes, an unblocking function can be

used. Use this function at older, less reliable, power line carrier (PLC) communication, where
the signal has to be sent through the primary fault. The unblocking function uses a guard
signal CRG, which must always be present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of
the CRG signal during the security time is used as a CR signal. This also enables a permissive
scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal transmission. Set the tSecurity to 35
ms.

16.6.3 Setting guidelines M13920-4 v7

The parameters for the scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection function:

Operation: Off or On.

SchemeType: This parameter can be set to Off , Intertrip, Permissive UR, Permissive OR or
Blocking.

tCoord: Delay time for trip from ECPSCH function. For Permissive under/overreaching
schemes, this timer shall be set to at least 20 ms plus maximum reset time of the
communication channel as a security margin. For Blocking scheme, the setting should be >
maximum signal transmission time +10 ms.

Unblock: Select Off if unblocking scheme with no alarm for loss of guard is used. Set to Restart
if unblocking scheme with alarm for loss of guard is used.

tSendMin: Time duration, the carrier send signal is prolonged.

tSecurity: The absence of CRG signal for a time duration of tSecurity is considered as CR
signal.

16.7 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual

overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH IP14365-1 v4

16.7.1 Identification
M14883-1 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current reversal and weak-end ECRWPSCH - 85
infeed logic for residual overcurrent
protection

16.7.2 Application IP15041-1 v1

16.7.2.1 Fault current reversal logic M15285-3 v7

Figure 378 and figure 379 show a typical system condition, which can result in a fault current
reversal.

Line distance protection REL670 619

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

Assume that fault is near the B1 breaker. B1 Relay sees the fault in Zone1 and A1 relay identifies
the fault in Zone2.

Note that the fault current is reversed in line L2 after the breaker B1 opening.

It can cause an unselective trip on line L2 if the current reversal logic does not block the
permissive overreaching scheme in the IED at B2.

L1

A1 B1

L2

A2 B2

IEC9900043-2.vsd

IEC99000043 V3 EN-US

Figure 378: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when all breakers are closed

L1

A1 B1

L2

A2 B2

IEC99000044-2.vsd

IEC99000044 V3 EN-US

Figure 379: Current distribution for a fault close to B side when breaker at B1 is opened
When the breaker on the parallel line operates, the fault current on the healthy line is reversed.
The IED at B2 recognizes the fault in forward direction from reverse direction before breaker
operates. As IED at B2 already received permissive signal from A2 and IED at B2 is now
detecting the fault as forward fault, it will immediately trip breaker at B2. To ensure that
tripping at B2 should not occur, the permissive overreaching function at B2 needs to be
blocked by IRVL till the received permissive signal from A2 is reset.

The IED at A2, where the forward direction element was initially activated, must reset before
the send signal is initiated from B2. The delayed reset of output signal IRVL also ensures the
send signal from IED B2 is held back till the forward direction element is reset in IED A2.

16.7.2.2 Weak-end infeed logic M15285-6 v5

Figure 380 shows a typical system condition that can result in a missing operation. Note that
there is no fault current from node B. This causes that the IED at B cannot detect the fault and
trip the breaker in B. To cope with this situation, a selectable weak-end infeed logic is provided
for the permissive overreaching scheme.

Strong Weak
source source

A B

IEC99000054-3-en.vsd
IEC99000054 V3 EN-US

Figure 380: Initial condition for weak-end infeed

620 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

16.7.3 Setting guidelines IP15042-1 v1

M13933-4 v5
The parameters for the current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent
protection function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in a Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

16.7.3.1 Current reversal M13933-6 v5

The current reversal function is set on or off by setting the parameter CurrRev to On or Off.
Time delays shall be set for the timers tPickUpRev and tDelayRev.

tPickUpRev is chosen shorter (<80%) than the breaker opening time, but minimum 20 ms.

tDelayRev is chosen at a minimum to the sum of protection reset time and the communication
reset time. A minimum tDelayRev setting of 40 ms is recommended.

The reset time of the directional residual overcurrent protection (EF4PTOC) is typically 25 ms.
If other type of residual overcurrent protection is used in the remote line end, its reset time
should be used.

The signal propagation time is in the range 3 – 10 ms/km for most types of communication
media. In communication networks small additional time delays are added in multiplexers and
repeaters. Theses delays are less than 1 ms per process. It is often stated that the total
propagation time is less than 5 ms.

When a signal picks-up or drops out there is a decision time to be added. This decision time is
highly dependent on the interface between communication and protection used. In many
cases an external interface (teleprotection equipment) is used. This equipment makes a
decision and gives a binary signal to the protection device. In case of analog teleprotection
equipment typical decision time is in the range 10 – 30 ms. For digital teleprotection
equipment this time is in the range 2 – 10 ms.

If the teleprotection equipment is integrated in the protection IED the decision time can be
slightly reduced.

The principle time sequence of signaling at current reversal is shown.

Line distance protection REL670 621

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

Tele- Tele- Tele- Protection

Protection
Protection communication Protection Function
Function
Equipment System Equipment

CS initiation to
CS from the CR to the
the CR selection and
protection CS propagation, protection
communication decision, operate
function, operate propagation function, operate
system, operate and reset time
and reset time and reset time
and reset time

Sending CR
protection reception
reset drop
CR to
CR to CR to CS to
prot.
teleprot. prot. communication
Fault Protection Fault current func
CS initiation eq. func drop
occurs pick-up reversal drop

Time

Minimum setting of tDelay IEC05000536-2-en.vsd

IEC05000536 V2 EN-US

Figure 381: Time sequence of signaling at current reversal

16.7.3.2 Weak-end infeed M13933-12 v6

The weak-end infeed can be set by setting the parameter WEI to Off, Echo or Echo & Trip.
Operating zero sequence voltage when parameter WEI is set to Echo & Trip is set with 3U0>.

The zero sequence voltage for a fault at the remote line end and appropriate fault resistance is
calculated.

To avoid unwanted trip from the weak-end infeed logic (if spurious signals should occur), set
the operate value of the broken delta voltage level detector (3U0) higher than the maximum
false network frequency residual voltage that can occur during normal service conditions. The
recommended minimum setting is two times the false zero-sequence voltage during normal
service conditions.

16.8 Direct transfer trip logic GUID-F6AE5927-D93F-4CAD-A6C6-445720C806D8 v1

16.8.1 Application GUID-4D4051FE-B3AC-4394-9234-CC351E95E7F1 v1

The main purpose of the direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme is to provide a local criterion check
on receiving a transfer trip signal from remote end before tripping the local end CB. A typical
application for this scheme is a power transformer directly connected, without circuit breaker,
to the feeding line. Suppose that an internal symmetrical or non-symmetrical transformer fault
appears within the protective area of the transformer differential protection. The line
protection will, in some cases, not recognize the fault. The transformer differential protection
operates for the internal fault and initiates a trip of the secondary side circuit breaker. It also
sends the carrier signal to the remote line end in order to open the line circuit breaker.

622 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

CR CS TRIP
TRIP
DTT IDIFF>

Xsource VT1

~ CT1
Line
CT2 CT3
Source Power Load
Transformer

en03000120.vsd
IEC03000120 V1 EN-US

Figure 382:
Usually carrier receive (CR) signal trips the line circuit breaker directly in normal direct transfer
trip scheme (DTT) but in such cases security would be compromised, due to the risk of a false
communication signal. A false CR signal could unnecessarily trip the line. Therefore, a local
criterion is used, to provide an additional trip criterion, at the same location as the line circuit
breaker. The local criterion must detect the abnormal conditions at the end of the protected
line and transformer and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

Another application is a line connected shunt reactor, where the reactor is solidly connected to
the line. Shunt reactors are generally protected by differential protection, which operates the
local line circuit breaker and sends a transfer trip command to the remote line end.

The line protection in the remote end is much less sensitive than the differential protection
and will only operate for low impedance reactor faults very close to the high voltage terminal.
To avoid frequent line trips at the local end due to false transfer trip signals, a local criterion
check is required to be added at the local end.

The trip signal from local criterion will ensure the fault at the remote end and release the trip
signal to the local side circuit breaker. The local criterion must detect the abnormal conditions
and permit the CR signal to trip the circuit breaker.

DTT scheme comprises following local criteria checks as shown in Figure 383.

Line distance protection REL670 623

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

CR1

CR2

Impedance protection
Low impedance protection

Breaker Failure Backup trip of breaker failure

protection

Three phase overcurrent

CarrierReceiveLogic

LCCRPTRC
Three phase undercurrent
U3P
CR1

CB Trip output
CR2
Zero sequence overcurrent
protection

LocalCheck
Analog input

Negative sequence overcurrent

protection OR

Zero sequence overvoltage

protection
I3P

Negative sequence overvoltage

protection

Compensated over and

undervoltage protection

Low active power and power

factor protection

Sudden change in current

variation

IEC09000773-1-en.vsd
IEC09000773 V1 EN-US

Figure 383: DTT scheme

16.8.2 Setting guidelines GUID-9E9CD5E0-1556-4E56-8A5D-5ACC17DAA00F v2

Setting guidelines for Direct transfer trip functions are outlined in the following sections.

16.8.3 Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC GUID-585236C8-583C-4415-9820-A1DD038EA995 v1

16.8.3.1 Identification
GUID-6F3FADD8-8974-4874-8A43-642C1D540D3E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Low active power and power factor LAPPGAPC - 37_55
protection

624 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

16.8.3.2 Application GUID-66A4DE76-7477-4B1A-A214-0BE14E0289F3 v1

Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) is one of the local criteria to be
checked in direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme. In LAPPGAPC, active power and power factor are
calculated from the voltage and current values at this end. On detection of low active power or
low power factor condition, the trip output will be set. All the calculation and comparison are
done per phase.

If there is a fault and the remote end circuit breaker is tripped, a carrier signal is sent to the
local end and the active power in respective phases will decrease. Hence, detection of low
active power in at least one of the phases would be one of the factors to ascertain the fault at
other end.

The function has two modes, '1 out of 3' and '2 out of 3'. '1 out of 3' mode ensures that there is
low active power in at least one of the three phases, while the '2 out of 3' mode the low power
is ensured in at least two phases simultaneously before sending the trip signal.

Line which is tripped at the remote end will have low active power flowing through it which
also results in low power factor in the respective phase. A low power factor criterion could also
be an added check of the local criterion in DTT. In this function phase wise power factor is
calculated, and a comparison is made for the low power factor condition to give phase
segregated start and trip.

16.8.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-9E340B5A-D007-41F0-BC53-9416028002C7 v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

OperationLAP: Used to set the low power function On or Off.

OpMode: Can be set 2 out of 3 or 1 out of 3. If 1 out of 3 is set, the function will send TRIP signal
if one or more phases have low power. If 2 out of 3 is set, the function will send TRIP signal if
two or more phases have low power. When the remote breaker has opened, there should
theoretically be zero power at the protection measurement point. However, when fault current
is fed to the fault point the power loss in the fault will be detected. For operation for all
unsymmetrical faults 1 out of 3 should be selected.

LAP<: Level of low active power detection, given in % of SBase. This parameter should be set
as low as possible to avoid activation during low load conditions at undisturbed network
operation. The measurement is blocked for current levels below 3 % of IBase and 30% of
UBase. All outputs are blocked.

tOpLAP: Time delay for trip in case of low active power detection.

OperationLPF: Used to set the low power factor function On or Off.

LPF<: Level of low power factor detection. The setting should be set lower than the lowest
power factor at undisturbed network operation. A value lower than 0.4 is normally sufficient.

tOpLPF: Time delay for trip in case of low power factor detection.

16.8.4 Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC GUID-41C1AD2A-3E57-40A9-9039-F159A3CE3DF8 v1

Line distance protection REL670 625

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

16.8.4.1 Identification
GUID-F5F76C4D-DD25-4695-9FF1-6B45C696CC5E v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Compensated over and undervoltage COUVGAPC - 59_27
protection

16.8.4.2 Application GUID-49CDDFEF-DB8F-4733-AD7C-0A87E0F6BAA1 v1

Compensated over and undervoltage protection (COUVGAPC) function calculates the remote
end voltage of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage, current and with the help
of transmission line parameters, that is, line resistance, reactance, capacitance and local shunt
reactor.

For protection of long transmission line for in zone faults this function can be incorporated
with other local criteria checks within direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line
only under abnormal conditions and to avoid unnecessary tripping during healthy operation of
the line (for example, lightly loaded or unloaded).

Long transmission line draws substantial quantity of charging current. If such a line is open
circuited or lightly loaded at the remote end, the voltage at remote end may exceeds local end
voltage. This is known as Ferranti effect and is due to the voltage drop across the line
inductance (due to charging current) being in phase with the local end voltages. Both
capacitance and inductance are responsible for this phenomenon. The capacitance (and
charging current) is negligible in short line but significant in medium line and appreciable in
long line. The percentage voltage rise due to the Ferranti effect between local end and remote
end voltage is proportional to the length of the line and the properties of the transmission line.
The Ferranti effect is symmetrical between all three phases for normal balanced load
condition. The overvoltage caused by Ferranti effect can be reduced by drawing larger load
through the line or switching in the shunt reactor (connected either to line or to remote bus) at
the remote end. The calculated compensated voltage at the local end can detect such
overvoltage phenomenon.

The vector representation of local end and remote end voltages are shown below:

Us R L UR
C

P Ic X
Ic Us N
1 1 Ic R
C C O
2 2 Ur M

IEC09000774-1-en.vsd
IEC09000774 V1 EN-US

Figure 384: Vector diagram for local end and remote end voltage at no power transfer
conditions

Where:
OM Remote end voltage Ur
OP Local end voltage Us
OC Current drawn by capacitance (Ic)
MN Resistance drop (IcR)
NP Inductive reactance drop (IcX)

626 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

If there is a transmission line that is opened at the remote end or radial or remote end source
is weak, then a fault anywhere on the line can result into undervoltage at the remote end. There
can be undervoltage at remote end also due to heavy loading or poor power factor on lagging
side. A fault in a line connected beyond the remote end bus can also produce undervoltage at
remote end. The compensated voltage calculated at the local end can detect such
undervoltages. The undervoltage caused by a fault can be asymmetrical while that due to
overloading is symmetrical.

The trip signal issued by compensated over and under voltage function should be
accompanied by a transfer trip signal received from the remote end. The trip signal should be
used as a release signal which can permit a remote transfer trip to be used to trip the local
circuit breaker.

Setting of over voltage and under voltage levels for compensated voltage should be same as
the remote end over and under voltage levels. This will ensure proper operation of voltage
protection of the transmission line.

The definite delay time for compensated over and under voltage can be shorter than that at
remote end, but not too short. A short delay time would result in frequent operation of
compensated over and under voltage function without corresponding transfer trip received
from remote end.

Switchable shunt reactors located on both line terminals and substation bus-bars are
commonly used on long radial EHV transmission networks for the purpose of voltage control
during daily/seasonal load variations.

The function can internally correct for the current through the local shunt reactor. The setting
EnShuntReactor should be On if there is a shunt reactor on the line. Change in this setting will
be effected only when IED is restarted. Hence this setting should be configured during
installing and then connection and disconnection of shunt reactor breaker should be handled
by the input SWIPOS. In figure 385, if the measured current IS is configured in the IED, then
internal shunt reactor correction should be used (The setting EnShuntReactor should be On if
there is a shunt reactor on the line. Change in this setting will reboot the IED to take effect of
XSR. Hence this setting should be configured during installing and then connection and
disconnection of shunt reactor breaker should be handled by the input SWIPOS). Also, for
shunt reactor connected through the breaker or disconnector, status of the same must be
configured in the IED as shown in figure 385.

Frequently, the input current to the line protection IED is already corrected for the current
through the local shunt reactor. In figure 385 if the measured current IL is connected to the IED
then even if local shunt reactor is present its correction should not be done inside the function,
otherwise this will result into incorrect calculation for compensated voltage.

Us Is IL R L IR UR

Breaker Status

XSR
IED

IEC09000775-1-en.vsd
IEC09000775 V1 EN-US

Figure 385: Breaker status configured with IED

16.8.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DE3963D6-016E-41AD-832F-1D10DD26AABA v2

Line distance protection REL670 627

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

OperationUV: Used to set the under-voltage function On or Off.

U<: Level of low voltage detection, given in % of UBase. This setting should be based on fault
calculations to find the voltage decrease in case of a fault at the most remote point where the
direct trip scheme shall be active. The phase voltages shall be calculated for different types of
faults (single phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase to earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase short
circuits) at different switching states in the network.

tUV: Time delay for trip in case of low voltage detection

OperationOV: Used to set the over-voltage function On or Off.

U>: Level of high voltage detection, given in % of UBase. This setting should be based on fault
calculations to find the voltage increase in case of an earth fault at the most remote point
where the direct trip scheme shall be active. The phase voltages shall be calculated for
different types of faults (single phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase to earth) at different
switching states in the network. The setting must be higher than the largest phase voltage
that can occur during non-disturbed network operation.

tOV: Time delay for trip in case of high voltage detection.

R1: Positive sequence line resistance given in ohm.

X1: Positive sequence line reactance given in ohm.

Xc: Half the value of the equivalent Positive sequence capacitive shunt reactance of the line
given in ohm.

EnShuntReactor: Set On or Off to enable the charging current to be involved in the voltage
compensation calculation.

Xsh: Per phase reactance of the line connected shunt reactor given in ohm.

16.8.5 Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC GUID-61E9C823-5313-4682-93CB-2BA6AC0A0640 v1

16.8.5.1 Identification
GUID-3B6E6472-8153-4D8F-874B-DF68891296C8 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC - 51

16.8.5.2 Application GUID-C97C2326-98DA-428D-92CD-4FF4658E2142 v1

The Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function is fast way of finding any
abnormality in line currents. When there is a fault in the system then current changes faster
than the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds abnormal condition based on phase-to-phase current
variation. The main application is as one of local criterion to increase security when transfer
trips are used.

16.8.5.3 Setting guidelines GUID-00CE5289-3789-437D-A9AE-8E4BDD7C9D8A v2

628 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

I>: Level of fixed threshold given in % of IBase. This setting should be based on fault
calculations to find the current increase in case of a fault at the most remote point where the
direct trip scheme shall be active. The phase to phase current shall be calculated for different
types of faults (single phase to earth, phase to phase to earth, phase to phase and three phase
short circuits) at different switching states in the network. In case of switching of large
objects (shunt capacitor banks, transformers, etc.) large change in current can occur. The I>
setting should be larger than estimated switch in currents measured by the protection.

tHold: Hold time (minimum signal duration). This time setting shall be long enough to assure
that the CR-signal is received. The default value 0.5 s is recommended.

tDelay: Trip time is set according to the individual application.

16.8.6 Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC GUID-13BF45AF-B04C-4C6D-B59D-79A51241C449 v1

16.8.6.1 Identification
GUID-D420E532-37DC-442F-B847-8F73EE8527A7 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC - 94

16.8.6.2 Application GUID-2CAA361A-C3A9-44F0-99DF-FB4E4FA227E3 v1

In the Direct transfer trip scheme, the received CR signal gives the trip to the circuit breaker
after checking certain local criteria functions in order to increase the security of the overall
tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic (LCCRPTRC) checks for the CR signals and passes
the local check trip to the circuit breaker.

LCCRPTRC receives the two CR signals, local criterion trip signals and releases the trip to the
circuit breaker based on the input signal status and mode of operation. There are two modes
of operation in CR channel logic. In the case of '1 out of 2' mode if any one of the two CR is
received then the trip signal coming from the local criterion is released, and in case of '2 out of
2' mode both the CR’s should be received to release the trip signal coming from the local
criterion. Both the CR signals are validated using the channel error binary flag.

16.8.6.3 Setting guidelines GUID-FE0C0FC7-461E-476C-8C24-36A49E0E2587 v1

ChMode: This parameter can be set 1 out of 2 or 2 out of 2. The parameter gives the conditions
for operation of the transfer trip function, i.e. if only one CR signal is required or of both CR
signals are required for trip (in addition to local criteria). If only one channel is available the
parameter must be set 1 out of 2. If parallel channels are available 2 out of 2 gives a high
degree of security but can decrease the dependability if one channel is faulted.

tOperate: Trip time is normally set maximum 0.1 s.

16.8.7 Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV GUID-F15A69BA-58B1-4F3E-AE12-11FF71B96021 v1

Line distance protection REL670 629

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

16.8.7.1 Identification
GUID-C0F8D64B-FBCD-4115-9A5A-23B252CB7E45 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Negative sequence overvoltage LCNSPTOV - 47
protection

16.8.7.2 Application GUID-4FDDBF7D-801B-4C7A-AAE1-8D3ED41D950E v1

Negative sequence symmetrical components are present in all types of fault condition. In case
of three phase short circuits the negative sequence voltages and current have transient nature
and will therefore decline to zero after some periods.

Negative sequence overvoltage protection (LCNSPTOV) is a definite time stage comparator

function. The negative sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is connected as input to
the function through a group connection U3P in PCM600. This voltage is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input negative sequence voltage is more
than the preset value U2>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tU2. There is
a BLOCK input which will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output.
Negative sequence voltage is also available as service value output U2.

16.8.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-CB454AA3-ED5F-4D8A-9568-B6A167301B1E v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

U2>: Level of high negative sequence voltage detection given in % of UBase. This setting
should be based on fault calculations to find the negative sequence voltage in case of a fault at
the most remote point where the direct trip scheme shall be active. The negative sequence
voltages shall be calculated for different types of faults (single phase to earth, phase to phase
to earth and phase to phase short circuits) at different switching states in the network.

tU2: Time delay for trip in case of high negative sequence voltage detection. The trip function
can be used as stand alone short circuit protection with a long time delay. The choice of time
delay is depending on the application of the protection as well as network topology.

16.8.8 Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV GUID-5179ADF5-7A85-4B95-972F-F55566B46709 v1

16.8.8.1 Identification
GUID-0D2A007F-167A-4534-A41B-22C107FEAC46 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Zero sequence overvoltage LCZSPTOV - 59N
protection

16.8.8.2 Application GUID-07A135B9-F60B-4469-9538-DBBEDF7BF2BD v1

Zero sequence symmetrical components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth.
They have a considerably high value during earth faults.

630 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

Zero sequence overvoltage protection (LCZSPTOV) is a definite time stage comparator

function. The Zero sequence input voltage from the SMAI block is connected as input to the
function through a group connection U3P in PCM600. This voltage is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input zero sequence voltage is more than
the preset value 3U0>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of t3U0. BLOCK
input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output . Zero sequence voltage
will be available as service value output as 3U0.

16.8.8.3 Setting guidelines GUID-9BC4E28B-85CD-4CF7-96C6-C8D9D802A1B3 v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

The IED is fed from a normal voltage transformer group where the residual voltage is created
from the phase to earth voltages within the protection software or the residual voltage is fed
from a broken delta-connected VT-group. The setting of analogue inputs always gives 3U0.
Therefore set:

U ph - ph
UBase =
3
EQUATION2268 V1 EN-US (Equation 535)

3U0>: Level of high zero sequence voltage detection given in % of UBase. This setting should
be based on fault calculations to find the zero sequence voltage in case of a fault at the most
remote point where the direct trip scheme shall be active. The zero sequence voltages shall be
calculated for different types of earth faults (single phase to earth and phase to phase to earth
short circuits) at different switching states in the network.

t3U0: Time delay for trip in case of high zero sequence voltage detection. The trip function can
be used as stand alone earth fault protection with a long time delay. The choice of time delay
is depending on the application of the protection as well as network topology.

16.8.9 Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC GUID-0593B07A-4F76-4F92-92E9-EB30FC836ABE v1

16.8.9.1 Identification
GUID-EDC20AC7-540D-43DE-8ABF-7A463E115950 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Negative sequence overcurrent LCNSPTOC - 46
protection

16.8.9.2 Application GUID-D47B89E9-2279-4057-B77D-F27CDF84F1CE v1

Negative sequence symmetrical components are present in all types of fault condition.

Negative sequence overcurrent protection (LCNSPTOC) is a definite time stage comparator

function. The negative sequence input current from the SMAI block is connected as input to
the function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This current is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input negative sequence current is greater
than the preset value I2>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of tI2. BLOCK

Line distance protection REL670 631

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

input will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. Negative sequence
current is available as service value output I2.

16.8.9.3 Setting guideline GUID-377FEADE-375F-4B2D-ADDE-D92C59BDBD41 v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

I2>: Level of high negative sequence current detection given in % of IBase. This setting should
be based on fault calculations to find the negative sequence current in case of a fault at the
most remote point where the direct trip scheme shall be active. The negative sequence current
shall be calculated for different types of faults (single phase to earth, phase to phase to earth
and phase to phase short circuits) at different switching states in the network.

tI2: Time delay for trip in case of high negative sequence current detection. The trip function
can be used as stand alone short circuit protection with a long time delay. The choice of time
delay is depending on the application of the protection as well as network topology.

16.8.10 Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC GUID-6F355F11-2863-4E05-A72C-FB4D6A1A6C0F v1

16.8.10.1 Identification
GUID-581BA9F0-7886-4E46-84B6-37E8B6962934 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Zero sequence overcurrent LCZSPTOC - 51N
protection

16.8.10.2 Application GUID-3110A739-C0B9-4C63-96EA-41BC0A1036DA v1

Zero sequence symmetrical components are present in all abnormal conditions involving earth.
They are having a considerably high value during earth faults.

Zero sequence overcurrent protection (LCZSPTOC) is a definite time stage comparator

function. The zero sequence input current from the SMAI block is connected as input to the
function through a group connection I3P in PCM600. This current is compared against the
preset value and a start signal will be set high if the input zero sequence current is more than
the preset value 3I0>. Trip signal will be set high after a time delay setting of t3I0. BLOCK input
will block the complete function. BLKTR will block the trip output. Zero sequence current is
available as service value output 3I0.

16.8.10.3 Setting guidelines GUID-F4045B0D-39D9-46F1-B83D-0E6DD409E989 v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

3I0> : Level of high zero sequence current detection given in % of IBase. This setting should be
based on fault calculations to find the zero sequence current in case of a fault at the most
remote point where the direct trip scheme shall be active. The zero sequence current shall be
calculated for different types of faults (single phase to earth and phase to phase to earth) at
different switching states in the network.

632 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 16
Scheme communication

t3I0: Time delay for trip in case of high zero sequence current detection. The trip function can
be used as stand alone short circuit protection with a long time delay. The choice of time delay
is depending on the application of the protection as well as network topology.

16.8.11 Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC GUID-510F1FCE-39ED-4B44-89D0-338B085DD8C3 v1

16.8.11.1 Identification
GUID-5FBC4309-C8FB-4CDF-A4D6-84E3A89C81B7 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC - 51

16.8.11.2 Application GUID-EFA9F558-B4DA-4DA3-AA49-9139EC4C23FD v1

Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for detecting over current conditions due to
fault or any other abnormality in the system.

LCP3PTOC could be used as a back up for other local criterion checks.

16.8.11.3 Setting guidelines GUID-BEC224BD-F45D-4D42-8287-D9D9F4AB3D7B v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

IOC>: Level of high phase current detection given in % of IBase. This setting can be based on
evaluation of the largest current that can occur during non-faulted network operation: Iloadmax.
Fault calculations where the smallest current at relevant faults gives: Ifaultmin. The setting can
be chosen: Iloadmax<IOC> <Ifaultmin

tOC: Time delay for trip in case of high phase current detection. The trip function can be used
as stand alone short circuit protection with a long time delay. The choice of time delay is
depending on the application of the protection as well as network topology.

16.8.12 Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC GUID-E8EAE24D-4B69-43DC-BCFC-C4AC63AA66AB v1

16.8.12.1 Identification
GUID-51A4DEE2-C549-483B-9BDD-8F79AD4CFE23 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC - 37

16.8.12.2 Application GUID-CD2DC0C5-B4D6-4041-9A03-1D01C9158628 v1

Three phase undercurrent protection function (LCP3PTUC) is designed for detecting loss of
load conditions.

Line distance protection REL670 633

Application manual
Section 16 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Scheme communication

When the transformer or shunt reactor differential operates and the secondary side circuit
breaker is tripped there will be very low current from this end of the line to the remote end.

LCP3PTUC detects the above low current condition by monitoring the current and helps to trip
the circuit breaker at this end instantaneously or after a time delay according to the
requirement.

16.8.12.3 Setting guidelines GUID-8A4C4842-F9DB-4B44-8114-DCEE18CC6E59 v2

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

IUC<: Level of low phase current detection given in % of IBase. This setting is highly depending
on the application and therefore can no general rules be given.

tUC: Time delay for trip in case of low phase current detection. The trip function can be used
as stand alone short circuit protection with a long time delay. The choice of time delay is
depending on the application of the protection as well as network topology.

634 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

Section 17 Logic

17.1 Tripping logic SMPPTRC IP14576-1 v4

17.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56226-2 v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Tripping logic SMPPTRC 94

1 -> 0
IEC15000314 V1 EN-US

17.1.2 Application M12252-3 v11

All trip signals from the different protection functions shall be routed through the trip logic. All
start signals and directional information can be routed through the trip logic as well. In its
simplest form, the trip logic will only link the TRIP signal to a binary output and make sure that
the pulse time is long enough.

Tripping logic SMPPTRC offers three different operating modes:

• Three-phase tripping for all fault types (3ph operating mode)

• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults and three-phase tripping for multi-phase and
evolving faults (1ph/3ph operating mode).
• Single-phase tripping for single-phase faults, two-phase tripping for two-phase faults and
three-phase tripping for three-phase faults (1ph/2ph/3ph operating mode).

The logic also issues a three-phase tripping command when phase selection within the
operating protection functions is not possible, or when external conditions request three-
phase tripping.To meet the different double, 1½ breaker and other multiple circuit breaker
arrangements, multiple identical SMPPTRC function blocks are provided within the IED. In such
installation, use one instance of SMPPTRC function per circuit breaker.

If the OHL is connected to the substation via more than one breaker, one SMPPTRC function
block should be used for each breaker. For example when single-phase tripping and
autoreclosing is used on the line, both breakers are normally set up for 1/3-phase tripping and
1/3-phase autoreclosing. Alternatively, the breaker chosen as master can have single-phase
tripping, while the slave breaker could have three-phase tripping and autoreclosing. In the case
of a permanent fault, only one of the breakers has to be operated when the fault is energized a
second time. In the event of a transient fault the slave breaker performs a three-phase
reclosing onto the non-faulted line.

The same philosophy can be used for two-phase tripping and autoreclosing.

To prevent closing of a circuit breaker after a trip, the function offers a lockout function.

Line distance protection REL670 635

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

17.1.2.1 Three-phase tripping M14828-7 v10

Connect the inputs from the protection functions to the input TRIN. The TMGAPC function
block is used to combine up to 32 inputs into one output. Connect the output TRIP to the
binary outputs on the IO board.

This signal can also be used for other purposes internally in the IED. An example could be the
starting of breaker failure protection. The three outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 will always be
activated at every trip and can be utilized on individual trip outputs if single-phase operating
devices are available on the circuit breaker even when a three-phase tripping scheme is
selected.

Set the function block to Program = 3 phase and set the required length of the trip pulse to for
example, tTripMin = 150ms.

The typical connection is shown below in figure 386.

SMPPTRC
BLOCK TRIP
TMAGAPC BLKLKOUT TRL1
Protection functions with 3 phase
trip, for example time delayed TRIN TRL2
overcurrent protection TRINL1 TRL3
TRINL2 TR1P
TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
PSL2 CLLKOUT
PSL3 START
1PTRZ STL1
1PTREF STL2
P3PTR STL3
SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
STDIR REV

IEC05000544-4-en.vsdx
IEC05000544 V4 EN-US

Figure 386: Tripping logic SMPPTRC is used for a simple three-phase tripping application

17.1.2.2 Single- and/or three-phase tripping M14828-11 v7

The single-/three-phase tripping operation mode will give single-phase tripping for single-
phase faults and three-phase tripping for multi-phase fault. This operating mode is always
used together with a single-phase autoreclosing scheme.

The single-phase tripping operation mode can include different options and the use of the
different inputs in the function block. Inputs TRINL1, TRINL2 and TRINL3 shall be used for trip
signals from functions with built-in phase selection logic such as distance or line differential
protection functions.

The inputs 1PTRZ and 1PTREF are used for single-phase tripping from functions which do not
have built-in phase selection logic:

• 1PTRZ can be connected to the carrier aided trip signal from the distance protection
scheme (it means that another distance protection function has seen or detected the
fault)
• 1PTREF can be connected to an earth fault function such as EF4PTOC or a carrier aided
trip signal from the earth fault protection scheme

636 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

These two inputs are combined with the external phase selection logic. Phase selection signals
from the external phase selector must be connected to the inputs PSL1, PSL2 and PSL3 to
achieve the tripping on the respective single-phase trip outputs TRL1, TRL2 and TRL3. The
output TRIP is a general trip and is always activated independent of which phase is involved.
Depending on which phases are involved the outputs TR1P, TR2P and TR3P will be activated as
well.

When single-phase tripping schemes are used, a single-phase autoreclosing attempt is

expected to follow. For cases where the autoreclosing is not in service or will not follow for
some reason, the input prepare three-phase trip P3PTR must be activated. This input is
normally connected to the output PREP3P on the autorecloser function SMBRREC but can also
be connected to other signals, for example, an external logic signal. If two circuit breakers are
involved, one SMPPTRC block instance and one SMBRREC instance are used for each circuit
breaker. This will ensure correct operation and behavior of each circuit breaker.

The output TR3P must be connected to the input TR3P on the SMBRREC function in order to
switch SMBRREC to perform a three-phase reclosing. If this signal is not activated, SMBRREC
will use single-phase dead time.

If a second line protection is utilizing the same SMBRREC, the three-phase trip
signal must be generated as OR conditions from both line protections.

Other back-up functions are connected to the input TRIN as described above for three-phase
tripping. A typical connection for a single-phase tripping scheme is shown in figure 387.

Protection functions with 3 SMPPTRC

phase trip, for example time OR
BLOCK TRIP
delayed overcurrent protection
BLKLKOUT TRL1
TRIN TRL2
Phase segregated trip L1, L2 and L3 TRINL1 TRL3
from example line differential or TRINL2 TR1P
distance protection TRINL3 TR2P
PSL1 TR3P
Phase selection L1, L2 and L3 from PSL2 CLLKOUT
external phase selection logic PSL3 START
1PTRZ STL1
Trip by communication scheme of 1PTREF STL2
distance protection if required to P3PTR STL3
provide a single pole trip SETLKOUT STN
RSTLKOUT FW
Trip by communication scheme of STDIR REV
earth fault protection if required to
provide single pole trip

SMBRREC
PREP3P
To prepare 3 phase trip
for any trip signal
TR3P

To activate lockout for any trip

To reset lockout

IEC05000545-5-en.vsdx
IEC05000545 V5 EN-US

Figure 387: The trip logic function SMPPTRC used for single-phase tripping application

Line distance protection REL670 637

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

17.1.2.3 Single-, two- or three-phase tripping M14828-15 v5

The single-/two-/three-phase tripping mode provides single-phase tripping for single-phase

faults, two-phase tripping for two-phase faults and three-phase tripping for three-phase
faults. The operating mode is always used together with an autoreclosing scheme with setting
ARMode = 1/2/3 ph or ARMode = 1/2 ph.

The functionality is very similar to the single-phase scheme described above. However, in
addition to the connections for single phase SMBRREC must also be informed that the trip is
two phases by connecting the output TR2P to the input TR2P in the SMBRREC function.

17.1.2.4 Lock-out M14828-18 v6

The SMPPTRC function block is provided with possibilities to initiate lock-out. The lock-out can
be set to only activate the block closing output CLLKOUT or initiate the block closing output
and also maintain the trip signal output TR3P (latched trip).

The lock-out can then be manually reset after checking the primary fault by activating the
input reset lock-out RSTLKOUT.

If external conditions are required to initiate a closing circuit lock-out but not to lockout trip,
this can be achieved by activating input SETLKOUT. The setting AutoLock = Off means that the
internal trip will not activate lock-out so only initiation of the input SETLKOUT will result in
lock-out. This is normally the case for overhead line protection where most faults are transient.
Unsuccessful autoreclose and back-up zone tripping can in such cases be connected to initiate
lock-out by activating the input SETLKOUT.

17.1.2.5 Example of directional data GUID-08AC09AB-2B2F-4095-B06E-1171CF225869 v2

An example how to connect the directional data from different application functions to the
trip function is given below, see Figure 388:

638 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

SMAGAPC SMPPTRC
STARTCOMB BLOCK STDIR BLOCK TRIP
PROTECTION 1 BLOCK STDIR STDIR1 BLKLKOUT TRL1
START START STDIR2 TRIN TRL2
FW FW STDIR3 TRINL1 TRL3
REV REV STDIR4 TRINL2 TR1P
STL1 STDIR5 TRINL3 TR2P
FWL1 STDIR6 PSL1 TR3P
REVL1 STDIR7 PSL2 CLLKOUT
STL2 STDIR8 PSL3 START
FWL2 STDIR9 1PTRZ STL1
REVL2 STDIR10 1PTREF STL2
STL3 STDIR11 P3PTR STL3
FWL3 STDIR12 SETLKOUT STN
REVL3 STDIR13 RSTLKOUT FW
STN STDIR14 STDIR REV
FWN STDIR15
REVN STDIR16

STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDIR
START
FW
PROTECTION 2 REV
STL1 STL1
FWL1 FWL1
REVL1 REVL1
STL2 STL2
FWL2 FWL2
REVL2 REVL2
STL3 STL3
FWL3 FWL3
REVL3 REVL3
STN
FWN
REVN

STARTCOMB
BLOCK STDIR
START
FW
REV
STL1
FWL1
REVL1
STL2
FWL2 PROTECTION 4
REVL2 -
STL3 STDIR
FWL3 -
PROTECTION 3 REVL3 -
STN STN
FWN FWN
REVN REVN
IEC16000180-2-en.vsdx
IEC16000180 V2 EN-US

Figure 388: Example of the connection of directional start logic

The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional output signals from different
application functions and creates a common directional output signal (STDIR) to be connected
to the Trip function (SMPPTRC). Protection functions connect their directional data via the
STARTCOMB function to SMAGAPC and then to the SMPPTRC, or directly to SMAGAPC and then
to the SMPPTRC.

The trip function (SMPPTRC) splits up the directional data as general output data for START,
STL1, STL2, STL3, STN, FW and REV.

All start and directional outputs are mapped to the logical node data model of the trip
function and provided via the IEC 61850 attributes dirGeneral, DIRL1, DIRL2, DIRL3 and DIRN.

Line distance protection REL670 639

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

17.1.2.6 Blocking of the function block M14828-21 v4

Total block of the trip function is done by activating the input BLOCK and can be used to
disable the outputs of the trip logic in the event of internal failures. Block of lock-out output is
achieved by activating the input BLKLKOUT.

17.1.3 Setting guidelines M12274-3 v9

The parameters for tripping logic SMPPTRC are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

Operation: Sets the mode of operation. Off switches the tripping off. The normal selection is
On.

Program: Sets the required tripping scheme. Normally 3 phase or 1ph/3ph is used.

TripLockout: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Off only activates the closing circuit lock-out
output. On activates the closing circuit lock-out output and latches the TRIP related outputs.
The normal selection is Off.

AutoLock: Sets the scheme for lock-out. Off only activates lock-out through the input
SETLKOUT. On additionally allows lock-out activation via the trip inputs. The normal selection
is Off.

tTripMin: Sets the required minimum duration of the trip pulse. It should be set to ensure that
the circuit breaker is opened correctly. The normal setting is 0.150s.

tWaitForPHS: Sets a duration during which external phase selection must operate in order to
get a single phase trip, after any of the inputs 1PTRZ or 1PTREF has been activated. If no phase
selection has been achieved, a three-phase trip will be issued after this time has elapsed.

tEvolvingFault: Secures two- or three-pole tripping depending on Program selection during

evolving faults.

17.2 Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC IP15121-1 v4

17.2.1 Identification
SEMOD167882-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC - -

17.2.2 Application M15321-3 v13

The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to route trip signals and other logical output
signals to different output contacts on the IED.

The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these outputs can be connected to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs for settable pulse or
steady output.

640 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

17.2.3 Setting guidelines M15291-3 v5

Operation: Operation of function On/Off.

PulseTime: Defines the pulse time when in Pulsed mode. When used for direct tripping of
circuit breaker(s) the pulse time delay shall be set to approximately 0.150 seconds in order to
obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

OnDelay: Used to prevent output signals to be given for spurious inputs. Normally set to 0 or a
low value.

OffDelay: Defines a delay of the reset of the outputs after the activation conditions no longer
are fulfilled. It is only used in Steady mode. When used for direct tripping of circuit breaker(s)
the off delay time shall be set to at least 0.150 seconds in order to obtain a satisfactory
minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit breaker trip coils.

ModeOutputx: Defines if output signal OUTPUTx (where x=1-3) is Steady or Pulsed.

17.3 Logic for group alarm ALMCALH GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

17.3.1 Identification GUID-64EA392C-950F-486C-8D96-6E7736B592BF v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group alarm ALMCALH - -

17.3.2 Application GUID-70B268A9-B248-422D-9896-89FECFF80B75 v1

Group alarm logic function ALMCALH is used to route alarm signals to different LEDs and/or
output contacts on the IED.

ALMCALH output signal and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the alarm signal to
physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

17.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0BDD898A-360B-4443-A5CF-7619C80A17F4 v2

Operation: On or Off

17.4 Logic for group alarm WRNCALH

17.4.1 Identification GUID-3EBD3D5B-F506-4557-88D7-DFC0BD21C690 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group warning WRNCALH - -

17.4.1.1 Application GUID-FC0DBB7B-FF86-44BF-83D6-DDF120A176DE v1

Group warning logic function WRNCALH is used to route warning signals to LEDs and/or
output contacts on the IED.

Line distance protection REL670 641

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

WRNCALH output signal WARNING and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the
warning signal to physical tripping outputs according to the specific application needs.

17.4.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-B08F2636-33DA-4937-92EB-1A8AC0909AB4 v2

OperationOn or Off

17.5 Logic for group indication INDCALH

17.5.1 Identification GUID-3B5D4371-420D-4249-B6A4-5A168920D635 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logic for group indication INDCALH - -

17.5.1.1 Application GUID-9BAD30FB-4B75-4E14-82A8-6A59B09FA6EA v1

Group indication logic function INDCALH is used to route indication signals to different LEDs
and/or output contacts on the IED.

INDCALH output signal IND and the physical outputs allows the user to adapt the indication
signal to physical outputs according to the specific application needs.

17.5.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-7E776D39-1A42-4F90-BF50-9B38F494A01E v2

Operation: On or Off

17.6 Configurable logic blocks IP11009-1 v4

The configurable logic blocks are available in two categories:

• Configurable logic blocks that do not propagate the time stamp and the quality of signals.
They do not have the suffix QT at the end of their function block name, for example,
SRMEMORY. These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension logic package
with the same number of instances.
• Configurable logic blocks that propagate the time stamp and the quality of signals. They
have the suffix QT at the end of their function block name, for example, SRMEMORYQT.

17.6.1 Application GUID-F5D6F065-441B-4296-AC56-F4DC1F5487E3 v3

A set of standard logic blocks, like AND, OR etc, and timers are available for adapting the IED
configuration to the specific application needs. Additional logic blocks that, beside the normal
logical function, have the capability to propagate timestamp and quality are also available.
Those blocks have a designation including the letters QT, like ANDQT, ORQT etc.

17.6.2 Setting guidelines GUID-E6BD982D-9E47-4CC2-9666-6E5CABA414C0 v4

There are no settings for AND gates, OR gates, inverters or XOR gates as well as, for ANDQT
gates, ORQT gates or XORQT gates.

642 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

For normal On/Off delay and pulse timers the time delays and pulse lengths are set from the
local HMI or via the PST tool.

Both timers in the same logic block (the one delayed on pick-up and the one delayed on drop-
out) always have a common setting value.

For controllable gates, settable timers and SR flip-flops with memory, the setting parameters
are accessible via the local HMI or via the PST tool.

17.6.2.1 Configuration GUID-D93E383C-1655-46A3-A540-657141F77CF0 v4

Logic is configured using the ACT configuration tool in PCM600.

Execution of functions as defined by the configurable logic blocks runs according to a fixed
sequence with different cycle times.

For each cycle time, the function block is given an serial execution number. This is shown when
using the ACT configuration tool with the designation of the function block and the cycle time,
see example below.

IEC09000695_2_en.vsd
IEC09000695 V2 EN-US

Figure 389: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function

IEC09000310-2-en.vsd
IEC09000310 V2 EN-US

Figure 390: Example designation, serial execution number and cycle time for logic
function that also propagates timestamp and quality of input signals
The execution of different function blocks within the same cycle is determined by the order of
their serial execution numbers. Always remember this when connecting two or more logical
function blocks in series.

Line distance protection REL670 643

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

Always be careful when connecting function blocks with a fast cycle time to
function blocks with a slow cycle time.
Remember to design the logic circuits carefully and always check the execution
sequence for different functions. In other cases, additional time delays must be
introduced into the logic schemes to prevent errors, for example, race between
functions.

17.7 Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN IP15080-1 v2

17.7.1 Identification
SEMOD167904-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fixed signals FXDSIGN - -

17.7.2 Application M15322-3 v15

The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed) signals that can be used in the
configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a
certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string types of
signals are available.

One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.

Example for use of GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN

The Restricted earth fault function (REFPDIF) can be used both for auto-transformers and
normal transformers.

When used for auto-transformers, information from both windings parts, together with the
neutral point current, needs to be available to the function. This means that three inputs are
needed.

REFPDIF
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

IEC09000619_3_en.vsd
IEC09000619 V3 EN-US

Figure 391: REFPDIF function inputs for autotransformer application

For normal transformers only one winding and the neutral point is available. This means that
only two inputs are used. Since all group connections are mandatory to be connected, the third
input needs to be connected to something, which is the GRP_OFF signal in FXDSIGN function
block.

644 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

REFPDIF
I3PW1CT1
I3PW2CT1
I3P

FXDSIGN
GRP_OFF

IEC09000620_3_en.vsd
IEC09000620 V3 EN-US

Figure 392: REFPDIF function inputs for normal transformer application

17.8 Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I SEMOD175715-1 v1

17.8.1 Identification
SEMOD175721-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean 16 to integer conversion B16I - -

17.8.2 Application SEMOD175832-4 v4

Boolean 16 to integer conversion function B16I is used to transform a set of 16 binary (logical)
signals into an integer. It can be used – for example, to connect logical output signals from a
function (like distance protection) to integer inputs from another function (like line differential
protection). B16I does not have a logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (B16I) will transfer a combination of up to 16

binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the
table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum
of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values
of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are
activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output
OUT. B16I function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input
is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block B16I for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block B16I.

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 645

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the B16I function block.

17.9 Boolean to integer conversion with logical node

representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC SEMOD175753-1 v4

17.9.1 Identification
SEMOD175757-2 v5

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Boolean to integer conversion with BTIGAPC - -
logical node representation, 16 bit

17.9.2 Application SEMOD175849-4 v6

Boolean to integer conversion with logical node representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to
transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an integer. BTIGAPC has a logical node
mapping in IEC 61850.

The BTIGAPC function will transfer a combination of up to 16 binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to
an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the table below from 0 to 32768. This
follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum of all the values on the activated
INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values of all the inputs INx that are
activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are activated that is = Boolean 1 it
corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output OUT. BTIGAPC function is
designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input is activated, it will
freeze the output at the last value.

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block BTIGAPC for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block BTIGAPC.

646 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the BTIGAPC function block.

17.10 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16 SEMOD158367-1 v2

17.10.1 Identification
SEMOD167941-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion IB16 - -

17.10.2 Application SEMOD158499-5 v4

Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to transform an integer into a set of 16
binary (logical) signals. It can be used – for example, to connect integer output signals from
one function to binary (logical) inputs to another function. IB16 function does not have a
logical node mapping.

The Boolean 16 to integer conversion function (IB16) will transfer a combination of up to 16

binary inputs INx where 1≤x≤16 to an integer. Each INx represents a value according to the
table below from 0 to 32768. This follows the general formula: INx = 2x-1 where 1≤x≤16. The sum
of all the values on the activated INx will be available on the output OUT as a sum of the values
of all the inputs INx that are activated. OUT is an integer. When all INx where 1≤x≤16 are
activated that is = Boolean 1 it corresponds to that integer 65535 is available on the output
OUT. IB16 function is designed for receiving up to 16 booleans input locally. If the BLOCK input
is activated, it will freeze the output at the last value.

Line distance protection REL670 647

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

Values of each of the different OUTx from function block IB16 for 1≤x≤16.

The sum of the value on each INx corresponds to the integer presented on the output OUT on
the function block IB16.

Name of input Type Default Description Value when Value when

activated deactivated
IN1 BOOLEAN 0 Input 1 1 0
IN2 BOOLEAN 0 Input 2 2 0
IN3 BOOLEAN 0 Input 3 4 0
IN4 BOOLEAN 0 Input 4 8 0
IN5 BOOLEAN 0 Input 5 16 0
IN6 BOOLEAN 0 Input 6 32 0
IN7 BOOLEAN 0 Input 7 64 0
IN8 BOOLEAN 0 Input 8 128 0
IN9 BOOLEAN 0 Input 9 256 0
IN10 BOOLEAN 0 Input 10 512 0
IN11 BOOLEAN 0 Input 11 1024 0
IN12 BOOLEAN 0 Input 12 2048 0
IN13 BOOLEAN 0 Input 13 4096 0
IN14 BOOLEAN 0 Input 14 8192 0
IN15 BOOLEAN 0 Input 15 16384 0
IN16 BOOLEAN 0 Input 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all INx (where 1≤x≤16) are
active that is=1; is 65535. 65535 is the highest boolean value that can be converted to an
integer by the IB16 function block.

17.11 Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node

representation ITBGAPC SEMOD158419-1 v3

17.11.1 Identification
SEMOD167944-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Integer to boolean 16 conversion ITBGAPC - -
with logic node representation

17.11.2 Application SEMOD158512-5 v7

Integer to boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) is used to
transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean signals. ITBGAPC function can receive an integer
from a station computer – for example, over IEC 61850–8–1. This function is very useful when
the user wants to generate logical commands (for selector switches or voltage controllers) by
inputting an integer number. ITBGAPC function has a logical node mapping in IEC 61850.

648 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

The Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation function (ITBGAPC) will
transfer an integer with a value between 0 to 65535 communicated via IEC 61850 and
connected to the ITBGAPC function block to a combination of activated outputs OUTx where
1≤x≤16.

The values of the different OUTx are according to the Table 54.

If the BLOCK input is activated, it freezes the logical outputs at the last value.

Table 54: Output signals

Name of OUTx Type Description Value when Value when
activated deactivated
OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 1 0
OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 2 0
OUT3 BOOLEAN Output 3 4 0
OUT4 BOOLEAN Output 4 8 0
OUT5 BOOLEAN Output 5 16 0
OUT6 BOOLEAN Output 6 32 0
OUT7 BOOLEAN Output 7 64 0
OUT8 BOOLEAN Output 8 128 0
OUT9 BOOLEAN Output 9 256 0
OUT10 BOOLEAN Output 10 512 0
OUT11 BOOLEAN Output 11 1024 0
OUT12 BOOLEAN Output 12 2048 0
OUT13 BOOLEAN Output 13 4096 0
OUT14 BOOLEAN Output 14 8192 0
OUT15 BOOLEAN Output 15 16384 0
OUT16 BOOLEAN Output 16 32768 0

The sum of the numbers in column “Value when activated” when all OUTx (1≤x≤16) are active
equals 65535. This is the highest integer that can be converted by the ITBGAPC function block.

17.12 Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and

overflow supervision TEIGAPC

17.12.1 Identification GUID-1913E066-37D1-4689-9178-5B3C8B029815 v3

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identificatio identificatio number
n n
Elapsed time integrator TEIGAPC - -

17.12.2 Application GUID-B4B47167-C8DE-4496-AEF1-5F0FD1768A87 v2

The function TEIGAPC is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for different
purposes internally in the IED. An application example is the integration of elapsed time during
the measurement of neutral point voltage or neutral current at earth-fault conditions.

Line distance protection REL670 649

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow indication
is fixed to 999999.9 seconds.

17.12.3 Setting guidelines GUID-2911D624-87D5-4427-BB2F-E0D1072394FA v3

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in seconds. The achievable
resolution of the settings depends on the level of the values defined.

A resolution of 10 ms can be achieved when the settings are defined within the range

1.00 second ≤ tAlarm ≤ 99 999.99 seconds

1.00 second ≤ tWarning ≤ 99 999.99 seconds.

If the values are above this range, the resolution becomes lower due to the 32 bit float
representation

99 999.99 seconds < tAlarm ≤ 999 999.0 seconds

99 999.99 seconds < tWarning ≤ 999 999.0 seconds

Note that tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is no
check if tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 999999.9 seconds.

17.13 Comparator for integer inputs - INTCOMP

17.13.1 Identification GUID-5992B0F2-FC1B-4838-9BAB-2D2542BB264D v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparison of integer values INTCOMP Int<=>

17.13.2 Application GUID-4C6D730D-BB1C-45F1-A719-1267234BF1B9 v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of integer values in the system relative
to each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics.

17.13.3 Setting guidelines GUID-ADA3E806-BEF1-4D15-B270-207386A0AEE4 v2

For proper operation of comparison the set value should be set within the range of ± 2 ×109.

Setting procedure on the IED:

EnaAbs: This setting is used to select the comparison type between signed and absolute
values.

• Absolute: Comparison is performed on absolute values of input and reference values

• Signed: Comparison is performed on signed values of input and reference values.

650 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

RefSource: This setting is used to select the reference source between input and setting for
comparison.

• Input REF: The function will take reference value from input REF
• Set Value: The function will take reference value from setting SetValue

SetValue: This setting is used to set the reference value for comparison when setting
RefSource is selected as SetValue.

17.13.4 Setting example GUID-13302FD6-1585-42FE-BD6D-44F231982C59 v2

For absolute comparison between inputs:

Set the EnaAbs = Absolute

Set the RefSource = Input REF

Similarly for Signed comparison between inputs

Set the EnaAbs = Signed

Set the RefSource =Input REF

For absolute comparison between input and setting

Set the EnaAbs = Absolute

Set the RefSource = Set Value

SetValue shall be set between -2000000000 to 2000000000

Similarly for signed comparison between input and setting

Set the EnaAbs = Signed

Set the RefSource = Set Value

SetValue shall be set between -2000000000 to 2000000000

17.14 Comparator for real inputs - REALCOMP

17.14.1 Identification GUID-0D68E846-5A15-4C2C-91A2-F81A74034E81 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP Real<=>

17.14.2 Application GUID-5F7B1683-9799-4D27-B333-B184F8861A5B v1

The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real values in the system relative to
each other or to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for monitoring,
supervision, interlocking and other logics.

Line distance protection REL670 651

Application manual
Section 17 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Logic

17.14.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DE69FF5B-7D34-4A30-9060-214E98BFF798 v2

Setting procedure on the IED:

EnaAbs: This setting is used to select the comparison type between signed and absolute
values.

• Absolute: Comparison is performed with absolute values of input and reference.

• Signed: Comparison is performed with signed values of input and reference.

RefSource: This setting is used to select the reference source between input and setting for
comparison.

• Input REF: The function will take reference value from input REF
• Set Value: The function will take reference value from setting SetValue

SetValue: This setting is used to set the reference value for comparison when setting
RefSource is selected as Set Value. If this setting value is less than 0.2% of the set unit then the
output INLOW will never pickup.

RefPrefix: This setting is used to set the unit of the reference value for comparison when
setting RefSource is selected as SetValue. It has 5 unit selections and they are Milli, Unity, Kilo,
Mega and Giga.

EqualBandHigh: This setting is used to set the equal condition high band limit in % of
reference value. This high band limit will act as reset limit for INHIGH output when INHIGH.

EqualBandLow: This setting is used to set the equal condition low band limit in % of reference
value. This low band limit will act as reset limit for INLOW output when INLOW.

17.14.4 Setting example GUID-E7070CF6-B44B-4799-BE18-5C75B9FE2A87 v2

Let us consider a comparison is to be done between current magnitudes in the range of 90 to

110 with nominal rating is 100 and the order is kA.

For the above condition the comparator can be designed with settings as follows,

EnaAbs = Absolute

RefSource = Set Value

SetValue = 100

RefPrefix = Kilo

EqualBandHigh = 5.0 % of reference value

EqualBandLow = 5.0 % of reference value

Operation

The function will set the outputs for the following conditions,

INEQUAL will set when the INPUT is between the ranges of 95 to 105 kA.

INHIGH will set when the INPUT crosses above 105 kA.

INLOW will set when the INPUT crosses below 95 kA.

652 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 17
Logic

If the comparison should be done between two current magnitudes then those current signals
need to be connected to function inputs, INPUT and REF. Then the settings should be adjusted
as below,

EnaAbs = Absolute

RefSource = Input REF

EqualBandHigh = 5.0 % of reference value

EqualBandLow = 5.0 % of reference value.

Line distance protection REL670 653

Application manual
654
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Section 18 Monitoring

18.1 Measurement GUID-9D2D47A0-FE62-4FE3-82EE-034BED82682A v1

18.1.1 Identification
SEMOD56123-2 v8

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Power system measurements CVMMXN -
P, Q, S, I, U, f

SYMBOL-RR V1 EN-US

Phase current measurement CMMXU -

SYMBOL-SS V1 EN-US

Phase-phase voltage measurement VMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

Current sequence component CMSQI -

measurement
I1, I2, I0

SYMBOL-VV V1 EN-US

Voltage sequence component VMSQI -

measurement
U1, U2, U0

SYMBOL-TT V1 EN-US

Phase-neutral voltage measurement VNMMXU -

SYMBOL-UU V1 EN-US

18.1.2 Application SEMOD54488-4 v12

Measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting
to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM600 or to station level for example, via IEC 61850.
The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power, reactive power,
currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient production, transmission
and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the system operator fast and easy overview
of the present status of the power system. Additionally, it can be used during testing and
commissioning of protection and control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and
connection of instrument transformers (CTs and VTs). During normal service by periodic
comparison of the measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper
operation of the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally, it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection function.

Line distance protection REL670 655

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

The available measured values from an IED are depending on the actual
hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits that is, low-low limit, low limit,
high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported, that is, the
measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact of noise in
the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level when
change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all changes since the
last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value can also be based on
periodic reporting.

Main menu/Measurement/Monitoring/Service values/CVMMXN

The measurement function, CVMMXN, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power

• PF: power factor
• U: phase-to-phase voltage amplitude
• I: phase current amplitude
• F: power system frequency

,
The measuring functions CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU provide physical quantities:

• I: phase currents (amplitude and angle) (CMMXU)

• U: voltages (phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) (VMMXU,
VNMMXU)

The CVMMXN function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamental

frequency phasors (DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. The measured
power quantities are available either, as instantaneously calculated quantities or, averaged
values over a period of time (low pass filtered) depending on the selected settings.

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of
rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actual hardware, (TRM)
and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

The measuring functions CMSQI and VMSQI provide sequence component quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, amplitude and angle)

• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, amplitude and angle).

18.1.3 Zero clamping GUID-8DABC3F5-6615-493C-B839-A5C557A2FAE8 v5

Measuring functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU have no interconnections

regarding any settings or parameters.

Zero clampings are also handled entirely by ZeroDb separately for each function's every output
signal. For example, zero clamping of U12 is handled by UL12ZeroDb in VMMXU, zero clamping
of I1 is handled by IL1ZeroDb in CMMXU, and so on.

656 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Example of CVMMXN operation

Outputs seen on the local HMI under Main menu/Measurements/Monitoring/

Servicevalues(P_Q)/CVMMXN(P_Q):

S Apparent three-phase power

P Active three-phase power
Q Reactive three-phase power
PF Power factor
ILAG I lagging U
ILEAD I leading U
U System mean voltage, calculated according to selected mode
I System mean current, calculated according to selected mode
F Frequency

Relevant settings and their values on the local HMI under Main menu/Settings/IED settings/
Monitoring/Servicevalues(P_Q)/CVMMXN(P_Q):

• When system voltage falls below UGenZeroDB, values for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG, ILEAD, U and F
are forced to zero.
• When system current falls below IGenZeroDB, values for S, P, Q, PF, ILAG, ILEAD, U and F
are forced to zero.
• When the value of a single signal falls below its set deadband, the value is forced to zero.
For example, if the apparent three-phase power falls below SZeroDb, the value for S is
forced to zero.

18.1.4 Setting guidelines SEMOD54481-165 v14

The available setting parameters of the measurement function CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU,
CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU are depending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic
configuration made in PCM600.

The parameters for the Measurement functions CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI,
VNMMXU are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: Off/On. Every function instance (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI,
VNMMXU) can be taken in operation (On) or out of operation (Off).

The following general settings can be set for the Measurement function (CVMMXN).

PowAmpFact: Amplitude factor to scale power calculations.

PowAngComp: Angle compensation for phase shift between measured I & U.

Mode: Selection of measured current and voltage. There are 9 different ways of calculating
monitored three-phase values depending on the available VT inputs connected to the IED. See
parameter group setting table.

k: Low pass filter coefficient for power measurement, U and I.

UGenZeroDb: Minimum level of voltage in % of UBase, used as indication of zero voltage (zero
point clamping). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero.

Line distance protection REL670 657

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

IGenZeroDb: Minimum level of current in % of IBase, used as indication of zero current (zero
point clamping). If measured value is below IGenZeroDb calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero.

UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of Ur, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y

is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is

equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase current measurement (CMMXU).

IAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate current measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y

is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

IAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ir, where Y is

equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for the Phase-phase voltage measurement
(VMMXU).

UAmpCompY: Amplitude compensation to calibrate voltage measurements at Y% of Ur, where

Y is equal to 5, 30 or 100.

UAngCompY: Angle compensation to calibrate angle measurements at Y% of Ur, where Y is

equal to 5, 30 or 100.

The following general settings can be set for all monitored quantities included in the
functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI, VNMMXU) X in setting names below
equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL1-3UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0, U1, U2 or 3U0.

Xmin: Minimum value for analog signal X set directly in applicable measuring unit. This forms
the minimum limit of the range.

Xmax: Maximum value for analog signal X. This forms the maximum limit of the range.

XZeroDb: Zero point clamping. A signal value less than XZeroDb is forced to zero.

Observe the related zero point clamping settings in Setting group N for CVMMXN
(UGenZeroDb and IGenZeroDb). If measured value is below UGenZeroDb and/or IGenZeroDb
calculated S, P, Q and PF will be zero and these settings will override XZeroDb.

XRepTyp: Reporting type. Cyclic (Cyclic), amplitude deadband (Dead band), integral deadband
(Int deadband) or Deadband and xx se cyclic (xx: 5 sec, 30 sec, 1 min). The reporting interval is
controlled by the parameter XDbRepInt.

XDbRepInt: This setting handles all the reporting types. If setting is deadband in XRepTyp,
XDbRepInt defines the deadband in m% of the measuring range. For cyclic reporting type
(XRepTyp : cyclic), the setting value reporting interval is in seconds. Amplitude deadband is the
setting value in m% of measuring range. Integral deadband setting is the integral area, that is,
measured value in m% of measuring range multiplied by the time between two measured
values.

XHiHiLim: High-high limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage
measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XHiLim: High limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage measurement and
IBase for current measurement).

658 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

XLowLim: Low limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage measurement
and IBase for current measurement).

XLowLowLim: Low-low limit. Set as % of YBase (Y is SBase for S,P,Q UBase for Voltage
measurement and IBase for current measurement).

XLimHyst: Hysteresis value in % of range and is common for all limits.

All phase angles are presented in relation to defined reference channel. The parameter
PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see Section “Analog inputs”.

Calibration curves
It is possible to calibrate the functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU) to get class
0.5 presentations of currents, voltages and powers. This is accomplished by amplitude and
angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation curve
will have the characteristic for amplitude and angle compensation of currents as shown in
figure 393 (example). The first phase will be used as reference channel and compared with the
curve for calculation of factors. The factors will then be used for all related channels.

IEC05000652 V2 EN-US

Figure 393: Calibration curves

18.1.4.1 Setting examples SEMOD54481-4 v5

Three setting examples, in connection to Measurement function (CVMMXN), are provided:

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a OHL

• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application on the secondary side of a transformer
• Measurement function (CVMMXN) application for a generator

For each of them detail explanation and final list of selected setting parameters values will be
provided.

Line distance protection REL670 659

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actual hardware
(TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

Measurement function application for a 400kV OHL SEMOD54481-12 v11

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 394:

400kV Busbar

1000/1 A
400 0 ,1 IED
/ kV
3 3
P Q

400kV OHL
IEC09000039-3-en.vsdx
IEC09000039-1-EN V3 EN-US

Figure 394: Single line diagram for 400kV OHL application

In order to monitor, supervise and calibrate the active and reactive power as indicated in
figure 394 it is necessary to do the following:

1. Set correctly CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see
Section “Setting of the phase reference channel”) using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to three-phase CT and VT inputs
3. Set under General settings parameters for the Measurement function:
• general settings as shown in table 55.
• level supervision of active power as shown in table 56.
• calibration parameters as shown in table 57.

Table 55: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale 1.000 It can be used during commissioning to
power calculations achieve higher measurement accuracy.
Typically no scaling is required
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 It can be used during commissioning to
shift between measured I & U achieve higher measurement accuracy.
Typically no angle compensation is required.
As well here required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards protected object (as
per IED internal default direction)
Mode Selection of measured current L1, L2, L3 All three phase-to-earth VT inputs are
and voltage available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is required
power measurement, U and I
Table continues on next page

660 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected Comments

value
UGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%. Voltage
Ubase below 25% will force S, P and Q to zero.
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%. Current
Ibase below 3% will force S, P and Q to zero.
UBase (set in Base setting for voltage level 400.00 Set rated OHL phase-to-phase voltage
Global base) in kV
IBase (set in Base setting for current level 1000 Set rated primary CT current used for OHL
Global base) in A
SBase (set in Base Setting for power base in 1000 Set based on rated Power
Global base) MVA

Table 56: Settings parameters for level supervision

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
PMin Minimum value -100 Minimum expected load
PMax Minimum value 100 Maximum expected load
PZeroDb Zero point clamping in 0.001% 3000 Set zero point clamping to 60 MW that is, 3%
of range of 200 MW
PRepTyp Reporting type db Select amplitude deadband supervision
PDbRepInt Cycl: Report interval (s), Db: In 2000 Set ±Δdb=40 MW that is, 2% (larger changes
0.001% of range, Int Db: In than 40 MW will be reported)
0.001%s
PHiHiLim High High limit (physical 60 High alarm limit that is, extreme overload
value), % of SBase alarm, hence it will be 415 MW.
PHiLim High limit (physical value), in % 50 High warning limit that is, overload warning,
of SBase hence it will be 371 MW.
PLowLim Low limit (physical value), in % -50 Low warning limit -500 MW
of SBase
PLowLowlLim Low Low limit (physical value), -60 Low alarm limit -600 MW
in % of SBase
PLimHyst Hysteresis value in % of range 1 Set ±Δ Hysteresis 20 MW that is, 1% of range
(common for all limits) (2000 MW)

Table 57: Settings for calibration parameters

Setting Short Description Selected Comments
value
IAmpComp5 Amplitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 Amplitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 Amplitude factor to calibrate 0.00
current at 100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 Amplitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 Amplitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 Amplitude factor to calibrate 0.00
voltage at 100% of Ur
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 661

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

Setting Short Description Selected Comments

value
IAngComp5 Angle calibration for current at 0.00
5% of Ir
IAngComp30 Angle pre-calibration for 0.00
current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 Angle pre-calibration for 0.00
current at 100% of Ir

Measurement function application for a power transformer SEMOD54481-61 v9

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 395.

110kV Busbar

200/1

31,5 MVA
110/36,75/(10,5) kV IED
Yy0(d5)

P Q

500/5
UL1L2
35 / 0,1kV

35kV Busbar IEC09000040-1-en.vsd

IEC09000040-1-EN V1 EN-US

Figure 395: Single line diagram for transformer application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 395, it is necessary to
do the following:

662 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

1. Set correctly all CT and VT and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see Section
“Setting of the phase reference channel”) data using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to LV side CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the following
table 58:

Table 58: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
power calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 180.0 Typically no angle compensation is required.
shift between measured I & U However here the required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards busbar (Not per IED
internal default direction). Therefore angle
compensation have to be used in order to get
measurements in aliment with the required
direction.
Mode Selection of measured current L1L2 Only UL1L2 phase-to-phase voltage is
and voltage available
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is required
power measurement, U and I
UGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25 Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Ubase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
Ibase
UBase (set in Base setting for voltage level 35.00 Set LV side rated phase-to-phase voltage
Global base) in kV
IBase (set in Base setting for current level 495 Set transformer LV winding rated current
Global base) in A
SBase (set in Base setting for power in MVA 31.5 Set based on rated power
Global base)

Measurement function application for a generator SEMOD54481-110 v8

Single line diagram for this application is given in figure 396.

Line distance protection REL670 663

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

220kV Busbar

300/1

100 MVA
242/15,65 kV
Yd5 IED

15 / 0,1kV
UL1L2 , UL2L3

P Q

100MVA G
15,65kV

4000/5
IEC09000041-1-en.vsd
IEC09000041-1-EN V1 EN-US

Figure 396: Single line diagram for generator application

In order to measure the active and reactive power as indicated in figure 396, it is necessary to
do the following:

1. Set correctly all CT and VT data and phase angle reference channel PhaseAngleRef (see
Section “Setting of the phase reference channel”) using PCM600 for analog input channels
2. Connect, in PCM600, measurement function to the generator CT & VT inputs
3. Set the setting parameters for relevant Measurement function as shown in the following
table:

664 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Table 59: General settings parameters for the Measurement function

Setting Short description Selected Comment
value
Operation Operation Off/On On Function must be On
PowAmpFact Amplitude factor to scale 1.000 Typically no scaling is required
power calculations
PowAngComp Angle compensation for phase 0.0 Typically no angle compensation is required.
shift between measured I & U As well here required direction of P & Q
measurement is towards protected object (as
per IED internal default direction)
Mode Selection of measured current Arone Generator VTs are connected between phases
and voltage (V-connected)
k Low pass filter coefficient for 0.00 Typically no additional filtering is required
power measurement, U and I
UGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 25% Set minimum voltage level to 25%
Ubase
IGenZeroDb Zero point clamping in % of 3 Set minimum current level to 3%
Ibase
UBase (set in Base setting for voltage level 15,65 Set generator rated phase-to-phase voltage
Global base) in kV
IBase (set in Base setting for current level 3690 Set generator rated current
Global base) in A

18.2 Gas medium supervision SSIMG GUID-358AD8F8-AE06-4AEA-9969-46E5299D5B4B v3

18.2.1 Identification
GUID-AD96C26E-C3E5-4B21-9ED6-12E540954AC3 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation gas monitoring function SSIMG - 63

18.2.2 Application GUID-A840E38C-CC42-4995-A569-A6092DDB81B2 v5

Gas medium supervision (SSIMG) is used for monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Proper
arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker is very important. When the
pressure becomes too low compared to the required value, the circuit breaker operation shall
be blocked to minimize the risk of internal failure. Binary information based on the gas
pressure in the circuit breaker is used as an input signal to the function. The function
generates alarms based on the received information.

18.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-DF6BEC98-F806-41CE-8C29-BEE9C88FC1FD v3

The parameters for Gas medium supervision SSIMG can be set via local HMI or Protection and
Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: This is used to disable/enable the operation of gas medium supervision i.e. Off/On.

PresAlmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a pressure alarm condition in the circuit breaker.

PresLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a pressure lockout condition in the circuit breaker.

Line distance protection REL670 665

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

TempAlarmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature alarm condition in the circuit
breaker.

TempLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature lockout condition in the circuit
breaker.

tPressureAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a pressure alarm indication, given in s.

tPressureLO: This is used to set the time delay for a pressure lockout indication, given in s.

tTempAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature alarm indication, given in s.

tTempLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature lockout indication, given in
s.

tResetPressAlm: This is used for the pressure alarm indication to reset after a set time delay in
s.

tResetPressLO: This is used for the pressure lockout indication to reset after a set time delay
in s.

tResetTempLO: This is used for the temperature lockout indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetTempAlm: This is used for the temperature alarm indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

18.3 Liquid medium supervision SSIML GUID-37669E94-4830-4C96-8A67-09600F847F23 v3

18.3.1 Identification
GUID-4CE96EF6-42C6-4F2E-A190-D288ABF766F6 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Insulation liquid monitoring function SSIML - 71

18.3.2 Application GUID-140AA10C-4E93-4C23-AD57-895FADB0DB29 v7

Liquid medium supervision (SSIML) is used for monitoring the oil insulated device condition.
For example, transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. When the level becomes too low
compared to the required value, the operation is blocked to minimize the risk of internal
failures. Binary information based on the oil level in the oil insulated devices are used as input
signals to the function. In addition, the function generates alarms based on the received
information.

18.3.3 Setting guidelines GUID-0C8E498B-2A65-44ED-91D6-53EC72F49222 v4

The parameters for Liquid medium supervision SSIML can be set via local HMI or Protection
and Control Manager PCM600.

Operation: This is used to disable/enable the operation of liquid medium supervision i.e.
Off/On.

LevelAlmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a level alarm condition in the oil insulated
device.

666 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

LevelLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a level lockout condition in the oil insulated
device.

TempAlarmLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature alarm condition in the oil
insulated device.

TempLOLimit: This is used to set the limit for a temperature lockout condition in the oil
insulated device.

tLevelAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a level alarm indication, given in s.

tLevelLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a level lockout indication, given in s.

tTempAlarm: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature alarm indication, given in s.

tTempLockOut: This is used to set the time delay for a temperature lockout indication, given in
s.

tResetLevelAlm: This is used for the level alarm indication to reset after a set time delay in s.

tResetLevelLO: This is used for the level lockout indication to reset after a set time delay in s.

tResetTempLO: This is used for the temperature lockout indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

tResetTempAlm: This is used for the temperature alarm indication to reset after a set time
delay in s.

18.4 Breaker monitoring SSCBR

18.4.1 Identification GUID-0FC081B2-0BC8-4EB8-9529-B941E51F18EE v7

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Breaker monitoring SSCBR - -

18.4.2 Application GUID-45572680-3A39-4B3C-8639-4E4C5A95AA26 v10

The circuit breaker maintenance is usually based on regular time intervals or the number of
operations performed. This has some disadvantages because there could be a number of
abnormal operations or few operations with high-level currents within the predetermined
maintenance interval. Hence, condition-based maintenance scheduling is an optimum solution
in assessing the condition of circuit breakers.

Circuit breaker contact travel time

Auxiliary contacts provide information about the mechanical operation, opening time and
closing time of a breaker. Detecting an excessive traveling time is essential to indicate the
need for maintenance of the circuit breaker mechanism. The excessive travel time can be due
to problems in the driving mechanism or failures of the contacts.

Circuit breaker status

Monitoring the breaker status ensures proper functioning of the features within the
protection relay such as breaker control, breaker failure and autoreclosing. The breaker status
is monitored using breaker auxiliary contacts. The breaker status is indicated by the binary
outputs. These signals indicate whether the circuit breaker is in an open, closed or error state.

Line distance protection REL670 667

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

Remaining life of circuit breaker

Every time the breaker operates, the circuit breaker life reduces due to wear. The wear in a
breaker depends on the interrupted current. For breaker maintenance or replacement at the
right time, the remaining life of the breaker must be estimated. The remaining life of a breaker
can be estimated using the maintenance curve provided by the circuit breaker manufacturer.

Circuit breaker manufacturers provide the number of make-break operations possible at

various interrupted currents. An example is shown in figure 397.

100000

50000

P1
20000

10000
Number of make-break operations ( n)

5000

2000

1000

500

200

P2
100

50

20

10
0.1 0.2 0.5 1 2 5 10 20 50 100

Interrupted current (kA)

IEC12000623_1_en.vsd
IEC12000623 V1 EN-US

Figure 397: An example for estimating the remaining life of a circuit breaker
Calculation for estimating the remaining life

The graph shows that there are 10000 possible operations at the rated operating current and
900 operations at 10 kA and 50 operations at rated fault current. Therefore, if the interrupted
current is 10 kA, one operation is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations at the rated current.
It is assumed that prior to tripping, the remaining life of a breaker is 10000 operations.
Remaining life calculation for three different interrupted current conditions is explained below.

• Breaker interrupts at and below the rated operating current, that is, 2 kA, the remaining
life of the CB is decreased by 1 operation and therefore, 9999 operations remaining at the
rated operating current.
• Breaker interrupts between rated operating current and rated fault current, that is, 10 kA,
one operation at 10kA is equivalent to 10000/900 = 11 operations at the rated current. The

668 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

remaining life of the CB would be (10000 – 10) = 9989 at the rated operating current after
one operation at 10 kA.
• Breaker interrupts at and above rated fault current, that is, 50 kA, one operation at 50 kA
is equivalent to 10000/50 = 200 operations at the rated operating current. The remaining
life of the CB would become (10000 – 200) = 9800 operations at the rated operating
current after one operation at 50 kA.

Accumulated energy
Monitoring the contact erosion and interrupter wear has a direct influence on the required
maintenance frequency. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately estimate the erosion of the
contacts and condition of interrupters using cumulative summation of Iy. The factor "y"
depends on the type of circuit breaker. The energy values were accumulated using the current
value and exponent factor for CB contact opening duration. When the next CB opening
operation is started, the energy is accumulated from the previous value. The accumulated
energy value can be reset to initial accumulation energy value by using the Reset accumulating
energy input, RSTIPOW.

Circuit breaker operation cycles

Routine breaker maintenance like lubricating breaker mechanism is based on the number of
operations. A suitable threshold setting helps in preventive maintenance. This can also be used
to indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing in case of an oil circuit
breaker.

Circuit breaker operation monitoring

By monitoring the activity of the number of operations, it is possible to calculate the number
of days the breaker has been inactive. Long periods of inactivity degrade the reliability for the
protection system.

Circuit breaker spring charge monitoring

For normal circuit breaker operation, the circuit breaker spring should be charged within a
specified time. Detecting a long spring charging time indicates the time for circuit breaker
maintenance. The last value of the spring charging time can be given as a service value.

Circuit breaker gas pressure indication

For proper arc extinction by the compressed gas in the circuit breaker, the pressure of the gas
must be adequate. Binary input available from the pressure sensor is based on the pressure
levels inside the arc chamber. When the pressure becomes too low compared to the required
value, the circuit breaker operation is blocked.

18.4.3 Setting guidelines GUID-AB93AD9B-E6F8-4F1A-B353-AA1008C15679 v3

The breaker monitoring function is used to monitor different parameters of the circuit
breaker. The breaker requires maintenance when the number of operations has reached a
predefined value. For proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it is also essential to monitor
the circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time, number of
operation cycles and accumulated energy during arc extinction.

Line distance protection REL670 669

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

Since there is no current measurement in SAM600-IO, evaluation of the

following parameters are not possible in the circuit breaker condition
monitoring function (SSCBR):

• Circuit breaker status

• Remaining life of the circuit breaker
• Contact erosion estimation
• Circuit breaker contact travel time

Ensure that OPENPOS, CLOSEPOS, INVDPOS, CBLIFEAL, IPOWALPH,

IPOWLOPH, TRVTOPAL and TRVTCLAL signals are not used in SAM600–IO.

18.4.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED GUID-4E895FEA-74BF-4B11-A239-0574F8FF5188 v5

The parameters for breaker monitoring (SSCBR) can be set via the local HMI or Protection and
Control Manager (PCM600).

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase), primary voltage (UBase) and primary
power (SBase) are set in Global base values for settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select a GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Operation: On or Off.

IBase: Base phase current in primary A. This current is used as reference for current settings.

OpenTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker opening travel time.

CloseTimeCorr: Correction factor for circuit breaker closing travel time.

tTrOpenAlm: Setting of alarm level for opening travel time.

tTrCloseAlm: Setting of alarm level for closing travel time.

OperAlmLevel: Alarm limit for number of mechanical operations.

OperLOLevel: Lockout limit for number of mechanical operations.

CurrExponent: Current exponent setting for energy calculation. It varies for different types of
circuit breakers. This factor ranges from 0.5 to 3.0.

AccStopCurr: RMS current setting below which calculation of energy accumulation stops. It is
given as a percentage of IBase.

ContTrCorr: Correction factor for time difference in auxiliary and main contacts' opening time.

AlmAccCurrPwr: Setting of alarm level for accumulated energy.

LOAccCurrPwr: Lockout limit setting for accumulated energy.

SpChAlmTime: Time delay for spring charging time alarm.

tDGasPresAlm: Time delay for gas pressure alarm.

tDGasPresLO: Time delay for gas pressure lockout.

DirCoef: Directional coefficient for circuit breaker life calculation.

RatedOperCurr: Rated operating current of the circuit breaker.

670 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

RatedFltCurr: Rated fault current of the circuit breaker.

OperNoRated: Number of operations possible at rated current.

OperNoFault: Number of operations possible at rated fault current.

CBLifeAlmLevel: Alarm level for circuit breaker remaining life.

AccSelCal: Selection between the method of calculation of accumulated energy.

OperTimeDelay: Time delay between change of status of trip output and start of main contact
separation.

18.5 Event function EVENT IP14590-1 v2

18.5.1 Identification
SEMOD167950-2 v2

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Event function EVENT -
S00946 V1 EN-US

18.5.2 Application M12805-6 v11

When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication, time-tagged
events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These events are
created from any available signal in the IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT).
The EVENT function block is used for LON and SPA communication.

Analog, integer and double indication values are also transferred through the EVENT function.

18.5.3 Setting guidelines IP14841-1 v1

M12811-3 v3
The input parameters for the Event function (EVENT) can be set individually via the local HMI
(Main Menu/Settings / IED Settings / Monitoring / Event Function) or via the Parameter
Setting Tool (PST).

EventMask (Ch_1 - 16) M12811-5 v3

The inputs can be set individually as:

• NoEvents
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, the EVENT function makes the reporting decision (reporting criteria for
integers have no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

LONChannelMask or SPAChannelMask M12811-15 v2

Definition of which part of the event function block that shall generate events:

Line distance protection REL670 671

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16

MinRepIntVal (1 - 16) M12811-29 v3

A time interval between cyclic events can be set individually for each input channel. This can be
set between 0 s to 3600 s in steps of 1 s. It should normally be set to 0, that is, no cyclic
communication.
M12811-34 v1

It is important to set the time interval for cyclic events in an optimized way to
minimize the load on the station bus.

18.6 Disturbance report DRPRDRE IP14584-1 v2

18.6.1 Identification
M16055-1 v9

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
Disturbance report DRPRDRE - -
Disturbance report A1RADR - A4RADR - -
Disturbance report B1RBDR - B22RBDR - -

18.6.2 Application M12152-3 v10

To get fast, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system it is very important to gather information on fault currents, voltages and
events. It is also important having a continuous event-logging to be able to monitor in an
overview perspective. These tasks are accomplished by the disturbance report function
DRPRDRE and facilitate a better understanding of the power system behavior and related
primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance. An analysis of the recorded
data provides valuable information that can be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change
of IED setting plan, improve existing equipment, and so on. This information can also be used
in a longer perspective when planning for and designing new installations, that is, a
disturbance recording could be a part of Functional Analysis (FA).

Disturbance report DRPRDRE, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all selected
analog and binary signals connected to the function blocks that is,

• Maximum 30 external analog signals,

• 10 internal derived analog signals, and
• 352 binary signals

Disturbance report function is a common name for several functions; Indications (IND), Event
recorder (ER), Event list (EL), Trip value recorder (TVR), Disturbance recorder (DR) and Fault
locator (FL).

672 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Disturbance report function is characterized by great flexibility as far as configuration,

starting conditions, recording times, and storage capacity are concerned. Thus, disturbance
report is not dependent on the operation of protective functions, and it can record
disturbances that were not discovered by protective functions for one reason or another.
Disturbance report can be used as an advanced stand-alone disturbance recorder.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED. The same applies to all events, which
are continuously saved in a ring-buffer. Local HMI can be used to get information about the
recordings, and the disturbance report files may be uploaded in the PCM600 using the
Disturbance handling tool, for report reading or further analysis (using WaveWin, that can be
found on the PCM600 installation CD). The user can also upload disturbance report files using
FTP or MMS (over 61850–8–1) clients.

If the IED is connected to a station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), the disturbance recorder (record made
and fault number) and the fault locator information are available. The same information is
obtainable if IEC 60870-5-103 is used.

18.6.3 Setting guidelines IP14874-1 v1

M12179-64 v9
The setting parameters for the Disturbance report function DRPRDRE are set via the local HMI
or PCM600.

It is possible to handle up to 40 analog and 352 binary signals, either internal signals or signals
coming from external inputs. The binary signals are identical in all functions that is,
Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value recorder (TVR) and
Event list (EL) function.

User-defined names of binary and analog input signals are set using PCM600. The analog and
binary signals appear with their user-defined names. The name is used in all related functions
(Disturbance recorder (DR), Event recorder (ER), Indication (IND), Trip value recorder (TVR) and
Event list (EL)).

Figure 398 shows the relations between Disturbance report, included functions and function
blocks. Event list (EL), Event recorder (ER) and Indication (IND) uses information from the
binary input function blocks (BxRBDR). Trip value recorder (TVR) uses analog information from
the analog input function blocks (AxRADR), which is used by Fault locator (FL) after estimation
by Trip Value Recorder (TVR). Disturbance report function acquires information from both
AxRADR and BxRBDR.

Line distance protection REL670 673

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

AxRADR Disturbance Report

DRPRDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip value rec Fault locator

BxRBDR Disturbance
recorder

Binary signals

Event list

Event recorder

Indications

IEC09000336-3-en.vsdx

IEC09000336 V3 EN-US

Figure 398: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

For Disturbance report function there are a number of settings which also influences the sub-
functions.

Three LED indications placed above the LCD screen makes it possible to get quick status
information about the IED.

Green LED:
Steady light In Service
Flashing light Internal failure
Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDx = Start (or Start
and Trip)
Flashing light The IED is in test mode

Red LED:
Steady light Triggered on binary signal N with SetLEDx = Trip (or Start
and Trip)
Flashing The IED is in configuration mode

Operation M12179-82 v7
The operation of Disturbance report function DRPRDRE has to be set On or Off. If Off is
selected, note that no disturbance report is registered, and none sub-function will operate
(the only general parameter that influences Event list (EL)).

674 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Operation = Off:

• Disturbance reports are not stored.

• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is not stored or changed.

Operation = On:

• Disturbance reports are stored, disturbance data can be read from the local HMI and from
a PC for example using PCM600.
• LED information (yellow - start, red - trip) is stored.

Every recording will get a number (0 to 999) which is used as identifier (local HMI, disturbance
handling tool and IEC 61850). An alternative recording identification is date, time and
sequence number. The sequence number is automatically increased by one for each new
recording and is reset to zero at midnight. The maximum number of recordings stored in the
IED is 100. The oldest recording will be overwritten when a new recording arrives (FIFO).

To be able to delete disturbance records, Operation parameter has to be On.

The maximum number of recordings depend on each recordings total

recording time. Long recording time will reduce the number of recordings to
less than 100.

The IED flash disk should NOT be used to store any user files. This might cause
disturbance recordings to be deleted due to lack of disk space.

18.6.3.1 Recording times M12179-88 v6

The different recording times for Disturbance report are set (the pre-fault time, post-fault
time, and limit time). These recording times affect all sub-functions more or less but not the
Event list (EL) function.

Prefault recording time (PreFaultRecT) is the recording time before the starting point of the
disturbance. The setting should be at least 0.1 s to ensure enough samples for the estimation
of pre-fault values in the Trip value recorder (TVR) function.

Postfault recording time (PostFaultRecT) is the maximum recording time after the
disappearance of the trig-signal (does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function).

Recording time limit (TimeLimit) is the maximum recording time after trig. The parameter
limits the recording time if some trigging condition (fault-time) is very long or permanently set
(does not influence the Trip value recorder (TVR) function).

Operation in test mode M12179-492 v4

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = Off. Disturbance report function does not save
any recordings and no LED information is displayed.

If the IED is in test mode and OpModeTest = On. Disturbance report function works in normal
mode and the status is indicated in the saved recording.

Line distance protection REL670 675

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

Post Retrigger M12155-173 v7

Disturbance report function does not automatically respond to any new trig condition during a
recording, after all signals set as trigger signals have been reset. However, under certain
circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the post-fault recording, for instance by
automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig = On)
during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and, during a
period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not start until
the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new trig occurs during
the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording a new complete
recording will be started.

Disturbance report function can handle a maximum of 3 simultaneous disturbance recordings.

18.6.3.2 Binary input signals M12179-90 v9

Up to 352 binary signals can be selected among internal logical and binary input signals. The
configuration tool is used to configure the signals.

For each of the 352 signals, it is also possible to select if the signal is to be used as a trigger
for the start of the Disturbance report and if the trigger should be activated on positive (1) or
negative (0) slope.

OperationN: Disturbance report may trig for binary input N (On) or not (Off).

TrigLevelN: Trig on positive (Trig on 1) or negative (Trig on 0) slope for binary input N.

Func103N: Function type number (0-255) for binary input N according to IEC-60870-5-103, that
is, 128: Distance protection, 160: overcurrent protection, 176: transformer differential
protection and 192: line differential protection.

Info103N: Information number (0-255) for binary input N according to IEC-60870-5-103, that is,
69-71: Trip L1-L3, 78-83: Zone 1-6.

See also description in the chapter IEC 60870-5-103.

18.6.3.3 Analog input signals M12179-92 v6

Up to 40 analog signals can be selected among internal analog and analog input signals.
PCM600 is used to configure the signals.

For retrieving remote data from LDCM module, the Disturbance report function
should be connected to a 8 ms SMAI function block if this is the only intended
use for the remote data.

The analog trigger of Disturbance report is not affected if analog input M is to be included in
the disturbance recording or not (OperationM = On/Off).

If OperationM = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,
Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be
used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

NomValueM: Nominal value for input M.

676 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

OverTrigOpM, UnderTrigOpM: Over or Under trig operation, Disturbance report may trig for
high/low level of analog input M (On) or not (Off).

OverTrigLeM, UnderTrigLeM: Over or under trig level, Trig high/low level relative nominal value
for analog input M in percent of nominal value.

18.6.3.4 Sub-function parameters M12179-389 v3

All functions are in operation as long as Disturbance report is in operation.

Indications M12179-448 v4
IndicationMaN: Indication mask for binary input N. If set (Show), a status change of that
particular input, will be fetched and shown in the disturbance summary on local HMI. If not set
(Hide), status change will not be indicated.

SetLEDN: Set red LED on local HMI in front of the IED if binary input N changes status.

Disturbance recorder M12179-446 v5

OperationM: Analog channel M is to be recorded by the disturbance recorder (On) or not (Off).

If OperationM = Off, no waveform (samples) will be recorded and reported in graph. However,
Trip value, pre-fault and fault value will be recorded and reported. The input channel can still be
used to trig the disturbance recorder.

If OperationM = On, waveform (samples) will also be recorded and reported in graph.

Setting information GUID-B0D40F6D-3CE4-4FF3-81B4-B453FDD389CB v1

SetInfoInDrep: Parameter used to enable or disable the settings information in disturbance
header.

Event recorder M12179-444 v4

Event recorder (ER) function has no dedicated parameters.

Trip value recorder M12179-442 v3

ZeroAngleRef: The parameter defines which analog signal that will be used as phase angle
reference for all other analog input signals. This signal will also be used for frequency
measurement and the measured frequency is used when calculating trip values. It is suggested
to point out a sampled voltage input signal, for example, a line or busbar phase voltage
(channel 1-30).

Event list M12179-440 v3

Event list (EL) (SOE) function has no dedicated parameters.

18.6.3.5 Consideration M12179-420 v6

The density of recording equipment in power systems is increasing, since the number of
modern IEDs, where recorders are included, is increasing. This leads to a vast number of
recordings at every single disturbance and a lot of information has to be handled if the
recording functions do not have proper settings. The goal is to optimize the settings in each
IED to be able to capture just valuable disturbances and to maximize the number that is
possible to save in the IED.

The recording time should not be longer than necessary (PostFaultrecT and TimeLimit).

• Should the function record faults only for the protected object or cover more?
• How long is the longest expected fault clearing time?
• Is it necessary to include reclosure in the recording or should a persistent fault generate a
second recording (PostRetrig)?

Line distance protection REL670 677

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

Minimize the number of recordings:

• Binary signals: Use only relevant signals to start the recording that is, protection trip,
carrier receive and/or start signals.
• Analog signals: The level triggering should be used with great care, since unfortunate
settings will cause enormously number of recordings. If nevertheless analog input
triggering is used, chose settings by a sufficient margin from normal operation values.
Phase voltages are not recommended for trigging.

There is a risk of flash wear out if the disturbance report triggers too often.

Remember that values of parameters set elsewhere are linked to the information on a report.
Such parameters are, for example, station and object identifiers, CT and VT ratios.

18.7 Logical signal status report BINSTATREP GUID-E7A2DB38-DD96-4296-B3D5-EB7FBE77CE07 v2

18.7.1 Identification GUID-E0247779-27A2-4E6C-A6DD-D4C31516CA5C v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Logical signal status report BINSTATREP - -

18.7.2 Application GUID-F9D225B1-68F7-4D15-AA89-C9211B450D19 v3

The Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP) function makes it possible to poll signals from
various other function blocks.

BINSTATREP has 16 inputs and 16 outputs. The output status follows the inputs and can be
read from the local HMI or via SPA communication.

When an input is set, the respective output is set for a user defined time. If the input signal
remains set for a longer period, the output will remain set until the input signal resets.

INPUTn

OUTPUTn
t t

IEC09000732-1-en.vsd
IEC09000732 V1 EN-US

Figure 399: BINSTATREP logical diagram

18.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-BBDA6900-4C1A-4A7C-AEA5-3C49C2749254 v2

The pulse time t is the only setting for the Logical signal status report (BINSTATREP). Each
output can be set or reset individually, but the pulse time will be the same for all outputs in the
entire BINSTATREP function.

678 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

18.8 Fault locator LMBRFLO IP14592-1 v2

18.8.1 Identification
M14892-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Fault locator LMBRFLO - -

18.8.2 Application M13752-3 v6

The main objective of line protection and monitoring IEDs is fast, selective and reliable
operation for faults on a protected line section. Besides this, information on distance to fault
is very important for those involved in operation and maintenance. Reliable information on the
fault location greatly decreases the downtime of the protected lines and increases the total
availability of a power system.

The fault locator is started with the input CALCDIST to which trip signals indicating in-line
faults are connected, typically distance protection zone 1 and accelerating zone or the line
differential protection. The disturbance report must also be started for the same faults since
the function uses pre- and post-fault information from the trip value recorder function (TVR).

Beside this information the function must be informed about faulted phases for correct loop
selection (phase selective outputs from differential protection, distance protection,
directional OC protection, and so on). The following loops are used for different types of
faults:

• for 3 phase faults: loop L1 - L2.

• for 2 phase faults: the loop between the faulted phases.
• for 2 phase-to-earth faults: the loop between the faulted phases.
• for phase-to-earth faults: the phase-to-earth loop.

LMBRFLO function indicates the distance to fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. LineLengthUnit setting is used to select the
unit of length either, in kilometer or miles for the distance to fault. The distance to the fault,
which is calculated with a high accuracy, is stored together with the recorded disturbances.
This information can be read on the local HMI, uploaded to PCM600 and is available on the
station bus according to IEC 61850–8–1.

The distance to fault can be recalculated on the local HMI by using the measuring algorithm for
different fault loops or for changed system parameters.

18.8.3 Setting guidelines IP14835-1 v1

M13769-3 v6
The parameters for the Fault locator function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The Fault locator algorithm uses phase voltages, phase currents and residual current in
observed bay (protected line) and residual current from a parallel bay (line, which is mutual
coupled to protected line).

The Fault locator has close connection to the Disturbance report function. All external analog
inputs (channel 1-30), connected to the Disturbance report function, are available to the Fault
locator and the function uses information calculated by the Trip value recorder. After
allocation of analog inputs to the Disturbance report function, the user has to point out which
analog inputs to be used by the Fault locator. According to the default settings the first four

Line distance protection REL670 679

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

analog inputs are currents and next three are voltages in the observed bay (no parallel line
expected since chosen input is set to zero). Use the Parameter Setting tool within PCM600 for
changing analog configuration.

The measured phase voltages can be fine tuned with the parameters UL1Gain, UL2Gain and
UL3Gain to further increase the accuracy of the fault locator.

The list of parameters explains the meaning of the abbreviations. Figure 400 also presents
these system parameters graphically. Note, that all impedance values relate to their primary
values and to the total length of the protected line.

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L

R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m

R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
DRPRDRE
LMBRFLO
ANSI05000045_2_en.vsd
ANSI05000045 V2 EN-US

Figure 400: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for settings of
the fault location-measuring function
For a single-circuit line (no parallel line), the figures for mutual zero-sequence impedance (X0M,
R0M) and analog input are set at zero.

Power system specific parameter settings are not general settings but specific setting
included in the setting groups, that is, this makes it possible to change conditions for the
Fault locator with short notice by changing setting group.

The source impedance is not constant in the network. However, this has a minor influence on
the accuracy of the distance-to-fault calculation, because only the phase angle of the
distribution factor has an influence on the accuracy. The phase angle of the distribution factor
is normally very low and practically constant, because the positive sequence line impedance,
which has an angle close to 90°, dominates it. Always set the source impedance resistance to
values other than zero. If the actual values are not known, the values that correspond to the
source impedance characteristic angle of 85° give satisfactory results.

18.8.3.1 Connection of analog currents M13769-16 v5

Connection diagram for analog currents included IN from parallel line shown in figure 401.

680 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

L1
L2
L3
1 1

I1 I1
2 2

3 3

4
I2 I2 4

5 5

I3 I3
6
6

9 9

10
I5 I5
10

en07000113-1.vsd
IEC07000113 V2 EN-US

Figure 401: Example of connection of parallel line IN for Fault locator LMBRFLO

18.9 Limit counter L4UFCNT GUID-22E141DB-38B3-462C-B031-73F7466DD135 v1

18.9.1 Identification
GUID-F3FB7B33-B189-4819-A1F0-8AC7762E9B7E v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Limit counter L4UFCNT -

18.9.2 Application GUID-41B13135-5069-4A5A-86CE-B7DBE9CFEF38 v2

Limit counter (L4UFCNT) is intended for applications where positive and/or negative flanks on
a binary signal need to be counted.

The limit counter provides four independent limits to be checked against the accumulated
counted value. The four limit reach indication outputs can be utilized to initiate proceeding
actions. The output indicators remain high until the reset of the function.

It is also possible to initiate the counter from a non-zero value by resetting the function to the
wanted initial value provided as a setting.

Line distance protection REL670 681

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

If applicable, the counter can be set to stop or rollover to zero and continue counting after
reaching the maximum count value. The steady overflow output flag indicates the next count
after reaching the maximum count value. It is also possible to set the counter to rollover and
indicate the overflow as a pulse, which lasts up to the first count after rolling over to zero. In
this case, periodic pulses will be generated at multiple overflow of the function.

18.9.3 Setting guidelines GUID-5AECCDBC-7385-4D9F-940C-9D4A0E59B106 v1

GUID-DA5DA8D7-4821-4BFB-86CC-28658E376270 v2
The parameters for Limit counter L4UFCNT are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

18.10 Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

18.10.1 Identification GUID-3F9EF4FA-74FA-4D1D-88A0-E948B722B64F v1

Function Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 device

identification identification number
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC - -

18.10.2 Application GUID-225D8341-2D31-49F1-9B49-571346C0FE26 v1

The function is used for user-defined logics and it can also be used for different purposes
internally in the IED. An application example is to accumulate the total running/energized time
of the generator, transformer, reactor, capacitor bank or even line.

Settable time limits for warning and alarm are provided. The time limit for overflow indication
is fixed to 99999.9 hours. At overflow the accumulated time resets and the accumulation
starts from zero again.

18.10.3 Setting guidelines GUID-D3BED56A-BA80-486F-B2A8-E47F7AC63468 v1

The settings tAlarm and tWarning are user settable limits defined in hours. The achievable
resolution of the settings is 0.1 hours (6 minutes).

tAlarm and tWarning are independent settings, that is, there is no check if
tAlarm > tWarning.

The limit for the overflow supervision is fixed at 99999.9 hours.

The setting tAddToTime is a user settable time parameter in hours.

18.11 Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR GUID-7AE60CB5-3CD5-4FE2-8D54-664AA78DD2DE v1

18.11.1 Identification
GUID-B62A30E5-C1F3-4E1F-B351-4F4CC60BA53F v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR - 51TF

682 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

18.11.2 Application GUID-A859F4D6-635E-4116-9416-EF50948FA6C9 v1

The through fault monitoring function PTRSTHR is used to monitor the mechanical stress on a
transformer and place it against its withstand capability. During through faults, the fault-
current magnitude is higher as the allowed overload current range. At low fault current
magnitudes which are below the overload capability of the transformer, mechanical effects are
considered less important unless the frequency of fault occurrence is high. Since through fault
current magnitudes are typically closer to the extreme design capabilities of the transformer,
mechanical effects are more significant than thermal effects.

The point of transition between mechanical stress and thermal stress cannot be precisely
defined. However, mechanical stresses tend to have a prominent role in larger kilovolt-amps
ratings, since the currents are higher. It is important to identify all transformer through faults,
capture the energy profile of each individual through fault, and ascertain the consequences of
aggregate effects to the transformer.

According to IEEE C57.12.00-1993 standard, transformers rated over 10 MVA come under
category IV. For these transformers, a single curve represents both thermal and mechanical
damage considerations. The recommended duration limit is based upon the curve in Figure
402. The validity of these damage limit curves cannot be demonstrated by tests since the
effects are cumulative over the transformers lifetime. They are based principally on informed
engineering judgment and favorable, historical field experience as said in IEEE standard.

2000

1000

500

200

100
Time (seconds)

50

20
10

2 12 10 8 7 6 5 4

1 % Transformer impedance

0.5
2 5 10 20 50
Times normal base current
IEC18000078-1-en.vsdx
IEC18000078 V1 EN-US

Figure 402: Transformer capability curve for category IV

Low values of 3.5 or fewer times normal base current may result from overloads rather than
faults. For such cases, loading guides may indicate different allowable time durations, that is
given in Figure 402. The short-circuit currents shown in Figure 402 is the balanced transformer
winding currents. The line currents that relate to these winding currents depend upon the
transformer connection and the type of fault present. The protection curves only apply to
transformers described in the IEEE C57.12.00-1993 standard. For transformers built the prior
to early 1970s, consult the manufacturer for short circuit withstand capabilities.

Line distance protection REL670 683

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

18.11.3 Setting guidelines

18.11.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED GUID-2719EBF0-A5F5-4F45-925C-169909C61576 v1

Parameters for the PTRSTHR function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

18.11.3.2 Consideration of zero sequence currents GUID-E351A606-6105-4187-A51B-F4501DD1A887 v1

Transformer withstand capability against through faults are determined based on fault
current flows through the windings. If the winding and CT connections are in star, then CT
measures the winding currents which can be used directly for calculations. However, if any one
of the windings or the CT is delta connected, then the measured current cannot be used
directly for the calculation. This is due to the fact that the zero sequence current cannot be
measured if any one of the windings or CT is delta connected. It is important to consider zero
sequence currents in order to calculate the I2t accurately.

Calculation of zero sequence current is difficult when more than one measured current does
not have zero sequence current. The function is able to calculate zero sequence current for a
winding by knowing the zero sequence currents of other winding(s). The zero sequence
current calculation is done numerically by setting ZSCurrCor = Off or On and does not require
any auxiliary transformers or zero sequence traps. However, it is necessary to consider zero
sequence currents from every individual winding by proper setting of ZSCurrCor to Off or On.

On the other hand, winding current transformers measure the winding currents directly so
that there is no need to calculate winding currents. In these cases, the ZSCurrCor should be set
as Off and ConnTypeWx should be set as WYE.

The following settings are related to the winding current calculation which is set under
advanced settings.

Common base IED values for primary current (IBase) and primary voltage (UBase) for a
particular winding are set in global base values for settings function GBASVAL. The settings
GlobalBaseSelW1, GlobalBaseSelW2 and GlobalBaseSelW3 in the through fault monitoring
function are used to select the corresponding GBASVAL function as a reference.

GlobalBaseSelW1: It defines the GBASVAL function instance for the reference of base values for
winding 1. Similarly, GlobalBaseSelW2 and GlobalBaseSelW3 settings shall be used to define
the GBASVAL function instance for winding 2 and winding 3 respectively.

NoOfWindings: It defines the number of windings in a transformer. It has two options to select
between; Two windings and Three windings. When the value Two windings is selected, then
the third winding related outputs are set to zero. General data in the through fault monitoring
report will show zero for all outputs which is related to winding 3 for two-winding
configuration.

ConnTypeW1: It defines the connection type of winding 1. It has two options to select between;
WYE and Delta. Similarly, connection types shall be set for winding 2 and winding 3 in settings
which designated with W2 and W3 in the settings name. In this case, if more than one winding
connection type is Delta, then setting ZSCurrCor shall be set as Off.

ClockNumberW2: It defines the phase displacement between winding 1 and winding 2. It has
the options to select the clock number between 0 to 11. Similarly, the phase displacement
between winding 1 and winding 3 shall be set using setting ClockNumberW3.

684 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

18.11.3.3 On-line correction with on-load tap changer position GUID-F2C11B7D-37EB-4122-A774-EC5569A715CE v1

The PTRSTHR function in the IED has a built-in logic to correct the calculated winding current
according to the present tap position of an on-load tap changer. The following settings are
related this correction feature which is set under advanced settings:

OLTCWinding: It defines where the OLTC’s (OLTC1, OLTC2) are physically located. It has 10
options to select between; Not Used / Winding 1 / Winding 2 / Winding 3 / Winding 1, Winding
2 / Winding 1, Winding 3 / Winding 2, Winding 1 / Winding 2, Winding 3 / Winding 3, Winding 1 /
Winding 3, Winding 2.
• If the value Not Used is selected, then the function assumes that both OLTC1 and OLTC2
do not exist and it disregards all other settings related to OLTC’s.
• If either one of the Winding 1 / Winding 2 / Winding 3 values is selected, then the function
assumes that only one OLTC has existed and it discards settings related to second OLTC.
• If any values other than the above-mentioned options are selected, then the function
assumes that the OLTC1 is located in first mentioned winding and OLTC 2 is located in
secondly mentioned winding. For example, if the value Winding 1, Winding 3 is selected,
then the function assumes OLTC1 is located in winding 1 and OLTC2 is located in winding
3.

LowTapOLTC1: It defines the tap position number at which minimum voltage is possible for
OLTC1.

RatedTapOLTC1: It defines the tap position number at which rated current and voltage of that
winding for OLTC1.

HighTapPsOLTC1: It defines the tap position number at which maximum voltage is possible for
OLTC1.

StepSizeOLTC1: It defines the change per OLTC1 step (for example, 1.5% of the rated voltage
of that winding).

The above settings are defined for OLTC1. Similar settings shall be set for
second on-load tap changer designated with OLTC2 in the setting names, for
three winding configurations.

18.11.3.4 Through fault detection GUID-EA8374AC-90DB-43E9-9DEA-49C2D962F9E3 v1

The transformer is subjected to electrical and mechanical stress when a fault current flows
through it, which is more than the transformer overload current. In general, stress reduces the
transformer life and it becomes even worse when stress occurs due to through faults. The
function checks the measured RMS currents against the set start level for through fault
detection. If the measured RMS current is above the set threshold limit and sustains even after
the set time delay, then through fault is detected. This time delay is used to ignore inadvertent
detection of faults. Also, for resetting through fault detection, a hysteresis has been
considered to avoid oscillations in boundary conditions.

The following settings are related to through fault detection which are set under basic
settings:

W1I>: It defines the current start value for through fault detection in percentage of winding 1
IB. This setting shall be set higher than the overload capacity of the transformer. This is
because currents below 3.5 times the rated current may generate due to overloads. Similarly,
current start values shall be set for winding 2 and winding 3 using settings which designated
with W2 and W3 in the settings name.

Line distance protection REL670 685

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

tMin: It defines the minimum duration of fault to start any calculations. It is used to ignore
accidental detection and calculations if the fault current drops below the lower threshold level
within a short time.

The function monitors the time between last two subsequent through fault detections and it
gives a warning signal when the time difference is below the set time. This indicates that the
transformer has faults very frequently and it may undergo heavy electrical and mechanical
stress. Thereby, the utility can take prior attention and undertake preventive actions to avoid
serious consequences. This warning signal resets if no more faults occurred within the same
set time.

tMultiThroFlt: It defines the time window to detect multi through faults. This setting shall be
set based on the maximum allowed number of through fault per time period, which may be
indicated by the transformer manufacturer.

18.11.3.5 Through fault I2t alarms GUID-06C7135E-7082-488C-B64A-6A82F95E7C35 v1

Through fault I2t calculations are done for all windings and phase-wise, and when this
integration exceeds the set limit in any one phase, an alarm is raised. The I2t limit shall be set
winding-wise and once the alarm is raised, then control actions can be taken such as changing
auto-reclosing settings.

MaxI2tW1: It defines the I2t threshold limit for an individual event or fault per phase. This
setting shall be set based on the withstand capability of each winding with respect to
corresponding rated current. Similarly, the threshold limit for winding 2 and winding 3 shall be
set using MaxI2tW2 and MaxI2tW3 settings.

Even though transformer damages caused by through faults are cumulative by nature,
individual through fault events also require attention. This is because the impact of several
small through faults can be less compared to one heavy through fault.

The PTRSTHR function monitors each through fault events and accumulates the calculated I2t
values for each fault to determine the cumulative effect. This cumulative I2t is calculated for all
windings phase-wise and when this value exceeds the cumulative I2t set limit, an alarm is
raised.

MaxI2tCmlW1: It defines the cumulative I2t threshold limit for all fault events in winding 1, per
phase. Similarly, the cumulative threshold limit for winding 2 and winding 3 shall be set using
MaxI2tCmlW2 and MaxI2tCmlW3 settings.

The alarm signal due to individual event I2t will be reset either after the ongoing fault is cleared
or the set minimum time delay, whichever is longer. The alarm signal due to cumulative I2t is
set high continuously until the cumulative I2t values are reset to a lower value than the set
limit.

tPulse: It defines the pulse duration for an individual event I2t alarm.

Consider all the calculations based on through fault not as a precise indicator of transformer
health. These values indicate that the transformer should be inspected, they do not indicate a
strict necessity to shut-down the transformer.

18.11.3.6 Initial values for cumulative I2t and number of through faults GUID-AA90D6D8-4AF2-4D5D-BCD9-308CD7578D05 v1

The calculated cumulative I2t values for each phase of windings and number of through faults
counts can be reset with preset values using command inputs under the clear menu or via
binary inputs. The following parameters which are set under advanced parameters are related
to the initial values of cumulative I2t and number of through faults.

686 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

InitCI2tW1L1: It defines the initial cumulative I2t value for winding 1 and phase L1. Similarly,
initial cumulative I2t value for L2 and L3 phase shall be set using parameters which are
designated with L2 and L3 in the parameters name. For other windings, the initial cumulative
I2t values shall be set using the parameters which are designated with W2 and W3 in the
parameters name.

InitTFCntW1L1: It defines the initial fault counter value of winding 1 and phase L1. Similarly, the
initial fault counter value for other phases L2 and L3 shall be set using parameters which are
designated with L2 and L3 in the parameters name. Also, for other windings the initial fault
counter value shall be set using the parameters which are designated with W2 and W3 in the
parameters name.

InitCmlTFCnt: It defines the initial overall fault counter value for the transformer.

18.11.4 Setting examples

GUID-2AE19CC1-F790-4E98-A75D-65363155E209 v1
In order to correctly apply transformer through fault monitoring with proper zero sequence
current, correction is needed for:

• Power transformer phase shift (vector group compensation)

• Zero sequence current (zero sequence current consideration)

The through fault monitoring is suitable for all standard three-phase power transformers
without any interposing CTs. It is designed with the assumption that all main CTs are star
connected. For such applications, it is only necessary to enter CT rated data and power
transformer data directly as they are given on the power transformer nameplate. The zero
sequence current is then calculated and included in the winding currents itself unless there is
more than one delta winding configuration.

However, the IED can also be used in applications where some of the main CTs are connected
in delta. In such cases, the ratio for the main CT connected in delta shall be intentionally set to
√3 = 1.732 times smaller than the actual ratio of individual phase CTs (for example, set 462/5
instead of 800/5). In case the ratio is 800/2.88A, often designed for such typical delta
connections, set the ratio as 800/5 in the IED.

At the same time, the power transformer vector group shall be set as Yy0 since the IED shall
not internally provide any phase angle shift compensation. The necessary phase angle shift
compensation will be provided externally by delta connected main CT. All other settings should
have the same values irrespective of main CT connections.

Irrespective of the main CT connections (star or delta), online reading and

automatic correction for actual load tap changer position can be used in the
IED.

18.11.4.1 Typical main CT connections for transformer GUID-3179E8A2-D1F8-4EDE-81F9-7A7AF2B8C2D6 v1

Three most typical main CT connections used for transformers are shown in Figure 403. It is
assumed that the primary phase sequence is L1-L2-L3.

Line distance protection REL670 687

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

IL1
L1

Monitored IL2
Transformer L2
Winding

IL3
L3

IL3-IL2

IL2-IL1

IL1-IL3

IL3-IL1

IL2-IL3

IL1-IL2
IL3

IL2

IL1
CT Star CT in Delta CT in Delta
Connected DAC Connected DAB Connected
IEC18000079-1-en.vsd
IEC18000079 V1 EN-US

Figure 403: Main CT connections for transformers

For star connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:

• Are directly proportional to the measured primary currents

• Are in phase with the measured primary currents
• Contains all sequence components including zero sequence current component

For star connected main CTs, the main CT ratio shall be set as it is in the actual application.
The StarPoint parameter, for the particular star connection shown in Figure 403, shall be set as
ToObject. If star connected main CTs have their star point away from the protected
transformer, this parameter shall be set as FromObject.

For delta DAC connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:

• Are increased √3 times (1.732 times) in comparison with star connected CTs
• Lag by 30° the primary winding currents (this CT connection rotates currents by 30° in
clockwise direction)
• Does not contain zero sequence current component and consequently winding currents
are not properly measured for all types of faults

For DAC delta connected main CTs, the ratio shall be set for √3 times smaller than the actual
ratio of individual phase CTs. The StarPoint parameter, for the particular star connection shall
be set as ToObject.

The delta DAC connected main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in
Figure 403.

For delta DAB connected main CTs, secondary currents fed to the IED:

• Are increased √3 times (1.732 times) in comparison with star connected CTs
• Lead by 30° the primary winding currents (this CT connection rotates currents by 30° in
anti-clockwise direction)
• Does not contain zero sequence current component and consequently winding currents
are not properly measured for all types of faults

For DAB delta connected, main CT ratio shall be set √3 times smaller than the actual ratio of
individual phase CTs. The StarPoint parameter for this particular connection shall be set as
ToObject.

688 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

The delta DAB connected main CTs must be connected exactly as shown in
Figure 403.

For more detailed information regarding CT data settings, refer to Section Application
examples.

It is strongly recommended to use star connected main CTs on all sides of the
monitored power transformer.

18.11.4.2 Application examples for power transformers GUID-694949AA-4EA8-4B30-B8D1-10AB0A7622A7 v1

Three application examples are presented here and each one has the following solutions:

• Solution 1: with all main CTs star connected

• Solution 2: with delta connected main CT on Y (i.e., star) connected sides of the protected
power transformer

The following settings are given for each solution:

• Input CT channels on the transformer input modules

• General settings for the transformer through fault monitoring where specific data about
monitored power transformer is entered.

Example 1: Star-delta connected power transformer without on-load tap changer

GUID-10200B25-5D36-4BB3-8095-B5313C8E1D30 v1
Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all
relevant application data is given in Figure 404.

Line distance protection REL670 689

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

CT 300/5
CT 300/5 in Delta
Star (DAC)

20.9 MVA 20.9 MVA

69/12.5 kV 69/12.5 kV
YNd1 YNd1
(YDAC) (YDAC)

CT 800/5 CT 800/5
Star Star

en06000554.vsd
IEC06000554 V1 EN-US

Figure 404: Star-delta connected power transformer solutions

For this particular power transformer, the 69 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages lead the
12.5 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages by 30 degrees. Thus, ensure that the HV currents
are rotated by 30° in the clockwise direction when external phase angle shift compensation is
done by connecting main HV CTs in delta (as shown in Figure 404, right-hand side). Therefore,
the DAC delta CT connection must be used for 69 kV CTs in order to put 69 kV & 12.5 kV
currents in phase.

In order to ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer, proceed as
follows:

1. Ensure that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED.

2. For the second solution, make sure that HV delta connected CTs are DAC connected.
3. For star connected CTs, make sure how they are star-connected (i.e., earthed) to/from
the protected transformer.
4. Enter the settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs as shown in
Table 60.

Table 60: LV side CTs input channels

Setting parameter Selected value for both solutions
CTprim 800
CTsec 5
CTStarPoint ToObject

5. Enter the settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs as shown in
Table 61.

690 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Table 61: HV side CTs input channels

Setting parameter Selected value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
CTprim 300
300
= 173
3
EQUATION1888 V1 EN-US

(To compensate for delta

connected CTs)
CTsec 5 5
CTStarPoint FromObject ToObject

6. Enter the values for the general settings of the PTRSTHR function as shown in Table 62.

Table 62: Through fault monitoring function general settings

Setting parameter Select value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
ConnTypeW1 WYE (Y) WYE (Y)
ConnTypeW2 Delta WYE (Y)1)
ClockNumberW2 1 [30 deg lag] 0 [0 deg]1)
ZSCurrCor On Off2)
OLTCWinding Not in use Not in use

1) To compensate for delta connected CTs

2) Zero-sequence current is removed by connecting main CTs in delta

Example 2: Delta-star connected power transformer without tap charger GUID-0E5F0588-DB5F-4B6E-ADE2-8190D5D9AA99 v1

Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all
relevant application data is given in Figure 405.

Line distance protection REL670 691

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

CT 400/5 CT 400/5
Star Star

60 MVA 60 MVA
115/24.9 kV 115/24.9 kV
Dyn1 Dyn1
(DABY) (DABY)

CT 1500/5
CT 1500/5 in Delta
Star (DAB)

en06000555.vsd
IEC06000555 V1 EN-US

Figure 405: Delta-star connected power transformer solutions

For this particular power transformer, the 115 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages lead the
24.9 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages by 30 degrees. Thus, ensure that the 24.9 kV
currents are rotated by 30° in the anti-clockwise direction when external phase angle shift
compensation is done by connecting main 24.9 kV CTs in delta (as shown in Figure 405, right-
hand side). Therefore, the DAB CT connection must be used for 24.9 kV CTs in order to put 115
kV & 24.9 kV currents in phase.

In order to ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer, proceed as
follows:

1. Ensure that HV & LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED.

2. For the second solution, make sure that LV delta connected CTs are DAB connected.
3. For star connected CTs, make sure how they are star connected (i.e., earthed) to/from
the protected transformer.
4. Enter the settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs as shown in
Table 63.

Table 63: HV side CTs input channels

Setting parameter Selected value for both solutions
CTprim 400
CTsec 5
CTStarPoint ToObject

5. Enter the settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs as shown in
Table 64.

692 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Table 64: LV side CTs input channels

Setting parameter Selected value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
CTprim 1500
1500
= 866
3
EQUATION1889 V1 EN-US

(To compensate for delta

connected CTs)
CTsec 5 5
CTStarPoint ToObject ToObject

6. Enter the values for the general settings of the PTRSTHR function as shown in Table 65.

Table 65: Through fault monitoring function general settings

Setting parameter Select value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
ConnTypeW1 Delta WYE (Y)
ConnTypeW2 WYE (Y) WYE (Y)1)
ClockNumberW2 1 [30 deg lag] 0 [0 deg]1)
ZSCurrCor On Off2)
OLTCWinding Not in use Not in use

1) To compensate for delta connected CTs

2) Zero-sequence current is removed by connecting main CTs in delta, so winding current with zero
sequence current is not possible

Example 3: Star-star connected power transformer with load tap changer and tertiary
not loaded delta winding GUID-87DDECC6-6277-4F34-A8E4-934F56E6CC56 v1
Single line diagrams for two possible solutions for such type of power transformer with all
relevant application data is given in Figure 406.

This example is also applicable for autotransformer not loaded with tertiary
delta.

Line distance protection REL670 693

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

CT 200/1
CT 200/1
in Delta
Star
(DAB)

31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA 31.5/31.5/(10.5) MVA

110±11×1.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV 110±11×1.5% /36.75/(10.5) kV
YNyn0(d5) YNyn0(d5)

CT 500/5
CT 500/5 in Delta
Star (DAB)

en06000558.vsd
IEC06000558 V1 EN-US

Figure 406: Star-star connected power transformer solutions

For this particular power transformer, the 110 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages are
exactly in phase with the 36.75 kV side phase-to-earth no-load voltages. Thus, when external
phase angle shift compensation is done by connecting main CTs in delta, both set of CTs must
be identically connected (i.e., either both DAC or both DAB as shown in the right-hand side in
Figure 406) in order to put 110 kV & 36.75 kV currents in phase.

In order to ensure proper application of the IED for this power transformer, proceed as
follows:

1. Ensure that HV & LV CTs are connected to 1 A CT inputs in the IED.

2. Check that LV CTs are connected to 5 A CT inputs in the IED.
3. Make sure that both CT sets are identically connected (i.e., either both side DAC or both
side DAB) when delta connected CTs are used.
4. For star connected CTs, make sure how they are star connected (i.e., earthed) towards or
away from the protected transformer.
5. Enter the settings for all three CT input channels used for the HV side CTs as shown in
Figure 406.

Table 66: HV side CTs input channels

Setting parameter Selected value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
CTprim 200
200
= 115
3
EQUATION1891 V1 EN-US

(To compensate for delta

connected CTs)
CTsec 1 1
CTStarPoint FromObject ToObject

6. Enter the settings for all three CT input channels used for the LV side CTs as shown in
Table 66.

694 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Table 67: LV side CTs input channels

Setting parameter Selected value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
CTprim 500
500
= 289
3
EQUATION1892 V1 EN-US

(To compensate for delta

connected CTs)
CTsec 5 5
CTStarPoint ToObject ToObject

7. Enter the values for the general settings of the PTRSTHR function as shown in Table 68.

Table 68: Through fault monitoring function general settings

Setting parameter Select value for solution 1 (star Selected value for solution 2
connected CT) (delta connected CT)
ConnTypeW1 WYE (Y) WYE (Y)
ConnTypeW2 WYE (Y) WYE (Y)
ClockNumberW2 0 [0 deg] 0 [0 deg]
ZSCurrCor Off Off1)
OLTCWinding Winding 1 (W1) Winding 1 (W1)
LowTapOLTC1 1 1
RatedTapOLTC1 12 12
HighTapOLTC1 23 23
StepSizeOLTC1 1.5% 1.5%

1) Zero-sequence current is removed by connecting main CTs in delta, so winding current with zero
sequence current is not possible

Summary and conclusions GUID-CC53DA83-EBDA-407A-9FFB-153600B4B3D2 v1

The IED can be used for through fault monitoring of transformers with main CTs are either star
or delta connected. However, the IED is designed with an assumption that all main CTs are star
connected. The IED can be used in applications where the main CTs are delta connected. For
such applications, consider the following:

• The ratio for delta connected CTs shall be set √3 = 1.732 times smaller than the actual
individual phase CT ratio.
• The power transformer vector group shall typically be set as Yy0 since the compensation
for power transformer the actual phase shift is provided by the external delta CT
connection.
• The zero sequence current is removed by the main CT delta connections. Therefore, when
star winding sides, the CTs are connected in delta the zero sequence current correction
shall be set to Off in the IED.

Table below summarizes the most commonly used star-delta vector groups around the world
and provides information about the required type of main CT delta connection on the star side
of the transformer.

Line distance protection REL670 695

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

IEC vector group Positive sequence no-load Required delta CT connection type on star side of the
voltage phasor diagram protected power transformer and internal vector group
setting in the IED
YNd1 DAC/Yy0
Y

IEC06000559 V1 EN-US

Dyn1 DAB/Yy0
Y

IEC06000560 V1 EN-US

YNd11 DAB/Yy0
Y

IEC06000561 V1 EN-US

Dyn11 DAC/Yy0

IEC06000562 V1 EN-US

YNd5 DAB/Yy6
Y

IEC06000563 V1 EN-US

Dyn5 DAC/Yy6

Y
IEC06000564 V1 EN-US

Settings for transformer withstand capability calculation GUID-DC24F8F5-C65A-4C6D-A892-F5605CAAA49A v1

Four different protection curves are given in the IEEE C57.109.1993 standard for different
categories of transformer which are covered by IEEE C57.12.00-1993 standard. These curves
are based on the historical evolution of the short circuit withstand requirements and these
should be applicable to transformers built beginning in the early 1970s.

696 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

For transformers built prior to the early 1970s, consult the manufacturer for
short circuit withstand capabilities as a precaution.

According to IEEE C57.109.1993 standard, single phase transformers above 10 MVA and three
phase transformers above 30 MVA come under category IV transformers. The recommended
protection curve for category IV transformer is given in Figure 402. This curve should be
applied as a protection curve for all faults, frequent and in-frequent. The curve is dependents
upon the transformer short circuit impedance for fault currents above 50% of the maximum
possible and it leads to worst case mechanical duty with maximum fault current for 2s. The
damage intensity from through faults depends on the current magnitude, fault duration, and
the total number of fault occurrences. Refer to Table 69 for the through fault monitoring
function settings values corresponding to the given transformer.

Table 69: Transformer nameplate data

Parameter Value
Frequency 50 Hz
Rated Power 500 MVA / 500 MVA / 20 MVA
Voltage ratio 415 kV / 230 kV / 20 kV
Winding 1 rated current 696 A
Winding 2 rated current 1255 A
Winding 3 rated current 577 A
Tap changer ±9; 1.67% of 230 kV
Connection Type YNyn0d1 YNyn0d1
Cooling ONAF
% Impedance 12 @ Base 500 MVA

According to the IEEE standard and Figure 402, the given transformer withstand capability can
be calculated with respect to transformer % impedance 12. In this case, I2t limits are calculated
based on the maximum allowable fault current 800 % of rated current for 2s duration. Also, if
the transformer manufacturer indicates that 10 such through faults can be withstand over the
life time of the transformer, then the cumulative I2t limits can be set accordingly.

Table 70: PTRSTHR setting parameters

Setting parameter Select value
W1I> 350 % IBaseW1
W2I> 350 % IBaseW2
W3I> 350 % IBaseW3
tMin 0.2 s
MaxI2tW1
 696  8
2

 2  62.0  kA  s
2

1000000
IECEQUATION18025 V1 EN-US

MaxI2tW2
1255  8
2

 2  201.608  kA  s
2

1000000
IECEQUATION18051 V1 EN-US

MaxI2tW3
 577  8
2

 2  45.615  kA  s
2

1000000
IECEQUATION18052 V1 EN-US

Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 697

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

Setting parameter Select value

MaxI2tCmlW1
62.0 10  620  kA  s
2

IECEQUATION18053 V1 EN-US

MaxI2tCmlW2
201.608 10  2016.08  kA  s
2

IECEQUATION18054 V1 EN-US

MaxI2tCmlW3
42.615 10  426.15  kA  s
2

IECEQUATION18055 V1 EN-US

18.11.4.3 Application example for OHL GUID-FDD5C618-93B0-4DE7-A7E4-D997E2087769 v1

Additionally, the PTRSTHR function can be used to monitor faults on OHL. In such cases, the
OHL current and voltage shall be connected to W1 inputs. In case of one-and-a-half breaker
configuration, W1 and W2 currents shall be used.

For such applications, the PTRSTHR function can be triggered either by the set phase current
level or externally by the START or TRIP signal from the distance protection. As a result, a
summary list that provides an overview about all through faults seen by the IED will be
available on the local HMI.

18.12 Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI GUID-692151F8-812B-4B32-AE86-E7A4E4B0101B v1

18.12.1 Identification
GUID-C7863D78-34DB-42E5-90FE-6483EDAAF319 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI ITHD ITHD

18.12.2 Application
GUID-987BCB6C-C559-42EE-9AAB-5F71189A58C6 v2
In order to maintain the power quality for better supply, harmonics in the system must be
monitored. Due to the nonlinear loads connected to the system, harmonics (apart from
fundamental frequency component) are generated and thereby the system voltage is
distorted. Voltage distortion appears to have a little effect on operation of nonlinear loads
connected, either phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral. Current distortion is limited at the
point of common coupling PCC to control the harmonic current from the utility to the
consumer. Thereby, the voltage distortion must be limited in order to prevent it from
spreading to other facilities.

Voltage harmonic distortion levels can vary drastically, depending on the configuration of
system. These voltage harmonics can damage the equipment as they are designed to operate
for certain range of voltage inaccuracy.

Moreover, in four-wire distribution systems (three-phase and neutral), the currents in the three
phases will return via the neutral conductor, a 120 degree phase shift between corresponding
phase currents that causes the currents to cancel out in the neutral, under balanced loading
conditions. When nonlinear loads are present, any ‘Triplen’ (3rd, 9th…) harmonics in the phase
currents does not cancel out. However, they will be added cumulatively in the neutral
conductor, which can carry up to 173% of phase current at a frequency of predominately 180
Hz (3rd harmonic).

In case of electric traction systems, it generates various power quality problems that have an
important impact on its distribution network. DC traction loads, fed through AC/DC rectifiers,
generates non-linear voltages and currents on the AC system, that will result in harmonic

698 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

voltage distortion of the power supply system. Traction power supply system creates power
quality problems to the corresponding grid, which can cause:

• Poor power quality

• Increase in operational cost due to less productivity
• Damage to sensitive equipment in nearby facilities.

GUID-2C07190A-7EEC-43AB-A84C-730550A2A7B0 v1
Maintaining high power quality in traction system is very complex. The presence of non-linear
loads reduces the capability of the existing harmonic mitigation techniques. However, it is
essential to minimize the issues like harmonics, voltage sags and flicker to protect sensitive
equipment affected by the aforementioned issues produced by traction systems.

Various practical conditions which have dynamic characteristics like the speed of locomotion,
load and line condition will make this problem even worse. Harmonic current increases the
heat dissipation due to hysteresis and eddy currents, which causes stress on insulation
materials. Harmonic current increases transmission loss and the voltage drops.
GUID-45A6724C-1FF0-4910-9878-01518111EB26 v1
In general, harmonics can cause reduced equipment life if a system is designed without
considering the harmonics and if the equipment is not designed to withstand harmonics.
Hence, it is important to measure and monitor harmonics in power systems. Harmonic voltage
distortions on 161 kV power system and above is limited to 1.5% of total harmonic distortion
(THD), in with each individual harmonic is limited to 1.0%.
GUID-0C108542-C1CF-4B95-AB67-C7424FB5A98E v1
Current harmonic limits vary based on the short circuit strength of the corresponding system
they are injected into. Harmonic current limit defines the maximum amount of harmonic
current that can be inject into the utility system. The difference between THD and TDD is used
to calculate the harmonics level during light load conditions.

18.12.3 Setting guidelines GUID-57719753-00C3-43F6-97B5-AA3B22618A3F v1

The recommended limits for total harmonic distortion and individual harmonic distortion are
available in the IEEE 519 standard. The limits are based on measurements which are done at
the point of common coupling. It should not be applied to either individual pieces of
equipment or at locations within a user’s facility. In most cases, harmonic voltages and
currents at these locations could be found to be significantly beyond recommended limits at
the PCC due to the lack of diversity, cancellation, and other phenomena that tend to reduce
the combined effects of multiple harmonic sources to levels below their algebraic summation.

18.12.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED GUID-A773AE35-1480-4C07-9894-908229DC3BC7 v1

Parameters for CHMMHAI function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.
GUID-F41E3011-637C-46C6-BA99-4F8C48AC79B5 v2
Common base IED values for primary current (IBase ) is set in the global base values for
settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Minimum and maximum current limit is set as 5% of the IB and 300.0% of IB

respectively. If the current is outside the above range, the calculation of total
harmonic distortion, individual harmonic distortion, total demand distortion
and crest factor are blocked and outputs are provided as zero.

MaxLoadCurr: Maximum demand load current at PCC for total demand distortion calculation.
When the point of common coupling (PCC) is considered at the service entrance or utility
metering point, IEEE 519 standard recommends that the maximum demand load current must
be calculated as the average current of maximum demand for the preceding 12 months.

Line distance protection REL670 699

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

WrnLimitTDD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated total demand distortion.
Harmonic current distortions on a power systems with ratio between the maximum short
circuit current to the maximum demand load current is 20, limited to 5% of the total demand
distortion (TDD).

tDelayAlmTDD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated total demand
distortion.

WrnLimitTHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated total harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlmTHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated total harmonic
distortion. This intimates the operator to take corrective operations immediately, otherwise
the system will undergo thermal stress.

WrnLimit2ndHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated second harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm2ndHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated second
harmonic distortion.

WrnLimit3rdHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated third harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm3rdHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated third
harmonic distortion.

WrnLimit4thHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated fourth harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm4thHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated fourth
harmonic distortion.

WrnLimit5thHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated fifth harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm5thHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated fifth
harmonic distortion.

18.13 Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI GUID-B2F24353-AAEA-4520-BB1C-5FD5FFCFC67B v1

18.13.1 Identification
GUID-BF90E93F-C0F4-43F7-BDD5-F3C289B5535B v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI UTHD VTHD

18.13.2 Application
GUID-987BCB6C-C559-42EE-9AAB-5F71189A58C6 v2
In order to maintain the power quality for better supply, harmonics in the system must be
monitored. Due to the nonlinear loads connected to the system, harmonics (apart from
fundamental frequency component) are generated and thereby the system voltage is
distorted. Voltage distortion appears to have a little effect on operation of nonlinear loads
connected, either phase-to-phase or phase-to-neutral. Current distortion is limited at the
point of common coupling PCC to control the harmonic current from the utility to the
consumer. Thereby, the voltage distortion must be limited in order to prevent it from
spreading to other facilities.

Voltage harmonic distortion levels can vary drastically, depending on the configuration of
system. These voltage harmonics can damage the equipment as they are designed to operate
for certain range of voltage inaccuracy.

700 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 18
Monitoring

Moreover, in four-wire distribution systems (three-phase and neutral), the currents in the three
phases will return via the neutral conductor, a 120 degree phase shift between corresponding
phase currents that causes the currents to cancel out in the neutral, under balanced loading
conditions. When nonlinear loads are present, any ‘Triplen’ (3rd, 9th…) harmonics in the phase
currents does not cancel out. However, they will be added cumulatively in the neutral
conductor, which can carry up to 173% of phase current at a frequency of predominately 180
Hz (3rd harmonic).

In case of electric traction systems, it generates various power quality problems that have an
important impact on its distribution network. DC traction loads, fed through AC/DC rectifiers,
generates non-linear voltages and currents on the AC system, that will result in harmonic
voltage distortion of the power supply system. Traction power supply system creates power
quality problems to the corresponding grid, which can cause:

• Poor power quality

• Increase in operational cost due to less productivity
• Damage to sensitive equipment in nearby facilities.

GUID-45A6724C-1FF0-4910-9878-01518111EB26 v1
In general, harmonics can cause reduced equipment life if a system is designed without
considering the harmonics and if the equipment is not designed to withstand harmonics.
Hence, it is important to measure and monitor harmonics in power systems. Harmonic voltage
distortions on 161 kV power system and above is limited to 1.5% of total harmonic distortion
(THD), in with each individual harmonic is limited to 1.0%.

18.13.3 Setting guidelines GUID-57719753-00C3-43F6-97B5-AA3B22618A3F v1

The recommended limits for total harmonic distortion and individual harmonic distortion are
available in the IEEE 519 standard. The limits are based on measurements which are done at
the point of common coupling. It should not be applied to either individual pieces of
equipment or at locations within a user’s facility. In most cases, harmonic voltages and
currents at these locations could be found to be significantly beyond recommended limits at
the PCC due to the lack of diversity, cancellation, and other phenomena that tend to reduce
the combined effects of multiple harmonic sources to levels below their algebraic summation.

18.13.3.1 Setting procedure on the IED GUID-60CEC5EC-19DC-49E6-946C-FE3883B67975 v1

Parameters for VHMMHAI function are set via the local HMI or PCM600.
GUID-B3611E99-63AD-4722-BFAA-3BC089F9AFF6 v2
Common base IED values for primary voltage (UBase) is set in the global base values for
settings function GBASVAL.

GlobalBaseSel: It is used to select GBASVAL function for reference of base values.

Minimum and maximum voltage limit is set as 5% of the UB and 300.0% of UB

respectively. If the voltage is outside the above range, the calculation of total
harmonic distortion, individual harmonic distortion and crest factor are
blocked and outputs are provided as zero.

WrnLimitTHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated total harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlmTHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated total harmonic
distortion. This intimates the operator to take corrective operations immediately, otherwise
the system will undergo thermal stress.

WrnLimit2ndHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated second harmonic distortion.

Line distance protection REL670 701

Application manual
Section 18 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Monitoring

tDelayAlm2ndHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated second
harmonic distortion.

WrnLimit3rdHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated third harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm3rdHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated third
harmonic distortion.

WrnLimit4thHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated fourth harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm4thHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated fourth
harmonic distortion.

WrnLimit5thHD: It defines the warning limit for the calculated fifth harmonic distortion.

tDelayAlm5thHD: It defines the alarm delay time from warning for the calculated fifth
harmonic distortion.

702 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 19
Metering

Section 19 Metering

19.1 Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT IP14600-1 v3

19.1.1 Identification
M14879-1 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT -

S00947 V1 EN-US

19.1.2 Application M13395-3 v6

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally generated binary pulses, for instance
pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption values.
The pulses are captured by the binary input module (BIM), and read by the PCFCNT function.
The number of pulses in the counter is then reported via the station bus to the substation
automation system or read via the station monitoring system as a service value. When using
IEC 61850–8–1, a scaled service value is available over the station bus.

The normal use for this function is the counting of energy pulses from external energy meters.
An optional number of inputs from an arbitrary input module in IED can be used for this
purpose with a frequency of up to 40 Hz. The pulse-counter logic PCFCNT can also be used as a
general purpose counter.

19.1.3 Setting guidelines M13396-4 v9

Parameters that can be set individually for each pulse counter from PCM600:

• Operation: Off/On
• tReporting: 0-3600s
• EventMask: NoEvents/ReportEvents

Configuration of inputs and outputs of PCFCNT is made via PCM600.

On the Binary input module (BIM), the debounce filter default time is set to 1 ms, that is, the
counter suppresses pulses with a pulse length less than 1 ms. The input oscillation blocking
frequency is preset to 40 Hz meaning that the counter detects the input to oscillate if the
input frequency is greater than 40 Hz. Oscillation suppression is released at 30 Hz. Block/
release values for oscillation can be changed on the local HMI and PCM600 under Main menu/
Configuration/I/O modules.

Line distance protection REL670 703

Application manual
Section 19 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Metering

The setting is common for all input channels on BIM, that is, if limit changes are
made for inputs not connected to the pulse counter, the setting also influences
the inputs on the same board used for pulse counting.

19.2 Function for energy calculation and demand handling

ETPMMTR SEMOD153638-1 v2

19.2.1 Identification
SEMOD175537-2 v4

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Function for energy calculation and ETPMMTR W_Varh -
demand handling

19.2.2 Application SEMOD175546-4 v5

Energy calculation and demand handling function (ETPMMTR) is intended for statistics of the
forward and reverse active and reactive energy. It has a high accuracy basically given by the
measurements function (CVMMXN). This function has a site calibration possibility to further
increase the total accuracy.

The function is connected to the instantaneous outputs of (CVMMXN) as shown in figure 407.

ETPMMTR
CVMMXN
P_ INST P

Q_ INST Q

STARTACC

STOPACC

RSTACC

RSTDMD

IEC130 00190-2-en.vsdx
IEC13000190 V2 EN-US

Figure 407: Connection of energy calculation and demand handling function ETPMMTR to
the measurements function (CVMMXN)
The energy values can be read through communication in MWh and MVArh in monitoring tool
of PCM600 and/or alternatively the values can be presented on the local HMI. The local HMI
graphical display is configured with PCM600 Graphical Display Editor tool (GDE) with a
measuring value which is selected to the active and reactive component as preferred. Also all
Accumulated Active Forward, Active Reverse, Reactive Forward and Reactive Reverse energy
values can be presented.

Maximum demand values are presented in MWh or MVArh in the same way.

704 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 19
Metering

Alternatively, the energy values can be presented with use of the pulse counters function
(PCGGIO). The output energy values are scaled with the pulse output setting values
EAFAccPlsQty, EARAccPlsQty, ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty of the energy metering
function and then the pulse counter can be set-up to present the correct values by scaling in
this function. Pulse counter values can then be presented on the local HMI in the same way
and/or sent to the SA (Substation Automation) system through communication where the
total energy then is calculated by summation of the energy pulses. This principle is good for
very high values of energy as the saturation of numbers else will limit energy integration to
about one year with 50 kV and 3000 A. After that the accumulation will start on zero again.

19.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD175556-4 v6

The parameters are set via the local HMI or PCM600.

The following settings can be done for the energy calculation and demand handling function
ETPMMTR:

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define IBase, UBase
and SBase. Note that this function will only use IBase value.

Operation: Off/On

EnaAcc: Off/On is used to switch the accumulation of energy on and off.

tEnergy: Time interval when energy is measured.

tEnergyOnPls: gives the pulse length ON time of the pulse. It should be at least 100 ms when
connected to the Pulse counter function block. Typical value can be 100 ms.

tEnergyOffPls: gives the OFF time between pulses. Typical value can be 100 ms.

EAFAccPlsQty and EARAccPlsQty: gives the MWh value in each pulse. It should be selected
together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the correct total pulse
value.

ERFAccPlsQty and ERVAccPlsQty : gives the MVArh value in each pulse. It should be selected
together with the setting of the Pulse counter (PCGGIO) settings to give the correct total pulse
value.

For the advanced user there are a number of settings for direction, zero clamping, max limit,
and so on. Normally, the default values are suitable for these parameters.

Line distance protection REL670 705

Application manual
706
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 20
Ethernet-based communication

Section 20 Ethernet-based communication

20.1 Access point

20.1.1 Application GUID-2942DF07-9BC1-4F49-9611-A5691D2C925C v1

The access points are used to connect the IED to the communication buses (like the station
bus) that use communication protocols. The access point can be used for single and
redundant data communication. The access points are also used for communication with the
merging units and for time synchronization using Precision Time Protocol (PTP).

20.1.2 Setting guidelines GUID-CEDC23B1-09F6-4C85-98D8-9D8E2C2553FE v2

The physical ports allocated to access points 2–6 have to be added in the
hardware tool in PCM600 before the access points can be configured. The
factory setting only includes the physical ports allocated to the front port and
access point 1.

The settings for the access points are configured using the Ethernet configuration tool (ECT)
in PCM600.

The access point is activated if the Operation checkbox is checked for the respective access
point and a partial or common write to IED is performed.

To increase security, it is recommended to deactivate the access point when it

is not in use.

Redundancy and PTP cannot be set for the front port (Access point 0) as redundant
communication and PTP are only available for the rear optical Ethernet ports.

Subnetwork shows the SCL subnetwork to which the access point is connected. This column
shows the SCL subnetworks available in the PCM600 project. SCL subnetworks can be
created/deleted in the Subnetworks tab of IEC 61850 Configuration tool in PCM600.

When saving the ECT configuration after selecting a subnetwork, ECT creates
the access point in the SCL model. Unselecting the subnetwork removes the
access point from the SCL model. This column is editable for IEC61850 Ed2 IEDs
and not editable for IEC61850 Ed1 IEDs because in IEC61850 Ed1 only one
access point can be modelled in SCL.

The IP address can be set in IP address. ECT validates the value, the access points have to be
on separate subnetworks.

The subnetwork mask can be set in Subnet mask. This field will be updated to the SCL model
based on the Subnetwork selection.

To select which communication protocols can be run on the respective access points, check or
uncheck the check box for the relevant protocol. The protocols are not activated/deactivated

Line distance protection REL670 707

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Ethernet-based communication

in ECT, only filtered for the specific access point. For information on how to activate the
individual communication protocols, see the communication protocol chapters.

To increase security it is recommended to uncheck protocols that are not used

on the access point.

The default gateway can be selected by entering the IP address in Default gateway. The default
gateway is the router that is used to communicate with the devices in the other subnetwork.
By default this is set to 0.0.0.0 which means that no default gateway is selected. ECT validates
the entered value, but the default gateway has to be in the same subnetwork as the access
point. The default gateway is the router that is being used as default, that is when no route
has been set up for the destination. If communication with a device in another subnetwork is
needed, a route has to be set up. For more information on routes, see the Routes chapter in
the Technical manual and the Application manual.

DHCP can be activated for the front port from the LHMI in Main menu/Configuration/
Communication/Ethernet configuration/Front port/DHCP:1

20.2 Redundant communication

20.2.1 Identification
GUID-B7AE0374-0336-42B8-90AF-3AE1C79A4116 v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy PRP - -
protocol
IEC 62439-3 High-availability HSR - -
seamless redundancy
Access point diagnostic for RCHLCCH - -
redundant Ethernet ports

20.2.2 Application GUID-172BA5D7-6532-4B0D-8C1D-2E02F70B4FCB v1

Dynamic access point diagnostic (RCHLCCH) is used to supervise and assure redundant
Ethernet communication over two channels. This will secure data transfer even though one
communication channel might not be available for some reason

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) and High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR) provides
redundant communication over station bus running the available communication protocols.
The redundant communication uses two Ethernet ports.

708 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 20
Ethernet-based communication

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

Switch A Switch B

PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC09000758-4-en.vsd
IEC09000758 V4 EN-US

Figure 408: Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP)

Device 1 Device 2

AP1 AP1
PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB

PhyPortB PhyPortA PhyPortB PhyPortA

AP1 AP1

Device 3 Device 4

IEC16000038-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000038 V1 EN-US

Figure 409: High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

20.2.3 Setting guidelines GUID-887B0AE2-0F2E-414D-96FD-7EC935C5D2D8 v1

Redundant communication is configured with the Ethernet configuration tool in PCM600.

Line distance protection REL670 709

Application manual
Section 20 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Ethernet-based communication

Redundancy: redundant communication is activated when the parameter is set to PRP-0, PRP-1
or HSR. The settings for the next access point will be hidden and PhyPortB will show the
second port information. Redundant communication is activated after a common write to IED
is done.

PRP-1 should be used primarily, PRP-0 is intended only for use in existing PRP-networks. PRP-1
and HSR can be combined in a mixed network.

If the access point is not taken into operation, the write option in Ethernet Configuration Tool
can be used to activate the access point.

IEC16000039-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000039 V1 EN-US

Figure 410: ECT screen with Redundancy set to PRP-1 on Access point 1 and HSR Access
point 3

20.3 Merging unit

20.3.1 Application GUID-E630C16F-EDB8-40AE-A8A2-94189982D15F v1

The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus communication protocol enables an IED to

communicate with devices providing measured values in digital format, commonly known as
Merging Units (MU). The rear access points are used for the communication.

The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more
measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients
(or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data from classical
measuring transformers, others from non-conventional measuring transducers and yet others
can pick up data from both types.

710 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 20
Ethernet-based communication

IEC17000044-1-en.vsdx
IEC17000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 411: Merging unit

20.3.2 Setting guidelines GUID-3449AB24-8C9D-4D9A-BD46-5DDF59A0F8E3 v1

For information on the merging unit setting guidelines, see section IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
communication protocol.

20.4 Routes

20.4.1 Application GUID-19616AC4-0FFD-4FF4-9198-5E33938E5ABD v1

Setting up a route enables communication to a device that is located in another subnetwork.

Routing is used when the destination device is not in the same subnetwork as the default
gateway.

The route specifies that when a package is sent to the destination device it should be sent
through the selected router. If no route is specified the source device will not find the
destination device.

20.4.2 Setting guidelines GUID-2C4A312A-00DC-44C8-B2D9-CD0822E1C806 v1

Routes are configured using the Ethernet configuration tool in PCM600.

Operation for the route can be set to On/Off by checking and unchecking the check-box in the
operation column.

Gateway specifies the address of the gateway.

Destination specifies the destination.

Destination subnet mask specifies the subnetwork mask of the destination.

Line distance protection REL670 711

Application manual
712
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

Section 21 Station communication

21.1 Communication protocols M14815-3 v14

Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces enabling it to connect to one or
many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation (SA) bus or
Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Available communication protocols are:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
• C37.118 communication protocol

Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

21.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol IP14616-1 v2

21.2.1 Application IEC 61850-8-1 IP14865-1 v2

M13912-3 v4
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol allows vertical communication to HSI clients and allows
horizontal communication between two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from one
or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the performance of their functions
and for correct co-operation.

GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC 61850–8–1 standard,
allows the IEDs to communicate state and control information amongst themselves, using a
publish-subscribe mechanism. That is, upon detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast
transmission to notify those devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can, by
publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can also request a control action to be
directed at any device in the network.
M13913-3 v6
Figure 412 shows the topology of an IEC 61850–8–1 configuration. IEC 61850–8–1 specifies only
the interface to the substation LAN. The LAN itself is left to the system integrator.

Line distance protection REL670 713

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Engineering
Station HSI
Workstation Gateway
Base System
SMS
CC

Printer

IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED IED

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

KIOSK 1 KIOSK 2 KIOSK 3

IEC09000135_en.v
sd
IEC09000135 V1 EN-US

Figure 412: SA system with IEC 61850–8–1

M16925-3 v4
Figure413 shows the GOOSE peer-to-peer communication.

Station HSI
MicroSCADA
Gateway

GOOSE

IED IED IED IED IED

A A A A A

Control Protection Control and protection Control Protection

en05000734.vsd
IEC05000734 V1 EN-US

Figure 413: Example of a broadcasted GOOSE message

21.2.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55317-5 v7

There are two settings related to the IEC 61850–8–1 protocol:

Operation: User can set IEC 61850 communication to On or Off.

714 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

GOOSEPortEd1: Selection of the Ethernet link where GOOSE traffic shall be sent and received.
This is only valid for Edition 1 and can be ignored if Edition 2 is used. For Edition 2, the
Ethernet link selection is done with the Ethernet Configuration Tool (ECT) in PCM600.

21.2.3 Horizontal communication via GOOSE

21.2.3.1 Sending data GUID-9888ECAD-8221-4B31-A443-EB1E3A9022C4 v1

In addition to the data object and data attributes of the logical nodes, it is possible to send
the outputs of the function blocks using the generic communication blocks. The outputs of
this function can be set in a dataset and be sent in a GOOSE Control Block to other subscriber
IEDs. There are different function blocks for different type of sending data.

Generic communication function for Single Point indication SPGAPC, SP16GAPC SEMOD55999-1 v4

Application SEMOD55350-5 v8
Generic communication function for Single Point Value (SPGAPC) function is used to send one
single logical output to other systems or equipment in the substation. SP16GAPC can be used
to send up to 16 single point values from the application functions running in the same cycle
time. SPGAPC has one visible input and SPGAPC16 has 16 visible inputs that should be
connected in the ACT tool.

Setting guidelines SEMOD55376-5 v5

There are no settings available for the user for SPGAPC.

Generic communication function for Measured Value MVGAPC SEMOD55402-1 v3

Application SEMOD55872-5 v10

Generic communication function for measured values (MVGAPC) function is used to send the
instantaneous value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the substation. It
can also be used inside the same IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to
permit measurement supervision on that value.

Setting guidelines SEMOD55424-5 v5

The settings available for Generic communication function for Measured Value (MVGAPC)
function allows the user to choose a deadband and a zero deadband for the monitored signal.
Values within the zero deadband are considered as zero.

The high and low limit settings provides limits for the high-high-, high, normal, low and low-
low ranges of the measured value. The actual range of the measured value is shown on the
range output of MVGAPC function block. When a Measured value expander block (RANGE_XP)
is connected to the range output, the logical outputs of the RANGE_XP are changed
accordingly.

21.2.3.2 Receiving data GUID-CAE4B020-7131-49BF-BA29-3EEE0EFEA2B8 v2

The GOOSE data must be received at function blocks. There are different GOOSE receiving
function blocks depending on the type of the received data. Refer to the Engineering manual
for more information about how to configure GOOSE.

Function block type Data Type

GOOSEBINRCV 16 single point
GOOSEINTLKRCV 2 single points
16 double points
GOOSEDPRCV Double point
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 715

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Function block type Data Type

GOOSEINTRCV Integer
GOOSEMVRCV Analog value
GOOSESPRCV Single point
GOOSEXLNRCV Switch status

Application GUID-808177B7-02CA-40DF-B41B-8B580E38478B v1
The GOOSE receive function blocks are used to receive subscribed data from the GOOSE
protocol. The validity of the data value is exposed as outputs of the function block as well as
the validity of the communication. It is recommended to use these outputs to ensure that only
valid data is handled on the subscriber IED. An example could be to control the external
reservation before operating on a bay. In the figure below, the GOOSESPRCV is used to receive
the status of the bay reservation. The validity of the received data is used in additional logic to
guarantee that the value has good quality before operation on that bay.

GOOSESPRCV AND AND

Block Spout Input1 out Input1 out

Ext_Res_OK_To_Operate
DataValid Input2 Noput Input2 Noput
CommValid Input3 Input3
Test Input4 Input4
IEC16000082=1=en.vsd
IEC16000082 V1 EN-US

Figure 414: GOOSESPRCV and AND function blocks - checking the validity of the received
data

21.3 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol SEMOD172279 v3

21.3.1 Introduction SEMOD166571-1 v2

SEMOD166590-5 v6
Every IED can be provided with communication interfaces enabling it to connect to the
process buses in order to get data from analog data acquisition units close to the process
(primary apparatus), commonly known as Merging Units (MU). The protocol used in this case is
the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol.

The IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE standard does not specify the quality of the sampled values. Thus,
the accuracy of the current and voltage inputs to the merging unit and the inaccuracy added
by the merging unit must be coordinated with the requirement for the actual type of
protection function.

Factors influencing the accuracy of the sampled values from the merging unit are, for example,
anti aliasing filters, frequency range, step response, truncating, A/D conversion inaccuracy,
time tagging accuracy etc.

In principle, the accuracy of the current and voltage transformers, together with the merging
unit, will have the same quality as the direct input of currents and voltages.

The process bus physical layout can be arranged in several ways, described in Annex B of the
standard, depending on what are the needs for sampled data in a substation.

716 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

Events Printer Printer

SDM600 Maintenance Center Network Control Center WAMS

IEC 6185 0

Engineering Computer HMI AFS 6xx

Firewall Workstation FOX615
VPN

Gateway

AFS 6xx NSD570

AFS 6xx AFS 6xx

IET600 PCM600 ITT600

SAM600 SAM600 SAM600

IEC18000011-1-en.vsdx

IEC18000011 V1 EN-US

Figure 415: Example of a station configuration with separated process bus and station
bus
The IED can get analog values simultaneously from a classical CT or VT and from a Merging
Unit, like in this example:

The merging units (MU) are called so because they can gather analog values from one or more
measuring transformers, sample the data and send the data over process bus to other clients
(or subscribers) in the system. Some merging units are able to get data from classical
measuring transformers, others from non-conventional measuring transducers and yet others
can pick up data from both types. The electronic part of a non-conventional measuring
transducer (like a Rogowski coil or a capacitive divider) can represent a MU by itself as long as
it can send sampled data over process bus.

Line distance protection REL670 717

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Station Wide Station Wide

SCADA System GPS Clock

IEC61850-8-1

Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter

IEC61850-8-1

110 V
Other 1A IED 1PPS
Relays 1A

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch

IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB
1PPS
Merging
Unit

Combi
CT CT
Sensor

Conventional VT
en08000069-3.vsd

IEC08000069 V2 EN-US

Figure 416: Example of a station configuration with the IED receiving analog values from
both classical measuring transformers and merging units.

718 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

Station Wide Station Wide

SCADA System GPS Clock

IEC61850-8-1

Splitter
Electrical-to-
Optical Converter

IEC61850-8-1

Other IED 1PPS

Relays

IEC61850-9-2LE

Ethernet Switch

IEC61850-9-2LE

ABB
1PPS
Merging
Unit

Combi
Sensor

en08000070-3.vsd

IEC08000070 V2 EN-US

Figure 417: Example of a station configuration with the IED receiving analogue values
from merging units

21.3.2 Setting guidelines GUID-29B296B3-6185-459F-B06F-8E7F0C6C9460 v4

Merging Units (MUs) have several settings on local HMI under:

• Main menu/Configuration/Analog modules/MUx:92xx. The corresponding settings are

also available in PST (PCM600).
• Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Merging units configuration/MUx:92xx. The
corresponding settings are also available in ECT (PCM600).

XX can take value 01–12.

Line distance protection REL670 719

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

21.3.2.1 Specific settings related to the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication SEMOD166590-24 v6

The process bus communication IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE has specific settings, similar to the
analog inputs modules.

If there are more than one sample group involved, time synch is mandatory. If there is no time
synchronization, the protection functions will be blocked due to condition blocking.

CTStarPointx: These parameters specify the direction to or from object. See also section
"Setting of current channels".

SyncLostMode: If this parameter is set to Block and the IED hardware time synchronization is
lost or the synchronization to the MU time is lost, the protection functions in the list 71 will be
blocked due to conditional blocking. If this parameter is set to BlockOnLostUTC, the
protection functions in list 71 are blocked if the IED hardware time synchronization is lost or
the synchronization of the MU time is lost or the IED has lost global common synchronization
(i.e. GPS, IRIG-B or PTP). SYNCH output will be set if IED hardware time synchronization is lost.
MUSYNCH output will be set if either of MU or IED hardware time synchronization is lost.

21.3.2.2 Loss of communication when used with LDCM GUID-29EFBCB7-2B4F-4AA1-B593-8E89838722E0 v5

If IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication is lost, see examples in figures 418, 419 and 420, the
protection functions in table 71 are blocked as per graceful degradation.

Case 1:

local Direct transfer trip (DTT) remote

OK
OK
IED IED

MU

IEC13000298-2-en.vsd

IEC13000298 V2 EN-US

Figure 418: Normal operation

Case 2:

Failure of the MU (sample lost) blocks the sending of binary signals through LDCM. The
received binary signals are not blocked and processd normally.

→DTT from the remote end is still processed.

720 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

local Direct transfer trip (DTT) remote

Not OK
OK
IED IED

MU

IEC13000299-2-en.vsd

IEC13000299 V2 EN-US

Figure 419: MU failed, mixed system

Case 3:

Failure of one MU (sample lost) blocks the sending and receiving of binary signals through
LDCM.

→DTT from the remote end is not working.

local Direct transfer trip (DTT) remote

Not OK
Not OK
IED IED

MU MU

IEC13000300-2-en.vsd

IEC13000300 V2 EN-US

Figure 420: MU failed, 9-2 system

Table 71: Blocked protection functions if IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication is interrupted and functions
are connected to specific MUs
Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Accidental energizing AEGPVOC Two step overvoltage OV2PTOV
protection for protection
synchronous generator
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC Four step single phase PH4SPTOC
overcurrent protection
Capacitor bank CBPGAPC Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC
protection
Pole discordance CCPDSC Instantaneous phase PHPIOC
protection overcurrent protection
Breaker failure CCRBRF PoleSlip/Out-of-step PSPPPAM
protection protection
Breaker failure CCSRBRF Restricted earth fault REFPDIF
protection, single phase protection, low
version impedance
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 721

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Current circuit CCSSPVC Two step residual ROV2PTOV
supervison overvoltage protection
Compensated over- and COUVGAPC Rate-of-change SAPFRC
undervoltage protection frequency protection
General currrent and CVGAPC Overfrequency SAPTOF
voltage protection protection
Current reversal and ECRWPSCH Underfrequency SAPTUF
weakend infeed logic for protection
residual overcurrent
protection
Four step residual EF4PTOC Sudden change in SCCVPTOC
overcurrent protection current variation
Instantaneous residual EFPIOC Sensitive Directional SDEPSDE
overcurrent protection residual over current and
power protetcion
Phase selection, FDPSPDIS Synchrocheck, energizing SESRSYN
quadrilateral check, and synchronizing
characteristic with fixed
angle
Faulty phase FMPSPDIS Circuit breaker condition SSCBR
identification with load monitoring
enchroachment
Phase selection, FRPSPDIS Insulation gas SSIMG
quadrilateral monitoring
characteristic with
settable angle
Frequency time FTAQFVR Insulation liquid SSIML
accumulation protection monitoring
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC Stub protection STBPTOC
Generator differential GENPDIF Transformer differential T2WPDIF
protection protection, two winding
Directional Overpower GOPPDOP Transformer differential T3WPDIF
protection protection, three
winding
Generator rotor overload GRPTTR Automatic voltage TR1ATCC
protection control for tapchanger,
single control
Generator stator GSPTTR Automatic voltage TR8ATCC
overload protection control for tapchanger,
parallel control
Directional Underpower GUPPDUP Thermal overload TRPTTR
protection protection, two time
constants
1Ph High impedance HZPDIF Two step undervoltage UV2PTUV
differential protection protection
Line differential L3CPDIF Voltage differential VDCPTOV
protection, 3 CT sets, 2-3 protection
line ends
Line differential L6CPDIF Fuse failure supervision VDRFUF
protection, 6 CT sets, 3-5
line ends
Low active power and LAPPGAPC Voltage-restrained time VRPVOC
power factor protection overcurrent protection
Negative sequence LCNSPTOC Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH
overcurrent protection
Table continues on next page

722 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Negative sequence LCNSPTOV Scheme communication ZCPSCH
overvoltage protection logic for distance or
overcurrent protection
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC Current reversal and ZCRWPSCH
weak-end infeed logic for
distance protection
Three phase LCP3PTUC Automatic switch onto ZCVPSOF
undercurrent fault logic, voltage and
current based
Thermal overload LCPTTR Under impedance ZGVPDIS
protection, one time protection for generator
constant
Zero sequence LCZSPTOC Fast distance protection ZMFCPDIS
overcurrent protection
Zero sequence LCZSPTOV High speed distance ZMFPDIS
overvoltage protection protection
Line differential LDLPSCH Distance measuring ZMCAPDIS
coordination zone, quadrilateral
characteristic for series
compensated lines
Additional security logic LDRGFC Distance measuring ZMCPDIS
for differential zone, quadrilateral
protection characteristic for series
compensated lines
Loss of excitation LEXPDIS Fullscheme distance ZMHPDIS
protection, mho
characteristic
Thermal overload LFPTTR Fullscheme distance ZMMAPDIS
protection, one time protection, quadrilateral
constant for earth faults
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV Fullscheme distance ZMMPDIS
protection, quadrilateral
for earth faults
Line differential LT3CPDIF Distance protection ZMQAPDIS
protection 3 CT sets, zone, quadrilateral
with inzone characteristic
transformers, 2-3 line
ends
Line differential LT6CPDIF Distance protection ZMQPDIS
protection 6 CT sets, zone, quadrilateral
with inzone characteristic
transformers, 3-5 line
ends
Negativ sequence time NS2PTOC Distance protection ZMRAPDIS
overcurrent protection zone, quadrilateral
for machines characteristic, separate
settings
Four step directional NS4PTOC Distance protection ZMRPDIS
negative phase sequence zone, quadrilateral
overcurrent protection characteristic, separate
settings
Four step phase OC4PTOC Power swing detection ZMRPSB
overcurrent protection
Overexcitation OEXPVPH Mho Impedance ZSMGAPC
protection supervision logic
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM Transformer tank TPPIOC
overcurrent protection
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 723

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Function description IEC 61850 identification Function description IEC 61850 identification
Busbar differential BCZPDIF Busbar differential BICPTRC_x, (1≤x≤5)
protection, check zone protection, bus
interconnection xx
Busbar differential BDZSGAPC Busbar differential BZNPDIF_Zx, (1≤x≤6)
protection, dynamic zone protection, zone 1
selection
Busbar differential BFPTRC_Fx, (1≤x≤24) Through fault PTRSTHR
protection, single phase monitoring
feeder xx
Voltage delta DELVSPVC Current delta DELISPVC
supervision, 2 phase supervision, 2 phase
DELSPVC Current harmonic CHMMHAN
monitoring, 2 phase

21.3.2.3 Setting examples for IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE and time synchronization GUID-CEDD520A-8A13-41DF-BFF1-8A3B4C00E098 v3

The IED and the Merging Units (MU) should use the same time reference especially if analog
data is used from several sources, for example from an internal TRM and an MU, or if several
physical MUs are used. Having the same time reference is important to correlate data so that
channels from different sources refer to the correct phase angle.

When only one MU is used as an analog source, it is theoretically possible to do without time
synchronization. However, this would mean that timestamps for analog and binary data/
events become uncorrelated. If the IED has no time synchronization source configured, then
the binary data/events will be synchronized with the merging unit. However, the global/
complete time might not be correct. Disturbance recordings then appear incorrect since
analog data is timestamped by MU, and binary events use the internal IED time. It is thus
recommended to use time synchronization also when analog data emanate from only one MU.

An external time source can be used to synchronize both the IED and the MU. It is also possible
to use the MU as a clock master to synchronize the IED from the MU. When using an external
clock, it is possible to set the IED to be synchronized via PPS,IRIG-B or PTP. It is also possible to
use an internal GPS receiver in the IED (if the external clock is using GPS).

724 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

Using PTP for synchronizing the MU

IED

9-2 PTP

SAM600 TS

SAM600 VT SAM600 CT

IEC17000040-1-en.vsdx

IEC17000040 V1 EN-US

Figure 421: Setting example with PTP synchronization

Settings on the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization/
TIMESYNCHGEN:1/IEC61850-9-2:

• HwSyncSrc: is not used as the SW-time and HW-time are connected with each other due to
PTP
• SyncLostMode : set to Block to block protection functions if time synchronization is lost
or set to BlockOnLostUTC if the protection functions are to be blocked when global
common synchronization is lost
• SyncAccLevel: can be set to 1μs since this corresponds to a maximum phase angle error of
0.018 degrees at 50Hz

Settings on the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Ethernet

configuration/Access point/AP_X:

• Operation: On
• PTP: On

Two status monitoring signals can be:

• SYNCH signal on the MUx function block indicates that protection functions are blocked
due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED
• MUSYNCH signal on the MUx function block monitors the synchronization flag smpSynch
in the datastream and IED hardware time synchronization.

Line distance protection REL670 725

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Using MU for time synchronization via PPS

This example is not valid when GPS time is used for differential protection,
when PTP is enabled or when the PMU report is used.

IED

PPS
Synchronization

IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
Analog data

MU

IEC10000061=2=en=Original.vsd

IEC10000061 V2 EN-US

Figure 422: Setting example when MU is the synchronizing source

Settings on the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization/
TIMESYNCHGEN:1/IEC61850-9-2:

• HwSyncSrc: set to PPS as generated by the MU (ABB MU)

• SyncLostMode : set to Block to block protection functions if time synchronization is lost
• SyncAccLevel: can be set to 4μs since this corresponds to a maximum phase angle error of
0.072 degrees at 50Hz

Settings on the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization/

TIMESYNCHGEN:1/General:

• fineSyncSource can be set to something different to correlate events and data to other
IEDs in the station.

Two status monitoring signals can be:

• SYNCH signal on the MUx function block indicates that protection functions are blocked
due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED.
• MUSYNCH signal on the MUx function block monitors the synchronization flag smpSynch
in the datastream and IED hardware time synchronization.

SMPLLOST indicates that merging unit data are generated by internal substitution or one/
more channel's Quality is not good or merging unit is in Testmode/detailed quality=Test, IED
is not in test mode.

Using external clock for time synchronization

This example is not valid when GPS time is used for differential protection,
when PTP is enabled or when the PMU report is used.

726 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

PPS / IRIG-B
IED

IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE
data
STATION
CLOCK

PPS
MU

IEC10000074=2=en=Original.vsd

IEC10000074 V2 EN-US

Figure 423: Setting example with external synchronization

Settings on the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization/
TIMESYNCHGEN:1/IEC61850-9-2:

• HwSyncSrc: set to PPS/IRIG-B depending on available outputs on the clock.

• SyncLostMode: set to Block to block protection functions if time synchronization is lost.
• SyncAccLevel: can be set to 4μs since this corresponds to a maximum phase angle error of
0.072 degrees at 50Hz.
• fineSyncSource: should be set to IRIG-B if available from the clock. If PPS is used for
HWSyncSrc , “full-time” has to be acquired from another source. If station clock is on the
local area network (LAN) and has an sntp-server, this is one option.

Two status monitoring signals can be:

• SYNCH signal on the MUx function block indicates that protection functions are blocked
due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED (that is loss of the hardware
synchSrc).
• MUSYNCH signal on the MUx function block monitors the synchronization flag smpSynch
in the datastream and IED hardware time synchronization.

No time synchronization

This example is not valid when GPS time is used for differential protection,
when PTP is enabled or when the PMU report is used.

Line distance protection REL670 727

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

IED

IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE

Data

MU

IEC10000075=2=en=Original.vsd

IEC10000075 V2 EN-US

Figure 424: Setting example without time synchronization

It is also possible to use IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication without time synchronization.

Settings on the local HMI under Main menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization/

TIMESYNCHGEN:1/IEC61850-9-2:

• HwSyncSrc: set to Off

• SyncLostMode: set to No block to indicate that protection functions are not blocked
• SyncAccLevel: set to unspecified

Two status monitoring signals with no time synchronization:

• SYNCH signal on the MUx function block indicates that protection functions are blocked
due to loss of internal time synchronization to the IED. Since SyncLostMode is set to No
block, this signal is not set.
• MUSYNCH signal on the MUx function block is set if the datastream indicates time
synchronization loss. However, protection functions are not blocked.

To get higher availability in protection functions, it is possible to avoid blocking during time
synchronization loss if there is a single source of analog data. This means that if there is only
one physical MU and no TRM, parameter SyncLostMode is set to No block but parameter
HwSyncSrc is still set to PPS. This maintains analog and binary data correlation in disturbance
recordings without blocking protection functions if PPS is lost.

21.3.3 IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP GUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1

The quality expander component is used to display the detailed quality of an IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE analog channel. The component expands the channel quality output of a Merging
Unit analog channel received in the IED as per the IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component can
be used during the ACT monitoring to get the particular channel quality of the Merging Unit.

Figure 425 depicts the usage of the quality expander block in ACT.

728 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

IEC16000073-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000073 V1 EN-US

Figure 425: Quality expander block in ACT

The expanded quality bits are visible on the outputs as per IEC 61850-7-3 standard. When
written to IED, the configuration will show the expanded form of the respective MU channel
quality information during the online monitoring in the ACT.

The quality expander function is intended for monitoring purposes, not for
being used in a logic controlling the behaviour of the protection or control
functions in the IED. The function outputs are updated once every second and,
therefore, do not reflect the quality bits in real time.

21.4 LON communication protocol IP14420-1 v1

21.4.1 Application IP14863-1 v1

M14804-3 v6

Station HSI Control Center

MicroSCADA

Gateway

Star coupler
RER 111

IED IED IED

IEC05000663-1-en.vsd
IEC05000663 V2 EN-US

Figure 426: Example of LON communication structure for a substation automation

system
An optical network can be used within the substation automation system. This enables
communication with the IEDs through the LON bus from the operator’s workplace, from the
control center and also from other IEDs via bay-to-bay horizontal communication. For LON
communication an SLM card should be ordered for the IEDs.

Line distance protection REL670 729

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

The fiber optic LON bus is implemented using either glass core or plastic core fiber optic
cables.

Table 72: Specification of the fiber optic connectors

Glass fiber Plastic fiber
Cable connector ST-connector snap-in connector
Cable diameter 62.5/125 m 1 mm
Max. cable length 1000 m 10 m
Wavelength 820-900 nm 660 nm
Transmitted power -13 dBm (HFBR-1414) -13 dBm (HFBR-1521)
Receiver sensitivity -24 dBm (HFBR-2412) -20 dBm (HFBR-2521)

The LON Protocol M14804-32 v2

The LON protocol is specified in the LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 from Echelon
Corporation. This protocol is designed for communication in control networks and is a peer-
to-peer protocol where all the devices connected to the network can communicate with each
other directly. For more information of the bay-to-bay communication, refer to the section
Multiple command function.

Hardware and software modules M14804-35 v5

The hardware needed for applying LON communication depends on the application, but one
very central unit needed is the LON Star Coupler and optical fibers connecting the star coupler
to the IEDs. To interface the IEDs from the MicroSCADA with Classic Monitor, application
library LIB520 is required.

The HV Control 670 software module is included in the LIB520 high-voltage process package,
which is a part of the Application Software Library in MicroSCADA applications.

The HV Control 670 software module is used for control functions in the IEDs. The module
contains a process picture, dialogues and a tool to generate a process database for the
control application in MicroSCADA.

When using MicroSCADA Monitor Pro instead of the Classic Monitor, SA LIB is used together
with 670 series Object Type files.

The HV Control 670 software module and 670 series Object Type files are used
with both 650 and 670 series IEDs.

Use the LON Network Tool (LNT) to set the LON communication. This is a software tool
applied as one node on the LON bus. To communicate via LON, the IEDs need to know

• The node addresses of the other connected IEDs.

• The network variable selectors to be used.

This is organized by LNT.

The node address is transferred to LNT via the local HMI by setting the parameter
ServicePinMsg = Yes. The node address is sent to LNT via the LON bus, or LNT can scan the
network for new nodes.

The communication speed of the LON bus is set to the default of 1.25 Mbit/s. This can be
changed by LNT.

730 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

21.4.2 MULTICMDRCV and MULTICMDSND SEMOD119881-1 v3

21.4.2.1 Identification
GUID-1A6E066C-6399-4D37-8CA5-3074537E48B2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Multiple command and receive MULTICMDRCV - -
Multiple command and send MULTICMDSND - -

21.4.2.2 Application M14790-3 v5

The IED provides two function blocks enabling several IEDs to send and receive signals via the
interbay bus. The sending function block, MULTICMDSND, takes 16 binary inputs. LON enables
these to be transmitted to the equivalent receiving function block, MULTICMDRCV, which has
16 binary outputs.

21.4.2.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD119915-1 v1

Settings M14789-4 v3
The parameters for the multiple command function are set via PCM600.

The Mode setting sets the outputs to either a Steady or Pulsed mode.

21.5 SPA communication protocol IP14614-1 v1

21.5.1 Application IP14785-1 v1

SEMOD115767-5 v7
SPA communication protocol is an alternative to IEC 60870-5-103, and they use the same rear
communication port.

When communicating with a PC connected to the utility substation LAN via WAN and the utility
office LAN (see Figure 427), and when using the rear optical Ethernet port, the only hardware
required for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibers from the IED to the utility substation LAN

• PC connected to the utility office LAN

Line distance protection REL670 731

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Utility LAN
Remote
monitoring
WAN

Substation LAN

IED IED IED

IEC05000715-4-en.vsd

IEC05000715 V4 EN-US

Figure 427: SPA communication structure for a remote monitoring system via a
substation LAN, WAN and utility LAN
SPA communication is mainly used for the Station Monitoring System. It can include different
IEDs with remote communication possibilities. Connection to a PC can be made directly (if the
PC is located in the substation), via a telephone modem through a telephone network with ITU
(former CCITT) characteristics or via a LAN/WAN connection.

glass <1000 m according to optical budget

plastic <25 m (inside cubicle) according to optical budget

Functionality SEMOD115767-25 v3
The SPA protocol V2.5 is an ASCII-based protocol for serial communication. The
communication is based on a master-slave principle, where the IED is a slave and the PC is the
master. Only one master can be applied on each fiber optic loop. A program is required in the
master computer for interpretation of the SPA-bus codes and for translation of the data that
should be sent to the IED.

For the specification of the SPA protocol V2.5, refer to SPA-bus Communication Protocol V2.5.

21.5.2 Setting guidelines M11876-3 v7

SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3 use the same rear communication port. This port can be set
for SPA use on the local HMI under Main menu /Configuration /Communication /Station
communication/Port configuration/SLM optical serial port/PROTOCOL:1. When the
communication protocol is selected, the IED is automatically restarted, and the port then
operates as a SPA port.

The SPA communication setting parameters are set on the local HMI under Main menu/
Configuration/Communication/Station communication/SPA/SPA:1.

The most important SPA communication setting parameters are SlaveAddress and BaudRate.
They are essential for all communication contact to the IED. SlaveAddress and BaudRate can
be set only on the local HMI for rear and front channel communication.

SlaveAddress can be set to any value between 1–899 as long as the slave number is unique
within the used SPA loop. BaudRate (communication speed) can be set between 300–38400
baud. BaudRate should be the same for the whole station although different communication
speeds in a loop are possible. If different communication speeds are used in the same fiber

732 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

optical loop or RS485 network, take this into account when making the communication setup
in the communication master (the PC).

With local fiber optic communication, communication speed is usually set to 19200 or 38400
baud. With telephone communication, the speed setting depends on the quality of the
connection and the type of modem used. Refer to technical data to determine the rated
communication speed for the selected communication interfaces.

The IED does not adapt its speed to the actual communication conditions
because the communication speed is set on the local HMI.

21.6 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol IP14615-1 v2

21.6.1 Application IP14864-1 v1

M17109-3 v7

TCP/IP

Control Center
Station HSI

Gateway

Star coupler

IED IED IED

IEC05000660-4-en.vsd
IEC05000660 V4 EN-US

Figure 428: Example of IEC 60870-5-103 communication structure for a substation

automation system
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection IED communicates
with a third party control or monitoring system. This system must have software that can
interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.

When communicating locally in the station using a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote
Terminal Unit (RTU) connected to the Communication and processing module, the only
hardware needed is optical fibers and an opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU, or a RS-485
connection depending on the used IED communication interface.

Line distance protection REL670 733

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

21.6.1.1 Functionality M17109-38 v3

IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serial communication

exchanging information with a control system. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master
and a secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point principle.
The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to IEC 60870 standard part 5:
Transmission protocols, and to the section 103, Companion standard for the informative
interface of protection equipment.

21.6.1.2 Design M17109-41 v1

General M17109-43 v2
The protocol implementation consists of the following functions:

• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurands)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization

Hardware M17109-59 v2
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) or a Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
in the station, using the SPA/IEC port, the only hardware needed is:· Optical fibers, glass/
plastic· Opto/electrical converter for the PC/RTU· PC/RTU

Commands M17109-62 v4
The commands defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are represented in dedicated function
blocks. These blocks have output signals for all available commands according to the protocol.
For more information, refer to the Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103.

• IED commands in control direction

Function block with defined IED functions in control direction, I103IEDCMD. This block use
PARAMETR as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each
output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

Function block with pre-defined functions in control direction, I103CMD. This block includes
the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each
output signal.

• Function commands in control direction

Function block with user defined functions in control direction, I103UserCMD. These function
blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and the
INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each output signal.

734 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

Status M17109-74 v6

For more information on the function blocks below, refer to the

Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103.

The events created in the IED available for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol are based on the:

• IED status indication in monitor direction

Function block with defined IED functions in monitor direction, I103IED. This block use
PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE, and INFORMATION NUMBER parameter is defined for each
input signal.

• Function status indication in monitor direction, user-defined

Function blocks with user defined input signals in monitor direction, I103UserDef. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and
the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each input signal.

• Supervision indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for supervision indications in monitor direction,
I103Superv. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION
NUMBER parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Earth fault indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EF.
This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

• Fault indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for fault indications in monitor direction, I103FLTPROT.
This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each input signal.

This block is suitable for distance protection, line differential, transformer differential, over-
current and earth-fault protection functions.

• Autorecloser indications in monitor direction

Function block with defined functions for autorecloser indications in monitor direction,
I103AR. This block includes the FUNCTION TYPE parameter, and the INFORMATION NUMBER
parameter is defined for each output signal.

Measurands M17109-99 v2
The measurands can be included as type 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4 and type 9 according to the standard.

• Measurands in public range

Function block that reports all valid measuring types depending on connected signals,
I103Meas.

• Measurands in private range

Line distance protection REL670 735

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Function blocks with user defined input measurands in monitor direction, I103MeasUsr. These
function blocks include the FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in the private range, and
the INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block.

Fault location M17109-108 v1

The fault location is expressed in reactive ohms. In relation to the line length in reactive ohms,
it gives the distance to the fault in percent. The data is available and reported when the fault
locator function is included in the IED.

Disturbance recordings M17109-111 v9

• The transfer functionality is based on the Disturbance recorder function. The analog and
binary signals recorded will be reported to the master by polling. The eight last
disturbances that are recorded are available for transfer to the master. A file that has
been transferred and acknowledged by the master cannot be transferred again.
• The binary signals that are included in the disturbance recorder are those that are
connected to the disturbance function blocks B1RBDR to B22RBDR. These function blocks
include the function type and the information number for each signal. For more
information on the description of the Disturbance report in the Technical reference
manual. The analog channels, that are reported, are those connected to the disturbance
function blocks A1RADR to A4RADR. The eight first ones belong to the public range and
the remaining ones to the private range.

21.6.2 Settings M17109-116 v1

21.6.2.1 Settings for RS485 and optical serial communication M17109-118 v12

General settings
SPA, DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 can be configured to operate on the SLM optical serial port
while DNP and IEC 60870-5-103 additionally can utilize the RS485 port. A single protocol can be
active on a given physical port at any time.

Two different areas in the HMI are used to configure the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.

1. The port specific IEC 60870-5-103 protocol parameters are configured under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/IEC60870-5-103/
• <config-selector>
• SlaveAddress
• BaudRate
• RevPolarity (optical channel only)
• CycMeasRepTime
• MasterTimeDomain
• TimeSyncMode
• EvalTimeAccuracy
• EventRepMode
• CmdMode
• RepIntermediatePos

<config-selector> is:
• “OPTICAL103:1” for the optical serial channel on the SLM
• “RS485103:1” for the RS485 port
2. The protocol to activate on a physical port is selected under:
Main menu/Configuration/Communication/Station Communication/Port
configuration/
• RS485 port

736 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

• RS485PROT:1 (off, DNP, IEC103)

• SLM optical serial port
• PROTOCOL:1 (off, DNP, IEC103, SPA)

GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN
GUID-CD4EB23C-65E7-4ED5-AFB1-A9D5E9EE7CA8 V3 EN-US

Figure 429: Settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The general settings for IEC 60870-5-103 communication are the following:

• SlaveAddress and BaudRate: Settings for slave number and communication speed (baud
rate).
The slave number can be set to any value between 1 and 254. The communication speed,
can be set either to 9600 bits/s or 19200 bits/s.
• RevPolarity: Setting for inverting the light (or not). Standard IEC 60870-5-103 setting is
On.
• CycMeasRepTime: See I103MEAS function block for more information.
• EventRepMode: Defines the mode for how events are reported. The event buffer size is
1000 events.

Event reporting mode

If EventRepMode = SeqOfEvent, all GI and spontaneous events will be delivered in the order
they were generated by BSW. The most recent value is the latest value delivered. All GI data
from a single block will come from the same cycle.

If EventRepMode = HiPriSpont, spontaneous events will be delivered prior to GI event. To

prevent old GI data from being delivered after a new spontaneous event, the pending GI event
is modified to contain the same value as the spontaneous event. As a result, the GI dataset is
not time-correlated.

21.6.2.2 Settings from PCM600 M17109-132 v2

I103USEDEF GUID-A41170D6-2846-4E5E-8B7F-85B53D4EF6B6 v1
For each input of the I103USEDEF function there is a setting for the information number of the
connected signal. The information number can be set to any value between 0 and 255. To get
proper operation of the sequence of events the event masks in the event function is to be set
to ON_CHANGE. For single-command signals, the event mask is to be set to ON_SET.

In addition there is a setting on each event block for function type. Refer to description of the
Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Commands M17109-138 v2
As for the commands defined in the protocol there is a dedicated function block with eight
output signals. Use PCM600 to configure these signals. To realize the BlockOfInformation
command, which is operated from the local HMI, the output BLKINFO on the IEC command
function block ICOM has to be connected to an input on an event function block. This input
must have the information number 20 (monitor direction blocked) according to the standard.

Line distance protection REL670 737

Application manual
Section 21 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Station communication

Disturbance Recordings M17109-141 v8

For each input of the Disturbance recorder function there is a setting for the information
number of the connected signal. The function type and the information number can be set to
any value between 0 and 255. To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals, there are
parameters on the disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to
whatever he connects to the corresponding input.

Refer to description of Main Function type set on the local HMI.

Recorded analog channels are sent with ASDU26 and ASDU31. One information element in
these ASDUs is called ACC, and it indicates the actual channel to be processed. The channels
on disturbance recorder are sent with an ACC as shown in Table 73.

Table 73: Channels on disturbance recorder sent with a given ACC

DRA#-Input ACC IEC 60870-5-103 meaning
1 1 IL1
2 2 IL2
3 3 IL3
4 4 IN
5 5 UL1
6 6 UL2
7 7 UL3
8 8 UN
9 64 Private range
10 65 Private range
11 66 Private range
12 67 Private range
13 68 Private range
14 69 Private range
15 70 Private range
16 71 Private range
17 72 Private range
18 73 Private range
19 74 Private range
20 75 Private range
21 76 Private range
22 77 Private range
23 78 Private range
24 79 Private range
25 80 Private range
26 81 Private range
27 82 Private range
28 83 Private range
29 84 Private range
30 85 Private range
31 86 Private range
32 87 Private range
Table continues on next page

738 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 21
Station communication

DRA#-Input ACC IEC 60870-5-103 meaning

33 88 Private range
34 89 Private range
35 90 Private range
36 91 Private range
37 92 Private range
38 93 Private range
39 94 Private range
40 95 Private range

21.6.3 Function and information types M17109-145 v7

Product type IEC103mainFunType value Comment:

REL 128 Compatible range

REC 242 Private range, use default

RED 192 Compatible range

RET 176 Compatible range

REB 207 Private range

REG 150 Private range

REQ 245 Private range

RER 152 Private range

RES 118 Private range

Refer to the tables in the Technical reference manual /Station communication, specifying the
information types supported by the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103.

To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in the protection IED.

There is no representation for the following parts:

• Generating events for test mode

• Cause of transmission: Info no 11, Local operation

Glass or plastic fiber should be used. BFOC/2.5 is the recommended interface to use
(BFOC/2.5 is the same as ST connectors). ST connectors are used with the optical power as
specified in standard.

For more information, refer to IEC standard IEC 60870-5-103.

21.7 DNP3 Communication protocol

21.7.1 Application GUID-EF1F0C38-9FF6-4683-8B10-AAA372D42185 v1

For more information on the application and setting guidelines for the DNP3 communication
protocol refer to the DNP3 Communication protocol manual.

Line distance protection REL670 739

Application manual
740
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 22
Remote communication

Section 22 Remote communication

22.1 Binary signal transfer IP12423-1 v2

22.1.1 Identification
M14849-1 v3

Function description IEC 61850 identification IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification device number
BinSignRec1_1
Binary signal transfer,
BinSignRec1_2 - -
receive
BinSignReceive2
Binary signal transfer, BinSigRec1_12M
- -
2Mbit receive BinSigRec1_22M
BinSignTrans1_1
Binary signal transfer,
BinSignTrans1_2 - -
transmit
BinSignTransm2
Binary signal transfer, BinSigTran1_12M
- -
2Mbit transmit BinSigTran1_22M

22.1.2 Application IP16245-1 v1

M12844-3 v4
The IEDs can be equipped with communication devices for line differential communication
(not applicable for RER670) and/or communication of binary signals between IEDs. The same
communication hardware is used for both purposes.

Sending of binary signals between two IEDs is used in teleprotection schemes and for direct
transfer trips. In addition to this, there are application possibilities, for example, blocking/
enabling functionality in the remote substation, changing setting group in the remote IED
depending on the switching situation in the local substation and so on.

If equipped with a 64kbit/s LDCM module, the IED can be configured to send either 192 binary
signals or 3 analog and 8 binary signals to a remote IED. If equipped with a 2Mbps LDCM
module, the IED can send 9 analog channels and 192 binary channels to a remote IED.

Link forwarding GUID-DD3CF47C-A202-4416-954A-EFC0F8BEBCB7 v1

If it is not possible to have a communication link between each station, the solution has been
to set the protection up in a slave-master-slave configuration. This means that in Figure 430,
only IED-B has access to all currents and, therefore, this is the only place where the differential
current is evaluated. If the evaluation results in a trip, the trip signal will be sent over the two
communication links.

Line distance protection REL670 741

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Remote communication

3-end differential protection with two communication links

Ldcm312 Ldcm312
IED-A Ldcm312
IED-B Ldcm313
IED-C

IEC16000077-1-en.vsd
IEC16000077 V1 EN-US

Figure 430: Three-end differential protection with two communication links

If the LDCM is in 2Mbit mode, you can send the three local currents as well as the three remote
currents from the other links by configuring the transmitters in IED-B:

1. Ldcm312 transmitter sends the local currents and the three currents received by Ldcm313.
2. Ldcm313 transmitter sends the three local currents and the three currents received from
Ldcm312.

As a result, six currents are received in IED-A and IED-C. These currents can be connected to
the protection function together with the local three currents.

In order to forward the logic signals (for example, inter-trip or inter-block)

between IED-A and IED-C, the setting LinkForwarded should be defined. In IED-
B, it is set to LDCM313 for Ldcm312 and to LDCM312 for ldcm313.

This setup results in a master-master-master configuration, but without the benefit of

reverting to a slave-master-slave configuration in case of a communication link interruption. In
case of a communication link interruption, all three IEDs would be blocked.

22.1.2.1 Communication hardware solutions M12844-11 v7

The LDCM (Line Data Communication Module) has an optical connection such that two IEDs
can be connected over a direct fiber (multimode), as shown in figure 431. The protocol used is
IEEE/ANSI C37.94. The distance with this solution is typical 110 km.

C M
CM LD
LD
CM CM
LD LD

en06000519-2.vsd
IEC06000519 V2 EN-US

Figure 431: Direct fiber optical connection between two IEDs with LDCM
The LDCM can also be used together with an external optical to galvanic G.703 converter or
with an alternative external optical to galvanic X.21 as shown in figure 432. These solutions are
aimed for connections to a multiplexer, which in turn is connected to a telecommunications
transmission network (for example PDH).

742 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 22
Remote communication

Multiplexer Multiplexer

Telecom. Network

*) *)

*) Converting optical to galvanic G.703

en05000527-2.vsd
IEC05000527 V2 EN-US

Figure 432: LDCM with an external optical to galvanic converter and a multiplexer
When an external modem G.703 or X.21 is used, the connection between LDCM and the modem
is made with a multimode fiber of max. 3 km length. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 protocol is always
used between LDCM and the modem.

Alternatively, a LDCM with X.21 built-in converter and micro D-sub 15-pole connector output
can be used.

22.1.3 Setting guidelines M12454-3 v7

64 kbit and 2 Mbit mode common settings

ChannelMode defines how an IED discards the LDCM information when one of the IEDs in the
system is out of service: it can either be done on the IED out of service by setting all local
LDCMs to channel mode OutOfService or at the remote end by setting the corresponding
LDCM to channel mode Blocked. If OutOfService is selected, the IED should have active
communication to the remote end during the whole maintenance process, that is, no restart or
removal of the fiber can be done.

This setting does not apply to two-end communication.

Blocked IED does not use data from the LDCM

OutOfService IED informs the remote end that it is out of service

TerminalNo is used to assign a unique address to each LDCM in all current differential IEDs. Up
to 256 LDCMs can be assigned a unique number. For example, in a local IED with two LDCMs:

• LDCM for slot 305: set TerminalNo to 1 and RemoteTermNo to 2

• LDCM for slot 306: set TerminalNo to 3 and RemoteTermNo to 4

In multiterminal current differential applications,with 4 LDCMs in each IED, up to 20 unique

addresses must be set.

Line distance protection REL670 743

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Remote communication

A unique address is necessary to give high security against incorrect

addressing in the communication system. If the same number is used for
TerminalNo in some of the LDCMs, a loop-back test in the communication
system can give an incorrect trip.

RemoteTermNo is used to assign a number to each related LDCM in the remote IED. For each
LDCM, RemoteTermNo is set to a different value than TerminalNo, but equal to the TerminalNo
of the remote end LDCM. In the remote IED, TerminalNo and RemoteTermNo are reversed as
follows:

• LDCM for slot 305: set TerminalNo to 2 and RemoteTermNo to 1

• LDCM for slot 306: set TerminalNo to 4 and RemoteTermNo to 3

The redundant channel is always configured to the lower position, for example:

• Slot 305: main channel

• Slot 306: redundant channel

The same is applicable for slot 312-313 and slot 322-323.

DiffSync defines the method of time synchronization for the line differential function: Echo or
GPS.

Using Echo in this case is safe only if there is no risk of varying transmission
asymmetry.

GPSSyncErr: when GPS synchronization is lost, synchronization of the line differential function
continues for 16 s based on the stability in the local IED clocks. After that, setting Block blocks
the line differential function or setting Echo keeps it on by using the Echo synchronization
method.

Using Echo in this case is safe only if there is no risk of varying transmission
asymmetry.

CommSync defines the Master and Slave relation in the communication system, and should
not be mistaken for the synchronization of line differential current samples. When direct fiber
is used, one LDCM is set as Master and the other as Slave. When a modem and multiplexer is
used, the IED is always set as Slave because the telecommunication system provides the clock
master.

OptoPower has two settings: LowPower and HighPower.

Short-range LDCM: Use LowPower for fibres 0 – 1 km and HighPower for fibers greater than 1
km.

Medium-range LDCM: Typical distance 80 km for both LowPower and HighPower.

Long-range LDCM: Typical distance 120 km for both LowPower and HighPower.

An optical budget calculation should be made for the actual case. For medium range LDCM and
long range LDCM the recommendation is to use the LowPower setting to minimize the power
consumption and keep the heat dissipation at minimum.

744 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 22
Remote communication

The HighPower setting adds 3 dBm extra optical power and can be used to increase the
margin at distances close to maximum.

Table 74: Optical budgets with C37.94 protocol

Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fibre Multi-mode fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber
glass 50/125 μm glass 62.5/125 μm glass 9/125 μm glass 9/125 μm
Modem type 1MRK0002122-AB 1MRK0002122-AB 1MRK002311-AA 1MRK002311-BA
Contact type ST ST FC/PC FC/PC
Minimum output –21 dBm –13.7 dBm –3.2 dBm –1.3 dBm
power1)
Minimum receiver –32.5 dBm –32.5 dBm –30 dBm –30 dBm
sensitivity
Optical link 11.5 dB 18.8 dB 26.8 dB 28.7 dB
budget2)

1) Minimum output power is measured with 1 m of the selected fiber and the high power mode.
2) The optical budget includes a satisfactory margin for aging in transmitter and receiver during 20–30 years.

Table 75: Example of input data for calculating the optical budget (maximum distance)
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fibre Multi-mode fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber
glass 50/125 μm glass 62.5/125 μm glass 9/125 μm glass 9/125 μm
Modem type 1MRK0002122-AB 1MRK0002122-AB 1MRK002311-AA 1MRK002311-BA
Typical attenuation 3 dB/km 3 dB/km 0.32 dB/km 0.21 dB/km
in fibre-optic
cables
Attenuation/ 1.5 dB/ST 1.5 dB/ST 0.3 dB/FC/PC 0.3 dB/FC/PC
Contact
Factory splice 0.5 dB/splice 0.5 dB/splice 0.08 dB/splice 0.08 dB/splice
attenuation 0.3 splices/km 0.1 splices/km 0.1 splices/km 0.1 splices/km
Repair splices 0.25 dB/splice 0.25 dB/splice 0.1 dB/splice 0.1 dB/splice
0.1 splices/km 0.1 splices/km 0.05 splices/km 0.05 splices/km
Fiber margin for 0.1 dB/km 0.1 dB/km 0.01 dB/km 0.01 dB/km
aging

Table 76: Example of calculating the optical budget (maximum distance)

Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fibre Multi-mode fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber
glass 50/125 μm glass 62.5/125 μm glass 9/125 μm glass 9/125 μm
Modem type 1MRK0002122-AB 1MRK0002122-AB 1MRK002311-AA 1MRK002311-BA
Maximum distance 2 km 3 km 80 km 120 km
Attenuation in 6 dB 9 dB 25.6 dB 25.2 dB
fibre-optic cables
2 contacts 2 dB 3 dB 0.6 dB 0.6 dB
Factory splice 0.3 dB 0.45 dB 0.64 dB 0.96 dB
attenuation
Repair splices 0.1 dB 0.3 dB 0.8 dB 1.2 dB
Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 745

Application manual
Section 22 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Remote communication

Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Fiber margin for 0.2 dB 0.3 dB 0.8 dB 1.2 dB
aging
Total attenuation 8.6 dB 12.05 dB 26.04 dB 28.56 dB
Optical link budget 9 dB 13 dB 26.8 dB 28.7 dB
Link margin 0.4 dB 0.95 dB 0.76 dB 0.14 dB

ComAlarmDel defines the time delay for communication failure alarm. In communication
systems, route switching can sometimes cause interruptions with a duration of up to 50 ms.
Too short a time delay can thus cause nuisance alarms.

ComAlrmResDel defines the time delay for communication failure alarm reset.

RedChSwTime defines the time delay before switching over to a redundant channel in case of
primary channel failure.

RedChRturnTime defines the time delay before switching back to the primary channel after
channel failure.

AsymDelay denotes asymmetry which is defined as transmission delay minus receive delay. If
fixed asymmetry is known, Echo synchronization method can be used, provided that
AsymDelay is properly set. From the definition follows that asymmetry is always positive at
one end and negative at the other end.

MaxTransmDelay indicates maximum transmission delay. Data for maximum 40 ms

transmission delay can be buffered up. Delay times in the range of some ms are common. If
data arrive in wrong order, the oldest data is disregarded.

MaxtDiffLevel indicates the maximum time difference allowed between internal clocks in
respective line ends.

64 kbit mode specific settings

TransmCurr is used to select among the following:

• one of the two possible local currents is transmitted
• sum of the two local currents is transmitted
• channel is used as a redundant backup channel

1½ breaker arrangement has two local currents, and the Current Transformer (CT) earthing for
those can differ. CT-SUM transmits the sum of the two CT groups. CT-DIFF1 transmits CT
group 1 minus CT group 2 and CT-DIFF2 transmits CT group 2 minus CT group 1.

CT-GRP1 and CT-GRP2 transmit the respective CT groups, and setting RedundantChannel
determines that the channel is used as a redundant backup channel. The redundant channel
takes the CT group setting of the main channel.

RemAinLatency corresponds to LocAinLatency set in the remote IED.

AnalogLatency specifies the time delay (number of samples) between actual sampling and the
time the sample reaches LDCM. The value is set to 2 when transmitting analog data. When a
merging unit according to IEC 61850-9-2 is used instead of the TRM, this parameter shall be
set to 5.

CompRange value indicates the current peak value over which truncation is made. To set this
value, knowledge of fault current levels is required. It is recommended to set the minimum

746 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 22
Remote communication

range that will cover the expected fault current value. For example, if a 40kA fault level is
expected on the network, the 0-50kA settings range should be chosen.

2 Mbit mode specific settings

RedundantCh is used to set the channel as a redundant backup channel. The redundant
channel takes the CT group setting of the main channel, and ignores the CT group configured
in its own transmit block.

LinkForwarded is used to configure the LDCM to merge the inter-trip and block signals from
another LDCM-receiver. This is used when the analog signals for the LDCM-transmitter is
connected to the receiver of another LDCM.

Line distance protection REL670 747

Application manual
748
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 23
Security

Section 23 Security

23.1 Authority status ATHSTAT SEMOD158575-1 v2

23.1.1 Application SEMOD158527-5 v3

Authority status (ATHSTAT) function is an indication function block, which informs about two
events related to the IED and the user authorization:

• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was blocked
(the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)

The two outputs of ATHSTAT function can be used in the configuration for different indication
and alarming reasons, or can be sent to the station control for the same purpose.

23.2 Self supervision with internal event list INTERRSIG IP1721-1 v2

23.2.1 Application M12625-3 v9

The protection and control IEDs have many functions included. The included self-supervision
with internal event list function block provides good supervision of the IED. The fault signals
make it easier to analyze and locate a fault.

Both hardware and software supervision is included and it is also possible to indicate possible
faults through a hardware contact on the power supply module and/or through the
communication.

Internal events are generated by the built-in supervisory functions. The supervisory functions
supervise the status of the various modules in the IED and, in case of failure, a corresponding
event is generated. Similarly, when the failure is corrected, a corresponding event is generated.

Apart from the built-in supervision of the various modules, events are also generated when the
status changes for the:

• built-in real time clock (in operation/out of order).

• external time synchronization (in operation/out of order).

Events are also generated:

• whenever any setting in the IED is changed.

The internal events are time tagged with a resolution of 1 ms and stored in a list. The list can
store up to 40 events. The list is based on the FIFO principle, that is, when it is full, the oldest
event is overwritten. The list contents cannot be modified, but the whole list can be cleared
using the Reset menu in the LHMI.

The list of internal events provides valuable information, which can be used during
commissioning and fault tracing.

Line distance protection REL670 749

Application manual
Section 23 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Security

The information can, in addition to be viewed on the built in HMI, also be retrieved with the aid
of a PC with PCM600 installed and by using the Event Monitoring Tool. The PC can either be
connected to the front port, or to the port at the back of the IED.

23.3 Change lock CHNGLCK GUID-B48775D0-ACF0-49C6-A7F6-69AF37F1C68F v1

23.3.1 Application GUID-51EEC9C7-8ECF-4546-BC26-326861654340 v4

Change lock function CHNGLCK is used to block further changes to the IED configuration once
the commissioning is complete. The purpose is to make it impossible to perform inadvertent
IED configuration and setting changes.

However, when activated, CHNGLCK will still allow the following actions that does not involve
reconfiguring of the IED:

• Monitoring
• Reading events
• Resetting events
• Reading disturbance data
• Clear disturbances
• Reset LEDs
• Reset counters and other runtime component states
• Control operations
• Set system time
• Enter and exit from test mode
• Change of active setting group

The binary input controlling the function is defined in ACT or SMT. The CHNGLCK function is
configured using ACT.

LOCK Binary input signal that will activate/deactivate the function, defined in ACT or SMT.

GUID-8C333BC0-AA7A-4ED1-A772-18C22E8EEE62 v6

When CHNGLCK has a logical one on its input, then all attempts to modify the
IED configuration and setting will be denied and the message "Error: Changes
blocked" will be displayed on the local HMI; in PCM600 the message will be
"Operation denied by active ChangeLock". The CHNGLCK function should be
configured so that it is controlled by a signal from a binary input card. This
guarantees that by setting that signal to a logical zero, CHNGLCK is
deactivated. If any logic is included in the signal path to the CHNGLCK input,
that logic must be designed so that it cannot permanently issue a logical one
to the CHNGLCK input. If such a situation would occur in spite of these
precautions, then please contact the local ABB representative for remedial
action.

750 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 23
Security

23.4 Denial of service SCHLCCH/RCHLCCH

23.4.1 Application GUID-64F4D905-9F73-4073-B8F6-8D373155316A v5

The denial of service functionality is designed to limit the CPU load that can be produced by
Ethernet network traffic on the IED. The communication facilities must not be allowed to
compromise the primary functionality of the device. All inbound network traffic will be quota
controlled so that too heavy network loads can be controlled. Heavy network load might for
instance be the result of malfunctioning equipment connected to the network.

The functions Access point diagnostics function block measure the IED load from
communication and, if necessary, limit it for not jeopardizing the IEDs control and protection
functionality due to high CPU load. The function has the following denial of service related
outputs:

• LINKSTS indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports (single communication)
• CHALISTS and CHBLISTS indicates the Ethernet link status for the rear ports channel A
and B (redundant communication)
• LinkStatus indicates the Ethernet link status for the front port

23.4.2 Setting guidelines GUID-CE3344E8-539B-47E0-9C19-8239988BDBCF v3

The function does not have any parameters available in the local HMI or PCM600.

Line distance protection REL670 751

Application manual
752
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

Section 24 Basic IED functions

24.1 IED identifiers TERMINALID IP15060-1 v2

24.1.1 Application M15324-3 v6

IED identifiers (TERMINALID) function allows the user to identify the individual IED in the
system, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.

Use only characters A-Z, a-z and 0-9 in station, object and unit names.

24.2 Product information PRODINF GUID-F67243CA-2429-4118-BBFF-3D62BF55E080 v2

24.2.1 Application GUID-D78786E6-C34A-4E63-9D1E-0582C8F1F7E1 v9

Product information contains unchangeable data that uniquely identifies the IED.

Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers:

Product information data is visible on the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers and under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers.

• ProductVer
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate
• IEDProdType

Figure 433: IED summary

This information is very helpful when interacting with ABB product support (for example
during repair and maintenance).

24.2.2 Factory defined settings M11789-39 v11

The factory defined settings are very useful for identifying a specific version and very helpful in
the case of maintenance, repair, interchanging IEDs between different Substation Automation
Systems and upgrading. The factory made settings can not be changed by the customer. They
can only be viewed. The settings are found in the local HMI under Main menu/Diagnostics/IED
status/Product identifiers

The following identifiers are available:

• IEDProdType

Line distance protection REL670 753

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

• Describes the type of the IED. Example: REL670

• ProductDef
• Describes the release number from the production. Example: 2.1.0
• FirmwareVer
• Describes the firmware version.
• The firmware version can be checked from Main menu/Diagnostics/IED status/
Product identifiers
• Firmware version numbers run independently from the release production numbers.
For every release number there can be one or more firmware versions depending on
the small issues corrected in between releases.
• ProductVer
• Describes the product version. Example: 2.1.0

1 is the Major version of the manufactured product this means, new platform of the product
2 is the Minor version of the manufactured product this means, new functions or new hardware
added to the product
3 is the Major revision of the manufactured product this means, functions or hardware is either
changed or enhanced in the product

• IEDMainFunType
• Main function type code according to IEC 60870-5-103. Example: 128 (meaning line
protection).
• SerialNo
• OrderingNo
• ProductionDate

24.3 Measured value expander block RANGE_XP SEMOD52451-1 v2

24.3.1 Identification
SEMOD113212-2 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP - -

24.3.2 Application SEMOD52434-4 v6

The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU),
current and voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and IEC 61850
generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement supervision
functionality. All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, that is low-low
limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value expander block ( RANGE_XP)
has been introduced to be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring
functions to 5 binary signals, that is below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-
high limit or above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable
logic.

754 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

24.3.3 Setting guidelines SEMOD113223-4 v1

There are no settable parameters for the measured value expander block function.

24.4 Parameter setting groups IP1745-1 v1

24.4.1 Application M12007-6 v10

Six sets of settings are available to optimize IED operation for different power system
conditions. By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the local
HMI or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED that can cope with a variety
of power system scenarios.

Different conditions in networks with different voltage levels require highly adaptable
protection and control units to best provide for dependability, security and selectivity
requirements. Protection units operate with a higher degree of availability, especially, if the
setting values of their parameters are continuously optimized according to the conditions in
the power system.

Operational departments can plan for different operating conditions in the primary
equipment. The protection engineer can prepare the necessary optimized and pre-tested
settings in advance for different protection functions. Six different groups of setting
parameters are available in the IED. Any of them can be activated through the different
programmable binary inputs by means of external or internal control signals.

A function block, SETGRPS, defines how many setting groups are used. Setting is done with
parameter MAXSETGR and shall be set to the required value for each IED. Only the number of
setting groups set will be available in the Parameter Setting tool for activation with the
ActiveGroup function block.

24.4.2 Setting guidelines M15259-3 v4

The setting ActiveSetGrp, is used to select which parameter group to be active. The active
group can also be selected with configured input to the function block SETGRPS.

The length of the pulse, sent out by the output signal SETCHGD when an active group has
changed, is set with the parameter t.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to switch
between. Only the selected number of setting groups will be available in the Parameter Setting
tool (PST) for activation with the ActiveGroup function block.

24.5 Rated system frequency PRIMVAL IP15064-1 v2

24.5.1 Identification
GUID-B8B3535D-227B-4151-9E98-BEB85F4D54DE v1

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Primary system values PRIMVAL - -

Line distance protection REL670 755

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

24.5.2 Application M15288-3 v6

The rated system frequency and phase rotation direction are set under Main menu/
Configuration/ Power system/ Primary Values in the local HMI and PCM600 parameter
setting tree.

24.5.3 Setting guidelines M15292-3 v2

Set the system rated frequency. Refer to section "Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI" for
description on frequency tracking.

24.6 Summation block 3 phase 3PHSUM SEMOD55968-1 v2

24.6.1 Application SEMOD56004-4 v3

The analog summation block 3PHSUM function block is used in order to get the sum of two
sets of 3 phase analog signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

24.6.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD56006-4 v7

The summation block receives the three-phase signals from SMAI blocks. The summation block
has several settings.

SummationType: Summation type (Group 1 + Group 2, Group 1 - Group 2, Group 2 - Group 1 or –

(Group 1 + Group 2)).

DFTReference: The reference DFT block (InternalDFT Ref,DFTRefGrp1 or External DFT ref) .

DFTRefGrp1: This setting means use own internal adaptive DFT reference ( this setting makes
the SUM3PH self DFT adaptive, that is, it will use the measured frequency for the summation
signal to adapt DFT).

InternalDFTRef: Gives fixed window DFT (to nominal system frequency).

ExternalDFTRef: This setting means that the DFT samples-per-cycle (adaptive DFT) will be
controlled by SMAI1 SPFCOUT.

FreqMeasMinVal: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated,
expressed as percent of UBasebase voltage setting (for each instance x).

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define (IBase),
(UBase) and (SBase).

24.7 Global base values GBASVAL GUID-2FDB0A2C-10FE-4954-B6E4-9DA2EEEF1668 v1

24.7.1 Identification
GUID-0D5405BE-E669-44C8-A208-3A4C86D39115 v3

Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2

identification identification device number
Global base values GBASVAL - -

756 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

24.7.2 Application GUID-D58ECA9A-9771-443D-BF84-8EF582A346BF v4

Global base values function (GBASVAL) is used to provide global values, common for all
applicable functions within the IED. One set of global values consists of values for current,
voltage and apparent power and it is possible to have twelve different sets.

This is an advantage since all applicable functions in the IED use a single source of base values.
This facilitates consistency throughout the IED and also facilitates a single point for updating
values when necessary.

Each applicable function in the IED has a parameter, GlobalBaseSel, defining one out of the
twelve sets of GBASVAL functions.

24.7.3 Setting guidelines GUID-E3F5D754-BD17-4729-895B-957A09C2AC75 v4

UBase: Phase-to-phase voltage value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED.

IBase: Phase current value to be used as a base value for applicable functions throughout the
IED.

SBase: Standard apparent power value to be used as a base value for applicable functions
throughout the IED, typically SBase=√3·UBase·IBase.

24.8 Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI SEMOD55793-1 v2

24.8.1 Application M15310-3 v2

The Signal matrix for binary inputs function SMBI is used within the Application Configuration
tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBI represents the way binary inputs are
brought in for one IED configuration.

24.8.2 Setting guidelines M15312-3 v3

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary inputs SMBI available to the
user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user shall give a name to SMBI instance and the
SMBI inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These names will define SMBI
function in the Signal Matrix tool. The user defined name for the input or output signal will also
appear on the respective output or input signal.

24.9 Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO SEMOD55215-1 v2

24.9.1 Application SEMOD55213-5 v4

The Signal matrix for binary outputs function SMBO is used within the Application
Configuration tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMBO represents the way
binary outputs are sent from one IED configuration.

Line distance protection REL670 757

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

24.9.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55228-5 v2

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for binary outputs SMBO available to the
user in Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMBO instance and
SMBO outputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool. These names will define SMBO
function in the Signal Matrix tool.

24.10 Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI SEMOD55233-1 v2

24.10.1 Application SEMOD55237-5 v2

The Signal matrix for mA inputs function SMMI is used within the Application Configuration
tool in direct relation with the Signal Matrix tool. SMMI represents the way milliamp (mA)
inputs are brought in for one IED configuration.

24.10.2 Setting guidelines SEMOD55247-5 v2

There are no setting parameters for the Signal matrix for mA inputs SMMI available to the user
in the Parameter Setting tool. However, the user must give a name to SMMI instance and SMMI
inputs, directly in the Application Configuration tool.

24.11 Signal matrix for analog inputs SMAI SEMOD55751-1 v2

24.11.1 Application SEMOD55744-4 v10

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI), also known as the preprocessor function block,
analyses the connected four analog signals (three phases and neutral) and calculates all
relevant information from them like the phasor magnitude, phase angle, frequency, true RMS
value, harmonics, sequence components and so on. This information is then used by the
respective functions connected to this SMAI block in ACT (for example protection,
measurement or monitoring functions).

24.11.2 Frequency values GUID-B494B93C-B5AA-4FD6-8080-8611C34C2AD8 v5

The SMAI function includes a functionality based on the level of positive sequence voltage,
MinValFreqMeas, to validate if the frequency measurement is valid or not. If the positive
sequence voltage is lower than MinValFreqMeas, the function freezes the frequency output
value for 500 ms and after that the frequency output is set to the nominal value. A signal is
available for the SMAI function to prevent operation due to non-valid frequency values.
MinValFreqMeas is set as % of UBase/√3

If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, at least two of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and
GRPxL3, where 1≤x≤12, must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.
Note that phase to phase inputs shall always be connected as follows: L1-L2 to GRPxL1, L2-L3
to GRPxL2, L3-L1 to GRPxL3. If SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-N, all three inputs GRPxL1,
GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 must be connected in order to calculate the positive sequence voltage.

If only one phase-phase voltage is available and SMAI setting ConnectionType is Ph-Ph, the
user is advised to connect two (not three) of the inputs GRPxL1, GRPxL2 and GRPxL3 to the
same voltage input as shown in figure 434 to make SMAI calculate a positive sequence voltage.

758 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

SMAI1
BLOCK SPFCOUT SAPTOF
DFTSPFC G1AI3P U3P* TRIP SAPTOF(1)_TRIP
UL1L2 BLOCK START
REVROT G1AI1
PHASEL1 G1AI2 BLKTRIP BLKDMAGN
^GRP1L1 G1AI4 FREQ
TRM_40.CH7(U) PHASEL2
G1N
^GRP1L2
PHASEL3
^GRP1L3
NEUTRAL
^GRP1N

EC10000060-3-en.vsdx
IEC10000060 V3 EN-US

Figure 434: Connection example

The above described scenario does not work if SMAI setting ConnectionType is
Ph-N. If only one phase-earth voltage is available, the same type of connection
can be used but the SMAI ConnectionType setting must still be Ph-Ph and this
has to be accounted for when setting MinValFreqMeas. If SMAI setting
ConnectionType is Ph-N and the same voltage is connected to all three SMAI
inputs, the positive sequence voltage will be zero and the frequency functions
will not work properly.

The outputs from the above configured SMAI block shall only be used for
Overfrequency protection (SAPTOF), Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) and
Rate-of-change frequency protection (SAPFRC) due to that all other
information except frequency and positive sequence voltage might be wrongly
calculated.

24.11.3 Setting guidelines GUID-C8D6C88B-87C6-44C1-804B-CF1594365EE6 v8

The parameters for the signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI) functions are set via the local
HMI or PCM600.

Every SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and one neutral value),
either voltage or current. SMAI outputs give information about every aspect of the 3ph analog
signals acquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates, and so on – 244
values in total). Besides the block “group name”, the analog inputs type (voltage or current)
and the analog input names that can be set directly in ACT.

Application functions should be connected to a SMAI block with same task cycle as the
application function, except for e.g. measurement functions that run in slow cycle tasks.

DFTRefExtOut: Parameter valid only for function block SMAI1 .

Reference block for external output (SPFCOUT function output).

DFTReference: Reference DFT for the SMAI block use.

These DFT reference block settings decide DFT reference for DFT calculations. The setting
InternalDFTRef will use fixed DFT reference based on set system frequency. DFTRefGrp(n) will
use DFT reference from the selected group block, when own group is selected, an adaptive
DFT reference will be used based on calculated signal frequency from own group. The setting
ExternalDFTRef will use reference based on what is connected to input DFTSPFC.

The setting ConnectionType: Connection type for that specific instance (n) of the SMAI (if it is
Ph-N or Ph-Ph). Depending on connection type setting the not connected Ph-N or Ph-Ph
outputs will be calculated as long as they are possible to calculate. E.g. at Ph-Ph connection L1,

Line distance protection REL670 759

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

L2 and L3 will be calculated for use in symmetrical situations. If N component should be used
respectively the phase component during faults IN/UN must be connected to input 4.

Negation: If the user wants to negate the 3ph signal, it is possible to choose to negate only the
phase signals Negate3Ph, only the neutral signal NegateN or both Negate3Ph+N. negation
means rotation with 180° of the vectors.

GlobalBaseSel: Selects the global base value group used by the function to define (IBase),
(UBase) and (SBase).

MinValFreqMeas: The minimum value of the voltage for which the frequency is calculated,
expressed as percent of UBase (for each instance n).

Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to default value

InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.

Even if the user sets the AnalogInputType of a SMAI block to “Current”, the
MinValFreqMeas is still visible. However, using the current channel values as
base for frequency measurement is not recommendable for a number of
reasons, not last among them being the low level of currents that one can have
in normal operating conditions.

Examples of adaptive frequency tracking

Preprocessing block shall only be used to feed functions within the same
execution cycles (e.g. use preprocessing block with cycle 1 to feed transformer
differential protection). The only exceptions are measurement functions
(CVMMXN, CMMXU,VMMXU, etc.) which shall be fed by preprocessing blocks
with cycle 8.

When two or more preprocessing blocks are used to feed one protection
function (e.g. over-power function GOPPDOP), it is of outmost importance that
parameter setting DFTReference has the same set value for all of the
preprocessing blocks involved

760 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

Task time group 1

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:1 1
SMAI2:2 2
SMAI3:3 3
SMAI4:4 4 AdDFTRefCh7
SMAI5:5 5
SMAI6:6 6
SMAI7:7 7
SMAI8:8 8
SMAI9:9 9
SMAI10:10 10
SMAI11:11 11
SMAI12:12 12

Task time group 2

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:13 1 AdDFTRefCh4
SMAI2:14 2
SMAI3:15 3
SMAI4:16 4
SMAI5:17 5
SMAI6:18 6
SMAI7:19 7
SMAI8:20 8
SMAI9:21 9
SMAI10:22 10
SMAI11:23 11
SMAI12:24 12

Task time group 3

SMAI instance 3 phase group
SMAI1:25 1
SMAI2:26 2
SMAI3:27 3
SMAI4:28 4
SMAI5:29 5
SMAI6:30 6
SMAI7:31 7
SMAI8:32 8
SMAI9:33 9
SMAI10:34 10
SMAI11:35 11
SMAI12:36 12

IEC07000197.vsd
IEC07000197 V2 EN-US

Figure 435: Twelve SMAI instances are grouped within one task time. SMAI blocks are
available in three different task times in the IED. Two pointed instances are
used in the following examples.
The examples shows a situation with adaptive frequency tracking with one reference selected
for all instances. In practice each instance can be adapted to the needs of the actual
application. The adaptive frequency tracking is needed in IEDs that belong to the protection
system of synchronous machines and that are active during run-up and shout-down of the
machine. In other application the usual setting of the parameter DFTReference of SMAI is
InternalDFTRef.

Example 1

Line distance protection REL670 761

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

SMAI1:13
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1L1 AI1
^GRP1L2 AI2
^GRP1L3 AI3
SMAI1:1 ^GRP1N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1L1 AI1
^GRP1L2 AI2
^GRP1L3 AI3
^GRP1N AI4
AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1L1 AI1
^GRP1L2 AI2
^GRP1L3 AI3
^GRP1N AI4
AIN

IEC07000198-2-en.vsd
IEC07000198 V3 EN-US

Figure 436: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 1 as DFT reference
Assume instance SMAI7:7 in task time group 1 has been selected in the configuration to control
the frequency tracking . Observe that the selected reference instance (i.e. frequency tracking
master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence voltage is used for the
frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 435 for numbering):

SMAI1:1: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp7 to route SMAI7:7 reference to the SPFCOUT output,

DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI1:1 to use SMAI7:7 as reference (see Figure 436) SMAI2:2 –
SMAI12:12: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp7 for SMAI2:2 – SMAI12:12 to use SMAI7:7 as reference.

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input of SMAI1:13 as

reference (SMAI7:7)

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference

(SMAI7:7)

Example 2

762 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

SMAI1:1
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1L1 AI1
^GRP1L2 AI2
^GRP1L3 AI3
SMAI1:13 ^GRP1N AI4
BLOCK SPFCOUT AIN
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1L1 AI1
^GRP1L2 AI2
^GRP1L3 AI3
^GRP1N AI4
AIN

SMAI1:25
BLOCK SPFCOUT
DFTSPFC AI3P
^GRP1L1 AI1
^GRP1L2 AI2
^GRP1L3 AI3
^GRP1N AI4
AIN

IEC07000199-2-en.vsd
IEC07000199 V3 EN-US

Figure 437: Configuration for using an instance in task time group 2 as DFT reference.
Assume instance SMAI4:16 in task time group 2 has been selected in the configuration to
control the frequency tracking for all instances. Observe that the selected reference instance
(i.e. frequency tracking master) must be a voltage type. Observe that positive sequence
voltage is used for the frequency tracking feature.

For task time group 1 this gives the following settings (see Figure 435 for numbering):

SMAI1:1 – SMAI12:12: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference

(SMAI4:16)

For task time group 2 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:13: DFTRefExtOut = DFTRefGrp4 to route SMAI4:16 reference to the SPFCOUT output,

DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 for SMAI1:13 to use SMAI4:16 as reference (see Figure 437)
SMAI2:14 – SMAI12:24: DFTReference = DFTRefGrp4 to use SMAI4:16 as reference.

For task time group 3 this gives the following settings:

SMAI1:25 – SMAI12:36: DFTReference = ExternalDFTRef to use DFTSPFC input as reference

(SMAI4:16)

24.12 Test mode functionality TESTMODE IP1647-1 v3

24.12.1 Application M11407-3 v9

The protection and control IEDs may have a complex configuration with many included
functions. To make the testing procedure easier, the IEDs include the feature that allows
individual blocking of a single-, several-, or all functions.

This means that it is possible to see when a function is activated or trips. It also enables the
user to follow the operation of several related functions to check correct functionality and to
check parts of the configuration, and to check parts.

Line distance protection REL670 763

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

24.12.1.1 IEC 61850 protocol test mode GUID-82998715-6F23-4CAF-92E4-05E1A863CF33 v5

The function block TESTMODE has implemented the extended testing mode capabilities for
IEC 61850 Ed2 systems. Operator commands sent to the function block TESTMODE determine
the behavior of the functions. The command can be given remotely from an IEC 61850 client or
from the LHMI under the Main menu/Test/Function test modes/Communication/Station
Communication/IEC61850 LD0 LLN0/LD0LLN0:1. The possible values of the function block
TESTMODE are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition
2.

There is no setting in PCM600 via PST for the TESTMODE function block.

To be able to set the function block TESTMODE remotely, the setting via path
on LHMI and in PST: Main menu/Configuration/Communication/ Station
Communication/IEC61850-8-1/IEC61850-8-1:1RemoteModControl may not be
set to Off. The possible values of the parameter RemoteModControl are Off,
Maintenance or All levels. The Off value denies all access to function block
TESTMODE from remote, Maintenance requires that the category of the
originator (orCat) is Maintenance and All levels allow any orCat.

The DataObject Mod of the Root LD.LNN0 can be set on the LHMI under Main menu/Test/
Function test modes/Communication/Station communication/IEC61850 LD0 LLN0/
LD0LLN0:1 to On, Off, TestBlocked,Test or Blocked.

When the setting of the DataObject Mod is changed at this level, all Logical Nodes inside the
logical device update their own behavior according to IEC61850-7-4. The supported values of
the function block TESTMODE are described in Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850
Edition 2. When the function block TESTMODE is in test mode the Start LED on the LHMI is
turned on with steady light.

The parameter Mod of any specific function block can be configured under Main menu/Test/
Function test modes/Communication/Station Communication

The parameter Mod can be set on the LHMI to the same values as for the DataObject Mod of
the Root LD.LNN0 to On, Off, TestBlocked,Test or Blocked. For Example, Main menu/ Test/
Function test modes/ Differential protection/GeneratorDiff(87G,3Id/I>)/ GENPDIF(87G,3Id/
I>):1.

It is possible that the behavior of the function block TESTMODE is also influenced by other
sources as well, independent of the mode communicated via the IEC61850-8-1 station bus. For
example the insertion of the test handle into the test switch with its auxiliary contact is
connected to a BI on the IED and further inside the configuration to the input IED_TEST on the
function block TESTMODE. Another example is when loss of Service Values appears, or as
explained above the setting via the LHMI.

When setting via PST or LHMI the parameterOperation of any function in an IED is set to Off,
the function is not executed and the behavior (beh) is set toOff and it is not possible to
override it. When a behavior of a function is Off the function will not execute. The related Mod
keeps its current state.

When IEC 61850 Mod of a function is set to Off or Blocked, the Start LED on the
LHMI will be set to flashing to indicate the abnormal operation of the IED.

The IEC 61850-7-4 gives a detailed overview over all aspects of the test mode and other states
of mode and behavior. The status of a function block behavior Beh is shown on the LHMI under

764 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

the Main menu/Test/Function status/Function group/Function block descriptive name/LN

name/Outputs.

• When the Beh of a function block is set to Test, the function block is not blocked and all
control commands with a test bit are accepted.
• When the Beh of a function block is set to Test/blocked, all control commands with a test
bit are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are blocked by the
function block. Only process-related outputs on function blocks related to primary
equipment are blocked. If there is an XCBR function block used, the outputs EXC_Open
and EXC_Close are blocked.
• When the Beh of a function block is set to Blocked, all control commands with a test bit
are accepted. Outputs to the process via a non-IEC 61850 link data are blocked by the
function block. In addition, the function block can be blocked when their Beh is blocked.
This can be done if the function block has a block input.

The block status of a component is shown on the LHMI as the Blk output under the same path
as for Beh:Main menu/Test/Function status/Function group/Function block descriptive
name/LN name/Outputs. If the Blk output is not shown, the component cannot be blocked.

24.12.2 Setting guidelines M15260-3 v7

Remember always that there are two possible ways to place the IED in the TestMode= On”
state. If, the IED is set to normal operation (TestMode = Off), but the functions are still shown
being in the test mode, the input signal IED_TEST on the TESTMODE function block is
activated in the configuration.

Forcing of binary input and output signals is only possible when the IED is in IED test mode.

24.13 Time synchronization TIMESYNCHGEN IP1750-1 v2

24.13.1 Application M11345-3 v11

Use time synchronization to achieve a common time base for the IEDs in a protection and
control system. This makes it possible to compare events and disturbance data between all
IEDs in the system. If a global common source (i.e. GPS) is used in different substations for the
time synchronization, also comparisons and analysis between recordings made at different
locations can be easily performed and a more accurate view of the actual sequence of events
can be obtained.

Time-tagging of internal events and disturbances are an excellent help when evaluating faults.
Without time synchronization, only the events within one IED can be compared with each
other. With time synchronization, events and disturbances within the whole network, can be
compared and evaluated.

In the IED, the internal time can be synchronized from the following sources:

• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)

• DNP
• GPS
• IEC103
• SNTP
• IRIG-B
• SPA
• LON
• PPS
• IEEE 1588 (PTP)

Line distance protection REL670 765

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

For IEDs using PMU functionality, only PTP, GPS or IRIG-B or a combination of both GPS and
IRIG-B is allowed.

For IEDs using IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE in "mixed mode" a time synchronization from an external
clock is recommended to the IED and all connected merging units. The time synchronization
from the clock to the IED can be PTP, optical PPS or IRIG-B. For IEDs using IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE from one single MU as analog data source, the MU and IED still need to be
synchronized to each other. This could be done by letting the MU supply a PPS signal to the IED
or by supplying a PPS signal from the IED to the MU, by using a GTM.

Out of these, LON and SPA contains two types of synchronization messages:

• Coarse time messages are sent every minute and contain complete date and time, that is
year, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.
• Fine time messages are sent every second and comprise only seconds and milliseconds.

The selection of the time source is done via the corresponding setting.

It is possible to select more than one time source, in which case one is backup for the other.
The time synchronization source with the best calculated time-quality is automatically
selected. For instance, if both GPS and IRIG-B are selected and both sources have the required
accuracy, optical IRIG-B with IEEE1344 will be automatically selected as the time
synchronization source. Or if GPS and SNTP are selected, when the GPS signal quality is bad,
the IED will automatically choose SNTP as the time-source.

If PTP is activated, the device with the best accuracy within the synchronizing group will be
selected as the source. For more information about PTP, see the Technical manual.

IEEE 1588 (PTP)

PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power
utility automation is a synchronization method that can be used to maintain a common time
within a station. This time can be synchronized to the global time using, for instance, a GPS
receiver. If PTP is enabled on the IEDs and the switches that connect the station are
compatible with IEEE 1588, the station will become synchronized to one common time with an
accuracy of under 1us. Using an IED as a boundary clock between several networks will keep
1us accuracy on three levels or when using an HSR, 15 IEDs can be connected in a ring without
losing a single microsecond in accuracy.

24.13.2 Setting guidelines IP15089-1 v3

All the parameters related to time are divided into two categories: System time and
Synchronization.

24.13.2.1 System time M11348-119 v6

The time is set with years, month, day, hour, minute, second and millisecond.

24.13.2.2 Synchronization M11348-143 v5

The setting parameters for the real-time clock with external time synchronization are set via
local HMI or PCM600. The path for Time Synchronization parameters on local HMI is Main
menu/Configuration/Time/Synchronization. The parameters are categorized as Time
Synchronization (TIMESYNCHGEN) and IRIG-B settings (IRIG-B:1) in case that IRIG-B is used as
the external time synchronization source.

766 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

TimeSynch M11348-167 v17

When the source of the time synchronization is selected on the local HMI, the parameter is
called TimeSynch. The time synchronization source can also be set from PCM600. The setting
alternatives are:

FineSyncSource can have the following values:

• Off
• SPA
• LON
• BIN (Binary Minute Pulse)
• GPS
• GPS+SPA
• GPS+LON
• GPS+BIN
• SNTP
• GPS+SNTP
• IRIG-B
• GPS+IRIG-B
• PPS

CoarseSyncSrc which can have the following values:

• Off
• SPA
• LON
• DNP
• IEC 60870-5-103

The function input to be used for minute-pulse synchronization is called BININPUT. For a
description of the BININPUT settings, see the Technical Manual.

The system time can be set manually, either via the local HMI or via any of the communication
ports. The time synchronization fine tunes the clock (seconds and milliseconds).

The parameter SyncMaster defines if the IED is a master, or not a master for time
synchronization within a Substation Automation System, for IEDs connected in a
communication network (IEC 61850-8-1). The SyncMaster can have the following values:

• Off
• SNTP -Server

Set the course time synchronizing source (CoarseSyncSrc) to Off when GPS
time synchronization of line differential function is used. Set the fine time
synchronization source (FineSyncSource) to GPS. The GPS will thus provide the
complete time synchronization. GPS alone shall synchronize the analogue
values in such systems.

IEEE 1588 (PTP) GUID-424227EC-74A1-4628-8948-C1876840ABFE v3

Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is enabled/disabled using the Ethernet configuration tool /ECT)
in PCM600.

PTP can be set to On,Off or Slave only. When set to Slave only the IED is connected to the PTP-
group and will synchronize to the grandmaster but cannot function as the grandmaster.

A PTP-group is set up by connecting the IEDs to a network and enabling PTP. To set one IED as
the grandmaster change Priority2 to 127 instead of the default 128.

Line distance protection REL670 767

Application manual
Section 24 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Basic IED functions

IEC16000089-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000089 V1 EN-US

Figure 438: Enabling PTP in ECT

The PTP VLAN tag must have the same value in station clock and in the IED. The default value is
set to 0.

The PTP VLAN tag does not need to be the same on all access points in one IED. It is possible
to mix as long as they are the same for all devices on each subnet.

Setting example

GPS

PTP

Station bus
PTP PTP

REC REL GTM

9-2 PTP PTP 9-2 9-2

PPS
Process bus
9-2 9-2

SAM600-TS MU

SAM600-CT

SAM600-VT

IEC16000167-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000167 V1 EN-US

Figure 439: Example system

Figure 439 describes an example system. The REC and REL are both using the 9-2 stream from
the SAM600, and gets its synch from the GPS. Moreover, the REL and REC both acts as a
boundary clock to provide synch to the SAM600. The REL contains a GTM card, which has a PPS
output that is used to synchronize merging units that are not PTP compliant. As a side effect,
the GTM contains a GPS receiver and the REL acts as a backup of the GPS on the station bus.

On all access points, the PTP parameter is “ON”.

On the REL, the parameter FineSyncSource (under Configuration/Time/Synchronization/

TIMESYNCHGEN:1/General) is set to “GPS” if there is a GPS antenna attached.

If the GTM is used as a PPS output only, the FineSynchSource is not set.

24.13.2.3 Process bus IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE synchronization GUID-6E384BDB-5598-4108-99B4-0B4A4E1828B2 v4

When process bus communication (IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE protocol) is used, it is essential that
the merging units are synchronized with the hardware time of the IED (see Technical manual,

768 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 24
Basic IED functions

section Design of the time system (clock synchronization) ). To achieve this, PTP, PPS or IRIG-B
can be used depending of the facilities of the merging unit.

If the merging unit supports PTP, use PTP. If PTP is used in the IED and the merging unit is not
PTP capable, then synchronize the merging unit from the IED via a PPS out from the GTM. If
PTP is used in the IED and the merging unit cannot be synchronized from the IED, then use
GPS-based clocks to provide PTP synch as well as sync to the merging unit.

If synchronization of the IED and the merging unit is based on GPS, set the parameter
LostSyncMode to BlockOnLostUTC in order to provide a block of protection functions
whenever the global common time is lost.

If PTP is not used, use the same synchronization method for the HwSyncSrc as the merging
unit provides. For instance, if the merging unit provides PPS as synchronization, use PPS as
HwSyncSrc. If either PMU or LDCM in GPS-mode is used, that is, the hardware and software
clocks are connected to each other, HwSyncSrc is not used and other means to synchronize the
merging unit to the IED is required. Either FineSyncSource is set to the same source that the
merging unit uses, or the PPS output from the GTM module is used to synchronize the merging
unit. If the PPS output from the GTM module is used to synchronize the merging unit and PTP
is not used, the IED does not know how the merging unit is synchronized and the parameter
LostSyncMode must be set to NoBlock.

Line distance protection REL670 769

Application manual
770
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 25
Requirements

Section 25 Requirements

25.1 Current transformer requirements IP15171-1 v2

M11609-3 v2
The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured current
signal. Saturation of the current transformers (CTs) will cause distortion of the current signals
and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of some functions.
Consequently CT saturation can have an influence on both the dependability and the security
of the protection. This protection IED has been designed to permit heavy CT saturation with
maintained correct operation.

25.1.1 Current transformer basic classification and requirements M11611-3 v2

M11611-4 v5
To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able to correctly
reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin to saturate. To fulfill the
requirement on a specified time to saturation the CTs must fulfill the requirements of a
minimum secondary e.m.f. that is specified below.

CTs are specified according to many different classes and standards. In principle, there are
three different types of protection CTs. These types are related to the design of the iron core
and the presence of airgaps. Airgaps affects the properties of the remanent flux.

The following three different types of protection CTs have been specified:

• The High Remanence type with closed iron core and no specified limit of the remanent flux
• The Low Remanence type with small airgaps in the iron core and the remanent flux limit is
specified to be maximum 10% of the saturation flux
• The Non Remanence type with big airgaps in the iron core and the remanent flux can be
neglected

Even though no limit of the remanent flux is specified in the IEC standard for closed core CTs,
it is a common opinion that the remanent flux is normally limited to maximum 75 - 80 % of the
saturation flux.

Since approximately year 2000 some CT manufactures have introduced new core materials
that gradually have increased the possible maximum levels of remanent flux even up to 95 %
related to the hysteresis curve. Corresponding level of actual remanent flux is 90 % of the
saturation flux (Ψsat). As the present CT standards have no limitation of the level of remanent
flux, these CTs are also classified as for example, class TPX, P and PX according to IEC. The IEC
TR 61869-100, Edition 1.0 2017-01, Instrument transformers – Guidance for application of
current transformers in power system protection, is the first official document that
highlighted this development. So far remanence factors of maximum 80% have been
considered when CT requirements have been decided for ABB IEDs. Even in the future this level
of remanent flux probably will be the maximum level that will be considered when decided the
CT requirements. If higher remanence levels should be considered, it should often lead to
unrealistic CT sizes.

Thus, now there is a need to limit the acceptable level of remanent flux. To be able to
guarantee the performance of protection IEDs, we need to introduce the following
classification of CTs.

There are many different standards and a lot of classes but fundamentally there are four
different types of CTs:

Line distance protection REL670 771

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Requirements

• Very High Remanence type CT

• High Remanence type CT
• Low Remanence type CT
• Non Remanence type CT

The Very High Remanence (VHR) type is a CT with closed iron core (for example. protection
classes TPX, P, PX according to IEC, class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE) and with an iron core
material (new material, typically new alloy based magnetic materials) that gives a remanent
flux higher than 80 % of the saturation flux.

The High Remanence (HR) type is a CT with closed iron core (for example, protection classes
TPX, P, PX according to IEC, class C, K according to ANSI/IEEE) but with an iron core material
(traditional material) that gives a remanent flux that is limited to maximum 80 % of the
saturation flux.

The Low Remanence (LR) type is a CT with small airgaps in the iron core (for example, TPY, PR,
PXR according to IEC) and the remanent flux limit is specified to be maximum 10% of the
saturation flux.

The Non Remanence (NR) type is a CT with big airgaps in the core (for example, TPZ according
to IEC) and the remanent flux can be neglected.

It is also possible that different CT classes of HR and LR type may be mixed.

CT type VHR (using new material) should not be used for protection CT cores. This means that
it is important to specify that the remanence factor must not exceed 80 % when ordering for
example, class P, PX or TPX CTs. If CT manufacturers are using new core material and are not
able to fulfill this requirement, the CTs shall be specified with small airgaps and therefore will
be CTs of LR type (for example, class PR, TPY or PXR). Very high remanence level in a protection
core CT can cause the following problems for protection IEDs:

1. Unwanted operation of differential (i.e. unit) protections for external faults

2. Unacceptably delayed or even missing operation of all types of protections (for example,
distance, differential, overcurrent, etc.) which can result in loosing protection selectivity in
the network

No information is available about how frequent the use of the new iron core material is for
protection CT cores, but it is known that some CT manufacturers are using the new material
while other manufacturers continue to use the old traditional core material for protection CT
cores. In a case where VHR type CTs have been already installed, the calculated values of Eal for
HR type CTs, for which the formulas are given in this document, must be multiplied by factor
two-and-a-half in order for VHR type CTs (i.e. with new material) to be used together with ABB
protection IEDs. However, this may result in unacceptably big CT cores, which can be difficult
to manufacture and fit in available space.

Different standards and classes specify the saturation e.m.f. in different ways but it is possible
to approximately compare values from different classes. The rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869–2 standard is used to specify the CT
requirements for the IED. The requirements are also specified according to other standards.

25.1.2 Conditions M11610-3 v1

M11610-4 v5
The requirements are a result of investigations performed in our network simulator. The
current transformer models are representative for current transformers of high remanence
and low remanence type. The results may not always be valid for non remanence type CTs
(TPZ).

The performances of the protection functions have been checked in the range from
symmetrical to fully asymmetrical fault currents. Primary time constants of at least 120 ms

772 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 25
Requirements

have been considered at the tests. The current requirements below are thus applicable both
for symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

Depending on the protection function phase-to-earth, phase-to-phase and three-phase faults

have been tested for different relevant fault positions for example, close in forward and
reverse faults, zone 1 reach faults, internal and external faults. The dependability and security
of the protection was verified by checking for example, time delays, unwanted operations,
directionality, overreach and stability.

The remanence in the current transformer core can cause unwanted operations or minor
additional time delays for some protection functions. As unwanted operations are not
acceptable at all maximum remanence has been considered for fault cases critical for the
security, for example, faults in reverse direction and external faults. Because of the almost
negligible risk of additional time delays and the non-existent risk of failure to operate the
remanence have not been considered for the dependability cases. The requirements below are
therefore fully valid for all normal applications.

It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence to avoid
the minor risk of an additional time delay. They depend on the performance and economy
requirements. When current transformers of low remanence type (for example, TPY, PR) are
used, normally no additional margin is needed. For current transformers of high remanence
type (for example, P, PX, TPX) the small probability of fully asymmetrical faults, together with
high remanence in the same direction as the flux generated by the fault, has to be kept in mind
at the decision of an additional margin. Fully asymmetrical fault current will be achieved when
the fault occurs at approximately zero voltage (0°). Investigations have shown that 95% of the
faults in the network will occur when the voltage is between 40° and 90°. In addition fully
asymmetrical fault current will not exist in all phases at the same time.

25.1.3 Fault current M11613-3 v1

M11613-4 v4
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in
different positions. Maximum fault current will occur for three-phase faults or single phase-to-
earth faults. The current for a single phase-to-earth fault will exceed the current for a three-
phase fault when the zero sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive
sequence impedance.

When calculating the current transformer requirements, maximum fault current for the
relevant fault position should be used and therefore both fault types have to be considered.

25.1.4 Secondary wire resistance and additional load M11614-3 v1

M11614-4 v5
The voltage at the current transformer secondary terminals directly affects the current
transformer saturation. This voltage is developed in a loop containing the secondary wires and
the burden of all relays in the circuit. For earth faults the loop includes the phase and neutral
wire, normally twice the resistance of the single secondary wire. For three-phase faults the
neutral current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the resistance up to the point where
the phase wires are connected to the common neutral wire. The most common practice is to
use four wires secondary cables so it normally is sufficient to consider just a single secondary
wire for the three-phase case.

The conclusion is that the loop resistance, twice the resistance of the single secondary wire,
must be used in the calculation for phase-to-earth faults and the phase resistance, the
resistance of a single secondary wire, may normally be used in the calculation for three-phase
faults.

As the burden can be considerable different for three-phase faults and phase-to-earth faults it
is important to consider both cases. Even in a case where the phase-to-earth fault current is
smaller than the three-phase fault current the phase-to-earth fault can be dimensioning for the
CT depending on the higher burden.

Line distance protection REL670 773

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Requirements

In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not the
dimensioning case. Therefore, the resistance of the single secondary wire can always be used
in the calculation for this kind of power systems.

25.1.5 General current transformer requirements M11615-3 v3

The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data for example,
maximum load and/or maximum fault current. It should be verified that the current to the
protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to be detected
with the selected CT ratio. It should also be verified that the maximum possible fault current is
within the limits of the IED.

The current error of the current transformer can limit the possibility to use a very sensitive
setting of a sensitive residual overcurrent protection. If a very sensitive setting of this function
will be used it is recommended that the current transformer should have an accuracy class
which have an current error at rated primary current that is less than ±1% (for example, 5P). If
current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the actual unwanted
residual current during the commissioning.

25.1.6 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. requirements SEMOD53723-1 v1

M11616-3 v2
With regard to saturation of the current transformer all current transformers of high
remanence and low remanence type that fulfill the requirements on the rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal below can be used. The characteristic of the non remanence type
CT (TPZ) is not well defined as far as the phase angle error is concerned. If no explicit
recommendation is given for a specific function we therefore recommend contacting ABB to
confirm that the non remanence type can be used.

The CT requirements for the different functions below are specified as a rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard. Requirements for CTs
specified according to other classes and standards are given at the end of this section.

25.1.6.1 Busbar protection SEMOD129059-4 v6

The CT can be of high remanence or low remanence type and they can be used together within
the same zone of protection. Each of them must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary
e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f.
Ealreq below:

The high remanence type CT must fulfill

Isr æ S ö
E al ³ E alreq = 0.5 × If max × × ç R ct + R L + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION1534 V2 EN-US (Equation 536)

The low remanence type CT must fulfill

Isr æ S ö
E al ³ E alreq = 0.2 × If max × × ç R ct + R L + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION1535 V2 EN-US (Equation 537)

where

774 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 25
Requirements

Ifmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency fault current on the busbar (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

Ir The rated current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). The loop
resistance containing the phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults
in solidly earthed systems. The resistance of a single secondary wire should
be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for
Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A.

The non remanence type CT

CTs of non remanence type (for example, TPZ) can be used but in this case the CTs within the
differential zone must be of non remanence type. They must fulfill the same requirements as
for the low remanence type CTs and have a rated equivalent secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger
than or equal to required secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

Isr æ S ö
E al ³ E alreq = 0.2 × If max × × ç R ct + R L + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION1536 V2 EN-US (Equation 538)

25.1.6.2 Distance protection M11619-3 v6

The current transformers must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is
larger than the maximum of the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq
below:

I k max × Isr æ S ö
E al ³ E alreq = × a × ç R ct + R L + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION1080 V2 EN-US (Equation 539)

Ikzone1×Isr æ S ö
E al ³ E alreq = × k × ç R ct + R L + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION1081 V2 EN-US (Equation 540)

where:
Ikmax Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for close-in forward and
reverse faults (A)
Ikzone1 Maximum primary fundamental frequency current for faults at the end of
zone 1 reach (A)
Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

Ir The rated current of the protection IED (A)

Table continues on next page

Line distance protection REL670 775

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Requirements

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary wire and additional load (W). In solidly
earthed systems the loop resistance containing the phase and neutral
wires should be used for phase-to-earth faults and the resistance of the
phase wire should be used for three-phase faults.
In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the resistance of the single
secondary wire can always be used.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for
Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/channel for Ir=5 A

a This factor depends on the design of the protection function and can be a
function of the primary DC time constant of the close-in fault current.
k This factor depends on the design of the protection function and can be a
function of the primary DC time constant of the fault current for a fault at
the set reach of zone 1.
The a- and k-factors have the following values for the different types of
distance function:
High speed distance: (ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS)
Quadrilateral characteristic:
a = 1 for primary time constant Tp £ 400 ms
k = 3 for primary time constant Tp £ 200 ms
Mho characteristic:
a = 2 for primary time constant Tp £ 400 ms (For a = 1 the delay in
operation due to saturation is still under 1.5 cycles)
k = 3 for primary time constant Tp £ 200 ms
Quadrilateral distance:(ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS and ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
and ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS)
a = 1 for primary time constant Tp £ 100 ms
a = 3 for primary time constant Tp > 100 and £ 400 ms
k = 4 for primary time constant Tp £ 50 ms
k = 5 for primary time constant Tp > 50 and £ 150 ms
Mho distance: (ZMHPDIS)
a = 1 for primary time constant Tp £ 100 ms
a = 3 for primary time constant Tp > 100 and £ 400 ms
k = 4 for primary time constant Tp £ 40 ms
k = 5 for primary time constant Tp > 40 and £ 150 ms

25.1.6.3 Breaker failure protection M11621-3 v5

The CTs must have a rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Eal that is larger than or equal
to the required rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq below:

776 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 25
Requirements

Isr æ S ö
E al ³ E alreq = 5 × Iop × × ç R ct + R L + R2 ÷
I pr è Ir ø
EQUATION1380 V2 EN-US (Equation 541)

where:
Iop The primary operate value (A)

Ipr The rated primary CT current (A)

Isr The rated secondary CT current (A)

Ir The rated current of the protection IED (A)

Rct The secondary resistance of the CT (W)

RL The resistance of the secondary cable and additional load (W). The loop resistance containing the
phase and neutral wires, must be used for faults in solidly earthed systems. The resistance of a single
secondary wire should be used for faults in high impedance earthed systems.
SR The burden of an IED current input channel (VA). SR=0.020 VA/channel for Ir=1 A and SR=0.150 VA/
channel for Ir=5 A

25.1.7 Current transformer requirements for CTs according to other

standards SEMOD53771-1 v1

M11623-4 v3
All kinds of conventional magnetic core CTs are possible to use with the IEDs if they fulfill the
requirements corresponding to the above specified expressed as the rated equivalent limiting
secondary e.m.f. Eal according to the IEC 61869-2 standard. From different standards and
available data for relaying applications it is possible to approximately calculate a secondary
e.m.f. of the CT comparable with Eal. By comparing this with the required rated equivalent
limiting secondary e.m.f. Ealreq it is possible to judge if the CT fulfills the requirements. The
requirements according to some other standards are specified below.

25.1.7.1 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class P, PR M11623-6 v4

A CT according to IEC 61869-2 is specified by the secondary limiting e.m.f. EALF. The value of
the EALF is approximately equal to the corresponding Eal. Therefore, the CTs according to class
P and PR must have a secondary limiting e.m.f. EALF that fulfills the following:

E ALF  max E alreq

EQUATION1383 V4 EN-US (Equation 542)

25.1.7.2 Current transformers according to IEC 61869-2, class PX, PXR (and old
IEC 60044-6, class TPS and old British Standard, class X) M11623-14 v5

CTs according to these classes are specified approximately in the same way by a rated knee
point e.m.f. Eknee (Ek for class PX and PXR, EkneeBS for class X and the limiting secondary voltage
Ual for TPS). The value of the Eknee is lower than the corresponding Eal according to IEC
61869-2. It is not possible to give a general relation between the Eknee and the Eal but normally
the Eknee is approximately 80 % of the Eal. Therefore, the CTs according to class PX, PXR, X and
TPS must have a rated knee point e.m.f. Eknee that fulfills the following:

Line distance protection REL670 777

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Requirements

E knee » E k » E kneeBS » U al > 0.8 × ( maximum of E alreq )

EQUATION2100 V2 EN-US (Equation 543)

25.1.7.3 Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE M11623-22 v6

Current transformers according to ANSI/IEEE are partly specified in different ways. A rated
secondary terminal voltage UANSI is specified for a CT of class C. UANSI is the secondary
terminal voltage the CT will deliver to a standard burden at 20 times rated secondary current
without exceeding 10 % ratio correction. There are a number of standardized UANSI values for
example, UANSI is 400 V for a C400 CT. A corresponding rated equivalent limiting secondary
e.m.f. EalANSI can be estimated as follows:

E alANSI = 20 × Isr × R ct + U ANSI = 20 × Isr × R ct + 20 × Isr × Z bANSI

EQUATION971 V2 EN-US (Equation 544)

where:
ZbANSI The impedance (that is, with a complex quantity) of the standard ANSI burden for the specific C class
(W)
UANSI The secondary terminal voltage for the specific C class (V)

The CTs according to class C must have a calculated rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f.
EalANSI that fulfils the following:

E alANSI > maximum of E alreq

EQUATION1384 V2 EN-US (Equation 545)

A CT according to ANSI/IEEE is also specified by the knee point voltage UkneeANSI that is
graphically defined from an excitation curve. The knee point voltage UkneeANSI normally has a
lower value than the knee-point e.m.f. according to IEC and BS. UkneeANSI can approximately be
estimated to 75 % of the corresponding Eal according to IEC 61869-2. Therefore, the CTs
according to ANSI/IEEE must have a knee point voltage UkneeANSI that fulfills the following:

VkneeANSI > 0.75 × (max imum of E alreq )

EQUATION2101 V2 EN-US (Equation 546)

25.2 Voltage transformer requirements M11608-3 v5

The performance of a protection function will depend on the quality of the measured input
signal. Transients caused by capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) can affect some
protection functions.

Magnetic or capacitive voltage transformers can be used.

The capacitive voltage transformers (CVTs) should fulfill the requirements according to the IEC
61869-5 standard regarding ferro-resonance and transients. The ferro-resonance
requirements of the CVTs are specified in chapter 6.502 of the standard.

778 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 25
Requirements

The transient responses for three different standard transient response classes, T1, T2 and T3
are specified in chapter 6.503 of the standard. CVTs according to all classes can be used.

The protection IED has effective filters for these transients, which gives secure and correct
operation with CVTs.

25.3 SNTP server requirements GUID-588FCD12-C494-445E-8488-8287B34EFD9A v4

The SNTP server to be used is connected to the local network, that is not more than 4-5
switches or routers away from the IED. The SNTP server is dedicated for its task, or at least
equipped with a real-time operating system, that is not a PC with SNTP server software. The
SNTP server should be stable, that is, either synchronized from a stable source like GPS, or
local without synchronization. Using a local SNTP server without synchronization as primary or
secondary server in a redundant configuration is not recommended.

25.4 PTP requirements GUID-741CC863-D760-49D6-85B2-AFECA222A8C3 v1

For PTP to perform properly, the Ethernet equipment that is used needs to be compliant with
IEEE1588. The clocks used must follow the IEEE1588 standard BMC (Best Master Algorithm)
and shall, for instance, not claim class 7 for a longer time than it can guarantee 1us absolute
accuracy.

25.5 Sample specification of communication requirements

for the protection and control terminals in digital
telecommunication networks GUID-0A9F36AF-3802-42FE-8970-4662798C19D1 v3

The communication requirements are based on echo timing.

Bit Error Rate (BER) according to ITU-T G.821, G.826 and G.828

• <10-6 according to the standard for data and voice transfer

Bit Error Rate (BER) for high availability of the differential protection

• <10-8-10-9 during normal operation

• <10-6 during disturbed operation

During disturbed conditions, the trip security function can cope with high bit error rates up to
10-5 or even up to 10-4. The trip security can be configured to be independent of COMFAIL from
the differential protection communication supervision, or blocked when COMFAIL is issued
after receive error >100ms. (Default).

Synchronization in SDH systems with G.703 E1 or IEEE C37.94

The G.703 E1, 2 Mbit shall be set according to ITU-T G.803, G.810-13

• One master clock for the actual network

• The actual port Synchronized to the SDH system clock at 2048 kbit
• Synchronization; bit synchronized, synchronized mapping
• Maximum clock deviation <±50 ppm nominal, <±100 ppm operational
• Jitter and Wander according to ITU-T G.823 and G.825

Line distance protection REL670 779

Application manual
Section 25 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Requirements

• Buffer memory <250 μs, <100 μs asymmetric difference

• Format.G 704 frame, structured etc.Format.
• No CRC-check

Synchronization in PDH systems connected to SDH systems

• Independent synchronization, asynchronous mapping

• The actual SDH port must be set to allow transmission of the master clock from the PDH-
system via the SDH-system in transparent mode.
• Maximum clock deviation <±50 ppm nominal, <±100 ppm operational
• Jitter and Wander according to ITU-T G.823 and G.825
• Buffer memory <100 μs
• Format: Transparent
• Maximum channel delay
• Loop time <40 ms continuous (2 x 20 ms)

IED with echo synchronization of differential clock (without GPS clock)

• Both channels must have the same route with maximum asymmetry of 0,2-0,5 ms,
depending on set sensitivity of the differential protection.
• A fixed asymmetry can be compensated (setting of asymmetric delay in built in HMI or the
parameter setting tool PST).

IED with GPS clock

• Independent of asymmetry.

25.6 IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE Merging unit requirements SEMOD166590-11 v5

The merging units that supply the IED with measured values via the process bus must fulfill the
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE standard.

This part of the IEC 61850 is specifying “Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled
values over ISO/IEC 8802”, in other words – sampled data over Ethernet. The 9-2 part of the
IEC 61850 protocol uses also definitions from 7-2, “Basic communication structure for
substation and feeder equipment – Abstract communication service interface (ACSI)”. The set
of functionality implemented in the IED (IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE) is a subset of the IEC
61850-9-2. For example the IED covers the client part of the standard, not the server part.

The standard does not define the sample rate for data, but in the UCA users group
recommendations there are indicated sample rates that are adopted, by consensus, in the
industry.

There are two sample rates defined: 80 samples/cycle (4000 samples/sec. at 50Hz or 4800
samples/sec. at 60 Hz) for a merging unit “type1” and 256 samples/cycle for a merging unit
“type2”. The IED can receive data rates of 80 samples/cycle.

Note that the IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE standard does not specify the quality of the sampled
values, only the transportation. Thus, the accuracy of the current and voltage inputs to the
merging unit and the inaccuracy added by the merging unit must be coordinated with the
requirement for actual type of protection function.

Factors influencing the accuracy of the sampled values from the merging unit are for example
anti aliasing filters, frequency range, step response, truncating, A/D conversion inaccuracy,
time tagging accuracy etc.

780 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 25
Requirements

In principle the accuracy of the current and voltage transformers, together with the merging
unit, shall have the same quality as direct input of currents and voltages.

Line distance protection REL670 781

Application manual
782
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 26
Glossary

Section 26 Glossary M14893-1 v18

AC Alternating current
ACC Actual channel
ACT Application configuration tool within PCM600
A/D converter Analog-to-digital converter
ADBS Amplitude deadband supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
AI Analog input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
ASDU Application service data unit
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFOC/2,5 Bayonet fiber optic connector
BFP Breaker failure protection
BI Binary input
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BOS Binary outputs status
BR External bistable relay
BS British Standards
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephony. A
United Nations-sponsored standards body within the International
Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined megapulses per second
CMT Communication Management tool in PCM600

Line distance protection REL670 783

Application manual
Section 26 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Glossary

CO cycle Close-open cycle

Codirectional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two twisted
pairs making it possible to transmit information in both directions
COM Command
COMTRADE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange format for
Disturbance recorder according to IEEE/ANSI C37.111, 1999 / IEC
60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four twisted
pairs, two of which are used for transmitting data in both directions
and two for transmitting clock signals
COT Cause of transmission
CPU Central processing unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CROB Control relay output block
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CU Communication unit
CVT or CCVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed autoreclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer of the
TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFC Data flow control
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DI Digital input
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE Std 1815-2012
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler
DSP Digital signal processor
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
ECT Ethernet configuration tool
EHV network Extra high voltage network
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force

784 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 26
Glossary

EMI Electromagnetic interference

EnFP End fault protection
EPA Enhanced performance architecture
ESD Electrostatic discharge
F-SMA Type of optical fiber connector
FAN Fault number
FCB Flow control bit; Frame count bit
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data and
protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to seven
duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
FPN Flexible product naming
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FUN Function type
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local
telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and
unbalanced lines
GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receiver module
GDE Graphical display editor within PCM600
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object-oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSAL Generic security application
GSE Generic substation event
HDLC protocol High-level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector type Plastic fiber connector
HLV circuit Hazardous Live Voltage according to IEC60255-27
HMI Human-machine interface
HSAR High speed autoreclosing
HSR High-availability Seamless Redundancy
HV High-voltage
HVDC High-voltage direct current
IDBS Integrating deadband supervision
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protection equipment. A serial master/
slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation automation communication standard
IEC 61850–8–1 Communication protocol standard

Line distance protection REL670 785

Application manual
Section 26 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Glossary

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on twisted-
pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine Card (PMC) standard for local bus modules. References
the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common Mezzanine Card)
standard for the mechanics and the PCI specifications from the PCI SIG
(Special Interest Group) for the electrical EMF (Electromotive force).
IEEE 1686 Standard for Substation Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) Cyber
Security Capabilities
IED Intelligent electronic device
IET600 Integrated engineering tool
I-GIS Intelligent gas-insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available in the IED,
they are referred to as instances of that function. One instance of a
function is identical to another of the same kind but has a different
number in the IED user interfaces. The word "instance" is sometimes
defined as an item of information that is representative of a type. In
the same way an instance of a function in the IED is representative of a
type of function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol suite
widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless, best-effort
packet-switching protocol. It provides packet routing, fragmentation
and reassembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 20
IP 40 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 40
IP 54 Ingression protection, according to IEC 60529, level 54
IRF Internal failure signal
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard 200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LIB 520 High-voltage software module
LCD Liquid crystal display
LDCM Line data communication module
LDD Local detection device
LED Light-emitting diode
LNT LON network tool
LON Local operating network
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MIM Milli-ampere module
MPM Main processing module
MVAL Value of measurement
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally developed
for use in trains.

786 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 26
Glossary

NCC National Control Centre

NOF Number of grid faults
NUM Numerical module
OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle
OCP Overcurrent protection
OEM Optical Ethernet module
OLTC On-load tap changer
OTEV Disturbance data recording initiated by other event than start/pick-up
OV Overvoltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is overreaching when the impedance
presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay “sees” the
fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus
PCM Pulse code modulation
PCM600 Protection and control IED manager
PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard
PELV circuit Protected Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
PMC PCI Mezzanine card
POR Permissive overreach
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to the
measured and/or controlled components
PRP Parallel redundancy protocol
PSM Power supply module
PST Parameter setting tool within PCM600
PTP Precision time protocol
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX
RCA Relay characteristic angle
RISC Reduced instruction set computer
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in point-
to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real-time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SBO Select-before-operate
SC Switch or push button to close

Line distance protection REL670 787

Application manual
Section 26 1MRK 506 369-UEN D
Glossary

SCL Short circuit location

SCS Station control system
SCADA Supervision, control and data acquisition
SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850
SDU Service data unit
SELV circuit Safety Extra-Low Voltage circuit type according to IEC60255-27
SFP Small form-factor pluggable (abbreviation)
Optical Ethernet port (explanation)

SLM Serial communication module.

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constant
impedance.
SMT Signal matrix tool within PCM600
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronize computer clocks
on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to have accurate
hardware clocks in every embedded system in a network. Each
embedded node can instead synchronize with a remote clock,
providing the required accuracy.
SOF Status of fault
SPA Strömberg Protection Acquisition (SPA), a serial master/slave protocol
for point-to-point and ring communication.
SRY Switch for CB ready condition
ST Switch or push button to trip
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
SVC Static VAr compensation
TC Trip coil
TCS Trip circuit supervision
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer
protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto
standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix. TCP/IP
was developed by DARPA for Internet working and encompasses both
network layer and transport layer protocols. While TCP and IP specify
two protocols at specific protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer
to the entire US Department of Defense protocol suite based upon
these, including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function
TLS Transport Layer Security
TM Transmit (disturbance data)
TNC connector Threaded Neill-Concelman, a threaded constant impedance version of a
BNC connector
TP Trip (recorded fault)
TPZ, TPY, TPX, TPS Current transformer class according to IEC

788 Line distance protection REL670

Application manual
1MRK 506 369-UEN D Section 26
Glossary

TRM Transformer Module. This module transforms currents and voltages

taken from the process into levels suitable for further signal
processing.
TYP Type identification
UMT User management tool
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault condition.
For example, a distance relay is underreaching when the impedance
presented to it is greater than the apparent impedance to the fault
applied to the balance point, that is, the set reach. The relay does not
“see” the fault but perhaps it should have seen it. See also Overreach.
UTC Coordinated Universal Time. A coordinated time scale, maintained by
the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures (BIPM), which forms the
basis of a coordinated dissemination of standard frequencies and time
signals. UTC is derived from International Atomic Time (TAI) by the
addition of a whole number of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with
Universal Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth's
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing the Earth's
irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. The Coordinated Universal
Time is expressed using a 24-hour clock, and uses the Gregorian
calendar. It is used for aeroplane and ship navigation, where it is also
sometimes known by the military name, "Zulu time." "Zulu" in the
phonetic alphabet stands for "Z", which stands for longitude zero.
UV Undervoltage
WEI Weak end infeed logic
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current.Often referred to as the residual or
the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage

Line distance protection REL670 789

Application manual
790
791
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 506 369-UEN

© Copyright 2017 ABB.

All rights reserved.